WO2021176375A1 - Sales system - Google Patents

Sales system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021176375A1
WO2021176375A1 PCT/IB2021/051781 IB2021051781W WO2021176375A1 WO 2021176375 A1 WO2021176375 A1 WO 2021176375A1 IB 2021051781 W IB2021051781 W IB 2021051781W WO 2021176375 A1 WO2021176375 A1 WO 2021176375A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
mobile terminal
weighing
product
connection
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/IB2021/051781
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
マモントワエカテリーナ
金子知樹
黒崎直人
江夏恵理子
西野賢一
Original Assignee
株式会社寺岡精工
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2020037200A external-priority patent/JP2021139727A/en
Priority claimed from JP2020039013A external-priority patent/JP7438530B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2020039294A external-priority patent/JP7455365B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2020132301A external-priority patent/JP2022029133A/en
Application filed by 株式会社寺岡精工 filed Critical 株式会社寺岡精工
Publication of WO2021176375A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021176375A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07G—REGISTERING THE RECEIPT OF CASH, VALUABLES, OR TOKENS
    • G07G1/00—Cash registers
    • G07G1/0036—Checkout procedures
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01G—WEIGHING
    • G01G19/00—Weighing apparatus or methods adapted for special purposes not provided for in the preceding groups
    • G01G19/40—Weighing apparatus or methods adapted for special purposes not provided for in the preceding groups with provisions for indicating, recording, or computing price or other quantities dependent on the weight
    • G01G19/413—Weighing apparatus or methods adapted for special purposes not provided for in the preceding groups with provisions for indicating, recording, or computing price or other quantities dependent on the weight using electromechanical or electronic computing means
    • G01G19/414—Weighing apparatus or methods adapted for special purposes not provided for in the preceding groups with provisions for indicating, recording, or computing price or other quantities dependent on the weight using electromechanical or electronic computing means using electronic computing means only
    • G01G19/415—Weighing apparatus or methods adapted for special purposes not provided for in the preceding groups with provisions for indicating, recording, or computing price or other quantities dependent on the weight using electromechanical or electronic computing means using electronic computing means only combined with recording means
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06Q—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q20/00—Payment architectures, schemes or protocols
    • G06Q20/08—Payment architectures
    • G06Q20/20—Point-of-sale [POS] network systems
    • G06Q20/208—Input by product or record sensing, e.g. weighing or scanner processing
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06Q—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q20/00—Payment architectures, schemes or protocols
    • G06Q20/30—Payment architectures, schemes or protocols characterised by the use of specific devices or networks
    • G06Q20/32—Payment architectures, schemes or protocols characterised by the use of specific devices or networks using wireless devices
    • G06Q20/322—Aspects of commerce using mobile devices [M-devices]
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07G—REGISTERING THE RECEIPT OF CASH, VALUABLES, OR TOKENS
    • G07G1/00—Cash registers
    • G07G1/0018—Constructional details, e.g. of drawer, printing means, input means
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07G—REGISTERING THE RECEIPT OF CASH, VALUABLES, OR TOKENS
    • G07G1/00—Cash registers
    • G07G1/0036—Checkout procedures
    • G07G1/0045—Checkout procedures with a code reader for reading of an identifying code of the article to be registered, e.g. barcode reader or radio-frequency identity [RFID] reader
    • G07G1/0054—Checkout procedures with a code reader for reading of an identifying code of the article to be registered, e.g. barcode reader or radio-frequency identity [RFID] reader with control of supplementary check-parameters, e.g. weight or number of articles
    • G07G1/0063—Checkout procedures with a code reader for reading of an identifying code of the article to be registered, e.g. barcode reader or radio-frequency identity [RFID] reader with control of supplementary check-parameters, e.g. weight or number of articles with means for detecting the geometric dimensions of the article of which the code is read, such as its size or height, for the verification of the registration
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07G—REGISTERING THE RECEIPT OF CASH, VALUABLES, OR TOKENS
    • G07G1/00—Cash registers
    • G07G1/0036—Checkout procedures
    • G07G1/0045—Checkout procedures with a code reader for reading of an identifying code of the article to be registered, e.g. barcode reader or radio-frequency identity [RFID] reader
    • G07G1/0054—Checkout procedures with a code reader for reading of an identifying code of the article to be registered, e.g. barcode reader or radio-frequency identity [RFID] reader with control of supplementary check-parameters, e.g. weight or number of articles
    • G07G1/0072—Checkout procedures with a code reader for reading of an identifying code of the article to be registered, e.g. barcode reader or radio-frequency identity [RFID] reader with control of supplementary check-parameters, e.g. weight or number of articles with means for detecting the weight of the article of which the code is read, for the verification of the registration
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07G—REGISTERING THE RECEIPT OF CASH, VALUABLES, OR TOKENS
    • G07G1/00—Cash registers
    • G07G1/0036—Checkout procedures
    • G07G1/0045—Checkout procedures with a code reader for reading of an identifying code of the article to be registered, e.g. barcode reader or radio-frequency identity [RFID] reader
    • G07G1/0081—Checkout procedures with a code reader for reading of an identifying code of the article to be registered, e.g. barcode reader or radio-frequency identity [RFID] reader the reader being a portable scanner or data reader
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07G—REGISTERING THE RECEIPT OF CASH, VALUABLES, OR TOKENS
    • G07G1/00—Cash registers
    • G07G1/01—Details for indicating

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a sales system.
  • a mobile terminal in the procedure for selling a product for regular sale, reads the code of the product taken out from the product shelf by the customer, and the product is registered using the read product code.
  • the procedure for selling a product sold by weight it is required that the product to be purchased by the customer is priced by using a weighing pricing device, and after the price is set, the product is registered by the customer's mobile terminal.
  • the customer himself / herself can weigh the products sold by weight and can efficiently execute the product registration using the mobile terminal.
  • the sales system includes a weighing and pricing device and a mobile terminal used for product registration by a customer.
  • the mobile terminal includes a communication unit that communicates with the weighing and pricing device.
  • the weighing pricing device is a display that displays connection information for communicably connecting the weighing pricing device and the mobile terminal, and the weighing pricing device and the mobile terminal communicate with each other based on the connection information. It is provided with a controller that terminates the display of the connection information on the display at a predetermined timing after the connection is possible.
  • the controller terminates the display of the connection information on the display when the weighing unit of the weighing pricing device performs weighing or when an operation is performed on the operating unit.
  • the controller issues a label indicating the weighing result by the weighing pricing device when the weighing pricing device finishes displaying the connection information.
  • the display displays a guide for attaching the label to the product, and after the display of the connection information is finished, the display displays the guide.
  • the weighing and pricing device includes a weighing unit that weighs a product, and the display displays information based on the weighing result by the measuring unit.
  • the display displays a connection state with the mobile terminal and identification information for identifying the mobile terminal.
  • the weighing and pricing device includes a time measuring unit.
  • the display displays the time related to the connection with the mobile terminal based on the time timed by the timekeeping unit.
  • the display displays the measurement result column and the connection information used for communication with the mobile terminal on the same screen.
  • the weighing and pricing device includes a communication unit that communicates with a mobile terminal that has read the connection information.
  • the display displays a product button corresponding to a product classified as a product sold by weight.
  • the weighing and pricing device includes a reception unit that receives information on products to be weighed by the weighing and pricing device from outside the weighing device.
  • the display displays a selection screen that accepts the selection of pre-registered products.
  • the reception unit receives the information on the product, the display emphasizes the information on the received product on the selection screen.
  • the mobile terminal displays a screen in a language indicated by one set language information and accepts a customer's operation.
  • the sales system further includes a transaction information output device.
  • the transaction information output device outputs information about transactions in a communication unit that communicates with the mobile terminal, a controller that acquires the one language information from the mobile terminal, and a language corresponding to the acquired one language information. It is equipped with a display for displaying.
  • FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the appearance of the weighing device according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the weighing device according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 3A-3J is an explanatory diagram illustrating a flow of mass sales according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the weighing device 20 in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 5 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of the weighing device 20 and the like according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the weighing device 20 in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of the weighing device 20 and the like according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of the weighing device 20 and the like according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of the weighing device 20 and the like according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of the weighing device 20 and the like according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of the weighing device 20 and the like according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 is a display example during a warning in the weighing device 20 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a display example during a warning in the mobile terminal 60 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing another example of the operation of the weighing device 20 in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing another example of the operation of the weighing device according to the first embodiment.
  • 16A-16B are explanatory views illustrating examples of other evaluations in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 17 is another display example in the mobile terminal according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a schematic example of a store in which the weighing and pricing device in the sales system of the first example of the second embodiment is used.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the sales system in the first example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a weighing and pricing device in the first example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 21A-21B is a perspective view showing an external example of the weighing and pricing device in the first example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the appearance of the settlement device in the first example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the settlement device in the first example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a mobile terminal in the first example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the transaction management server in the first example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of customer information in the first example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of store information in the first example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of cart information in the first example of the second embodiment.
  • 29A-29C is a diagram showing an example of an activation screen, a peripheral store guidance screen, and a store information screen in the first example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 30A-30D is a diagram showing an example of an advertisement screen, a product registration screen, and a settlement guidance screen in the first example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing pricing device, the mobile terminal, and the transaction management server in the first example of the second embodiment in connection with the product registration in one transaction.
  • FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the connection information code screen in the first example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of a single item label in the first example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing and pricing device in the second example of the second embodiment corresponding to the pricing in one transaction.
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a connection necessity confirmation screen in the second example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an issuance confirmation screen in the second example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing and pricing device in the third example of the second embodiment corresponding to the pricing in one transaction.
  • FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a code information reading guide screen in the third example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of one aspect of the addition label in the fourth example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the sales system in the fifth example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 41 is a sequence showing an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing pricing device, the mobile terminal, the transaction management server, and the weighing sales management server in the fifth example of the second embodiment in connection with the product registration in one transaction. It is a figure.
  • FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the clerk button in the modified example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the connection information code screen in the modified example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which merchandise sold by weight is displayed at a store in the sixth example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of the appearance of the weighing and pricing device according to the sixth example of the second embodiment as viewed from the front direction.
  • FIG. 46A-46C is a diagram showing an example of a connection information code reading procedure and a pricing operation screen in the sixth example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 47A-47B is a diagram illustrating an example of a procedure performed by a customer in a sixth example of the second embodiment according to the price of one product.
  • FIG. 48A-48B is a diagram illustrating an example of a procedure performed by a customer in a sixth example of the second embodiment according to the price of one product.
  • FIGS. 49A-49B are diagrams showing an example of the mode of the pricing operation screen and the product registration screen in the sixth example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing pricing device, the mobile terminal, and the transaction management server in the sixth example of the second embodiment in connection with the registration of the merchandise sold by weight in one transaction.
  • FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of a pricing operation screen in a modified example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a pricing operation screen in a modified example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of a measurement result screen in the modified example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the weighing and pricing device according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing an external example of the weighing and pricing device according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of a pricing operation screen according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of a pricing operation screen according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of a weighing guide screen according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a measurement result screen according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a pricing operation screen according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing pricing device, the mobile terminal, and the transaction management server in the third embodiment in connection with the registration of the merchandise sold by weight in one transaction.
  • FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a network configuration of the sales system in the first example of the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the POS terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing an example of the appearance of the weighing device according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 65A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the weighing device according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 65B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a language-related table according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 65C is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the corresponding language table in the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIGS. 67A-67C are explanatory views showing an example of various information for each mobile terminal 450 managed by the cloud server Sv in the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 68 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow in product registration and settlement in the sales system according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 69 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of registration processing of the goods to be weighed in the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing an example of the registration process of the weighing target product performed by the mobile terminal in the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing an example of processing during connection with the weighing device performed by the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 70C is a flowchart showing an example of transaction information output processing performed by the weighing device according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of transaction information output processing performed by the POS terminal in the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a procedure for registering a product to be weighed according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a standby screen displayed on the weighing device according to the fourth embodiment.
  • 74A-74B are explanatory views showing an example of a screen during pairing displayed on the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIGS. 75A-75D are explanatory views showing an example of a screen during weighing displayed on the weighing device and the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a label issued by the weighing device according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a procedure for registering a product to be weighed in a foreign language according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a foreign language display standby screen displayed on the weighing device according to the fourth embodiment.
  • 79A-79B are explanatory views showing an example of a foreign language display screen during pairing displayed on the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
  • 80A-80D is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen of a foreign language display during weighing displayed on the weighing device and the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a label issued in a foreign language by the weighing device according to the fourth embodiment.
  • 82A-82B are explanatory views showing an example of a screen displayed on the display of the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIGS. 83A-83B are explanatory views showing an example of screen transitions displayed on the customer side display 4205 of the POS terminal at the time of settlement in the fourth embodiment.
  • FIGS. 84A-84B are explanatory views showing an example of a screen displayed in Chinese on the display of the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIGS. 85A-85B are explanatory views showing an example of a screen transition displayed in a foreign language on the customer side display 4205 of the POS terminal at the time of settlement in the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing a network configuration of the sales system 5500 in the second example of the fourth embodiment in the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the appearance of the ticket vending machine according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the ticket vending machine according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the calling display according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed by the ticket vending machine in the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of transaction information output processing performed by the call display according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a menu screen displayed in Japanese on the ticket vending machine according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a meal ticket issued in Japanese according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a call screen displayed in Japanese on the call display according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a menu screen displayed in Chinese on the ticket vending machine according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a meal ticket issued in Chinese according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a call screen displayed in Chinese on the call display according to the fourth embodiment.
  • the sales system according to the embodiment of the present invention is introduced in a store.
  • the stores are, for example, supermarkets, convenience stores, drug stores, home improvement stores, and consumer electronics mass retailers.
  • the sales system is also referred to as, for example, a shopping system, a self-checkout system or a weighing system.
  • the first embodiment of the present invention is shown below.
  • the sales system in the first embodiment includes a weighing device and a mobile terminal.
  • FIG. 1 is an explanatory view showing an example of the appearance of the weighing device 20 in the embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the weighing device 20.
  • the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals.
  • the configuration of the weighing device 20 shown in FIG. 2 will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the weighing device 20 includes a Central Processing Unit (CPU) 21, a Read Only Memory (ROM) 22, a Random Access Memory (RAM) 23, a scanner 24, a weighing unit 25, a touch display 26, and an audio output unit 27.
  • CPU Central Processing Unit
  • ROM Read Only Memory
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • a printing unit 28, a first communication unit 29 (first transceiver), and a second communication unit 30 (second scanner) are provided.
  • the weighing device 20 may be referred to as a weighing and pricing device.
  • the CPU 21 is a central processing unit, and controls the operation of the weighing device 20 by reading and executing a program stored in the ROM 22.
  • the ROM 22 is a read-only memory, and stores, for example, various information used by the CPU 21 including a program.
  • the RAM 23 is a read / write memory, and stores various information such as information read from the ROM 22, information acquired via the first communication unit 29 and the second communication unit 30, and information generated by processing. The values of various flags are also stored in the RAM 23.
  • the scanner 24 optically reads various kinds of information.
  • the scanner 24 reads various codes (bar code, two-dimensional code, etc.).
  • the weighing unit 25 weighs what is placed on the platform 25a (commodity, container, etc.) by, for example, a weight detection method using a load cell.
  • the touch display 26 displays various information to the customer, is also provided with a touch panel, and has a function as an operation unit.
  • the audio output unit 27 outputs audio.
  • the voice output unit 214 outputs voice guidance and the like.
  • the printing unit 28 is a printer device (printer) that issues a medium.
  • the printing unit 28 generates (prints) a printed matter (hereinafter, also referred to as “label”) on which the product name of the product to be sold is printed, and discharges (issues) it from the label discharge port 28a.
  • the printing unit 28 can issue a label printed with a barcode (optically readable barcode) that encodes the price information of the product.
  • the printing unit 28 usually does not print the above barcode on the label.
  • the first communication unit 29 may be wireless (for example, wireless LAN (Local Area Network)) or wired to another device (management device installed in the store, other weighing device installed in the store, store). Information is sent and received between the payment device installed inside, various servers installed outside the store, etc.). For example, it is used for fault monitoring, etc. in addition to acquisition, reference, program acquisition, and update of various masters.
  • wireless LAN Local Area Network
  • management device installed in the store, other weighing device installed in the store, store
  • Information is sent and received between the payment device installed inside, various servers installed outside the store, etc.). For example, it is used for fault monitoring, etc. in addition to acquisition, reference, program acquisition, and update of various masters.
  • the second communication unit 30 transmits / receives information to / from another device (for example, the mobile terminal 60) by short-range wireless communication (for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)).
  • short-range wireless communication for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)
  • the second communication unit 30 (or the second communication unit)
  • the distance (or distance and direction) between the weighing device 20 and another device can be measured (by the cooperation of 30 and the CPU 21). Specifically, it is measured by the radio field intensity, but the details will be described later.
  • the weighing device 20 may have a clock function (timekeeping function).
  • the weighing device 20 having a clock function can manage, for example, the current time, the remaining time until a certain time, and the elapsed time from a certain state.
  • the weighing device 20 may include a wireless tag reading unit that executes reading and writing of information with respect to the non-contact type IC tag.
  • the IC tag may be attached to, for example, a tare (container).
  • the type of IC tag may be any of a passive tag (passive tag), an active tag (active tag), and a semi-active tag (activated active tag) in which both are combined.
  • the weighing device 20 includes the CPU 21, the ROM 22, and the RAM 22 has been described, but the weighing device 20 may be configured to include an MCU (Micro Controller Unit) instead of them.
  • MCU Micro Controller Unit
  • the weighing device 20 is introduced in a store (for example, a supermarket) that handles products that are weighed and sold (for example, agricultural products, prepared foods, etc.).
  • a store for example, a supermarket
  • One or more weighing devices 20 are installed in the store.
  • Reference numeral A in FIG. 1 is a sticker (device number sticker) indicating the device number (machine number) “No. 1” of the weighing device 20. Even when two or more weighing devices 20 are installed in the store, each of the weighing devices 20 can be distinguished by the device number indicated by the device number sticker. Paper may be attached instead of a sticker. The weighing device 20 may display the device number on the display in place of or in addition to sticking a sticker or paper. Instead of the device number, an icon for each device may be used.
  • FIG. 3A to 3J are explanatory views for explaining the flow of weighing and selling.
  • the left side of FIG. 3A shows how products (lemon, apple, orange) are displayed in the display area of the store.
  • a barcode that can be recognized (optically readable) by the mobile terminal 60 is displayed on the lemon price tag 80.
  • the barcode displayed on the lemon price tag 80 contains at least information that can identify the product (information that it is a lemon).
  • the price tag 80 may be printed on paper or the like, or may be displayed on an electronic display. The same applies to other products (apples, oranges).
  • FIG. 3A The right side of FIG. 3A is a display example of the mobile terminal 60 in a certain scene (specifically, when the barcode displayed on the lemon price tag 80 is read). More specifically, the customer reads the yogurt barcode (the barcode attached to the yogurt) as one item in the store and displays the apple barcode (displayed on the apple price tag) as two items. (Bar code), this is a display example of the mobile terminal 60 in the scene where the lemon bar code (bar code displayed on the lemon price tag 80) is read as three items this time. Just as customers keep the yogurt in their basket when reading the yogurt barcode, they also have the necessary amount of lemon in their basket when reading the lemon (same for apples) barcode. Put it in.
  • yogurt barcode the barcode attached to the yogurt
  • apple barcode displayed on the apple price tag
  • the captured image display area 71 for displaying the captured image On the screen 70 displayed on the display of the mobile terminal 60, the captured image display area 71 for displaying the captured image, the registration information display area 72 for displaying the registration information of each product, and the total information display area 73 for displaying the total information.
  • a notification information display area 74 for notifying various other information is provided.
  • the screen 70 is an example of a product registration screen for members (a screen according to the registration status).
  • the mobile terminal 60 displays a product registration screen such as the screen 70 by, for example, a specific application program (hereinafter, a specific application).
  • the mobile terminal 60 may acquire a specific application from another device (for example, an application providing server (not shown) installed outside the store) after customer registration (member registration). That is, the mobile terminal 60 transmits the customer information of the customer to another device by the operation of the customer (inputs information about the customer himself / herself in the input form provided by the other device, etc.), and the specific application is transmitted from the other device. You may get it.
  • a bar code (bar code displayed on the lemon price tag 80) is displayed in the captured image display area 71. That is, the mobile terminal 60 displays the barcode imaged by itself as a through image (live view image) in the captured image display area 71.
  • yogurt registration information (reference numeral a) is displayed as one item
  • apple pre-weighing information (reference numeral b) is displayed as two items
  • lemon pre-weighing information (reference numeral c) is displayed as three items. ..
  • the selling price is specified if the product is identified by the barcode. Therefore, 160 yen is displayed as the selling price for yogurt.
  • Yogurt is referred to as registration information because the selling price required to perform the settlement process, which is the subsequent process, has already been specified (registered).
  • the weighing device 20 notifies that the pre-weighing information (unpriced product) needs to be weighed by a shaded display and a display of the wording “weighing required”.
  • the total information display area 73 as total information, the total quantity excluding unpriced products (apple, lemon) and the total amount are displayed (reference numeral d).
  • a “Proceed to checkout” button is arranged in the total information display area 73 (reference numeral d).
  • the "Proceed to checkout” button is a button for proceeding to the settlement process, which is a subsequent process.
  • the settlement process does not proceed even if the "Proceed to checkout” button is operated (touched).
  • the weighing device 20 may notify that there is an unpriced product and may not proceed to the settlement process.
  • the "Proceed to checkout” button may be hidden (or grayed out).
  • the name of the customer who uses the mobile terminal 60 (for example, a display name such as a nickname) "TS" is displayed (reference numeral e), and the character “tiger" of the customer who uses the mobile terminal 60 is displayed. Is displayed (reference numeral f).
  • the customer's name and character may be, for example, those registered (input, selected) by the customer at the time of customer registration.
  • the characters may be sequentially (cyclically) selected from a plurality of types (for example, types that do not overlap in the store, 300 types, etc.) when the specific application is started. ..
  • FIG. 3B is an example of an initial screen (standby screen) of the weighing device 20.
  • the left side of FIG. 3B is an enlarged view of the initial screen on the right side for convenience of explanation.
  • a member instruction display area 41 for customers (members) who weigh using the mobile terminal 60 and a non-member instruction display area 41 for customers (basically non-members) who weigh without using the mobile terminal 60. 42 is provided.
  • a code for connecting to the mobile terminal 60 (a code used to establish communication with the mobile terminal 60) is displayed.
  • a two-dimensional code such as a QR code (registered trademark) is used as the above code.
  • the customer who weighs using the mobile terminal 60 reads the two-dimensional code displayed in the member instruction display area 41 on the mobile terminal 60.
  • the customer who weighs without using the mobile terminal 60 operates (touches) the non-member instruction display area 42 or places the product on the platform 25a.
  • FIG. 3C shows a mobile terminal 60 reading a two-dimensional code displayed in the member instruction display area 41 on the initial screen of the weighing device 20.
  • the mobile terminal 60 displays the two-dimensional code during imaging (reading) in the captured image display area 71.
  • the mobile terminal 60 displays in the notification information display area 74 that it is preparing to connect to the measuring device 20 (while trying to connect).
  • the mobile terminal 60 analyzes the two-dimensional code and acquires information necessary for communication with the weighing device 20. Using the information, the mobile terminal 60 and the weighing device 20 establish communication by using short-range wireless communication such as Bluetooth. After the communication is established, not only short-range wireless communication such as Bluetooth, but also other wireless communication such as Wi-Fi, optical communication, wide area communication network of mobile phones and the like may be used in combination.
  • short-range wireless communication such as Bluetooth
  • other wireless communication such as Wi-Fi, optical communication, wide area communication network of mobile phones and the like may be used in combination.
  • the mobile terminal 60 reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the weighing device 20.
  • the mobile terminal 60 displays the two-dimensional code and the two-dimensional code displayed by the mobile terminal 60 is read by the weighing device 20. (Scanner 24) may read it.
  • FIG. 3D is an example of a pricing screen (also referred to as a weighing screen) of the weighing device 20.
  • the left side of FIG. 3D is an enlarged view of the screen on the right side for convenience of explanation.
  • the weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen as shown in FIG. 3D when communication is established by the connection operation shown in FIG. 3C.
  • the priced screen is provided with a product selection area 43 for selecting (designating) unpriced products, a priced information display area 44 for displaying priced information, and a notification information display area 45 for notifying various other information. ing.
  • a product button for selecting an apple and a product button for selecting a lemon are displayed.
  • the weighing device 20 recognizes that apples and lemons are unpriced products by communicating with the mobile terminal 60, and sets a product button for selecting an apple and a product button for selecting a lemon in the product selection area 43. Display on.
  • the weighing device 20 stores a product button master capable of identifying a product button for selecting each product from the product identification information that identifies each product, and stores the product identification information (unvalued value acquired from the mobile terminal 60). Identify and display the product button corresponding to the product identification information of the attached product). The weighing device 20 may acquire and display the product button corresponding to the product identification information by inquiring to an external device that stores the product master.
  • warning information can also be displayed in the product selection area 43. Details will be described later.
  • the measured value, the unit price, and the amount of money are displayed.
  • zero is displayed in each case because it has not been weighed yet.
  • the notification information display area 45 "connecting" is displayed as information indicating that the mobile terminal 60 is connected (reference numeral g), and "(good)” is displayed as the connection state (reference numeral h). That is, the weighing device 20 displays in the notification information display area 45 that the connection is being established and that the connection state is good based on the establishment of communication with the mobile terminal 60.
  • the name "TS" of the customer who uses the connected mobile terminal 60 is displayed (reference numeral i), and the character of the customer who uses the connected mobile terminal 60 is displayed. (Code j).
  • the weighing device 20 recognizes the name of the customer who uses the mobile terminal 60 and the character of the customer who uses the mobile terminal 60 by communicating with the mobile terminal 60, and displays them in the broadcast information display area 45.
  • the weighing device 20 stores a customer master capable of identifying the name and character of a customer who uses the connected mobile terminal 60 from the customer identification information that identifies each customer. Obtain and display by inquiring about other devices (management devices installed inside the store, servers installed outside the store, etc.). The weighing device 20 itself may store the customer master. In this case, no inquiry is required.
  • connection time 10 seconds is displayed as the connection time (elapsed time from the start of connection) (reference numeral k).
  • a message (specifically, a message "Please select a product and put the product on the table") is displayed to the customer (TS) to promote the action (operation). (Code l).
  • connection code two-dimensional code
  • the connection code is displayed on the initial screen (FIG. 3B), but the connection code is not displayed on the pricing screen (FIG. 3D, FIG. 3F, FIG. 3G, FIG. 3H, FIG. 3I, FIG. 12). That is, when the weighing device 20 is connected to a mobile terminal 60, another mobile terminal 60 cannot be connected to the weighing device 20.
  • FIG. 3E is a display example on the mobile terminal 60 side in the scene where the weighing device 20 displays the pricing screen of FIG. 3D.
  • FIG. 3E is a display example of the mobile terminal 60 when communication is established by the connection operation of FIG. 3C.
  • the notification information display area 74 in addition to the customer's name and character, "Connecting to Unit 1" is displayed as information indicating that the measuring device 20 (Unit 1) is connected. , "(Good)" is displayed as the connection status. That is, the mobile terminal 60 displays in the notification information display area 74 that the connection is being established and that the connection state is good based on the establishment of communication with the weighing device 20 (Unit 1). Since FIG. 3E is a scene where the connection is completed, it may be displayed that the connection is completed (for example, a message such as "connected").
  • FIG. 3F is a display example of the weighing device 20 after the product is selected.
  • the left side of FIG. 3F is an enlarged view of the right side screen for convenience of explanation.
  • the weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen as shown in FIG. 3F. Since the product (apple) to be weighed is selected, the weighing device 20 displays a message or the like promoting the placement of the product (apple) as shown in FIG. 3F, and sets the unit price of the product (apple) as pricing information. It is displayed in the display area 44.
  • the weighing device 20 stores a product master capable of specifying the unit price of each product from the product identification information that identifies each product, and identifies and displays the unit price corresponding to the product identification information.
  • the weighing device 20 may acquire and display the unit price corresponding to the product identification information by inquiring to an external device that stores the product master.
  • FIG. 3G is a display example of the weighing device 20 after weighing the product.
  • the left side of FIG. 3G is an enlarged view of the screen on the right side for convenience of explanation.
  • the weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen as shown in FIG. 3G. Since the product (apple) has been weighed, the weighing device 20 displays the measured value and the amount of the product (apple) in the pricing information display area 44.
  • the weighing device 20 displays a message prompting the printing and issuance of the label. In the example of FIG. 3G, the weighing device 20 displays a message "press the print button" that facilitates the operation of the print button 400 for printing and issuing the label.
  • FIG. 3H is a display example of the weighing device 20 at the time of issuing the label.
  • the weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen as shown in FIG. 3H. Since the label is printed and issued, the weighing device 20 displays a message or the like that promotes the sticking of the product (apple) of the label. Since the pricing for the product (apple) is completed, zero is displayed in the pricing information display area 44.
  • FIG. 3I is a display example of the weighing device 20 after the label is issued.
  • the weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen as shown in FIG. 3I. Since the price of the apple has been completed, the product button for selecting the apple is deleted in the product selection area 43, and only the product button for selecting the lemon is displayed. In the notification information display area 45, "connection time 53 seconds" is displayed as the connection time (reference numeral k). The completed apple may be displayed in gray down (cannot be pressed).
  • FIG. 3J is a display example on the mobile terminal 60 side in the scene where the weighing device 20 displays the pricing screen of FIG. 3I.
  • FIG. 3J is a display example of the mobile terminal 60 when the label is removed from the scene of FIG. 3H.
  • the apple is changed from "weighing required" to "weighing” in the registration information display area 72, and the selling price is displayed (reference numeral b). ). That is, the apple is updated from the pre-weighing information to the registered information. The apple content is also reflected in the total information (reference numeral d).
  • the weighing device 20 connects to the mobile terminal 60, and the pricing of all unpriced products is completed and disconnected (completed and disconnected), and the pricing of all unpriced products is completed.
  • the flow of disconnection (disconnection due to interruption) before the completion of is described.
  • FIG. 4 (also in FIG. 6) is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the weighing device 20.
  • FIG. 5 (the same applies to FIGS. 7 to 11) is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of the weighing device 20 and the like.
  • the flowchart of FIG. 4 shows an outline of the operation of the weighing device 20. At the start of the flowchart of FIG. 4, it is assumed that the weighing device 20 is not connected to the mobile terminal 60.
  • Step S10 The weighing device 20 executes the connection process.
  • the connection process is a process for establishing communication with the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S20. The details of the connection process will be described with reference to the sequence diagram of FIG.
  • Step S20 The weighing device 20 executes a connection monitoring process.
  • the connection monitoring process is a process of monitoring the connection with the mobile terminal 60 after the communication is established. Then, the process proceeds to step S30. The details of the connection monitoring process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 6 and the sequence diagrams of FIGS. 7 to 9.
  • Step S30 The weighing device 20 determines whether or not to interrupt. If it is determined to be interrupted (step S30: YES), the process proceeds to step S60. If it is determined that the interruption is not performed (step S30: NO), the process proceeds to step S40.
  • step S30 the weighing device 20 determines whether or not to interrupt based on the value of the interruption flag.
  • the value of the interruption flag becomes "1" when it is determined that the connection is interrupted based on the connection state (see step S234 in FIG. 8). That is, when the value of the interruption flag is "1" (step S30: YES), the process proceeds to step S60. If the value of the interruption flag is not "1" (step S30: NO), the process proceeds to step S40.
  • Step S40 The weighing device 20 executes a weighing process (price processing).
  • the weighing process is a process of weighing unweighed goods and executing pricing. Then, the process proceeds to step S50. The details of the weighing process will be described with reference to the sequence diagram of FIG.
  • Step S50 The weighing device 20 determines whether or not to end. If it is determined to end (step S50: YES), the process proceeds to step S60. If it is determined that the process does not end (step S50: NO), the process returns to step S20.
  • step S50 the weighing device 20 determines whether or not to end based on the value of the completion flag.
  • the value of the completion flag becomes "1" when the pricing of all unpriced products is completed (see step S407 in FIG. 10). That is, when the value of the completion flag is "1" (step S50: YES), the process proceeds to step S50. If the value of the completion flag is not "1" (step S50: NO), the process returns to step S20.
  • Step S60 The weighing device 20 executes a cutting process.
  • the disconnection process is a process of disconnecting the communication (connection) with the mobile terminal 60. Then, this flowchart ends. The details of the cutting process will be described with reference to the sequence diagram of FIG.
  • FIG. 5 is a sequence diagram showing the processing flow of each of the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 when the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 are connected.
  • the left side of FIG. 5 shows the processing of the weighing device 20, and the right side of FIG. 5 shows the processing of the mobile terminal 60.
  • Each process of the weighing device 20 on the left side of FIG. 5 corresponds to the connection process of step S10 of FIG.
  • Step S101 The weighing device 20 receives the connection start request transmitted from the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S102.
  • the connection start request includes, for example, customer identification information that identifies a customer who uses the mobile terminal 60 (that is, the mobile terminal 60 that is trying to connect) that is the source of the connection start request.
  • Step S102 The weighing device 20 transmits a connection start confirmation response to the mobile terminal 60 that is the source of the connection start request.
  • the connection start confirmation response includes, for example, connection identification information for identifying individual connections and device identification information for identifying the weighing device 20. Then, the process proceeds to step S103.
  • Step S103 The weighing device 20 receives the product identification information (product identification information of the unpriced product) transmitted from the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S104.
  • Step S104 The weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen on which buttons for unpriced goods are arranged. For example, as shown in FIG. 3D, the weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen in which a product button for selecting an apple, which is an unpriced product, and a product button for selecting a lemon are arranged.
  • the weighing device 20 displays information indicating that the connection is in progress and information regarding the connection destination on the pricing screen. For example, as shown in FIG. 3D, the weighing device 20 displays “connecting” as information indicating that the connection is in progress (reference numeral g), and displays a customer's name or character as information regarding the connection destination (reference numeral i). , Reference numeral j). Then, the process proceeds to step S105.
  • step S104 the weighing device 20 displays the customer's name and character based on the customer identification information included in the connection start request received from the mobile terminal 60 in step S101. For example, the weighing device 20 obtains a name or character corresponding to the customer identification information included in the connection start request received from the mobile terminal 60 in step S101, and each customer's name or character from the customer identification information that identifies each customer. Is acquired and displayed by inquiring to other devices (management devices installed in the store, servers installed outside the store, etc.) that store the identifiable customer master. The weighing device 20 itself may store the customer master. In this case, no inquiry is required.
  • the mobile terminal 60 may transmit a connection start request including information about the customer's name and character.
  • the weighing device 20 displays the customer's name and character based on the information about the customer's name and character included in the connection start request received from the mobile terminal 60 in step S101.
  • Step S105 The weighing device 20 evaluates the connection state with the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S106.
  • the evaluation of the connection state is performed not only in the connection process (FIG. 5) but also in the connection monitoring process (FIG. 6) described later, both of which are performed based on, for example, the radio field strength of the short-range wireless communication connected to each other. Will be. More specifically, the measuring device 20 evaluates the connection state based on the radio wave intensity and the threshold value (evaluation reference value).
  • the threshold value may be stored in the weighing device 20 or in another device (a management device installed in the store, a server installed outside the store, etc.) that the measuring device 20 can refer to. ..
  • the number of thresholds may be 1 or more, and the number of evaluation stages varies depending on the number of thresholds.
  • the number of evaluation stages is two stages (for example, the evaluation "good” when the radio field intensity is equal to or more than the threshold value, and the evaluation "poor” when the radio wave intensity is less than the threshold value. 2 stages).
  • the threshold value is two, the first threshold value and the second threshold value smaller than the first threshold value, the number of evaluation stages is three (for example, the evaluation "good” when the radio wave intensity is equal to or higher than the first threshold value, the radio wave intensity. Is the second threshold value or more and less than the first threshold value, the evaluation is “slightly poor”, and the radio wave intensity is less than the second threshold value, the evaluation is “poor”).
  • the number of threshold values may be one or three or more.
  • the evaluation of the connection state is an evaluation based on the feasibility of communication and the communication quality (performance).
  • the evaluation of the connection state in the present embodiment is an evaluation of the distance from the mobile terminal 60 (the customer who uses the mobile terminal 60 connected to the weighing device 20), which is the communication partner of the weighing device 20. Therefore, the "evaluation of the connection state" indicates the “evaluation of the distance to the communication partner”.
  • the weighing device 20 stores the following two threshold values (first threshold value and second threshold value) and evaluates the connection state.
  • Threshold 1 is a threshold for determining whether or not the mobile terminal 60, which is the communication partner, exists in the vicinity of the measuring device 20 (for example, within 2 meters).
  • Threshold 2 is a threshold for determining whether or not the mobile terminal 60, which is the communication partner, exists at a position (for example, within 10 meters) relatively close (farther than the vicinity) of the weighing device 20. Is.
  • the limit distance from the measuring device 20 is 2 where it is determined that the communication partner (mobile terminal 60) exists in the vicinity of the measuring device 20.
  • the radio wave strength (reception strength of radio waves transmitted from the mobile terminal 60) when present at the position of meters) is set (stored) as a threshold value 1, and the communication partner (mobile terminal 60) exists relatively close to the weighing device 20.
  • the radio wave intensity when it exists at the limit determined (the distance from the measuring device 20 is 10 meters) is set as the threshold value 2.
  • the specific values of the threshold value 1 and the threshold value 2 may be obtained from the specifications of the short-range wireless communication, or may be collected by an experiment or the like.
  • the measuring device 20 evaluates the connection state as “good”.
  • the customer connects with the weighing device 20 to price the unpriced goods. Therefore, usually, the customer connected to the weighing device 20 exists in the vicinity of the weighing device 20. That is, the weighing device 20 basically determines that the connection state is “good”.
  • the measuring device 20 evaluates the connection state as “slightly defective”. For example, when the customer is a little away from the weighing device 20, the weighing device 20 determines that the connection state is “slightly defective”.
  • the measuring device 20 evaluates the connection state as “poor”. For example, when the customer is separated from the weighing device 20 to some extent, the weighing device 20 determines that the connection state is “defective”.
  • connection state is“ good ”
  • the original customer customer being connected
  • connection state is“ good ”
  • the customer other than the original customer is present. It is extremely unlikely that the customer will mistakenly operate (or continue to operate) the weighing device 20 (misunderstanding that it is not connected).
  • connection state is“ slightly defective ”
  • the original customer the connected customer
  • connection state is “slightly defective”
  • the possibility of continuing) is low.
  • the “connection state is“ defective ”
  • the original customer is in a position where it is more difficult to return to the position of the weighing device 20 than when the “connection state is“ slightly defective ””.
  • Customerers connected exist. Therefore, when the “connection state is“ defective ””, the customer other than the original customer is the weighing device 20 than when the “connection state is“ slightly defective ””. There is a high possibility that you will accidentally operate (or continue to operate).
  • connection state good “"
  • "communication partner” neighborhood "” or “communication partner” operation position "” It may be displayed as "communication partner” ⁇ "”.
  • connection status slightly defective “"
  • “communication partner” exists within 10 meters "”
  • “communication partner” ⁇ "”, etc. may be displayed.
  • connection state is basically good.
  • the connection process (FIG. 5) is executed when the mobile terminal 60 reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the weighing device 20, the distance between the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 should be short. Therefore, in the evaluation of the connection state in the connection process, it is basically judged that the connection state is good as a confirmation result.
  • the connection monitoring process FIG.
  • the distance between the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 may become long. For example, if a customer leaves the weighing device 20 because he / she mistakenly thinks that the pricing of all unpriced products has been completed, or adds or returns products during pricing. Therefore, when the user goes to the display area away from the weighing device 20, the distance between the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 becomes long. Therefore, in the evaluation of the connection state in the connection monitoring process, it is not always judged that the connection state is good as a confirmation result.
  • Step S106 The weighing device 20 transmits the connection status information to the mobile terminal 60 based on the confirmation result of step S105. Then, the process proceeds to step S107.
  • Step S107 The weighing device 20 displays information on the connection state based on the confirmation result in step S105. For example, as shown in FIG. 3D, the weighing device 20 displays “(good)” as information regarding the connection state (reference numeral h). Then, the process proceeds to step S108.
  • Step S108 The weighing device 20 sets a connection time counter that measures the connection time, and starts displaying the connection time. That is, the weighing device 20 is based on the value of the connection time counter that counts up (timed) from zero in the step S208, and thereafter, the elapsed time until the connection time counter is reset in the step S603 of FIG. Continue to update and display. For example, in FIG. 3D, "10 seconds" is displayed as the connection time (reference numeral k).
  • Step S111 The mobile terminal 60 reads the two-dimensional code for connection.
  • the mobile terminal 60 reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the weighing device 20 as shown in FIG. 3C. Then, the process proceeds to step S112.
  • Step S112 The mobile terminal 60 analyzes the two-dimensional code, acquires information necessary for communication with the weighing device 20, and transmits a connection start request (including customer identification information) to the weighing device 20. Then, the process proceeds to step S113.
  • Step S113 The mobile terminal 60 receives the connection start confirmation response transmitted from the weighing device 20. Then, the process proceeds to step S114.
  • Step S114 The mobile terminal 60 transmits the product identification information of the unpriced product to the weighing device 20. Then, the process proceeds to step S115.
  • Step S115 The mobile terminal 60 displays information indicating that the connection is in progress and information regarding the connection destination. For example, as shown in FIG. 3E, the mobile terminal 60 displays "connecting" as information indicating that it is connected, and displays "Unit 1" as information regarding the connection destination. Then, the process proceeds to step S116.
  • step S115 the mobile terminal 60 displays the device number “No. 1” of the weighing device 20 based on the terminal identification information included in the connection start confirmation response received from the measuring device 20 in step S113.
  • the mobile terminal 60 stores a device master capable of acquiring a device number corresponding to the terminal identification information included in the connection start confirmation response received from the weighing device 20 in step S113 and each device number from the terminal identification information. Obtain and display by inquiring about other devices (management devices installed inside the store, servers installed outside the store, etc.).
  • the mobile terminal 60 itself may store the device master. In this case, no inquiry is required.
  • step S102 the weighing device 20 may transmit a connection start request including the device number.
  • the mobile terminal 60 displays the device number included in the connection start request received from the weighing device 20 in step S113.
  • Step S116 The mobile terminal 60 receives the connection status information transmitted from the weighing device 20. Then, the process proceeds to step S117.
  • Step S117 The mobile terminal 60 displays information on the connection status based on the connection status information. For example, the mobile terminal 60 displays "(good)" as information regarding the connection state, as shown in FIG. 3E.
  • the flowchart of FIG. 6 shows the operation of the weighing device 20 in the connection monitoring process of step S20 of FIG.
  • Step S21 The weighing device 20 evaluates the connection state with the mobile terminal 60 in the same manner as in step S105 of the connection process (FIG. 5). That is, the weighing device 20 evaluates the distance to the mobile terminal 60 (the mobile terminal 60 connected to the weighing device 20) which is the communication partner. Then, the process proceeds to step S22.
  • Step S22 The weighing device 20 determines whether or not the connection state with the mobile terminal 60 is good. That is, if the connection state evaluated in the latest (immediately before) step S21 is good (step S22: YES), the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is not good (step S22: NO), the step. Proceed to S24. That is, the weighing device 20 proceeds to step S23 when the mobile terminal 60 which is the communication partner exists in the vicinity (step S22: YES), and proceeds to step S23 when it does not exist in the vicinity (step S22: NO), step S24. Proceed to.
  • Step S23 The weighing device 20 determines whether or not the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side is “1”. If the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side is "1" (step S23: YES), the process proceeds to step S260. If the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side is not "1" (step S23: NO), this flowchart ends.
  • the warning flag on the measuring device side is a flag indicating whether or not the connection warning control process is being executed on the measuring device 20 side.
  • the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side becomes "1" when the connection warning control process is executed on the measuring device 20 side (see step S202 in FIG. 7).
  • Step S24 The weighing device 20 determines whether or not the value of the warning flag on the measuring device side is “1”. When the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side is "1" (step S24: YES), the process proceeds to step S230. If the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side is not "1" (step S24: NO), the process proceeds to step S200.
  • Step S200 The weighing device 20 executes a connection warning control start process for starting the connection warning control (connection warning control process). That is, if the connection state is not good (step S22: NO) and the connection warning control process has not yet been executed (step S24: NO), the weighing device 20 performs the connection warning control start process for starting the connection warning control. Run. Then, this flowchart ends. The details of the connection warning control start process will be described with reference to the sequence diagram of FIG.
  • Step S230 The weighing device 20 executes the connection warning control process. That is, if the connection state is not good (step S22: NO) and the connection warning control process has already been executed (step S24: YES), the weighing device 20 continues to execute the connection warning control process. and
  • Step S260 The weighing device 20 executes a connection warning control end process for terminating the connection warning control (connection warning control process). That is, if the connection state is good (step S22: YES) and the connection warning control process is executed (step S23: YES), the weighing device 20 executes the connection warning control end process for terminating the connection warning control. do. Then, this flowchart ends. The details of the connection warning control termination process will be described with reference to the sequence diagram of FIG.
  • FIG. 7 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of each of the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 when starting the connection warning control.
  • the left side of FIG. 7 shows the processing of the weighing device 20, and the right side of FIG. 7 shows the processing of the mobile terminal 60.
  • Each process of the weighing device 20 on the left side of FIG. 7 corresponds to the connection warning control start process of step S200 of FIG.
  • Step S201 The weighing device 20 transmits control information to the effect that the connection warning control is started to the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S202.
  • Step S202 The weighing device 20 sets the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side to “1”. For example, the weighing device 20 stores “1” as the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side in the storage unit (RAM 23) in the own device. The initial value of the warning flag on the weighing device side is "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S203.
  • Step S203 The weighing device 20 displays a warning message regarding the connection. Then, the process proceeds to step S204.
  • Step S204 The weighing device 20 displays a caution message to other customers.
  • the other customers are customers other than the original customers (customers who are connected. In this example, "TS").
  • Step S205 The weighing device 20 sets a warning duration counter that measures the duration (warning duration) of the warning regarding the connection, and starts displaying the warning duration. That is, the weighing device 20 is based on the value of the warning duration counter that counts up (timed) from zero in step S205, and thereafter until the warning duration counter is reset in step S264 of FIG. The warning duration is updated and displayed continuously.
  • Step S211 The portable device 60 receives the control information transmitted from the weighing device 20 to start the connection warning control. Then, the process proceeds to step S212.
  • Step S212 The mobile terminal 60 sets the value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side to "1". For example, the mobile terminal 60 stores "1" as the value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side in the storage unit in the own terminal. The initial value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side is "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S213.
  • the mobile terminal side warning flag in step S212 is a flag indicating whether or not the connection warning control process is being executed on the mobile terminal 60 side.
  • the value of the terminal side warning flag is "1".
  • Step S213 The mobile terminal 60 displays a warning message regarding the connection. Then, the process proceeds to step S214.
  • the mobile terminal 60 may control the display of a warning message regarding the connection based on the value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side. That is, the mobile terminal 60 does not display the warning message regarding the connection when the value of the terminal side warning flag is "0", and displays the warning message regarding the connection when the value of the terminal side warning flag is "1". It may be displayed. The same applies to the message that promotes the action of step S214.
  • Step S214 The mobile terminal 60 displays a message that promotes an action (movement). That is, since the customer is likely to be away from the weighing device 20, the mobile terminal 60 displays a message to the customer to return to the weighing device 20.
  • FIG. 8 is a sequence diagram showing the processing flow of each of the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 during the execution of the connection warning control.
  • the left side of FIG. 8 shows the processing of the weighing device 20, and the right side of FIG. 8 shows the processing of the mobile terminal 60.
  • Each process of the weighing device 20 on the left side of FIG. 8 corresponds to the connection warning control process of step S230 of FIG.
  • Step S2311 If a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the previous transmission, the weighing device 20 transmits the connection status information to the mobile terminal 60 based on the latest (immediately preceding) confirmation result of step S21. do. That is, the weighing device 20 periodically (for example, every 5 seconds) transmits the latest connection status information to the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S232.
  • a predetermined time for example, 5 seconds
  • Step S232 When the weighing device 20 transmits the connection status information, the weighing device 20 displays the information regarding the connection status based on the latest (immediately preceding) confirmation result of step S21. That is, the weighing device 20 displays the information related to the connection state in accordance with the timing of transmitting the connection state information. Then, the process proceeds to step S233.
  • Step S234 If the warning duration has reached a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) or the connection status confirmation response to be received has not been received, the weighing device 20 sets the value of the interruption flag to “1”. .. That is, the weighing device 20 determines that the connection is interrupted when the connection state is not good for a predetermined time or when the connection state deteriorates to the extent that communication cannot be performed, and the value of the interruption flag is set to "1".
  • Step S2411 The mobile terminal 60 receives the connection status information if it has been transmitted. That is, if the measuring device 20 has transmitted the connection state information, the mobile terminal 60 receives it. Then, the process proceeds to step S242.
  • Step S242 If the mobile terminal 60 has received the connection status information, the mobile terminal 60 displays information on the connection status based on the received connection status information. Then, the process proceeds to step S243.
  • Step S242 If the mobile terminal 60 has received the connection status information, the mobile terminal 60 transmits a connection status confirmation response.
  • FIG. 9 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of each of the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 when the connection warning control is terminated.
  • the left side of FIG. 9 shows the processing of the weighing device 20, and the right side of FIG. 9 shows the processing of the mobile terminal 60.
  • Each process of the weighing device 20 on the left side of FIG. 9 corresponds to the connection warning control end process of step S260 of FIG.
  • Step S261 The weighing device 20 transmits control information to the effect that the connection warning control is terminated to the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S262.
  • Step S262 The weighing device 20 sets the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side to “0”. Then, the process proceeds to step S263.
  • Step S263 The weighing device 20 deletes the warning message regarding the connection and the caution message for other customers. Then, the process proceeds to step S264.
  • Step S264 The weighing device 20 resets the warning duration counter (ends timing). That is, the weighing device 20 ends (erases) the display of the warning duration.
  • Step S271 The portable device 60 receives the control information transmitted from the weighing device 20 to the effect that the connection warning control is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S272.
  • Step S272 The mobile terminal 60 sets the value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side to “0”. Then, the process proceeds to step S273.
  • Step S273 The mobile terminal 60 deletes the warning message regarding the connection and the message promoting the action.
  • the mobile terminal 60 may control the display of a warning message or the like regarding the connection based on the value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side. That is, when the value of the terminal side warning flag is "0", the mobile terminal 60 does not display a warning message or the like regarding the connection, and the terminal side does not display the warning message or the like.
  • warning flag When the value of the warning flag is "1”, a warning message or the like regarding the connection may be displayed.
  • the transaction management server is a server that stores product registration information.
  • the transaction management server stores the registration information of each mobile terminal 60 (registration information as displayed in the registration information display area 72 (FIG. 3A) shown in FIG. 3A) as cart information (basket information).
  • Step S401 The weighing device 20 accepts a designation for one of the unpriced goods.
  • the weighing device 20 accepts the designation of one of the unpriced products by accepting the operation of the product button in the product selection area 43 of the pricing screen. Then, the process proceeds to step S402.
  • Step S402 The weighing device 20 acquires the weighing value of the product and calculates the selling price. That is, since the customer who has designated the product is placed on the platform of the product, the weighing device 20 weighs the product mounted on the platform and calculates the selling price from the measured value and the unit price. Then, the process proceeds to step S403.
  • the weight of the tare (container) is omitted for convenience of explanation, but when it is necessary to consider the tare, the weighing device 20 deducts the tare from the weighed value and sells the price. Is calculated.
  • Step S403 The weighing device 20 transmits the registration information of the product to the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S403.
  • the registered information includes, for example, product identification information, a measured value, a selling price, and the like of the product.
  • Step S404 The weighing device 20 receives the update confirmation response transmitted from the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S405.
  • Step S405 The weighing device 20 prints and issues a label of the product. Then, the process proceeds to step S406.
  • a barcode for registering the product (a barcode that encodes the selling price of the product and is optically readable, etc.) is printed. do not. That is, since the update confirmation response is received in step S404 after the registration information is transmitted, the product is registered (the registration information of the product has been reflected in the cart information of the transaction management server), and the subsequent product No registration required. Therefore, the weighing device 20 does not print the bar code for registering the product on the label. However, although it is not necessary originally, a barcode may be printed.
  • Step S406 The weighing device 20 excludes the goods from the unpriced goods. For example, the weighing device 20 erases the product button of the product. Then, the process proceeds to step S407.
  • Step S407 If there is no unpriced product, the weighing device 20 sets the value of the completion flag to “1”. That is, the weighing device 20 sets the value of the completion flag to "1" when the pricing of all the unpriced products is completed.
  • Step S411 The mobile terminal 60 receives the registration information transmitted from the weighing device 20.
  • the mobile terminal 60 transmits the registration information received from the weighing device 20 to the transaction management server.
  • the process proceeds to step S412.
  • the mobile terminal 60 may process the registration information received from the weighing device 20 and transmit it to the transaction management server. That is, the registration information received by the mobile terminal 60 from the weighing device 20 and the registration information transmitted by the mobile terminal 60 to the transaction management server do not necessarily have to be in the same format, for example.
  • Step S412 The mobile terminal 60 receives the update confirmation response transmitted from the transaction management server.
  • the mobile terminal 60 transmits the received update confirmation response to the weighing device 20.
  • the process proceeds to step S413.
  • the mobile terminal 60 may process the update confirmation response received from the transaction management server and transmit it to the weighing device 20. That is, the update confirmation response received by the mobile terminal 60 from the transaction management server and the update confirmation response transmitted by the mobile terminal 60 to the weighing device 20 do not necessarily have to be in the same format, for example.
  • Step S413 The mobile terminal 60 excludes the product from unpriced products. For example, the mobile terminal 60 changes the product from "weighing required” to “weighing” and displays the selling price of the product.
  • Step S421 The transaction management server receives the registration information transmitted from the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S422.
  • Step S422 The transaction management server updates the cart information based on the registration information transmitted from the mobile terminal 60. That is, the transaction management server registers the product designated by the customer and placed on the platform, and the weighing device 20 calculates the selling price. Then, the process proceeds to step S423.
  • Step S423 The transaction management server transmits an update confirmation response to the mobile terminal 60.
  • the update confirmation response responds to the sender of the registration information that the cart information has been updated based on the registration information.
  • FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram showing the processing flow of each of the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 when the communication between the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 is disconnected.
  • the left side of FIG. 11 shows the processing of the weighing device 20, and the right side of FIG. 11 shows the processing of the mobile terminal 60.
  • Each process of the weighing device 20 on the left side of FIG. 11 corresponds to the cutting process of step S60 of FIG.
  • Step S601 The weighing device 20 transmits a connection termination request (including connection identification information and the like) to the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S602.
  • Step S602 The weighing device 20 receives the connection termination confirmation response transmitted from the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S603.
  • Step S603 The weighing device 20 resets the connection time counter (ends timing). That is, the weighing device 20 ends (erases) the display of the connection time. Then, the process proceeds to step S604.
  • Step S604 The weighing device 20 displays an initial screen.
  • the weighing device 20 displays, for example, an initial screen as shown in FIG. 3B. Then, the process proceeds to step S605.
  • the initial screen is a screen that is displayed when the connection is not established, as shown in FIG. 3B, the initial screen contains information indicating that the connection is in progress, information regarding the connection destination, and information regarding the connection status. ,Do not show.
  • the weighing device 20 erases the information indicating that the connection is in progress, the information regarding the connection destination, and the information regarding the connection state by switching to the initial screen.
  • the initial screen is a screen that is displayed when the connection is not established, as shown in FIG. 3B, the initial screen has warning information regarding the connection (information such as "connection warning in progress" described in FIG. 12). Is not displayed. That is, when the warning state is reached, there are cases where the warning state returns to the normal state (when the connection warning control termination process of FIG. 9 is executed) and cases where the warning state returns to the normal state without returning to the normal state. (When the value of the interruption flag is set to "1" in step S234 of FIG. 8), there are two cases, and in the former case, the weighing device 20 connects the above warning information to the connection warning control. It is erased in the end process (step S263), and in the latter case, the warning information is erased by switching to the initial screen in the disconnection process (step S604).
  • the warning information is erased by switching to the initial screen in the disconnection process (step S604).
  • Step S605 If the value of the weighing device side warning flag is "1", the weighing device 20 sets the value of the measuring device side warning flag to "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S605.
  • Step S606 If the value of the completion flag is "1", the weighing device 20 sets the value of the completion flag to "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S607.
  • Step S607 If the value of the interruption flag is "1", the weighing device 20 sets the value of the interruption flag to "0".
  • Step S611 The mobile terminal 60 receives the connection termination request transmitted from the weighing device 20. Then, the process proceeds to step S612.
  • Step S612 The mobile terminal 60 transmits a connection termination confirmation response. Then, the process proceeds to step S613.
  • Step S613 The mobile terminal 60 erases the information indicating that the connection is in progress, the information regarding the connection destination, and the information regarding the connection state. Then, the process proceeds to step S614.
  • Step S614 If the value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side is "1", the mobile terminal 60 sets the value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side to "0".
  • FIG. 12 is a display example during the warning in the weighing device 20.
  • the customer should normally start the lemon pricing, but in the scene of FIG. 3I, the lemon pricing is not started.
  • the weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen as shown in FIG.
  • connection time 83 seconds is displayed as the connection time (reference numeral k). That is, the scene of FIG. 12 is a scene in which 30 seconds have passed from the scene of FIG. 3I. According to "(20 seconds have passed from the start of the warning)" to be described later, a warning state is set when 10 seconds have passed from the scene of FIG. 3I, and a scene where the warning state has passed 20 seconds is the scene of FIG.
  • a product button for selecting a lemon is displayed as in the scene of FIG. 3I.
  • warning information is also displayed in the notification information display area 45 in the scene of FIG. 12. Specifically, “Connecting warning” is displayed as a warning about connection, “(20 seconds have passed since the warning started)” is displayed as the warning duration, and “Connecting with TS” is displayed as a caution to other customers. Please do not touch the button if you are not TS. "
  • the weighing device 20 displays "connection warning in progress" as a warning message regarding connection in the connection warning control start process of FIG. 7 (step S203), and "connects with TS" as a caution message to other customers. Please do not touch the button if you are not like this "(step S204).
  • the weighing device 20 starts timing the warning duration in the connection warning control start process of FIG. 7 (step S205), and always displays the warning duration as "(20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the warning)" during the warning (step S205).
  • the weighing device 20 displays “(slightly defective)” as information regarding the connection state in the connection warning control process (FIG. 8) (step S232).
  • the above-mentioned warning information is deleted in the connection warning control end process (FIG. 9) or the disconnection process (FIG. 11).
  • FIG. 13 is a display example during a warning on the mobile terminal 60.
  • FIG. 13 is a display example on the mobile terminal 60 side in the scene where the weighing device 20 displays the pricing screen of FIG.
  • the mobile terminal 60 displays a screen as shown in FIG. 13 when the lemon is separated from the weighing device 20 without starting the price of the lemon from the state of FIG. 3J.
  • the notification information display area 74 in the scene of FIG. 13 the customer's name, the customer's character, and "connecting to Unit 1" are displayed as in the scene of FIG. 3J. However, unlike the scene of FIG. 3J, "(slightly defective)" is displayed in the notification information display area 74 in the scene of FIG. 13 as information indicating that the connection state is slightly defective. In the notification information display area 74 in the scene of FIG. 13, "connection warning in progress" is displayed.
  • the mobile terminal 60 displays "connection warning in progress” as a warning message regarding connection in the connection warning control start process of FIG. 7 (step S213), and approaches the "weighing device (Unit 1)" as a message for promoting action. Please. ”Is displayed (step S214).
  • the mobile terminal 60 displays "(slightly defective)" as information regarding the connection state in the connection warning control process (FIG. 8) (step S242).
  • the above-mentioned warning information is deleted in the connection warning control end process (FIG. 9) or the disconnection process (FIG. 11).
  • the above-described embodiment is an example, and the specific configuration is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and includes a design and the like within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the invention.
  • the information that the weighing device 20 is connected to the mobile terminal 60 (“connecting” in the example of FIG. 3D) and the connection state (in the example of FIG. 3D, “( Good) ”,“ Slightly bad ”in the example of FIG. 12, customer name (“TS” in the example of FIG. 3D), character (tiger in the example of FIG. 3D), connection time (“connection time” in the example of FIG. 3D. 10 seconds ”), connection warning message (“connection warning in progress” in the example of FIG. 12), warning duration (“(20 seconds have passed since the start of the warning)” in the example of FIG. 12), warning message to other customers ( In the example of Fig. 12, we explained an example of displaying "Connecting with TS.
  • connection warning Please do not touch the button if you are not TS", but not necessarily all the information explained in each scene is displayed. It may not be necessary, or other information may be displayed as information related to the connection. Although not described in the above embodiment, some or all of the above-mentioned information related to the connection may be lit and displayed. For example, the information indicating that the mobile terminal 60 is connected (“connecting”), the connection time, the warning message regarding the connection (“connection warning”), and the warning duration may be lit and displayed.
  • connection instead of or in addition to the connection states "good”, “slightly bad”, and “bad", the communication partner “neighborhood”, “existing within 10 meters”, “absent within 10 meters”, and the like may be displayed.
  • “connection” may be displayed as “use” or the like.
  • FIG. 3D “in use (nearby)” may be displayed instead of “connecting (good)”
  • “usage time 10 seconds” may be displayed instead of “connection time 10 seconds”.
  • FIG. 12 even if “in use (exists within 10 meters)” is displayed instead of “connecting (slightly defective)” and "use time 83 seconds” is displayed instead of "connection time 83 seconds”. good.
  • the fact that the mobile terminal 60 is connected is displayed as "connecting" at the fixed position (FIG. 3D), but instead of displaying at the fixed position or in addition. It may be scrolled in the left-right direction (or up-down direction).
  • the fact that the mobile terminal 60 is connected is displayed as a character (“connecting” in the example of FIG. 3D), but the method of recognizing whether or not the connection is being made is not limited to this.
  • the background color and the background pattern of the pricing screen may be different between when the mobile terminal 60 is not connected and when the mobile terminal 60 is connected. This makes it easier to see that they are connected.
  • the background color and background pattern may be different depending on the customer.
  • information related to the connection is displayed before the product button is operated (FIG. 3D).
  • Fig. 3I the information related to the connection was not displayed between the operation of the product button and the issuance of the label (Fig. 3F, Fig. 3G, Fig. 3H), but the product button was added before the operation of the product.
  • Information related to the connection may be displayed after the button is operated and after the label is issued.
  • the weighing device 20 may display the information related to the connection in a simplified manner after the product button is operated and after the label is issued, as compared with before the product button is operated.
  • the weighing device 20 may reduce the amount of information (type of information) of the information related to the connection from the time after the operation of the product button to the time when the label is issued, as compared with the case before the operation of the product button.
  • the weighing device 20 may display information related to the connection in a mode (large characters or the like) that is easier to recognize before the product button is operated than after the product button is operated and during label issuance.
  • the weighing device 20 displays the connection time (FIG. 3D, FIG. 3I, FIG. 12, etc.), and the mobile terminal 60 does not display the connection time (FIG. 3E, FIG. 3J, FIG. 13).
  • the mobile terminal 60 may also display the connection time during the connection.
  • the weighing device 20 displays the warning duration during the warning (FIG. 12 and the like), and the mobile terminal 60 does not display the warning duration (FIG. 13).
  • the terminal 60 may also display the warning duration.
  • the weighing device 20 displays (counts up) the warning duration during the warning has been described (FIG. 12, etc.), but instead of or in addition to the warning duration, the remaining time until disconnection (the remaining time until disconnection (FIG. 12 etc.)). (Countdown) may be done. The same applies to the mobile terminal 60.
  • the mobile terminal 60 may warn by voice instead of or in addition to the display.
  • the mobile terminal 60 may output audio when displaying the screen as shown in FIG.
  • the mobile terminal 60 may warn by vibration in place of or in addition to the display and voice.
  • the mobile terminal 60 may vibrate the housing when displaying the screen as shown in FIG.
  • the screen as shown in FIG. 13 is displayed, it is at least a part of the period from immediately before the start of the display to the end of the display of the screen.
  • the above-mentioned partial period may occur a plurality of times within the period from immediately before the start of the display of the screen to the end of the display.
  • the period and the number of times the sound is output may or may not match the period and the number of times the housing is vibrated.
  • the mobile terminal 60 erases the information indicating that the connection is being made (step S613), but may notify the disconnection (notify by one or more of display, voice, and vibration).
  • the connection monitoring process is executed, and if it is not interrupted (unless the value of the interruption flag is set to "1" in the connection monitoring process), the weighing process is performed on the first unpriced product. If it is executed and unpriced products remain (unless the value of the completion flag is set to "1" in the weighing process), the connection monitoring process is executed again, and if it is not interrupted, the second unpriced item is not executed.
  • connection monitoring process An example of executing the connection monitoring process at an execution interval such as executing the weighing process for the priced product and executing the connection monitoring process again if the unpriced product remains has been described.
  • the execution interval of the connection monitoring process does not have to be every time the weighing process is executed for each unpriced product.
  • the execution timing of the connection monitoring process does not have to be before the weighing process for each unpriced product is executed.
  • the connection monitoring process may be executed at predetermined intervals during the connection (for example, every 10 seconds due to a timer interrupt).
  • connection monitoring process In the mode of executing the connection monitoring process at predetermined intervals during connection, for example, if the unpriced product is not placed on the platform immediately after the unpriced product is specified (step S401 in FIG. 10 is executed). (If step S402 is not executed immediately after that), until the unpriced product is placed on the table (until step S402 is executed), depending on the time until it is placed.
  • the connection monitoring process is executed one or more times.
  • step S404 If the update confirmation response is not received immediately after the registration information is transmitted (if step S404 is not executed immediately after step S403 in FIG. 10 is executed), until the update confirmation response is received (step S404 is executed). Until this is done), one or more connection monitoring processes are executed according to the time until the update confirmation response is received.
  • connection monitoring process is executed each time the weighing process for each unpriced product shown in the above embodiment is executed, between the product designation reception (step S401) and the product button deletion (step S406).
  • connection monitoring process is executed at predetermined intervals during connection, the connection status is also monitored during the product designation reception (step S401) to the deletion of the product button (step S406). ..
  • connection status is not good as a result of monitoring the connection status between the product designation reception (step S401) and the product button deletion (step S406)
  • the relevant product is determined according to the progress stage of the weighing process.
  • the weighing process may be maintained at that stage, or the weighing process may be canceled (may be canceled assuming that the designation was not made).
  • step S405 A case where the warning duration reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) between the reception of the update confirmation response (step S404) and the printing and issuing of the label (step S405) (the case where the condition of step S234 in FIG. 8 is satisfied). ), But in the case of this case, the registration of the product, etc. (registration of the product in the cart information in step S422 in FIG. 10, exclusion from the unpriced product of the product in step S413, etc.) is canceled (the product). You may delete the registration in the cart information, return to "Weighing” ⁇ "Weighing required", return the selling price to "??”, etc.), and do not issue the label.
  • a predetermined time for example, 3 minutes
  • the registration of the product may be maintained without being canceled and a label may be issued. That is, at least, the label (not the label printed with the bar code that encodes the selling price of the product described in FIG. 14) and whether or not it is registered (priced) is printed. It suffices to make it consistent with the presence or absence of print issuance of (no label).
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing another example of the operation of the weighing device 20. It is a modification of the operation of the weighing device 20 shown on the left side of the sequence diagram of FIG. Specifically, the flowchart of FIG. 14 shows a case where the registration information that should be transmitted (step S403 of FIG. 10) is not transmitted after the calculation of the selling price (step S402 of FIG. 10). The operation of the weighing device 20 is shown as a modified example. Since steps S1401, S1402, S1406, and S1407 in FIG. 14 are the same as steps S401, S402, S406, and S407 in FIG. 10, a part or all of the description will be omitted.
  • Step S1405 After calculating the selling price in step S1402, the weighing device 20 prints and issues a label of the product without transmitting registration information to the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S1406.
  • Printing and issuing a label without sending the registration information means that the label has never been sent to the mobile terminal 60 before printing and issuing the label, and before printing and issuing the label. It also includes the case where the registration information is transmitted to the mobile terminal 60 at least once but cannot be transmitted. For example, when a problem occurs in communication with the mobile terminal 60 between the designated reception of the product (step S1401) and the calculation of the selling price (step S1402), the weighing device 20 transmits the registration information to the mobile terminal 60.
  • the label may be printed and issued without attempting once, or the label may be printed and issued after attempting to transmit the registration information to the mobile terminal 60 once or more.
  • the above-mentioned communication problem is a problem of radio wave strength (weak enough to prevent communication), it depends on the threshold value in the connection monitoring process (for example, the mode in which the connection monitoring process is executed at predetermined intervals during the above-mentioned connection). However, the connection status "bad" is judged. The same applies to the scene of FIG.
  • a barcode for registering the product (a barcode that encodes the selling price of the product and is optically readable, etc.) is printed. do. That is, unlike the scene of FIG. 10, since the registration information is not transmitted, the product is not registered (not registered in the cart information of the transaction management server). Therefore, the weighing device 20 prints a bar code for registering the product on the label. As a result, the product can be registered easily and accurately by reading the barcode on the label with another device (such as a payment device having a barcode reading function).
  • the mobile terminal 60 displays an accounting code (information for acquiring registration information of all registered products) in response to a predetermined operation (operation of the "proceed to accounting" button).
  • the checkout device for example, a self-payment device
  • the settlement device executes the settlement process based on the registration information acquired from the accounting code. So-called mobile payment may be performed on the mobile terminal 60 without using the payment device.
  • the settlement is performed as follows, for example. conduct.
  • the mobile terminal 60 displays an accounting code (information for acquiring registration information of all registered products) in response to a predetermined operation (operation of the "proceed to accounting" button).
  • the checkout device (for example, a self-payment device) reads the accounting code and acquires the registration information of all the registered products.
  • the settlement device reads the label of the unregistered product (the label on which the above barcode is printed) and acquires the information of the unregistered product as the registration information.
  • the settlement device executes the settlement process based on the registration information acquired from the accounting code and the registration information acquired from the label.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing another example of the operation of the weighing device 20. It is a modification of the operation of the weighing device 20 shown on the left side of the sequence diagram of FIG. Specifically, the flowchart of FIG. 15 is a case where the update confirmation response that should have been received (step S404 of FIG. 10) is not received after the transmission of the registration information (step S403 of FIG. 10). The operation of the weighing device 20 is shown as a modified example. Since steps S2401 to S2403, S2406, and S2407 of FIG. 15 are the same as steps S401 to S403, S406, and S407 of FIG. 10, a part or all of the description will be omitted.
  • Step S2405 When the weighing device 20 transmits the registration information of the product (the unpriced product specified in step S1401) to the mobile terminal 60 in step S1403, but does not receive the update confirmation response from the mobile terminal 60. (For example, if the product is not received within the specified time), the label of the product is printed and issued. Then, the process proceeds to step S2406. For example, if any problem occurs in communication with the mobile terminal 60 after the transmission of the registration information (step S2403), the weighing device 20 does not receive the update confirmation response.
  • a barcode for registering the product (a barcode that encodes the selling price of the product and is optically readable, etc.) is printed. do. That is, unlike the scene of FIG. 10, since the update confirmation response is not received after the registration information is transmitted, it is unknown whether or not the product has been registered. If it has been registered, subsequent registration of the product is not required, and if it has not been registered, subsequent registration of the product is required. In this example, it is considered that the product has not been registered, and the weighing device 20 prints a barcode for registering the product on the label. As a result, it is possible to register easily and accurately by reading the barcode on the label with another device (such as a settlement device having a barcode reading function).
  • a control number is issued (numbered) for each product (for each price), registration information including the control number is transmitted, and information including the control number (selling price + control number, etc.) is coded.
  • a label with a barcode printed on it may be issued.
  • the transaction management server also stores the management number (stored in the cart information) when registering the product.
  • another device such as a settlement device having a barcode reading function
  • a customer who weighs without using the mobile terminal 60 operates the non-member instruction display area 42 to start weighing (price) (FIG. 3B), but when the non-member instruction display area 42 is operated.
  • the operation of the weighing device 20 is basically the same as that of FIG. 14 (except for the operation related to the display of the product button in the product selection area 43). That is, in the case of a customer who weighs using the mobile terminal 60, the weighing device 20 displays a product button (that is, the product button) of the product in which the customer recognizes the bar code of the price tag 60 using the mobile terminal 60 in the product selection area 43. A product button that is almost certain to be operated by the customer) is displayed (FIG.
  • the product button displayed in the product selection area 43 may be referred to as a preset button (or a preset product button).
  • the printing unit 28 may be compatible with multicolor printing.
  • the label that does not print the barcode (label for registered products) and the label that prints the barcode (label for unregistered products) are multicolored.
  • the presence or absence of printing or the mode of use may be different.
  • print a message such as "Please scan" in red on the label that prints the barcode, and do not use red printing on the label that does not print the barcode. You may.
  • the printing unit 28 may be compatible with double-sided printing. When the printing unit 28 is compatible with double-sided printing, the presence or absence of double-sided printing or the mode of use may be different between the label that does not print the barcode and the label that prints the barcode.
  • a label that prints a barcode is printed with a watermark on the back (in light letters) and "x" is printed, and a label that does not print a barcode is printed with a watermark on the back and " ⁇ " is printed. You may.
  • the weighing device 20 determines that the pricing of all unpriced products has been completed, or when it determines that the pricing is interrupted, the communication with the mobile terminal 60 is cut off (FIGS. 4 and 4). 8 step S234, FIG. 10 step S407, FIG. 11 step S601, etc.), the cutting method is not limited thereto.
  • the weighing device 20 may disconnect the communication with the mobile terminal 60 based on the operation.
  • the weighing device 20 may display a button (disconnect button) when it is determined to be interrupted, and disconnect the communication with the mobile terminal 60 in response to the operation of the disconnect button. That is, the method 1 is an embodiment in which an operation (approval) of a clerk or the like is inserted before step S601 of the cutting process (FIG. 11) executed when it is determined to be interrupted.
  • the disconnect button may be a button (so-called hidden button) operated by a clerk who is not well known to the customer. Even if the disconnect button is displayed in an inoperable (operation invalid) mode (gray-down display, etc.) until it is determined to be interrupted, and the disconnect button is displayed as operable (operation enabled) when it is determined to be interrupted. good. The same applies to the other methods (methods 3 and 4) in which the disconnect button is displayed according to the judgment of the device.
  • the weighing device 20 may display a disconnect button based on a predetermined operation and disconnect the communication with the mobile terminal 60 in response to the operation of the disconnect button.
  • the disconnect button is a hidden button. That is, the method 2 is an embodiment in which the disconnection process (FIG. 11) is executed at an arbitrary timing (arbitrary timing determined by the clerk) at which the hidden button can be operated.
  • Communication may be disconnected from the mobile terminal 60 side.
  • the mobile terminal 60 may disconnect the communication with the weighing device 20 based on the operation.
  • the communication with the mobile terminal 60 may be disconnected in response to the operation of the disconnect button.
  • Method 3 When a notification to the effect of interruption is received from the weighing device 20 determined to be interrupted, the disconnect button may be displayed.
  • the operation of the disconnect button is operated on the mobile terminal 60 side, the fact that the disconnect button is operated (approval) is notified to the weighing device 20 side, and the weighing device 20 receiving the notification executes the cutting process. You may let me. That is, the method 3 is an embodiment in which the operation (approval) of the customer of the mobile terminal 60 is sandwiched between steps S611 and S612 in FIG.
  • the mobile terminal 60 itself may determine the interruption (for example, determine the interruption by managing the warning duration) and display the disconnect button.
  • the fact that the disconnect button is operated (request) is notified to the weighing device 20 side, and the weighing device 20 receiving the notification executes the cutting process. You may let me. That is, in FIG. 11, the weighing device 20 is the starting point of the operation (although the connection termination request is transmitted), but the method 4 is the mode in which the mobile terminal 60 is the starting point of the operation.
  • the measuring device 20 may request the disconnection without displaying the disconnect button (without the consent of the customer).
  • the mobile terminal 60 may display a disconnect button at all times during connection. That is, the method 5 is an embodiment in which the disconnection process (however, unlike FIG. 11, the mobile terminal 60 is the starting point) is executed at an arbitrary timing (arbitrary timing determined by the customer). The movement when the operation of the disconnect button is operated on the mobile terminal 60 side is the same as that of the method 4.
  • connection state S105, S21
  • an example of evaluating how far the measuring device 20 is from the communication partner (mobile terminal 60) based on the strength of the radio wave has been described. And how far away from the communication partner may be evaluated based on the direction of the radio wave.
  • Bluetooth specifications for example, Bluetooth 5.1 or later
  • the weighing device 20 may recognize the distance and direction of the communication partner and perform a comprehensive evaluation based on the distance and direction. That is, the weighing device 20 may derive different evaluations in consideration of the direction, for example, even if the recognized distances are about the same (even if the evaluations based on the distances alone are the same). .. P1 and P2 in FIG. 16A have the same distance from the settlement device, but have different directions, so they are evaluated differently.
  • each weighing device 20 stores a map (evaluation information) according to the installation position of its own device in the store.
  • the map may be stored in another device (a management device installed in the store, a server installed outside the store, etc.) to which the weighing device 20 can be referred, or among the plurality of measuring devices 20. Although it may be stored in one of the representatives, it will be described as being stored by each measuring device 20 for convenience.
  • evaluations according to directions, distances (or distances, directions), that is, coordinates are stored.
  • FIG. 16A schematically shows the floor of the store.
  • the left side of FIG. 16A is a display area where products sold by weight are displayed.
  • the lower right is the settlement device.
  • the upper right direction is the entrance / exit of the store.
  • three areas A, B, and C that do not overlap each other are set.
  • Area A is an area in the vicinity of the weighing device 20.
  • P1 is a point in the area.
  • Area B is an area on the display area side of the areas other than area A.
  • P2 is a point in the area.
  • Area C is an area excluding area A and is an area in the direction of the settlement device and the entrance / exit.
  • P3 is a point in area C.
  • the distance between the measuring device 20 and P2 is the same as the distance between the measuring device 20 and P3.
  • FIG. 16B is a map stored by the weighing device 20 shown in FIG. 16A. Areas A, B, and C are each defined by coordinates (omitted).
  • the evaluation of area A is "operation position". That is, as shown in FIG. 16A, the area A is in the vicinity of the weighing device 20, and the weighing device 20 can be operated if, for example, the communication partner (customer) is located at P1. Therefore, the evaluation of the area A is set as the "operation position”.
  • the evaluation of area B is "non-operation position (temporary)". That is, as shown in FIG. 16A, the area B is not in the vicinity of the weighing device 20, and if, for example, the communication partner (customer) is located at P2, the weighing device 20 cannot be operated.
  • Area B is on the display area side, and there is a high possibility that the weighing device 20 is temporarily left due to additional purchase of products or the like. Therefore, the evaluation of area B is set to "non-operation position (temporary)".
  • the evaluation of area C is "non-operation position (non-temporary)". That is, as shown in FIG. 16A, the area C is not in the vicinity of the weighing device 20, and if, for example, the communication partner (customer) is located at P3, the weighing device 20 cannot be operated. Area C is on the settlement device and the entrance / exit side, and it is unlikely that the weighing device 20 is temporarily left. Therefore, the evaluation of area C is set to "non-operation position (non-temporary)".
  • the weighing device 20 controls (controls to proceed from step S22 to the step S23) in the same manner as when the connection state is judged to be "good", and when the evaluation of the area B or the area C, the connection is made.
  • the weighing device 20 is controlled in the same manner as when the state is not determined to be “good” (control is performed so as to proceed from step S22 to step S24).
  • the time until it is determined to be interrupted may be different depending on the case of the non-operating position (temporary) (in the case of area B) and the case of the non-operating position (non-temporary) (in the case of area C).
  • non-operating position non-temporary
  • temporary the non-operating position
  • connection state "slightly defective” the case of the connection state "defective” shown in the embodiment as the case of only the distance. That is, it may be determined that the connection state "bad” is interrupted in a shorter time than the connection state "bad”.
  • connection state is judged to be "good” when the evaluation of the area B is performed in addition to the area A, as in the case where the connection state is judged to be "good”.
  • the weighing device 20 may be controlled and the weighing device 20 may be controlled only when the evaluation of the area C is performed, as in the case where the connection state is not determined to be “good”.
  • the weighing device 20 may execute a part of the functions of the weighing device 20.
  • the weighing device 20 weighs the placed product and subsequently calculates the selling price, but the calculation of the selling price may be performed by another device. That is, the weighing device 20 may transmit the weighing value obtained by weighing the placed product to another device and receive the selling price from the other device.
  • the other device calculates the selling price based on the measured value received from the measuring device 20 and the unit price information, but the other device itself holds the unit price information of each product and calculates the selling price.
  • the selling price may be calculated by inquiring the unit price of the product to another device without holding the unit price information of each product.
  • the weighing device 20 may transmit the value obtained by subtracting the tare portion from the weighed value to another device.
  • the weighing device 20 may simply control the display of the touch display 26 based on the control information transmitted from another device with respect to the display control of the screen. That is, the weighing device 20 transmits input information such as operation information for the touch display 26, weighing information based on the weighing of the weighing unit 25, and recognition information recognized by the scanner 24 to another device, and controls obtained from the other device. The display of the touch display 26 may be controlled based on the information. The other device executes various processes based on the information received from the measuring device 20 (input information to the measuring device 20), and transmits control information according to the processing result to the measuring device 20.
  • the weighing device 20 may receive information corresponding to the operation information for the touch display 26 from another device (mobile terminal). For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the mobile end
  • the terminal 60 displays a screen corresponding to a pricing screen, transmits operation information corresponding to the operation on the screen to the weighing device 20, and the weighing device 20 receives information received from the mobile terminal 60 (on the mobile terminal 60).
  • the process may be executed based on the operation information of.
  • FIG. 17 is another display example on the mobile terminal 60.
  • the mobile terminal 60 has a screen capable of accepting an operation in pricing after being connected to the weighing device 20 (a screen corresponding to the pricing screen displayed by the weighing device 20.
  • the value on the mobile terminal side It may be possible to display (referred to as a attached screen) and accept an operation in pricing from a customer via the mobile terminal side pricing screen.
  • the direct operation on the weighing device 20 may not be accepted. That is, the weighing device 20 may not be operated by a customer other than the original customer (the connected customer). As described above, when the weighing device 20 is connected to a mobile terminal 60, another mobile terminal 60 cannot be connected to the weighing device 20.
  • the mobile terminal 60 connected to the weighing device 20 may always display the priced screen on the mobile terminal side and can accept operations on the priced screen on the mobile terminal side as long as it is connected.
  • the mobile terminal 60 moves away from the vicinity of the weighing device 20 (a position where a customer who operates the price-setting screen on the mobile terminal side can place a product on the platform within a few steps) (for example, the weighing device).
  • the weighing device 20 or the mobile terminal 60 recognizes that the distance between the 20 and the mobile terminal 60 is equal to or greater than a predetermined distance
  • a warning on the priced screen on the mobile terminal side (warning that the meter is not in the vicinity of the measuring device 20 and weighing).
  • a warning to return to the device 20 etc.) may be given.
  • the warning may be given by voice or vibration in place of or in addition to the warning on the priced screen on the mobile terminal side.
  • the warning is canceled. If the mobile terminal 60 does not return to the vicinity within a predetermined time, or if the mobile terminal 60 moves further away, the priced screen on the mobile terminal side is deleted (disconnected and the screen before connection is displayed). do.
  • the operation on the priced screen on the mobile terminal side may be invalidated (non-accepted). That is, as the distance between the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 increases, "display the priced screen on the mobile terminal side in an operable manner" ⁇ display the priced screen on the mobile terminal side (operation disabled) " ⁇ " display the priced screen on the mobile terminal side (operation disabled) " ⁇ " mobile terminal side It may be controlled step by step in the order of "Clear pricing screen".
  • the control of the price-setting screen on the mobile terminal side described above may be performed based on the distance to the measuring device 20 alone, or may be performed based on the distance and direction from the measuring device 20.
  • the direct operation on the weighing device 20 may not be accepted, but the mobile terminal 60 displays the priced screen on the mobile terminal side. Even when it is displayed, it may be possible to accept a direct operation to the weighing device 20.
  • the specific (partial) operation of the weighing device 20 may be accepted (valid) (all other operations may be invalid).
  • a clerk call button for calling a clerk may be arranged on the weighing screen, and when the mobile terminal 60 displays the priced screen on the mobile terminal side, only the operation of the clerk call button may be accepted (cancel button). If (described later) is also arranged, the operation of the clerk call button and the operation of the cancel button can be accepted, and other operations (operations of product buttons, etc.) may be invalidated).
  • a cancel button is placed to cancel the process during work in process (for example, after the product is specified-label issuance), and when the mobile terminal 60 is displaying the priced screen on the mobile terminal side, only the operation of the cancel button can be accepted. (If the clerk call button is also arranged, the operation of the clerk call button and the operation of the cancel button may be accepted, and other operations may be invalidated). That is, for example, the operation of the product button or the like may be invalidated.
  • the weighing device 20 displays an interrupt button, and when the operation of the interrupt button is operated by another customer, another customer sends the weighing device 20 to the weighing device 20.
  • Direct operations operations other than the above-mentioned clerk call button and cancel button
  • the operation of the priced screen on the mobile terminal side may be invalidated while maintaining the connected state, and the operation of the priced screen on the mobile terminal side may be enabled after the processing by the other customer.
  • the weighing device 20 may display the initial screen. That is, another customer may operate the interrupt button and start the operation from the initial screen. For example, if it is a non-member, the non-member instruction display area 42 is operated (touched), and the weighing device 20 performs processing as shown in FIG.
  • the operation of the interrupt button corresponds to the above "specific operation", but the mode of displaying the initial screen after the operation of the interrupt button is all (almost all) after the initial screen.
  • the interrupt button may not be displayed when the connected mobile terminal 60 is in the vicinity of the weighing device 20, and the interrupt button may be displayed when the connected mobile terminal 60 is not in the vicinity of the weighing device 20. ..
  • the operations of other customers (all operations or operations other than the clerk call button and the cancel button) on the weighing device 20 are invalidated, and the original customer When not in the vicinity of the weighing device 20, other customers' operations (all or substantially all operations) of the weighing device 20 may be accepted.
  • the connected mobile terminal 60 When the connected mobile terminal 60 is in the vicinity of the weighing device 20 (when the original customer is in the vicinity of the weighing device 20), another customer ignores the original customer nearby and the interrupt button. It is unlikely that you will operate. That is, even if the weighing device 20 displays the interrupt button while the mobile terminal 60 is displaying the price-setting screen on the mobile terminal side, it is actually during connection that another customer operates the interrupt button. This is when the mobile terminal 60 does not exist in the vicinity of the weighing device 20. Therefore, the interrupt button may not be displayed when the connected mobile terminal 60 is in the vicinity of the weighing device 20, and the interrupt button may be displayed when the connected mobile terminal 60 is not in the vicinity of the measuring device 20. ..
  • the mobile terminal 60 When the mobile terminal 60 scans the bar code of the price tag 80 of the product sold by weight, the mobile terminal 60 notifies the connection with the weighing device 20 (notification that the connection with the weighing device 20 is required later, etc.). May be good. A notification may be given when the bar code of the price tag 80 of a product sold by weight for one item is scanned, and the notification may not be given for the second and subsequent items. Since there may be a store in which the weighing device 20 is installed and a store in which the weighing device 20 is not installed, the mobile terminal 60 may notify the store in the case where the weighing device 20 is installed.
  • the mobile terminal 60 refers to the store master (may be stored by the mobile terminal 60 itself or may be stored by another device) at the time of entering the store (grasped by the location information), and the weighing device is stored in the store. It may be determined in advance whether or not 20 is installed, or it may be determined whether or not the weighing device 20 is installed in the store when the barcode is scanned.
  • the mobile terminal 60 When the mobile terminal 60 first displays the screen 70 after entering the store, even if the number (number of users) of other mobile terminals 60 that also display the screen 70 in the store is acquired and notified. good. For example, when the mobile terminal 60 displays the screen 70 based on the operation area of the predetermined button (for example, the shopping start button) after entering the store, the number of the mobile terminals 60 may be notified when the predetermined button is operated. When there is a limit to the number of mobile terminals 60 that display the screen 70 in the same store, when the number is close to the limit, it may be notified that the number is close to the limit.
  • the mobile terminal 60 may acquire information about cash stored in the checkout device and notify a warning (near end, etc.). For example, a wireless LAN may be used to acquire the above information.
  • the device that executes the settlement process is referred to as a "settlement device", but if it has the same function, it is a settlement terminal, an accounting device (terminal), a payment device (terminal), and a POS device (terminal). ) Etc. may be used.
  • the first embodiment it is possible to provide an apparatus and a method suitable for the customer himself to weigh the goods sold by weight.
  • the weighing device includes a weighing means for weighing a product, a display means for displaying information based on the weighing result by the weighing means, and a connecting means for communicably connecting to a mobile terminal.
  • the display means displays the connection state with the mobile terminal and information that can identify the mobile terminal.
  • the customer himself / herself can suitably weigh the products sold by weight. That is, since the status of the weighing device (information that can identify the connection state and the mobile terminal) is known, the weighing device can be used depending on the situation. For example, the usage status of the measuring device can be properly recognized and used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another customer from erroneously operating the weighing device used by the customer, or the measuring device used by the other customer from being erroneously operated by the customer.
  • the measuring device further comprising a time measuring means, wherein the display means displays a time related to connection with the mobile terminal.
  • the time related to the connection can be confirmed. This makes it possible to recognize, for example, how long the connected (in use) state continues. Since the time is updated (counted up) from time to time, it is possible to recognize that the connection (use) is in progress. That is, it is possible to make the user more strongly aware that the device is being connected (in use).
  • the display means is characterized in that when the time related to the connection with the mobile terminal reaches a predetermined time, a button for disconnecting the communication with the mobile terminal is operably displayed (2). ) Is the weighing device.
  • the disconnect button can be suitably displayed according to the connection time.
  • the connection time for example, before the predetermined time and time, the communication with the customer is prevented from being unnecessarily disconnected, and after the predetermined time and time, the customer is processed in order to proceed with the processing of the other customer. You can disconnect the communication with.
  • a printing means for printing and issuing a label to be attached to a product is provided, and the printing means is characterized in that the label is issued by changing the printing mode according to the connection state with the mobile terminal.
  • the weighing device according to any one of (1) to (3).
  • a suitable label can be issued according to the connection state.
  • the printing means can issue a label printed with a code obtained by coding information based on the measurement result by the measuring means so that it can be read by another device, and when connected to the mobile terminal, the code.
  • the process can be suitably proceeded even when the device is not connected to the mobile terminal. That is, when the mobile terminal is not connected, the code on the label may be read by another device, so that the process can proceed easily and accurately.
  • Another aspect of the present invention is a sales system including a weighing device and a mobile terminal capable of communicating with the weighing device, wherein the weighing device includes a weighing means for weighing a product and the weighing means. Display means for displaying information based on the measurement result by
  • connection means for communicably connecting to a band terminal
  • the display means displays a connection state with the mobile terminal and information recognizable by the mobile terminal. It is a sales system.
  • the mobile terminal has a warning means for giving a warning to a user of the mobile terminal, and the warning means gives a warning related to connection with the measuring device (6). It is a sales system described in.
  • the second embodiment of the present invention is shown below.
  • FIG. 18 shows an outline of a store in which a weighing pricing device (an example of a weighing pricing device) in the sales system of the present embodiment is used.
  • a weighing pricing device an example of a weighing pricing device
  • FIG. 18 shows an outline of a store in which a weighing pricing device (an example of a weighing pricing device) in the sales system of the present embodiment is used.
  • a case where food is sold will be taken as an example.
  • a face-to-face method is used in which a store clerk performs an operation of weighing and pricing a product by the weighing and pricing device according to a customer's designation of the product. Taken.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 includes a weighing platform on which a product for measuring weight (may be mass) is placed.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 executes a pricing process for the weighed goods.
  • the checkout device is installed at a predetermined place away from the sales floor.
  • the number of weighing and pricing devices 210 installed in the store and the number of payment devices installed are not particularly limited.
  • the sales floor where the customer can put any product from the product shelf into the shopping cart is also arranged.
  • FIG. 19 shows a configuration example of the sales system according to the second embodiment.
  • the sales system includes a weighing and pricing device 210 (210-1, 210-2, 210-3), a settlement device 220 (220-1, 220-2), a management device 230, a mobile terminal 240, and a transaction management server 250.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 calculates the amount of money for each product based on the weight measured for the product placed on the scale and the weight unit price, and generates the product price information of the product including the calculated amount.
  • the product pricing information is transmitted to the mobile terminal 240 communicably connected to the weighing pricing device 210.
  • the customer instructs the clerk about the product to be purchased and the weight (or amount) to be purchased.
  • the clerk performs an operation of designating the product instructed by the customer as a registration target on the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the clerk measures the weight of the product to be registered (or the weight corresponding to the amount of money instructed by the customer) by the weighing and pricing device 10.
  • the clerk weighs the product by placing it on the scale.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 calculates the amount of the product based on the measured weight and the unit weight per unit weight (for example, 100 g) set for the product, and is designated as a registration target together with the amount of the product. Price the products. The customer instructs the clerk about the weight of each product he / she wants to purchase as described above, and the clerk measures the weight of the instructed product and prices the product. Each time the price of the product is confirmed, the weighing pricing device 210 transmits the product pricing information reflecting the confirmed price of the product to the mobile terminal 240 connected communicably.
  • the settlement device 220 uses the cart information (settlement information) acquired from the transaction management server 250 to execute the settlement process according to the operation of the customer.
  • the management device 230 is a higher-level device of the settlement device 220 in the store.
  • the management device 230 is communicably connected to the checkout device 220.
  • the management device 230 can manage the transaction record in the store by acquiring the record information of the settlement process in the store from the settlement device 220, for example. For example, the status of the settlement device 220 can be monitored, and if an abnormality occurs in the settlement device 220, a notification can be given.
  • the management device 230 may also be communicably connected to the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the management device 230 may store the product master information.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 can execute a process corresponding to the registration of the product by using the product master stored in the management device 230.
  • the mobile terminal 240 is a terminal device owned by the customer.
  • the mobile terminal 240 may be a smartphone, a tablet terminal, or the like owned by the customer.
  • Application software used by the customer for services related to shopping and the like is installed in the mobile terminal 240 corresponding to the sales system of the second embodiment.
  • the transaction management server 250 manages transactions in the sales system.
  • the transaction management server 250 receives the product registration information transmitted from the mobile terminal 240 via the network, and generates cart information for each transaction based on the received product registration information.
  • the cart information indicates the registration result of the product in the corresponding transaction.
  • the transaction management server 250 transmits to the settlement device 220 the cart information associated with the transaction identifier specified by the cart information request in response to the cart information request transmitted from the settlement device 220.
  • FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing a hardware configuration example of the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • 21A and 21B are perspective views showing an external example of the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • FIG. 21A is a view of the weighing and pricing device 210 viewed from the clerk side
  • FIG. 21B is a view of the weighing and pricing device 210 viewed from the customer side.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 includes a CPU 2101, a ROM 2102, a ROM 2103, a scanner 2104, a clerk display 2105, a customer display 2106, a hard disk 2107, a key operation unit 2108, a measuring unit 2109, a printing unit 2110, and an apparatus. It is provided with an interim communication unit 2111 and a short-range communication unit 2112. These are connected to each other via bus 2119.
  • the CPU 2101 executes various processes for realizing the function as the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the ROM 2102 stores various information. For example, the program executed by the CPU 2101 is stored.
  • the ROM 2102 stores information (screen information, message information, etc.) related to the display on the store clerk display 2105 and the customer display 2106.
  • the ROM 2102 stores a device number (device identifier) for identifying its own device.
  • the ROM 2102 may store information (print contents, print format information, etc.) related to printing by the printing unit 2110.
  • the ROM 2103 is used as a work area for the CPU 2101 to perform processing and calculation.
  • the scanner 2104 optically reads the coded information.
  • the scanner 2104 is installed at a position that is difficult for the customer to see.
  • the clerk display 2105 is arranged toward the clerk side.
  • the clerk display 2105 is configured as a touch panel, and accepts an operation by touching the displayed operation screen with an operating body such as a finger.
  • the customer display 2106 is arranged toward the customer side and displays for the customer.
  • the customer display 2106 may be configured as a touch panel so that it can be operated by the customer.
  • the hard disk 2107 stores various information required for the weighing and pricing device 210 as an auxiliary storage device of the CPU 2101.
  • the hard disk 2107 may store, for example, a product file or the like.
  • the hard disk 2107 may store a program for causing the CPU 2101 to execute a registration process or the like.
  • the hard disk 2107 may store various information generated by executing the program.
  • the hard disk 2107 may store information related to display by the store clerk display 2105 and customer display 2106, and information related to printing by the printing unit 2110.
  • SSD Solid State Drive
  • the key operation unit 2108 includes various operation keys (number key, cancel key, tare key, additional key, product number key, execution key, etc.) for receiving various operations from the clerk. ..
  • the measuring unit 2109 weighs the product or the like (the product and the tare containing the product) placed on the scale 2109a, and outputs data indicating the measured value to the CPU 2101.
  • the CPU 2101 that has acquired the measured value from the measuring unit 2109 subtracts a predetermined weight (weight of the tare) from the measured value to calculate the product placed on the scale 2109a.
  • the CPU 2101 temporarily stores the weight of the product calculated as described above in the ROM 2103, and displays it on the display (clerk display 2105, customer display 2106).
  • the printing unit 2110 prints (prints) on a recording medium and issues (outputs) from the issuing port (see FIG. 21A). For example, the printing unit 2110 can issue a label to be attached to a product.
  • the inter-device communication unit 2111 is provided in response to the case of communicating with another weighing and pricing device 210 via a predetermined communication network.
  • the communication network supported by the inter-device communication unit 2111 may be wired or wireless.
  • the inter-device communication unit 2111 may communicate with the management device 230.
  • the inter-device communication unit 2111 is also referred to as a transceiver.
  • the short-range communication unit 2112 communicates with the mobile terminal 240 by a predetermined short-range wireless communication method.
  • the short-range wireless communication method supported by the short-range communication unit 2112 may be, for example, Bluetooth.
  • the short-range communication unit 2112 is, for example, a Bluetooth transceiver.
  • FIG. 22 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the settlement device 220.
  • the checkout device 220 includes a scanner 2204, a customer display 2206, a change machine 2260, and an issue port 2210a.
  • the scanner 2204 reads the code information.
  • the code information that can be read by the scanner 2204 may be a bar code (one-dimensional code) or a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)).
  • the scanner 2204 is used to read the code information displayed on the mobile terminal 240.
  • Examples of the code information displayed on the mobile terminal 240 include code information for settlement, code information arranged on the membership card screen and indicating a member identifier and the like, code information including information as a coupon ticket, and the like.
  • the settlement device 220 may be capable of executing the product registration process in response to, for example, an operation by a clerk. In this case, the scanner 2204 may be able to read the code information as the product code.
  • the scanner 2204 is fixedly provided on the pedestal portion of the customer display 2206, but for example, it may be a handy scanner and may be hooked on a pedestal provided on the side surface of the housing.
  • the customer display 2206 displays information related to payment for the customer.
  • the customer display 2206 may be configured as a display device including a touch panel.
  • the change machine 2260 is an automatic change machine that accepts the input of banknotes and coins by customers, performs a deposit process, and discharges the banknotes and coins when the change, refund, or rejection is performed.
  • the change machine 2260 includes a bill management unit 261, a coin slot 264, a coin ejection port 265, and a reject port 266.
  • the coin slot 264, the coin ejection port 265, and the reject port 266 are included in the coin management unit.
  • the bill management unit 261 includes a bill insertion slot 262 and a bill discharge port 263.
  • the bill slot 262 is a slot for taking in bills inserted by customers.
  • the bill discharge port 263 is a port for discharging bills and rejected bills.
  • the bill insertion slot 262 and the bill discharge port 263 are configured in two stages. For example, in the bill management unit 261, the upper row is the bill insertion slot 262 and the lower row is the bill discharge port 263.
  • the coin slot 264 is a slot for taking in coins inserted by the customer.
  • the coin ejection port 265 is a port for ejecting coins as change, coins when the coin identification unit of the change machine 2260 fails to identify, and coins when the coin identification unit identifies them as counterfeit coins.
  • the reject port 266 is a port for ejecting coins when a cancel operation is performed after depositing.
  • the bill slot 262 and the coin slot 264 are deposit slots.
  • the bill discharge port 263, the coin discharge port 265, and the reject port 266 are the withdrawal ports.
  • the issuing port 2210a outputs various receipts from the receiving port of the receipt.
  • the change machine 2260 and the issuing port 2210a have the bill insertion port 262, the bill discharge port 263, the coin insertion port 264, the coin discharge port 265, the reject port 266, and the receipt discharge port facing the customer side. It is projected on the customer side of the counter stand. This arrangement reduces the risk of the customer's toes hitting the counter stand when the customer stands close to the change machine 2260.
  • the change machine 2260 and the issuing port 2210a are housed in an integrated housing, and this housing is projected from the customer side side surface of the counter stand.
  • FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the settlement device 220.
  • the settlement device 220 includes a CPU 2201, a ROM 2202, a RAM 2203, a scanner 2204, a customer display 2206, a hard disk 2207, a printing unit 2210, an inter-device communication unit 2211, and a change machine 2260. These are connected to each other via bus 2219. Since the device-to-device communication unit 2211 is a part provided for communication with the clerk identification tag in the third example of the second embodiment described later, it may be omitted in the second embodiment.
  • the CPU 2201 executes various processes for realizing the function as the settlement device 220.
  • ROM 2202 stores various information. For example, ROM 2202 stores a program executed by CPU 2201. The ROM 2202 stores information (screen information, message information, etc.) related to the display on the customer display 2206. The ROM 2202 stores a device number for identifying the own device. The ROM 2202 may store information (print contents, print format information, etc.) related to printing by the printing unit 2210. The scanner 2204 optically reads the coded information, and stores the read information in the RAM 2203.
  • the RAM 2203 is used as a work area for the CPU 2201 to perform processing and calculation.
  • the scanner 2204 optically reads the coded information.
  • the scanner 2204 can read information such as a membership number printed on a membership card as a barcode or the like.
  • the customer display 2206 is configured as a touch panel, displays information for the customer, and accepts an operation by the customer touching the screen.
  • the hard disk 2207 stores various information required for the settlement device 220 as an auxiliary storage device for the CPU 2201.
  • the hard disk 2207 may store a program for causing the CPU 2201 to execute a settlement process or the like.
  • the hard disk 2207 may store various information generated by executing the program.
  • the hard disk 2207 may store information related to display by the customer display 2206 and information related to printing by the printing unit 2210.
  • the printing unit 2210 prints a receipt or the like on paper, and discharges the receipt from the discharge port.
  • the inter-device communication unit 2211 communicates with, for example, another settlement device 220 or a management device 230.
  • the mobile terminal 240 includes a CPU 2401, a storage 2402, a RAM 2403, a network-compatible communication unit 2404, a short-range wireless-compatible communication unit 2405, a touch panel display 2406, an operation unit 2407, an imaging unit 2408, and a position information acquisition unit 2409.
  • the CPU 2401 realizes various processes in the mobile terminal 240 by executing a program.
  • the storage 2402 is an auxiliary storage device of the CPU 2401, and stores various data in addition to the program to be executed by the CPU 2401.
  • the RAM 2403 is the main storage device of the CPU 2401.
  • the network-compatible communication unit 2404 executes communication corresponding to the network via a telephone line or a wireless LAN.
  • the short-range wireless communication unit 2405 performs short-range wireless communication according to, for example, the Bluetooth standard. That is, the short-range wireless communication unit 2405 performs short-range wireless communication with the short-range communication unit 2112 in the weighing pricing device 210. This enables communication between the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the touch panel display 2406 is a display in which a touch panel is combined.
  • the operation unit 2407 is, for example, a keyboard that accepts operations from the user.
  • the imaging unit 2408 performs imaging.
  • the mobile terminal 240 has a code information scanning function using the image pickup unit 2408. That is, when the mobile terminal 240 recognizes that the captured image obtained by imaging by the imaging unit 2408 contains the code information as the code information scanning function, the mobile terminal 240 acquires the code information from the captured image.
  • the code information scanning function using the image pickup unit 2408 reads the code information attached to the product and the connection information code displayed by the weighing and pricing device 210 under the shopping application of the second embodiment. Used for reading.
  • the product to be registered is specified by the product code included in the code information.
  • identification of the product to be registered may be realized by, for example, a general object recognition process using the captured image obtained by imaging the product by the imaging unit 2408. In this case, as a result of the general object recognition process, one product may be specified, or a plurality of candidates may be presented. When presenting a plurality of candidates, the product to be registered may be specified by selecting one of the plurality of candidates presented by the customer.
  • the position information acquisition unit 2409 positions its own position and acquires position information indicating the positioned position.
  • the position information acquisition unit 2409 may be configured to include, for example, a positioning device corresponding to GPS (Global Positioning System).
  • the transaction management server 250 includes a CPU 501, a storage unit 502, a RAM 503, and a communication unit 504.
  • the CPU 501 realizes various processes on the transaction management server 250 by executing the program.
  • the storage unit 502 is an auxiliary storage device of the CPU 501, and stores various data in addition to the program to be executed by the CPU 501.
  • the RAM 503 is the main storage device of the CPU 501.
  • the communication unit 504 executes communication with the settlement device 220, the mobile terminal 240, and the like.
  • the transaction management server 250 may also be provided with a display, an operation unit, and the like so that the administrator can perform operations and the like.
  • the transaction management server 250 stores customer information as shown in FIG. 26, for example.
  • the customer information shown in FIG. 26 includes customer identification information, customer name, customer registration date, cancellation information, customer rank, number of points, and the like.
  • the customer identification information is identification information that uniquely identifies a customer.
  • the customer name is a customer's name, nickname, or the like.
  • the customer registration date is the date and time of customer registration.
  • the cancellation information is information regarding the cancellation of the registered product after registration.
  • the customer rank is a rank according to the purchase record of the customer.
  • the transaction management server 250 is used for shopping because, for example, the mobile terminal 240 uses the service provided by the transaction management server 250 from the outside (for example, a predetermined server that provides the entire application, the transaction management server 250) at the time of customer registration. Generate and store customer identification information (when downloading or installing an application). For example, at the time of customer registration, the transaction management server 250 acquires the information entered in the name field of the registration form (input form) using the mobile terminal 240 and stores it as the customer name. The transaction management server 250 acquires, for example, the current date and time at the time of customer registration and stores it as the customer registration date.
  • the transaction management server 250 stores a part or all of the customer information in another device (such as a file server accessible to the transaction management server 250) in place of or in addition to storing the customer information in the storage unit in the own device. You may remember.
  • another device such as a file server accessible to the transaction management server 250
  • the store information is obtained from the management device 230 of each store. That is, the transaction management server 250 stores the store information by receiving the store information directly from the management device 230 of each store or indirectly via another device.
  • the transaction management server 250 stores, for example, store information as shown in FIG. 27.
  • the store information shown in FIG. 27 includes store identification information, store name (branch name), store identification information 1, and store identification information 2.
  • the store identification information is identification information that uniquely identifies a store.
  • the store identification information shown in FIG. 27 is composed of a store (store name) or company code and a branch code.
  • the store name is the name of the store.
  • the store name shown in FIG. 27 is composed of a store (store name) or a company and a branch name.
  • the store identification information 1 is information on a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)) for specifying a store (a store where products are bought and sold) to be traded.
  • the store identification information 2 is store location information (GPS information) for identifying a store with which a transaction is made.
  • GPS information GPS information
  • the store identification information and the store identification information 1 are different, but the store identification information and the store identification information 1 may be the same.
  • the transaction management server 250 may acquire and store store information and the like from the outside (a server (not shown) of the headquarters that controls each store).
  • the transaction management server 250 stores a part or all of the store information in another device (such as a file server accessible to the transaction management server 250) in place of or in addition to storing the store information in the storage unit in the own device. You may remember.
  • the product information is obtained from the management device 230 or the like of each store. That is, the transaction management server 250 stores the product information by receiving the product information directly from the management device 230 of each store or indirectly via another device.
  • the transaction management server 250 may acquire and store product information from the outside (a server (not shown) of the headquarters that controls each store, etc.).
  • the transaction management server 250 stores a part or all of the store information in another device (such as a file server accessible to the transaction management server 250) in place of or in addition to storing the store information in the storage unit in the own device. You may remember.
  • Cart information is information for managing individual transactions.
  • the transaction management server 250 generates cart information at the start of a transaction.
  • the transaction management server 250 may update the cart information (every time the product is registered) according to the progress of the transaction (it may be understood that the product is registered by storing the product in the cart information). ).
  • the transaction management server 250 stores, for example, cart information as shown in FIG. 28.
  • the cart information shown in FIG. 28 includes cart identification information, transaction start date and time, transaction end date and time, customer identification information, registered product information, reserved product information, cancellation information, and the like.
  • the cart identification information is identification information that uniquely identifies a cart (transaction).
  • the cart identification information shown in FIG. 28 is composed of store identification information, a date, and a serial number (for example, a serial number for each store date).
  • the transaction start date and time is the transaction start date and time.
  • the transaction start date and time shown in FIG. 28 is the generation date and time of the cart information.
  • the transaction start date and time may be the registration date and time of one item of goods (the date and time when the registered product information (registered product 1) in FIG. 28 is stored). Both the generation date and time of the cart information and the registration date and time of the product of one item may be stored separately.
  • the transaction end date and time is the transaction end date and time.
  • the transaction start date and time shown in FIG. 28 is the settlement date and time.
  • the customer identification information is customer identification information that identifies the customer of the transaction. When the cart information is generated, the cart identification information, the transaction start date and time, and the customer identification information are generated, but other information (transaction end date and time, etc.) is not generated because it is before the actual transaction (product registration) starts.
  • the settlement date and time may be the settlement start date and time or the settlement end date and time. Both the settlement start date and time and the settlement end date and time may be stored separately.
  • the registered product information (total) is information that is updated every time a product is registered.
  • the registered product information (total) includes the number of products (number of products), the approximate subtotal amount (approximate subtotal amount before price calculation by the price determination logic), the subtotal amount (subtotal amount after price calculation by the price determination logic), and the like.
  • the registered product information (1) is the registration information of one product.
  • the registered product information (2) is the registration information of two products. In the example shown in FIG. 28, the illustrations of the registered product information (3) to the registered product information (5) are omitted.
  • the registered product information (N; N is an integer) includes a product code, a product name (product name), a price, and the like.
  • the registered product information (N) may include the registration date and time of the product of the N item. That is, the transaction management server 250 may store the registration date and time of the registered product as the registered product information.
  • the registration date and time of each product may also be used as a material for determining the necessity of applying a service such as a time service (service by the selling price determination logic E) and the effect after application.
  • the reserved product information (total) is information that is updated every time a reserved product (described later) is registered.
  • the reserved product information (total) includes the number of reserved products (number of products), the number of NON-FILE products among the reserved products, the number of read NG (unauthorized operation confirmation) items among the reserved products, and the like.
  • NON-FILE means that the barcode was successfully scanned at the store (although the product code could be read), but the product code was not stored in the product information, or the product code was successfully scanned at the store. However, it is a product whose product code is not stored in the product information.
  • the reading NG means that the product code scan failed at the store (the product code could not be read) or the product code scan failed at the store. That is, the reading NG is, for example, a time-out processing when it is possible to determine a case where the product is imaged for a certain period of time by the image recognition technology but the barcode recognition is not reached, or the time-out processed product. For example, if the barcode cannot be correctly acquired (recognized) due to wrinkles on the package, blurring or stains on the barcode printing, it is determined that the barcode is read NG. Even if an unauthorized operation of pretending to read the barcode and throwing it into the basket is detected, it is judged as reading NG.
  • the mobile terminal 240 includes a sensor (for example, a gyro sensor, an acceleration sensor, a distance sensor, etc.), and the mobile terminal 240 is tilting while reading a barcode (specifically, the mobile terminal 240 is tilted to read the barcode. It is possible to detect a situation in which an article (commodity) exists at a certain distance ahead of the mobile terminal 240).
  • the product is reserved (reading NG) as a timeout process.
  • the reserved product information (reserved product 1) is information on the reserved product of one item.
  • the reserved product information (reserved product 2) is information on two items of reserved products.
  • the reserved product information (reserved product 3) is information on the reserved products of three items.
  • the reserved product information (held product N; N is an integer) includes the reserved product type (information indicating whether the reserved product is NON-FILE or read NG) and image data (image data captured at the time of read NG). including.
  • the reserved product information (reserved product N) includes the reserved product type "1 (NON-FILE)" and image data.
  • the reserved product information (reserved product N) includes the reserved product type "2 (reading NG)" and image data.
  • the transaction management server 250 stores a part or all of the cart information in another device (such as a file server accessible to the transaction management server 250) in place of or in addition to storing the cart information in the storage unit in the own device. You may remember.
  • another device such as a file server accessible to the transaction management server 250
  • the mobile terminal 240 on which the shopping application operates first displays the activation screen on the touch panel display 2406 as shown in FIG. 29A.
  • a "store information” button, a “notification” button, and a “profitable information” button are arranged on the startup screen.
  • the display of the touch panel display 2406 transitions to the peripheral store guidance screen as shown in FIG. 29B.
  • the peripheral store guidance screen displays on the map the stores (available stores) where the shopping application can be used, which exist within a certain range based on the own position acquired by the location information acquisition unit 2409.
  • FIG. 29B an example is shown in which marks indicating three available stores are arranged on the map with reference to the current position of the mobile terminal 240.
  • the mobile terminal 240 is, for example, a store information server (not shown, transaction management server 250, etc.) that manages information about available stores (available store information) is shared as a store information server. ), Along with its own location information, it sends an available store search request. In response to the reception of the available store search request, the store information server searches for available stores located within a certain distance range based on the location information received together with the available store search request. The store information server transmits the searched available store information to the mobile terminal 240. The mobile terminal 240 uses the received information on available stores to display a peripheral store information screen.
  • a store information server not shown, transaction management server 250, etc.
  • the store information server searches for available stores located within a certain distance range based on the location information received together with the available store search request.
  • the store information server transmits the searched available store information to the mobile terminal 240.
  • the mobile terminal 240 uses the received information on available stores to display a peripheral store information screen.
  • the shopping application may have, for example, the function of a shopping list.
  • the customer can perform an operation of registering the product for which he / she wants to shop in the shopping list.
  • the mobile terminal 240 includes, for example, the information of the products registered in the shopping list in the available store search request.
  • the store information server includes a list of items of products sold at the store in the available store information for each store.
  • the store information server indicates the presence or absence of products registered in the shopping list for each available store information searched as being within a certain range from the position of the mobile terminal 240 in response to the reception of the available store search request.
  • the available store information is transmitted to the mobile terminal 240.
  • the mobile terminal 240 may display the available stores on the map so that the presence or absence of the products registered in the shopping list can be visually recognized.
  • the mark indicating the available stores is used with and without available stores with products registered in the shopping list.
  • the color coding and size may be changed according to the available stores.
  • the customer performs an operation of selecting a mark of an arbitrary store (for example, a tap operation on the mark) while the peripheral store information screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 29B.
  • a store information screen showing information on the selected store is displayed.
  • a "notification” button and a “profitable information” button are arranged on the startup screen of FIG. 29A. Also on the store information screen of FIG. 29C, a "notification” button and a “profitable information” button are arranged.
  • an advertisement screen that provides information on services such as discounts for customers who use the shopping application is displayed.
  • the display of these advertisement screens may be performed based on the advertisement information included in the available store information transmitted from the store information server.
  • the touch panel display 2406 transitions to the product registration screen (code scan screen) as shown in FIG. 30C.
  • the customer can perform the product registration operation using the mobile terminal 240 on which the product registration screen is displayed.
  • the customer takes out the product (the product to be purchased) that he / she intends to purchase from the product shelf.
  • the customer uses the code information of the code (bar code, but may be a two-dimensional code) attached to the product to be purchased, which is the image pickup unit 2408 of the mobile terminal 240 in the state where the product registration screen is displayed. Perform an operation to read by.
  • the code information read in this way is transmitted from the mobile terminal 240 to the transaction management server 250 as product registration information corresponding to one product.
  • the transaction management server 250 includes the received product registration information in the cart information (settlement information) corresponding to one transaction.
  • the product registration information based on the read code information may be stored in the mobile terminal 240.
  • the customer When the customer finishes the operation of registering all the products to be purchased, the customer performs a predetermined operation (product registration completion operation) for instructing the completion of the product registration to the mobile terminal 240.
  • product registration completion operation When the product registration completion operation is performed, the mobile terminal 240 may notify the transaction management server 250 of the completion of product registration.
  • the transaction management server 250 that has received the notification of the completion of product registration can manage the cart information of the corresponding transaction as if the product registration has been completed.
  • the settlement guidance screen is displayed on the touch panel display 2406 of the mobile terminal 240 as shown in FIG. 30D.
  • a message of guidance to ask the customer to go to the settlement device 220 for settlement and transaction code information indicating the transaction according to the product registration this time are displayed as, for example, a two-dimensional code. It is displayed.
  • the transaction code information includes a transaction identifier that uniquely indicates the transaction. This transaction identifier may be, for example, one issued by the transaction management server 250 in response to the mobile terminal 240 first transmitting the product registration information in the corresponding transaction, and notified to the mobile terminal 240.
  • the customer goes to the settlement device 220 and has the scanner 2204 of the settlement device 220 read the two-dimensional code displayed on the settlement guidance screen.
  • the settlement device 220 acquires the cart information corresponding to the transaction identifier indicated by the read two-dimensional code from the transaction management server 250.
  • the settlement device 220 uses the acquired cart information to execute the settlement process according to the operation of the customer.
  • the settlement device 220 is provided with one or more card readers corresponding to a predetermined card, for example, when a customer uses or uses cards such as a credit card, an electronic money card, and a point card to perform settlement. May be done.
  • the customer who has installed the shopping application on his / her own mobile terminal 240 can register the product by operating the own mobile terminal 240.
  • the settlement with the settlement device 220 is also performed by the operation of the customer. Since the product registration and settlement are performed by the customer in this way, in the second embodiment, it is not necessary for the clerk to perform the product registration operation, the settlement device operation, or the like.
  • Step S2101 The weighing and pricing device 210 determines whether or not a pricing operation for one commodity in one transaction has been performed.
  • a customer who wants to purchase a product sold by weight tells the clerk what product he / she wants to purchase and its weight.
  • the clerk takes out the reported product to be purchased from the display case.
  • the clerk inputs the item of the product to be purchased into the weighing pricing device 210, and then puts the product on the scale (weighing unit 2109).
  • Input of the item of the product to be purchased is performed as follows, for example. Keys (preset keys) corresponding to each of the products sold by weight are arranged on the clerk display 2105 (touch panel) of the weighing pricing device 210. The clerk operates the preset key corresponding to the product to be purchased from the preset keys. As a result, the item of the product corresponding to the operated preset key is input as the item of the product to be purchased.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 may determine that the pricing operation for one product has started in response to the input of the item of the product to be purchased.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 determines that the product registration corresponding to one transaction has been started in response to the start of the pricing operation of the first product in one transaction, and determines the transaction identifier corresponding to this transaction. Issue.
  • Step S2102 The weighing pricing device 210 executes the pricing process in response to the pricing operation being performed.
  • the pricing process is a product registration process executed by the weighing pricing device 210 to register the product to be purchased.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 accepts the input of the item of the product by the clerk and acquires the item of the product to be purchased.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 utilizes the unit weight and the weight measured by the weighing unit 2109 (for example, the weight measured when the product is placed on the measuring unit 2109 and then stabilized without fluctuation). , Calculate the price of the goods.
  • the measuring unit 2109 displays, for example, the item of the product to be purchased, the measured weight, the price, and the like on the display 2105 for the clerk and the display 2106 for the customer.
  • the clerk confirms the weight and the like with the customer, and when the customer's consent is obtained, the clerk performs an operation of instructing the confirmation of the price of the product to be purchased.
  • Step S2103 In the weighing pricing device 210, when the weighing result by the weighing unit 2109 is determined as described above, and the pricing is confirmed (corresponding to the determination of the weighing result) for the product to be purchased in 1 accordingly.
  • the connection information code is displayed on the customer display 2106.
  • the connection information code may be displayed as, for example, a two-dimensional code.
  • the connection information code is control information for connecting the mobile terminal 240 on which the shopping application operates to the weighing and pricing device 210 by, for example, Bluetooth.
  • the connection information code includes the legal entity issued in response to this transaction.
  • FIG. 32 shows an example of the connection information code screen displayed on the customer display 2106.
  • the figure shows an example of a mode in which the customer display 2106 has a vertically long display surface portion and the notation on the screen is in English.
  • connection information code screen On the connection information code screen, the connection information code by the two-dimensional code is displayed, and the image of the mobile terminal is displayed together with the arrow pointing to the two-dimensional code. As a result, the customer can intuitively grasp that the two-dimensional code should be read by the mobile terminal 240.
  • connection information code screen On the connection information code screen, pricing-related information (packet weight (Tare), weighed weight (Gross weight), weight unit price (Unit Price), price (Total Price), etc.) for the product to be priced is displayed. It is shown. That is, on the connection information code screen, the result of the pricing process (confirmed weighing result) for the product to be priced is shown. A message ("OK with this weight?") Is displayed asking the customer to confirm whether or not to register with the weighed weight.
  • the customer After confirming the contents of the pricing-related information displayed on the connection information code screen, the customer performs an operation of having the mobile terminal 240 read the connection information code as a two-dimensional code displayed on the connection information code screen. To be done.
  • a message, a pop-up window, an icon, or the like for notifying the clerk that the connection information code is displayed on the customer display 2106 may be displayed.
  • the display of the connection information code in step S2103 may be performed at the following timing.
  • connection information code may be displayed at the timing when the fluctuation amount of the measured value by the measuring unit 2109 for the product to be priced becomes a certain amount or less.
  • connection information code may be displayed at the timing when the measured value by the measuring unit 2109 for the product to be priced becomes stable and the measured value for price calculation is determined.
  • connection information code may be displayed at the timing when the weighing value for price calculation is fixed and the price is calculated.
  • connection information code may be displayed according to the operation.
  • the clerk may perform an operation of displaying the connection information code at an arbitrary timing, such as the timing of starting a transaction or the timing when the price of the product to be priced is fixed.
  • the operation for displaying the connection information code in this case may be, for example, a touch operation for a button instructing the display of the connection information code arranged on the screen displayed on the clerk display 2105.
  • the price of the product to be priced on the customer display 2106 and the display timing of the connection information code may be as follows.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 displays the price of the product on the customer display 2106 according to the timing when the price of the product to be priced is determined.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 may add and display the connection information code on the same screen together with the price of the product to be priced according to the operation of displaying the connection information code.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 does not display the price of the product at the timing when the price of the product to be priced is determined by weighing, and displays the connection information code after the price of the product to be priced is determined.
  • the price of the product to be priced and the connection information code may be displayed on the same screen according to the above.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 completes the pricing by the pricing process in step S2102 in response to the determination in step S2101 that the pricing operation has started, for example, because the item of the product to be purchased has been input.
  • the connection information code may be displayed at a timing prior to the above.
  • Such a modified example of the display timing mode of the connection information code may be similarly applied to the second example of the second embodiment described later to the fifth example of the second embodiment.
  • Step S2104 of FIG. 31 The weighing and pricing device 210 executes a connection process for establishing a connection in response to a connection request from the mobile terminal 240 that has read the connection information code. Once the connection is established, the weighing and pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 can communicate with each other.
  • Step S2104-1 The weighing and pricing device 210 is adapted to detect whether or not the connection has been established by the connection process of step S2104. When the weighing and pricing device 210 detects that the connection with the mobile terminal 240 has been established, it erases (ends) the display of the connection information code displayed in step S2103.
  • connection information code may be constantly displayed on the weighing and pricing device 210, or a plate or the like on which the connection information code is presented may be constantly installed in the vicinity of the weighing and pricing device 210. You can. However, in this case, for example, a customer who has nothing to do with the target transaction may cause the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code, resulting in a useless connection between the weighing and pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240. There is. Therefore, the weighing and pricing device 210 controls the start and end of the display of the connection information code and limits the opportunity for connection with the mobile terminal 240, whereby the weighing and pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal as described above are used. It is possible to avoid unnecessary connection with 240.
  • Step S2105 The weighing and pricing device 210 in a state of being connected to the mobile terminal 240 by the connection process of step S2104 performs the transaction identifier collation process. That is, the weighing pricing device 210 determines whether or not the transaction identifier issued in response to the current transaction matches the transaction identifier notified from the connection-destination mobile terminal 240.
  • connection information code may not include the transaction identifier. ..
  • the transaction identifier collation process of step S2105 and step S2203 described later may be omitted, and then the subsequent processes may be executed.
  • Step S2106 When it is determined by the transaction identifier matching process of step S2105 that the transaction identifiers match, the weighing pricing device 210 reflects the result of the pricing process for one product in step S2102 this time.
  • the pricing information (an example of registration processing information) is transmitted to the mobile terminal 240 of the connection destination.
  • Step S2107 When the product pricing information transmitted in step S2106 can be normally received by the mobile terminal 240, the reception confirmation notification is transmitted from the mobile terminal 240 to the weighing pricing device 210. The weighing and pricing device 210 receives the transmitted confirmation notification.
  • Step S2108 In response to the receipt confirmation notification being received, the weighing pricing device 210 causes the printing unit 2110 to print a label (single item label) corresponding to the product that has been priced in step S2102 this time. Then, let's issue a single item label.
  • FIG. 33 shows an example of a single item label.
  • Information such as a product name, a processing date, an expiration date, a weight unit price, a weight, and a price is printed on such a single product label.
  • On the single item label for example, information indicating the department or the like corresponding to the sales floor corresponding to the sales by weight may be printed.
  • a code containing at least a part of the information printed by characters may be printed on the single product label, but it has been registered so as not to be confused with the label for general customers. It is preferable to change the mode such as printing and label format. The clerk attaches the single item label issued in this way to the product targeted for this price.
  • Step S2109 of FIG. 31 When it is determined in step S2101 that the pricing operation for one product has not been performed, or after the process of step S2108 is executed, the weighing pricing device 210 makes one transaction. It is determined whether or not the pricing of all the products corresponding to is completed.
  • the clerk When the clerk confirms that the pricing has been completed for all the products specified by the customer in response to one transaction, the clerk performs an operation of declaring the completion of pricing corresponding to one transaction (price completion operation). Perform for 210. In response to the pricing completion operation, the weighing pricing device 210 determines that the pricing of all the commodities corresponding to one transaction has been completed.
  • the clerk may determine whether or not the pricing of all the commodities corresponding to one transaction has been completed.
  • an operation in which the clerk specifies the item of the product to be priced in one transaction in advance for example, an operation on the preset key displayed on the clerk display 2105 of the weighing pricing device 210 or each displayed product. It may be an operation on a tag device arranged toward a clerk in response to the above.
  • Preset keys are keys that are arranged on the screen corresponding to each product.
  • the tag device is a device that transmits product information about a corresponding product to the weighing and pricing device 210 by, for example, short-range wireless communication, in response to a touch operation.
  • Step S2110 When it is determined that the pricing of the product corresponding to one transaction is completed, the weighing pricing device 210 transmits the pricing completion notification to the mobile terminal 240 of the connection destination.
  • Step S211 The mobile terminal 240 that has received the pricing completion notification transmitted in step S2110 transmits the reception confirmation notification to the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the reception confirmation notification transmitted in step S2111 notifies that the pricing completion notification has been normally received.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 executes a process of disconnecting the communication connection with the conventional mobile terminal 240.
  • the display of the connection information code may be erased at the timing when the single item label is issued in step S2108 (the timing when the pricing of one product is completed) instead of the timing of step S2104-1.
  • the display of the connection information code may be erased at a timing corresponding to, for example, disconnection of communication with the mobile terminal 240 in step S2111.
  • Step S2201 The mobile terminal 240 determines whether or not the code has been read under the state where the product registration screen is displayed on the touch panel display 2406.
  • Step S2202 As described above, one product specified by the customer is priced by the weighing pricing device 210 according to the operation of the clerk, and when the pricing is confirmed, the customer display 2106 of the weighing pricing device 210 The connection information code is displayed in. Therefore, the customer operates the mobile terminal 240 in the state where the product registration screen is displayed, and causes the mobile terminal 240 to read the displayed connection information code. As a result, it is determined that the code has been read in step S2201.
  • the mobile terminal 240 Since the code read in this case is the connection information code, the mobile terminal 240 performs a process for communicably connecting to the measurement and pricing device 210 of the connection destination according to the connection procedure indicated by the connection information code. Execute with the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • Step S2203 The mobile terminal 240 connected to the weighing and pricing device 210 in step S2202 executes the transaction identifier matching process with the connected weighing and pricing device 210. At this time, the mobile terminal 240 transmits the transaction identifier included in the connection information code read corresponding to step S2201 to the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • connection information code does not include the transaction identifier
  • the transaction identifier matching process in step S2203 may be omitted together with step S2105, and the subsequent processes may be executed. ..
  • Step S2204 As described above, in the weighing pricing device 210, when it is determined by the transaction identifier matching process that the transaction identifiers match, the product pricing information is transmitted in step S2106.
  • the mobile terminal 240 receives the transmitted product pricing information.
  • the mobile terminal 240 displays the pricing result reflecting the contents of the received product pricing information on the touch panel display 2406 in response to the receipt of the product pricing information.
  • the pricing result displayed on the touch panel display 2406 is, for example, a product name, a price, a clarification that the product is a product to be priced, and the like.
  • the pricing result for example, any of the information indicated by the label of FIG. 33 can be displayed.
  • Step S2205 The mobile terminal 240 transmits a reception confirmation notice to the weighing pricing device 210, which notifies that the product pricing information has been received.
  • Step S2206 The mobile terminal 240 transmits the product registration information for one product, which reflects the content of the product pricing information received in step S2204, to the transaction management server 250.
  • the product registration information transmitted in this way includes a transaction identifier.
  • Step S2207 The mobile terminal 240 determines whether or not the weighing pricing device 210 has received the pricing completion notification transmitted in step S2110. If it is determined that the pricing completion notification is not received, the process is returned to step S2201.
  • Step S2208 When it is determined in step S2207 that the pricing completion notification has been received, the mobile terminal 240 sends a reception confirmation notification as a notification that the pricing completion notification has been received to the weighing pricing device 210. Send to.
  • Step S2209 The receipt of the pricing completion notification means that the product registration corresponding to one transaction at the sales floor corresponding to the sale by weight has been completed. Therefore, the mobile terminal 240 transmits a product registration completion notification, which is a notification that the product registration corresponding to one transaction has been completed, to the transaction management server 250.
  • Step S2301 The transaction management server 250 determines whether or not the product registration information transmitted by the mobile terminal 240 in step S2206 has been received in response to one transaction.
  • Step S2302 When the product registration information is received in step S2301, the transaction management server 250 registers (adds) the received product registration information to the cart information corresponding to the current transaction. As a result, the registration of one product (product type) in one transaction is confirmed.
  • step S2302 which is first executed in response to one transaction, the transaction management server 250 newly generates cart information, and then registers the received product registration information with respect to the generated cart information. ..
  • the cart identification information stored in the cart information can be generated by using the transaction identifier included in the product registration information transmitted in step S2206.
  • Step S2303 When it is determined in step S2301 that the product registration information is not received, or after executing the process of step S2302, the transaction management server 250 receives a product registration completion notification transmitted by the mobile terminal 240 in step S2209. Determine if it has been received. If it is determined that the product registration completion notification is not received, the process is returned to step S2301. When it is determined that the product registration completion notification has been received, the process related to the generation of cart information corresponding to one transaction shown in the figure is completed. When the process related to the generation of cart information corresponding to one transaction is completed, the registration of all products corresponding to one transaction is confirmed.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 of the second embodiment issues a single item label in response to the receipt confirmation notification regarding the product pricing information received from the mobile terminal 240 of the connection destination. Has been made.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 does not issue a single item label. At this time, for example, error notification is performed.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 only the single product label of the product for which the product pricing information has been received by the mobile terminal 240 is issued.
  • the clerk and the customer can confirm that the price information necessary for registering the product sold by weight is normally received by the mobile terminal 240 in response to the issuance of the single item label. That is, the clerk and the customer can accurately determine whether or not the product registration process on the mobile terminal 240 has been normally executed.
  • the first example of the second embodiment mentioned above is an example in which a customer who intends to purchase a product at a sales floor where a weighing pricing device 210 is arranged receives a product registration using a mobile terminal 240. ing.
  • the store may be operated so as to be able to accommodate both customers who shop by registering products using the mobile terminal 240 and customers who shop without using the mobile terminal 240.
  • a POS register operated by a clerk is arranged at the store, and the customer selects from the product shelves. Bring the removed product to the POS register.
  • the clerk who operates the POS register may register the product brought by the customer and settle the payment.
  • a registration device that registers products according to the operation of a clerk may be arranged in the store.
  • the customer brings the products selected from the product shelves to the registration device.
  • the clerk who operates the registration device performs an operation of registering the product brought by the customer.
  • the settlement information reflecting the result of the product registration process by the registration device is acquired by the settlement device 220 according to a predetermined mode.
  • the settlement information may be transmitted directly from the registration device or via the host device to the settlement device 220.
  • a checkout ticket (registered trademark) is issued by a registration device, and the customer causes the checkout device 220 to read the code information printed on the checkout ticket, so that the checkout device 220 corresponds to the transaction identifier indicated by the code information.
  • the attached settlement information may be acquired from a registration device, a higher-level device, or the like.
  • the code information printed on the checkout ticket may include the settlement information.
  • the customer may operate the settlement device 220 that has acquired the settlement information to perform the settlement.
  • a full self POS register may be placed in the store.
  • the customer may register the products he / she brought from the product shelves in the full-self POS register and perform the operation of payment.
  • the customer who makes a purchase using the mobile terminal 240 and the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 are not used. It is configured so that the following responses can be made according to the customers who shop.
  • the flowchart of FIG. 34 shows an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing and pricing device 210 of the second embodiment in response to pricing in one transaction.
  • the processing of the mobile terminal 240 and the transaction management server 250 corresponding to the processing of the weighing and pricing device 210 may be the same as in FIG. 31.
  • Step S1101 The weighing and pricing device 210 first executes a product identification process.
  • the product identification process is a process for specifying whether the product to be priced is a type of a product sold by weight or a fixed-price product.
  • the type indicated in the product master of the input product item corresponds to either a weight-selling product or a fixed-price product. You just have to decide if you want to.
  • the operation of inputting the item of the product performed by the clerk in the product identification process corresponds to the designation of the product to be registered. That is, the weighing and pricing device 210 designates the product to be registered according to the operation for inputting the item of the product performed by the clerk.
  • the product identification process in step S1101 may include a process of acquiring information about the product name and the image of the product to be priced.
  • the product identification process in step S1101 may include a process of acquiring a price such as an amount of money per unit weight (weight unit price) of a product to be priced or a number of products to be priced per unit weight.
  • the product identification process in step S1101 may be performed in response to the preset keys displayed on the clerk display 2105 of the weighing and pricing device 210 being operated by the clerk.
  • the shelves may be touched by a clerk or a customer on a shelf tag having a wireless function, which is arranged corresponding to each product displayed in the showcase. It may be performed in response to the receipt of the product information transmitted from the tag by the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • Step S1102 The weighing and pricing device 210 determines whether the product to be priced is a merchandise sold by weight or a fixed-price product as a result of the product identification process in step S1101.
  • Step S1103 When it is determined in step S1102 that the product is sold by weight, the weighing pricing device 210 executes the weighing corresponding pricing process.
  • the weighing corresponding pricing process may be, for example, according to step S102 in FIG.
  • Step S1104 When it is determined in step S1102 that the product is a fixed-price product, the weighing pricing device 210 executes a quantity-corresponding pricing process. That is, in this case, the clerk inputs the number of fixed-price products to be registered into the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the number input by the clerk may be performed by, for example, the operation of the number. Alternatively, the input of the number by the clerk may be an operation (work) of placing the products one by one on the scale 2109a.
  • the weight measured by the weighing unit 2109 gradually changes by an increase amount of a certain amount or more as the products are placed on the weighing platform 2109a one by one. The number of times is counted as the number of products. Then, the weighing pricing device 210 calculates the price of the product by using the input quantity and the weight unit price set for the item of the product to be registered.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 displays, for example, the item, quantity, price, etc. of the product to be purchased on the clerk display 2105 and the customer display 2106.
  • the clerk confirms the number of items and the like with the customer, and when the customer's consent is obtained, the clerk performs an operation of instructing the confirmation of the price of the product to be purchased.
  • Step S1105 After the processing of step S1103 or step S1104, the weighing pricing device 210 sets the connection information code on the customer display 2106 in response to the determination of the pricing for the product to be purchased in 1 as described above. Display it.
  • Step S1106 In the second embodiment, not only the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 but also the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 receives the pricing by the weighing pricing device 210. In this case, the customer using the mobile terminal 240 performs an operation of causing the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code displayed on the customer display 2106 in step S1105. On the other hand, a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 may order the next product or wait for the product to be received from the clerk without performing the operation of connecting the mobile terminal 240 to the weighing pricing device 210 in a communicable manner. do.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the display of the connection information code is started in step S1105.
  • the predetermined time here may be set in consideration of the standard time required from the display of the connection information code to the completion of the operation for the customer to read the connection information code by the mobile terminal 240.
  • Step S1107 The weighing and pricing device 210 further determines whether or not the connection process has been started while it is determined in step S1106 that the predetermined time has not elapsed.
  • the customer corresponding to this transaction is a customer who uses the mobile terminal 240
  • the customer performs an operation of causing the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code displayed in step S1105.
  • the mobile terminal 240 that has read the connection information code makes a connection request to the weighing and pricing device 210 (step S2202 in FIG. 31), and establishes a connection between the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • Connection processing is started.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 starts the connection process in response to the connection request from the mobile terminal 240 in this way, it is determined in step S1107 that the connection process has started.
  • step S1107 If it is determined in step S1107 that the connection process is not started, the process is returned to step S1106. In this way, the weighing and pricing device 210 determines whether or not the connection process is started within a predetermined time in the state where the connection information code is displayed on the customer display 2106 in step S1105.
  • Step S1108 When it is determined in step S1106 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the weighing pricing device 210 causes the clerk display 2105 to display a connection necessity confirmation screen.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 issues a single item label on which the code information is printed, assuming that the corresponding customer is a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240. You may be made to do so. However, for example, a customer who intends to use the mobile terminal 240 forgets to perform an operation to read the connection information code by the mobile terminal 240 due to being distracted by other things, or the handling of the mobile terminal 240. There is a possibility that a predetermined time will elapse due to the time and effort required.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 of the second embodiment does not immediately issue a label when a predetermined time elapses after the connection information code is displayed on the customer display 2106, but a connection necessity confirmation screen. Is displayed to ask the clerk to confirm whether or not the customer does not use the mobile terminal 240.
  • FIG. 35 shows an example of a connection necessity confirmation screen.
  • the connection necessity confirmation screen may be, for example, in the form of a pop-up window, and may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the screen displayed on the clerk side display 26 until immediately before the label issuing operation is performed.
  • connection information code display button BT1 is a button to be operated when it is confirmed that the customer is using the mobile terminal 40 and the clerk determines that the connection should be made with the mobile terminal 240. Since it was confirmed that the label issuing button BT2 is not a customer who uses the mobile terminal 240, it is a button to be operated to issue a single item label when the clerk decides that the label may be issued as it is. ..
  • connection necessity confirmation screen When the connection necessity confirmation screen is displayed, the clerk is asked to confirm whether or not the customer is using the mobile terminal 240, depending on the state of the customer or by inquiring to the customer.
  • connection information code is first displayed on the customer display 2106 by step S1105 in response to the pricing being confirmed in step S1103 or step S1104.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 omits the processing of, for example, steps S1105 and S1106, and responds to the fact that the pricing is confirmed in step S1103 or step S1104, and the connection necessity confirmation screen corresponding to step S1108. May be displayed. That is, in this case, the connection necessity confirmation screen is first displayed according to the confirmation of the pricing, and it is determined whether or not the clerk is a customer who uses the mobile terminal 240, and the connection information code. Is to be displayed or a label is issued. In such a configuration, the clerk can promptly issue a label when, for example, it can be determined that the customer clearly does not use the mobile terminal 240.
  • Step S1109 of FIG. 34 The weighing and pricing device 210 determines whether or not it has been confirmed that the connection is unnecessary in the state where the connection necessity confirmation screen is displayed in step S1108.
  • connection information code display button BT1 When it is confirmed that the customer is using the mobile terminal 240, the clerk operates the connection information code display button BT1. When the connection information code display button BT1 is operated, the weighing and pricing device 210 determines that the confirmation that the connection is necessary has been obtained. In this case, the connection necessity confirmation screen is deleted, and then the process is returned to step S1106. As a result, the display of the connection information code of the customer display 2106 started in step S1105 is continued.
  • connection information code displayed on the customer display 2106 is erased in response to the label issuing operation, the process is returned to step S1105 and the connection is made on the customer display 2106.
  • the information code may be displayed again.
  • Step S1110 When it is confirmed that the customer is not a customer using the mobile terminal 240, the clerk operates the label issuing button BT2 on the connection necessity confirmation screen. When the label issuing button BT2 is operated, the weighing and pricing device 210 determines that the confirmation that the connection is unnecessary has been obtained.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 issues a single item label reflecting the result of the pricing process of the product to be registered this time in response to the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240.
  • the clerk attaches the single item label issued in this way to the product targeted for this price.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 When the label issuing button BT2 is operated in this way, the weighing and pricing device 210 does not need to be connected to the mobile terminal 240. Therefore, the weighing and pricing device 10 may be configured to erase the connection information code displayed in step S1105 at the timing when the label issuing button BT2 is operated.
  • the result of the pricing process is printed in characters and the code information is printed.
  • the code information of the single item label corresponding to the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 is read by a device capable of product registration processing such as a POS register operated by a clerk, a registration device, and a full-self POS register. Contains the content that can be used to execute the product registration process.
  • Such code information may include, for example, a product code, weight or quantity, unit price (weight unit price or unit price per predetermined quantity), price, and the like.
  • the code information of the single item label may also be readable by the mobile terminal 240. Even for a customer who uses the mobile terminal 240, there is a possibility that, for example, a clerk may cause a single item label on which the code information is printed to be issued due to a mistake. In this case, the weighing pricing device 210 does not transmit the product pricing information to the mobile terminal 240. Even when such a situation occurs, the mobile terminal 240 can acquire the product price information by reading the code information of the single item label by the mobile terminal 240.
  • the mobile terminal 240 can read the product pricing information via communication with the weighing pricing device 210 without having the mobile terminal 240 read the code information printed on the single item label. It is made available.
  • Step S1111 The weighing and pricing device 210 executes the connection process started in response to step S1107 to establish a connection with the mobile terminal 240.
  • Step S1111-1 When the weighing and pricing device 210 detects that the connection has been established by the connection process in step S1111, the display of the connection information code displayed in step S1105 is erased.
  • steps S1112 to S1116 are the same as that of steps S105 to S109 of FIG.
  • a single product label is issued according to the label issuing operation.
  • the label issuing operation in this case may be, for example, an operation for a predetermined key arranged in the key operation unit 2108, or an operation for a predetermined key arranged on the operation screen displayed on the clerk display 2105. You may. No code information is printed on the single label issued.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 may display a screen (for example, a pop-up window) in which the label issuing operation is performed in response to the reception of the reception confirmation notification from the mobile terminal 240 in step S1114.
  • the issue confirmation screen for confirming the issuance of the single item label may be displayed on the clerk display 2105.
  • FIG. 36 shows an example of the issuance confirmation screen.
  • a message notifying that a single item label is issued in response to the completion of transmission of the product pricing information transmitted in step S1113 is displayed, and a confirmation button BT3 is arranged.
  • the clerk operates the confirmation button BT3 arranged on the displayed issuance confirmation screen to cause the weighing and pricing device 210 to issue a single item label.
  • the single item label may be issued after receiving the notification of the completion of receiving the product price information from the mobile terminal.
  • Step S1117 of FIG. 34 When it is determined in step S1116 that the pricing of the product corresponding to one transaction is completed, whether or not the weighing pricing device 210 is currently connected to the mobile terminal 240. To judge. If it is determined that the mobile terminal 240 is not connected to the mobile terminal 240, the weighing and pricing device 210 may skip the process of step S1119 and end the process.
  • step S1117 when it is determined in step S1117 that the devices are connected, the weighing and pricing device 210 executes the processes of steps S1118 and S1119.
  • the processing of steps S1118 and S1119 is the same as that of steps S110 and S111 of FIG.
  • the display of the connection information code may be erased, for example, at the timing when the single item label is issued in step S1115, instead of the timing of step S111-1.
  • the display of the connection information code may be erased at a timing corresponding to, for example, disconnection of communication with the mobile terminal 240 in step S1119.
  • the single item label on which the code information is printed is issued to the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240, and the code information is not printed to the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240. It is made to issue a single item label. Thereby, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the priced product is a customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 or a customer who does not use it, depending on the presence or absence of the code information on the single item label. As a result, it becomes possible to efficiently carry out transactions when selling products that are priced by the weighing and pricing device 210 in response to both customers who use the mobile terminal 240 and customers who do not use it.
  • the clerk operates according to the same procedure for the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 and the customer who does not use it. Specifically, the clerk performs a pricing operation for causing the weighing pricing device 210 to execute a pricing process corresponding to either step S1103 or step S1104, and then corresponds to step S1115 or step S1110. Then, the operation of instructing the issuance of a single item label may be performed. That is, the clerk performs a pricing operation as an operation to be performed regardless of whether the customer uses the mobile terminal 240 or the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240, and then instructs the issuance of a single item label.
  • the procedure is the same, such as performing an operation. Therefore, the clerk is less likely to be confused about the operation when dealing with either the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 or the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240. This makes it possible to carry out transactions more efficiently.
  • the label issuing operation corresponding to the single item label on which the code information is printed is an operation for the label issuing button BT2 arranged on the connection necessity confirmation screen, but the code information in step S1115 is not printed, for example.
  • the operation may be the same as when issuing a single item label.
  • connection information code is displayed in step S1105 after the weighing pricing process in step S1103 or step S1104 is completed and the pricing is confirmed.
  • the display of the connection information code is performed until the product registration information is registered in the cart information (that is, the product registration is confirmed) in response to the transmission of the product pricing information, for example, in step S1113. You may be made to be.
  • the display of the connection information code may be performed at the same time as the product identification process is executed in step S1102.
  • the connection information code is displayed for each product so that the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 are connected for each product in the registration mode. ..
  • the connection between the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 may be made once corresponding to a plurality of products to be registered in one transaction.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 may display the connection information code corresponding to one transaction at the stage when the operation corresponding to the completion of the pricing of one transaction is performed.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 may be configured to transmit the product pricing information of all the products registered in this one transaction to the mobile terminal 240 of the connection destination.
  • steps S1108 and S1109 may be omitted. That is, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of displaying the connection information code in step S1106, the code information is printed as it is without displaying the connection necessity confirmation screen as a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240. It may be made to issue a single item label. In this case, a single item label on which the code information is printed may be issued even if the label issuing operation is not performed, with the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of displaying the connection information code as a trigger.
  • connection information code may be deleted at the timing when the label is issued after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of displaying the connection information code.
  • the code is issued even if the label issuance operation is not performed with the receipt confirmation notification being received in step S1114 as a trigger.
  • a single label may be issued with no information printed on it.
  • steps S1108 and S1109 are omitted, and in step S1106, instead of determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed, a single product label on which code information is printed is printed. It may be determined whether or not a label issuing operation for instructing the issuance of is performed.
  • step S1105 the clerk confirms whether or not the customer intends to use the mobile terminal 240 depending on the state of the customer or by inquiring the customer. Then, when it is confirmed that the customer does not intend to use the mobile terminal 240, a label issuing operation is performed. As a result, a single item label on which the code information is not printed is issued in step S1110.
  • step S1111 may be executed according to the customer having the mobile terminal 240 read the connection information code.
  • the connection necessity confirmation screen may have a mode in which the label issuing button BT2 is arranged instead of the connection information code display button BT1.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 displays the connection information code on the customer display 2106 and displays the connection necessity confirmation screen on the clerk display 2105 at a predetermined timing after the price of the product to be registered is determined. Display it.
  • the customer uses the mobile terminal 240, the customer causes the mobile terminal 240 to read the displayed connection information code to connect the communication between the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 may erase the connection necessity confirmation screen and the connection information code according to the establishment of communication.
  • the clerk operates the label issuing button BT2 arranged on the connection necessity confirmation screen.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 issues a single item label reflecting the result of the pricing process of the product to be registered.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 may erase the connection necessity confirmation screen and the connection information code in response to the label issuing button BT2 being issued.
  • step S1108 the operation corresponding to the connection necessity confirmation screen displayed in step S1108 is performed, after the single item label on which the code information is printed is issued, the customer corresponding to this transaction It may be confirmed again that the customer is using the mobile terminal 240.
  • the clerk performs an operation to re-price the same product, and then asks the customer to connect the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing pricing device 210 so as to be communicable. Registration should be done.
  • the clerk will repeat the operation procedure according to the pricing for the same product twice, so that the transaction can proceed efficiently. It may be an obstacle.
  • a weighing operation for weighing a product is required, an operation for inputting a tare number or an operation for selecting a tare from a tare preset key is required.
  • the product is weighed after performing the tare operation, so if the price is re-priced, for example, the product will be taken out of the container and then weighed again. It also takes a lot of wasted man-hours.
  • product registration corresponding to the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 can be performed without re-price. It is composed of.
  • FIG. 37 shows an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing and pricing device 210 of the second embodiment in response to pricing in one transaction.
  • the steps that are the same as those in FIG. 34 are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • Step S1210 After issuing the single item label on which the code information is printed in step S1110, the weighing pricing device 210 executes the following processing. That is, has the weighing pricing device 210 performed the label reissue instruction operation until the operation of inputting the item for the next product to be priced or the operation of completing the pricing is performed? Judge whether or not.
  • the label reissue instruction operation may be, for example, an operation on a button arranged at a predetermined position on the clerk display 2105.
  • a dialog window for confirming the label reissue instruction operation is displayed on the clerk display 2105, and then a predetermined button arranged in the dialog window is displayed.
  • the label reissue instruction operation may be performed by the operation.
  • Step S1211 In response to the label reissue instruction operation, the weighing and pricing device 210 is in a state where code information can be input. Therefore, the clerk performs an operation of having the scanner 2104 read the code information of the single item label issued in step S1110. The weighing and pricing device 210 acquires the code information read by the scanner 2104. The single item label from which the code information has been read is collected by the clerk.
  • the clerk may be made to perform an operation (number of units) for inputting a numerical value corresponding to the code information instead of the operation of reading the code information by the scanner 2104.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 may guide the clerk to perform an operation of reading the code information of the issued single item label in response to the label reissue instruction operation. Such guidance may be performed by display on the clerk display 2105, audio output, or the like.
  • FIG. 38 shows an example of a code information reading guide screen displayed on the clerk display 2105 as a guide for performing an operation for inputting the code information of the single item label.
  • a message is displayed to the clerk to guide the operation of inputting the code information printed on the single item label (scanning by the scanner 2104 or the number of units), and the confirmation button BT3 is arranged. There is. The clerk operates the confirmation button BT3 and then inputs the code information printed on the single item label.
  • Step S1222 The weighing and pricing device 210 causes the connection information code to be displayed on the customer display 2106. After the process of step S1222, the process shifts to step S1111.
  • the customer is made to perform an operation of having his / her mobile terminal 240 read the connection information code displayed in step S1222.
  • the mobile terminal 240 executes a connection process for communicably connecting to the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the weighing and pricing device 10 executes the processes after steps S1111 to S1115. That is, the product corresponding to the single product label on which the code information is printed is registered in the cart information on the transaction management server 250 by being transmitted again as the product pricing information in step S1113. That is, it is treated as a registered product in a transaction using the mobile terminal 240.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 reissues the single item label including the code information read in step S1211, and the product pricing information including the transaction number. May be transmitted to the mobile terminal 240.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 obtains the weight unit price of the item (for example, from the item master). Alternatively, the store clerk may input the weight), and after calculating the weight from the amount of money included in the code information read in step S1211, the single item label may be reissued.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 may transmit at least the information on the product number and the amount of the corresponding product to the mobile terminal 240.
  • the label issuance history may be stored in a predetermined device in the sales system of the second embodiment.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 searches for the corresponding label issuance history from the stored label issuance history by using the predetermined information included in the code information read in step S1211, for example, as a search key.
  • the label issuance history may be transmitted as product pricing information.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 is configured to issue a single item label corresponding to one item each time the price of one item is confirmed in one transaction. rice field.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 of the second embodiment is printed with a content indicating the total amount of the priced goods in one transaction in response to the completion of the pricing in one transaction. Issue an additional label.
  • FIG. 39 shows an example of one aspect of the addition label. As shown in FIG. 39, the names of the three products whose prices have been confirmed in one transaction, the prices of each product, the total price of each product, and the like are printed.
  • Code information (for example, a barcode) is printed on the addition label.
  • the information printed on the bar code of the addition label in the second embodiment is not particularly limited as long as it is information that can be acquired by the weighing and pricing device 210 in response to the pricing process of the goods in one transaction.
  • the code information of the addition label may indicate, for example, information on the department code corresponding to the sales floor where the weighing pricing device 210 is arranged and the total price of the product.
  • the code information of the addition label may include the transaction identifier and the information for each product whose price has been confirmed in one transaction.
  • the transaction record is called and corrected by having the settlement device 220 or the like read the code information of the addition label. Can be done. Inspection of products sold by weight in one transaction is also possible by having the settlement device 220 or the like read the code information of the addition label.
  • step S108 in FIG. 31 may be omitted. Then, after it is determined in step S109 that the pricing of the product corresponding to one transaction has been completed, a step of issuing an addition label is added.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 may be configured to issue a single item label each time the price of a product is confirmed, and to issue an additional label when the price of one transaction is completed.
  • the code information of the addition label includes the transaction identifier and the information for each product whose price has been confirmed in one transaction. In this case, printing of the code information may be omitted for the single product label.
  • step S1110 and S1115 are omitted. Then, after it is determined in step S1117 that the pricing of the product corresponding to one transaction has been completed, a step of issuing an addition label is added.
  • the addition label with the code information printed is issued, and if it is not connected, the addition label is issued.
  • An additional label may be issued in which the code information is not printed.
  • FIG. 40 shows a configuration example of the sales system of the second embodiment.
  • the same parts as those in FIG. 19 are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • a measurement sales management server 60 is further provided.
  • the weighing and sales management server 60 is communicably connected to each of the weighing and pricing devices 210.
  • the mass sales management server 60 is communicably connected to the transaction management server 250.
  • the weighing and sales management server 60 manages product pricing information that reflects the result of the pricing process executed by the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the mass sales management server 60 may be configured to include a CPU, a storage unit, a RAM, and a communication unit.
  • Step S1001 The weighing and pricing device 210 executes a pricing process corresponding to one product in response to the product pricing operation of the clerk.
  • Step S1002 When the price of the product is confirmed in step S1001, the weighing and pricing device 210 transmits the product pricing information indicating the result of the price processing of the confirmed product to the weighing and sales management server 60.
  • the transmitted product pricing information includes a product pricing information identifier that uniquely identifies the product pricing information.
  • Step S1003 When the weighing and sales management server 60 receives the product pricing information transmitted in step S1002, it stores the product registration information reflecting the contents of the received product pricing information.
  • the stored product registration information is associated with the product pricing information identifier of the received product pricing information.
  • Step S1004 In response to the execution of the pricing process according to step S1001, the weighing pricing device 210 transmits the product pricing information in step S1002 and displays the connection information code on the customer display 2106.
  • the connection information code displayed here includes control information for the mobile terminal 240 to connect to the transaction management server 250 in a communicable manner.
  • the connection information code includes a product pricing information identifier that uniquely identifies the product pricing information transmitted in step S1002.
  • Step S1005 The mobile terminal 240 displays the product registration screen and is in a state where the code can be read. Therefore, the customer operates the mobile terminal 240 to have the mobile terminal 240 read the connection information code displayed on the customer display 2106.
  • Step S1006 The mobile terminal 240 executes a connection process with the transaction management server 250 according to a connection procedure based on the control information included in the connection information code read in step S1005.
  • Step S1007 When the connection with the transaction management server 250 is established by the connection process of step S1006, the mobile terminal 240 transfers the product pricing information identifier included in the connection information read in step S1005 to the transaction management server 250. Send to.
  • Step S1008 The transaction management server 250 that has received the product pricing information identifier in step S1007 transmits a product registration information request including the received product pricing information identifier to the measurement sales management server 60.
  • Step S1009 In response to receiving the product registration information request, the weighing and sales management server 60 includes the received product registration information request from the product registration information stored by itself and the product pricing information identifier. Search for the product registration information associated with. The measurement sales management server 60 transmits the searched product registration information to the transaction management server 250.
  • Step S1010 The transaction management server 250 registers the received product registration information in the cart information.
  • Step S1011 Since the product registration information is registered in the cart information on the transaction management server 250 in step S1010, the product registration for one product that has been priced in step S1001 on the weighing pricing device 210 is completed. That's what I did. Therefore, the transaction management server 250 transmits a registration completion notification to the mobile terminal 240.
  • the mobile terminal 240 that has received the registration completion notification has completed the product registration for one product subject to the pricing process executed by the weighing and pricing device 210 in response to the connection information code read this time, for example. May be displayed to notify the customer.
  • Step S1012 The transaction management server 250 transmits a reception confirmation notification indicating that the product registration information transmitted in step S1009 has been normally received to the measurement sales management server 60.
  • the receipt confirmation notification includes a product pricing information identifier that identifies the corresponding product registration information.
  • Step S1013 The weighing and sales management server 60 receives the receipt confirmation notification transmitted in step S1012, and among the product registration information stored by itself, the product indicated by the product pricing information identifier included in the reception confirmation notification. Manage the registration information so that it is shown to have been sent.
  • Step S1014 After the process of step S1013, the weighing and sales management server 60 transmits a registration completion notification to the weighing and pricing device 210 that is the source of the product pricing information according to step S1002.
  • Step S1015 In response to receiving the registration completion notification transmitted in step S1014, the weighing pricing device 210 causes the weighing pricing device 210 to issue a single item label reflecting the result of the pricing process in step S1001.
  • Step S1015-1 In response to receiving the registration completion notification transmitted in step S1014, the weighing pricing device 210 erases the connection information code displayed in step S1004.
  • steps S1001 to S1015 are referred to as "loop processing 1", and the product pricing operation for each product is performed on the weighing pricing device 210 according to the designation of the product for sale by weight from the customer in response to one transaction. Every time it is done, it is executed repeatedly.
  • Step S1016 When the clerk confirms that the pricing has been completed for all the products specified by the customer in response to one transaction, the operation of declaring the completion of pricing corresponding to one transaction (price completion).
  • the completion operation is performed on the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 determines that the pricing of the goods corresponding to one transaction has been completed.
  • Step S1017 When it is determined that the pricing of the product corresponding to one transaction is completed, the weighing pricing device 210 transmits the pricing completion notification to the weighing sales management server 60.
  • the pricing completion notification indicates that the pricing process for all the products corresponding to one transaction has been completed.
  • Step S1018 In response to receiving the pricing completion notification transmitted in step S1017, the weighing sales management server 60 transmits the pricing completion notification to the transaction management server 250 (may be forwarding).
  • Step S1019 In response to receiving the pricing completion notification transmitted in step S1018, the transaction management server 250 transmits the pricing completion notification to the mobile terminal 240 (may be forwarding).
  • the mobile terminal 240 that has received the pricing completion notification may display, for example, the settlement guidance screen of FIG. 30D.
  • the process may be executed so that, for example, the connection between the mobile terminal 240 and the transaction management server 250 is disconnected in response to the receipt of the pricing completion notification on the mobile terminal 240.
  • the erasure of the connection information code may be performed, for example, in response to the transaction management server 250 establishing a connection with the mobile terminal 240 by the connection process of step S1006.
  • the connection information code includes weighing device identification information that identifies the corresponding weighing device 210.
  • the mobile terminal 240 transmits the weighing and pricing device identification information included in the connection information code to the transaction management server 250.
  • the transaction management server 250 transmits a connection establishment notification to the weighing and pricing device 210 indicated by the received weighing and pricing device identification information.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 erases the connection information code in response to the reception of the connection establishment notification.
  • connection information code may be deleted in response to the product registration in the cart information in step S1010.
  • the connection information code includes weighing device identification information that identifies the corresponding weighing device 210.
  • the mobile terminal 240 transmits the weighing and pricing device identification information included in the connection information code to the transaction management server 250.
  • the transaction management server 250 stores the received weighing and pricing device identification information.
  • the transaction management server 250 completes the registration of the product in the cart information in step S1010
  • the transaction management server 250 not only in the mobile terminal 240 but also in the weighing pricing device 210 indicated by the stored weighing pricing device identification information in step S1011.
  • Send a registration completion notification The weighing pricing device 210 erases the connection information code in response to the receipt of the registration completion notification.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 starts displaying the connection information code in response to the pricing process of the first product in the pricing of one transaction, the display is continued thereafter, and the value of the one transaction is displayed. It may be erased when the attachment is completed.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 are not directly connected to each other so as to be able to communicate directly with each other, but the weighing and pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 are connected to the weighing and sales management server 60 and the transaction management server 250, respectively.
  • the mass sales management server 60 and the transaction management server 250 communicate with each other.
  • the weighing and selling management server 60 notifies that the weighing and selling management server 60 has completed the registration of the product registration information corresponding to the product pricing in the cart information (that is, is transmitted in step S1014).
  • a single item label can be issued in response to the receipt of the registration completion notification).
  • the weighing pricing device 210 does not issue a single item label. As a result, in the weighing pricing device 210, only the single product label of the product to be priced whose corresponding product registration information is registered in the cart information is issued.
  • the clerk and the customer can confirm that the product subject to the pricing process has been normally registered in the cart information by issuing the single item label.
  • the customer can also obtain the cart information of the product subject to the pricing process by the notification performed on the mobile terminal 240 in response to the reception of the registration completion notification (step S1011). You can confirm that the registration was successful.
  • the configuration of the second example of the second embodiment and the third example of the second embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 may perform the same processing as the flowchart of FIG. 34 or FIG. 37.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 prices in one transaction in response to the completion of pricing in one transaction.
  • An additional label may be issued with a printed content indicating the total amount of the goods sold.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 may be configured to issue a single item label each time the pricing of a product is finalized, and issue an additional label when the pricing of one transaction is completed.
  • indefinite products There are two types of products sold by weight: indefinite products and fixed products.
  • An indefinite product is a product that has a fixed weight unit price and can be purchased by a customer with an arbitrary weight (or quantity). The price of an indefinite product is calculated by multiplying the weight measured for the product by the unit weight.
  • a fixed-price product is a product in which the weight per unit number and the unit price are determined, and the customer decides the number of products to purchase.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 in each of the above embodiments gives an example of executing the pricing process corresponding to the indefinite product
  • the pricing process may be enabled in response to the indefinite product.
  • the weighing pricing device 10 calculates the number of purchased items by dividing the weight measured by the measuring unit 2109 by the weight unit price, and calculates the price by multiplying the calculated number and the unit price. Be made to do.
  • the input of the item of the product to be priced may be performed by an mode other than the operation for the preset key on the clerk display 2105 of the weighing pricing device 210.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 is provided with an imaging unit that images the product to be priced, and the weighing pricing device 210 identifies the item of the product to be priced based on the analysis result of the image captured by the imaging unit. It may be made possible.
  • the transaction management server 250 receives an image of the product captured from the weighing pricing device 210, identifies the item of the product to be priced based on the result of analyzing the received image, and of the specified product. The item may be notified from the transaction management server 250 to the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the store clerk causes the imaging unit of the weighing and pricing device 210 to image the product to be priced, and the weighing and pricing device 210 sets the item of the product imaged by the imaging unit to be priced. Enter as an item of goods.
  • the tag device may be arranged at a position corresponding to the clerk side corresponding to each of the displayed products sold by weight.
  • the tag device is communicably connected to the weighing and pricing device 210 by wire or wirelessly.
  • the tag device stores product information indicating the corresponding products sold by weight.
  • the clerk performs a touch operation on the tag device corresponding to the product, for example, which is informed by the customer as the purchase target.
  • the tag device that detects the touch operation transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 uses the received product information to input the item of the product to be priced.
  • the tag device may be provided at a position where the customer can perform a touch operation corresponding to each of the displayed products sold by weight. In this case, the customer himself / herself is made to perform a touch operation on the tag device corresponding to the product to be purchased.
  • a motion sensor that detects movement may be provided at a part such as a lid or a lever that moves as the product is taken out from the fixture in which the product sold by weight is stored.
  • the motion detection by the motion sensor stores the product information indicating the corresponding merchandise sold by weight, which can be realized by, for example, an acceleration sensor or the like.
  • the motion sensor transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210 in response to detecting the motion.
  • the clerk takes out, for example, the product that the customer has informed as a purchase target from the displayed products.
  • the motion sensor corresponding to the product to be purchased detects the movement in response to the product being taken out.
  • the motion sensor transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210 in response to detecting the motion.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 uses the received product information to input the item of the product to be priced.
  • products sold by weight may be displayed so that customers can take out the products.
  • the customer is asked to take out the product to be purchased from the displayed place and hand it to the clerk.
  • the product information is transmitted from the motion sensor in response to the customer taking out the product, and the weighing and pricing device 210 inputs the item of the product to be priced.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 may not be able to receive the reception confirmation notification in step S107 for some reason.
  • cases where the reception confirmation notification cannot be received include the following cases.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 does not receive the receipt confirmation notification and times out within a certain period of time after executing the process of step S106 for transmitting the product pricing information, an error in transmitting / receiving the product pricing information occurs. It is determined that the product has been used. When it is determined that the transmission / reception error of the product pricing information has occurred, the weighing pricing device 210 is made to notify, for example, that the transmission / reception error of the product pricing information has occurred on the clerk display 2105. .. The customer display 2106 may also be notified that a transmission / reception error of the product pricing information has occurred.
  • the clerk asks the customer whether or not the corresponding product is normally registered. You may be asked to do it.
  • the customer sees, for example, the display on the mobile terminal 240, and whether or not the product registration information is normally transmitted / received to / from the transaction management server 250 corresponding to step S2206 (corresponding with the transaction management server 250). (Whether or not the cart information of is registered normally) is confirmed.
  • the customer is asked to retransmit the reception confirmation notification from the mobile terminal 240, and the weighing pricing device 210 receives the reception confirmation notification, so that the transmission / reception error of the product price information is resolved. May be processed as.
  • a pricing information code (bar code or two-dimensional code) that reflects the pricing information of the corresponding product is handled by the weighing pricing device 210 as a response when the occurrence of a transmission / reception error of the product pricing information is notified.
  • a label (re-registration label) on which (may be) is printed may be issued.
  • a dialog window for asking the clerk to confirm the necessity of issuance may be displayed on the clerk display 2105.
  • the clerk declares that it is not necessary to issue the re-registration label when it is confirmed that the product registration information has been normally transmitted / received to / from the transaction management server 250. Perform the operation to be performed on the dialog window.
  • the clerk gives an operation to instruct the issuance of the re-registration label in the dialog window. To do.
  • the clerk hands the issued re-registration label to the customer.
  • the customer has the mobile terminal 240 read the pricing information code printed on the handed re-registration label.
  • the mobile terminal 240 transmits the product pricing information indicated by the read pricing information code to the transaction management server 250 as product registration information.
  • the cart information for the product corresponding to the transmission / reception error of the product pricing information is registered in the transaction management server 250.
  • connection information code is displayed each time the pricing process is performed for each product in one transaction.
  • the connection information code is displayed corresponding to one transaction.
  • the clerk performs a predetermined operation on the weighing pricing device 210 before the pricing operation of the first selling product by weight in one transaction, so that the connection information code is displayed on the customer display 2106.
  • the connection information code may be included in the standby screen displayed on the customer display 2106, for example, in a state of waiting for the first pricing operation in one transaction.
  • the customer causes the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code displayed on the customer display 2106 before the price of the first product is set.
  • the mobile terminal 240 is in a state of establishing a connection with the weighing and pricing device 210 according to the connection conditions (connection procedure) indicated by the read connection information code.
  • the display of the connection information code may be erased when the weighing and pricing device 210 detects, for example, the establishment of a connection with the mobile terminal 240.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 executes a process of associating the mobile terminal 240, which is the communication partner, with the current transaction. For this purpose, the weighing and pricing device 210 acquires a terminal identifier from, for example, a mobile terminal 240 which is a communication partner.
  • the terminal identifier may be an identifier individually assigned to each hardware as the mobile terminal 240, such as a MAC address, or an application identifier assigned to the shopping application installed on the mobile terminal 240. You may.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 is a clerk designation screen in which an operation for associating a clerk in charge of a pricing operation with the current transaction is performed according to the establishment of communication and connection with the mobile terminal 240. May be displayed on the clerk display 2105.
  • FIG. 42 shows an example of a clerk designation screen.
  • a clerk button is arranged on the clerk designation screen.
  • the clerk button is shown to be associated with the clerk by displaying characters or the like indicating the corresponding clerk.
  • three clerk buttons are arranged, and an example is shown in which they are shown as "clerk A”, “clerk B”, and “clerk C", respectively.
  • the clerk's name, job title, etc. may be indicated on the clerk button.
  • the clerk corresponding to the displayed clerk button is a clerk who is currently registered (logged in) as a clerk in charge of the sales floor of the merchandise sold by weight.
  • the clerk button of the clerk who is currently performing the pricing operation by the other weighing and pricing device 210 in response to other customers for example, as shown in the figure, the diagonal line arrangement (other than grayout etc. may be used). ) Indicates that the operation is not possible.
  • the clerk operates the clerk button corresponding to himself / herself from the displayed clerk buttons.
  • An "Add" button is arranged on the clerk designation screen.
  • a clerk may need to deal with a customer before logging in as a clerk in charge of the sales floor.
  • the clerk button corresponding to the clerk who is not logged in is not displayed on the clerk designation screen. Therefore, the clerk in this case can log in on the spot by operating the "add" button and then performing, for example, an operation of causing the weighing and pricing device 210 to read his / her clerk's identifier.
  • the clerk buttons of the corresponding clerk are further displayed.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 associates the clerk identifier indicated by the operated clerk button with the terminal identifier acquired from the mobile terminal 240, which is the communication partner.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 manages the product pricing information for each product corresponding to the pricing operation performed under the corresponding transaction in association with the clerk identifier. As a result, the transaction corresponding to the mobile terminal 240 can be uniquely specified.
  • the clerk identifier may be acquired by having the scanner 2104 of the weighing and pricing device 210 read the code information of the clerk identifier attached to the clerk's card possessed by the clerk.
  • the clerk ID may be, for example, in the form of an IC (Integrated Circuit) card in which the clerk identifier is stored, and the clerk identifier may be obtained from the IC card by a card reader provided in the weighing and pricing device 210. ..
  • the RFID Radio Frequency Identifier
  • the weighing pricing device 210 obtains a stored clerk identifier from a communicable clerk ID.
  • the clerk identifier is obtained from the clerk ID with the strongest reception strength (that is, the clerk ID of the clerk located closest to the weighing and pricing device 210). May be done.
  • a transaction identifier may be further associated with the mobile phone identifier, the clerk identifier, and the product pricing information.
  • the transaction identifier may be associated with the clerk identifier.
  • the transaction identifier can be associated with the mobile terminal 240 instead of the clerk identifier. Can be associated with.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 displays and displays a plurality of transaction selection buttons indicating a mark such as a predetermined figure or a predetermined color instead of the clerk button.
  • the mark and color attached to the transaction selection button operated by the clerk from among the transaction selection buttons may be associated with the transaction.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 displays the product pricing information each time the product is priced. It does not have to be transmitted to the mobile terminal 240. That is, the weighing pricing device 210 transmits the product pricing information for each of the priced products to the mobile terminal 240, for example, when the price processing of all the products corresponding to one transaction is completed. May be done.
  • connection information code is displayed corresponding to one transaction as in this modification
  • the one weighing and pricing device 210 is associated with the transaction and the mobile terminal 240 as described above.
  • the pricing operation of another transaction can also be interrupted between the start and the completion of the pricing operation according to one transaction. That is, one weighing and pricing device 210 can perform pricing processing for a plurality of transactions in parallel.
  • the clerk can price the product corresponding to the next customer after memorizing the contents of the previous transaction (product pricing information) of the previous customer.
  • connection information code is displayed on the customer display 2106 at the stage before the pricing operation of the first merchandise sold by weight in one transaction.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 were connected to each other before the price of the product corresponding to the transaction was started.
  • connection information code corresponding to one transaction for example, according to step S2103 of FIG. 31, it may be displayed at a timing corresponding to the price of the first mass-sold product in one transaction.
  • connection information code may be displayed when the pricing of all the products in one transaction is completed.
  • FIG. 43 shows an example of the mode of the connection information code screen displayed on the customer display 2106 when the pricing of all the products in one transaction is completed.
  • FIG. 43 shows an example of a mode in which the customer display 2106 has a vertically long display surface portion and the notation on the screen is in English.
  • connection information code screen As in FIG. 32, the connection information code with the two-dimensional code is displayed, and the image of the mobile terminal is displayed with an arrow pointing to the two-dimensional code.
  • connection information code screen On the connection information code screen, pricing-related information (product name, measured weight, price, etc.) for each one or more products that have been priced so far in the corresponding transaction is displayed.
  • the clerk display 2105 may display a message, a pop-up window, an icon, or the like for notifying the clerk that the connection information code is displayed on the customer display 2106.
  • connection information code is displayed at the stage when the pricing of all the products sold by weight in one transaction is completed, the weighing pricing device 210 has detected the establishment of the connection with the mobile terminal 240.
  • the display of the connection information code may be deleted accordingly.
  • Product registration takeover may be possible between a plurality of weighing and pricing devices 210.
  • Product registration takeover means that after a clerk registers a product in one transaction with one weighing and pricing device 210, the clerk moves to another weighing and pricing device 210 and registers the product in the same transaction. Is to do.
  • the product registration transfer in the same transaction, the product registration information corresponding to the product registration previously performed by the weighing pricing device 210 is transferred to the next weighing pricing device 210.
  • the next weighing and pricing device 210 can add information about the product registered by its own product registration process to the inherited product registration information.
  • a customer may specify a product displayed at a position away from the weighing and pricing device 210 currently operated by a clerk.
  • product registration takeover the clerk goes to the designated product, takes out the product, and registers the product with another weighing and pricing device 210 installed at the nearest location. You can continue.
  • one of the plurality of weighing and pricing devices 210 functions as a parent, and then the parent weighing and pricing device 210 and the child weighing and pricing device 210 communicate with each other. It is realized by being connected as possible.
  • the child weighing and pricing device 210 associates the product pricing information for each priced product with the clerk identifier of the clerk who performed the pricing operation (or, the transaction identifier is associated with the clerk identifier instead of the clerk identifier. Alternatively, both the clerk identifier and the transaction identifier may be associated with each other), and the product is transmitted to the parent weighing and pricing device 10. For example, each time a clerk starts an operation of one weighing and pricing device 210, the clerk causes the weighing and pricing device 210 to read the clerk identifier recorded on his or her clerk's card, or operates the number of units and a predetermined button. By doing so, the weighing and pricing device 210 is made to acquire its own clerk identifier and logs in. Each time the clerk changes the weighing pricing device 210 that performs the pricing operation in response to the takeover of the product registration, the clerk causes the weighing pricing device 210 to acquire his / her own clerk identifier.
  • the parent weighing device 210 stores the integrated product pricing information in which the received product pricing information is integrated for each same clerk identifier.
  • the clerk performs the pricing completion operation.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 displays the connection information code on the customer display 2106.
  • the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210 are communicably connected in response to the customer having the mobile terminal 240 read the displayed connection information code, the mobile terminal 240 is included in the connection information code.
  • the clerk identifier that has been used is transmitted to the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the display of the connection information code may be erased in response to detecting that the weighing and pricing device 210 is communicably connected to the mobile terminal 240.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 that has received the clerk identifier receives the integrated product pricing information associated with the received clerk identifier from the integrated product pricing information stored in the parent weighing pricing device 210. It is transmitted to the mobile terminal 240.
  • the mobile terminal 240 transmits the received integrated product pricing information to the transaction management server 250 as product registration information for all the priced products.
  • the transaction management server 250 registers the information for each product indicated in the received product registration information as cart information.
  • the transaction and the mobile terminal 240 may be associated with each other as in the second modification.
  • a higher-level management device, a transaction management server 250, or the like may execute a process corresponding to the function as a parent weighing and pricing device.
  • a transaction management server 250 may execute a process corresponding to the function as a parent weighing and pricing device.
  • every time the clerk moves the weighing pricing device 210 inputs the clerk identifier and logs in, the product pricing information of the corresponding transaction stored in the weighing pricing device 210 of the moving source is moved to the moving destination.
  • the product pricing information transmitted to and transmitted to the weighing and pricing device 210 may be integrated with the product pricing information obtained by the pricing process at the destination.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 may display the connection information code on the customer display 2106 each time the product pricing process is completed.
  • the connection information code enables communication between the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 by causing the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code each time the product pricing process is completed.
  • the display may be erased depending on the connection to.
  • the following modes can be considered for disconnecting the connection between the weighing and pricing device 210 of the moving source and the mobile terminal 240.
  • a log-out operation is performed on the weighing and pricing device 210 of the moving source.
  • the weighing device 210 of the moving source disconnects from the current mobile terminal 240 according to the state of logging out in response to the log-out operation.
  • the clerk when the clerk starts the pricing operation on the moving destination weighing pricing device 210 by taking over the product registration, the clerk moves according to the fact that the moving destination weighing pricing device 210 acquires his / her own clerk identifier.
  • the original weighing and pricing device 210 may be disconnected from the current mobile terminal 240. In this case, the clerk may move to the moving-destination weighing and pricing device 210 without performing a log-out operation to the moving-source weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the moving source weighing and pricing device 210 is logged in by the same clerk who is currently logged in from the moving destination weighing and pricing device 210 by communicating with the moving destination weighing and pricing device 210. Upon receiving the notification of the fact, the connection with the current mobile terminal 240 is disconnected. In addition, the moving source weighing and pricing device 210 may log in by another clerk at a timing before receiving a notification that the same clerk has logged in from the moving destination weighing and pricing device 210. Disconnect from the current mobile terminal 240.
  • connection between the moving source weighing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 is configured to be disconnected at a predetermined timing until the destination weighing device 210 is logged in. Just do it.
  • the parent weighing is performed until the operation for declaring the completion of pricing for one transaction is performed.
  • the pricing device 210 manages the clerk identifier and the product pricing information in the same transaction in association with each other. As a result, even if the same clerk performs a pricing operation on any of the weighing pricing devices 210 in response to one transaction, the product pricing information of the same transaction is properly integrated.
  • connection correspondence information associated with identification information may be stored in the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the connection correspondence information may be stored in the logged-in weighing and pricing device 210, or may be stored in the parent weighing and pricing device 210.
  • connection correspondence information By storing the connection correspondence information in this way, for example, when the clerk moves to another weighing and pricing device 210 and logs in by taking over the product registration, the connection information code is not used automatically. It becomes possible to connect the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240.
  • the logged-in weighing device 210 acquires connection correspondence information including the same clerk identifier acquired by login. .. Then, the logged-in weighing and pricing device 210 may execute a process of connecting to the corresponding mobile terminal 240 by using the terminal identification information included in the acquired connection correspondence information.
  • the first example to the fifth example of the second embodiment correspond to the face-to-face method in which the clerk is made to weigh and price the products sold by weight relative to the customer. Was.
  • the second embodiment corresponds to a self-service method in which the customer weighs and prices the products sold by weight.
  • the clerk who operates the weighing and pricing device may be absent.
  • the configuration of the sales system corresponding to the second embodiment may be the same as that shown in FIG. However, in the sales system according to the second embodiment, the weighing and pricing device 210A having a configuration different from that of the weighing and pricing device 210 is provided.
  • the configuration of the weighing pricing device 210A may be the same as that shown in FIG. 3, for example, but the clerk display 2105 may be omitted.
  • the customer can weigh and price the products sold by weight as described below.
  • the customer When the customer wants to purchase the product by weight, the customer first inputs the item of the product to be purchased as follows.
  • FIG. 44 shows an example of how the products sold by weight are displayed in the store.
  • lemon LM, apple AP, and orange OG are displayed as products sold by weight.
  • a product information panel 3000-LM, 3000-AP, 3000-OG is installed corresponding to each of the displayed lemon LM, apple AP, and orange OG.
  • the product information panel 3000-LM, 3000-AP, 3000-OG is not particularly distinguished, it is described as the product information panel 3000.
  • the product information panel 3000 presents information on the corresponding product.
  • the product information panel 3000-LM is enlarged and shown.
  • the product item is lemon
  • the product information code 3001 are presented as the product information.
  • the product information code 3001 is a bar code (one-dimensional code) in the example.
  • the product information code 3001 includes the product code of the item of the product as a lemon.
  • the item of the product, the unit price per unit weight, and the product information code are presented as the product information.
  • the product information panel 3000 may be configured to present product information by displaying on the display device.
  • the product information panel 3000 may be adapted to present product information by pasting a printed matter such as a poster.
  • the customer When inputting the item of the product to be purchased, the customer displays the product registration screen on his / her mobile terminal 240 and transfers the product information code presented on the product information panel 3000 of the product to be purchased to the mobile terminal 240. Let me read it.
  • the figure shows a customer reading the product information code 3001 corresponding to the lemon LM.
  • the scan image area AR11 on the product registration screen of the mobile terminal 240 shows the image of the product information code 3001.
  • the mobile terminal 240 acquires the product information of the lemon LM from the read product information code 3001.
  • the mobile terminal 240 uses the acquired product information to designate Lemon LM as an item of a product sold by weight.
  • the product registration status area AR12 On the product registration screen, the product registration status area AR12 is arranged.
  • the product registration status area AR12 shows the registration status of the product to be purchased at the present time.
  • the total area AR121 and the registration list items AR122 (AR122-1, AR122-2, AR122-3) are arranged.
  • the registration list item AR122 is a list item that individually indicates a registered product or a product in a provisionally registered state in which an item has been input.
  • the registration list item AR122 the registration list items AR122-1, AR122-2, and AR122-3 corresponding to each of yogurt, apple AP, and lemon LM are arranged.
  • yogurt is not a merchandise sold by weight. Therefore, in the yogurt registration list item AR122-1, one item is registered by displaying "x1" in the comment display CM, and the price is 160 yen. There is.
  • apple AP and lemon LM products sold by weight are in the “temporary registration” state (temporary registration state) for the products to be purchased.
  • a product in the provisionally registered state is a product in which the item has been input but the pricing has not been completed (it is also in the state of waiting for weighing).
  • a comment display CM saying "weighing required” indicates that pricing by weighing has not yet been performed.
  • the display of "?? Yen” indicates that the price is undecided.
  • a predetermined background color indicating the temporary registration state is set.
  • the customer is in a situation where the lemon LM and the apple AP are provisionally registered as products sold by weight.
  • the customer will weigh each of the lemon LM and the apple AP. Therefore, the customer tries to take out the quantity (quantity) to be purchased from each of the displayed lemon LM and apple AP. Then, the customer goes to the weighing and pricing device 210A with the taken out lemon LM and apple AP.
  • FIG. 45 shows an example of the appearance of the weighing and pricing device 210A of the second embodiment as viewed from the front direction.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A is provided with a customer display 2106, a scanner 2104, a label discharge port 110a, and a weighing platform 109b of the weighing unit 2109 toward the customer.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A is in a state in which the standby screen is displayed on the customer display 2106 under the standby state. In the figure, the standby screen is enlarged and shown.
  • the code reading guide area AR21 and the measurement guide area AR22 are arranged.
  • the code reading guidance area AR21 is displayed according to the guidance for the customer who registers the product using the mobile terminal 240.
  • the code reading guide area AR21 for example, after displaying the connection information code CD by the two-dimensional code, when starting the registration of the product to be purchased (including weighing and pricing based on the weighing result), first , The mobile terminal 240 is displayed to guide the customer to read the connection information code CD.
  • the weighing guidance area AR22 is displayed according to guidance for customers who do not use the mobile terminal 240 for shopping.
  • the customer when starting the registration of the product to be purchased, the customer is instructed to place the product corresponding to one of the products to be purchased on the scale 109b of the weighing unit 2109. Is displayed.
  • FIG. 46A shows an example of the mode of the product registration screen on the touch panel display 2406 when the mobile terminal 240 is reading the connection information code CD.
  • the mobile terminal 240 establishes communication with the weighing and pricing device 210A in response to reading the connection information code CD as described above.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210A and the mobile terminal 240 are communicably connected in this way, the weighing and pricing device 210A is in a state in which communication is exclusively occupied by the connected mobile terminal 240. In the state where communication is exclusively used, the mobile terminal 240 does not connect to another mobile terminal 240.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A When a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 for shopping starts weighing by, for example, placing a product on the scale 109b, the weighing pricing device 210A establishes mutual communication with the mobile terminal 240 thereafter. May be prohibited. If the establishment of mutual communication is not prohibited, even if an attempt to establish mutual communication is attempted, it will end in failure, but it will take time until the timeout occurs, so it is possible to actually measure after detecting the above declaration. It will take some time before it becomes. On the other hand, if the establishment of mutual communication is prohibited, the originally unnecessary time (time until time-out) is saved, and the measurement is performed immediately. For example, after the label printing is completed, the above prohibition may be lifted.
  • the mobile terminal 240 transmits information on the merchandise sold by weight in the provisionally registered state to the weighing pricing device 210A in response to the establishment of communication with the weighing pricing device 210A. Specifically, the mobile terminal 240 in this case transmits information on the lemon LM and the apple AP as information on the products sold by weight in the provisionally registered state.
  • the mobile terminal 240 causes the touch panel display 2406 to display the pricing operation screen in response to the establishment of communication with the weighing and pricing device 210A.
  • FIG. 46B shows an example of a pricing operation screen displayed on the touch panel display 2406 of the mobile terminal 240.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210A causes the customer display 2106 to display the pricing operation screen in response to the establishment of communication with the mobile terminal 240.
  • FIG. 46C shows an example of a pricing operation screen displayed on the customer display 2106 of the weighing pricing device 210A.
  • product selection buttons BT11 (BT11-1, BT11-2) are arranged.
  • the product selection button BT11 is a button that corresponds to each product in the provisionally registered state and performs an operation of selecting a product to be registered (weighed, priced).
  • FIG. 46C shows an example in which the product selection button BT11-1 corresponds to the apple AP and the product selection button BT11-2 corresponds to the lemon LM among the product selection buttons BT11.
  • the registration result area AR31 is arranged.
  • the unit weight of the products sold by weight, the measured weight, and the total amount of the products sold by weight that have been registered so far are shown.
  • a stop button BT12 and a search button BT13 are arranged on the pricing operation screen.
  • the cancel button BT12 is a button for instructing the cancellation of registration by weighing and pricing the merchandise sold by weight in the provisionally registered state.
  • the search button BT13 is a button that is operated to instruct a search for another product when, for example, temporary registration has not been performed and it is desired to further register other products not indicated by the product selection button BT11. ..
  • the mobile terminal 240 displays a pricing operation screen similar to that displayed on the weighing pricing device 210A.
  • the customer can perform the operation of weighing, pricing, and registering the temporarily registered product for both the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210A.
  • the product registration screen or the like may be displayed without displaying the pricing operation screen.
  • the customer decides to first register from the apple AP among the apple AP and the lemon LM in the provisionally registered state.
  • the customer operates the product selection button BT11-1 corresponding to the apple AP on the pricing operation screen.
  • FIG. 47A shows a state in which the customer operates the product selection button BT11-1 corresponding to the apple AP.
  • the product selection button BT11-1 is highlighted according to the touch by the operation. By such an operation on the product selection button BT11-1, the apple AP is designated as the registration target.
  • FIG. 47B shows an example of the weighing guide screen.
  • the weighing guide screen On the weighing guide screen, the weighing guide area AR32 is arranged.
  • the registration result area AR31, the stop button BT12, and the search button BT13 are continuously arranged from the pricing operation screen.
  • the content of guiding the customer to place the apple AP on the scale 109b is displayed. Specifically, in the weighing guide area AR32, the message MS2 "Please put the product", the characters "apple” and the picture of the apple are displayed.
  • the back button BT14 is arranged. The back button BT14 is a button on which an operation to return to the previous screen is performed.
  • the customer places the apple AP to be registered on the scale 109b as shown in FIG. 47B.
  • the display of the customer display 2106 of the weighing pricing device 210A shifts from the weighing guide screen to the weighing result screen in response to the apple AP to be registered being placed on the scale table 109b and the weighing unit 2109 performing the measurement. ..
  • FIG. 48A shows an example of the measurement result screen.
  • the label issuance guidance area AR33 is arranged.
  • the registration result area AR31, the stop button BT12, and the search button BT13 are continuously arranged from the measurement guidance screen.
  • the registration result area AR31 of the weighing result screen the weight measured for the apple AP, the weight unit price of the apple AP, and the price of the apple AP calculated according to the measured weight are shown.
  • the label issuance guide area AR33 operate the label issuance button BT15 to issue a label (single item label) that reflects the pricing result of the apple AP, for example, "Please press the print button”.
  • Message MS3 is displayed to prompt the customer.
  • the characters "apple” indicating that the product for which the label is issued this time is an apple AP and an apple pattern are displayed.
  • the label issuing button BT15 is arranged in the label issuing guidance area AR33.
  • a back button BT14 for performing an operation to return to the previous screen is arranged.
  • the customer operates the label issuing button BT15 as shown in the same FIG. 48A.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A issues a label (single item label) on which the content reflecting the pricing result for the apple AP is printed.
  • the display of the customer display 2106 of the weighing pricing device 210A shifts from the weighing result screen to the label affixing guidance screen.
  • FIG. 48B shows an example of a label sticking guide screen.
  • the label sticking guide area AR34 is arranged.
  • the registration result area AR31, the stop button BT12, and the search button BT13 are continuously arranged from the measurement guidance screen.
  • a pattern is displayed to guide the label issued by the weighing pricing device 210A to be affixed to the bag containing the apple AP that has been priced this time. ..
  • a message for affixing the label for example, "Please affix the label to the product bag" may be displayed.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A sends the product registration information of the apple AP reflecting the pricing result to the mobile terminal. Send to 240.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A may transmit the product registration information to the transaction management server 250 via the communication line.
  • FIG. 49A shows an example of a mode of the pricing operation screen displayed according to the issuance of the label of the apple AP.
  • the product selection button BT11-1 of the apple AP displayed on the pricing operation screen of FIG. 46C is deleted.
  • the product selection button BT11-1 of the apple AP may be displayed so as to indicate that the operation is impossible, for example, by graying out instead of erasing. That is, on the pricing operation screen, only the operation of the merchandise sold by weight in the temporarily registered state is possible.
  • the mobile terminal 240 may also display the pricing operation screen capable of performing the same operation as in the figure.
  • the customer operates the product selection button BT11-2 in order to register (weigh, price) the lemon LM, which is still in the provisionally registered state.
  • the customer may return the lemon LM brought from the display place to the display place or keep it as a reserved item and hand it to the clerk at the time of payment.
  • the customer After operating the product selection button BT11-2 corresponding to the lemon LM, the customer uses the same procedure as the apple AP described above to weigh and price the lemon LM and issue a label to the weighing pricing device 210A. Let me do it. In response to the issuance of the label for Lemon LM, the weighing and pricing (registration) of all the products sold by weight that were in the provisionally registered state have been completed.
  • the display of the customer display 2106 of the weighing and pricing device 210A is returned to the standby screen (FIG. 45) in response to the completion of registration of all the products sold by weight that were in the provisionally registered state.
  • the product registration screen displayed on the touch panel display 2406 of the mobile terminal 240 is in the state shown in FIG. 49B, for example, in response to the completion of registration of all the products sold by weight that were in the provisional registration state.
  • the product registration status area AR12 on the product registration screen changes as follows in comparison with FIG. 44. That is, the registration list items AR122-1 and AR122-2 corresponding to the lemon LM and the apple AP are in a state indicating that they have been registered from a state indicating that they are provisionally registered. Specifically, the background color of each of the registration list items AR122-1 and AR122-2 has changed from a color indicating a provisional registration state to a color indicating registration. The prices determined by the pricing process are shown in each of the registration list items AR122-1 and AR122-2. The comment display CM in each of the registration list items AR122-1 and AR122-2 has changed from "weighing required" to "weighing".
  • the comment display CM of "weighing” indicates that the corresponding product is a product sold by weight and registered by the processing of weighing and pricing. Therefore, the comment display CM may be displayed as, for example, “weighed” or “registered” instead of the display of "weighed”.
  • the product registration status area AR12 for the products sold by weight that have been weighed, information regarding the result of the pricing process such as the weighed weight, price, and unit price may be displayed.
  • the "weighing required" comment display CM itself may be deleted depending on the fact that the corresponding product has been registered. Even in such a case, it is preferable to change the mode such as the background color of the registration list item AR122 so that the product registered by weight and the product not sold by weight can be visually distinguished in the product registration status area AR12.
  • the registration list item AR122 of the registered products by weight is displayed. It may be changed to a state indicating that it is registered (weighed).
  • Step S9201 The mobile terminal 240 waits for the product information code 3001 (FIG. 44) to be read while the product registration screen is displayed on the touch panel display 2406.
  • Step S9202 In response to the reading of the product information code 3001, the mobile terminal 240 acquires the product information from the read product information code. By acquiring the product information, the mobile terminal 240 inputs the item of the product to be purchased by the customer.
  • Step S9203 The mobile terminal 240 adds the registration list item AR122 indicating the product of the product information acquired in step S9202 to the product registration status area AR12 on the product registration screen.
  • the product of the product information acquired in response to the reading of the product information code 3001 in this way is treated as a provisionally registered product.
  • the registration list item AR122 of the provisionally registered product is set with a background color indicating that it is provisionally registered, as in the registration list items AR122-2 and AR122-3 of FIG. 44, and is described as "weighing required" in the comment display CM. Is displayed to indicate that pricing has not yet taken place.
  • step S9203 After the processing of step S9203, the processing is returned to step S9201.
  • Step S9101 The weighing and pricing device 210A sets the standby mode when the customer has not performed the weighing and pricing operations.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A causes the customer display 2106 to display a standby screen. As shown in FIG. 45, the connection information code CD is displayed on the standby screen.
  • Step S9102 Under the standby state, the weighing and pricing device 210A determines whether or not the connection process with the mobile terminal 240 that has read the connection information code CD has been started.
  • Step S9103 When it is determined in step S9102 that the connection process is not started, the weighing pricing device 210A determines whether or not the weighing unit 2109 has started weighing due to the customer placing the product on the weighing platform 109b. do.
  • Step S9104 When it is determined in step S9103 that the weighing unit 2109 has started weighing, the weighing pricing device 210A performs a pricing process corresponding to a transaction that does not use the mobile terminal 240 for the measured product. Run. After the processing in step S9104, the processing is returned to step S9101. When the process is returned to step S9101, the weighing and pricing device 210A sets the standby mode and displays the standby screen including the connection information code CD.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 displays a product selection screen for performing an operation of designating (selecting) a product to be priced.
  • the connection information code CD may be deleted when the product selection screen is displayed. That is, the connection information code CD may be erased according to the measurement performed by the measuring unit 2109.
  • the product selection screen is a screen in which a product for sale by weight can be selected by arranging preset keys for each product classified as a product for sale by weight, for example.
  • the products sold by weight may include products in which the quantity is calculated according to the weighed weight and the price is calculated according to the calculated quantity and the unit price.
  • the customer finds a preset key corresponding to the product placed on the scale 109b from the product selection screen, and operates the found preset key.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 sets the product corresponding to the operated preset key as a pricing target.
  • the weighing unit 210 calculates the price of the product to be priced based on the weighing result of the measuring unit 2109.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 When the price is calculated, the weighing pricing device 210 has a content of guiding the customer to the operation of issuing the label in a manner according to FIG. 48A, and displays the weighing result screen on which the label issuing button BT15 is arranged. do.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 issues a label (single item label) reflecting the pricing processing result of the product to be priced this time in response to the operation of the label issuing button BT15. After that, the weighing and pricing device 210 returns to the process in step S9101 to enter the standby mode and display the standby screen.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 may display the product selection screen on which the preset keys of the products sold by weight are arranged together with the connection information code CD on the standby screen.
  • a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 can also start pricing by operating a preset key on the product selection screen displayed on the standby screen before placing the product to be priced on the scale 109b.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 sets the product corresponding to the operated preset key as the price target.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 displays, for example, a weighing guide screen according to FIG. 47A, and guides the customer to place the product set as the pricing target on the scale 109b.
  • the connection information code CD may be erased when the weighing guide screen is displayed.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 that displays the above weighing guide screen determines that the product to be priced is priced based on the weighing result of the weighing unit 2109 in response to the customer placing the product to be priced on the weighing platform 109b. Calculate the price. When the price is calculated, the weighing pricing device 210 displays the weighing result screen in a manner according to FIG. 48A. The weighing pricing device 210 issues a label (single item label) when the label issuing button BT15 arranged on the weighing result screen is operated, and returns the process to step S9101 to enter the standby mode and display the standby screen.
  • a label single item label
  • the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 places the product to be priced on the scale 109b, or selects the product to be priced by operating the product selection screen displayed on the standby screen. You can start pricing by performing the operation.
  • Step S9105 When it is determined in step S9102 that the connection process has been started, the weighing and pricing device 210A executes the started connection process and establishes a connection with the mobile terminal 240.
  • Step S9106 When the connection is established, the mobile terminal 240 transmits the provisionally registered product information.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A acquires the transmitted provisionally registered product information.
  • the provisionally registered product information is a product sold by weight, such as an apple AP or a lemon LM, in which an item is input in response to the mobile terminal 240 reading the product information code 3001.
  • Step S9107 The weighing pricing device 210A that has acquired the provisionally registered product information causes the customer display 2106 to display the pricing operation screen (FIG. 46C).
  • the pricing operation screen is a screen in which the product selection button BT11 corresponding to each temporarily registered product indicated by the acquired temporarily registered product information is arranged, and as a pricing operation, the pricing process is performed from among the temporarily registered products. The operation of selecting the target 1 temporarily registered product is performed.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210A is on standby until the connection process is started, along with the display of the price setting operation screen in the first step S9017 corresponding to the start of the connection process in step S9102.
  • the screen will be erased.
  • the connection information code CD is also deleted. That is, the process of step S9107 is a process of erasing the connection information code CD in response to the measurement pricing device 210A establishing the connection with the mobile terminal 240.
  • Step S9108 After displaying the pricing operation screen, the weighing pricing device 210A executes the pricing process according to the customer's pricing operation. That is, as described with reference to FIGS. 47A and 47B, the customer operates the product selection button BT11 on the pricing operation screen to specify the temporarily registered product to be priced. The customer places the temporarily registered product designated as the price processing target on the scale 109b and causes the weighing unit 2109 to perform the weighing. The weighing pricing device 210A calculates the price by using the weight measured by the weighing unit 2109 and the weight unit price indicated in the provisionally registered product information acquired in step S9106.
  • Step S9109 In response to the price being determined by the pricing process in step S9108, the weighing pricing device 210A causes the customer display 2106 to display the weighing result screen (FIG. 48A). The weighing pricing device 210A displays the weighed weight, the weight unit price, and the calculated price in the registration result area AR31 of the weighing result screen so as to be reflected.
  • Step S9110 The label issuing button BT15 is arranged on the weighing result screen.
  • the customer operates the label issuing button BT15.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A issues a label corresponding to the product priced by the pricing process in step S9018 this time.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210A may be configured to issue a label as the process of step S9111, for example, when the pricing process of step S9108 is completed and the price is fixed. In this case, the display of the label issuing button BT15 on the weighing result screen may be omitted.
  • Step S9111 The weighing pricing device 210A transmits the product pricing information to the mobile terminal 240 in response to the completion of the pricing process in step S9108 and the determination of the price.
  • the product pricing information reflects the result of the pricing process for the product targeted for the price process in step S9108 this time.
  • Step S91112 After transmitting the product pricing information in step S9111, the weighing pricing device 210A determines whether or not the pricing processing for all the provisionally registered products has been completed. If there are still products for which the pricing process has not been completed, the process is returned to step S9107. In this case, in step S9107, the weighing and pricing device 210A displays a pricing operation screen in which the product selection button BT11 of the temporarily registered product for which the pricing process has been completed is in an inoperable state as illustrated in FIG. 49. Let me.
  • Step S9113 When it is determined in step S9112 that the pricing process of all the provisionally registered products is completed, the weighing pricing device 210A disconnects from the mobile terminal 240 established in step S9105.
  • step S9101. That is, the standby screen is displayed.
  • the connection information code CD is displayed. That is, the weighing and pricing device 210A displays the connection information code CD for the next connection with the mobile terminal 240 in response to the disconnection from the mobile terminal 240.
  • Step S9211 The mobile terminal 240 is waiting for the connection information code CD to be read while the product registration screen is being displayed.
  • Step S9212 The mobile terminal 240 reads the connection information code CD by causing the customer to read the connection information code CD by the mobile terminal 240.
  • Connection information
  • the mobile terminal 240 In response to the reading of the information code CD, the mobile terminal 240 performs a process for communicably connecting to the weighing and pricing device 210A according to the connection procedure indicated by the read connection information code CD. Execute with 210A.
  • Step S9213 When the connection with the weighing and pricing device 210A is established by the connection process of step S9212, the mobile terminal 240 transmits the provisionally registered product information to the weighing and pricing device 210A.
  • the provisionally registered product information is information on products sold by weight for which items have been input by the processes of steps S9201 to S9203.
  • Step S9214 After the process of step S9213, the mobile terminal 240 causes the touch panel display 2406 to display the pricing operation screen (FIG. 46B) instead of the conventional product registration screen.
  • Step S9215 The mobile terminal 240 waits for the product pricing information transmitted from the weighing pricing device 210A in step S9211 to be received after the display of the pricing operation screen in step S9214.
  • the mobile terminal 240 transmits the product registration information reflecting the pricing processing result indicated by the received product pricing information to the transaction management server 250.
  • the mobile terminal 240 determines that the pricing of the temporarily registered product indicated by the product pricing information has been completed in response to the receipt of the product pricing information.
  • Step S9216 After the process of step S9215, the mobile terminal 240 determines whether or not the pricing process for all the provisionally registered products has been completed.
  • step S9214 the mobile terminal 240 updates the pricing operation screen that has been displayed so far so that the product selection button of the temporarily registered product for which the pricing process has been completed becomes inoperable.
  • Step S9217 When it is determined in step S9216 that the pricing process for all the temporarily registered products is completed, the mobile terminal 240 causes the touch panel display 2406 to display the product registration screen.
  • Step S9301 The transaction management server 250 is waiting for receiving the product registration information transmitted from the mobile terminal 240 in step S9215.
  • Step S9302 When the product registration information is received, the transaction management server 250 registers (adds) the received product registration information to the cart information corresponding to the current transaction. At this time, the transaction management server 250 searches for the cart information associated with the same cart identification information included in the received product registration information, and registers the product registration information in the searched cart information. By performing the process of step S9302, the temporary registration state for one product is canceled, and the registration is completed. After the processing of step S9302, the processing is returned to step S9301.
  • the acquisition of the product information (temporary registered product information) of the product (temporary registered product) to be priced by the weighing pricing device 210A is the temporary registration transmitted from the mobile terminal 240. Not limited to receiving product information.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A may be capable of displaying a product selection screen in which a preset key corresponding to each product sold by weight is arranged on the customer display 2106.
  • the customer can specify the product to be priced by the weighing pricing device 210A by operating the preset key arranged on the displayed product selection screen.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A may be adapted to acquire the product information of the product corresponding to the operated preset key as the provisionally registered product information.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210A in this case does not display the connection information code CD on the standby screen, but displays the connection information code CD on the customer display 2106 at a predetermined timing according to, for example, a preset key operation. You may let it.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A may display the connection information code CD at the timing when the product selection screen on which the preset keys are arranged is displayed.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A is at a predetermined timing from the operation of the preset key for selecting the first temporarily registered product to the operation of the preset key for selecting the last temporarily registered product.
  • connection information code CD may be displayed.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A may display the connection information code CD at the timing when the operation of the preset keys corresponding to all the products sold by weight to be purchased is completed.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A may indicate the connection information code CD at the timing when the pricing of at least one product is completed after the operation of the preset keys corresponding to all the products sold by weight to be purchased is completed. ..
  • the provisionally registered product information can be transmitted from the weighing and pricing device 210A to the mobile terminal 240.
  • the provisionally registered product information can be shared between the weighing pricing device 210A and the mobile terminal 240.
  • connection information code CD may be erased at the timing when the connection between the weighing and pricing device 210A and the mobile terminal 240 is established.
  • the connection information code CD may be erased, for example, at a timing corresponding to the completion of pricing of all the temporarily registered products.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A is provided with an imaging unit that captures an image of a product to be priced, and the weighing pricing device 10A is based on an analysis result of an image obtained by the imaging unit of a product sold by weight to be purchased by a customer. Identify the item of goods.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A may be adapted to acquire the provisionally registered product information by acquiring the product information corresponding to the specified item from, for example, the product master or the like.
  • the transaction management server 250 receives an image of the product from the weighing pricing device 210A and analyzes the received image to identify and identify the item of the product to be priced. The transaction management server 250 may notify the weighing and pricing device 210A of the item of the goods.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A displays the connection information code CD at a predetermined timing from the acquisition of the provisionally registered product information of the first product to the acquisition of the provisionally registered product information of the last product. You may let me.
  • the connection information code CD may be displayed at the timing when the provisionally registered product information corresponding to all the products sold by weight to be purchased is acquired.
  • connection information code CD is also erased at the timing when the connection between the weighing pricing device 210A and the mobile terminal 240 is established, or at the timing when the pricing of all the temporarily registered products is completed. good.
  • the tag device may be arranged at a position corresponding to the customer side corresponding to each of the displayed products sold by weight.
  • the tag device is communicably connected to the weighing and pricing device 210A by wire or wirelessly.
  • the tag device stores product information indicating the corresponding products sold by weight.
  • the customer performs a touch operation on the tag device corresponding to the product to be purchased.
  • the tag device that detects the touch operation transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210A.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A may be adapted to acquire the received product information as provisionally registered product information.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A may display the connection information code CD at the timing when the provisionally registered product information of the first product is acquired, for example.
  • connection information code CD is also erased at the timing when the connection between the weighing pricing device 210A and the mobile terminal 240 is established, or at the timing when the pricing of all the temporarily registered products is completed. good.
  • a motion sensor that detects movement may be provided on a part such as a lid or a lever that moves as the customer takes out the product from the fixture in which the product sold by weight is stored.
  • the motion detection by the motion sensor stores the product information indicating the corresponding merchandise sold by weight, which can be realized by, for example, an acceleration sensor or the like.
  • the motion sensor transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210A in response to detecting the motion.
  • the customer takes out the product to be purchased from the displayed products.
  • the motion sensor corresponding to the product to be purchased detects the movement in response to the product being taken out.
  • the motion sensor transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210A in response to detecting the motion.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A acquires the received product information as provisionally registered product information.
  • the weighing pricing device 210A in this case may also display the connection information code CD at the timing when the provisionally registered product information of the first product is acquired, for example.
  • connection information code CD is also erased at the timing when the connection between the weighing pricing device 210A and the mobile terminal 240 is established, or at the timing when the pricing of all the temporarily registered products is completed. good.
  • the price of the product may be set according to the following procedure in response to the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 and the customer who does not use it.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 displays the standby screen in the standby mode.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 displays a plurality of standby screens so as to be cyclically switched, for example, at predetermined time intervals.
  • one standby screen has content that guides the customer to pick up the goods on the scale 109b to start pricing.
  • One standby screen has a content that guides the customer to read the code information (for example, a barcode) attached to the product.
  • One standby screen has a content that guides the customer to perform an operation of searching for a product in order to start pricing.
  • One standby screen has a content that guides the customer to perform an operation of touching the standby screen to start pricing.
  • the product information panel 3000 used in the sixth example of the second embodiment is not used at the product display location. Therefore, the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 does not perform temporary registration by reading the product information code 3001 of the product information panel 3000 in order to input the item of the product to be priced.
  • the customer is provided with the touch operation on the tag device corresponding to the product to be purchased or the motion sensor described in the sixth modification described above regardless of whether or not the mobile terminal 240 is used.
  • the item of the product to be priced is input (pre-item input).
  • the customer first picks up the product to be purchased from the product display location, and then performs the product selection operation on the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the item of the product to be priced is input (screen operation item input).
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 of this modification sets the standby mode when it is not operating according to the operation of the customer.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 in the standby mode displays the initial pricing operation screen on the customer display 2106.
  • FIG. 51 shows an example of the pricing operation screen in the initial state displayed on the customer display 2106.
  • the figure shows the initial pricing operation screen that is displayed when the advance item is not entered.
  • the weighing result area AR41 is arranged on the pricing operation screen.
  • the weighing result area AR41 is an area in which the result of weighing the product sold by weight to be priced is displayed.
  • the weighing result area AR41 includes a weight area AR41-1, a weight unit price area AR41-2, and a total amount area AR41-3.
  • the weight area AR41-1 is an area where the measured weight of the goods sold by weight to be priced is shown.
  • the weight unit price area AR41-2 is an area in which the weight unit price of the merchandise sold by weight to be priced is shown.
  • the weight area AR41-1 displays the number calculated based on the measured weight and the unit weight
  • the weight unit price area AR41-2 is 1 The unit price per piece may be shown.
  • the total amount area AR41-3 is an area showing the total amount of the total prices of the merchandise sold by weight for which pricing has been completed so far under the same transaction.
  • the product selection area AR42 is an area in which a product to be priced can be selected.
  • four tabs TB (TB-1 to TB-4) are arranged in the product selection area AR42.
  • a sheet on which a product button is arranged is associated with each tab TB.
  • the tab TB can be selected by the operation of the customer.
  • the selected tab TB is highlighted with respect to the other tab TB, and in the product selection area AR42, the product button BT41 arranged on the sheet of the selected tab TB is displayed.
  • the product button BT41 of the product in which the pre-item has been input is arranged on the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-1.
  • product buttons BT41 preset keys for each product registered in advance in the product master after being classified as products sold by weight are arranged in a predetermined order.
  • the product buttons of the products classified as fruits are further arranged under the classification of the products sold by weight in the product master.
  • the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-4 is a tab corresponding to the sheet on which the product buttons of the products classified as vegetables are arranged under the classification of the products sold by weight in the product master.
  • a fruit sheet and a vegetable sheet are prepared according to the fact that the fruit and vegetable products have a high purchase record among the products sold by weight.
  • tab TB-2 is selected, as shown in the figure.
  • the product button BT41 preset key of the product included in all the products registered in the product master by weight in the product master is arranged on the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-2. It is in.
  • the arrangement order of the product buttons BT41 on the sheet may be determined based on, for example, a purchase record or a preset priority.
  • 16 product buttons BT41 are arranged. That is, 16 products sold by weight are presented as selection candidates.
  • the product button BT41 of other products sold by weight can be displayed by an operation such as page turning or scrolling with respect to the sheet area.
  • the product button BT41 shows the product information in a simplified manner such as "Item1" and "Item2".
  • the product button BT41 displays the product name, the pattern, etc. indicating the corresponding product. May be done.
  • the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-2 is an area for performing an operation of designating (selecting) a product to be priced from all the products classified as products sold by weight by the product master.
  • the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 for product registration operates the tab TB-3 to display the sheet on which the product button BT41 of the product for sale by weight in the fruit classification is arranged. be able to.
  • the customer can operate the product button BT41 corresponding to the product sold by weight to be purchased from the product button BT41 arranged on the displayed sheet, and can specify the item as the item of the product to be priced.
  • the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 for product registration operates the tab TB-4 to display the sheet on which the product button BT41 of the product sold by weight in the vegetable classification is arranged. be able to.
  • the customer can operate the product button BT41 corresponding to the product sold by weight to be purchased from the product button BT41 arranged on the displayed sheet, and can specify the item as the item of the product to be priced.
  • a message area ARM is arranged above the product selection area AR42.
  • the message area ARM is an area in which a message having a predetermined content according to the content of the current screen is displayed.
  • "SelectTheItem" is displayed. That is, in the message area ARM in this case, a message is displayed to guide the customer to operate the product button BT41 for designating the item of the product to be priced.
  • a search area AR43 that allows a search for products sold by weight by a character input operation is arranged.
  • the search area AR43 does not have to be arranged on the pricing operation screen. Then, for example, the search area AR43 may be displayed in response to a predetermined operation on the pricing operation screen.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 When the weighing pricing device 210 receives the information of the merchandise sold by weight according to the pre-item input from the tag device or the motion sensor in the standby mode, it is shown in FIG. 52 instead of the pricing operation screen of FIG. Display the pricing operation screen.
  • FIG. 52 the same parts as those in FIG. 51 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
  • the tab TB-1 is selected in the product selection area AR42.
  • Six product buttons BT41 of Items 11 to 16 are arranged on the sheet corresponding to the selected tab TB-1.
  • the merchandise sold by weight corresponding to the six merchandise buttons BT41 is a merchandise in which the item to be priced is input by the pre-item input performed by the customer first.
  • the arrangement order of the product buttons BT41 may correspond to the order in which the items are input.
  • a message is displayed to guide the customer to operate the product button BT41 in order to specify the item of the product to be priced.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 of the present modification is registered in the product selection area AR42 by default in the standby mode in the state where the tab TB-2 is selected and classified by weight for sale on the sheet.
  • the product button BT41 of the product is arranged.
  • the customer inputs the item in advance, and the information of the merchandise sold by weight transmitted from outside the weighing device (tag device or motion sensor) is received, so that the weighing pricing device 210 , Change from tab TB-2 to tab TB-1 in the selected state.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 displays that the product button BT 41 corresponding to the received information on the products sold by weight is arranged on the sheet of the selected tab TB-1.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 is received on the sheet of the tab TB-1. Display is performed by adding and arranging the product button BT41 according to the information of the product sold by weight.
  • the screen is displayed.
  • the customer can specify the product to be priced by operating the product button BT41 arranged on the sheet of the tab TB-2 displayed at that time.
  • the customer specifies (selects) the product to be priced by operating the tabs TB-2 and TB-3 corresponding to the products sold by weight of fruits and vegetables to switch the sheet and then operating the product button BT41. can do.
  • the customer goes to the weighing pricing device 210 when the customer has entered the pre-item, as shown in FIG. 52, the product for each product for which the pre-item has been entered in the tab TB-1 sheet.
  • the pricing operation screen on which the button BT41 is arranged is displayed. In this case, the customer operates the product button BT41 arranged on the sheet of the tab TB-1 displayed at that time to specify (select) the product to be priced.
  • the mode in which the product button BT41 of the product for which the pre-item has been input in the tab TB-1 sheet is arranged is that the pre-item is input from the products pre-registered in the product master according to the classification as a merchandise sold by weight.
  • the products are displayed with emphasis (priority).
  • the mode in which the pre-item input product is emphasized (priority) and displayed is not limited to the example of switching the sheet as described above.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 displays the product button BT41 corresponding to all the products sold by weight as shown in FIG. 51 in the state where there is no prior item input on the sheet 1.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 erases the product button BT41 of the product for which the pre-item has not been input among the product buttons BT41 corresponding to all the products sold by weight on the same sheet, and pre-inputs the product.
  • the product button BT41 of the product for which the product has been input may be displayed.
  • the product buttons BT41 of the products for which the pre-items have been input may be rearranged so as to be collectively positioned.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 displays the size of the product button BT41 of the product for which the pre-item has been input so as to be larger than the product button BT41 for the product for which the pre-item has not been input when the pre-item is input. You can do it.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 has an area in which the product button BT41 of the pre-item input product is arranged and the product button of the product for which the pre-item has not been input in the product selection area AR42. It may be displayed so as to be separated from the area where the BT 41 is arranged.
  • the mode of emphasizing the product button BT41 of the product for which the pre-item is input on the same sheet with respect to the product button BT41 of the product for which the pre-item is not input may be appropriately combined.
  • the display of the customer display 2106 in the weighing pricing device 210 changes from the pricing operation screen to the weighing guidance screen. Transition to.
  • the product designated as the price target is indicated by, for example, the product name or a pattern representing the product, and the product designated as the price target is placed on the scale 109b. A message is displayed to guide the customer.
  • the customer can confirm whether or not the product button BT41 operated by the customer definitely corresponds to the product designated as the price target.
  • the customer can know that the product should be placed on the scale 109b.
  • the display in the measurement result area AR41 on the price setting operation screen is as follows. That is, the weight area AR41-1 indicates that the weight is zero depending on the fact that the weight has not been measured yet.
  • the weight unit price area AR41-2 shows the weight unit price of the goods designated as the price target. The weight unit price displayed in this way may be obtained from, for example, the product information of the product master.
  • the total amount area AR41-3 indicates that the price is zero.
  • the customer places the product to be priced on the scale 109b.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 executes the pricing process in response to the goods being placed on the scale 109b. That is, the weighing pricing device 210 determines the weight of the product according to the determination that the weight of the product measured by the measuring unit 2109 is stable, and calculates the price based on the determined weight and the weight unit price.
  • the display on the customer display 2106 transitions from the weighing guide screen to the weighing result screen.
  • FIG. 53 shows an example of the measurement result screen.
  • the same parts as those in FIG. 52 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
  • the weight of the product weighed in the weight area AR41-1 (in this case, the number calculated according to the weight and the unit weight) is shown, and the total price area AR41 In -3, the total amount of money according to the calculated price of the product is shown.
  • the product selection area AR42 indicates the product name and pattern of the priced product.
  • the label issuing button BT42 and the connection information code area AR44 are arranged.
  • the label issuing button BT42 is a button for instructing the issuance of a label (single item label) reflecting the pricing processing result of the product to be priced.
  • connection information code area AR44 is an area in which the connection information code CD is displayed.
  • a message such as "PRINTLABELOR READCHORD" is displayed to guide the customer to either operate the label issuing button BT42 or read the connection information code CD.
  • the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 causes the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code CD.
  • the mobile terminal 240 is connected to the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the connection information code CD is erased when the mobile terminal 240 is connected to the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 transmits the product pricing information reflecting the current pricing processing result to the connected mobile terminal 240.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 issues a single item label on which the code information is not printed, in response to the completion of transmission of the product pricing information.
  • a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 operates the label issuing button BT42.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 issues a single item label on which the code information reflecting the current pricing processing result is printed.
  • the label issuing button BT42 and the connection information code area AR44 are displayed on the same screen as the weighing result screen when the pricing is confirmed.
  • the customer can determine whether to read the connection information code CD or operate the label issuing button BT42 depending on whether or not he / she uses the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the procedure until the price is fixed by pricing is common regardless of whether or not the mobile terminal 240 is used, so that the customer can easily get used to the procedure.
  • the display may be changed from the measurement result screen to the label affixing guidance screen.
  • a message, a pattern, etc. are displayed to guide the label issued by the weighing and pricing device 210 to be affixed to the bag containing the product that has been priced this time. Will be.
  • the connection information code area AR44 displayed on the measurement result screen is not arranged. That is, the label affixing guidance screen is displayed after the display of the connection information code is completed.
  • the customer lifts the product from the scale 109b and attaches the label taken out from the label discharge port 110a to the bag containing the product.
  • the label sticking guide screen is erased when, for example, the sensor provided in the label discharge port 110a detects that the label has been taken out. Instead of erasing the label affixing guidance screen, the customer display 2106 transitions to the display of the pricing operation screen for designating the next item to be priced.
  • the transition to the pricing operation screen of FIG. 51 is performed next. May be made.
  • the current pricing process is performed in response to the operation on the pricing operation screen according to the pre-item input shown in FIG. 52, and among the pre-item input products, the unpriced product is not yet priced. If it remains, the transition to the pricing operation screen of FIG. 52 may be performed next.
  • the second embodiment What is applicable to the sixth example may be appropriately applied to the sixth example of the second embodiment.
  • a higher-level device such as the transaction management server 250 may share the predetermined processing that was to be executed by the mobile terminal 240 in each of the above embodiments, or may be configured to execute the predetermined processing in cooperation with the mobile terminal 240.
  • a higher-level device such as the transaction management server 250 may share the predetermined processing executed by the weighing pricing devices 210 and 10A, or may be configured to execute the predetermined processing in cooperation with the mobile terminal 240. Further, the mobile terminal 240 or the weighing and pricing device 210 and 10A may share the predetermined processing executed by the transaction management server 250, or the mobile terminal 240 or the weighing and pricing device 210 and 10A may cooperate with each other. ..
  • Weighing pricing equipment is used to sell products sold by weight.
  • the procedure is that the product to be purchased by the customer is priced by the weighing and pricing device and then the product is registered on the customer's mobile terminal.
  • the procedure is different from the procedure when the customer takes out the product from the product shelf or the like and has the mobile terminal read the code to register the product.
  • the sales system of the second embodiment can smoothly execute the product registration by the weighing and pricing device when the product registration is performed by the mobile terminal owned by the customer.
  • the sales system of the second embodiment includes a weighing and pricing device and a mobile terminal used by a customer to register a product.
  • the sales system includes an output means for outputting connection information for communicably connecting the weighing and pricing device and the mobile terminal, and after the output of the connection information, the weighing and pricing device and the mobile terminal are connected to each other. It is provided with a control means for terminating the output of connection information by the output means at a predetermined timing after being communicably connected.
  • the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing pricing device 210 (210A) are communicably connected using the connection information code displayed (output) on the weighing pricing device 210 for product registration. Be made. Then, the weighing pricing device 210 (210A) can erase the displayed connection information code at a predetermined timing after the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing pricing device 210 (210A) are communicably connected. ..
  • One aspect of the second embodiment is the sales system according to (1), wherein the control means is operated at a timing when the weighing unit of the weighing pricing device performs weighing or an operation on the operating unit. At the timing when the connection information is output, the output of the connection information by the output means is terminated.
  • connection information code can be erased.
  • One aspect of the second embodiment is the sales system according to (1) or (2), wherein when the control means ends the output of the connection information, the weighing and pricing device.
  • a label issuing means for issuing a label indicating the measurement result by.
  • connection information code can be erased when the label is issued according to the pricing.
  • One aspect of the second embodiment includes a display means for displaying a guide for attaching the label described in (3) to the product, and the output of the connection information by the output means is completed. Later, the display by the display means is performed.
  • connection information code displayed at the stage when the price of the product is confirmed and the label is issued.
  • One aspect of the second embodiment is a sales system including a weighing and pricing device and a mobile terminal used by a customer to register a product, and the weighing and pricing device and the mobile terminal are combined.
  • the output means for outputting the connection information for communicably connecting and the weighing pricing device and the mobile terminal are not communicably connected, the output means outputs the connection information at a predetermined timing.
  • the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210 (210A) are communicably connected to each other for product registration by using the connection information code displayed on the weighing and pricing device 210. .. Then, the weighing and pricing device 210 (210A) can display the connection information code at a predetermined timing when the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210 (10A) are not communicably connected. can.
  • connection information code it is possible to limit the display of the connection information code at an appropriate timing in accordance with the situation where the customer who corresponds to the transaction registers the product.
  • a customer who has nothing to do with the transaction accidentally causes his / her mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code CD, so that the customer is inadvertently connected to the weighing and pricing device 210 (210A). Problems will be prevented and product registration will be carried out smoothly.
  • One aspect of the second embodiment is the sales system according to (5), in which the control means is connected by the output means at the timing when the measurement result by the measurement pricing device is determined. Output information.
  • connection information code is displayed when the pricing result is confirmed when the weighing result is confirmed, so that communication is possible by reading the connection information code.
  • the product pricing information can be immediately transmitted from the weighing pricing device 210 to the mobile terminal 240.
  • connection information for example, connection
  • Information code screen is output.
  • the customer causes the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code while checking the weighing result (price processing result) of the product to be priced displayed on the customer display 2106. You can perform operations.
  • One aspect of the second embodiment is the sales system according to any one of (5) to (7), and is an operation for printing the measurement result on a label in the measurement pricing device.
  • a display means for displaying a child for example, a label issuing button BT42
  • the control means outputs the connection information together with an operator displayed by the display means.
  • the customer using the mobile terminal 240 confirms the registration of the product by reading the connection information code arranged on the weighing result screen, and then labels the weighing pricing device 210 (bar code is displayed). (Not printed) can be issued.
  • a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 can issue a label (with a bar code printed on it) by operating the label issuing button BT42 arranged on the same weighing result screen. That is, on the weighing result screen, both the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 and the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 can perform the operation for issuing the label.
  • the weighing pricing device 210 is a label (bar code) for customers who use the mobile terminal 240, depending on whether the label issuing operation is reading the connection information code or operating the label issuing button BT42. (Label on which is not printed) and a label for customers who do not use the mobile terminal 240 (label on which a barcode is printed) can be issued separately.
  • the selection display is provided with a reception means for receiving from outside the device (for example, a tag device, a motion sensor) and a selection display means for displaying a pre-registered product in a selectable manner (for example, displaying the product button BT41).
  • a reception means for receiving from outside the device (for example, a tag device, a motion sensor)
  • a selection display means for displaying a pre-registered product in a selectable manner (for example, displaying the product button BT41).
  • the receiving means receives the information of the product
  • the means emphasizes the product corresponding to the information of the product received by the receiving means (for example, the product button BT41 is displayed on the sheet of the tab TB-1. Display can be selected according to the mode).
  • the product button BT41 (preset key) corresponding to all products sold by weight is pressed on the tab TB-2 sheet. It is possible to display in the arranged mode. Then, in response to the pre-item input, the product button BT41 of the pre-item input product among the preset keys is arranged on the tab TB-1 sheet on the initial state pricing operation screen. You can switch to the display of. This facilitates the operation of specifying the product to be priced when the pre-item input is performed.
  • the third embodiment of the present invention is shown below.
  • the sales system in the third embodiment has, for example, the same configuration shown in FIG. 19 as the sales system in the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing a hardware configuration example of the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the appearance of the weighing and pricing device 210, and shows an example of the appearance of the weighing and pricing device 210 when viewed from the front direction.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 includes a CPU 3101, a ROM 3102, a RAM 3103, a scanner 3104, a customer display 3106, a hard disk 3107, a weighing unit 3109, a printing unit 3110, an inter-device communication unit 3111, and a short-range communication unit. 3112 is provided. These are connected to each other via a bus 3119.
  • the CPU 3101 executes various processes for realizing the function as the weighing and pricing device 210.
  • the ROM 3102 stores various information. For example, the program executed by the CPU 3101 is stored.
  • the ROM 3102 stores information (screen information, message information, etc.) related to the display on the customer display 3106 and the customer display 3106.
  • the ROM 3102 stores a device number (device identifier) for identifying its own device.
  • the ROM 3102 may store information (print contents, print format information, etc.) related to printing by the printing unit 3110.
  • the RAM 3103 is used as a work area for the CPU 3101 to perform processing and calculation.
  • the scanner 3104 optically reads the coded information.
  • the customer display 3106 is arranged on the front side toward the customer side to display for the customer.
  • the customer display 3106 may be configured as a touch panel so that it can be operated by the customer.
  • the hard disk 3107 stores various information required for the weighing and pricing device 210 as an auxiliary storage device of the CPU 3101.
  • the hard disk 3107 may store, for example, a product file or the like.
  • the hard disk 3107 may store a program for causing the CPU 3101 to execute a registration process or the like.
  • the hard disk 3107 may store various information generated by executing the program.
  • the hard disk 3107 may store information related to display by the customer display 3106 and information related to printing by the printing unit 3110. Instead of the hard disk 3107, another storage device such as an SSD may be provided.
  • the measuring unit 3109 weighs the product or the like (the product and the tare containing the product) placed on the scale 3109b, and outputs data indicating the measured value to the CPU 3101.
  • the CPU 3101 that has acquired the measured value from the measuring unit 3109 subtracts a predetermined weight (weight of the tare) from the measured value to calculate the product placed on the scale 3109b.
  • the CPU 3101 temporarily stores the weight of the product calculated as described above in the RAM 3103 and displays it on the customer display 3106.
  • the printing unit 3110 prints (prints) on a paper medium and issues (outputs) from the label ejection port 110a (FIG. 55). For example, the printing unit 3110 can issue a label to be attached to a product.
  • the inter-device communication unit 3111 is provided in response to the case of communicating with another weighing and pricing device 210 via a predetermined communication network.
  • the communication network supported by the inter-device communication unit 3111 may be wired or wireless.
  • the inter-device communication unit 3111 may be capable of communicating with the management device 30.
  • the short-range communication unit 3112 communicates with the mobile terminal 240 by a predetermined short-range wireless communication method.
  • the short-range wireless communication method supported by the short-range communication unit 3112 may be, for example, Bluetooth.
  • the settlement device 20 in the third embodiment includes, for example, the appearance shown in FIG. 22 and the hardware configuration shown in FIG. 23.
  • the mobile terminal 240 according to the third embodiment includes, for example, the hardware configuration shown in FIG. 24.
  • the transaction management server 250 in the third embodiment includes, for example, the hardware configuration shown in FIG. 25.
  • the transaction management server 250 in the third embodiment stores, for example, the customer information shown in FIG. 26, the store information shown in FIG. 27, and the cart information shown in FIG. 28.
  • the mobile terminal 240 according to the third embodiment is installed with the shopping application described in FIGS. 29A-29C and 30A-30D.
  • the customer When the customer wants to purchase the product by weight, the customer first inputs the item of the product to be purchased by using his / her mobile terminal 240 as follows.
  • FIG. 25 shows an example of how products sold by weight are displayed in a store.
  • lemon LM, apple AP, and orange OG are displayed as products sold by weight.
  • a product information panel 3000-LM, 3000-AP, 3000-OG is installed corresponding to each of the displayed lemon LM, apple AP, and orange OG.
  • the product information panel 3000-LM, 3000-AP, 3000-OG is not particularly distinguished, it is described as the product information panel 3000.
  • the product information panel 3000 presents information on the corresponding product.
  • the product information panel 3000-LM is enlarged and shown.
  • the product item is lemon
  • the product information code 3001 are presented as the product information.
  • the product information code 3001 is a barcode (one-dimensional code) in the example of the figure.
  • the product information code 3001 includes the product code of the item of the product as a lemon.
  • the item of the product, the unit price per unit weight, and the product information code are presented as the product information.
  • the product information panel 3000 may be configured to present product information by displaying on the display device.
  • the product information panel 3000 may be adapted to present product information by pasting a printed matter such as a poster.
  • the customer When inputting the item of the product to be purchased, the customer displays the product registration screen on his / her mobile terminal 240 and transfers the product information code presented on the product information panel 3000 of the product to be purchased to the mobile terminal 240. Let me read it.
  • the figure shows a customer reading the product information code 3001 corresponding to the lemon LM.
  • the scan image area AR11 on the product registration screen of the mobile terminal 240 shows the image of the product information code 3001.
  • the mobile terminal 240 acquires the product information of the lemon LM from the read product information code 3001.
  • the mobile terminal 240 uses the acquired product information to designate Lemon LM as an item of a product sold by weight.
  • the product registration status area AR12 On the product registration screen, the product registration status area AR12 is arranged.
  • the product registration status area AR12 shows the registration status of the product to be purchased at the present time.
  • the total area AR121 and the registration list items AR122 (AR122-1, AR122-2, AR122-3) are arranged.
  • the registration list item AR122 is a list item that individually indicates a registered product or a product in a provisionally registered state in which an item has been input.
  • the registration list item AR122 the registration list items AR122-1, AR122-2, and AR122-3 corresponding to each of yogurt, apple AP, and lemon LM are arranged.
  • yogurt is not a merchandise sold by weight. Therefore, in the yogurt registration list item AR122-1, one item is registered by displaying "x1" in the comment display CM, and the price is 160 yen. There is.
  • apple AP and lemon LM products sold by weight are in the “temporary registration” state (temporary registration state) for the products to be purchased.
  • a product in the provisionally registered state is a product in which the item has been input but the pricing has not been completed (it is also in the state of waiting for weighing).
  • a comment display CM saying "weighing required” indicates that pricing by weighing has not yet been performed.
  • the display of "?? Yen” indicates that the price is undecided.
  • a predetermined background color indicating the temporary registration state is set.
  • the customer is in a situation where the lemon LM and the apple AP are provisionally registered as products sold by weight.
  • the customer will weigh each of the lemon LM and the apple AP. Therefore, the customer tries to take out the quantity (quantity) to be purchased from each of the displayed lemon LM and apple AP. Then, the customer goes to the weighing and pricing device 210 with the taken out lemon LM and apple AP.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 to which the customer went was not operating in response to the operation of another customer, it was in a standby mode of waiting for the start of weighing according to one transaction. rice field.
  • the weighing and pricing device 210 in the standby mode displays the initial pricing operation screen on the customer display 3106.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Accounting & Taxation (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Strategic Management (AREA)
  • General Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Finance (AREA)
  • Geometry (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Cash Registers Or Receiving Machines (AREA)

Abstract

A sales system according to the present invention is provided with: a measuring and pricing device; and a mobile terminal which is used in product registration by customers. The mobile terminal is provided with a communication unit which communicates with the measuring and pricing device. The measuring and pricing device is provided with: a display which displays connection information for connecting the measuring and pricing device and the mobile terminal in a manner enabling communication; and a controller which causes the display to end display of the connection information at a predetermined time after the measuring and pricing device and the mobile terminal are connected in the manner enabling communication on the basis of the connection information.

Description

販売システムSales system
本発明は、販売システムに関するものである。 The present invention relates to a sales system.
店舗にて、客が、自分の所持する携帯端末を操作して、自ら商品登録を行うことが可能な販売システムが導入されている（例えば、特許文献１参照）。 At a store, a sales system has been introduced in which a customer can operate his / her own mobile terminal to register a product by himself / herself (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
特許第５０５６１６１号公報Japanese Patent No. 5056161
特開２０１３−１３１２３２号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-131232
特開２０１４−１４２９２２号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-142922
このような販売システムにおいて、定貫売りの商品の販売手順では、客により商品棚から取り出された商品のコードを携帯端末が読み取り、読み取った商品コードを用いて商品登録が行われる。一方、量り売りの商品の販売手順では、計量値付け装置を用いて、客の購入対象の商品の値付けが行われることが要求され、さらに値付け後、客の携帯端末による商品登録をする。 In such a sales system, in the procedure for selling a product for regular sale, a mobile terminal reads the code of the product taken out from the product shelf by the customer, and the product is registered using the read product code. On the other hand, in the procedure for selling a product sold by weight, it is required that the product to be purchased by the customer is priced by using a weighing pricing device, and after the price is set, the product is registered by the customer's mobile terminal.
本実施形態における販売システムによれば、客自身が量り売り商品を計量できたり、携帯端末を用いた商品登録を効率的に実行できたりする。 According to the sales system in the present embodiment, the customer himself / herself can weigh the products sold by weight and can efficiently execute the product registration using the mobile terminal.
本発明の実施形態における販売システムは、計量値付け装置と、客による商品登録に用いられる携帯端末と、を備える。前記携帯端末は、前記計量値付け装置と通信する通信部を備える。前記計量値付け装置は、前記計量値付け装置と前記携帯端末とを通信可能に接続するための接続情報を表示するディスプレイと、前記接続情報に基づき前記計量値付け装置と前記携帯端末とが通信可能に接続された後、所定のタイミングで、前記ディスプレイに前記接続情報の表示を終了させるコントローラと、を備える。 The sales system according to the embodiment of the present invention includes a weighing and pricing device and a mobile terminal used for product registration by a customer. The mobile terminal includes a communication unit that communicates with the weighing and pricing device. The weighing pricing device is a display that displays connection information for communicably connecting the weighing pricing device and the mobile terminal, and the weighing pricing device and the mobile terminal communicate with each other based on the connection information. It is provided with a controller that terminates the display of the connection information on the display at a predetermined timing after the connection is possible.
本実施形態によれば、前記コントローラは、前記計量値付け装置の計量部が計量を行った時又は操作部に対する操作が行われた時、前記ディスプレイに前記接続情報の表示を終了させる。 According to the present embodiment, the controller terminates the display of the connection information on the display when the weighing unit of the weighing pricing device performs weighing or when an operation is performed on the operating unit.
本実施形態によれば、前記コントローラは、前記計量値付け装置は、前記接続情報の表示が終了されるとき、前記計量値付け装置による計量結果を示すラベルを発行する。 According to the present embodiment, the controller issues a label indicating the weighing result by the weighing pricing device when the weighing pricing device finishes displaying the connection information.
本実施形態によれば、前記ディスプレイは、前記ラベルを商品に添付することの案内を表示し、前記接続情報の表示が終了された後、前記ディスプレイは、前記案内を表示する。 According to the present embodiment, the display displays a guide for attaching the label to the product, and after the display of the connection information is finished, the display displays the guide.
本実施形態によれば、前記計量値付け装置は、商品を計量する計量部を備え、前記ディスプレイは、前記計量部による計量結果に基づく情報を表示する。前記ディスプレイは、前記携帯端末との接続状態及び該携帯端末を識別する識別情報を表示する。 According to the present embodiment, the weighing and pricing device includes a weighing unit that weighs a product, and the display displays information based on the weighing result by the measuring unit. The display displays a connection state with the mobile terminal and identification information for identifying the mobile terminal.
本実施形態によれば、前記計量値付け装置は、計時部を備える。前記ディスプレイは、前記計時部により計時された時間に基づき、前記携帯端末との接続に関係する時間を表示する。 According to the present embodiment, the weighing and pricing device includes a time measuring unit. The display displays the time related to the connection with the mobile terminal based on the time timed by the timekeeping unit.
本実施形態によれば、前記ディスプレイは、計量結果欄及び前記携帯端末との通信に用いられる接続情報を同一画面に表示する。前記計量値付け装置は、前記接続情報を読み取った携帯端末と通信する通信部を備える。 According to the present embodiment, the display displays the measurement result column and the connection information used for communication with the mobile terminal on the same screen. The weighing and pricing device includes a communication unit that communicates with a mobile terminal that has read the connection information.
本実施形態によれば、前記ディスプレイは、量り売り商品に分類された商品に対応する商品ボタンを表示する。 According to the present embodiment, the display displays a product button corresponding to a product classified as a product sold by weight.
本実施形態によれば、前記計量値付け装置は、前記計量値付け装置による計量の対象とする商品の情報を計量装置外から受け付ける受付部を備える。前記ディスプレイは、予め登録されている商品の選択を受け付ける選択画面を表示する。前記ディスプレイは、前記受付部が前記商品の情報を受け付けたとき、前記選択画面において前記受け付けた商品の情報を強調して表示する。 According to the present embodiment, the weighing and pricing device includes a reception unit that receives information on products to be weighed by the weighing and pricing device from outside the weighing device. The display displays a selection screen that accepts the selection of pre-registered products. When the reception unit receives the information on the product, the display emphasizes the information on the received product on the selection screen.
本実施形態によれば、前記携帯端末は、設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語で画面を表示し、顧客の操作を受け付ける。前記販売システムは、さらに取引情報出力装置を備える。前記取引情報出力装置は、前記携帯端末と通信する通信部と、前記携帯端末から前記一の言語情報を取得するコントローラと、取得された前記一の言語情報に応じた言語で、取引に関する情報を表示するディスプレイと、を備える。 According to the present embodiment, the mobile terminal displays a screen in a language indicated by one set language information and accepts a customer's operation. The sales system further includes a transaction information output device. The transaction information output device outputs information about transactions in a communication unit that communicates with the mobile terminal, a controller that acquires the one language information from the mobile terminal, and a language corresponding to the acquired one language information. It is equipped with a display for displaying.
図１は、第１の実施形態における計量装置の外観の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the appearance of the weighing device according to the first embodiment.
図２は、第１の実施形態における計量装置の構成の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the weighing device according to the first embodiment.
図３Ａ−３Ｊは、第１の実施形態における計量販売の流れを説明する説明図である。 FIG. 3A-3J is an explanatory diagram illustrating a flow of mass sales according to the first embodiment.
図４は、第１の実施形態における計量装置２０の動作の一例を示したフローチャートである。 FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the weighing device 20 in the first embodiment.
図５は、第１の実施形態における計量装置２０等の処理の流れを示したシーケンス図である。 FIG. 5 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of the weighing device 20 and the like according to the first embodiment.
図６は、第１の実施形態における計量装置２０の動作の一例を示したフローチャートである。 FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the weighing device 20 in the first embodiment.
図７は、第１の実施形態における計量装置２０等の処理の流れを示したシーケンス図である。 FIG. 7 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of the weighing device 20 and the like according to the first embodiment.
図８は、第１の実施形態における計量装置２０等の処理の流れを示したシーケンス図である。 FIG. 8 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of the weighing device 20 and the like according to the first embodiment.
図９は、第１の実施形態における計量装置２０等の処理の流れを示したシーケンス図である。 FIG. 9 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of the weighing device 20 and the like according to the first embodiment.
図１０は、第１の実施形態における計量装置２０等の処理の流れを示したシーケンス図である。 FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of the weighing device 20 and the like according to the first embodiment.
図１１は、第１の実施形態における計量装置２０等の処理の流れを示したシーケンス図である。 FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of the weighing device 20 and the like according to the first embodiment.
図１２は、第１の実施形態における計量装置２０における警告中の表示例である。 FIG. 12 is a display example during a warning in the weighing device 20 according to the first embodiment.
図１３は、第１の実施形態における携帯端末６０における警告中の表示例である。 FIG. 13 is a display example during a warning in the mobile terminal 60 according to the first embodiment.
図１４は、第１の実施形態における計量装置２０の動作の他の例を示したフローチャートである。 FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing another example of the operation of the weighing device 20 in the first embodiment.
図１５は、第１の実施形態における計量装置の動作の他の例を示したフローチャートである。 FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing another example of the operation of the weighing device according to the first embodiment.
図１６Ａ−１６Ｂは、第１の実施形態における他の評価の例を説明する説明図である。 16A-16B are explanatory views illustrating examples of other evaluations in the first embodiment.
図１７は、第１の実施形態における携帯端末における他の表示例である。 FIG. 17 is another display example in the mobile terminal according to the first embodiment.
図１８は、第２の実施形態の第１の例の販売システムにおける計量値付け装置が使用される店舗の概要例を示す図である。 FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a schematic example of a store in which the weighing and pricing device in the sales system of the first example of the second embodiment is used.
図１９は、第２の実施形態の第１の例における販売システムの構成例を示す図である。 FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the sales system in the first example of the second embodiment.
図２０は、第２の実施形態の第１の例における計量値付け装置の構成例を示す図である。 FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a weighing and pricing device in the first example of the second embodiment.
図２１Ａ−２１Ｂは、第２の実施形態の第１の例における計量値付け装置の外観例を示す斜視図である。 FIG. 21A-21B is a perspective view showing an external example of the weighing and pricing device in the first example of the second embodiment.
図２２は、第２の実施形態の第１の例における精算装置の外観例を示す図である。 FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the appearance of the settlement device in the first example of the second embodiment.
図２３は、第２の実施形態の第１の例における精算装置の構成例を示す図である。 FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the settlement device in the first example of the second embodiment.
図２４は、第２の実施形態の第１の例における携帯端末の構成例を示す図である。 FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a mobile terminal in the first example of the second embodiment.
図２５は、第２の実施形態の第１の例における取引管理サーバの構成例を示す図である。 FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the transaction management server in the first example of the second embodiment.
図２６は、第２の実施形態の第１の例における顧客情報の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of customer information in the first example of the second embodiment.
図２７は、第２の実施形態の第１の例における店舗情報の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of store information in the first example of the second embodiment.
図２８は、第２の実施形態の第１の例におけるカート情報の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of cart information in the first example of the second embodiment.
図２９Ａ−２９Ｃは、第２の実施形態の第１の例における起動画面、周辺店舗案内画面、店舗情報画面の一態様例を示す図である。 29A-29C is a diagram showing an example of an activation screen, a peripheral store guidance screen, and a store information screen in the first example of the second embodiment.
図３０Ａ−３０Ｄは、第２の実施形態の第１の例における広告画面、商品登録画面及び精算案内画面の一態様例を示す図である。 FIG. 30A-30D is a diagram showing an example of an advertisement screen, a product registration screen, and a settlement guidance screen in the first example of the second embodiment.
図３１は、第２の実施形態の第１の例における計量値付け装置、携帯端末及び取引管理サーバが、一取引における商品登録に関連して実行する処理手順例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing pricing device, the mobile terminal, and the transaction management server in the first example of the second embodiment in connection with the product registration in one transaction.
図３２は、第２の実施形態の第１の例における接続情報コード画面の表示態様例を示す図である。 FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the connection information code screen in the first example of the second embodiment.
図３３は、第２の実施形態の第１の例における単品ラベルの一態様例を示す図である。 FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of a single item label in the first example of the second embodiment.
図３４は、第２の実施形態の第２の例における計量値付け装置が一取引における値付けに対応して実行する処理手順例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing and pricing device in the second example of the second embodiment corresponding to the pricing in one transaction.
図３５は、第２の実施形態の第２の例における接続要否確認画面の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a connection necessity confirmation screen in the second example of the second embodiment.
図３６は、第２の実施形態の第２の例における発行確認画面の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an issuance confirmation screen in the second example of the second embodiment.
図３７は、第２の実施形態の第３の例における計量値付け装置が一取引における値付けに対応して実行する処理手順例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing and pricing device in the third example of the second embodiment corresponding to the pricing in one transaction.
図３８は、第２の実施形態の第３の例におけるコード情報読取案内画面の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a code information reading guide screen in the third example of the second embodiment.
図３９は、第２の実施形態の第４の例における加算ラベルの一態様例を示す図である。 FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of one aspect of the addition label in the fourth example of the second embodiment.
図４０は、第２の実施形態の第５の例における販売システムの構成例を示す図である。 FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the sales system in the fifth example of the second embodiment.
図４１は、第２の実施形態の第５の例における計量値付け装置、携帯端末、取引管理サーバ及び計量販売管理サーバが、一取引における商品登録に関連して実行する処理手順例を示すシーケンス図である。 FIG. 41 is a sequence showing an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing pricing device, the mobile terminal, the transaction management server, and the weighing sales management server in the fifth example of the second embodiment in connection with the product registration in one transaction. It is a figure.
図４２は、第２の実施形態の変形例における店員ボタンの表示態様例を示す図である。 FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the clerk button in the modified example of the second embodiment.
図４３は、第２の実施形態の変形例における接続情報コード画面の表示態様例を示す図である。 FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the connection information code screen in the modified example of the second embodiment.
図４４は、第２の実施形態の第６の例における店舗において量り売り商品が陳列された様子の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which merchandise sold by weight is displayed at a store in the sixth example of the second embodiment.
図４５は、第２の実施形態の第６の例における計量値付け装置を正面方向からみた外観例を示す図である。 FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of the appearance of the weighing and pricing device according to the sixth example of the second embodiment as viewed from the front direction.
図４６Ａ−４６Ｃは、第２の実施形態の第６の例における接続情報コードの読み取り手順と、値付け操作画面の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 46A-46C is a diagram showing an example of a connection information code reading procedure and a pricing operation screen in the sixth example of the second embodiment.
図４７Ａ−４７Ｂは、第２の実施形態の第６の例における客が１の商品の値付けに応じて行う手順例を説明する図である。 FIG. 47A-47B is a diagram illustrating an example of a procedure performed by a customer in a sixth example of the second embodiment according to the price of one product.
図４８Ａ−４８Ｂは、第２の実施形態の第６の例における客が１の商品の値付けに応じて行う手順例を説明する図である。 FIG. 48A-48B is a diagram illustrating an example of a procedure performed by a customer in a sixth example of the second embodiment according to the price of one product.
図４９Ａ−４９Ｂは、第２の実施形態の第６の例における値付け操作画面、商品登録画面の態様例を示す図である。 FIGS. 49A-49B are diagrams showing an example of the mode of the pricing operation screen and the product registration screen in the sixth example of the second embodiment.
図５０は、第２の実施形態の第６の例における計量値付け装置、携帯端末及び取引管理サーバが、一取引における量り売り商品の登録に関連して実行する処理手順例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing pricing device, the mobile terminal, and the transaction management server in the sixth example of the second embodiment in connection with the registration of the merchandise sold by weight in one transaction.
図５１は、第２の実施形態の変形例における値付け操作画面の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of a pricing operation screen in a modified example of the second embodiment.
図５２は、第２の実施形態の変形例における値付け操作画面の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a pricing operation screen in a modified example of the second embodiment.
図５３は、第２の実施形態の変形例における計量結果画面の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of a measurement result screen in the modified example of the second embodiment.
図５４は、第３の実施形態における計量値付け装置の構成例を示す図である。 FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the weighing and pricing device according to the third embodiment.
図５５は、第３の実施形態における計量値付け装置の外観例を示す斜視図である。 FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing an external example of the weighing and pricing device according to the third embodiment.
図５６は、第３の実施形態における値付け操作画面の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of a pricing operation screen according to the third embodiment.
図５７は、第３の実施形態における値付け操作画面の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of a pricing operation screen according to the third embodiment.
図５８は、第３の実施形態における計量案内画面の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of a weighing guide screen according to the third embodiment.
図５９は、第３の実施形態における計量結果画面の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a measurement result screen according to the third embodiment.
図６０は、第３の実施形態における値付け操作画面の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a pricing operation screen according to the third embodiment.
図６１は、第３の実施形態における計量値付け装置、携帯端末及び取引管理サーバが、一取引における量り売り商品の登録に関連して実行する処理手順例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing pricing device, the mobile terminal, and the transaction management server in the third embodiment in connection with the registration of the merchandise sold by weight in one transaction.
図６２は、第４の実施形態の第１の例における販売システムのネットワーク構成を示す説明図である。 FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a network configuration of the sales system in the first example of the fourth embodiment.
図６３は、第４の実施形態におけるＰＯＳ端末のハードウェア構成の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the POS terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
図６４は、第４の実施形態における計量装置の外観の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing an example of the appearance of the weighing device according to the fourth embodiment.
図６５Ａは、第４の実施形態における計量装置のハードウェア構成の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 65A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the weighing device according to the fourth embodiment.
図６５Ｂは、第４の実施形態における言語関連テーブルの一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 65B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a language-related table according to the fourth embodiment.
図６５Ｃは、第４の実施形態における対応言語テーブルの一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 65C is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the corresponding language table in the fourth embodiment.
図６６は、第４の実施形態における携帯端末のハードウェア構成の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
図６７Ａ−６７Ｃは、第４の実施形態におけるクラウドサーバＳｖが管理する、携帯端末４５０ごとの各種情報の一例を示す説明図である。 FIGS. 67A-67C are explanatory views showing an example of various information for each mobile terminal 450 managed by the cloud server Sv in the fourth embodiment.
図６８は、第４の実施形態における販売システムにおける商品の登録及び精算における処理の流れを示すシーケンス図である。 FIG. 68 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow in product registration and settlement in the sales system according to the fourth embodiment.
図６９は、第４の実施形態における計量対象商品の登録処理の流れを示すシーケンス図である。 FIG. 69 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of registration processing of the goods to be weighed in the fourth embodiment.
図７０Ａは、第４の実施形態における携帯端末が行う計量対象商品の登録処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing an example of the registration process of the weighing target product performed by the mobile terminal in the fourth embodiment.
図７０Ｂは、第４の実施形態における携帯端末が行う計量装置との接続中処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing an example of processing during connection with the weighing device performed by the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
図７０Ｃは、第４の実施形態における計量装置が行う取引情報出力処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 70C is a flowchart showing an example of transaction information output processing performed by the weighing device according to the fourth embodiment.
図７１は、第４の実施形態におけるＰＯＳ端末が行う取引情報出力処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of transaction information output processing performed by the POS terminal in the fourth embodiment.
図７２は、第４の実施形態における計量対象商品の登録手順の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a procedure for registering a product to be weighed according to the fourth embodiment.
図７３は、第４の実施形態における計量装置に表示される待機画面の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a standby screen displayed on the weighing device according to the fourth embodiment.
図７４Ａ−７４Ｂは、第４の実施形態における携帯端末に表示されるペアリング中の画面の一例を示す説明図である。 74A-74B are explanatory views showing an example of a screen during pairing displayed on the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
図７５Ａ−７５Ｄは、第４の実施形態における計量装置及び携帯端末に表示される計量中の画面の一例を示す説明図である。 FIGS. 75A-75D are explanatory views showing an example of a screen during weighing displayed on the weighing device and the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
図７６は、第４の実施形態における計量装置が発行するラベルの一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a label issued by the weighing device according to the fourth embodiment.
図７７は、第４の実施形態における外国語で計量対象商品を登録する際の手順の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a procedure for registering a product to be weighed in a foreign language according to the fourth embodiment.
図７８は、第４の実施形態における計量装置に表示される外国語表示の待機画面の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a foreign language display standby screen displayed on the weighing device according to the fourth embodiment.
図７９Ａ−７９Ｂは、第４の実施形態における携帯端末に表示されるペアリング中の外国語表示の画面の一例を示す説明図である。 79A-79B are explanatory views showing an example of a foreign language display screen during pairing displayed on the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
図８０Ａ−８０Ｄは、第４の実施形態における計量装置及び携帯端末に表示される計量中の外国語表示の画面の一例を示す説明図である。 80A-80D is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen of a foreign language display during weighing displayed on the weighing device and the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
図８１は、第４の実施形態における計量装置が外国語で発行するラベルの一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a label issued in a foreign language by the weighing device according to the fourth embodiment.
図８２Ａ−８２Ｂは、第４の実施形態における携帯端末のディスプレイに表示される画面の一例を示す説明図である。 82A-82B are explanatory views showing an example of a screen displayed on the display of the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
図８３Ａ−８３Ｂは、第４の実施形態における精算時にＰＯＳ端末の客側ディスプレイ４２０５に表示される画面の遷移の一例を示す説明図である。 FIGS. 83A-83B are explanatory views showing an example of screen transitions displayed on the customer side display 4205 of the POS terminal at the time of settlement in the fourth embodiment.
図８４Ａ−８４Ｂは、第４の実施形態における携帯端末のディスプレイに中国語で表示される画面の一例を示す説明図である。 FIGS. 84A-84B are explanatory views showing an example of a screen displayed in Chinese on the display of the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment.
図８５Ａ−８５Ｂは、第４の実施形態における精算時にＰＯＳ端末の客側ディスプレイ４２０５に外国語で表示される画面の遷移の一例を示す説明図である。 FIGS. 85A-85B are explanatory views showing an example of a screen transition displayed in a foreign language on the customer side display 4205 of the POS terminal at the time of settlement in the fourth embodiment.
図８６は、第４の実施形態における第４の実施形態の第２の例における販売システム５５００のネットワーク構成を示す説明図である。 FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing a network configuration of the sales system 5500 in the second example of the fourth embodiment in the fourth embodiment.
図８７は、第４の実施形態における券売機の外観の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the appearance of the ticket vending machine according to the fourth embodiment.
図８８は、第４の実施形態における券売機のハードウェア構成の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the ticket vending machine according to the fourth embodiment.
図８９は、第４の実施形態における呼出ディスプレイのハードウェア構成の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the calling display according to the fourth embodiment.
図９０は、第４の実施形態における券売機が行う処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed by the ticket vending machine in the fourth embodiment.
図９１は、第４の実施形態における呼出ディスプレイが行う取引情報出力処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of transaction information output processing performed by the call display according to the fourth embodiment.
図９２は、第４の実施形態における券売機に日本語で表示されるメニュー画面の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a menu screen displayed in Japanese on the ticket vending machine according to the fourth embodiment.
図９３は、第４の実施形態における日本語で発行した食券の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a meal ticket issued in Japanese according to the fourth embodiment.
図９４は、第４の実施形態における呼出ディスプレイに日本語で表示される呼出画面の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a call screen displayed in Japanese on the call display according to the fourth embodiment.
図９５は、第４の実施形態における券売機に中国語で表示されるメニュー画面の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a menu screen displayed in Chinese on the ticket vending machine according to the fourth embodiment.
図９６は、第４の実施形態における中国語で発行した食券の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a meal ticket issued in Chinese according to the fourth embodiment.
図９７は、第４の実施形態における呼出ディスプレイに中国語で表示される呼出画面の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a call screen displayed in Chinese on the call display according to the fourth embodiment.
以下に図面を参照しつつ、本発明の実施形態を説明する。 An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
本発明の実施形態における販売システムは、店舗に導入される。店舗は、例えば、スーパーマーケット、コンビニストア、ドラックストア、ホームセンタ及び家電量販店である。販売システムは、例えば、ショッピングシステム、セルフチェックアウトシステム又は計量システムともいう。 The sales system according to the embodiment of the present invention is introduced in a store. The stores are, for example, supermarkets, convenience stores, drug stores, home improvement stores, and consumer electronics mass retailers. The sales system is also referred to as, for example, a shopping system, a self-checkout system or a weighing system.
以下に本発明の第１の実施形態を示す。 The first embodiment of the present invention is shown below.
第１の実施形態における販売システムは、計量装置及び携帯端末を含む。 The sales system in the first embodiment includes a weighing device and a mobile terminal.
図１は、実施形態における計量装置２０の外観の一例を示す説明図である。図２は、計量装置２０の構成の一例を示す説明図である。図１、図２において、同一部分には同一符号を付している。以下、図１を参照しつつ、図２に示した計量装置２０の構成を説明する。 FIG. 1 is an explanatory view showing an example of the appearance of the weighing device 20 in the embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the weighing device 20. In FIGS. 1 and 2, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals. Hereinafter, the configuration of the weighing device 20 shown in FIG. 2 will be described with reference to FIG.
計量装置２０は、Ｃｅｎｔｒａｌ　Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓｉｎｇ　Ｕｎｉｔ（ＣＰＵ）２１と、Ｒｅａｄ　Ｏｎｌｙ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ（ＲＯＭ）２２と、Ｒａｎｄｏｍ　Ａｃｃｅｓｓ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ（ＲＡＭ）２３と、スキャナ２４と、計量部２５と、タッチディスプレイ２６と、音声出力部２７と、印刷部２８と、第１通信部２９（第１トランシーバ）と、第２通信部３０（第２トランシーバ）とを備える。計量装置２０は、計量値付け装置と称されてもよい。 The weighing device 20 includes a Central Processing Unit (CPU) 21, a Read Only Memory (ROM) 22, a Random Access Memory (RAM) 23, a scanner 24, a weighing unit 25, a touch display 26, and an audio output unit 27. A printing unit 28, a first communication unit 29 (first transceiver), and a second communication unit 30 (second scanner) are provided. The weighing device 20 may be referred to as a weighing and pricing device.
ＣＰＵ２１は、中央演算処理装置であり、ＲＯＭ２２に記憶されているプログラムを読み出して実行することにより、計量装置２０の動作を制御する。 The CPU 21 is a central processing unit, and controls the operation of the weighing device 20 by reading and executing a program stored in the ROM 22.
ＲＯＭ２２は、読み出し専用メモリであり、例えば、プログラムをはじめとしてＣＰＵ２１が利用する種々の情報を記憶する。 The ROM 22 is a read-only memory, and stores, for example, various information used by the CPU 21 including a program.
ＲＡＭ２３は、読み出し書き込みメモリであり、例えば、ＲＯＭ２２から読み出した情報、第１通信部２９、第２通信部３０を介して取得した情報、処理によって生成される情報等、種々の情報を記憶する。種々のフラグの値もＲＡＭ２３に記憶される。 The RAM 23 is a read / write memory, and stores various information such as information read from the ROM 22, information acquired via the first communication unit 29 and the second communication unit 30, and information generated by processing. The values of various flags are also stored in the RAM 23.
スキャナ２４は、各種の情報を光学的に読み取る。例えば、スキャナ２４は、各種コード（バーコード、２次元コード等）を読み取る。 The scanner 24 optically reads various kinds of information. For example, the scanner 24 reads various codes (bar code, two-dimensional code, etc.).
計量部２５は、載台２５ａに載せられたもの（商品、容器等）を、例えばロードセルによる重量検出方式で計量する。 The weighing unit 25 weighs what is placed on the platform 25a (commodity, container, etc.) by, for example, a weight detection method using a load cell.
タッチディスプレイ２６は、客に各種情報を表示するとともに、タッチパネルも備え、操作部としての機能を有する。 The touch display 26 displays various information to the customer, is also provided with a touch panel, and has a function as an operation unit.
音声出力部２７は、音声を出力する。例えば、音声出力部２１４は、音声ガイダンス等を出力する。 The audio output unit 27 outputs audio. For example, the voice output unit 214 outputs voice guidance and the like.
印刷部２８は、媒体を発行するプリンタ装置（プリンタ）である。例えば、印刷部２８は、販売される商品の商品名が印刷された印刷物（以下、「ラベル」ともいう）を生成（印刷）し、ラベル排出口２８ａから排出（発行）する。印刷部２８は、当該商品の価格情報をコード化したバーコード（光学的に読取可能なバーコード）を印刷したラベルを発行可能である。但し、印刷部２８は、通常、ラベルに上記バーコードを印刷しない。 The printing unit 28 is a printer device (printer) that issues a medium. For example, the printing unit 28 generates (prints) a printed matter (hereinafter, also referred to as “label”) on which the product name of the product to be sold is printed, and discharges (issues) it from the label discharge port 28a. The printing unit 28 can issue a label printed with a barcode (optically readable barcode) that encodes the price information of the product. However, the printing unit 28 usually does not print the above barcode on the label.
第１通信部２９は、無線（例えば、無線ＬＡＮ（Ｌｏｃａｌ　Ａｒｅａ　Ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋ））、又は、有線によって、他の装置（店舗内に設置される管理装置、店舗内に設置される他の計量装置、店舗内に設置される精算装置、店舗外に設置される種々のサーバ等）との間で情報を送受信する。例えば、各種のマスタの取得、参照、プログラムの取得、更新の他に障害監視等にも用いられる。 The first communication unit 29 may be wireless (for example, wireless LAN (Local Area Network)) or wired to another device (management device installed in the store, other weighing device installed in the store, store). Information is sent and received between the payment device installed inside, various servers installed outside the store, etc.). For example, it is used for fault monitoring, etc. in addition to acquisition, reference, program acquisition, and update of various masters.
第２通信部３０は、近距離無線通信（例えば、Ｂｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈ（登録商標））により、他の装置（例えば、携帯端末６０）との間で情報を送受信する。第２通信部３０によって当該計量装置２０と他の装置（携帯端末６０等）とが通信しているときは（相互接続しているときは）、第２通信部３０によって（又は第２通信部３０とＣＰＵ２１との協業によって）、当該計量装置２０と他の装置との距離（又は、距離及び方向）を測定可能である。具体的には、電波強度によって測定するが、詳細は後述する。 The second communication unit 30 transmits / receives information to / from another device (for example, the mobile terminal 60) by short-range wireless communication (for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)). When the measuring device 20 is communicating with another device (portable terminal 60 or the like) by the second communication unit 30 (when interconnected), the second communication unit 30 (or the second communication unit) The distance (or distance and direction) between the weighing device 20 and another device can be measured (by the cooperation of 30 and the CPU 21). Specifically, it is measured by the radio field intensity, but the details will be described later.
計量装置２０は、時計機能（計時機能）を備えていてもよい。時計機能を備える計量装置２０は、例えば、現在時刻や、ある時間までの残時間や、ある状態となってからの経過時間を管理可能である。 The weighing device 20 may have a clock function (timekeeping function). The weighing device 20 having a clock function can manage, for example, the current time, the remaining time until a certain time, and the elapsed time from a certain state.
計量装置２０は、非接触型のＩＣタグに対して情報の読み書きを実行する無線タグ読書部を備えていてもよい。ＩＣタグは、例えば、風袋（容器）に貼付されていてもよい。ＩＣタグの種類としては、パッシブタグ（受動タグ）とアクティブタグ（能動タグ）、双方を組み合わせたセミアクティブタグ（起動型能動タグ）の何れであってもよい。 The weighing device 20 may include a wireless tag reading unit that executes reading and writing of information with respect to the non-contact type IC tag. The IC tag may be attached to, for example, a tare (container). The type of IC tag may be any of a passive tag (passive tag), an active tag (active tag), and a semi-active tag (activated active tag) in which both are combined.
図２では、計量装置２０がＣＰＵ２１と、ＲＯＭ２２と、ＲＡＭ２２とを備える構成を説明したが、計量装置２０は、それらに代えて、ＭＣＵ（Ｍｉｃｒｏ　Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌｌｅｒ　Ｕｎｉｔ）を備える構成であってもよい。 In FIG. 2, the configuration in which the weighing device 20 includes the CPU 21, the ROM 22, and the RAM 22 has been described, but the weighing device 20 may be configured to include an MCU (Micro Controller Unit) instead of them.
計量装置２０は、計量して販売される商品（量り売り商品。例えば、農作物、惣菜等）を取り扱う店舗（例えば、スーパーマーケット等）内に導入される。店舗内には、１以上の計量装置２０が設置される。 The weighing device 20 is introduced in a store (for example, a supermarket) that handles products that are weighed and sold (for example, agricultural products, prepared foods, etc.). One or more weighing devices 20 are installed in the store.
図１の符号Ａは、当該計量装置２０の装置番号（号機番号）「１号機」を示したシール（装置番号シール）である。店舗内に２以上の計量装置２０が設置される場合であっても、計量装置２０の夫々を装置番号シールによって示される装置番号によって区別することができる。シールではなく紙を貼付してもよい。計量装置２０は、シール、紙の貼付に代えて又は加えて装置番号をディスプレイに表示してもよい。装置番号に代えて装置毎のアイコン等でもよい。 Reference numeral A in FIG. 1 is a sticker (device number sticker) indicating the device number (machine number) “No. 1” of the weighing device 20. Even when two or more weighing devices 20 are installed in the store, each of the weighing devices 20 can be distinguished by the device number indicated by the device number sticker. Paper may be attached instead of a sticker. The weighing device 20 may display the device number on the display in place of or in addition to sticking a sticker or paper. Instead of the device number, an icon for each device may be used.
図３Ａ~図３Ｊは、計量販売の流れを説明する説明図である。図３Ａの左側は、店舗の陳列エリアに商品（レモン、リンゴ、オレンジ）が陳列されている様子を示している。レモンの値札８０には、商品名「レモン」、単価「ｎｎ（円／ｋｇ）」のほか、携帯端末６０が認識可能（光学的に読取可能）なバーコードが表示されている。レモンの値札８０に表示されているバーコードには、少なくとも、商品を識別可能な情報（レモンである旨の情報）が含まれている。値札８０は、紙などに印刷されたものであってもよいし、電子的なディスプレイに表示されたものであってもよい。他の商品（リンゴ、オレンジ）についても同様である。 3A to 3J are explanatory views for explaining the flow of weighing and selling. The left side of FIG. 3A shows how products (lemon, apple, orange) are displayed in the display area of the store. On the lemon price tag 80, in addition to the product name "lemon" and the unit price "nn (yen / kg)", a barcode that can be recognized (optically readable) by the mobile terminal 60 is displayed. The barcode displayed on the lemon price tag 80 contains at least information that can identify the product (information that it is a lemon). The price tag 80 may be printed on paper or the like, or may be displayed on an electronic display. The same applies to other products (apples, oranges).
図３Ａの右側は、ある場面（具体的には、レモンの値札８０に表示されているバーコードを読み取った際）における携帯端末６０の表示例である。より詳細には、客が、店舗内にて、１品目としてヨーグルトのバーコード（該ヨーグルトに付されているバーコード）を読み取り、２品目としてリンゴのバーコード（リンゴの値札に表示されているバーコード）、今回３品目としてレモンのバーコード（レモンの値札８０に表示されているバーコード）を読み取った場面における携帯端末６０の表示例である。客は、ヨーグルトのバーコードを読み取るときに当該ヨーグルトを手元のカゴ等に入れておくのと同様、レモン（リンゴも同様）のバーコードを読み取るときにも必要な数量のレモンを手元のカゴ等に入れておく。 The right side of FIG. 3A is a display example of the mobile terminal 60 in a certain scene (specifically, when the barcode displayed on the lemon price tag 80 is read). More specifically, the customer reads the yogurt barcode (the barcode attached to the yogurt) as one item in the store and displays the apple barcode (displayed on the apple price tag) as two items. (Bar code), this is a display example of the mobile terminal 60 in the scene where the lemon bar code (bar code displayed on the lemon price tag 80) is read as three items this time. Just as customers keep the yogurt in their basket when reading the yogurt barcode, they also have the necessary amount of lemon in their basket when reading the lemon (same for apples) barcode. Put it in.
携帯端末６０がディスプレイに表示する画面７０には、撮像画像を表示する撮像画像表示領域７１、個々の商品の登録情報等を表示する登録情報表示領域７２、合計情報を表示する合計情報表示領域７３、他の種々の情報を報知する報知情報表示領域７４が設けられている。 On the screen 70 displayed on the display of the mobile terminal 60, the captured image display area 71 for displaying the captured image, the registration information display area 72 for displaying the registration information of each product, and the total information display area 73 for displaying the total information. , A notification information display area 74 for notifying various other information is provided.
画面７０は、会員用の商品登録画面の一例（登録の状況に応じた画面）である。携帯端末６０は、例えば、特定のアプリケーションプログラム（以下、特定アプリ）によって画面７０のような商品登録画面を表示する。携帯端末６０は、例えば、顧客登録（会員登録）を経て、他の装置（例えば、店舗外に設置されるアプリ提供サーバ（非図示））から特定アプリを取得してもよい。つまり、携帯端末６０は、客の操作によって当該客の顧客情報を他の装置に送信（他の装置が提供する入力フォームに当該顧客自身に関する情報を入力等）し、他の装置から特定アプリを取得してもよい。 The screen 70 is an example of a product registration screen for members (a screen according to the registration status). The mobile terminal 60 displays a product registration screen such as the screen 70 by, for example, a specific application program (hereinafter, a specific application). The mobile terminal 60 may acquire a specific application from another device (for example, an application providing server (not shown) installed outside the store) after customer registration (member registration). That is, the mobile terminal 60 transmits the customer information of the customer to another device by the operation of the customer (inputs information about the customer himself / herself in the input form provided by the other device, etc.), and the specific application is transmitted from the other device. You may get it.
撮像画像表示領域７１には、バーコード（レモンの値札８０に表示されているバーコード）が表示されている。つまり、携帯端末６０は、自身が撮像しているバーコードを撮像画像表示領域７１にスルー画像（ライブビュー画像）として表示している。 A bar code (bar code displayed on the lemon price tag 80) is displayed in the captured image display area 71. That is, the mobile terminal 60 displays the barcode imaged by itself as a through image (live view image) in the captured image display area 71.
登録情報表示領域７２には、１品目としてヨーグルトの登録情報（符号ａ）、２品目としてリンゴの計量前情報（符号ｂ）、３品目としてレモンの計量前情報（符号ｃ）が表示されている。 In the registration information display area 72, yogurt registration information (reference numeral a) is displayed as one item, apple pre-weighing information (reference numeral b) is displayed as two items, and lemon pre-weighing information (reference numeral c) is displayed as three items. ..
量り売り商品に該当しないヨーグルトは、バーコードによって商品が特定されれば販売価格が特定される。従って、ヨーグルトについては販売価格として１６０円が表示されている。ヨーグルトについては、後工程である精算処理を行うのに必要な販売価格が既に特定（登録）されているため、登録情報と称している。 For yogurt that does not fall under the category of merchandise sold by weight, the selling price is specified if the product is identified by the barcode. Therefore, 160 yen is displayed as the selling price for yogurt. Yogurt is referred to as registration information because the selling price required to perform the settlement process, which is the subsequent process, has already been specified (registered).
一方、量り売り商品に該当するリンゴ（レモンも同様）は、バーコードによって商品が特定されても計量されなければ販売価格は特定されない。従って、リンゴ（レモンも同様）については販売価格として「？？」が表示されている。リンゴ（レモンも同様）については、後工程である精算処理を行うのに必要な情報な販売価格が未だ特定（登録）されていないため、便宜上、登録情報と区別し、計量前情報と称している。リンゴ（レモンも同様）は、販売価格が未だ特定されていないため、すなわち、未だ値付が完了していないため、未値付商品（又は、要値付商品、未計量商品、要計量商品）などともしている。 On the other hand, for apples (same for lemons), which are sold by weight, the selling price is not specified unless the product is weighed even if the product is specified by the barcode. Therefore, for apples (same for lemons), "??" is displayed as the selling price. For apples (same for lemons), the informational selling price required for the post-process settlement process has not yet been specified (registered), so for convenience, it is referred to as pre-weighing information to distinguish it from registered information. There is. Apples (as well as lemons) are unpriced products (or priced products, unweighed products, weighed products) because the selling price has not yet been specified, that is, the pricing has not been completed yet. And so on.
計量装置２０は、計量前情報（未値付商品）について、網掛け表示と、文言「要計量」の表示によって、計量が必要である旨を報知している。 The weighing device 20 notifies that the pre-weighing information (unpriced product) needs to be weighed by a shaded display and a display of the wording “weighing required”.
合計情報表示領域７３には、合計情報として、未値付商品（リンゴ、レモン）を除いた合計数量と合計金額とが表示されている（符号ｄ）。 In the total information display area 73, as total information, the total quantity excluding unpriced products (apple, lemon) and the total amount are displayed (reference numeral d).
合計情報表示領域７３には、「お会計に進む」ボタンが配置されている（符号ｄ）。「お会計に進む」ボタンは、後工程である精算処理に進むためのボタンである。但し、図３Ａの場面では、計量前情報が存在し、精算処理を実行することができないため、「お会計に進む」ボタンを操作（タッチ）しても精算処理に進まない。例えば、計量装置２０は、「お会計に進む」ボタンが操作された場合、未値付商品がある旨を報知し、精算処理に進まないようにしてもよい。図３Ａの場面の如く計量前情報が存在する場合には、「お会計に進む」ボタンを非表示（又はグレーダウン（グレーアウト）表示）としてもよい。 A "Proceed to checkout" button is arranged in the total information display area 73 (reference numeral d). The "Proceed to checkout" button is a button for proceeding to the settlement process, which is a subsequent process. However, in the scene of FIG. 3A, since the pre-weighing information exists and the settlement process cannot be executed, the settlement process does not proceed even if the "Proceed to checkout" button is operated (touched). For example, when the "Proceed to checkout" button is operated, the weighing device 20 may notify that there is an unpriced product and may not proceed to the settlement process. When the pre-weighing information exists as in the scene of FIG. 3A, the "Proceed to checkout" button may be hidden (or grayed out).
報知情報表示領域７４には、当該携帯端末６０を使用する客の名前（例えば、ニックネーム等の表示名）「ＴＳ」が表示され（符号ｅ）、当該携帯端末６０を使用する客のキャラクタ「トラ」が表示されている（符号ｆ）。客の名前やキャラクタは、例えば、顧客登録の際に当該客が登録（入力、選択）したものであってもよい。キャラクタは、特定アプリの起動時に、複数種類（例えば、店舗内にて重複しない程度の種類。３００種類等）のキャラクタのなかから、順番に（サイクリックに）選択されたものであってもよい。 In the notification information display area 74, the name of the customer who uses the mobile terminal 60 (for example, a display name such as a nickname) "TS" is displayed (reference numeral e), and the character "tiger" of the customer who uses the mobile terminal 60 is displayed. Is displayed (reference numeral f). The customer's name and character may be, for example, those registered (input, selected) by the customer at the time of customer registration. The characters may be sequentially (cyclically) selected from a plurality of types (for example, types that do not overlap in the store, 300 types, etc.) when the specific application is started. ..
図３Ｂは、計量装置２０の初期画面（待機画面）の一例である。図３Ｂの左側は、説明の便宜上、右側の初期画面を拡大したものである。初期画面には、携帯端末６０を用いて計量する客（会員）向けの会員指示表示領域４１、携帯端末６０を用いずに計量する客（基本的には非会員）向けの非会員指示表示領域４２が設けられている。会員指示表示領域４１には、携帯端末６０との接続用コード（携帯端末６０と通信の確立に用いられるコード）が表示されている。本実施例では、上記コードとして、ＱＲコード（登録商標）等の２次元コードを用いている。 FIG. 3B is an example of an initial screen (standby screen) of the weighing device 20. The left side of FIG. 3B is an enlarged view of the initial screen on the right side for convenience of explanation. On the initial screen, a member instruction display area 41 for customers (members) who weigh using the mobile terminal 60, and a non-member instruction display area 41 for customers (basically non-members) who weigh without using the mobile terminal 60. 42 is provided. In the member instruction display area 41, a code for connecting to the mobile terminal 60 (a code used to establish communication with the mobile terminal 60) is displayed. In this embodiment, a two-dimensional code such as a QR code (registered trademark) is used as the above code.
携帯端末６０を用いて計量する客は、携帯端末６０で、会員指示表示領域４１に表示されている２次元コードを読み取る。携帯端末６０を用いずに計量する客は、非会員指示表示領域４２を操作（タッチ）するか、載台２５ａに商品を載置する。 The customer who weighs using the mobile terminal 60 reads the two-dimensional code displayed in the member instruction display area 41 on the mobile terminal 60. The customer who weighs without using the mobile terminal 60 operates (touches) the non-member instruction display area 42 or places the product on the platform 25a.
初期画面の上部（会員指示表示領域４１の上側）には、当該計量装置の装置番号として「１号機」と表示されている。初期画面の上部には、携帯端末６０と接続していない旨の情報としてメッセージ「現在、接続されていません」が表示されている。 At the upper part of the initial screen (upper side of the member instruction display area 41), "Unit 1" is displayed as the device number of the weighing device. At the top of the initial screen, the message "Currently not connected" is displayed as information indicating that the mobile terminal 60 is not connected.
図３Ｃは、携帯端末６０が、計量装置２０の初期画面の会員指示表示領域４１に表示されている２次元コードを読み取る様子である。携帯端末６０は、撮像中（読取中）の２次元コードを撮像画像表示領域７１に表示している。携帯端末６０は、当該計量装置２０と接続準備中（接続を試みている最中）である旨を報知情報表示領域７４に表示している。 FIG. 3C shows a mobile terminal 60 reading a two-dimensional code displayed in the member instruction display area 41 on the initial screen of the weighing device 20. The mobile terminal 60 displays the two-dimensional code during imaging (reading) in the captured image display area 71. The mobile terminal 60 displays in the notification information display area 74 that it is preparing to connect to the measuring device 20 (while trying to connect).
携帯端末６０は、上記２次元コードを解析し、計量装置２０との通信に必要な情報を取得する。当該情報を用いて、携帯端末６０と計量装置２０とが、Ｂｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈなどの近距離無線通信を利用し、通信を確立する。通信が確立した後は、Ｂｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈなどの近距離無線通信だけでなく、他のＷｉ−Ｆｉなどの無線通信、光通信、携帯電話の広域通信網等が併用されてもよい。 The mobile terminal 60 analyzes the two-dimensional code and acquires information necessary for communication with the weighing device 20. Using the information, the mobile terminal 60 and the weighing device 20 establish communication by using short-range wireless communication such as Bluetooth. After the communication is established, not only short-range wireless communication such as Bluetooth, but also other wireless communication such as Wi-Fi, optical communication, wide area communication network of mobile phones and the like may be used in combination.
本実施形態では、計量装置２０が２次元コードを表示する例を説明するが、２次元コードを印刷した媒体（紙、シール等）を、計量装置２０の筐体に（又は計量装置２０の近傍に）、貼付してもよい。 In this embodiment, an example in which the weighing device 20 displays the two-dimensional code will be described, but a medium (paper, sticker, etc.) on which the two-dimensional code is printed is placed in the housing of the weighing device 20 (or in the vicinity of the weighing device 20). ), May be pasted.
本実施形態では、計量装置２０が表示する２次元コードを携帯端末６０が読み取る例を説明するが、携帯端末６０が２次元コードを表示し、携帯端末６０が表示する２次元コードを計量装置２０（スキャナ２４）が読み取るようにしてもよい。 In the present embodiment, an example in which the mobile terminal 60 reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the weighing device 20 will be described. However, the mobile terminal 60 displays the two-dimensional code and the two-dimensional code displayed by the mobile terminal 60 is read by the weighing device 20. (Scanner 24) may read it.
図３Ｄは、計量装置２０の値付画面（計量画面とも称する）の一例である。図３Ｄの左側は、説明の便宜上、右側の画面を拡大したものである。例えば、計量装置２０は、図３Ｃの接続操作によって通信が確立した場合、図３Ｄに示すような値付画面を表示する。 FIG. 3D is an example of a pricing screen (also referred to as a weighing screen) of the weighing device 20. The left side of FIG. 3D is an enlarged view of the screen on the right side for convenience of explanation. For example, the weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen as shown in FIG. 3D when communication is established by the connection operation shown in FIG. 3C.
値付画面には、未値付商品を選択（指定）する商品選択領域４３、値付情報を表示する値付情報表示領域４４、他の種々の情報を報知する報知情報表示領域４５が設けられている。 The priced screen is provided with a product selection area 43 for selecting (designating) unpriced products, a priced information display area 44 for displaying priced information, and a notification information display area 45 for notifying various other information. ing.
商品選択領域４３には、リンゴを選択するための商品ボタン、レモンを選択するための商品ボタンが表示されている。計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０との通信によって、リンゴ、レモンが未値付商品であることを認識し、リンゴを選択するための商品ボタン、レモンを選択するための商品ボタンを商品選択領域４３に表示する。 In the product selection area 43, a product button for selecting an apple and a product button for selecting a lemon are displayed. The weighing device 20 recognizes that apples and lemons are unpriced products by communicating with the mobile terminal 60, and sets a product button for selecting an apple and a product button for selecting a lemon in the product selection area 43. Display on.
例えば、計量装置２０は、個々の商品を識別する商品識別情報から夫々の商品を選択するための商品ボタンを特定可能な商品ボタンマスタを記憶し、商品識別情報（携帯端末６０から取得する未値付商品の商品識別情報）に対応する商品ボタンを特定し、表示する。計量装置２０は、商品識別情報に対応する商品ボタンを、商品マスタを記憶する外部の装置に問い合わせることによって取得し、表示してもよい。 For example, the weighing device 20 stores a product button master capable of identifying a product button for selecting each product from the product identification information that identifies each product, and stores the product identification information (unvalued value acquired from the mobile terminal 60). Identify and display the product button corresponding to the product identification information of the attached product). The weighing device 20 may acquire and display the product button corresponding to the product identification information by inquiring to an external device that stores the product master.
商品選択領域４３には、図１２に示すように、警告情報も表示可能である。詳細は、後述する。 As shown in FIG. 12, warning information can also be displayed in the product selection area 43. Details will be described later.
値付情報表示領域４４には、計量値、単価、金額が表示される。図３Ｄの場面では、未だ計量されていないため、何れも、ゼロが表示されている。 In the priced information display area 44, the measured value, the unit price, and the amount of money are displayed. In the scene of FIG. 3D, zero is displayed in each case because it has not been weighed yet.
報知情報表示領域４５には、携帯端末６０と接続している旨の情報として「接続中」と表示され（符号ｇ）、接続状態として「（良好）」が表示されている（符号ｈ）。つまり、計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０との通信が確立したことに基づいて接続中である旨、接続状態が良好である旨を報知情報表示領域４５に表示する。 In the notification information display area 45, "connecting" is displayed as information indicating that the mobile terminal 60 is connected (reference numeral g), and "(good)" is displayed as the connection state (reference numeral h). That is, the weighing device 20 displays in the notification information display area 45 that the connection is being established and that the connection state is good based on the establishment of communication with the mobile terminal 60.
報知情報表示領域４５には、接続している携帯端末６０を使用する客の名前「ＴＳ」が表示され（符号ｉ）、接続している携帯端末６０を使用する客のキャラクタが表示されている（符号ｊ）。計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０との通信によって、当該携帯端末６０を使用する客の名前、携帯端末６０を使用する客のキャラクタを認識し、報知情報表示領域４５に表示する。 In the notification information display area 45, the name "TS" of the customer who uses the connected mobile terminal 60 is displayed (reference numeral i), and the character of the customer who uses the connected mobile terminal 60 is displayed. (Code j). The weighing device 20 recognizes the name of the customer who uses the mobile terminal 60 and the character of the customer who uses the mobile terminal 60 by communicating with the mobile terminal 60, and displays them in the broadcast information display area 45.
例えば、計量装置２０は、接続している携帯端末６０を使用する客の名前やキャラクタを、個々の客を識別する顧客識別情報から夫々の客の名前やキャラクタを特定可能な顧客マスタを記憶する他の装置（店舗内に設置される管理装置、店舗外に設置されるサーバ等）に問い合わせることによって取得し、表示する。計量装置２０自身が顧客マスタを記憶してもよい。この場合、問い合わせは不要になる。 For example, the weighing device 20 stores a customer master capable of identifying the name and character of a customer who uses the connected mobile terminal 60 from the customer identification information that identifies each customer. Obtain and display by inquiring about other devices (management devices installed inside the store, servers installed outside the store, etc.). The weighing device 20 itself may store the customer master. In this case, no inquiry is required.
報知情報表示領域４５には、接続時間（接続開始からの経過時間）として「接続時間１０秒」が表示されている（符号ｋ）。 In the notification information display area 45, "connection time 10 seconds" is displayed as the connection time (elapsed time from the start of connection) (reference numeral k).
報知情報表示領域４５には、客（ＴＳ）に対し、行動（操作）を促進させるメッセージ（具体的には、「商品を選択してその商品を台に載せて下さい」なるメッセージ）が表示されている（符号ｌ）。 In the notification information display area 45, a message (specifically, a message "Please select a product and put the product on the table") is displayed to the customer (TS) to promote the action (operation). (Code l).
値付画面の上部（値付情報表示領域４４の上側）には、当該計量装置の装置番号として「１号機」と表示されている。 At the upper part of the pricing screen (upper side of the pricing information display area 44), "Unit 1" is displayed as the device number of the weighing device.
初期画面（図３Ｂ）では接続用コード（２次元コード）を表示するが、値付画面（図３Ｄ、図３Ｆ、図３Ｇ、図３Ｈ、図３Ｉ、図１２）では接続用コードを表示しない。つまり、計量装置２０がある携帯端末６０と接続しているときは、当該計量装置２０に対し、他の携帯端末６０は接続できない。 The connection code (two-dimensional code) is displayed on the initial screen (FIG. 3B), but the connection code is not displayed on the pricing screen (FIG. 3D, FIG. 3F, FIG. 3G, FIG. 3H, FIG. 3I, FIG. 12). That is, when the weighing device 20 is connected to a mobile terminal 60, another mobile terminal 60 cannot be connected to the weighing device 20.
図３Ｅは、計量装置２０が図３Ｄの値付画面を表示した場面における携帯端末６０側の表示例である。換言すれば、図３Ｅは、図３Ｃの接続操作によって通信が確立したときの携帯端末６０の表示例である。図３Ｅに示すように、報知情報表示領域７４には、客の名前やキャラクタに加えて、計量装置２０（１号機）と接続している旨の情報として「１号機に接続中」と表示され、接続状態として「（良好）」が表示されている。つまり、携帯端末６０は、計量装置２０（１号機）との通信が確立したことに基づいて接続中である旨、接続状態が良好である旨を報知情報表示領域７４に表示する。図３Ｅは、接続が完了した場面であるため、接続が完了した旨（例えば、「接続されました」というようなメッセージ）を表示してもよい。 FIG. 3E is a display example on the mobile terminal 60 side in the scene where the weighing device 20 displays the pricing screen of FIG. 3D. In other words, FIG. 3E is a display example of the mobile terminal 60 when communication is established by the connection operation of FIG. 3C. As shown in FIG. 3E, in the notification information display area 74, in addition to the customer's name and character, "Connecting to Unit 1" is displayed as information indicating that the measuring device 20 (Unit 1) is connected. , "(Good)" is displayed as the connection status. That is, the mobile terminal 60 displays in the notification information display area 74 that the connection is being established and that the connection state is good based on the establishment of communication with the weighing device 20 (Unit 1). Since FIG. 3E is a scene where the connection is completed, it may be displayed that the connection is completed (for example, a message such as "connected").
図３Ｆは、商品の選択後における計量装置２０の表示例である。図３Ｆの左側は、説明の便宜上、右側の画面を拡大したものである。例えば、図３Ｄの場面からリンゴの商品ボタンが操作（タッチ）された場合、計量装置２０は、図３Ｆに示すような値付画面を表示する。計量する商品（リンゴ）が選択されたため、計量装置２０は、図３Ｆに示すように、商品（リンゴ）の載置を促進するメッセージ等を表示し、当該商品（リンゴ）の単価を値付情報表示領域４４に表示する。計量装置２０は、個々の商品を識別する商品識別情報から夫々の商品の単価を特定可能な商品マスタを記憶し、商品識別情報に対応する単価を特定し、表示する。計量装置２０は、商品識別情報に対応する単価を、商品マスタを記憶する外部の装置に問い合わせることによって取得し、表示してもよい。 FIG. 3F is a display example of the weighing device 20 after the product is selected. The left side of FIG. 3F is an enlarged view of the right side screen for convenience of explanation. For example, when the apple product button is operated (touched) from the scene of FIG. 3D, the weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen as shown in FIG. 3F. Since the product (apple) to be weighed is selected, the weighing device 20 displays a message or the like promoting the placement of the product (apple) as shown in FIG. 3F, and sets the unit price of the product (apple) as pricing information. It is displayed in the display area 44. The weighing device 20 stores a product master capable of specifying the unit price of each product from the product identification information that identifies each product, and identifies and displays the unit price corresponding to the product identification information. The weighing device 20 may acquire and display the unit price corresponding to the product identification information by inquiring to an external device that stores the product master.
図３Ｇは、商品の計量後における計量装置２０の表示例である。図３Ｇの左側は、説明の便宜上、右側の画面を拡大したものである。例えば、図３Ｆの場面からリンゴが載台２５ａに載置された場合、計量装置２０は、図３Ｇに示すような値付画面を表示する。商品（リンゴ）が計量されたため、計量装置２０は、当該商品（リンゴ）の計量値、金額を値付情報表示領域４４に表示する。計量装置２０は、ラベルの印刷、発行を促進するメッセージを表示する。図３Ｇの例では、計量装置２０は、ラベルを印刷、発行させるためのプリントボタン４００の操作を促進させる「プリントボタンを押してください」なるメッセージを表示している。 FIG. 3G is a display example of the weighing device 20 after weighing the product. The left side of FIG. 3G is an enlarged view of the screen on the right side for convenience of explanation. For example, when an apple is placed on the platform 25a from the scene of FIG. 3F, the weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen as shown in FIG. 3G. Since the product (apple) has been weighed, the weighing device 20 displays the measured value and the amount of the product (apple) in the pricing information display area 44. The weighing device 20 displays a message prompting the printing and issuance of the label. In the example of FIG. 3G, the weighing device 20 displays a message "press the print button" that facilitates the operation of the print button 400 for printing and issuing the label.
図３Ｈは、ラベルの発行時における計量装置２０の表示例である。例えば、図３Ｇの場面からプリントボタン４００が操作された場合、計量装置２０は、図３Ｈに示すような値付画面を表示する。ラベルが印刷、発行されるため、計量装置２０は、該ラベルの商品（リンゴ）の貼付を促進するメッセージ等を表示する。当該商品（リンゴ）についての値付けは完了するため、値付情報表示領域４４には、ゼロが表示されている。 FIG. 3H is a display example of the weighing device 20 at the time of issuing the label. For example, when the print button 400 is operated from the scene of FIG. 3G, the weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen as shown in FIG. 3H. Since the label is printed and issued, the weighing device 20 displays a message or the like that promotes the sticking of the product (apple) of the label. Since the pricing for the product (apple) is completed, zero is displayed in the pricing information display area 44.
図３Ｉは、ラベルの発行後における計量装置２０の表示例である。例えば、図３Ｈの場面から、発行されたラベルがラベル排出口２８ａから取り去られた場合、計量装置２０は、図３Ｉに示すような値付画面を表示する。リンゴの値付けが完了したため、商品選択領域４３において、リンゴを選択するための商品ボタンは消去され、レモンを選択するための商品ボタンのみが表示されている。報知情報表示領域４５には、接続時間として、「接続時間５３秒」が表示されている（符号ｋ）。完了したリンゴは、グレーダウン表示（押下不能）にしてもよい。 FIG. 3I is a display example of the weighing device 20 after the label is issued. For example, from the scene of FIG. 3H, when the issued label is removed from the label discharge port 28a, the weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen as shown in FIG. 3I. Since the price of the apple has been completed, the product button for selecting the apple is deleted in the product selection area 43, and only the product button for selecting the lemon is displayed. In the notification information display area 45, "connection time 53 seconds" is displayed as the connection time (reference numeral k). The completed apple may be displayed in gray down (cannot be pressed).
図３Ｊは、計量装置２０が図３Ｉの値付画面を表示した場面における携帯端末６０側の表示例である。換言すれば、図３Ｊは、図３Ｈの場面からラベルが取り去られたときの携帯端末６０の表示例である。図３Ｊに示すように、リンゴの計量（値付け）が完了したため、登録情報表示領域７２において、リンゴについて、「要計量」から「計量」に変更され、販売価格が表示されている（符号ｂ）。つまり、リンゴは、計量前情報から登録情報に更新されている。合計情報にもリンゴ分が反映されている（符号ｄ）。 FIG. 3J is a display example on the mobile terminal 60 side in the scene where the weighing device 20 displays the pricing screen of FIG. 3I. In other words, FIG. 3J is a display example of the mobile terminal 60 when the label is removed from the scene of FIG. 3H. As shown in FIG. 3J, since the weighing (price) of the apple is completed, the apple is changed from "weighing required" to "weighing" in the registration information display area 72, and the selling price is displayed (reference numeral b). ). That is, the apple is updated from the pre-weighing information to the registered information. The apple content is also reflected in the total information (reference numeral d).
以下、図４~図１１を用いて、計量装置２０等の処理の流れを説明する。具体的には、計量装置２０が、携帯端末６０と接続し、全部の未値付商品の値付けが完了して切断（完了して切断）する流れや、全部の未値付商品の値付けが完了する前に切断（中断による切断）する流れ等を説明する。 Hereinafter, the flow of processing of the weighing device 20 and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 11. Specifically, the weighing device 20 connects to the mobile terminal 60, and the pricing of all unpriced products is completed and disconnected (completed and disconnected), and the pricing of all unpriced products is completed. The flow of disconnection (disconnection due to interruption) before the completion of is described.
図４（図６も同様）は、計量装置２０の動作の一例を示したフローチャートである。図５（図７~図１１も同様）は、計量装置２０等の処理の流れを示したシーケンス図である。 FIG. 4 (also in FIG. 6) is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the weighing device 20. FIG. 5 (the same applies to FIGS. 7 to 11) is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of the weighing device 20 and the like.
図４のフローチャートは、計量装置２０の動作の概略を示したものである。図４のフローチャートの開始時において、計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０と接続していないものとする。 The flowchart of FIG. 4 shows an outline of the operation of the weighing device 20. At the start of the flowchart of FIG. 4, it is assumed that the weighing device 20 is not connected to the mobile terminal 60.
ステップＳ１０：計量装置２０は、接続処理を実行する。接続処理は、携帯端末６０と通信を確立させる処理である。そしてステップＳ２０に進む。接続処理の詳細は、図５のシーケンス図を用いて説明する。 Step S10: The weighing device 20 executes the connection process. The connection process is a process for establishing communication with the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S20. The details of the connection process will be described with reference to the sequence diagram of FIG.
ステップＳ２０：計量装置２０は、接続監視処理を実行する。接続監視処理は、通信確立後の携帯端末６０との接続を監視する処理である。そしてステップＳ３０に進む。接続監視処理の詳細は、図６のフローチャート、図７~図９のシーケンス図を用いて説明する。 Step S20: The weighing device 20 executes a connection monitoring process. The connection monitoring process is a process of monitoring the connection with the mobile terminal 60 after the communication is established. Then, the process proceeds to step S30. The details of the connection monitoring process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 6 and the sequence diagrams of FIGS. 7 to 9.
ステップＳ３０：計量装置２０は、中断するか否かを判断する。中断すると判断した場合（ステップＳ３０：ＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ６０に進む。中断しないと判断した場合（ステップＳ３０：ＮＯ）、ステップＳ４０に進む。 Step S30: The weighing device 20 determines whether or not to interrupt. If it is determined to be interrupted (step S30: YES), the process proceeds to step S60. If it is determined that the interruption is not performed (step S30: NO), the process proceeds to step S40.
ステップＳ３０では、計量装置２０は、中断フラグの値に基づいて中断するか否かを判断する。中断フラグの値は、接続状態に基づいて接続を中断すると判断した場合に「１」となる（図８のステップＳ２３４参照）。つまり、中断フラグの値が「１」である場合には（ステップＳ３０：ＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ６０に進む。中断フラグの値が「１」でない場合には（ステップＳ３０：ＮＯ）、ステップＳ４０に進む。 In step S30, the weighing device 20 determines whether or not to interrupt based on the value of the interruption flag. The value of the interruption flag becomes "1" when it is determined that the connection is interrupted based on the connection state (see step S234 in FIG. 8). That is, when the value of the interruption flag is "1" (step S30: YES), the process proceeds to step S60. If the value of the interruption flag is not "1" (step S30: NO), the process proceeds to step S40.
ステップＳ４０：計量装置２０は、計量処理（値付処理）を実行する。計量処理は、未計量の商品を計量し値付けを実行する処理である。そしてステップＳ５０に進む。計量処理の詳細は、図１０のシーケンス図を用いて説明する。 Step S40: The weighing device 20 executes a weighing process (price processing). The weighing process is a process of weighing unweighed goods and executing pricing. Then, the process proceeds to step S50. The details of the weighing process will be described with reference to the sequence diagram of FIG.
ステップＳ５０：計量装置２０は、終了するか否かを判断する。終了すると判断した場合（ステップＳ５０：ＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ６０に進む。終了しないと判断した場合（ステップＳ５０：ＮＯ）、ステップＳ２０に戻る。 Step S50: The weighing device 20 determines whether or not to end. If it is determined to end (step S50: YES), the process proceeds to step S60. If it is determined that the process does not end (step S50: NO), the process returns to step S20.
ステップＳ５０では、計量装置２０は、完了フラグの値に基づいて終了するか否かを判断する。完了フラグの値は、全部の未値付商品の値付けが完了した場合に「１」となる（図１０のステップＳ４０７参照）。つまり、完了フラグの値が「１」である場合には（ステップＳ５０：ＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ５０に進む。完了フラグの値が「１」でない場合には（ステップＳ５０：ＮＯ）、ステップＳ２０に戻る。 In step S50, the weighing device 20 determines whether or not to end based on the value of the completion flag. The value of the completion flag becomes "1" when the pricing of all unpriced products is completed (see step S407 in FIG. 10). That is, when the value of the completion flag is "1" (step S50: YES), the process proceeds to step S50. If the value of the completion flag is not "1" (step S50: NO), the process returns to step S20.
ステップＳ６０：計量装置２０は、切断処理を実行する。切断処理は、携帯端末６０との通信（接続）を切断する処理である。そして、本フローチャートは終了する。切断処理の詳細は、図１１のシーケンス図を用いて説明する。 Step S60: The weighing device 20 executes a cutting process. The disconnection process is a process of disconnecting the communication (connection) with the mobile terminal 60. Then, this flowchart ends. The details of the cutting process will be described with reference to the sequence diagram of FIG.
図５は、計量装置２０と携帯端末６０とを接続する際の、計量装置２０及び携帯端末６０の夫々の処理の流れを示したシーケンス図である。図５の左側は計量装置２０の処理を示し、図５の右側は携帯端末６０の処理を示している。図５の左側の計量装置２０の各処理は、図４のステップＳ１０の接続処理に相当する。 FIG. 5 is a sequence diagram showing the processing flow of each of the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 when the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 are connected. The left side of FIG. 5 shows the processing of the weighing device 20, and the right side of FIG. 5 shows the processing of the mobile terminal 60. Each process of the weighing device 20 on the left side of FIG. 5 corresponds to the connection process of step S10 of FIG.
ステップＳ１０１：計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０から送信された接続開始要求を受信する。そしてステップＳ１０２に進む。接続開始要求は、例えば、当該接続開始要求の送信元である携帯端末６０（つまり接続を試みている携帯端末６０）を利用する客を識別する顧客識別情報等を含む。 Step S101: The weighing device 20 receives the connection start request transmitted from the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S102. The connection start request includes, for example, customer identification information that identifies a customer who uses the mobile terminal 60 (that is, the mobile terminal 60 that is trying to connect) that is the source of the connection start request.
ステップＳ１０２：計量装置２０は、接続開始要求の送信元である携帯端末６０に接続開始確認応答を送信する。接続開始確認応答は、例えば、個々の接続を識別する接続識別情報、当該計量装置２０を識別する装置識別情報を含む。そしてステップＳ１０３に進む。 Step S102: The weighing device 20 transmits a connection start confirmation response to the mobile terminal 60 that is the source of the connection start request. The connection start confirmation response includes, for example, connection identification information for identifying individual connections and device identification information for identifying the weighing device 20. Then, the process proceeds to step S103.
ステップＳ１０３：計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０から送信された商品識別情報（未値付商品の商品識別情報）を受信する。そしてステップＳ１０４に進む。 Step S103: The weighing device 20 receives the product identification information (product identification information of the unpriced product) transmitted from the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S104.
ステップＳ１０４：計量装置２０は、未値付商品のボタンを配置した値付画面を表示する。例えば、計量装置２０は、図３Ｄに示すように、未値付商品であるリンゴを選択するための商品ボタン、レモンを選択するための商品ボタンを配置した値付画面を表示する。計量装置２０は、値付画面において、接続中である旨の情報や、接続先に関する情報を表示する。例えば、計量装置２０は、図３Ｄに示すように、接続中である旨の情報として「接続中」と表示し（符号ｇ）、接続先に関する情報として客の名前やキャラクタを表示する（符号ｉ、符号ｊ）。そしてステップＳ１０５に進む。 Step S104: The weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen on which buttons for unpriced goods are arranged. For example, as shown in FIG. 3D, the weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen in which a product button for selecting an apple, which is an unpriced product, and a product button for selecting a lemon are arranged. The weighing device 20 displays information indicating that the connection is in progress and information regarding the connection destination on the pricing screen. For example, as shown in FIG. 3D, the weighing device 20 displays “connecting” as information indicating that the connection is in progress (reference numeral g), and displays a customer's name or character as information regarding the connection destination (reference numeral i). , Reference numeral j). Then, the process proceeds to step S105.
ステップＳ１０４では、計量装置２０は、ステップＳ１０１で携帯端末６０から受信した接続開始要求に含まれる顧客識別情報に基づいて客の名前やキャラクタを表示する。例えば、計量装置２０は、ステップＳ１０１で携帯端末６０から受信した接続開始要求に含まれる顧客識別情報に対応する名前やキャラクタを、個々の客を識別する顧客識別情報から夫々の客の名前やキャラクタを特定可能な顧客マスタを記憶する他の装置（店舗内に設置される管理装置、店舗外に設置されるサーバ等）に問い合わせることによって取得し、表示する。計量装置２０自身が顧客マスタを記憶してもよい。この場合、問い合わせは不要になる。 In step S104, the weighing device 20 displays the customer's name and character based on the customer identification information included in the connection start request received from the mobile terminal 60 in step S101. For example, the weighing device 20 obtains a name or character corresponding to the customer identification information included in the connection start request received from the mobile terminal 60 in step S101, and each customer's name or character from the customer identification information that identifies each customer. Is acquired and displayed by inquiring to other devices (management devices installed in the store, servers installed outside the store, etc.) that store the identifiable customer master. The weighing device 20 itself may store the customer master. In this case, no inquiry is required.
ステップＳ１１２において携帯端末６０は、客の名前やキャラクタに関する情報を含む接続開始要求を送信してもよい。この場合、計量装置２０は、ステップＳ１０１で携帯端末６０から受信した接続開始要求に含まれる客の名前やキャラクタに関する情報に基づいて客の名前やキャラクタを表示する。 In step S112, the mobile terminal 60 may transmit a connection start request including information about the customer's name and character. In this case, the weighing device 20 displays the customer's name and character based on the information about the customer's name and character included in the connection start request received from the mobile terminal 60 in step S101.
ステップＳ１０５：計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０との接続状態を評価する。そしてステップＳ１０６に進む。 Step S105: The weighing device 20 evaluates the connection state with the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S106.
ここで、接続状態の評価を説明する。接続状態の評価は、当該接続処理（図５）の他、後述する接続監視処理（図６）においても行われるが、共に、例えば、相互に接続した近距離無線通信の電波強度に基づいて行われる。より詳細には、計量装置２０は、上記電波強度と閾値（評価基準値）に基づいて接続状態を評価する。閾値は、計量装置２０が記憶してもよいし、計量装置２０が参照可能な他の装置（店舗内に設置される管理装置、店舗外に設置されるサーバ等）に記憶されていてもよい。閾値の個数は１以上であればよく、閾値の個数に応じて評価段階数も異なる。例えば、閾値が１つである場合には評価段階数は２段階（例えば、電波強度が当該閾値以上である場合の評価「良好」、電波強度が当該閾値未満である場合の評価「不良」の２段階）となる。閾値が第１閾値と第１閾値よりも小さい第２閾値の２つである場合には評価段階数は３段階（例えば、電波強度が第１閾値以上である場合の評価「良好」、電波強度が第２閾値以上第１閾値未満である場合の評価「やや不良」、電波強度が第２閾値未満である場合の評価「不良」の３段階）となる。本実施形態では、閾値の個数が２つの例を説明するが、上述したように閾値の個数は１つであってもよいし、３つ以上であってもよい。 Here, the evaluation of the connection state will be described. The evaluation of the connection state is performed not only in the connection process (FIG. 5) but also in the connection monitoring process (FIG. 6) described later, both of which are performed based on, for example, the radio field strength of the short-range wireless communication connected to each other. Will be. More specifically, the measuring device 20 evaluates the connection state based on the radio wave intensity and the threshold value (evaluation reference value). The threshold value may be stored in the weighing device 20 or in another device (a management device installed in the store, a server installed outside the store, etc.) that the measuring device 20 can refer to. .. The number of thresholds may be 1 or more, and the number of evaluation stages varies depending on the number of thresholds. For example, when the threshold value is one, the number of evaluation stages is two stages (for example, the evaluation "good" when the radio field intensity is equal to or more than the threshold value, and the evaluation "poor" when the radio wave intensity is less than the threshold value. 2 stages). When the threshold value is two, the first threshold value and the second threshold value smaller than the first threshold value, the number of evaluation stages is three (for example, the evaluation "good" when the radio wave intensity is equal to or higher than the first threshold value, the radio wave intensity. Is the second threshold value or more and less than the first threshold value, the evaluation is “slightly poor”, and the radio wave intensity is less than the second threshold value, the evaluation is “poor”). In the present embodiment, an example in which the number of threshold values is two will be described, but as described above, the number of threshold values may be one or three or more.
一般的には、接続状態の評価は、通信の可否や通信品質（性能）に基づく評価である。しかしながら、本実施形態における接続状態の評価は、計量装置２０の通信相手である携帯端末６０（計量装置２０と接続させた携帯端末６０を利用する客）との距離の評価である。従って、「接続状態の評価」は「通信相手との距離の評価」を示す。 Generally, the evaluation of the connection state is an evaluation based on the feasibility of communication and the communication quality (performance). However, the evaluation of the connection state in the present embodiment is an evaluation of the distance from the mobile terminal 60 (the customer who uses the mobile terminal 60 connected to the weighing device 20), which is the communication partner of the weighing device 20. Therefore, the "evaluation of the connection state" indicates the "evaluation of the distance to the communication partner".
例えば、計量装置２０は、下記の２つの閾値（第１閾値、第２閾値）を記憶し、接続状態を評価する。 For example, the weighing device 20 stores the following two threshold values (first threshold value and second threshold value) and evaluates the connection state.
閾値１：閾値１は、通信相手である携帯端末６０が、当該計量装置２０の近傍（例えば２メートル以内）に存在するか否かを判断するための閾値である。 Threshold 1: Threshold 1 is a threshold for determining whether or not the mobile terminal 60, which is the communication partner, exists in the vicinity of the measuring device 20 (for example, within 2 meters).
閾値２：閾値２は、通信相手である携帯端末６０が、当該計量装置２０の比較的近く（近傍よりは遠く）の位置（例えば１０メートル以内）に存在するか否かを判断するための閾値である。 Threshold 2: The threshold 2 is a threshold for determining whether or not the mobile terminal 60, which is the communication partner, exists at a position (for example, within 10 meters) relatively close (farther than the vicinity) of the weighing device 20. Is.
例えば、採用する近距離無線通信（例えば、Ｂｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈ）の規格等にもよるが、通信相手（携帯端末６０）が計量装置２０の近傍に存在すると判断される限界（計量装置２０との距離が２メートルの位置）に存在するときの電波強度（携帯端末６０から送信される電波の受信強度）を閾値１として設定（記憶）し、通信相手（携帯端末６０）が計量装置２０の比較的近く存在すると判断される限界（計量装置２０との距離が１０メートルの位置）に存在するときの電波強度を閾値２として設定する。閾値１、閾値２の具体的な値は、当該近距離無線通信の仕様から取得してもよいし、実験等により採取等してもよい。 For example, although it depends on the standard of short-range wireless communication (for example, Bluetooth) to be adopted, the limit (distance from the measuring device 20 is 2) where it is determined that the communication partner (mobile terminal 60) exists in the vicinity of the measuring device 20. The radio wave strength (reception strength of radio waves transmitted from the mobile terminal 60) when present at the position of meters) is set (stored) as a threshold value 1, and the communication partner (mobile terminal 60) exists relatively close to the weighing device 20. Then, the radio wave intensity when it exists at the limit determined (the distance from the measuring device 20 is 10 meters) is set as the threshold value 2. The specific values of the threshold value 1 and the threshold value 2 may be obtained from the specifications of the short-range wireless communication, or may be collected by an experiment or the like.
計量装置２０は、電波強度が第１閾値以上である場合には、接続状態「良好」と評価する。客は、未値付商品の値付けを行うために計量装置２０と接続する。従って、通常、計量装置２０と接続した客は当該計量装置２０の近傍に存在する。つまり、計量装置２０は、基本的に“接続状態「良好」”と判断する。 When the radio wave intensity is equal to or higher than the first threshold value, the measuring device 20 evaluates the connection state as “good”. The customer connects with the weighing device 20 to price the unpriced goods. Therefore, usually, the customer connected to the weighing device 20 exists in the vicinity of the weighing device 20. That is, the weighing device 20 basically determines that the connection state is “good”.
計量装置２０は、電波強度が第２閾値以上第１閾値未満である場合には、接続状態「やや不良」と評価する。例えば、客が、計量装置２０から少し離れた場合、計量装置２０は、“接続状態「やや不良」”と判断する。 When the radio wave intensity is equal to or more than the second threshold value and less than the first threshold value, the measuring device 20 evaluates the connection state as “slightly defective”. For example, when the customer is a little away from the weighing device 20, the weighing device 20 determines that the connection state is “slightly defective”.
計量装置２０は、電波強度が第２閾値未満である場合には、接続状態「不良」と評価する。例えば、客が、計量装置２０からある程度離れた場合、計量装置２０は、“接続状態「不良」”と判断する。 When the radio wave intensity is less than the second threshold value, the measuring device 20 evaluates the connection state as “poor”. For example, when the customer is separated from the weighing device 20 to some extent, the weighing device 20 determines that the connection state is “defective”.
“接続状態「良好」”であるときは、計量装置２０の近傍に本来の客（接続中の客）が存在する。従って、“接続状態「良好」”であるときは、本来の客以外の客が、当該計量装置２０を誤って操作（接続中ではないと勘違いして操作）する可能性（又は操作し続ける可能性）は極めて低い。 When the “connection state is“ good ””, the original customer (customer being connected) exists in the vicinity of the weighing device 20. Therefore, when the “connection state is“ good ””, the customer other than the original customer is present. It is extremely unlikely that the customer will mistakenly operate (or continue to operate) the weighing device 20 (misunderstanding that it is not connected).
“接続状態「やや不良」”であるときは、“接続状態「不良」”であるときよりも、計量装置２０の位置に戻り易い位置に本来の客（接続中の客）が存在する。従って、“接続状態「やや不良」”であるときは、“接続状態「不良」”であるときよりも、本来の客以外の客が、当該計量装置２０を誤って操作する可能性（又は操作し続ける可能性）は低い。換言すれば、“接続状態「不良」”であるときは、“接続状態「やや不良」”であるときよりも、計量装置２０の位置に戻り難い位置に本来の客（接続中の客）が存在する。従って、“接続状態「不良」”であるときは、“接続状態「やや不良」”であるときよりも、本来の客以外の客が、当該計量装置２０を誤って操作する可能性（又は操作し続ける可能性）は高い。 Therefore, when the “connection state is“ slightly defective ””, the original customer (the connected customer) is present at a position where it is easier to return to the position of the weighing device 20 than when the “connection state is“ defective ””. , When the connection state is "slightly defective", there is a possibility (or operation) that a customer other than the original customer erroneously operates the weighing device 20 than when the connection state is "defective". The possibility of continuing) is low. In other words, when the “connection state is“ defective ””, the original customer is in a position where it is more difficult to return to the position of the weighing device 20 than when the “connection state is“ slightly defective ””. (Customers connected) exist. Therefore, when the “connection state is“ defective ””, the customer other than the original customer is the weighing device 20 than when the “connection state is“ slightly defective ””. There is a high possibility that you will accidentally operate (or continue to operate).
“接続状態「良好」”と表示する場面（例えば図３Ｉの場面）では、“接続状態「良好」”に代えて又は加えて、“通信相手「近傍」”や“通信相手「操作位置」”“通信相手「○」”なとど表示してもよい。“接続状態「やや不良」”と表示する場面（例えば図１２の場面）では、“接続状態「やや不良」”に代えて又は加えて、“通信相手「１０メートル以内に存在」”や“通信相手「非操作位置（一時的）」”や“通信相手「△」”などと表示してもよい。“接続状態「不良」”と表示する場面（非図示）では、“接続状態「不良」”に代えて又は加えて、“通信相手「１０メートル以内に不在」”や“通信相手「非操作位置（非一時的）」”や“通信相手「×」”なとど表示してもよい。 In the scene where "connection state" good "" is displayed (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 3I), in place of or in addition to "connection state" good "", "communication partner" neighborhood "" or "communication partner" operation position "" It may be displayed as "communication partner" ○ "". In a scene where "connection status" slightly defective "" is displayed (for example, in the scene shown in FIG. 12), it may be displayed in place of or in addition to "connection status" slightly defective "". Then, "communication partner" exists within 10 meters "", "communication partner" non-operation position (temporary) "", "communication partner" △ "", etc. may be displayed. In the scene (not shown), in place of or in addition to "connection status" defective "", "communication partner" absent within 10 meters "" or "communication partner" non-operation position (non-temporary) "" Or "Communication partner" x "" may be displayed.
接続状態の評価は、当該接続処理（図５）の他、後述する接続監視処理（図６）においても行われると説明したが、接続処理（図５）では基本的には接続状態は良好であると判断されるが、接続監視処理（図６）では接続状態は良好であると判断されるとは限らない。つまり、接続処理（図５）は、計量装置２０が表示する２次元コードを携帯端末６０が読み取った場面に実行されるため、計量装置２０と携帯端末６０の距離は短い筈である。従って、当該接続処理における接続状態の評価では、基本的には確認結果として接続状態は良好であると判断される。一方、接続監視処理（図６）は、接続開始から切断迄の間、繰り返し実行されるため（図４）、計量装置２０と携帯端末６０の距離が長くなる可能性もある。例えば、客が、全部の未値付商品の値付けが完了していないのに完了したと勘違いして計量装置２０から去ってしまった場合や、値付けの最中に商品を追加又は返却するために計量装置２０から離れた陳列エリアに向かってしまった場合には、計量装置２０と携帯端末６０の距離が長くなる。従って、接続監視処理における接続状態の評価では、確認結果として接続状態は良好であると判断されるとは限らない。 It was explained that the evaluation of the connection state is performed not only in the connection process (FIG. 5) but also in the connection monitoring process (FIG. 6) described later, but in the connection process (FIG. 5), the connection state is basically good. Although it is determined that there is, it is not always determined that the connection state is good in the connection monitoring process (FIG. 6). That is, since the connection process (FIG. 5) is executed when the mobile terminal 60 reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the weighing device 20, the distance between the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 should be short. Therefore, in the evaluation of the connection state in the connection process, it is basically judged that the connection state is good as a confirmation result. On the other hand, since the connection monitoring process (FIG. 6) is repeatedly executed from the start of the connection to the disconnection (FIG. 4), the distance between the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 may become long. For example, if a customer leaves the weighing device 20 because he / she mistakenly thinks that the pricing of all unpriced products has been completed, or adds or returns products during pricing. Therefore, when the user goes to the display area away from the weighing device 20, the distance between the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 becomes long. Therefore, in the evaluation of the connection state in the connection monitoring process, it is not always judged that the connection state is good as a confirmation result.
ステップＳ１０６：計量装置２０は、ステップＳ１０５の確認結果に基づいて、携帯端末６０に接続状態情報を送信する。そしてステップＳ１０７に進む。 Step S106: The weighing device 20 transmits the connection status information to the mobile terminal 60 based on the confirmation result of step S105. Then, the process proceeds to step S107.
ステップＳ１０７：計量装置２０は、ステップＳ１０５の確認結果に基づいて、接続状態に関する情報を表示する。例えば、計量装置２０は、図３Ｄに示すように、接続状態に関する情報として「（良好）」を表示する（符号ｈ）。そしてステップＳ１０８に進む。 Step S107: The weighing device 20 displays information on the connection state based on the confirmation result in step S105. For example, as shown in FIG. 3D, the weighing device 20 displays “(good)” as information regarding the connection state (reference numeral h). Then, the process proceeds to step S108.
ステップＳ１０８：計量装置２０は、接続時間を計時する接続時間カウンタをセットし、接続時間の表示を開始する。つまり、計量装置２０は、当該ステップＳ２０８においてゼロからカウントアップ（計時）される接続時間カウンタの値に基づいて、以降、図１１のステップＳ６０３において接続時間カウンタがリセットされる迄の間、経過時間を更新表示し続ける。例えば、図３Ｄでは、接続時間として「１０秒」が表示されている（符号ｋ）。 Step S108: The weighing device 20 sets a connection time counter that measures the connection time, and starts displaying the connection time. That is, the weighing device 20 is based on the value of the connection time counter that counts up (timed) from zero in the step S208, and thereafter, the elapsed time until the connection time counter is reset in the step S603 of FIG. Continue to update and display. For example, in FIG. 3D, "10 seconds" is displayed as the connection time (reference numeral k).
ステップＳ１１１：携帯端末６０は、接続用の２次元コードを読み取る。例えば、携帯端末６０は、図３Ｃに示すように、計量装置２０に表示されている２次元コードを読み取る。そしてステップＳ１１２に進む。 Step S111: The mobile terminal 60 reads the two-dimensional code for connection. For example, the mobile terminal 60 reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the weighing device 20 as shown in FIG. 3C. Then, the process proceeds to step S112.
ステップＳ１１２：携帯端末６０は、２次元コードを解析し、計量装置２０との通信に必要な情報を取得し、接続開始要求（顧客識別情報等を含む）を計量装置２０に送信する。そしてステップＳ１１３に進む。 Step S112: The mobile terminal 60 analyzes the two-dimensional code, acquires information necessary for communication with the weighing device 20, and transmits a connection start request (including customer identification information) to the weighing device 20. Then, the process proceeds to step S113.
ステップＳ１１３：携帯端末６０は、計量装置２０から送信された接続開始確認応答を受信する。そしてステップＳ１１４に進む。 Step S113: The mobile terminal 60 receives the connection start confirmation response transmitted from the weighing device 20. Then, the process proceeds to step S114.
ステップＳ１１４：携帯端末６０は、未値付商品の商品識別情報を計量装置２０に送信する。そしてステップＳ１１５に進む。 Step S114: The mobile terminal 60 transmits the product identification information of the unpriced product to the weighing device 20. Then, the process proceeds to step S115.
ステップＳ１１５：携帯端末６０は、接続中である旨の情報や、接続先に関する情報を表示する。例えば、携帯端末６０は、図３Ｅに示すように、接続中である旨の情報として「接続中」と表示し、接続先に関する情報として「１号機」を表示する。そしてステップＳ１１６に進む。 Step S115: The mobile terminal 60 displays information indicating that the connection is in progress and information regarding the connection destination. For example, as shown in FIG. 3E, the mobile terminal 60 displays "connecting" as information indicating that it is connected, and displays "Unit 1" as information regarding the connection destination. Then, the process proceeds to step S116.
ステップＳ１１５では、携帯端末６０は、ステップＳ１１３で計量装置２０から受信した接続開始確認応答に含まれる端末識別情報に基づいて当該計量装置２０の装置番号「１号機」を表示する。例えば、携帯端末６０は、ステップＳ１１３で計量装置２０から受信した接続開始確認応答に含まれる端末識別情報に対応する装置番号を、端末識別情報から夫々の装置番号を取得可能な装置マスタを記憶する他の装置（店舗内に設置される管理装置、店舗外に設置されるサーバ等）に問い合わせることによって取得し、表示する。携帯端末６０自身が装置マスタを記憶してもよい。この場合、問い合わせは不要になる。 In step S115, the mobile terminal 60 displays the device number “No. 1” of the weighing device 20 based on the terminal identification information included in the connection start confirmation response received from the measuring device 20 in step S113. For example, the mobile terminal 60 stores a device master capable of acquiring a device number corresponding to the terminal identification information included in the connection start confirmation response received from the weighing device 20 in step S113 and each device number from the terminal identification information. Obtain and display by inquiring about other devices (management devices installed inside the store, servers installed outside the store, etc.). The mobile terminal 60 itself may store the device master. In this case, no inquiry is required.
ステップＳ１０２において計量装置２０は、装置番号を含む接続開始要求を送信してもよい。この場合、携帯端末６０は、ステップＳ１１３で計量装置２０から受信した接続開始要求に含まれる装置番号を表示する。 In step S102, the weighing device 20 may transmit a connection start request including the device number. In this case, the mobile terminal 60 displays the device number included in the connection start request received from the weighing device 20 in step S113.
ステップＳ１１６：携帯端末６０は、計量装置２０から送信された接続状態情報を受信する。そしてステップＳ１１７に進む。 Step S116: The mobile terminal 60 receives the connection status information transmitted from the weighing device 20. Then, the process proceeds to step S117.
ステップＳ１１７：携帯端末６０は、接続状態情報に基づいて、接続状態に関する情報を表示する。例えば、携帯端末６０は、図３Ｅに示すように、接続状態に関する情報として「（良好）」を表示する。 Step S117: The mobile terminal 60 displays information on the connection status based on the connection status information. For example, the mobile terminal 60 displays "(good)" as information regarding the connection state, as shown in FIG. 3E.
図６のフローチャートは、図４のステップＳ２０の接続監視処理における計量装置２０の動作を示している。 The flowchart of FIG. 6 shows the operation of the weighing device 20 in the connection monitoring process of step S20 of FIG.
ステップＳ２１：計量装置２０は、接続処理（図５）のステップＳ１０５と同様、携帯端末６０との接続状態を評価する。つまり、計量装置２０は、通信相手である携帯端末６０（計量装置２０と接続中の携帯端末６０）との距離を評価する。そしてステップＳ２２に進む。 Step S21: The weighing device 20 evaluates the connection state with the mobile terminal 60 in the same manner as in step S105 of the connection process (FIG. 5). That is, the weighing device 20 evaluates the distance to the mobile terminal 60 (the mobile terminal 60 connected to the weighing device 20) which is the communication partner. Then, the process proceeds to step S22.
ステップＳ２２：計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０との接続状態が良好であるか否かを判断する。つまり、最新（直前）のステップＳ２１において評価した接続状態が、良好であった場合には（ステップＳ２２：ＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ２３に進み、良好でなかった場合には（ステップＳ２２：ＮＯ）、ステップＳ２４に進む。つまり、計量装置２０は、通信相手である携帯端末６０が近傍に存在する場合には（ステップＳ２２：ＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ２３に進み、近傍に存在しない場合には（ステップＳ２２：ＮＯ）、ステップＳ２４に進む。 Step S22: The weighing device 20 determines whether or not the connection state with the mobile terminal 60 is good. That is, if the connection state evaluated in the latest (immediately before) step S21 is good (step S22: YES), the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is not good (step S22: NO), the step. Proceed to S24. That is, the weighing device 20 proceeds to step S23 when the mobile terminal 60 which is the communication partner exists in the vicinity (step S22: YES), and proceeds to step S23 when it does not exist in the vicinity (step S22: NO), step S24. Proceed to.
ステップＳ２３：計量装置２０は、計量装置側警告フラグの値が「１」であるか否かを判断する。計量装置側警告フラグの値が「１」である場合（ステップＳ２３：ＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ２６０に進む。計量装置側警告フラグの値が「１」でない場合（ステップＳ２３：ＮＯ）、本フローチャートは終了する。 Step S23: The weighing device 20 determines whether or not the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side is “1”. If the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side is "1" (step S23: YES), the process proceeds to step S260. If the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side is not "1" (step S23: NO), this flowchart ends.
計量装置側警告フラグは、計量装置２０側において接続警告制御処理が実行されているか否かを示すフラグである。計量装置側警告フラグの値は、計量装置２０側において接続警告制御処理を実行する場合に「１」となる（図７のステップＳ２０２参照）。 The warning flag on the measuring device side is a flag indicating whether or not the connection warning control process is being executed on the measuring device 20 side. The value of the warning flag on the weighing device side becomes "1" when the connection warning control process is executed on the measuring device 20 side (see step S202 in FIG. 7).
ステップＳ２４：計量装置２０は、計量装置側警告フラグの値が「１」であるか否かを判断する。計量装置側警告フラグの値が「１」である場合（ステップＳ２４：ＹＥＳ）、ステップＳ２３０に進む。計量装置側警告フラグの値が「１」でない場合（ステップＳ２４：ＮＯ）、ステップＳ２００に進む。 Step S24: The weighing device 20 determines whether or not the value of the warning flag on the measuring device side is “1”. When the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side is "1" (step S24: YES), the process proceeds to step S230. If the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side is not "1" (step S24: NO), the process proceeds to step S200.
ステップＳ２００：計量装置２０は、接続警告制御（接続警告制御処理）を開始させる接続警告制御開始処理を実行する。つまり、計量装置２０は、接続状態が良好ではなく（ステップＳ２２：ＮＯ）、接続警告制御処理を未だ実行していなければ（ステップＳ２４：ＮＯ）、接続警告制御を開始させる接続警告制御開始処理を実行する。そして本フローチャートは終了する。接続警告制御開始処理の詳細は、図７のシーケンス図を用いて説明する。 Step S200: The weighing device 20 executes a connection warning control start process for starting the connection warning control (connection warning control process). That is, if the connection state is not good (step S22: NO) and the connection warning control process has not yet been executed (step S24: NO), the weighing device 20 performs the connection warning control start process for starting the connection warning control. Run. Then, this flowchart ends. The details of the connection warning control start process will be described with reference to the sequence diagram of FIG.
ステップＳ２３０：計量装置２０は、接続警告制御処理を実行する。つまり、計量装置２０は、接続状態が良好ではなく（ステップＳ２２：ＮＯ）、既に接続警告制御処理を実行していれば（ステップＳ２４：ＹＥＳ）、接続警告制御処理を継続して実行する。そして Step S230: The weighing device 20 executes the connection warning control process. That is, if the connection state is not good (step S22: NO) and the connection warning control process has already been executed (step S24: YES), the weighing device 20 continues to execute the connection warning control process. and
本フローチャートは終了する。接続警告制御処理の詳細は、図８のシーケンス図を用いて説明する。 This flowchart ends. The details of the connection warning control process will be described with reference to the sequence diagram of FIG.
ステップＳ２６０：計量装置２０は、接続警告制御（接続警告制御処理）を終了させる接続警告制御終了処理を実行する。つまり、計量装置２０は、接続状態が良好であり（ステップＳ２２：ＹＥＳ）、接続警告制御処理を実行していれば（ステップＳ２３：ＹＥＳ）、接続警告制御を終了させる接続警告制御終了処理を実行する。そして本フローチャートは終了する。接続警告制御終了処理の詳細は、図９のシーケンス図を用いて説明する。 Step S260: The weighing device 20 executes a connection warning control end process for terminating the connection warning control (connection warning control process). That is, if the connection state is good (step S22: YES) and the connection warning control process is executed (step S23: YES), the weighing device 20 executes the connection warning control end process for terminating the connection warning control. do. Then, this flowchart ends. The details of the connection warning control termination process will be described with reference to the sequence diagram of FIG.
図７は、接続警告制御を開始する際の、計量装置２０及び携帯端末６０の夫々の処理の流れを示したシーケンス図である。図７の左側は計量装置２０の処理を示し、図７の右側は携帯端末６０の処理を示している。図７の左側の計量装置２０の各処理は、図６のステップＳ２００の接続警告制御開始処理に相当する。 FIG. 7 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of each of the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 when starting the connection warning control. The left side of FIG. 7 shows the processing of the weighing device 20, and the right side of FIG. 7 shows the processing of the mobile terminal 60. Each process of the weighing device 20 on the left side of FIG. 7 corresponds to the connection warning control start process of step S200 of FIG.
ステップＳ２０１：計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０に接続警告制御を開始する旨の制御情報を送信する。そしてステップＳ２０２に進む。 Step S201: The weighing device 20 transmits control information to the effect that the connection warning control is started to the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S202.
ステップＳ２０２：計量装置２０は、計量装置側警告フラグの値を「１」にする。例えば、計量装置２０は、自装置内の記憶部（ＲＡＭ２３）に、計量装置側警告フラグの値として「１」を記憶する。計量装置側警告フラグの初期値は「０」である。そしてステップＳ２０３に進む。 Step S202: The weighing device 20 sets the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side to “1”. For example, the weighing device 20 stores “1” as the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side in the storage unit (RAM 23) in the own device. The initial value of the warning flag on the weighing device side is "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S203.
ステップＳ２０３：計量装置２０は、接続に関する警告メッセージを表示する。そしてステップＳ２０４に進む。 Step S203: The weighing device 20 displays a warning message regarding the connection. Then, the process proceeds to step S204.
ステップＳ２０４：計量装置２０は、他の客に対する注意メッセージを表示する。他の客とは、本来の客（接続中の客。本例では「ＴＳ」）以外の客である。 Step S204: The weighing device 20 displays a caution message to other customers. The other customers are customers other than the original customers (customers who are connected. In this example, "TS").
そしてステップＳ２０５に進む。 Then, the process proceeds to step S205.
ステップＳ２０５：計量装置２０は、接続に関する警告の継続時間（警告継続時間）を計時する警告継続時間カウンタをセットし、警告継続時間の表示を開始する。つまり、計量装置２０は、当該ステップＳ２０５においてゼロからカウントアップ（計時）される警告継続時間カウンタの値に基づいて、以降、図９のステップＳ２６４において警告継続時間カウンタがリセットされる迄の間、警告継続時間を更新表示し続ける。 Step S205: The weighing device 20 sets a warning duration counter that measures the duration (warning duration) of the warning regarding the connection, and starts displaying the warning duration. That is, the weighing device 20 is based on the value of the warning duration counter that counts up (timed) from zero in step S205, and thereafter until the warning duration counter is reset in step S264 of FIG. The warning duration is updated and displayed continuously.
ステップＳ２１１：携帯装置６０は、計量装置２０から送信された接続警告制御を開始する旨の制御情報を受信する。そしてステップＳ２１２に進む。 Step S211: The portable device 60 receives the control information transmitted from the weighing device 20 to start the connection warning control. Then, the process proceeds to step S212.
ステップＳ２１２：携帯端末６０は、携帯端末側警告フラグの値を「１」にする。例えば、携帯端末６０は、自端末内の記憶部に、携帯端末側警告フラグの値として「１」を記憶する。携帯端末側警告フラグの初期値は「０」である。そしてステップＳ２１３に進む。 Step S212: The mobile terminal 60 sets the value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side to "1". For example, the mobile terminal 60 stores "1" as the value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side in the storage unit in the own terminal. The initial value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side is "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S213.
ステップＳ２１２の携帯端末側警告フラグは、携帯端末６０側において接続警告制御処理が実行されているか否かを示すフラグである。携帯端末６０側において接続警告制御処理が実行されている場合には端末側警告フラグの値は「１」となる。 The mobile terminal side warning flag in step S212 is a flag indicating whether or not the connection warning control process is being executed on the mobile terminal 60 side. When the connection warning control process is executed on the mobile terminal 60 side, the value of the terminal side warning flag is "1".
ステップＳ２１３：携帯端末６０は、接続に関する警告メッセージを表示する。そしてステップＳ２１４に進む。携帯端末６０は、携帯端末側警告フラグの値に基づいて接続に関する警告メッセージの表示を制御してもよい。つまり、携帯端末６０は、端末側警告フラグの値が「０」である場合、接続に関する警告メッセージを表示せずに、端末側警告フラグの値が「１」である場合、接続に関する警告メッセージを表示してもよい。ステップＳ２１４の行動を促進させるメッセージについても同様である。 Step S213: The mobile terminal 60 displays a warning message regarding the connection. Then, the process proceeds to step S214. The mobile terminal 60 may control the display of a warning message regarding the connection based on the value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side. That is, the mobile terminal 60 does not display the warning message regarding the connection when the value of the terminal side warning flag is "0", and displays the warning message regarding the connection when the value of the terminal side warning flag is "1". It may be displayed. The same applies to the message that promotes the action of step S214.
ステップＳ２１４：携帯端末６０は、行動（移動）を促進させるメッセージを表示する。つまり、携帯端末６０は、客が計量装置２０から離れている可能性が高いため、客に対し、計量装置２０に戻るようにメッセージを表示する。 Step S214: The mobile terminal 60 displays a message that promotes an action (movement). That is, since the customer is likely to be away from the weighing device 20, the mobile terminal 60 displays a message to the customer to return to the weighing device 20.
図８は、接続警告制御の実行中における、計量装置２０及び携帯端末６０の夫々の処理の流れを示したシーケンス図である。図８の左側は計量装置２０の処理を示し、図８の右側は携帯端末６０の処理を示している。図８の左側の計量装置２０の各処理は、図６のステップＳ２３０の接続警告制御処理に相当する。 FIG. 8 is a sequence diagram showing the processing flow of each of the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 during the execution of the connection warning control. The left side of FIG. 8 shows the processing of the weighing device 20, and the right side of FIG. 8 shows the processing of the mobile terminal 60. Each process of the weighing device 20 on the left side of FIG. 8 corresponds to the connection warning control process of step S230 of FIG.
（図８左側の計量装置２０の動作） (Operation of the weighing device 20 on the left side of FIG. 8)
ステップＳ２３１：計量装置２０は、前回の送信から所定時間（例えば５秒等）が経過していれば、最新（直前）のステップＳ２１の確認結果に基づいて、携帯端末６０に接続状態情報を送信する。つまり、計量装置２０は、定期的（例えば５秒毎）に、携帯端末６０に最新の接続状態情報を送信する。そしてステップＳ２３２に進む。 Step S2311: If a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the previous transmission, the weighing device 20 transmits the connection status information to the mobile terminal 60 based on the latest (immediately preceding) confirmation result of step S21. do. That is, the weighing device 20 periodically (for example, every 5 seconds) transmits the latest connection status information to the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S232.
ステップＳ２３２：計量装置２０は、接続状態情報を送信した場合、最新（直前）のステップＳ２１の確認結果に基づいて、接続状態に関する情報を表示する。つまり、計量装置２０は、接続状態情報の送信のタイミングにあわせて接続状態に関する情報を表示する。そしてステップＳ２３３に進む。 Step S232: When the weighing device 20 transmits the connection status information, the weighing device 20 displays the information regarding the connection status based on the latest (immediately preceding) confirmation result of step S21. That is, the weighing device 20 displays the information related to the connection state in accordance with the timing of transmitting the connection state information. Then, the process proceeds to step S233.
ステップＳ２３４：計量装置２０は、警告継続時間が所定時間（例えば３分）に到達したか、又は、受信すべき接続状態確認応答を受信していなければ、中断フラグの値を「１」にする。つまり、計量装置２０は、所定時間にわたって接続状態が良好ではない場合や、接続状態が通信できない程度に悪化した場合には、接続を中断すると判断し、中断フラグの値を「１」にする。 Step S234: If the warning duration has reached a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) or the connection status confirmation response to be received has not been received, the weighing device 20 sets the value of the interruption flag to “1”. .. That is, the weighing device 20 determines that the connection is interrupted when the connection state is not good for a predetermined time or when the connection state deteriorates to the extent that communication cannot be performed, and the value of the interruption flag is set to "1".
（図８右側の携帯端末６０の動作） (Operation of mobile terminal 60 on the right side of FIG. 8)
ステップＳ２４１：携帯端末６０は、送信されていれば、接続状態情報を受信する。つまり、携帯端末６０は、計量装置２０が接続状態情報を送信していれば、受信する。そしてステップＳ２４２に進む。 Step S2411: The mobile terminal 60 receives the connection status information if it has been transmitted. That is, if the measuring device 20 has transmitted the connection state information, the mobile terminal 60 receives it. Then, the process proceeds to step S242.
ステップＳ２４２：携帯端末６０は、接続状態情報を受信していれば、受信した接続状態情報に基づいて、接続状態に関する情報を表示する。そしてステップＳ２４３に進む。 Step S242: If the mobile terminal 60 has received the connection status information, the mobile terminal 60 displays information on the connection status based on the received connection status information. Then, the process proceeds to step S243.
ステップＳ２４２：携帯端末６０は、接続状態情報を受信していれば、接続状態確認応答を送信する。 Step S242: If the mobile terminal 60 has received the connection status information, the mobile terminal 60 transmits a connection status confirmation response.
図９は、接続警告制御を終了する際の、計量装置２０及び携帯端末６０の夫々の処理の流れを示したシーケンス図である。図９の左側は計量装置２０の処理を示し、図９の右側は携帯端末６０の処理を示している。図９の左側の計量装置２０の各処理は、図６のステップＳ２６０の接続警告制御終了処理に相当する。 FIG. 9 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of each of the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 when the connection warning control is terminated. The left side of FIG. 9 shows the processing of the weighing device 20, and the right side of FIG. 9 shows the processing of the mobile terminal 60. Each process of the weighing device 20 on the left side of FIG. 9 corresponds to the connection warning control end process of step S260 of FIG.
ステップＳ２６１：計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０に接続警告制御を終了する旨の制御情報を送信する。そしてステップＳ２６２に進む。 Step S261: The weighing device 20 transmits control information to the effect that the connection warning control is terminated to the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S262.
ステップＳ２６２：計量装置２０は、計量装置側警告フラグの値を「０」にする。そしてステップＳ２６３に進む。 Step S262: The weighing device 20 sets the value of the warning flag on the weighing device side to “0”. Then, the process proceeds to step S263.
ステップＳ２６３：計量装置２０は、接続に関する警告メッセージ、他の客に対する注意メッセージを消去する。そしてステップＳ２６４に進む。 Step S263: The weighing device 20 deletes the warning message regarding the connection and the caution message for other customers. Then, the process proceeds to step S264.
ステップＳ２６４：計量装置２０は、警告継続時間カウンタをリセット（計時を終了）する。つまり、計量装置２０は、警告継続時間の表示を終了（消去）する。 Step S264: The weighing device 20 resets the warning duration counter (ends timing). That is, the weighing device 20 ends (erases) the display of the warning duration.
ステップＳ２７１：携帯装置６０は、計量装置２０から送信された接続警告制御を終了する旨の制御情報を受信する。そしてステップＳ２７２に進む。 Step S271: The portable device 60 receives the control information transmitted from the weighing device 20 to the effect that the connection warning control is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S272.
ステップＳ２７２：携帯端末６０は、携帯端末側警告フラグの値を「０」にする。そしてステップＳ２７３に進む。 Step S272: The mobile terminal 60 sets the value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side to “0”. Then, the process proceeds to step S273.
ステップＳ２７３：携帯端末６０は、接続に関する警告メッセージ、行動を促進させるメッセージを消去する。携帯端末６０は、携帯端末側警告フラグの値に基づいて接続に関する警告メッセージ等の表示を制御してもよい。つまり、携帯端末６０は、端末側警告フラグの値が「０」である場合、接続に関する警告メッセージ等を表示せずに、端末側 Step S273: The mobile terminal 60 deletes the warning message regarding the connection and the message promoting the action. The mobile terminal 60 may control the display of a warning message or the like regarding the connection based on the value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side. That is, when the value of the terminal side warning flag is "0", the mobile terminal 60 does not display a warning message or the like regarding the connection, and the terminal side does not display the warning message or the like.
警告フラグの値が「１」である場合、接続に関する警告メッセージ等を表示してもよい。 When the value of the warning flag is "1", a warning message or the like regarding the connection may be displayed.
取引管理サーバとは、商品の登録情報を記憶するサーバである。例えば、取引管理サーバは、夫々の携帯端末６０の登録情報（図３Ａに示した登録情報表示領域７２（図３Ａ）に表示されるような登録情報）をカート情報（バスケット情報）として記憶する。 The transaction management server is a server that stores product registration information. For example, the transaction management server stores the registration information of each mobile terminal 60 (registration information as displayed in the registration information display area 72 (FIG. 3A) shown in FIG. 3A) as cart information (basket information).
ステップＳ４０１：計量装置２０は、未値付商品の１つについて指定を受け付ける。例えば、計量装置２０は、値付画面の商品選択領域４３において商品ボタンの操作を受け付けることにより、未値付商品の１つについて指定を受け付ける。そしてステップＳ４０２に進む。 Step S401: The weighing device 20 accepts a designation for one of the unpriced goods. For example, the weighing device 20 accepts the designation of one of the unpriced products by accepting the operation of the product button in the product selection area 43 of the pricing screen. Then, the process proceeds to step S402.
ステップＳ４０２：計量装置２０は、当該商品の計量値を取得し、販売価格を算出する。つまり、商品を指定した客は当該商品の載台に載置するため、計量装置２０は、載台に載置された商品を計量し、計量値と単価とから販売価格を算出する。そしてステップＳ４０３に進む。本実施形態では、説明の便宜上、風袋（容器）の重量については省略しているが、風袋を考慮する必要がある場合には、計量装置２０は、計量値から風袋分を控除して販売価格を算出する。 Step S402: The weighing device 20 acquires the weighing value of the product and calculates the selling price. That is, since the customer who has designated the product is placed on the platform of the product, the weighing device 20 weighs the product mounted on the platform and calculates the selling price from the measured value and the unit price. Then, the process proceeds to step S403. In the present embodiment, the weight of the tare (container) is omitted for convenience of explanation, but when it is necessary to consider the tare, the weighing device 20 deducts the tare from the weighed value and sells the price. Is calculated.
ステップＳ４０３：計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０に、当該商品の登録情報を送信する。そしてステップＳ４０３に進む。登録情報は、例えば、当該商品の商品識別情報、計量値、販売価格等を含む。 Step S403: The weighing device 20 transmits the registration information of the product to the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S403. The registered information includes, for example, product identification information, a measured value, a selling price, and the like of the product.
ステップＳ４０４：計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０から送信された更新確認応答を受信する。そしてステップＳ４０５に進む。 Step S404: The weighing device 20 receives the update confirmation response transmitted from the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S405.
ステップＳ４０５：計量装置２０は、当該商品のラベルを印刷、発行する。そしてステップＳ４０６に進む。 Step S405: The weighing device 20 prints and issues a label of the product. Then, the process proceeds to step S406.
ステップＳ４０５にて計量装置２０が発行するラベルには、当該商品を登録するめのバーコード（当該商品の販売価格等をコード化したバーコードであって光学的に読取可能なバーコード等）を印刷しない。つまり、登録情報の送信後にステップＳ４０４において更新確認応答を受信しているため、当該商品は登録済（当該商品の登録情報は取引管理サーバのカート情報に反映済）であり、当該商品の以降の登録は不要である。従って、計量装置２０は、当該商品を登録するめのバーコードをラベルに印刷しない。但し、本来、不要ではあるが、バーコードを印刷してもよい。 On the label issued by the weighing device 20 in step S405, a barcode for registering the product (a barcode that encodes the selling price of the product and is optically readable, etc.) is printed. do not. That is, since the update confirmation response is received in step S404 after the registration information is transmitted, the product is registered (the registration information of the product has been reflected in the cart information of the transaction management server), and the subsequent product No registration required. Therefore, the weighing device 20 does not print the bar code for registering the product on the label. However, although it is not necessary originally, a barcode may be printed.
ステップＳ４０６：計量装置２０は、当該商品を未値付商品から除外する。例えば、計量装置２０は、当該商品の商品ボタンを消去等する。そしてステップＳ４０７に進む。 Step S406: The weighing device 20 excludes the goods from the unpriced goods. For example, the weighing device 20 erases the product button of the product. Then, the process proceeds to step S407.
ステップＳ４０７：計量装置２０は、未値付商品がなければ、完了フラグの値を「１」にする。つまり、計量装置２０は、全部の未値付商品の値付けが完了した場合には、完了フラグの値を「１」にする。 Step S407: If there is no unpriced product, the weighing device 20 sets the value of the completion flag to “1”. That is, the weighing device 20 sets the value of the completion flag to "1" when the pricing of all the unpriced products is completed.
（図１０中央の携帯端末６０の動作） (Operation of mobile terminal 60 in the center of FIG. 10)
ステップＳ４１１：携帯端末６０は、計量装置２０から送信された登録情報を受信する。携帯端末６０は、計量装置２０から受信した登録情報を取引管理サーバに送信する。そしてステップＳ４１２に進む。携帯端末６０は、計量装置２０から受信した登録情報を加工等し、取引管理サーバに送信してもよい。つまり、携帯端末６０が計量装置２０から受信する登録情報と、携帯端末６０が取引管理サーバに送信する登録情報とは、例えば形式等が必ずしも同一ではなくてもよい。 Step S411: The mobile terminal 60 receives the registration information transmitted from the weighing device 20. The mobile terminal 60 transmits the registration information received from the weighing device 20 to the transaction management server. Then, the process proceeds to step S412. The mobile terminal 60 may process the registration information received from the weighing device 20 and transmit it to the transaction management server. That is, the registration information received by the mobile terminal 60 from the weighing device 20 and the registration information transmitted by the mobile terminal 60 to the transaction management server do not necessarily have to be in the same format, for example.
ステップＳ４１２：携帯端末６０は、取引管理サーバから送信された更新確認応答を受信する。携帯端末６０は、受信した更新確認応答を計量装置２０に送信する。そして Step S412: The mobile terminal 60 receives the update confirmation response transmitted from the transaction management server. The mobile terminal 60 transmits the received update confirmation response to the weighing device 20. and
ステップＳ４１３に進む。携帯端末６０は、取引管理サーバから受信した更新確認応答を加工等し、計量装置２０に送信してもよい。つまり、携帯端末６０が取引管理サーバから受信する更新確認応答と、携帯端末６０が計量装置２０に送信する更新確認応答とは、例えば形式等が必ずしも同一ではなくてもよい。 The process proceeds to step S413. The mobile terminal 60 may process the update confirmation response received from the transaction management server and transmit it to the weighing device 20. That is, the update confirmation response received by the mobile terminal 60 from the transaction management server and the update confirmation response transmitted by the mobile terminal 60 to the weighing device 20 do not necessarily have to be in the same format, for example.
ステップＳ４１３：携帯端末６０は、当該商品を未値付商品から除外する。例えば、携帯端末６０は、当該商品について「要計量」から「計量」に変更し、当該商品の販売価格を表示する。 Step S413: The mobile terminal 60 excludes the product from unpriced products. For example, the mobile terminal 60 changes the product from "weighing required" to "weighing" and displays the selling price of the product.
ステップＳ４２１：取引管理サーバは、携帯端末６０から送信された登録情報を受信する。そしてステップＳ４２２に進む。 Step S421: The transaction management server receives the registration information transmitted from the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S422.
ステップＳ４２２：取引管理サーバは、携帯端末６０から送信された登録情報に基づいてカート情報を更新する。つまり、取引管理サーバは、客が指定し載台に載置し、計量装置２０が販売価格を算出した商品を登録する。そしてステップＳ４２３に進む。 Step S422: The transaction management server updates the cart information based on the registration information transmitted from the mobile terminal 60. That is, the transaction management server registers the product designated by the customer and placed on the platform, and the weighing device 20 calculates the selling price. Then, the process proceeds to step S423.
ステップＳ４２３：取引管理サーバは、携帯端末６０に更新確認応答を送信する。更新確認応答は、登録情報に基づいてカート情報を更新した旨を登録情報の送信元に応答するものである。 Step S423: The transaction management server transmits an update confirmation response to the mobile terminal 60. The update confirmation response responds to the sender of the registration information that the cart information has been updated based on the registration information.
図１１は、計量装置２０と携帯端末６０との通信を切断する際の、計量装置２０及び携帯端末６０の夫々の処理の流れを示したシーケンス図である。図１１の左側は計量装置２０の処理を示し、図１１の右側は携帯端末６０の処理を示している。図１１の左側の計量装置２０の各処理は、図４のステップＳ６０の切断処理に相当する。 FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram showing the processing flow of each of the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 when the communication between the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 is disconnected. The left side of FIG. 11 shows the processing of the weighing device 20, and the right side of FIG. 11 shows the processing of the mobile terminal 60. Each process of the weighing device 20 on the left side of FIG. 11 corresponds to the cutting process of step S60 of FIG.
ステップＳ６０１：計量装置２０は、接続終了要求（接続識別情報等を含む）を携帯端末６０に送信する。そしてステップＳ６０２に進む。 Step S601: The weighing device 20 transmits a connection termination request (including connection identification information and the like) to the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S602.
ステップＳ６０２：計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０から送信された接続終了確認応答を受信する。そしてステップＳ６０３に進む。 Step S602: The weighing device 20 receives the connection termination confirmation response transmitted from the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S603.
ステップＳ６０３：計量装置２０は、接続時間カウンタをリセット（計時を終了）する。つまり、計量装置２０は、接続時間の表示を終了（消去）する。そしてステップＳ６０４に進む。 Step S603: The weighing device 20 resets the connection time counter (ends timing). That is, the weighing device 20 ends (erases) the display of the connection time. Then, the process proceeds to step S604.
ステップＳ６０４：計量装置２０は、初期画面を表示する。計量装置２０は、例えば、図３Ｂに示したような初期画面を表示する。そしてステップＳ６０５に進む。 Step S604: The weighing device 20 displays an initial screen. The weighing device 20 displays, for example, an initial screen as shown in FIG. 3B. Then, the process proceeds to step S605.
初期画面は、接続状態ではないときに表示される画面であるため、図３Ｂに示すように、初期画面には、接続中である旨の情報や、接続先に関する情報や、接続状態に関する情報は、表示されない。換言すれば、計量装置２０は、ステップＳ６０４において、初期画面に切り替えることで、接続中である旨の情報や、接続先に関する情報や、接続状態に関する情報を消去する。 Since the initial screen is a screen that is displayed when the connection is not established, as shown in FIG. 3B, the initial screen contains information indicating that the connection is in progress, information regarding the connection destination, and information regarding the connection status. ,Do not show. In other words, in step S604, the weighing device 20 erases the information indicating that the connection is in progress, the information regarding the connection destination, and the information regarding the connection state by switching to the initial screen.
初期画面は、接続状態ではないときに表示される画面であるため、図３Ｂに示すように、初期画面には、接続に関する警告情報（図１２にて説明する「接続警告中」等の情報）は、表示されない。つまり、警告状態となった場合、警告状態から正常な状態へと復帰するケース（図９の接続警告制御終了処理が実行される場合）と、警告状態から正常な状態へと復帰せずに切断に至るケース（図８のステップＳ２３４にて中断フラグの値を「１」とした場合）と、の２つのケースが存在し、計量装置２０は、前者のケースでは、上記警告情報を接続警告制御終了処理（ステップＳ２６３）において消去し、後者のケースでは、上記警告情報を当該切断処理（ステップＳ６０４）において初期画面に切り替えることで、消去する。 Since the initial screen is a screen that is displayed when the connection is not established, as shown in FIG. 3B, the initial screen has warning information regarding the connection (information such as "connection warning in progress" described in FIG. 12). Is not displayed. That is, when the warning state is reached, there are cases where the warning state returns to the normal state (when the connection warning control termination process of FIG. 9 is executed) and cases where the warning state returns to the normal state without returning to the normal state. (When the value of the interruption flag is set to "1" in step S234 of FIG. 8), there are two cases, and in the former case, the weighing device 20 connects the above warning information to the connection warning control. It is erased in the end process (step S263), and in the latter case, the warning information is erased by switching to the initial screen in the disconnection process (step S604).
ステップＳ６０５：計量装置２０は、計量装置側警告フラグの値が「１」であれば、計量装置側警告フラグの値を「０」にする。そしてステップＳ６０５に進む。 Step S605: If the value of the weighing device side warning flag is "1", the weighing device 20 sets the value of the measuring device side warning flag to "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S605.
ステップＳ６０６：計量装置２０は、完了フラグの値が「１」であれば、完了フラグの値を「０」にする。そしてステップＳ６０７に進む。 Step S606: If the value of the completion flag is "1", the weighing device 20 sets the value of the completion flag to "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S607.
ステップＳ６０７：計量装置２０は、中断フラグの値が「１」であれば、中断フラグの値を「０」にする。 Step S607: If the value of the interruption flag is "1", the weighing device 20 sets the value of the interruption flag to "0".
（図１１右側の携帯端末６０の動作） (Operation of mobile terminal 60 on the right side of FIG. 11)
ステップＳ６１１：携帯端末６０は、計量装置２０から送信された接続終了要求を受信する。そしてステップＳ６１２に進む Step S611: The mobile terminal 60 receives the connection termination request transmitted from the weighing device 20. Then, the process proceeds to step S612.
ステップＳ６１２：携帯端末６０は、接続終了確認応答を送信する。そしてステップＳ６１３に進む。 Step S612: The mobile terminal 60 transmits a connection termination confirmation response. Then, the process proceeds to step S613.
ステップＳ６１３：携帯端末６０は、接続中である旨の情報や、接続先に関する情報や、接続状態に関する情報を消去する。そしてステップＳ６１４に進む。 Step S613: The mobile terminal 60 erases the information indicating that the connection is in progress, the information regarding the connection destination, and the information regarding the connection state. Then, the process proceeds to step S614.
ステップＳ６１４：携帯端末６０は、携帯端末側警告フラグの値が「１」であれば、携帯端末側警告フラグの値を「０」にする。 Step S614: If the value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side is "1", the mobile terminal 60 sets the value of the warning flag on the mobile terminal side to "0".
図１２は、計量装置２０における警告中の表示例である。例えば、図３Ｉの場面（リンゴの値付けが完了した場面）では、本来であれば、客はレモンの値付けを開始すべきところであるが、図３Ｉの場面においてレモンの値付けを開始せずに計量装置２０から離れてしまった場合、計量装置２０は、図１２に示すような値付画面を表示する。 FIG. 12 is a display example during the warning in the weighing device 20. For example, in the scene of FIG. 3I (the scene where the apple pricing is completed), the customer should normally start the lemon pricing, but in the scene of FIG. 3I, the lemon pricing is not started. When the apple is separated from the weighing device 20, the weighing device 20 displays a pricing screen as shown in FIG.
図１２の場面における報知情報表示領域４５には、接続時間として「接続時間８３秒」が表示されている（符号ｋ）。つまり、図１２の場面は、図３Ｉの場面から３０秒が経過した場面である。後述する「（警告開始から２０秒経過）」によれば、図３Ｉの場面から１０秒経したときに警告状態となり、警告状態となって２０秒経過した場面が図１２の場面である。 In the notification information display area 45 in the scene of FIG. 12, “connection time 83 seconds” is displayed as the connection time (reference numeral k). That is, the scene of FIG. 12 is a scene in which 30 seconds have passed from the scene of FIG. 3I. According to "(20 seconds have passed from the start of the warning)" to be described later, a warning state is set when 10 seconds have passed from the scene of FIG. 3I, and a scene where the warning state has passed 20 seconds is the scene of FIG.
図１２の場面における報知情報表示領域４５には、図３Ｉの場面と同様、「接続中」と表示され（符号ｇ）、客の名前「ＴＳ」が表示され（符号ｉ）、客のキャラクタが表示され（符号ｊ）、メッセージが表示されている（符号ｌ）。しかしながら、図１２の場面における報知情報表示領域４５には、図３Ｉの場面とは異なり、接続状態がやや不良である旨の情報として「（やや不良）」が表示されている（符号ｈ）。 In the notification information display area 45 in the scene of FIG. 12, “Connecting” is displayed (reference numeral g), the customer name “TS” is displayed (reference numeral i), and the customer character is displayed, as in the scene of FIG. 3I. It is displayed (reference numeral j) and a message is displayed (reference numeral l). However, unlike the scene of FIG. 3I, "(slightly defective)" is displayed in the notification information display area 45 in the scene of FIG. 12 as information indicating that the connection state is slightly defective (reference numeral h).
図１２の場面における商品選択領域４３には、図３Ｉの場面と同様、レモンを選択するための商品ボタンが表示されている。しかしながら、図１２の場面における報知情報表示領域４５には、図３Ｉの場面とは異なり、警告情報も表示されている。具体的には、接続に関する警告として「接続警告中」と表示され、警告継続時間として「（警告開始から２０秒経過）」が表示され、他の客に対する注意として「ＴＳ様と接続中です。ＴＳ様以外の方はボタンをタッチしないでください」と表示されている。 In the product selection area 43 in the scene of FIG. 12, a product button for selecting a lemon is displayed as in the scene of FIG. 3I. However, unlike the scene of FIG. 3I, warning information is also displayed in the notification information display area 45 in the scene of FIG. 12. Specifically, "Connecting warning" is displayed as a warning about connection, "(20 seconds have passed since the warning started)" is displayed as the warning duration, and "Connecting with TS" is displayed as a caution to other customers. Please do not touch the button if you are not TS. "
つまり、計量装置２０は、図７の接続警告制御開始処理において接続に関する警告メッセージとして「接続警告中」と表示し（ステップＳ２０３）、他の客に対する注意メッセージとして「ＴＳ様と接続中です。ＴＳ様以外の方はボタンをタッチしないでください」と表示する（ステップＳ２０４）。計量装置２０は、図７の接続警告制御開始処理において警告継続時間の計時を開始し（ステップＳ２０５）、警告中は常に警告継続時間を「（警告開始から２０秒経過）」のように表示（更新）する。計量装置２０は、接続警告制御処理（図８）において接続状態に関する情報として「（やや不良）」と表示する（ステップＳ２３２）。上述した警告情報は、接続警告制御終了処理（図９）、又は、切断処理（図１１）において消去される。 That is, the weighing device 20 displays "connection warning in progress" as a warning message regarding connection in the connection warning control start process of FIG. 7 (step S203), and "connects with TS" as a caution message to other customers. Please do not touch the button if you are not like this "(step S204). The weighing device 20 starts timing the warning duration in the connection warning control start process of FIG. 7 (step S205), and always displays the warning duration as "(20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the warning)" during the warning (step S205). Update. The weighing device 20 displays “(slightly defective)” as information regarding the connection state in the connection warning control process (FIG. 8) (step S232). The above-mentioned warning information is deleted in the connection warning control end process (FIG. 9) or the disconnection process (FIG. 11).
図１３は、携帯端末６０における警告中の表示例である。具体的には、図１３は、計量装置２０が図１２の値付画面を表示した場面における携帯端末６０側の表示例である。換言すれば、携帯端末６０は、図３Ｊの状態からレモンの値付けを開始せずに計量装置２０から離れてしまった場合、図１３に示すような画面を表示する。 FIG. 13 is a display example during a warning on the mobile terminal 60. Specifically, FIG. 13 is a display example on the mobile terminal 60 side in the scene where the weighing device 20 displays the pricing screen of FIG. In other words, the mobile terminal 60 displays a screen as shown in FIG. 13 when the lemon is separated from the weighing device 20 without starting the price of the lemon from the state of FIG. 3J.
図１３の場面における報知情報表示領域７４には、図３Ｊの場面と同様、客の名前、客のキャラクタ、「１号機に接続中」と表示されている。しかしながら、図１３の場面における報知情報表示領域７４には、図３Ｊの場面とは異なり、接続状態がやや不良である旨の情報として「（やや不良）」が表示されている。図１３の場面における報知情報表示領域７４には、「接続警告中」と表示されている。 In the notification information display area 74 in the scene of FIG. 13, the customer's name, the customer's character, and "connecting to Unit 1" are displayed as in the scene of FIG. 3J. However, unlike the scene of FIG. 3J, "(slightly defective)" is displayed in the notification information display area 74 in the scene of FIG. 13 as information indicating that the connection state is slightly defective. In the notification information display area 74 in the scene of FIG. 13, "connection warning in progress" is displayed.
図１３に示すように、合計情報表示領域７３の上側には、「計量装置（１号機）に近づいてください」と表示されている。 As shown in FIG. 13, "Please approach the weighing device (Unit 1)" is displayed on the upper side of the total information display area 73.
つまり、携帯端末６０は、図７の接続警告制御開始処理において接続に関する警告メッセージとして「接続警告中」と表示し（ステップＳ２１３）、行動を促進させるメッセージとして「計量装置（１号機）に近づいてください」と表示する（ステップＳ２１４）。携帯端末６０は、接続警告制御処理（図８）において接続状態に関する情報として「（やや不良）」と表示する（ステップＳ２４２）。上述した警告情報は、接続警告制御終了処理（図９）、又は、切断処理（図１１）において消去される。 That is, the mobile terminal 60 displays "connection warning in progress" as a warning message regarding connection in the connection warning control start process of FIG. 7 (step S213), and approaches the "weighing device (Unit 1)" as a message for promoting action. Please. ”Is displayed (step S214). The mobile terminal 60 displays "(slightly defective)" as information regarding the connection state in the connection warning control process (FIG. 8) (step S242). The above-mentioned warning information is deleted in the connection warning control end process (FIG. 9) or the disconnection process (FIG. 11).
以上、実施形態について説明したが、上記実施形態は、一例であって具体的な構成は上記実施形態に限られるものではなく、発明の要旨を逸脱しない範囲の設計等も含まれる。 Although the embodiments have been described above, the above-described embodiment is an example, and the specific configuration is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and includes a design and the like within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the invention.
（接続に関係する表示について） (About display related to connection)
上記実施形態では、接続に関係する情報として、計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０と接続している旨の情報（図３Ｄの例では「接続中」）、接続状態（図３Ｄの例では「（良好）」、図１２の例では「やや不良」）、客の名前（図３Ｄの例では「ＴＳ」）、キャラクタ（図３Ｄの例ではトラ）、接続時間（図３Ｄの例では「接続時間１０秒」）、接続に関する警告メッセージ（図１２の例では「接続警告中」）、警告継続時間（図１２の例では「（警告開始から２０秒経過）」）、他の客に対する警告メッセージ（図１２の例では「ＴＳ様と接続中です。ＴＳ様以外の方はボタンをタッチしないでください」）等を表示する例を説明したが、個々の場面にて説明した情報について必ずしも全部を表示しなくてもよいし、接続に関係する情報として他の情報を表示してもよい。上記実施形態で説明をしていなかったが、上述した接続に関係する情報のうちの一部又は全部を点灯表示させてもよい。例えば、携帯端末６０と接続している旨の情報（「接続中」）、接続時間、接続に関する警告メッセージ（「接続警告中」）、警告継続時間を点灯表示させてもよい。 In the above embodiment, as the information related to the connection, the information that the weighing device 20 is connected to the mobile terminal 60 (“connecting” in the example of FIG. 3D) and the connection state (in the example of FIG. 3D, “( Good) ”,“ Slightly bad ”in the example of FIG. 12, customer name (“TS” in the example of FIG. 3D), character (tiger in the example of FIG. 3D), connection time (“connection time” in the example of FIG. 3D. 10 seconds ”), connection warning message (“connection warning in progress” in the example of FIG. 12), warning duration (“(20 seconds have passed since the start of the warning)” in the example of FIG. 12), warning message to other customers ( In the example of Fig. 12, we explained an example of displaying "Connecting with TS. Please do not touch the button if you are not TS"), but not necessarily all the information explained in each scene is displayed. It may not be necessary, or other information may be displayed as information related to the connection. Although not described in the above embodiment, some or all of the above-mentioned information related to the connection may be lit and displayed. For example, the information indicating that the mobile terminal 60 is connected (“connecting”), the connection time, the warning message regarding the connection (“connection warning”), and the warning duration may be lit and displayed.
上記実施形態において接続状態「良好」「やや不良」「不良」の夫々に代えて又は加えて通信相手「近傍」「１０メートル以内に存在」「１０メートル以内に不在」などと表示してもよいと説明したが、これに関連し、「接続」を「利用」などと表示してもよい。例えば、図３Ｄにおいて、「接続中（良好）」に代えて「利用中（近傍）」と表示し、「接続時間１０秒」に代えて「利用時間１０秒」と表示してもよい。図１２において、「接続中（やや不良）」に代えて「利用中（１０メートル以内に存在）」と表示し、「接続時間８３秒」に代えて「利用時間８３秒」と表示してもよい。 In the above embodiment, instead of or in addition to the connection states "good", "slightly bad", and "bad", the communication partner "neighborhood", "existing within 10 meters", "absent within 10 meters", and the like may be displayed. However, in connection with this, "connection" may be displayed as "use" or the like. For example, in FIG. 3D, "in use (nearby)" may be displayed instead of "connecting (good)", and "usage time 10 seconds" may be displayed instead of "connection time 10 seconds". In FIG. 12, even if "in use (exists within 10 meters)" is displayed instead of "connecting (slightly defective)" and "use time 83 seconds" is displayed instead of "connection time 83 seconds". good.
上記実施形態では、携帯端末６０と接続している旨（図３Ｄの例では左上）を固定位置に「接続中」と表示したが（図３Ｄ）、固定位置に表示することに代えて又は加えて左右方向（又は上下方向）にスクロール表示させてもよい。上記実施形態では、携帯端末６０と接続している旨を文字（図３Ｄの例では「接続中」）と表示したが、接続中であるか否かを認識させる方法はこれに限定されない。例えば、携帯端末６０と接続していないときと、携帯端末６０と接続しているときとで、値付画面（計量画面）の背景色や背景模様を異ならせてもよい。これにより、接続していることがより分かり易くなる。客に応じて背景色や背景模様を異ならせてもよい In the above embodiment, the fact that the mobile terminal 60 is connected (upper left in the example of FIG. 3D) is displayed as "connecting" at the fixed position (FIG. 3D), but instead of displaying at the fixed position or in addition. It may be scrolled in the left-right direction (or up-down direction). In the above embodiment, the fact that the mobile terminal 60 is connected is displayed as a character (“connecting” in the example of FIG. 3D), but the method of recognizing whether or not the connection is being made is not limited to this. For example, the background color and the background pattern of the pricing screen (weighing screen) may be different between when the mobile terminal 60 is not connected and when the mobile terminal 60 is connected. This makes it easier to see that they are connected. The background color and background pattern may be different depending on the customer.
上記実施形態では、図３Ｆの場面では、接続に関係する情報（携帯端末６０と接続している旨の情報、接続状態、客の名前、キャラクタ、接続時間等）を表示しない例を説明したが、図３Ｆの場面でも、図３Ｄや図３Ｉの場面と同様、接続に関係する情報を表示してもよい。図３Ｇや図３Ｈの場面についても同様である。つまり、計量装置２０に接続した携帯端末６０の客が、商品ボタンの操作後（未値付商品を選択後）~ラベル発行の間に当該計量装置２０から離れる可能性は、商品ボタンの操作前（未値付商品を選択前）に当該計量装置２０から離れる可能性よりも低いと考えられるため、上記実施形態では、商品ボタンを操作前には接続に関係する情報を表示するが（図３Ｄ、図３Ｉ）、商品ボタンの操作後~ラベル発行の間には接続に関係する情報を表示しないようにしていたが（図３Ｆ、図３Ｇ、図３Ｈ）、商品ボタンを操作前に加えて商品ボタンの操作後~ラベル発行の間にも接続に関係する情報を表示するようにしてもよい。計量装置２０は、商品ボタンの操作後~ラベル発行の間においては、商品ボタンを操作前よりも、接続に関係する情報を簡略化して表示してもよい。例えば、計量装置２０は、商品ボタンの操作後~ラベル発行の間においては、商品ボタンを操作前よりも、接続に関係する情報の情報量（情報の種類）を減らしてもよい。あるいは、計量装置２０は、商品ボタンを操作前は、商品ボタンの操作後~ラベル発行の間よりも、認識し易い態様（大きな文字等）で、接続に関係する情報を表示してもよい。 In the above embodiment, in the scene of FIG. 3F, an example in which information related to the connection (information indicating that the mobile terminal 60 is connected, a connection status, a customer's name, a character, a connection time, etc.) is not displayed has been described. , In the scene of FIG. 3F, information related to the connection may be displayed as in the scene of FIG. 3D and FIG. 3I. The same applies to the scenes of FIGS. 3G and 3H. That is, the possibility that the customer of the mobile terminal 60 connected to the weighing device 20 will leave the weighing device 20 after the operation of the product button (after selecting the unpriced product) to the issuance of the label is possible before the operation of the product button. Since it is considered less likely to leave the weighing device 20 (before selecting an unpriced product), in the above embodiment, information related to the connection is displayed before the product button is operated (FIG. 3D). , Fig. 3I), the information related to the connection was not displayed between the operation of the product button and the issuance of the label (Fig. 3F, Fig. 3G, Fig. 3H), but the product button was added before the operation of the product. Information related to the connection may be displayed after the button is operated and after the label is issued. The weighing device 20 may display the information related to the connection in a simplified manner after the product button is operated and after the label is issued, as compared with before the product button is operated. For example, the weighing device 20 may reduce the amount of information (type of information) of the information related to the connection from the time after the operation of the product button to the time when the label is issued, as compared with the case before the operation of the product button. Alternatively, the weighing device 20 may display information related to the connection in a mode (large characters or the like) that is easier to recognize before the product button is operated than after the product button is operated and during label issuance.
上記実施形態では、接続中において、計量装置２０は接続時間を表示し（図３Ｄ、図３Ｉ、図１２等）、携帯端末６０は接続時間を表示しない（図３Ｅ、図３Ｊ、図１３）例を説明したが、接続中において、携帯端末６０も接続時間を表示してもよい。 In the above embodiment, during connection, the weighing device 20 displays the connection time (FIG. 3D, FIG. 3I, FIG. 12, etc.), and the mobile terminal 60 does not display the connection time (FIG. 3E, FIG. 3J, FIG. 13). However, the mobile terminal 60 may also display the connection time during the connection.
上記実施形態では、警告中に、計量装置２０は警告継続時間を表示し（図１２等）、携帯端末６０は警告継続時間を表示しない（図１３）例を説明したが、警告中に、携帯端末６０も警告継続時間を表示してもよい。 In the above embodiment, the weighing device 20 displays the warning duration during the warning (FIG. 12 and the like), and the mobile terminal 60 does not display the warning duration (FIG. 13). The terminal 60 may also display the warning duration.
上記実施形態では、警告中に、計量装置２０は警告継続時間を表示（カウントアップ）する例を説明したが（図１２等）、警告継続時間に代えて又は加えて、切断迄の残時間（カウントダウン）してもよい。携帯端末６０においても同様である。 In the above embodiment, an example in which the weighing device 20 displays (counts up) the warning duration during the warning has been described (FIG. 12, etc.), but instead of or in addition to the warning duration, the remaining time until disconnection (the remaining time until disconnection (FIG. 12 etc.)). (Countdown) may be done. The same applies to the mobile terminal 60.
携帯端末６０は、表示に代えて又は加えて、音声により警告してもよい。例えば、携帯端末６０は、図１３のような画面を表示するときに音声を出力してもよい。携帯端末６０は、表示や音声に代えて又は加えて、振動により警告してもよい。例えば、携帯端末６０は、図１３のような画面を表示するときに筐体を振動させてもよい。図１３のような画面を表示するときとは、当該画面の表示開始直前~表示終了の期間のうちの少なくとも一部の期間である。当該画面の表示開始直前~表示終了の期間内に、上記一部の期間が複数回あってもよい。音声の出力も筐体の振動も行う場合には、音声を出力する期間や回数は、筐体を振動させる期間や回数と一致してもよいし一致していなくてもよい。 The mobile terminal 60 may warn by voice instead of or in addition to the display. For example, the mobile terminal 60 may output audio when displaying the screen as shown in FIG. The mobile terminal 60 may warn by vibration in place of or in addition to the display and voice. For example, the mobile terminal 60 may vibrate the housing when displaying the screen as shown in FIG. When the screen as shown in FIG. 13 is displayed, it is at least a part of the period from immediately before the start of the display to the end of the display of the screen. The above-mentioned partial period may occur a plurality of times within the period from immediately before the start of the display of the screen to the end of the display. When both the sound output and the vibration of the housing are performed, the period and the number of times the sound is output may or may not match the period and the number of times the housing is vibrated.
携帯端末６０は、切断時に、接続中である旨の情報を消去するが（ステップＳ６１３）、切断した旨を報知（表示、音声、振動の１つ以上により報知）してもよい。 At the time of disconnection, the mobile terminal 60 erases the information indicating that the connection is being made (step S613), but may notify the disconnection (notify by one or more of display, voice, and vibration).
上記実施形態では、接続監視処理の実行間隔（又は実行タイミング）に関し、夫々の未値付商品に対する計量処理を実行する毎に（夫々の未値付商品に対する計量処理を実行する前に）接続監視処理を実行する例を説明した（図４、図１０）。つまり、上記実施形態では、接続監視処理を実行し、中断とならなければ（該接続監視処理において中断フラグの値を「１」としなければ）、１つ目の未値付商品について計量処理を実行し、未値付商品が残っていれば（該計量処理において完了フラグの値を「１」としなければ）、再度、接続監視処理を実行し、中断とならなければ、２つ目の未値付商品について計量処理を実行し、未値付商品が残っていれば、再度、接続監視処理を実行する、というような実行間隔で接続監視処理を実行する例を説明した。しかしながら、接続監視処理の実行間隔は、夫々の未値付商品に対する計量処理を実行する毎でなくてもよい。換言すれば、接続監視処理の実行タイミングは、夫々の未値付商品に対する計量処理を実行する前でなくてもよい。例えば、接続中に所定間隔で（例えばタイマー割込みによる１０秒毎に）、接続監視処理を実行してもよい。 In the above embodiment, regarding the execution interval (or execution timing) of the connection monitoring process, each time the weighing process for each unpriced product is executed (before executing the weighing process for each unpriced product), the connection monitoring is performed. An example of executing the process has been described (FIGS. 4 and 10). That is, in the above embodiment, the connection monitoring process is executed, and if it is not interrupted (unless the value of the interruption flag is set to "1" in the connection monitoring process), the weighing process is performed on the first unpriced product. If it is executed and unpriced products remain (unless the value of the completion flag is set to "1" in the weighing process), the connection monitoring process is executed again, and if it is not interrupted, the second unpriced item is not executed. An example of executing the connection monitoring process at an execution interval such as executing the weighing process for the priced product and executing the connection monitoring process again if the unpriced product remains has been described. However, the execution interval of the connection monitoring process does not have to be every time the weighing process is executed for each unpriced product. In other words, the execution timing of the connection monitoring process does not have to be before the weighing process for each unpriced product is executed. For example, the connection monitoring process may be executed at predetermined intervals during the connection (for example, every 10 seconds due to a timer interrupt).
接続中に所定間隔で接続監視処理を実行する態様では、例えば、未値付商品が指定された後に当該未値付商品が直ぐに載台に載置されなければ（図１０のステップＳ４０１が実行された後に直ぐにステップＳ４０２が実行されなければ）、未値付商品が載台に載置される迄の間（ステップＳ４０２が実行される迄の間）に、載置される迄の時間に応じて１回以上の接続監視処理が実行される。 In the mode of executing the connection monitoring process at predetermined intervals during connection, for example, if the unpriced product is not placed on the platform immediately after the unpriced product is specified (step S401 in FIG. 10 is executed). (If step S402 is not executed immediately after that), until the unpriced product is placed on the table (until step S402 is executed), depending on the time until it is placed. The connection monitoring process is executed one or more times.
登録情報を送信した後に直ぐに更新確認応答を受信しなければ（図１０のステップＳ４０３が実行された後に直ぐにステップＳ４０４が実行されなければ）、更新確認応答を受信する迄の間（ステップＳ４０４が実行される迄の間）に、更新確認応答を受信する迄の時間に応じて１回以上の接続監視処理が実行される。 If the update confirmation response is not received immediately after the registration information is transmitted (if step S404 is not executed immediately after step S403 in FIG. 10 is executed), until the update confirmation response is received (step S404 is executed). Until this is done), one or more connection monitoring processes are executed according to the time until the update confirmation response is received.
つまり、上記実施形態に示した夫々の未値付商品に対する計量処理を実行する毎に接続監視処理を実行する態様では、商品の指定受付（ステップＳ４０１）~商品ボタンの消去（ステップＳ４０６）の間には接続状態を監視しないが、接続中に所定間隔で接続監視処理を実行する態様では、商品の指定受付（ステップＳ４０１）~商品ボタンの消去（ステップＳ４０６）の間にも接続状態を監視する。 That is, in the mode in which the connection monitoring process is executed each time the weighing process for each unpriced product shown in the above embodiment is executed, between the product designation reception (step S401) and the product button deletion (step S406). However, in a mode in which the connection monitoring process is executed at predetermined intervals during connection, the connection status is also monitored during the product designation reception (step S401) to the deletion of the product button (step S406). ..
商品の指定受付（ステップＳ４０１）~商品ボタンの消去（ステップＳ４０６）の間に接続状態を監視した結果、接続状態が良好でないと判断された場合には、計量処理の進行段階に応じて、当該計量処理を当該段階のまま維持させてもよいし、当該計量処理をキャンセルしてもよい（当該指定が無かったものとして取り消してもよい）。 If it is determined that the connection status is not good as a result of monitoring the connection status between the product designation reception (step S401) and the product button deletion (step S406), the relevant product is determined according to the progress stage of the weighing process. The weighing process may be maintained at that stage, or the weighing process may be canceled (may be canceled assuming that the designation was not made).
更新確認応答の受信後（ステップＳ４０４）~ラベルの印刷、発行（ステップＳ４０５）の間に警告継続時間が所定時間（例えば３分）に到達するケース（図８のステップＳ２３４の条件が成立するケース）もあるが、当該ケースの場合、当該商品の登録等（図１０のステップＳ４２２の当該商品のカート情報への登録、ステップＳ４１３の当該商品の未値付商品から除外等）をキャンセル（当該商品のカート情報への登録を消去、「計量」→「要計量」に戻し、販売価格を「？？」に戻す等）するとともに、ラベルを発行しないようにしてもよい。上記ケースの場合に、当該商品の登録をキャンセルせずに維持し、ラベルを発行するようにしてもよい。つまり、少なくとも、登録済（値付済）であるか否かと、ラベル（図１４で説明する当該商品の販売価格等をコード化したバーコードを印刷したラベルではなく、当該バーコードを印刷していないラベル）の印刷発行の有無との整合を図るようにすればよい。 A case where the warning duration reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) between the reception of the update confirmation response (step S404) and the printing and issuing of the label (step S405) (the case where the condition of step S234 in FIG. 8 is satisfied). ), But in the case of this case, the registration of the product, etc. (registration of the product in the cart information in step S422 in FIG. 10, exclusion from the unpriced product of the product in step S413, etc.) is canceled (the product). You may delete the registration in the cart information, return to "Weighing" → "Weighing required", return the selling price to "??", etc.), and do not issue the label. In the case of the above case, the registration of the product may be maintained without being canceled and a label may be issued. That is, at least, the label (not the label printed with the bar code that encodes the selling price of the product described in FIG. 14) and whether or not it is registered (priced) is printed. It suffices to make it consistent with the presence or absence of print issuance of (no label).
図１４は、計量装置２０の動作の他の例を示したフローチャートである。図１０のシーケンス図の左側に示した計量装置２０の動作の変形例である。具体的には、図１４のフローチャートは、販売価格の算出後（図１０のステップＳ４０２）、本来であれば、送信（図１０のステップＳ４０３）する筈の登録情報を送信しなかった場合における、計量装置２０の動作を変形例として示したものである。図１４のステップＳ１４０１、Ｓ１４０２、Ｓ１４０６、Ｓ１４０７は、図１０のステップＳ４０１、Ｓ４０２、Ｓ４０６、Ｓ４０７と同様であるため、説明の一部又は全部を省略する。 FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing another example of the operation of the weighing device 20. It is a modification of the operation of the weighing device 20 shown on the left side of the sequence diagram of FIG. Specifically, the flowchart of FIG. 14 shows a case where the registration information that should be transmitted (step S403 of FIG. 10) is not transmitted after the calculation of the selling price (step S402 of FIG. 10). The operation of the weighing device 20 is shown as a modified example. Since steps S1401, S1402, S1406, and S1407 in FIG. 14 are the same as steps S401, S402, S406, and S407 in FIG. 10, a part or all of the description will be omitted.
ステップＳ１４０５：計量装置２０は、ステップＳ１４０２における販売価格の算出後、携帯端末６０に登録情報を送信せずに当該商品のラベルを印刷、発行する。そしてステップＳ１４０６に進む。 Step S1405: After calculating the selling price in step S1402, the weighing device 20 prints and issues a label of the product without transmitting registration information to the mobile terminal 60. Then, the process proceeds to step S1406.
登録情報を送信せずにラベルを印刷、発行するとは、ラベルを印刷、発行する前に携帯端末６０への登録情報の送信を１度も試みなかった場合のほか、ラベルを印刷、発行する前に携帯端末６０への登録情報の送信を１度以上試みたが送信できかった場合も含まれる。計量装置２０は、例えば、商品の指定受付（ステップＳ１４０１）~販売価格の算出（ステップＳ１４０２）の間に携帯端末６０との通信に何らかの問題が生じた場合、携帯端末６０への登録情報の送信を１度も試みることなくラベルを印刷、発行してもよいし、携帯端末６０への登録情報の送信を１度以上試みてからラベルを印刷、発行してもよい。上述の通信の問題が、電波強度の問題（通信できない程に弱い）であれば、接続監視処理（例えば、上述した接続中に所定間隔で接続監視処理を実行する態様）において、閾値にもよるが、接続状態「不良」が判断される。図１５の場面も同様である。 Printing and issuing a label without sending the registration information means that the label has never been sent to the mobile terminal 60 before printing and issuing the label, and before printing and issuing the label. It also includes the case where the registration information is transmitted to the mobile terminal 60 at least once but cannot be transmitted. For example, when a problem occurs in communication with the mobile terminal 60 between the designated reception of the product (step S1401) and the calculation of the selling price (step S1402), the weighing device 20 transmits the registration information to the mobile terminal 60. The label may be printed and issued without attempting once, or the label may be printed and issued after attempting to transmit the registration information to the mobile terminal 60 once or more. If the above-mentioned communication problem is a problem of radio wave strength (weak enough to prevent communication), it depends on the threshold value in the connection monitoring process (for example, the mode in which the connection monitoring process is executed at predetermined intervals during the above-mentioned connection). However, the connection status "bad" is judged. The same applies to the scene of FIG.
ステップＳ１４０５にて計量装置２０が発行するラベルには、当該商品を登録するめのバーコード（当該商品の販売価格等をコード化したバーコードであって光学的に読取可能なバーコード等）を印刷する。つまり、図１０の場面とは異なり、登録情報を送信していないため、当該商品は未登録（取引管理サーバのカート情報に未登録）である。従って、計量装置２０は、ラベル上に、当該商品を登録するめのバーコードを印刷する。これにより、他の装置（バーコード読み取り機能を備える精算装置等）においてラベル上のバーコードを読み取ることにより、簡便かつ正確に、当該商品を登録することができる。 On the label issued by the weighing device 20 in step S1405, a barcode for registering the product (a barcode that encodes the selling price of the product and is optically readable, etc.) is printed. do. That is, unlike the scene of FIG. 10, since the registration information is not transmitted, the product is not registered (not registered in the cart information of the transaction management server). Therefore, the weighing device 20 prints a bar code for registering the product on the label. As a result, the product can be registered easily and accurately by reading the barcode on the label with another device (such as a payment device having a barcode reading function).
全部の商品の登録が正常に完了して精算を行う場合（つまり、上記バーコードを印刷したラベルが１枚も発行されていない場合）、精算は、例えば、以下のように行う。携帯端末６０は、所定の操作（「お会計に進む」ボタンの操作）に応じて、会計用コード（登録済の全商品の登録情報を取得するための情報）を表示する。精算装置（例えばセルフ精算装置）は、会計用コードを読み取って登録済の全商品の登録情報を取得する。精算装置は、会計用コードから取得した登録情報に基づいて精算処理を実行する。精算装置を利用せずに、携帯端末６０でいわゆるモバイル決済を行ってもよい。 When the registration of all the products is completed normally and the settlement is performed (that is, when no label printed with the above barcode is issued), the settlement is performed as follows, for example. The mobile terminal 60 displays an accounting code (information for acquiring registration information of all registered products) in response to a predetermined operation (operation of the "proceed to accounting" button). The checkout device (for example, a self-payment device) reads the accounting code and acquires the registration information of all the registered products. The settlement device executes the settlement process based on the registration information acquired from the accounting code. So-called mobile payment may be performed on the mobile terminal 60 without using the payment device.
一方、少なくとも一部の商品の登録が正常に完了せずに精算を行う場合（つまり、上記バーコードを印刷したラベルが１枚以上も発行された場合）、精算は、例えば、以下のように行う。携帯端末６０は、所定の操作（「お会計に進む」ボタンの操作）に応じて、会計用コード（登録済の全商品の登録情報を取得するための情報）を表示する。精算装置（例えばセルフ精算装置）は、会計用コードを読み取って登録済の全商品の登録情報を取得する。更に精算装置は、未登録の商品のラベル（上記バーコードを印刷したラベル）を読み取って未登録の商品の情報を登録情報として取得する。精算装置は、会計用コードから取得した登録情報及びラベルから取得した登録情報に基づいて精算処理を実行する。 On the other hand, when the settlement is performed without normally completing the registration of at least some products (that is, when one or more labels printed with the above barcode are issued), the settlement is performed as follows, for example. conduct. The mobile terminal 60 displays an accounting code (information for acquiring registration information of all registered products) in response to a predetermined operation (operation of the "proceed to accounting" button). The checkout device (for example, a self-payment device) reads the accounting code and acquires the registration information of all the registered products. Further, the settlement device reads the label of the unregistered product (the label on which the above barcode is printed) and acquires the information of the unregistered product as the registration information. The settlement device executes the settlement process based on the registration information acquired from the accounting code and the registration information acquired from the label.
図１５は、計量装置２０の動作の他の例を示したフローチャートである。図１０のシーケンス図の左側に示した計量装置２０の動作の変形例である。具体的には、図１５のフローチャートは、登録情報の送信後（図１０のステップＳ４０３）、本来であれば受信（図１０のステップＳ４０４）する筈の更新確認応答を受信しなかった場合における、計量装置２０の動作を変形例として示したものである。図１５のステップＳ２４０１~Ｓ２４０３、Ｓ２４０６、Ｓ２４０７は、図１０のステップＳ４０１~Ｓ４０３、Ｓ４０６、Ｓ４０７と同様であるため、説明の一部又は全部を省略する。 FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing another example of the operation of the weighing device 20. It is a modification of the operation of the weighing device 20 shown on the left side of the sequence diagram of FIG. Specifically, the flowchart of FIG. 15 is a case where the update confirmation response that should have been received (step S404 of FIG. 10) is not received after the transmission of the registration information (step S403 of FIG. 10). The operation of the weighing device 20 is shown as a modified example. Since steps S2401 to S2403, S2406, and S2407 of FIG. 15 are the same as steps S401 to S403, S406, and S407 of FIG. 10, a part or all of the description will be omitted.
ステップＳ２４０５：計量装置２０は、ステップＳ１４０３において商品（ステップＳ１４０１において指定された未値付商品）の登録情報を携帯端末６０に送信したが、該携帯端末６０から更新確認応答を受信しなかった場合（例えば、所定時間内に受信しなかった場合）、当該商品のラベルを印刷、発行する。そしてステップＳ２４０６に進む。例えば、登録情報の送信（ステップＳ２４０３）後、携帯端末６０との通信に何らかの問題が生じた場合、計量装置２０は、更新確認応答を受信しなくなる。 Step S2405: When the weighing device 20 transmits the registration information of the product (the unpriced product specified in step S1401) to the mobile terminal 60 in step S1403, but does not receive the update confirmation response from the mobile terminal 60. (For example, if the product is not received within the specified time), the label of the product is printed and issued. Then, the process proceeds to step S2406. For example, if any problem occurs in communication with the mobile terminal 60 after the transmission of the registration information (step S2403), the weighing device 20 does not receive the update confirmation response.
ステップＳ２４０５にて計量装置２０が発行するラベルには、当該商品を登録するめのバーコード（当該商品の販売価格等をコード化したバーコードであって光学的に読取可能なバーコード等）を印刷する。つまり、図１０の場面とは異なり、登録情報の送信後に更新確認応答を受信していないため、当該商品が登録済であるか否かは不明である。登録済であれば当該商品の以降の登録は不要であり、登録済でなければ当該商品の以降の登録は必要である。本例では、登録済でないとみなし、計量装置２０は、ラベル上に、当該商品を登録するめのバーコードを印刷することとしている。これにより、他の装置（バーコード読み取り機能を備える精算装置等）においてラベル上のバーコードを読み取ることにより、簡便かつ正確に、登録することができる。 On the label issued by the weighing device 20 in step S2405, a barcode for registering the product (a barcode that encodes the selling price of the product and is optically readable, etc.) is printed. do. That is, unlike the scene of FIG. 10, since the update confirmation response is not received after the registration information is transmitted, it is unknown whether or not the product has been registered. If it has been registered, subsequent registration of the product is not required, and if it has not been registered, subsequent registration of the product is required. In this example, it is considered that the product has not been registered, and the weighing device 20 prints a barcode for registering the product on the label. As a result, it is possible to register easily and accurately by reading the barcode on the label with another device (such as a settlement device having a barcode reading function).
登録済でないとみなしているに過ぎないため、実際には登録済である可能性もある。従って、二重登録の防止策が必要となる。例えば、商品毎（値付毎）に管理番号を発行（採番）し、当該管理番号を含む登録情報を送信するとともに、当該管理番号も含む情報（販売価格＋管理番号等）をコード化したバーコードを印刷したラベルを発行するようにしてもよい。取引管理サーバは、商品を登録する際は管理番号も記憶（カート情報内に記憶）する。これにより、例えば、他の装置（バーコード読み取り機能を備える精算装置等）は、ラベル上のバーコードから認識した管理番号が取引管理サーバに既に記憶されているか否かを確認し、二重登録を防止することができる。 It is possible that it is actually registered, as it is only considered unregistered. Therefore, measures to prevent double registration are required. For example, a control number is issued (numbered) for each product (for each price), registration information including the control number is transmitted, and information including the control number (selling price + control number, etc.) is coded. A label with a barcode printed on it may be issued. The transaction management server also stores the management number (stored in the cart information) when registering the product. As a result, for example, another device (such as a settlement device having a barcode reading function) confirms whether or not the management number recognized from the barcode on the label is already stored in the transaction management server, and double-registers it. Can be prevented.
携帯端末６０を用いずに計量する客は、非会員指示表示領域４２を操作して計量（値付け）を開始することとなるが（図３Ｂ）、非会員指示表示領域４２を操作した場合の計量装置２０の動作は、基本的には（商品選択領域４３への商品ボタンの表示に関する動作を除き）、図１４と同様となる。つまり、計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０を用いて計量する客の場合には、商品選択領域４３に、客が携帯端末６０を用いて値札６０のバーコードを認識した商品の商品ボタン（つまり当該客に操作されることが略確定的な商品ボタン）を表示するが（図３Ｄ）、携帯端末６０を用いずに計量する客の場合には、商品選択領域４３に、全部（又は、商品選択領域４３のサイズを考慮した一部）の商品の商品ボタン（つまり当該客に操作されるかが未確定な商品ボタン）を表示する点が異なるものの、非会員指示表示領域４２を操作した場合（つまり携帯端末６０を用いずに計量する客の場合）の計量装置２０の動作は、図１４のようになる。携帯端末６０を用いずに計量する客の場合に商品選択領域４３に表示する商品ボタンをプリセットボタン（又は、プリセットの商品ボタン）と称する場合がある。 A customer who weighs without using the mobile terminal 60 operates the non-member instruction display area 42 to start weighing (price) (FIG. 3B), but when the non-member instruction display area 42 is operated. The operation of the weighing device 20 is basically the same as that of FIG. 14 (except for the operation related to the display of the product button in the product selection area 43). That is, in the case of a customer who weighs using the mobile terminal 60, the weighing device 20 displays a product button (that is, the product button) of the product in which the customer recognizes the bar code of the price tag 60 using the mobile terminal 60 in the product selection area 43. A product button that is almost certain to be operated by the customer) is displayed (FIG. 3D), but in the case of a customer who weighs without using the mobile terminal 60, all (or product selection) are displayed in the product selection area 43. When the non-member instruction display area 42 is operated (that is, the product button (that is, the product button whose operation by the customer is uncertain) is displayed) of the product of the product (a part considering the size of the area 43) is displayed. That is, the operation of the weighing device 20 (in the case of a customer who weighs without using the portable terminal 60) is as shown in FIG. In the case of a customer who weighs without using the mobile terminal 60, the product button displayed in the product selection area 43 may be referred to as a preset button (or a preset product button).
印刷部２８は、多色印刷に対応するものであってもよい。印刷部２８が多色印刷に対応するものである場合、バーコードを印刷しないラベル（登録済商品用のラベル）と、バーコードを印刷するラベル（未登録商品用のラベル）とで、多色印刷の有無又は使用態様を異ならせてもよい。例えば、バーコードを印刷するラベルには、バーコードに加え、赤文字で「スキャンしてください」等のメッセージを印刷し、バーコードを印刷しないラベルには、赤色の印刷を一切使用しないようにしてもよい。印刷部２８は、両面印刷に対応するものであってもよい。印刷部２８が両面印刷に対応するものである場合、バーコードを印刷しないラベルと、バーコードを印刷するラベルとで、両面印刷の有無又は使用態様を異ならせてもよい。例えば、バーコードを印刷するラベルには、背面に透かし文字で（薄目の文字で）、「×」を印刷し、バーコードを印刷しないラベルには、背面に透かし文字で、「○」を印刷してもよい。 The printing unit 28 may be compatible with multicolor printing. When the printing unit 28 supports multicolor printing, the label that does not print the barcode (label for registered products) and the label that prints the barcode (label for unregistered products) are multicolored. The presence or absence of printing or the mode of use may be different. For example, in addition to the barcode, print a message such as "Please scan" in red on the label that prints the barcode, and do not use red printing on the label that does not print the barcode. You may. The printing unit 28 may be compatible with double-sided printing. When the printing unit 28 is compatible with double-sided printing, the presence or absence of double-sided printing or the mode of use may be different between the label that does not print the barcode and the label that prints the barcode. For example, a label that prints a barcode is printed with a watermark on the back (in light letters) and "x" is printed, and a label that does not print a barcode is printed with a watermark on the back and "○" is printed. You may.
上記実施形態では、計量装置２０が、全部の未値付商品の値付けが完了したと判断した場合、又は、中断すると判断した場合、携帯端末６０との通信を切断するが（図４、図８のステップＳ２３４、図１０のステップＳ４０７、図１１のステップＳ６０１等）、切断方法はこれに限定されない。例えば、計量装置２０は、操作に基づいて携帯端末６０との通信を切断してもよい。 In the above embodiment, when the weighing device 20 determines that the pricing of all unpriced products has been completed, or when it determines that the pricing is interrupted, the communication with the mobile terminal 60 is cut off (FIGS. 4 and 4). 8 step S234, FIG. 10 step S407, FIG. 11 step S601, etc.), the cutting method is not limited thereto. For example, the weighing device 20 may disconnect the communication with the mobile terminal 60 based on the operation.
（方法１）計量装置２０は、中断すると判断した場合にボタン（切断ボタン）を表示し、切断ボタンの操作に応じて携帯端末６０との通信を切断してもよい。つまり、方法１は、中断すると判断した場合に実行される切断処理（図１１）のステップＳ６０１の前に店員等の操作（承認）を挟む態様である。切断ボタンは、客には周知されていない店員が操作するボタン（所謂隠しボタン）であってもよい。中断すると判断する前迄は、操作不能（操作無効）な態様（グレーダウン表示等）で切断ボタンを表示し、中断すると判断した場合に、切断ボタンを操作可能（操作有効）に表示してもよい。装置の判断に応じて切断ボタンを表示する他の方法（方法３、４）についても同様である。 (Method 1) The weighing device 20 may display a button (disconnect button) when it is determined to be interrupted, and disconnect the communication with the mobile terminal 60 in response to the operation of the disconnect button. That is, the method 1 is an embodiment in which an operation (approval) of a clerk or the like is inserted before step S601 of the cutting process (FIG. 11) executed when it is determined to be interrupted. The disconnect button may be a button (so-called hidden button) operated by a clerk who is not well known to the customer. Even if the disconnect button is displayed in an inoperable (operation invalid) mode (gray-down display, etc.) until it is determined to be interrupted, and the disconnect button is displayed as operable (operation enabled) when it is determined to be interrupted. good. The same applies to the other methods (methods 3 and 4) in which the disconnect button is displayed according to the judgment of the device.
（方法２）計量装置２０は、所定の操作に基づいて切断ボタンを表示し、切断ボタンの操作に応じて携帯端末６０との通信を切断してもよい。切断ボタンは、隠しボタンである。つまり、方法２は、隠しボタンの操作が可能な任意のタイミング（店員が判断した任意のタイミング）で、切断処理（図１１）を実行させる態様である。 (Method 2) The weighing device 20 may display a disconnect button based on a predetermined operation and disconnect the communication with the mobile terminal 60 in response to the operation of the disconnect button. The disconnect button is a hidden button. That is, the method 2 is an embodiment in which the disconnection process (FIG. 11) is executed at an arbitrary timing (arbitrary timing determined by the clerk) at which the hidden button can be operated.
携帯端末６０側から通信を切断してもよい。例えば、携帯端末６０は、操作に基づいて計量装置２０との通信を切断してもよい。一例として、切断ボタンの操作に応じて携帯端末６０との通信を切断してもよい。 Communication may be disconnected from the mobile terminal 60 side. For example, the mobile terminal 60 may disconnect the communication with the weighing device 20 based on the operation. As an example, the communication with the mobile terminal 60 may be disconnected in response to the operation of the disconnect button.
（方法３）中断すると判断した計量装置２０から中断する旨の通知を受信した場合に、切断ボタンを表示してもよい。携帯端末６０側で切断ボタンの操作が操作された場合には、切断ボタンが操作された旨（承認）が計量装置２０側に通知され、該通知を受けた計量装置２０は、切断処理を実行させてもよい。つまり、方法３は、図１１のステップＳ６１１とＳ６１２の間に携帯端末６０の客の操作（承認）を挟む態様である。 (Method 3) When a notification to the effect of interruption is received from the weighing device 20 determined to be interrupted, the disconnect button may be displayed. When the operation of the disconnect button is operated on the mobile terminal 60 side, the fact that the disconnect button is operated (approval) is notified to the weighing device 20 side, and the weighing device 20 receiving the notification executes the cutting process. You may let me. That is, the method 3 is an embodiment in which the operation (approval) of the customer of the mobile terminal 60 is sandwiched between steps S611 and S612 in FIG.
（方法４）携帯端末６０自体が、中断を判断し（例えば、警告継続時間を管理することにより中断を判断し）、切断ボタンを表示してもよい。携帯端末６０側で切断ボタンの操作が操作された場合には、切断ボタンが操作された旨（要求）が計量装置２０側に通知され、該通知を受けた計量装置２０は、切断処理を実行させてもよい。つまり、図１１は計量装置２０が動作の起点となるが（接続終了要求を送信するが）、方法４は、携帯端末６０が動作の起点となる態様である。携帯端末６０自体が中断を判断するが、切断ボタンを表示せずに（客の了承無しに）、計量装置２０側に切断を要求してもよい。 (Method 4) The mobile terminal 60 itself may determine the interruption (for example, determine the interruption by managing the warning duration) and display the disconnect button. When the operation of the disconnect button is operated on the mobile terminal 60 side, the fact that the disconnect button is operated (request) is notified to the weighing device 20 side, and the weighing device 20 receiving the notification executes the cutting process. You may let me. That is, in FIG. 11, the weighing device 20 is the starting point of the operation (although the connection termination request is transmitted), but the method 4 is the mode in which the mobile terminal 60 is the starting point of the operation. Although the mobile terminal 60 itself determines the interruption, the measuring device 20 may request the disconnection without displaying the disconnect button (without the consent of the customer).
（方法５）携帯端末６０は、接続中は常時、切断ボタンを表示してもよい。つまり、方法５は、任意のタイミング（客が判断した任意のタイミング）で、切断処理（但し、図１１とは異なり携帯端末６０が起点となる）を実行させる態様である。携帯端末６０側で切断ボタンの操作が操作された場合の動きは方法４と同様である。 (Method 5) The mobile terminal 60 may display a disconnect button at all times during connection. That is, the method 5 is an embodiment in which the disconnection process (however, unlike FIG. 11, the mobile terminal 60 is the starting point) is executed at an arbitrary timing (arbitrary timing determined by the customer). The movement when the operation of the disconnect button is operated on the mobile terminal 60 side is the same as that of the method 4.
上記実施形態では、接続状態の評価（Ｓ１０５、Ｓ２１）に関し、計量装置２０が、電波の強度に基づいて通信相手（携帯端末６０）とどのくらい離れているか評価する例を説明したが、電波の強度と電波の方向とに基づいて通信相手とどの方向にどのくらい離れているかを評価してもよい。現在知られているＢｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈの仕様（例えば、Ｂｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈ５．１以降）では、通信相手との距離の他に通信相手の存在する方向も認識（方向探知機能による方向の認識）も可能である。 In the above embodiment, regarding the evaluation of the connection state (S105, S21), an example of evaluating how far the measuring device 20 is from the communication partner (mobile terminal 60) based on the strength of the radio wave has been described. And how far away from the communication partner may be evaluated based on the direction of the radio wave. According to the currently known Bluetooth specifications (for example, Bluetooth 5.1 or later), it is possible to recognize not only the distance to the communication partner but also the direction in which the communication partner exists (direction recognition by the direction finding function).
計量装置２０は、通信相手の距離と方向とを認識し、距離と方向とに基づく総合的な評価を実行してもよい。つまり、計量装置２０は、例えば認識した距離が同程度であっても（距離単独による評価が同一となるような場合であっても）、方向も考慮し、異なる評価を導き出すようにしてもよい。図１６ＡのＰ１、Ｐ２は、精算装置からの距離が同一であるが、方向が異なるため、異なる評価としている。 The weighing device 20 may recognize the distance and direction of the communication partner and perform a comprehensive evaluation based on the distance and direction. That is, the weighing device 20 may derive different evaluations in consideration of the direction, for example, even if the recognized distances are about the same (even if the evaluations based on the distances alone are the same). .. P1 and P2 in FIG. 16A have the same distance from the settlement device, but have different directions, so they are evaluated differently.
例えば、個々の計量装置２０は、店内における自装置の設置位置に応じたマップ（評価用情報）を記憶する。上記マップは、計量装置２０が参照可能な他の装置（店舗内に設置される管理装置、店舗外に設置されるサーバ等）に記憶されていてもよいし、複数の計量装置２０のうちの代表する１つに記憶されていてもよいが、便宜上、個々の計量装置２０が記憶しているものとして説明する。上記マップには、方向別距離別（又は距離別方向別）、つまり座標、に応じた評価が記憶されている。 For example, each weighing device 20 stores a map (evaluation information) according to the installation position of its own device in the store. The map may be stored in another device (a management device installed in the store, a server installed outside the store, etc.) to which the weighing device 20 can be referred, or among the plurality of measuring devices 20. Although it may be stored in one of the representatives, it will be described as being stored by each measuring device 20 for convenience. In the map, evaluations according to directions, distances (or distances, directions), that is, coordinates are stored.
図１６Ａ、図１６Ｂ、他の評価の例を説明する説明図である。図１６Ａは、店舗のフロアを模式的に示したものである。図１６Ａの左側は量り売り商品等が陳列されている陳列エリアである。右下は、精算装置である。右上方向は当該店舗の出入口である。また図１６Ａには、互いに重複しないエリアＡ、Ｂ、Ｃの３つのエリアが設定されている。エリアＡは、計量装置２０の近傍のエリアである。Ｐ１はエリア内の一地点である。エリアＢは、エリアＡを除くエリアのうち陳列エリア側のエリアである。Ｐ２はエリア内の一地点である。エリアＣは、エリアＡを除くエリアであって精算装置や出入口方面のエリアである。Ｐ３はエリアＣ内の一地点である。計量装置２０とＰ２との距離は、計量装置２０とＰ３との距離と同一である。 16A, 16B, and explanatory views for explaining other evaluation examples. FIG. 16A schematically shows the floor of the store. The left side of FIG. 16A is a display area where products sold by weight are displayed. The lower right is the settlement device. The upper right direction is the entrance / exit of the store. Further, in FIG. 16A, three areas A, B, and C that do not overlap each other are set. Area A is an area in the vicinity of the weighing device 20. P1 is a point in the area. Area B is an area on the display area side of the areas other than area A. P2 is a point in the area. Area C is an area excluding area A and is an area in the direction of the settlement device and the entrance / exit. P3 is a point in area C. The distance between the measuring device 20 and P2 is the same as the distance between the measuring device 20 and P3.
図１６Ｂは、図１６Ａに示した計量装置２０が記憶するマップである。エリアＡ、Ｂ、Ｃの夫々は、座標（省略）によって定義されている。エリアＡの評価は「操作位置」である。つまり、図１６Ａに示すようにエリアＡは計量装置２０の近傍であり、例えば通信相手（客）がＰ１に位置していれば計量装置２０を操作は可能である。従って、エリアＡの評価を「操作位置」としている。エリアＢの評価は「非操作位置（一時的）」である。つまり、図１６Ａに示すようにエリアＢは計量装置２０の近傍ではなく、例えば通信相手（客）がＰ２に位置していれば計量装置２０の操作は不可能である。エリアＢは、陳列エリア側であり商品の追加購入等のため一時的に計量装置２０を離れた可能性は高い。従って、エリアＢの評価を「非操作位置（一時的）」としている。エリアＣの評価は「非操作位置（非一時的）」である。つまり、図１６Ａに示すようにエリアＣは計量装置２０の近傍ではなく、例えば通信相手（客）がＰ３に位置していれば計量装置２０の操作は不可能である。エリアＣは、精算装置や出入口側であり一時的に計量装置２０を離れた可能性は低い。従って、エリアＣの評価を「非操作位置（非一時的）」としている。 FIG. 16B is a map stored by the weighing device 20 shown in FIG. 16A. Areas A, B, and C are each defined by coordinates (omitted). The evaluation of area A is "operation position". That is, as shown in FIG. 16A, the area A is in the vicinity of the weighing device 20, and the weighing device 20 can be operated if, for example, the communication partner (customer) is located at P1. Therefore, the evaluation of the area A is set as the "operation position". The evaluation of area B is "non-operation position (temporary)". That is, as shown in FIG. 16A, the area B is not in the vicinity of the weighing device 20, and if, for example, the communication partner (customer) is located at P2, the weighing device 20 cannot be operated. Area B is on the display area side, and there is a high possibility that the weighing device 20 is temporarily left due to additional purchase of products or the like. Therefore, the evaluation of area B is set to "non-operation position (temporary)". The evaluation of area C is "non-operation position (non-temporary)". That is, as shown in FIG. 16A, the area C is not in the vicinity of the weighing device 20, and if, for example, the communication partner (customer) is located at P3, the weighing device 20 cannot be operated. Area C is on the settlement device and the entrance / exit side, and it is unlikely that the weighing device 20 is temporarily left. Therefore, the evaluation of area C is set to "non-operation position (non-temporary)".
エリアＡの評価であるときには接続状態「良好」と判断した場合と同様に計量装置２０は制御し（ステップＳ２２からステップＳ２３に進むように制御し）、エリアＢ又はエリアＣの評価であるときには接続状態「良好」と判断しなかった場合と同様に計量装置２０を制御する（ステップＳ２２からステップＳ２４に進むように制御する）。非操作位置（一時的）の場合（エリアＢの場合）と、非操作位置（非一時的）の場合（エリアＣの場合）とで、中断すると判断する迄の時間を異ならせてもよい。具体的には、非操作位置（非一時的）では非操作位置（一時的）よりも短い時間で中断すると判断してもよい。距離のみの場合として実施形態に示した、接続状態「やや不良」と、接続状態「不良」の場合も同様である。つまり、接続状態「不良」では接続状態「不良」よりも短い時間で中断すると判断してもよい。 When the evaluation of the area A, the weighing device 20 controls (controls to proceed from step S22 to the step S23) in the same manner as when the connection state is judged to be "good", and when the evaluation of the area B or the area C, the connection is made. The weighing device 20 is controlled in the same manner as when the state is not determined to be “good” (control is performed so as to proceed from step S22 to step S24). The time until it is determined to be interrupted may be different depending on the case of the non-operating position (temporary) (in the case of area B) and the case of the non-operating position (non-temporary) (in the case of area C). Specifically, it may be determined that the non-operating position (non-temporary) is interrupted in a shorter time than the non-operating position (temporary). The same applies to the case of the connection state "slightly defective" and the case of the connection state "defective" shown in the embodiment as the case of only the distance. That is, it may be determined that the connection state "bad" is interrupted in a shorter time than the connection state "bad".
エリアＢからはエリアＡ（計量装置２０）に直ぐに戻ると考える方が合理的であれば、エリアＡに加えエリアＢの評価であるときにも、接続状態「良好」と判断した場合と同様に計量装置２０を制御し、エリアＣの評価であるときに限って、接続状態「良好」と判断しなかった場合と同様に計量装置２０を制御してもよい。 If it is rational to think that the area B will return to the area A (weighing device 20) immediately, the connection state is judged to be "good" when the evaluation of the area B is performed in addition to the area A, as in the case where the connection state is judged to be "good". The weighing device 20 may be controlled and the weighing device 20 may be controlled only when the evaluation of the area C is performed, as in the case where the connection state is not determined to be “good”.
（他の装置による実装等について） (About mounting with other devices)
計量装置２０の機能の一部について他の装置（店舗内に設置される管理装置、店舗外に設置されるサーバ（クラウドサーバ等）等）が実行してもよい。例えば、上記実施形態では、計量装置２０が、載置された商品を計量し、続いて販売価格を算出しているが、販売価格の算出は他の装置が実行してもよい。つまり、計量装置２０は、載置された商品を計量した計量値を他の装置に送信し、当該他の装置から販売価格を受信してもよい。 Other devices (management device installed in the store, server installed outside the store (cloud server, etc.), etc.) may execute a part of the functions of the weighing device 20. For example, in the above embodiment, the weighing device 20 weighs the placed product and subsequently calculates the selling price, but the calculation of the selling price may be performed by another device. That is, the weighing device 20 may transmit the weighing value obtained by weighing the placed product to another device and receive the selling price from the other device.
当該他の装置は、計量装置２０から受信した計量値と単価情報とに基づいて販売価格を算出するが、当該他の装置自身が、各商品の単価情報を保持し、販売価格を算出してもよいし、各商品の単価情報を保持せずに、当該商品の単価を別の装置に問い合わせることにより取得し、販売価格を算出してもよい。風袋を考慮する必要がある場合には、計量装置２０は、計量値から風袋分を控除した値を他の装置に送信すればよい。 The other device calculates the selling price based on the measured value received from the measuring device 20 and the unit price information, but the other device itself holds the unit price information of each product and calculates the selling price. Alternatively, the selling price may be calculated by inquiring the unit price of the product to another device without holding the unit price information of each product. When it is necessary to consider the tare, the weighing device 20 may transmit the value obtained by subtracting the tare portion from the weighed value to another device.
また例えば、計量装置２０は、画面の表示制御に関しては、単に、他の装置から送信される制御情報に基づいてタッチディスプレイ２６の表示を制御してもよい。つまり、計量装置２０は、タッチディスプレイ２６に対する操作情報、計量部２５の計量による計量情報、スキャナ２４の認識による認識情報等の入力情報を他の装置に送信し、当該他の装置から得られる制御情報に基づいてタッチディスプレイ２６の表示を制御してもよい。当該他の装置は、計量装置２０からの受信情報（計量装置２０への入力情報）に基づいて種々の処理を実行し、処理結果に応じた制御情報を計量装置２０に送信する。 Further, for example, the weighing device 20 may simply control the display of the touch display 26 based on the control information transmitted from another device with respect to the display control of the screen. That is, the weighing device 20 transmits input information such as operation information for the touch display 26, weighing information based on the weighing of the weighing unit 25, and recognition information recognized by the scanner 24 to another device, and controls obtained from the other device. The display of the touch display 26 may be controlled based on the information. The other device executes various processes based on the information received from the measuring device 20 (input information to the measuring device 20), and transmits control information according to the processing result to the measuring device 20.
例えば、計量装置２０は、タッチディスプレイ２６に対する操作情報に相当する情報を、他の装置（携帯端末）から受信してもよい。例えば、図１７に示すように、携帯端 For example, the weighing device 20 may receive information corresponding to the operation information for the touch display 26 from another device (mobile terminal). For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the mobile end
末６０は、値付画面に相当する画面を表示し、当該画面上の操作に応じた操作情報を計量装置２０に送信し、計量装置２０は、携帯端末６０からの受信情報（携帯端末６０上の操作情報）に基づいて処理を実行してもよい。 The terminal 60 displays a screen corresponding to a pricing screen, transmits operation information corresponding to the operation on the screen to the weighing device 20, and the weighing device 20 receives information received from the mobile terminal 60 (on the mobile terminal 60). The process may be executed based on the operation information of.
図１７は、携帯端末６０における他の表示例である。図１７に示すように、携帯端末６０は、計量装置２０との接続後、値付けにおける操作を受付可能な画面（計量装置２０が表示する値付画面に相当する画面。以下、携帯端末側値付画面という）を表示し、当該携帯端末側値付画面を介して客からの値付けにおける操作を受け付けるようにしてもよい。 FIG. 17 is another display example on the mobile terminal 60. As shown in FIG. 17, the mobile terminal 60 has a screen capable of accepting an operation in pricing after being connected to the weighing device 20 (a screen corresponding to the pricing screen displayed by the weighing device 20. Hereinafter, the value on the mobile terminal side). It may be possible to display (referred to as a attached screen) and accept an operation in pricing from a customer via the mobile terminal side pricing screen.
携帯端末６０が携帯端末側値付画面を表示しているときは、計量装置２０への直接的な操作は受け付けないようにしてもよい。つまり、本来の客（接続中の客）以外の他の客が計量装置２０を操作できないようにしてもよい。既に説明したが、計量装置２０がある携帯端末６０と接続しているときは、当該計量装置２０に対し、他の携帯端末６０は接続できない。 When the mobile terminal 60 is displaying the price-setting screen on the mobile terminal side, the direct operation on the weighing device 20 may not be accepted. That is, the weighing device 20 may not be operated by a customer other than the original customer (the connected customer). As described above, when the weighing device 20 is connected to a mobile terminal 60, another mobile terminal 60 cannot be connected to the weighing device 20.
計量装置２０と接続中の携帯端末６０は、接続中であれば、常に、携帯端末側値付画面を表示し、携帯端末側値付画面上にて操作を受け付け可能としてもよい。携帯端末６０が計量装置２０の近傍（携帯端末側値付画面を操作する客が数歩内で載台に商品を載せることが可能な位置）から離れた位置に移動した場合（例えば、計量装置２０と携帯端末６０との距離が所定距離以上であると計量装置２０又は該携帯端末６０が認識した場合）、携帯端末側値付画面において警告（計量装置２０の近傍ではない旨の警告、計量装置２０に戻る旨の警告等）をしてもよい。警告は、携帯端末側値付画面上の警告に代えて又は加えて、音声や振動による警告を行ってもよい。 The mobile terminal 60 connected to the weighing device 20 may always display the priced screen on the mobile terminal side and can accept operations on the priced screen on the mobile terminal side as long as it is connected. When the mobile terminal 60 moves away from the vicinity of the weighing device 20 (a position where a customer who operates the price-setting screen on the mobile terminal side can place a product on the platform within a few steps) (for example, the weighing device). When the weighing device 20 or the mobile terminal 60 recognizes that the distance between the 20 and the mobile terminal 60 is equal to or greater than a predetermined distance), a warning on the priced screen on the mobile terminal side (warning that the meter is not in the vicinity of the measuring device 20 and weighing). A warning to return to the device 20 etc.) may be given. The warning may be given by voice or vibration in place of or in addition to the warning on the priced screen on the mobile terminal side.
携帯端末６０が所定時間内に近傍に戻った場合には警告を解除する。携帯端末６０が所定時間内に近傍に戻らない場合、又は、携帯端末６０が更に離れた位置に移動した場合には、携帯端末側値付画面を消去（切断し、接続前の画面を表示）する。 When the mobile terminal 60 returns to the vicinity within a predetermined time, the warning is canceled. If the mobile terminal 60 does not return to the vicinity within a predetermined time, or if the mobile terminal 60 moves further away, the priced screen on the mobile terminal side is deleted (disconnected and the screen before connection is displayed). do.
携帯端末側値付画面の消去前に、携帯端末側値付画面上の操作を無効（非受付）としてもよい。つまり、計量装置２０と携帯端末６０との距離が離れるに連れて、「携帯端末側値付画面を操作可能に表示」→携帯端末側値付画面を表示（操作無効）」→「携帯端末側値付画面を消去」の順に、段階的に制御してもよい。 Before erasing the priced screen on the mobile terminal side, the operation on the priced screen on the mobile terminal side may be invalidated (non-accepted). That is, as the distance between the weighing device 20 and the mobile terminal 60 increases, "display the priced screen on the mobile terminal side in an operable manner" → display the priced screen on the mobile terminal side (operation disabled) "→" display the priced screen on the mobile terminal side (operation disabled) "→" mobile terminal side It may be controlled step by step in the order of "Clear pricing screen".
携帯端末側値付画面上の操作を無効とした場合には、操作が無効となった旨を警告（報知）してもよい。携帯端末側値付画面を消去した場合も同様である。 When the operation on the priced screen on the mobile terminal side is invalidated, a warning (notification) may be given to the effect that the operation is invalid. The same applies when the price-setting screen on the mobile terminal side is deleted.
上述した携帯端末側値付画面の制御等を、計量装置２０との距離単独に基づいて行ってもよいが、計量装置２０との距離及び方向に基づいて行ってもよい。 The control of the price-setting screen on the mobile terminal side described above may be performed based on the distance to the measuring device 20 alone, or may be performed based on the distance and direction from the measuring device 20.
携帯端末６０が携帯端末側値付画面を表示しているときは計量装置２０への直接的な操作は受け付けないようにしてもよいと説明したが、携帯端末６０が携帯端末側値付画面を表示しているときであっても、計量装置２０への直接的な操作の受け付けを可能としてもよい。 It was explained that when the mobile terminal 60 is displaying the priced screen on the mobile terminal side, the direct operation on the weighing device 20 may not be accepted, but the mobile terminal 60 displays the priced screen on the mobile terminal side. Even when it is displayed, it may be possible to accept a direct operation to the weighing device 20.
携帯端末６０が携帯端末側値付画面を表示しているときには、計量装置２０における特定（一部）の操作を受付可能（有効）としてもよい（他の操作は全て無効としてもよい）。例えば、計量画面に店員を呼び出すための店員呼出ボタンを配置し、携帯端末６０が携帯端末側値付画面を表示しているときには、当該店員呼出ボタンの操作のみを受付可能としてもよい（キャンセルボタン（後述）も配置されている場合には、店員呼出ボタンの操作及びキャンセルボタンの操作を受付可能とし、他の操作（商品ボタン等の操作等）を無効としてもよい）。仕掛中（例えば、商品の指定後~ラベル発行）の処理をキャンセルさせるキャンセルボタンを配置し、携帯端末６０が携帯端末側値付画面を表示しているときには、キャンセルボタンの操作のみを受付可能としてもよい（店員呼出ボタンも配置されている場合には、店員呼出ボタンの操作及びキャンセルボタンの操作を受付可能とし、他の操作を無効としてもよい）。つまり、例えば商品ボタン等の操作は無効となるようにしてもよい。 When the mobile terminal 60 is displaying the price-setting screen on the mobile terminal side, the specific (partial) operation of the weighing device 20 may be accepted (valid) (all other operations may be invalid). For example, a clerk call button for calling a clerk may be arranged on the weighing screen, and when the mobile terminal 60 displays the priced screen on the mobile terminal side, only the operation of the clerk call button may be accepted (cancel button). If (described later) is also arranged, the operation of the clerk call button and the operation of the cancel button can be accepted, and other operations (operations of product buttons, etc.) may be invalidated). A cancel button is placed to cancel the process during work in process (for example, after the product is specified-label issuance), and when the mobile terminal 60 is displaying the priced screen on the mobile terminal side, only the operation of the cancel button can be accepted. (If the clerk call button is also arranged, the operation of the clerk call button and the operation of the cancel button may be accepted, and other operations may be invalidated). That is, for example, the operation of the product button or the like may be invalidated.
携帯端末６０が携帯端末側値付画面を表示しているときに計量装置２０は割込みボタンを表示し、他の客によって割込みボタンの操作が操作された場合、他の客による計量装置２０への直接的な操作（上述した店員呼出ボタンやキャンセルボタン以外の操作）を一時的に受け付けるようにしてもよい。他の客による処理中は、接続状態を維持しつつ、携帯端末側値付画面の操作を無効とし、他の客による処理後に、携帯端末側値付画面の操作を可能にしてもよい。 When the mobile terminal 60 is displaying the price-setting screen on the mobile terminal side, the weighing device 20 displays an interrupt button, and when the operation of the interrupt button is operated by another customer, another customer sends the weighing device 20 to the weighing device 20. Direct operations (operations other than the above-mentioned clerk call button and cancel button) may be temporarily accepted. During the processing by another customer, the operation of the priced screen on the mobile terminal side may be invalidated while maintaining the connected state, and the operation of the priced screen on the mobile terminal side may be enabled after the processing by the other customer.
割込みボタンの操作が操作された場合、計量装置２０は、初期画面を表示してもよい。つまり、他の客は、割込みボタンの操作し、初期画面から操作を開始してもよい。例えば、非会員であれば、非会員指示表示領域４２を操作（タッチ）し、計量装置２０は、図１４に示したように処理をする。割込みボタンの操作が上記「特定の操作」に相当するが、割込みボタンの操作後に初期画面を表示する態様は、初期画面後に全部（略全部） When the operation of the interrupt button is operated, the weighing device 20 may display the initial screen. That is, another customer may operate the interrupt button and start the operation from the initial screen. For example, if it is a non-member, the non-member instruction display area 42 is operated (touched), and the weighing device 20 performs processing as shown in FIG. The operation of the interrupt button corresponds to the above "specific operation", but the mode of displaying the initial screen after the operation of the interrupt button is all (almost all) after the initial screen.
の操作が可能になるため、実質的に、携帯端末６０が携帯端末側値付画面を表示しているときであっても計量装置２０への直接的な操作を全部（略全部）許可する態様である。 Since the operation of the above is possible, substantially all (almost all) direct operations to the weighing device 20 are permitted even when the mobile terminal 60 is displaying the price-setting screen on the mobile terminal side. Is.
携帯端末６０が携帯端末側値付画面を表示しているときに計量装置２０への操作を受付可能とするか否かを、当該携帯端末６０の計量装置２０からの距離に応じて制御してもよい。例えば、接続中の携帯端末６０が計量装置２０の近傍に存在するときには割込みボタンを表示せず、接続中の携帯端末６０が計量装置２０の近傍に存在しないときに割込みボタンを表示してもよい。つまり、本来の客が計量装置２０の近傍にいるときには当該計量装置２０への他の客の操作（全部の操作、又は、店員呼出ボタンやキャンセルボタン以外の操作）を無効とし、本来の客が計量装置２０の近傍にいないときは当該計量装置２０への他の客の操作（全部、又は略全部の操作）を受け付けるようにしてもよい。 Whether or not the operation to the weighing device 20 can be accepted when the mobile terminal 60 is displaying the price-setting screen on the mobile terminal side is controlled according to the distance of the mobile terminal 60 from the weighing device 20. May be good. For example, the interrupt button may not be displayed when the connected mobile terminal 60 is in the vicinity of the weighing device 20, and the interrupt button may be displayed when the connected mobile terminal 60 is not in the vicinity of the weighing device 20. .. That is, when the original customer is in the vicinity of the weighing device 20, the operations of other customers (all operations or operations other than the clerk call button and the cancel button) on the weighing device 20 are invalidated, and the original customer When not in the vicinity of the weighing device 20, other customers' operations (all or substantially all operations) of the weighing device 20 may be accepted.
接続中の携帯端末６０が計量装置２０の近傍に存在するとき（本来の客が計量装置２０の近傍にいるとき）には、他の客が、傍にいる本来の客を無視して割込みボタンを操作するとは考え難い。つまり、携帯端末６０が携帯端末側値付画面を表示しているときに計量装置２０が割込みボタンを表示したとしても、他の客が割込みボタンを操作するのは、実際のところ、接続中の携帯端末６０が計量装置２０の近傍に存在しないときである。従って、接続中の携帯端末６０が計量装置２０の近傍に存在するときには割込みボタンを表示せず、接続中の携帯端末６０が計量装置２０の近傍に存在しないときに割込みボタンを表示してもよい。 When the connected mobile terminal 60 is in the vicinity of the weighing device 20 (when the original customer is in the vicinity of the weighing device 20), another customer ignores the original customer nearby and the interrupt button. It is unlikely that you will operate. That is, even if the weighing device 20 displays the interrupt button while the mobile terminal 60 is displaying the price-setting screen on the mobile terminal side, it is actually during connection that another customer operates the interrupt button. This is when the mobile terminal 60 does not exist in the vicinity of the weighing device 20. Therefore, the interrupt button may not be displayed when the connected mobile terminal 60 is in the vicinity of the weighing device 20, and the interrupt button may be displayed when the connected mobile terminal 60 is not in the vicinity of the measuring device 20. ..
（その他）携帯端末６０は、量り売り商品の値札８０のバーコードをスキャンしたときに計量装置２０との接続に関する報知（後で計量装置２０との接続が必要である旨の報知等）を行ってもよい。１品目の量り売り商品の値札８０のバーコードをスキャンしたときに報知を行い、２品目以降は報知を行わないようにしてもよい。計量装置２０が設置されている店舗と設置されていない店舗があり得るため、携帯端末６０は、計量装置２０が設置されている店舗の場合に、報知すればよい。携帯端末６０は、入店時に（位置情報により把握）、店舗マスタ（当該携帯端末６０自身が記憶してもよいし、他の装置が記憶してもよい）を参照し、当該店舗に計量装置２０が設置されているか否かを事前に判断しておいてもよいし、バーコードをスキャンしたときに当該店舗に計量装置２０が設置されているか否かを判断してもよい。 (Others) When the mobile terminal 60 scans the bar code of the price tag 80 of the product sold by weight, the mobile terminal 60 notifies the connection with the weighing device 20 (notification that the connection with the weighing device 20 is required later, etc.). May be good. A notification may be given when the bar code of the price tag 80 of a product sold by weight for one item is scanned, and the notification may not be given for the second and subsequent items. Since there may be a store in which the weighing device 20 is installed and a store in which the weighing device 20 is not installed, the mobile terminal 60 may notify the store in the case where the weighing device 20 is installed. The mobile terminal 60 refers to the store master (may be stored by the mobile terminal 60 itself or may be stored by another device) at the time of entering the store (grasped by the location information), and the weighing device is stored in the store. It may be determined in advance whether or not 20 is installed, or it may be determined whether or not the weighing device 20 is installed in the store when the barcode is scanned.
携帯端末６０は入店後に画面７０を最初に表示したときに、当該店舗内において、同じく画面７０を表示している他の携帯端末６０の台数（利用者数）を取得し、報知してもよい。例えば、携帯端末６０は、入店後において、所定ボタン（例えば買物開始ボタン）の操場に基づいて画面７０を表示する場合、所定ボタンの操作時に上記台数を報知してもよい。同一店舗における画面７０を表示する携帯端末６０の台数に制限がある場合には、制限台数に近いときには制限台数に近い旨を報知してもよい。携帯端末６０は、精算装置において収容されている現金に関する情報を取得し、警告（ニアエンド等）を報知してもよい。上記情報の取得には、例えば、無線ＬＡＮを用いてもよい。 When the mobile terminal 60 first displays the screen 70 after entering the store, even if the number (number of users) of other mobile terminals 60 that also display the screen 70 in the store is acquired and notified. good. For example, when the mobile terminal 60 displays the screen 70 based on the operation area of the predetermined button (for example, the shopping start button) after entering the store, the number of the mobile terminals 60 may be notified when the predetermined button is operated. When there is a limit to the number of mobile terminals 60 that display the screen 70 in the same store, when the number is close to the limit, it may be notified that the number is close to the limit. The mobile terminal 60 may acquire information about cash stored in the checkout device and notify a warning (near end, etc.). For example, a wireless LAN may be used to acquire the above information.
上記実施形態では、精算処理を実行する装置を「精算装置」と称したが、同様の機能を有するものであれば、精算端末、会計装置（端末）、決済装置（端末）、ＰＯＳ装置（端末）などと称されるものであってもよい。 In the above embodiment, the device that executes the settlement process is referred to as a "settlement device", but if it has the same function, it is a settlement terminal, an accounting device (terminal), a payment device (terminal), and a POS device (terminal). ) Etc. may be used.
上記実施形態では、「携帯端末６０を用いて計量する客（会員）」「携帯端末６０を用いずに計量する客（基本的には非会員）」と説明したが、この説明における「会員」は、携帯端末６０に専用の画面（図３Ａの画面７０等）を表示し、商品を購入する客（ここではアプリ登録会員という）であり、いわゆる店舗の会員（購買実績に応じて何らかの特典が与えられる会員等。ここでは店舗会員という）とは別物である。店舗会員も、店舗会員でない客（一般客）も、アプリ登録（実施形態では「顧客登録（会員登録）」と説明）によってアプリ登録会員になる。逆に、アプリ登録しなければ、店舗会員であってもアプリ登録会員にならない。 In the above embodiment, "customers (members) who weigh using the mobile terminal 60" and "customers who weigh without using the mobile terminal 60 (basically non-members)" have been described, but "members" in this explanation. Is a customer who displays a dedicated screen (screen 70, etc. in FIG. 3A) on the mobile terminal 60 and purchases a product (here, referred to as an application registered member), and is a so-called store member (some privilege depending on the purchase record). It is different from the members who are given. Here, it is called a store member). Both store members and customers who are not store members (general customers) become app-registered members by app registration (explained as "customer registration (member registration)" in the embodiment). Conversely, if you do not register the app, even if you are a store member, you will not become an app registered member.
第１の実施形態によれば、客自身が量り売り商品を計量するのに適する装置及び方法を提供できる。 According to the first embodiment, it is possible to provide an apparatus and a method suitable for the customer himself to weigh the goods sold by weight.
（１）第１の実施形態における計量装置は、商品を計量する計量手段と、前記計量手段による計量結果に基づく情報を表示する表示手段と、携帯端末と通信可能に接続するための接続手段と、を備え、前記表示手段は、前記携帯端末との接続状態と、該携帯端末を識別可能な情報とを表示する。 (1) The weighing device according to the first embodiment includes a weighing means for weighing a product, a display means for displaying information based on the weighing result by the weighing means, and a connecting means for communicably connecting to a mobile terminal. The display means displays the connection state with the mobile terminal and information that can identify the mobile terminal.
上記（１）の計量装置によれば、客自身が量り売り商品を好適に計量することができる。つまり、計量装置の状況（接続状態や携帯端末を識別可能な情報）がわかるため、状況に応じて計量装置を利用することができる。例えば、当該計量装置の使用状況をきちんと認識し、使用することができる。従って、自身が使用する計量装置を他の客が誤って操作してしまうことや、他の客が使用する計量装置を自身が誤って操作してしまうことなどを、防止することができる。 According to the weighing device (1) described above, the customer himself / herself can suitably weigh the products sold by weight. That is, since the status of the weighing device (information that can identify the connection state and the mobile terminal) is known, the weighing device can be used depending on the situation. For example, the usage status of the measuring device can be properly recognized and used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another customer from erroneously operating the weighing device used by the customer, or the measuring device used by the other customer from being erroneously operated by the customer.
（２）計時手段を備え、前記表示手段は、前記携帯端末との接続に関係する時間を表示する、ことを特徴とする（１）に記載の計量装置である。 (2) The measuring device according to (1), further comprising a time measuring means, wherein the display means displays a time related to connection with the mobile terminal.
上記（２）の計量装置によれば、接続に関係する時間を確認することができる。これにより、例えば、接続中（利用中）の状態がどのくらい続いているのかを認識するができる。随時、時間が更新（カウントアップ）されるため、接続（利用）が進行中であることを認識させることができる。つまり、接続中（利用中）であることをより強く認識させることができる。 According to the measuring device of (2) above, the time related to the connection can be confirmed. This makes it possible to recognize, for example, how long the connected (in use) state continues. Since the time is updated (counted up) from time to time, it is possible to recognize that the connection (use) is in progress. That is, it is possible to make the user more strongly aware that the device is being connected (in use).
（３）前記表示手段は、前記携帯端末との接続に関係する時間が所定の時間となった場合、該携帯端末との通信を切断するボタンを操作可能に表示することを特徴とする（２）に記載の計量装置である。 (3) The display means is characterized in that when the time related to the connection with the mobile terminal reaches a predetermined time, a button for disconnecting the communication with the mobile terminal is operably displayed (2). ) Is the weighing device.
上記（３）の計量装置によれば、切断ボタンを接続時間に応じて好適に表示することができる。これにより、例えば、所定と時間となる前は、当該客との通信がむやみに切断されることを防止しつつ、所定と時間となった後は、他の客の処理を進行させるべく当該客との通信を切断することがきる。 According to the weighing device of (3) above, the disconnect button can be suitably displayed according to the connection time. As a result, for example, before the predetermined time and time, the communication with the customer is prevented from being unnecessarily disconnected, and after the predetermined time and time, the customer is processed in order to proceed with the processing of the other customer. You can disconnect the communication with.
（４）商品に貼付するラベルを印刷して発行する印刷手段を備え、前記印刷手段は、前記携帯端末との接続状態に応じて、印字態様を変えてラベルを発行する、ことを特徴とする（１）乃至（３）の何れかに記載の計量装置である。 (4) A printing means for printing and issuing a label to be attached to a product is provided, and the printing means is characterized in that the label is issued by changing the printing mode according to the connection state with the mobile terminal. The weighing device according to any one of (1) to (3).
上記（４）の計量装置によれば、接続状態に応じて好適なラベルを発行することができる。 According to the weighing device of (4) above, a suitable label can be issued according to the connection state.
（５）前記印刷手段は、前記計量手段による計量結果に基づく情報を他装置で読取可能にコード化したコードを印刷したラベルを発行可能であり、前記携帯端末と接続しているときは前記コードを印刷しないラベルを発行し、前記携帯端末と接続していないときは前記コードを印刷したラベルを発行する、ことを特徴とする（４）に記載の計量装置である。 (5) The printing means can issue a label printed with a code obtained by coding information based on the measurement result by the measuring means so that it can be read by another device, and when connected to the mobile terminal, the code. The weighing device according to (4), wherein a label on which the code is printed is issued, and a label on which the code is printed is issued when the mobile terminal is not connected to the mobile terminal.
上記（５）の計量装置によれば、携帯端末と接続していない場合であっても好適に処理を進行させることができる。つまり、携帯端末と接続していない場合には他装置でラベル上のコードを読み取ればよいので簡便かつ正確に処理を進行させることができる。 According to the weighing device of (5) above, the process can be suitably proceeded even when the device is not connected to the mobile terminal. That is, when the mobile terminal is not connected, the code on the label may be read by another device, so that the process can proceed easily and accurately.
（６）本発明の他の態様は、計量装置と、当該計量装置と通信可能な携帯端末と、を含む販売システムであって、前記計量装置は、商品を計量する計量手段と、前記計量手段による計量結果に基づく情報を表示する表示手段と、前記携 (6) Another aspect of the present invention is a sales system including a weighing device and a mobile terminal capable of communicating with the weighing device, wherein the weighing device includes a weighing means for weighing a product and the weighing means. Display means for displaying information based on the measurement result by
帯端末と通信可能に接続するための接続手段と、を有し、前記表示手段は、前記携帯端末との接続状態と、該携帯端末を認識可能な情報とを表示する、ことを特徴とする販売システムである。 It has a connection means for communicably connecting to a band terminal, and the display means displays a connection state with the mobile terminal and information recognizable by the mobile terminal. It is a sales system.
上記（６）の販売システムによれば、（１）と同様の効果が得られる。 According to the sales system of (6) above, the same effect as (1) can be obtained.
（７）前記携帯端末は、当該携帯端末の利用者への警告する警告手段を有し、前記警告手段は、前記計量装置との接続に関係する警告を行う、ことを特徴とする（６）に記載の販売システムである。 (7) The mobile terminal has a warning means for giving a warning to a user of the mobile terminal, and the warning means gives a warning related to connection with the measuring device (6). It is a sales system described in.
上記（７）の販売システムによれば、携帯端末の利用者に的確に警告を行うことができる。 According to the sales system of (7) above, it is possible to accurately warn the user of the mobile terminal.
以下に、本発明の第２の実施形態を示す。 The second embodiment of the present invention is shown below.
＜第２の実施形態の第１の例＞ <First example of the second embodiment>
図１８は、本実施形態の販売システムにおける計量値付け装置（計量値付け装置の一例）が使用される店舗の概要を示している。本実施形態の店舗としては食品を販売している場合を例に挙げる。本実施形態において計量値付け装置が使用される店舗では、客による商品の指定に応じて、店員が計量値付け装置により商品を計量して値付けする操作を行うようにされた、対面方式が採られる。 FIG. 18 shows an outline of a store in which a weighing pricing device (an example of a weighing pricing device) in the sales system of the present embodiment is used. As an example of the store of the present embodiment, a case where food is sold will be taken as an example. In a store where a weighing and pricing device is used in the present embodiment, a face-to-face method is used in which a store clerk performs an operation of weighing and pricing a product by the weighing and pricing device according to a customer's designation of the product. Taken.
陳列ケース内には、商品として種々の食品が陳列されている。 Various foods are displayed as products in the display case.
陳列ケース上には、３つの計量値付け装置２１０−１、２１０−２、２１０−３が設置されている。以降の説明にあたり、計量値付け装置２１０−１、２１０−２、２１０−３について特に区別しない場合には、計量値付け装置２１０と記載する。計量値付け装置２１０は、重量（質量でもよい）を計る商品を載せる秤台を備える。計量値付け装置２１０は、計量された商品を対象とする値付け処理を実行する。 Three weighing and pricing devices 210-1, 210-2, and 210-3 are installed on the display case. In the following description, when the weighing pricing devices 210-1, 210-2, and 210-3 are not particularly distinguished, they are referred to as weighing pricing devices 210. The weighing and pricing device 210 includes a weighing platform on which a product for measuring weight (may be mass) is placed. The weighing pricing device 210 executes a pricing process for the weighed goods.
例えば、精算装置は、売り場から離れた所定の場所に設置されている。店舗における計量値付け装置２１０の設置数と精算装置の設置数とは特に限定されるものではない。 For example, the checkout device is installed at a predetermined place away from the sales floor. The number of weighing and pricing devices 210 installed in the store and the number of payment devices installed are not particularly limited.
第２の実施形態において、店舗においては、計量値付け装置２１０が配置される売り場のほか、客が商品棚から任意の商品を買い物カゴに入れていくことのできる売り場も配置されている。 In the second embodiment, in the store, in addition to the sales floor where the weighing and pricing device 210 is arranged, the sales floor where the customer can put any product from the product shelf into the shopping cart is also arranged.
図１９は、第２の実施形態における販売システムの構成例を示している。販売システムは計量値付け装置２１０（２１０−１、２１０−２、２１０−３）、精算装置２２０（２２０−１、２２０−２）、管理装置２３０、携帯端末２４０及び取引管理サーバ２５０を備える。 FIG. 19 shows a configuration example of the sales system according to the second embodiment. The sales system includes a weighing and pricing device 210 (210-1, 210-2, 210-3), a settlement device 220 (220-1, 220-2), a management device 230, a mobile terminal 240, and a transaction management server 250.
計量値付け装置２１０は、秤台に載せられた商品について計測された重量と、重量単価とにより商品ごとの金額を算出し、算出された金額を含む商品の商品値付け情報を生成する。商品値付け情報は、計量値付け装置２１０と通信可能に接続された携帯端末２４０に送信される。 The weighing pricing device 210 calculates the amount of money for each product based on the weight measured for the product placed on the scale and the weight unit price, and generates the product price information of the product including the calculated amount. The product pricing information is transmitted to the mobile terminal 240 communicably connected to the weighing pricing device 210.
客は、購入する商品及び購入する重量（若しくは金額）を店員に指示する。店員は、客が指示した商品を登録対象として指定する操作を計量値付け装置２１０に行う。そのうえで、店員は、登録対象の商品の重量（もしくは客が指示した金額に対応する重量）を計量値付け装置１０により計量させる。この際、店員は、商品を秤台に載せることで計量を行う。 The customer instructs the clerk about the product to be purchased and the weight (or amount) to be purchased. The clerk performs an operation of designating the product instructed by the customer as a registration target on the weighing and pricing device 210. Then, the clerk measures the weight of the product to be registered (or the weight corresponding to the amount of money instructed by the customer) by the weighing and pricing device 10. At this time, the clerk weighs the product by placing it on the scale.
計量値付け装置２１０は、計量された重量と、商品について設定されている単位重量（例えば、１００ｇ）あたりの重量単価とにより商品の金額と、を算出し、商品の金額とともに登録対象として指定された商品の値付けを行う。客は、自分が購入したい商品ごとに上記のように重量を店員に指示し、店員は、指示された商品の重量を計測し、商品の値付けを行う。計量値付け装置２１０は、商品の値付けが確定されるごとに、確定された商品の金額が反映された商品値付け情報を、通信可能に接続された携帯端末２４０に送信する。 The weighing pricing device 210 calculates the amount of the product based on the measured weight and the unit weight per unit weight (for example, 100 g) set for the product, and is designated as a registration target together with the amount of the product. Price the products. The customer instructs the clerk about the weight of each product he / she wants to purchase as described above, and the clerk measures the weight of the instructed product and prices the product. Each time the price of the product is confirmed, the weighing pricing device 210 transmits the product pricing information reflecting the confirmed price of the product to the mobile terminal 240 connected communicably.
精算装置２２０は、取引管理サーバ２５０から取得したカート情報（精算情報）を利用して、客の操作に応じて精算処理を実行する。 The settlement device 220 uses the cart information (settlement information) acquired from the transaction management server 250 to execute the settlement process according to the operation of the customer.
管理装置２３０は、店舗における精算装置２２０の上位装置である。管理装置２３０は精算装置２２０と通信可能に接続される。管理装置２３０は、例えば、店舗における精算処理の実績情報を精算装置２２０から取得することで、店舗における取引実績を管理できる。例えば精算装置２２０のステータスを監視し、精算装置２２０に異常が発生した場合には報知を行うことができる。 The management device 230 is a higher-level device of the settlement device 220 in the store. The management device 230 is communicably connected to the checkout device 220. The management device 230 can manage the transaction record in the store by acquiring the record information of the settlement process in the store from the settlement device 220, for example. For example, the status of the settlement device 220 can be monitored, and if an abnormality occurs in the settlement device 220, a notification can be given.
管理装置２３０は、計量値付け装置２１０とも通信可能に接続されてよい。この場合には、例えば管理装置２３０に商品マスタの情報を記憶させておいてよい。計量値付け装置２１０は、管理装置２３０に記憶された商品マスタを利用して、商品の登録に対応する処理を実行することができる。 The management device 230 may also be communicably connected to the weighing and pricing device 210. In this case, for example, the management device 230 may store the product master information. The weighing pricing device 210 can execute a process corresponding to the registration of the product by using the product master stored in the management device 230.
携帯端末２４０は、客が所持する端末装置である。第２の実施形態において、携帯端末２４０は、客が所有するスマートフォンやタブレット端末等であってよい。携帯端末２４０には、第２の実施形態の販売システムに対応して客が買い物等に関連するサービスに利用するアプリケーションソフトウェア（買い物アプリケーション）がインストールされている。 The mobile terminal 240 is a terminal device owned by the customer. In the second embodiment, the mobile terminal 240 may be a smartphone, a tablet terminal, or the like owned by the customer. Application software (shopping application) used by the customer for services related to shopping and the like is installed in the mobile terminal 240 corresponding to the sales system of the second embodiment.
取引管理サーバ２５０は、販売システムにおいて、取引を管理する。取引管理サーバ２５０は、携帯端末２４０からネットワーク経由で送信される商品登録情報を受信し、受信された商品登録情報により、取引単位のカート情報を生成する。カート情報は、対応の取引における商品の登録結果を示す。 The transaction management server 250 manages transactions in the sales system. The transaction management server 250 receives the product registration information transmitted from the mobile terminal 240 via the network, and generates cart information for each transaction based on the received product registration information. The cart information indicates the registration result of the product in the corresponding transaction.
取引管理サーバ２５０は、精算装置２２０から送信されたカート情報要求に応じて、カート情報要求により指定される取引識別子が対応付けられたカート情報を、精算装置２２０に送信する。 The transaction management server 250 transmits to the settlement device 220 the cart information associated with the transaction identifier specified by the cart information request in response to the cart information request transmitted from the settlement device 220.
第２の実施形態における計量値付け装置２１０の構成例を説明する。図２０は、計量値付け装置２１０のハードウェア構成例を示すブロック図である。図２１Ａ及び２１Ｂは、計量値付け装置２１０の外観例を示す斜視図である。図２１Ａは店員側から計量値付け装置２１０を見た図であり、図２１Ｂは計量値付け装置２１０を客側から見た図である。 A configuration example of the weighing and pricing device 210 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing a hardware configuration example of the weighing and pricing device 210. 21A and 21B are perspective views showing an external example of the weighing and pricing device 210. FIG. 21A is a view of the weighing and pricing device 210 viewed from the clerk side, and FIG. 21B is a view of the weighing and pricing device 210 viewed from the customer side.
図２０に示すように、計量値付け装置２１０は、ＣＰＵ２１０１、ＲＯＭ２１０２、ＲＯＭ２１０３、スキャナ２１０４、店員用ディスプレイ２１０５、客用ディスプレイ２１０６、ハードディスク２１０７、キー操作部２１０８、計量部２１０９、印字部２１１０、装置間対応通信部２１１１、近距離通信部２１１２を備える。これらは、バス２１１９を介して互いに接続されている。 As shown in FIG. 20, the weighing pricing device 210 includes a CPU 2101, a ROM 2102, a ROM 2103, a scanner 2104, a clerk display 2105, a customer display 2106, a hard disk 2107, a key operation unit 2108, a measuring unit 2109, a printing unit 2110, and an apparatus. It is provided with an interim communication unit 2111 and a short-range communication unit 2112. These are connected to each other via bus 2119.
ＣＰＵ２１０１は、プログラムを実行することにより、計量値付け装置２１０としての機能実現のための各種処理を実行する。 By executing the program, the CPU 2101 executes various processes for realizing the function as the weighing and pricing device 210.
ＲＯＭ２１０２は、種々の情報を記憶する。例えば、ＣＰＵ２１０１が実行するプログラムを記憶する。ＲＯＭ２１０２は、店員用ディスプレイ２１０５や客用ディスプレイ２１０６による表示に関する情報（画面情報、メッセージ情報等）を記憶する。ＲＯＭ２１０２は、自装置を識別させるための装置番号（装置識別子）を記憶する。ＲＯＭ２１０２は、印字部２１１０による印字に関する情報（印字内容、印字フォーマット情報等）を記憶してもよい。 The ROM 2102 stores various information. For example, the program executed by the CPU 2101 is stored. The ROM 2102 stores information (screen information, message information, etc.) related to the display on the store clerk display 2105 and the customer display 2106. The ROM 2102 stores a device number (device identifier) for identifying its own device. The ROM 2102 may store information (print contents, print format information, etc.) related to printing by the printing unit 2110.
ＲＯＭ２１０３は、ＣＰＵ２１０１が処理、演算を実行するにあたっての作業領域として利用される。 The ROM 2103 is used as a work area for the CPU 2101 to perform processing and calculation.
スキャナ２１０４は、コード化された情報を光学的に読み取る。例えば、図２１Ａ、図２１Ｂに示されるように、スキャナ２１０４は、客からは見えにくい位置に設置されている。 The scanner 2104 optically reads the coded information. For example, as shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the scanner 2104 is installed at a position that is difficult for the customer to see.
店員用ディスプレイ２１０５は、図２１Ａに示すように、店員側に向けて配置される。店員用ディスプレイ２１０５は、タッチパネルとして構成され、表示された操作画面に対して指などの操作体が画面に触れることによる操作を受け付ける。 As shown in FIG. 21A, the clerk display 2105 is arranged toward the clerk side. The clerk display 2105 is configured as a touch panel, and accepts an operation by touching the displayed operation screen with an operating body such as a finger.
客用ディスプレイ２１０６は、図２１Ｂに示すように、客側に向けて配置され、客向けの表示を行う。客用ディスプレイ２１０６は、客による操作が可能なようにタッチパネルとして構成されてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 21B, the customer display 2106 is arranged toward the customer side and displays for the customer. The customer display 2106 may be configured as a touch panel so that it can be operated by the customer.
ハードディスク２１０７は、ＣＰＵ２１０１の補助記憶装置として計量値付け装置２１０に必要な各種の情報を記憶する。ハードディスク２１０７は、例えば商品ファイル等を記憶してもよい。ハードディスク２１０７は、登録処理等をＣＰＵ２１０１に実行させるためのプログラムを記憶してもよい。ハードディスク２１０７は、プログラムが実行されることによって生成される種々の情報を記憶してもよい。ハードディスク２１０７は、店員用ディスプレイ２１０５や客用ディスプレイ２１０６による表示に関する情報や、印字部２１１０による印字に関する情報を記憶してもよい。 The hard disk 2107 stores various information required for the weighing and pricing device 210 as an auxiliary storage device of the CPU 2101. The hard disk 2107 may store, for example, a product file or the like. The hard disk 2107 may store a program for causing the CPU 2101 to execute a registration process or the like. The hard disk 2107 may store various information generated by executing the program. The hard disk 2107 may store information related to display by the store clerk display 2105 and customer display 2106, and information related to printing by the printing unit 2110.
ハードディスク２１０７に代えて、ＳＳＤ（Ｓｏｌｉｄ　Ｓｔａｔｅ　Ｄｒｉｖｅ）等の他の記憶装置が備えられてもよい。 Instead of the hard disk 2107, another storage device such as an SSD (Solid State Drive) may be provided.
キー操作部２１０８は、図２１Ａに示すように、店員からの種々の操作を受け付けるための各種の操作キー（置数キー、取消キー、風袋キー、追加キー、品番キー、実行キー等）を備える。 As shown in FIG. 21A, the key operation unit 2108 includes various operation keys (number key, cancel key, tare key, additional key, product number key, execution key, etc.) for receiving various operations from the clerk. ..
計量部２１０９は、秤台２１０９ａに置かれた商品等（商品及び該商品を入れた風袋）の重量を計量し、計量値を示したデータをＣＰＵ２１０１に出力する。計量部２１０９から計量値を取得したＣＰＵ２１０１は、計量値から所定の重量（風袋の重量）を減算して、秤台２１０９ａに置かれた商品を算出する。ＣＰＵ２１０１は、上述の如く算出した商品の重量をＲＯＭ２１０３に一時記憶するとともに、ディスプレイ（店員用ディスプレイ２１０５、客用ディスプレイ２１０６）に表示させる。 The measuring unit 2109 weighs the product or the like (the product and the tare containing the product) placed on the scale 2109a, and outputs data indicating the measured value to the CPU 2101. The CPU 2101 that has acquired the measured value from the measuring unit 2109 subtracts a predetermined weight (weight of the tare) from the measured value to calculate the product placed on the scale 2109a. The CPU 2101 temporarily stores the weight of the product calculated as described above in the ROM 2103, and displays it on the display (clerk display 2105, customer display 2106).
印字部２１１０は、記録媒体に印字（印刷）し、発行口（図２１Ａ参照）から発行（出力）する。例えば印字部２１１０は、商品に貼り付けるラベルを発行することができる。 The printing unit 2110 prints (prints) on a recording medium and issues (outputs) from the issuing port (see FIG. 21A). For example, the printing unit 2110 can issue a label to be attached to a product.
装置間対応通信部２１１１は、所定の通信網を経由して、他の計量値付け装置２１０との通信を行う場合に対応して備えられる。装置間対応通信部２１１１が対応する通信網は、有線であってもよいし、無線であってもよい。装置間対応通信部２１１１は、管理装置２３０と通信してもよい。装置間対応通信部２１１１は、トランシーバともいう。 The inter-device communication unit 2111 is provided in response to the case of communicating with another weighing and pricing device 210 via a predetermined communication network. The communication network supported by the inter-device communication unit 2111 may be wired or wireless. The inter-device communication unit 2111 may communicate with the management device 230. The inter-device communication unit 2111 is also referred to as a transceiver.
近距離通信部２１１２は、携帯端末２４０と所定の近距離無線通信方式により通信を行う。近距離通信部２１１２が対応する近距離無線通信方式は、例えばＢｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈであってもよい。近距離通信部２１１２は、例えば、Ｂｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈトランシーバである。 The short-range communication unit 2112 communicates with the mobile terminal 240 by a predetermined short-range wireless communication method. The short-range wireless communication method supported by the short-range communication unit 2112 may be, for example, Bluetooth. The short-range communication unit 2112 is, for example, a Bluetooth transceiver.
図２２は、精算装置２２０の外観を示した斜視図である。精算装置２２０は、スキャナ２２０４と、客用ディスプレイ２２０６と、釣銭機２２６０と、発行口２２１０ａとを含む。 FIG. 22 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the settlement device 220. The checkout device 220 includes a scanner 2204, a customer display 2206, a change machine 2260, and an issue port 2210a.
スキャナ２２０４は、コード情報を読み取る。スキャナ２２０４が読み取り可能なコード情報は、バーコード（一次元コード）であってもよいし、二次元コード（例えば、ＱＲコード（登録商標））であってもよい。 The scanner 2204 reads the code information. The code information that can be read by the scanner 2204 may be a bar code (one-dimensional code) or a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)).
第２の実施形態の場合、スキャナ２２０４は、携帯端末２４０にて表示されるコード情報の読み取りに使用される。携帯端末２４０にて表示されるコード情報としては、精算用のコード情報、会員証画面において配置され会員識別子等を示すコード情報、クーポン券としての情報を含むコード情報等を挙げることができる。精算装置２２０は、例えば店員の操作等に応じて商品登録処理を実行可能とされてもよく、この場合には、スキャナ２２０４により商品コードとしてのコード情報が読み取られるようにされてよい。 In the second embodiment, the scanner 2204 is used to read the code information displayed on the mobile terminal 240. Examples of the code information displayed on the mobile terminal 240 include code information for settlement, code information arranged on the membership card screen and indicating a member identifier and the like, code information including information as a coupon ticket, and the like. The settlement device 220 may be capable of executing the product registration process in response to, for example, an operation by a clerk. In this case, the scanner 2204 may be able to read the code information as the product code.
スキャナ２２０４は、客用ディスプレイ２２０６の台座部分に固定的に設けられた例が示されているが、例えば、ハンディスキャナとされて、筐体の側面に設けられた台座に掛止されてよい。 An example is shown in which the scanner 2204 is fixedly provided on the pedestal portion of the customer display 2206, but for example, it may be a handy scanner and may be hooked on a pedestal provided on the side surface of the housing.
客用ディスプレイ２２０６は、客向けに精算に関連する情報が表示される。客用ディスプレイ２２０６は、タッチパネルを備えるディスプレイデバイスとして構成されてよい。 The customer display 2206 displays information related to payment for the customer. The customer display 2206 may be configured as a display device including a touch panel.
釣銭機２２６０は、紙幣及び硬貨の客による投入を受け付けて入金処理を行い、釣銭、返金、またはリジェクトされる場合の紙幣及び硬貨を排出する自動釣銭機である。釣銭機２２６０は、紙幣管理部２６１と、硬貨投入口２６４と、硬貨排出口２６５と、リジェクト口２６６とを備える。硬貨投入口２６４と、硬貨排出口２６５と、リジェクト口２６６とは、硬貨管理部に含まれる。紙幣管理部２６１は、紙幣投入口２６２と、紙幣排出口２６３とを備える。紙幣投入口２６２は、客により投入される紙幣を取り込む口である。紙幣排出口２６３は、紙幣及びリジェクト紙幣を排出する口である。紙幣投入口２６２及び紙幣排出口２６３は、二段に構成される。例えば、紙幣管理部２６１において、上段が紙幣投入口２６２、下段が紙幣排出口２６３である。 The change machine 2260 is an automatic change machine that accepts the input of banknotes and coins by customers, performs a deposit process, and discharges the banknotes and coins when the change, refund, or rejection is performed. The change machine 2260 includes a bill management unit 261, a coin slot 264, a coin ejection port 265, and a reject port 266. The coin slot 264, the coin ejection port 265, and the reject port 266 are included in the coin management unit. The bill management unit 261 includes a bill insertion slot 262 and a bill discharge port 263. The bill slot 262 is a slot for taking in bills inserted by customers. The bill discharge port 263 is a port for discharging bills and rejected bills. The bill insertion slot 262 and the bill discharge port 263 are configured in two stages. For example, in the bill management unit 261, the upper row is the bill insertion slot 262 and the lower row is the bill discharge port 263.
硬貨投入口２６４は、客により投入される硬貨を取り込む口である。硬貨排出口２６５は、おつりとしての硬貨、釣銭機２２６０が備える貨幣識別部が識別に失敗した場合の硬貨、貨幣識別部が偽造硬貨として識別した場合の硬貨を排出する口である。リジェクト口２６６は、入金後、キャンセルの操作をした場合に、硬貨を排出する口である。紙幣投入口２６２及び硬貨投入口２６４が入金口である。紙幣排出口２６３、硬貨排出口２６５及びリジェクト口２６６が出金口である。発行口２２１０ａは、各種レシートをレシートの排出口から出力する。 The coin slot 264 is a slot for taking in coins inserted by the customer. The coin ejection port 265 is a port for ejecting coins as change, coins when the coin identification unit of the change machine 2260 fails to identify, and coins when the coin identification unit identifies them as counterfeit coins. The reject port 266 is a port for ejecting coins when a cancel operation is performed after depositing. The bill slot 262 and the coin slot 264 are deposit slots. The bill discharge port 263, the coin discharge port 265, and the reject port 266 are the withdrawal ports. The issuing port 2210a outputs various receipts from the receiving port of the receipt.
釣銭機２２６０及び発行口２２１０ａは、紙幣投入口２６２と、紙幣排出口２６３と、硬貨投入口２６４と、硬貨排出口２６５と、リジェクト口２６６と、レシートの排出口とを客側に向けて、カウンタ台の客側側面に突設される。この配置により、客が釣銭機２２６０に近接して立った場合に、客のつま先がカウンタ台にあたるおそれが低減される。例えば、釣銭機２２６０及び発行口２２１０ａが一体の筐体に収納され、この筐体がカウンタ台の客側側面に突設される。 The change machine 2260 and the issuing port 2210a have the bill insertion port 262, the bill discharge port 263, the coin insertion port 264, the coin discharge port 265, the reject port 266, and the receipt discharge port facing the customer side. It is projected on the customer side of the counter stand. This arrangement reduces the risk of the customer's toes hitting the counter stand when the customer stands close to the change machine 2260. For example, the change machine 2260 and the issuing port 2210a are housed in an integrated housing, and this housing is projected from the customer side side surface of the counter stand.
図２３は、精算装置２２０の構成例を示すブロック図である。精算装置２２０は、ＣＰＵ２２０１と、ＲＯＭ２２０２と、ＲＡＭ２２０３と、スキャナ２２０４と、客用ディスプレイ２２０６と、ハードディスク２２０７と、印字部２２１０と、装置間対応通信部２２１１と、釣銭機２２６０とを備える。これらは、バス２２１９を介して互いに接続されている。装置間対応通信部２２１１は、後述の第２の実施形態の第３の例において店員識別タグとの通信のために備えられる部位であることから、第２の実施形態においては省略されてよい。 FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the settlement device 220. The settlement device 220 includes a CPU 2201, a ROM 2202, a RAM 2203, a scanner 2204, a customer display 2206, a hard disk 2207, a printing unit 2210, an inter-device communication unit 2211, and a change machine 2260. These are connected to each other via bus 2219. Since the device-to-device communication unit 2211 is a part provided for communication with the clerk identification tag in the third example of the second embodiment described later, it may be omitted in the second embodiment.
ＣＰＵ２２０１は、プログラムを実行することにより、精算装置２２０としての機能実現のための各種処理を実行する。 By executing the program, the CPU 2201 executes various processes for realizing the function as the settlement device 220.
ＲＯＭ２２０２は、種々の情報を記憶する。例えば、ＲＯＭ２２０２は、ＣＰＵ２２０１が実行するプログラムを記憶する。ＲＯＭ２２０２は、客用ディスプレイ２２０６による表示に関する情報（画面情報、メッセージ情報等）を記憶する。ＲＯＭ２２０２は、自装置を識別させるための装置番号を記憶する。ＲＯＭ２２０２は、印字部２２１０による印字に関する情報（印字内容、印字フォーマット情報等）を記憶してもよい。スキャナ２２０４は、コード化された情報を光学的に読み取って、読み取った情報をＲＡＭ２２０３に記憶させる。 ROM 2202 stores various information. For example, ROM 2202 stores a program executed by CPU 2201. The ROM 2202 stores information (screen information, message information, etc.) related to the display on the customer display 2206. The ROM 2202 stores a device number for identifying the own device. The ROM 2202 may store information (print contents, print format information, etc.) related to printing by the printing unit 2210. The scanner 2204 optically reads the coded information, and stores the read information in the RAM 2203.
ＲＡＭ２２０３は、ＣＰＵ２２０１が処理、演算を実行するにあたっての作業領域として利用される。 The RAM 2203 is used as a work area for the CPU 2201 to perform processing and calculation.
スキャナ２２０４は、コード化された情報を光学的に読み取る。スキャナ２２０４は、例えば会員カードにバーコード等として印刷された会員番号などの情報を読み取ることができる。 The scanner 2204 optically reads the coded information. The scanner 2204 can read information such as a membership number printed on a membership card as a barcode or the like.
客用ディスプレイ２２０６は、タッチパネルとして構成され、客向けの情報の表示を行い、客が画面を触れることによる操作を受け付ける。 The customer display 2206 is configured as a touch panel, displays information for the customer, and accepts an operation by the customer touching the screen.
ハードディスク２２０７は、ＣＰＵ２２０１の補助記憶装置として精算装置２２０に必要な各種の情報を記憶する。ハードディスク２２０７は、精算処理等をＣＰＵ２２０１に実行させるためのプログラムを記憶してもよい。ハードディスク２２０７は、プログラムが実行されることによって生成される種々の情報を記憶してもよい。ハードディスク２２０７は、客用ディスプレイ２２０６による表示に関する情報や、印字部２２１０による印字に関する情報を記憶してもよい。 The hard disk 2207 stores various information required for the settlement device 220 as an auxiliary storage device for the CPU 2201. The hard disk 2207 may store a program for causing the CPU 2201 to execute a settlement process or the like. The hard disk 2207 may store various information generated by executing the program. The hard disk 2207 may store information related to display by the customer display 2206 and information related to printing by the printing unit 2210.
印字部２２１０は、レシートなどを用紙に印字し、レシートを排出口から排出させる。 The printing unit 2210 prints a receipt or the like on paper, and discharges the receipt from the discharge port.
装置間対応通信部２２１１は、例えば他の精算装置２２０や管理装置２３０と通信する。 The inter-device communication unit 2211 communicates with, for example, another settlement device 220 or a management device 230.
図２４を参照して、第２の実施形態の携帯端末２４０の構成例を説明する。携帯端末２４０は、ＣＰＵ２４０１、ストレージ２４０２、ＲＡＭ２４０３、ネットワーク対応通信部２４０４、近距離無線対応通信部２４０５、タッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６、操作部２４０７、撮像部２４０８及び位置情報取得部２４０９を備える。 A configuration example of the mobile terminal 240 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 24. The mobile terminal 240 includes a CPU 2401, a storage 2402, a RAM 2403, a network-compatible communication unit 2404, a short-range wireless-compatible communication unit 2405, a touch panel display 2406, an operation unit 2407, an imaging unit 2408, and a position information acquisition unit 2409.
ＣＰＵ２４０１は、プログラムを実行することにより、携帯端末２４０における各種の処理を実現する。 The CPU 2401 realizes various processes in the mobile terminal 240 by executing a program.
ストレージ２４０２は、ＣＰＵ２４０１の補助記憶装置であって、ＣＰＵ２４０１に実行させるプログラムのほか、各種のデータを記憶する。 The storage 2402 is an auxiliary storage device of the CPU 2401, and stores various data in addition to the program to be executed by the CPU 2401.
ＲＡＭ２４０３は、ＣＰＵ２４０１の主記憶装置である。 The RAM 2403 is the main storage device of the CPU 2401.
ネットワーク対応通信部２４０４は、電話回線又は無線ＬＡＮ経由でネットワークに対応する通信を実行する。 The network-compatible communication unit 2404 executes communication corresponding to the network via a telephone line or a wireless LAN.
近距離無線対応通信部２４０５は、例えばＢｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈの規格に従った近距離無線通信を行う。即ち、近距離無線対応通信部２４０５は、計量値付け装置２１０における近距離通信部２１１２との間での近距離無線通信を行う。これにより、携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０との間での通信が可能となる。 The short-range wireless communication unit 2405 performs short-range wireless communication according to, for example, the Bluetooth standard. That is, the short-range wireless communication unit 2405 performs short-range wireless communication with the short-range communication unit 2112 in the weighing pricing device 210. This enables communication between the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210.
タッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６は、タッチパネルが組み合わされたディスプレイである。 The touch panel display 2406 is a display in which a touch panel is combined.
操作部２４０７は、例えば、ユーザからの操作を受け付けるキーボードである。 The operation unit 2407 is, for example, a keyboard that accepts operations from the user.
撮像部２４０８は、撮像を行う。携帯端末２４０は、撮像部２４０８を利用したコード情報スキャン機能を有する。つまり、携帯端末２４０は、コード情報スキャン機能として、撮像部２４０８により撮像して得られた撮像画像においてコード情報が含まれていることを認識すると、撮像画像からコード情報を取得する。 The imaging unit 2408 performs imaging. The mobile terminal 240 has a code information scanning function using the image pickup unit 2408. That is, when the mobile terminal 240 recognizes that the captured image obtained by imaging by the imaging unit 2408 contains the code information as the code information scanning function, the mobile terminal 240 acquires the code information from the captured image.
撮像部２４０８を用いたコード情報スキャン機能は、第２の実施形態の買い物アプリケーションのもとでは、商品に付されたコード情報の読み取りと、計量値付け装置２１０にて表示される接続情報コードの読み取りとに用いられる。商品に付されたコード情報の読み取りによっては、コード情報に含まれる商品コードにより登録対象の商品が特定される。このような登録対象の商品の特定に関しては、例えば、撮像部２４０８により商品を撮像して得られた撮像画像を用いた一般物体認識処理によって実現されてよい。この場合において、一般物体認識処理の結果として、１の商品を特定するようにしてもよいし、複数の候補を提示してもよい。複数の候補を提示する場合には、客が提示された複数の候補のうちから１つのものを選択することで、登録対象の商品が特定されるようにしてよい。 The code information scanning function using the image pickup unit 2408 reads the code information attached to the product and the connection information code displayed by the weighing and pricing device 210 under the shopping application of the second embodiment. Used for reading. By reading the code information attached to the product, the product to be registered is specified by the product code included in the code information. Such identification of the product to be registered may be realized by, for example, a general object recognition process using the captured image obtained by imaging the product by the imaging unit 2408. In this case, as a result of the general object recognition process, one product may be specified, or a plurality of candidates may be presented. When presenting a plurality of candidates, the product to be registered may be specified by selecting one of the plurality of candidates presented by the customer.
位置情報取得部２４０９は、自己の位置を測位し、測位された位置を示す位置情報を取得する。位置情報取得部２４０９は、例えばＧＰＳ（Ｇｌｏｂａｌ　Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｉｎｇ　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ）に対応する測位デバイスを備えて構成されてよい。 The position information acquisition unit 2409 positions its own position and acquires position information indicating the positioned position. The position information acquisition unit 2409 may be configured to include, for example, a positioning device corresponding to GPS (Global Positioning System).
図２５を参照して、第２の実施形態の取引管理サーバ２５０の構成例を説明する。取引管理サーバ２５０は、ＣＰＵ５０１、記憶部５０２、ＲＡＭ５０３及び通信部５０４を備える。 A configuration example of the transaction management server 250 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 25. The transaction management server 250 includes a CPU 501, a storage unit 502, a RAM 503, and a communication unit 504.
ＣＰＵ５０１は、プログラムを実行することにより、取引管理サーバ２５０における各種の処理を実現する。 The CPU 501 realizes various processes on the transaction management server 250 by executing the program.
記憶部５０２は、ＣＰＵ５０１の補助記憶装置であって、ＣＰＵ５０１に実行させるプログラムのほか、各種のデータを記憶する。 The storage unit 502 is an auxiliary storage device of the CPU 501, and stores various data in addition to the program to be executed by the CPU 501.
ＲＡＭ５０３は、ＣＰＵ５０１の主記憶装置である。 The RAM 503 is the main storage device of the CPU 501.
通信部５０４は、精算装置２２０や携帯端末２４０等と通信を実行する。 The communication unit 504 executes communication with the settlement device 220, the mobile terminal 240, and the like.
取引管理サーバ２５０においてもディスプレイ、操作部等が設けられ、管理者が操作等を行えるようにされてもよい。 The transaction management server 250 may also be provided with a display, an operation unit, and the like so that the administrator can perform operations and the like.
取引管理サーバ２５０は、例えば、図２６に示すような顧客情報を記憶する。図２６に示した顧客情報は、顧客識別情報、顧客名、顧客登録日、キャンセル情報、顧客ランク、ポイント数等を含む。顧客識別情報は、顧客を一意に識別する識別情報である。顧客名は、顧客の氏名やニックネームなどである。顧客登録日は、顧客登録した日時である。キャンセル情報は、登録後における登録商品のキャンセルに関する情報である。顧客ランクは、顧客の購入実績に応じたランクである。新規の顧客の顧客情報の生成時には、顧客識別情報、顧客名、顧客登録日は生成されるが、実際の取引（商品登録）の開始前であるため、他の情報（キャンセル情報等）は生成されない。 The transaction management server 250 stores customer information as shown in FIG. 26, for example. The customer information shown in FIG. 26 includes customer identification information, customer name, customer registration date, cancellation information, customer rank, number of points, and the like. The customer identification information is identification information that uniquely identifies a customer. The customer name is a customer's name, nickname, or the like. The customer registration date is the date and time of customer registration. The cancellation information is information regarding the cancellation of the registered product after registration. The customer rank is a rank according to the purchase record of the customer. When generating customer information for a new customer, customer identification information, customer name, and customer registration date are generated, but other information (cancellation information, etc.) is generated because it is before the start of the actual transaction (product registration). Not done.
取引管理サーバ２５０は、例えば、顧客登録の際（例えば、携帯端末２４０が外部（例えば、アプリ全般を提供する所定のサーバ、当該取引管理サーバ２５０）から取引管理サーバ２５０によるサービスを利用するため買い物アプリケーションをダウンロードまたはインストールする際）に顧客識別情報を生成し、記憶する。取引管理サーバ２５０は、例えば、顧客登録の際に、携帯端末２４０を用いて、登録フォーム（入力フォーム）の氏名欄に入力された情報を取得し、顧客名として記憶する。取引管理サーバ２５０は、例えば、顧客登録の際の現在日時を取得し、顧客登録日として記憶する。 The transaction management server 250 is used for shopping because, for example, the mobile terminal 240 uses the service provided by the transaction management server 250 from the outside (for example, a predetermined server that provides the entire application, the transaction management server 250) at the time of customer registration. Generate and store customer identification information (when downloading or installing an application). For example, at the time of customer registration, the transaction management server 250 acquires the information entered in the name field of the registration form (input form) using the mobile terminal 240 and stores it as the customer name. The transaction management server 250 acquires, for example, the current date and time at the time of customer registration and stores it as the customer registration date.
取引管理サーバ２５０は、自装置内の記憶部に顧客情報を記憶することに代えてまたは加えて他の装置（取引管理サーバ２５０がアクセス可能なファイルサーバ等）に顧客情報の一部または全部を記憶してもよい。 The transaction management server 250 stores a part or all of the customer information in another device (such as a file server accessible to the transaction management server 250) in place of or in addition to storing the customer information in the storage unit in the own device. You may remember.
店舗情報は、各店舗の管理装置２３０から取得したものである。つまり、取引管理サーバ２５０は、各店舗の管理装置２３０から直接または他の装置を介して間接的に店舗情報を受信するなどして、店舗情報を記憶する。 The store information is obtained from the management device 230 of each store. That is, the transaction management server 250 stores the store information by receiving the store information directly from the management device 230 of each store or indirectly via another device.
取引管理サーバ２５０は、例えば、図２７に示すような店舗情報を記憶する。図２７に示した店舗情報は、店舗識別情報、店舗名（支店名）、店舗特定情報１、店舗特定情報２を含む。店舗識別情報は、店舗を一意に識別する識別情報である。図２７に示した店舗識別情報は、店（屋号）もしくは企業のコードと、支店のコードとから構成される。店舗名は、店舗の名称である。図２７に示した店舗名は、店（屋号）もしくは企業と、支店名とから構成される。店舗特定情報１は、取引する店舗（商品の売買が行われる店舗）を特定するための二次元コード（例えば、ＱＲコード（登録商標）等）の情報である。店舗特定情報２は、取引する店舗を特定するための店舗の位置情報（ＧＰＳ情報）である。図２７に示した例では、店舗識別情報と店舗特定情報１とは異なるが、店舗識別情報と店舗特定情報１とは同一であってもよい。 The transaction management server 250 stores, for example, store information as shown in FIG. 27. The store information shown in FIG. 27 includes store identification information, store name (branch name), store identification information 1, and store identification information 2. The store identification information is identification information that uniquely identifies a store. The store identification information shown in FIG. 27 is composed of a store (store name) or company code and a branch code. The store name is the name of the store. The store name shown in FIG. 27 is composed of a store (store name) or a company and a branch name. The store identification information 1 is information on a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)) for specifying a store (a store where products are bought and sold) to be traded. The store identification information 2 is store location information (GPS information) for identifying a store with which a transaction is made. In the example shown in FIG. 27, the store identification information and the store identification information 1 are different, but the store identification information and the store identification information 1 may be the same.
取引管理サーバ２５０は、外部（各店舗を統括する本部のサーバ（不図示）等）から店舗情報等を取得し、記憶してもよい。取引管理サーバ２５０は、自装置内の記憶部に店舗情報を記憶することに代えてまたは加えて他の装置（取引管理サーバ２５０がアクセス可能なファイルサーバ等）に店舗情報の一部または全部を記憶してもよい。 The transaction management server 250 may acquire and store store information and the like from the outside (a server (not shown) of the headquarters that controls each store). The transaction management server 250 stores a part or all of the store information in another device (such as a file server accessible to the transaction management server 250) in place of or in addition to storing the store information in the storage unit in the own device. You may remember.
商品情報は、各店舗の管理装置２３０等から取得したものである。つまり、取引管理サーバ２５０は、各店舗の管理装置２３０から直接または他の装置を介して間接的に商品情報を受信するなどして、商品情報を記憶する。取引管理サーバ２５０は、外部（各店舗を統括する本部のサーバ（不図示）等）から商品情報を取得し、記憶してもよい。取引管理サーバ２５０は、自装置内の記憶部に店舗情報を記憶することに代えてまたは加えて他の装置（取引管理サーバ２５０がアクセス可能なファイルサーバ等）に店舗情報の一部または全部を記憶してもよい。 The product information is obtained from the management device 230 or the like of each store. That is, the transaction management server 250 stores the product information by receiving the product information directly from the management device 230 of each store or indirectly via another device. The transaction management server 250 may acquire and store product information from the outside (a server (not shown) of the headquarters that controls each store, etc.). The transaction management server 250 stores a part or all of the store information in another device (such as a file server accessible to the transaction management server 250) in place of or in addition to storing the store information in the storage unit in the own device. You may remember.
カート情報は、個々の取引を管理するための情報である。取引管理サーバ２５０は、取引の開始時にカート情報を生成する。取引管理サーバ２５０は、取引の進行にあわせて（商品が登録される度に）、カート情報を更新する（カート情報に商品が記憶されることを以て当該商品の登録がなされたと解してもよい）。 Cart information is information for managing individual transactions. The transaction management server 250 generates cart information at the start of a transaction. The transaction management server 250 may update the cart information (every time the product is registered) according to the progress of the transaction (it may be understood that the product is registered by storing the product in the cart information). ).
取引管理サーバ２５０は、例えば、図２８に示すようなカート情報を記憶する。 The transaction management server 250 stores, for example, cart information as shown in FIG. 28.
図２８に示したカート情報は、カート識別情報、取引開始日時、取引終了日時、顧客識別情報、登録商品情報、保留商品情報、キャンセル情報等を含む。カート識別情報は、カート（取引）を一意に識別する識別情報である。図２８に示したカート識別情報は、店舗識別情報と、日付と、シリアル番号（例えば店舗別日付別のシリアル番号）とから構成される。取引開始日時は、取引の開始日時である。図２８に示した取引開始日時は、当該カート情報の生成日時である。取引開始日時は、１品目の商品の登録日時（図２８中の登録商品情報（登録商品１）を記憶した日時）としてもよい。カート情報の生成日時と１品目の商品の登録日時とを別々に両方記憶してもよい。 The cart information shown in FIG. 28 includes cart identification information, transaction start date and time, transaction end date and time, customer identification information, registered product information, reserved product information, cancellation information, and the like. The cart identification information is identification information that uniquely identifies a cart (transaction). The cart identification information shown in FIG. 28 is composed of store identification information, a date, and a serial number (for example, a serial number for each store date). The transaction start date and time is the transaction start date and time. The transaction start date and time shown in FIG. 28 is the generation date and time of the cart information. The transaction start date and time may be the registration date and time of one item of goods (the date and time when the registered product information (registered product 1) in FIG. 28 is stored). Both the generation date and time of the cart information and the registration date and time of the product of one item may be stored separately.
取引終了日時は、取引の終了日時である。図２８に示した取引開始日時は、精算日時である。顧客識別情報は、当該取引の客を識別する顧客識別情報である。カート情報の生成時には、カート識別情報、取引開始日時、顧客識別情報は生成されるが、実際の取引（商品登録）の開始前であるため、他の情報（取引終了日時等）は生成されない。精算日時は、精算開始日時であってもよいし、精算終了日時であってもよい。精算開始日時と精算終了日時とを別々に両方記憶してもよい。 The transaction end date and time is the transaction end date and time. The transaction start date and time shown in FIG. 28 is the settlement date and time. The customer identification information is customer identification information that identifies the customer of the transaction. When the cart information is generated, the cart identification information, the transaction start date and time, and the customer identification information are generated, but other information (transaction end date and time, etc.) is not generated because it is before the actual transaction (product registration) starts. The settlement date and time may be the settlement start date and time or the settlement end date and time. Both the settlement start date and time and the settlement end date and time may be stored separately.
登録商品情報（計）は、商品が登録されるごとに更新される情報である。登録商品情報（計）は、品数（商品数）、概算小計金額（価格決定ロジックによる価格算出前の概算の小計金額）、小計金額（価格決定ロジックによる価格算出後の小計金額）等を含む。登録商品情報（１）は、１品目の商品の登録情報である。登録商品情報（２）は、２品目の商品の登録情報である。図２８に示す例では、登録商品情報（３）~登録商品情報（５）の図示を省略している。登録商品情報（Ｎ；Ｎは整数）は、商品コード、品名（商品名）、価格等を含む。 The registered product information (total) is information that is updated every time a product is registered. The registered product information (total) includes the number of products (number of products), the approximate subtotal amount (approximate subtotal amount before price calculation by the price determination logic), the subtotal amount (subtotal amount after price calculation by the price determination logic), and the like. The registered product information (1) is the registration information of one product. The registered product information (2) is the registration information of two products. In the example shown in FIG. 28, the illustrations of the registered product information (3) to the registered product information (5) are omitted. The registered product information (N; N is an integer) includes a product code, a product name (product name), a price, and the like.
登録商品情報（Ｎ）は、当該Ｎ品目の商品の登録日時を含むものであってもよい。つまり、取引管理サーバ２５０は、登録商品情報として、当該登録商品の登録日時を記憶してもよい。各商品の登録日時は、タイムサービス（売価決定ロジックＥによるサービス）等のサービス適用の要否や適用後の効果の判断材料としても用いてもよい。 The registered product information (N) may include the registration date and time of the product of the N item. That is, the transaction management server 250 may store the registration date and time of the registered product as the registered product information. The registration date and time of each product may also be used as a material for determining the necessity of applying a service such as a time service (service by the selling price determination logic E) and the effect after application.
保留商品情報（計）は、保留商品（後述）が登録されるごとに更新される情報である。保留商品情報（計）は、保留商品の品数（商品数）、保留商品のうちのＮＯＮ−ＦＩＬＥの品数、保留商品のうちの読取ＮＧ（要不正操作確認）の品数等を含む。 The reserved product information (total) is information that is updated every time a reserved product (described later) is registered. The reserved product information (total) includes the number of reserved products (number of products), the number of NON-FILE products among the reserved products, the number of read NG (unauthorized operation confirmation) items among the reserved products, and the like.
ＮＯＮ−ＦＩＬＥとは、店舗においてバーコードのスキャンは成功したが（商品コードを読み取ることができたが）、商品コードが商品情報に記憶されていないこと、または、店舗において商品コードのスキャンは成功したが、商品コードが商品情報に記憶されていない商品のことである。 NON-FILE means that the barcode was successfully scanned at the store (although the product code could be read), but the product code was not stored in the product information, or the product code was successfully scanned at the store. However, it is a product whose product code is not stored in the product information.
読取ＮＧとは、店舗において商品コードのスキャンが失敗したこと（商品コードを読み取ることができなかったこと）、または、店舗において商品コードのスキャンが失敗した商品のことである。つまり、読取ＮＧとは、例えば画像認識技術により一定時間商品を撮像しているがバーコード認識に至らない場合を判別できる場合にタイムアウト処理すること、タイムアウト処理された商品である。例えば、パッケージのシワ等やバーコード印字のカスレや汚れにより正しくバーコードを取得（認識）できない場合に読取ＮＧと判断される。バーコードを読んだフリしてカゴへ投入する不正操作を検出した場合にも読取ＮＧと判断される。携帯端末２４０は、センサ（例えば、ジャイロセンサや加速度センサや距離センサ等）を備え、当該携帯端末２４０がバーコード読取中（具体的には、バーコードの読み取りのため、当該携帯端末２４０が傾けられている状況であり、かつ、当該携帯端末２４０の一定距離先に物品（商品）が存在している状況）を検出可能である。そして、所定時間内にバーコードが読み取れなかった場合（バーコード読取中が所定時間継続したがバーコードを読み取れなかった場合）は、タイムアウト処理として、保留商品（読取ＮＧ）としている。 The reading NG means that the product code scan failed at the store (the product code could not be read) or the product code scan failed at the store. That is, the reading NG is, for example, a time-out processing when it is possible to determine a case where the product is imaged for a certain period of time by the image recognition technology but the barcode recognition is not reached, or the time-out processed product. For example, if the barcode cannot be correctly acquired (recognized) due to wrinkles on the package, blurring or stains on the barcode printing, it is determined that the barcode is read NG. Even if an unauthorized operation of pretending to read the barcode and throwing it into the basket is detected, it is judged as reading NG. The mobile terminal 240 includes a sensor (for example, a gyro sensor, an acceleration sensor, a distance sensor, etc.), and the mobile terminal 240 is tilting while reading a barcode (specifically, the mobile terminal 240 is tilted to read the barcode. It is possible to detect a situation in which an article (commodity) exists at a certain distance ahead of the mobile terminal 240). When the barcode cannot be read within the predetermined time (when the barcode is being read for a predetermined time but the barcode cannot be read), the product is reserved (reading NG) as a timeout process.
保留商品情報（保留商品１）は、１品目の保留商品の情報である。保留商品情報（保留商品２）は、２品目の保留商品の情報である。保留商品情報（保留商品３）は、３品目の保留商品の情報である。 The reserved product information (reserved product 1) is information on the reserved product of one item. The reserved product information (reserved product 2) is information on two items of reserved products. The reserved product information (reserved product 3) is information on the reserved products of three items.
保留商品情報（保留商品Ｎ；Ｎは整数）は、保留商品種別（当該保留商品がＮＯＮ−ＦＩＬＥであるか読取ＮＧであるかを示す情報）、画像データ（読取ＮＧ時に撮像された画像データ）を含む。例えば、Ｎ品目の商品がＮＯＮ−ＦＩＬＥによる保留商品である場合には、保留商品情報（保留商品Ｎ）は、保留商品種別「１（ＮＯＮ−ＦＩＬＥ）」、画像データを含む。Ｎ品目の商品が読取ＮＧによる保留商品である場合には、保留商品情報（保留商品Ｎ）は、保留商品種別「２（読取ＮＧ）」、画像データを含む。 The reserved product information (held product N; N is an integer) includes the reserved product type (information indicating whether the reserved product is NON-FILE or read NG) and image data (image data captured at the time of read NG). including. For example, when the product of N items is a reserved product by NON-FILE, the reserved product information (reserved product N) includes the reserved product type "1 (NON-FILE)" and image data. When the product of N items is a reserved product by reading NG, the reserved product information (reserved product N) includes the reserved product type "2 (reading NG)" and image data.
取引管理サーバ２５０は、自装置内の記憶部にカート情報を記憶することに代えてまたは加えて他の装置（取引管理サーバ２５０がアクセス可能なファイルサーバ等）にカート情報の一部または全部を記憶してもよい。 The transaction management server 250 stores a part or all of the cart information in another device (such as a file server accessible to the transaction management server 250) in place of or in addition to storing the cart information in the storage unit in the own device. You may remember.
図２９Ａ−２９Ｃ及び図３０Ａ−３０Ｄを参照して、携帯端末２４０にインストールされる買い物アプリケーションの機能を説明する。 The functions of the shopping application installed on the mobile terminal 240 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29A-29C and 30A-30D.
客が携帯端末２４０を操作して買い物アプリケーションを起動させると、買い物アプリケーションが動作する携帯端末２４０は、まず、図２９Ａに示すように、タッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６に起動画面を表示する。起動画面においては、「店舗情報」ボタン、「お知らせ」ボタン、「お得情報」ボタンが配置されている。「買い物を開始する」との文字が示される買い物開始ボタンが配置されている。 When the customer operates the mobile terminal 240 to activate the shopping application, the mobile terminal 240 on which the shopping application operates first displays the activation screen on the touch panel display 2406 as shown in FIG. 29A. On the startup screen, a "store information" button, a "notification" button, and a "profitable information" button are arranged. There is a shopping start button with the words "Start shopping".
例えば、客が「店舗情報」ボタンに対する操作（タップ操作）を行った場合には、タッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６の表示は、図２９Ｂに示されるように、周辺店舗案内画面に遷移する。周辺店舗案内画面は、位置情報取得部２４０９により取得される自己の位置を基準にして一定範囲内に存在する、買い物アプリケーションが利用可能な店舗（利用可能店舗）を地図上に表示する。同図では、地図上に、携帯端末２４０の現在位置を基準にして、３つの利用可能店舗を示すマークが配置された例が示されている。 For example, when the customer performs an operation (tap operation) on the "store information" button, the display of the touch panel display 2406 transitions to the peripheral store guidance screen as shown in FIG. 29B. The peripheral store guidance screen displays on the map the stores (available stores) where the shopping application can be used, which exist within a certain range based on the own position acquired by the location information acquisition unit 2409. In the figure, an example is shown in which marks indicating three available stores are arranged on the map with reference to the current position of the mobile terminal 240.
このような周辺店舗案内画面の表示にあたり、携帯端末２４０は、例えば、利用可能店舗に関する情報（利用可能店舗情報）を管理する店舗情報サーバ（図示省略、取引管理サーバ２５０等が店舗情報サーバとして共用されてもよい）に、自己の位置情報とともに、利用可能店舗探索要求を送信する。店舗情報サーバは、利用可能店舗探索要求の受信に応答して、利用可能店舗探索要求とともに受信された位置情報を基準にして一定の距離範囲に位置する利用可能店舗を探索する。店舗情報サーバは、探索された利用可能店舗の情報を携帯端末２４０に送信する。携帯端末２４０は、受信された利用可能店舗の情報を利用して、周辺店舗案内画面を表示する。 In displaying such a peripheral store information screen, the mobile terminal 240 is, for example, a store information server (not shown, transaction management server 250, etc.) that manages information about available stores (available store information) is shared as a store information server. ), Along with its own location information, it sends an available store search request. In response to the reception of the available store search request, the store information server searches for available stores located within a certain distance range based on the location information received together with the available store search request. The store information server transmits the searched available store information to the mobile terminal 240. The mobile terminal 240 uses the received information on available stores to display a peripheral store information screen.
買い物アプリケーションは、例えば買い物リストの機能を有してよい。客は、自分が買い物をしようと思っている商品を買い物リストに登録する操作を行うことができる。 The shopping application may have, for example, the function of a shopping list. The customer can perform an operation of registering the product for which he / she wants to shop in the shopping list.
このように買い物アプリケーションが買い物リストの機能を有している場合、携帯端末２４０は、例えば買い物リストに登録されている商品の情報も利用可能店舗探索要求に含めるようにする。店舗情報サーバは、店舗ごとの利用可能店舗情報に、店舗で販売している商品の品目のリストを含める。店舗情報サーバは、利用可能店舗探索要求の受信に応じて、携帯端末２４０の位置から一定範囲内にあるとして探索された利用可能店舗情報ごとに、買い物リストに登録されている商品の有無を示す情報を含めたうえで、利用可能店舗情報を携帯端末２４０に送信する。この場合、携帯端末２４０は、買い物リストに登録されている商品の有無が視認できるように地図上に利用可能店舗を表示してよい。買い物リストに登録されている商品の有無が視認できるようにする利用可能店舗の表示態様としては、例えば利用可能店舗を示すマークについて、買い物リストに登録されている商品の有る利用可能店舗と無い利用可能店舗とに応じて、色分けや大きさが変更されるようにしてよい。 When the shopping application has the function of the shopping list in this way, the mobile terminal 240 includes, for example, the information of the products registered in the shopping list in the available store search request. The store information server includes a list of items of products sold at the store in the available store information for each store. The store information server indicates the presence or absence of products registered in the shopping list for each available store information searched as being within a certain range from the position of the mobile terminal 240 in response to the reception of the available store search request. After including the information, the available store information is transmitted to the mobile terminal 240. In this case, the mobile terminal 240 may display the available stores on the map so that the presence or absence of the products registered in the shopping list can be visually recognized. As a display mode of available stores so that the presence or absence of products registered in the shopping list can be visually recognized, for example, the mark indicating the available stores is used with and without available stores with products registered in the shopping list. The color coding and size may be changed according to the available stores.
図２９Ｂのように周辺店舗案内画面が表示された状態のもとで、客が、任意の店舗のマークを選択する操作（例えばマークに対するタップ操作）を行うことによっては、図２９Ｃに示されるように、選択された店舗の情報を示す店舗情報画面が表示される。 As shown in FIG. 29C, the customer performs an operation of selecting a mark of an arbitrary store (for example, a tap operation on the mark) while the peripheral store information screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 29B. A store information screen showing information on the selected store is displayed.
前述のように、図２９Ａの起動画面においては、「お知らせ」ボタンと「お得情報」ボタンとが配置されている。図２９Ｃの店舗情報画面においても、「お知らせ」ボタンと「お得情報」ボタンとが配置されている。 As described above, on the startup screen of FIG. 29A, a "notification" button and a "profitable information" button are arranged. Also on the store information screen of FIG. 29C, a "notification" button and a "profitable information" button are arranged.
起動画面もしくは店舗情報画面が表示されている状態のもとで、客が「お知らせ」ボタンを操作した場合には、図３０Ａに示されるように、対応の利用可能店舗が「お知らせ」として用意した、イベント、セール告知等の情報を提供する広告画面が表示される。 When the customer operates the "Notification" button while the startup screen or the store information screen is displayed, the corresponding available stores have prepared it as "Notification" as shown in FIG. 30A. , An advertising screen that provides information such as events and sale announcements is displayed.
客が「お得情報」ボタンを操作した場合には、図３０Ｂに示されるように、買い物アプリケーションを利用する客に向けた割引等のサービスの情報を提供する広告画面が表示される。 When the customer operates the "profit information" button, as shown in FIG. 30B, an advertisement screen that provides information on services such as discounts for customers who use the shopping application is displayed.
これらの広告画面の表示は、店舗情報サーバから送信された利用可能店舗情報に含められた広告情報に基づいて行われてよい。 The display of these advertisement screens may be performed based on the advertisement information included in the available store information transmitted from the store information server.
図２９Ａの起動画面において配置される買い物開始ボタンが操作された場合、タッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６は、図３０Ｃに示されるように、商品登録画面（コードスキャン画面）に遷移する。客は、商品登録画面が表示された携帯端末２４０を使用して商品登録操作を行うことができる。 When the shopping start button arranged on the start screen of FIG. 29A is operated, the touch panel display 2406 transitions to the product registration screen (code scan screen) as shown in FIG. 30C. The customer can perform the product registration operation using the mobile terminal 240 on which the product registration screen is displayed.
ここでは、計量値付け装置２１０が配置された売り場ではなく、基本的な商品登録操作例として、商品棚が配置された売り場での商品登録操作例を説明する。 Here, an example of a product registration operation at a sales floor where a product shelf is arranged will be described as a basic example of a product registration operation, not at a sales floor where the weighing pricing device 210 is arranged.
客は、例えば商品棚から自分が購入しようとする商品（購入対象商品）を取り出す。客は、取り出した購入対象商品に付されたコード（バーコードであるが、二次元コードであってもよい）のコード情報を、商品登録画面が表示された状態の携帯端末２４０の撮像部２４０８により読み取らせる操作を行う。 The customer, for example, takes out the product (the product to be purchased) that he / she intends to purchase from the product shelf. The customer uses the code information of the code (bar code, but may be a two-dimensional code) attached to the product to be purchased, which is the image pickup unit 2408 of the mobile terminal 240 in the state where the product registration screen is displayed. Perform an operation to read by.
このように読み取られたコード情報は、１商品に対応する商品登録情報として、携帯端末２４０から取引管理サーバ２５０に送信される。取引管理サーバ２５０は、受信された商品登録情報を、一取引に対応するカート情報（精算情報）に含めるようにする。読み取られたコード情報に基づく商品登録情報は、携帯端末２４０にて記憶されてもよい。 The code information read in this way is transmitted from the mobile terminal 240 to the transaction management server 250 as product registration information corresponding to one product. The transaction management server 250 includes the received product registration information in the cart information (settlement information) corresponding to one transaction. The product registration information based on the read code information may be stored in the mobile terminal 240.
客は、全ての購入対象商品について登録する操作を終えると、商品登録の完了を指示する所定操作（商品登録完了操作）を携帯端末２４０に対して行う。商品登録完了操作が行われると、携帯端末２４０は、取引管理サーバ２５０に商品登録完了を通知してよい。商品登録完了の通知を受信した取引管理サーバ２５０は、対応の取引のカート情報について、商品登録が完了したものとして管理することができる。 When the customer finishes the operation of registering all the products to be purchased, the customer performs a predetermined operation (product registration completion operation) for instructing the completion of the product registration to the mobile terminal 240. When the product registration completion operation is performed, the mobile terminal 240 may notify the transaction management server 250 of the completion of product registration. The transaction management server 250 that has received the notification of the completion of product registration can manage the cart information of the corresponding transaction as if the product registration has been completed.
商品登録完了操作が行われると、携帯端末２４０のタッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６には、図３０Ｄに示されるように、精算案内画面が表示される。精算案内画面には、客に向けて、精算のために精算装置２２０にまで赴いてもらうようにする案内のメッセージと、今回の商品登録に応じた取引を示す取引コード情報が例えば二次元コードとして表示されている。取引コード情報には、取引を一意に示す取引識別子が含まれる。この取引識別子は、例えば、携帯端末２４０が、対応の取引において最初に商品登録情報を送信したことに応じて取引管理サーバ２５０にて発行され、携帯端末２４０に通知されたものであってよい。 When the product registration completion operation is performed, the settlement guidance screen is displayed on the touch panel display 2406 of the mobile terminal 240 as shown in FIG. 30D. On the settlement guidance screen, a message of guidance to ask the customer to go to the settlement device 220 for settlement and transaction code information indicating the transaction according to the product registration this time are displayed as, for example, a two-dimensional code. It is displayed. The transaction code information includes a transaction identifier that uniquely indicates the transaction. This transaction identifier may be, for example, one issued by the transaction management server 250 in response to the mobile terminal 240 first transmitting the product registration information in the corresponding transaction, and notified to the mobile terminal 240.
客は、精算装置２２０にまで赴いて、精算装置２２０のスキャナ２２０４に、精算案内画面に表示された二次元コードを読み取らせる。精算装置２２０は、読み取られた二次元コードが示す取引識別子に対応するカート情報を、取引管理サーバ２５０から取得する。精算装置２２０は、取得されたカート情報を利用して、客の操作に応じて精算処理を実行する。精算装置２２０には、例えば客がクレジットカード、電子マネーカード、ポイントカード等のカード類を利用、併用して精算を行う場合に対応して、所定のカードに対応する１以上のカードリーダが備えられてよい。 The customer goes to the settlement device 220 and has the scanner 2204 of the settlement device 220 read the two-dimensional code displayed on the settlement guidance screen. The settlement device 220 acquires the cart information corresponding to the transaction identifier indicated by the read two-dimensional code from the transaction management server 250. The settlement device 220 uses the acquired cart information to execute the settlement process according to the operation of the customer. The settlement device 220 is provided with one or more card readers corresponding to a predetermined card, for example, when a customer uses or uses cards such as a credit card, an electronic money card, and a point card to perform settlement. May be done.
このようにして第２の実施形態では、自分の所持する携帯端末２４０に買い物アプリケーションをインストールしている客は、自分の携帯端末２４０に対する操作により商品登録を行うことができる。精算装置２２０での精算も、客の操作によって行われる。このように客により商品登録及び精算が行われることで、第２の実施形態では、店員が商品登録の操作や精算装置の操作等を行う必要がない。 In this way, in the second embodiment, the customer who has installed the shopping application on his / her own mobile terminal 240 can register the product by operating the own mobile terminal 240. The settlement with the settlement device 220 is also performed by the operation of the customer. Since the product registration and settlement are performed by the customer in this way, in the second embodiment, it is not necessary for the clerk to perform the product registration operation, the settlement device operation, or the like.
一方で、店舗においては、計量値付け装置２１０が配置された、対面方式での量り売り対応の売り場がある。このような量り売り対応の売り場では、客は、計量値付け装置２１０を操作する店員と対面して商品とその重量を指定し、店員は、指定された商品の重量を計量値付け装置２１０により商品の値付けを行う。 On the other hand, in the store, there is a sales floor for face-to-face sales by weight, in which the weighing and pricing device 210 is arranged. In such a sales floor for selling by weight, the customer faces the clerk who operates the weighing pricing device 210 and specifies the product and its weight, and the clerk specifies the weight of the designated product by the weighing pricing device 210. Price.
このように対面販売に対応する計量値付け装置２１０が使用される売り場に関しては、商品登録に関する操作とこれに伴う販売システムでの処理が、先に説明した基本的な商品登録操作が行われる場合と異なってくる。以下、この点を説明する。 Regarding the sales floor where the weighing and pricing device 210 corresponding to face-to-face sales is used in this way, when the operation related to product registration and the processing in the sales system accompanying the operation are performed by the basic product registration operation described above. Will be different. This point will be described below.
図３１のフローチャートを参照して、計量値付け装置２１０、携帯端末２４０及び取引管理サーバ２５０が、一取引における商品登録に関連して実行する処理手順例を説明する。同図を参照して、客が量り売り対応の売り場にて買い物をする場合に対応する店員と客の操作についても説明する。同図においては、説明を簡単にするため、１つの計量値付け装置２１０に対応して行われた１以上の商品登録処理により一取引に対応する商品登録が完了する例を示している。 With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31, an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing pricing device 210, the mobile terminal 240, and the transaction management server 250 in connection with the product registration in one transaction will be described. With reference to the figure, the operations of the clerk and the customer corresponding to the case where the customer makes a purchase at the sales floor that supports selling by weight will also be described. In the figure, for simplification of explanation, an example is shown in which product registration corresponding to one transaction is completed by one or more product registration processes performed corresponding to one weighing and pricing device 210.
まず、計量値付け装置２１０が実行する処理手順例を説明する。 First, an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing and pricing device 210 will be described.
ステップＳ２１０１：計量値付け装置２１０は、一取引における１つの商品についての値付け操作が行われたか否かを判定する。 Step S2101: The weighing and pricing device 210 determines whether or not a pricing operation for one commodity in one transaction has been performed.
量り売り商品を購入しようとする客は、店員に、自分が購入したい商品と、その重量とを伝える。店員は、伝えられた購入対象の商品を陳列ケースから取り出す。店員は、計量値付け装置２１０に、購入対象の商品の品目を入力したうえで、商品を秤（計量部２１０９）に載せる。 A customer who wants to purchase a product sold by weight tells the clerk what product he / she wants to purchase and its weight. The clerk takes out the reported product to be purchased from the display case. The clerk inputs the item of the product to be purchased into the weighing pricing device 210, and then puts the product on the scale (weighing unit 2109).
購入対象の商品の品目の入力は、例えば以下のようにして行われる。計量値付け装置２１０の店員用ディスプレイ２１０５（タッチパネル）には、量り売り商品ごとに対応するキー（プリセットキー）が配置されている。店員は、プリセットキーのうちから、購入対象の商品に対応するプリセットキーを操作する。これにより、操作されたプリセットキーが対応する商品の品目が、購入対象の商品の品目として入力される。 Input of the item of the product to be purchased is performed as follows, for example. Keys (preset keys) corresponding to each of the products sold by weight are arranged on the clerk display 2105 (touch panel) of the weighing pricing device 210. The clerk operates the preset key corresponding to the product to be purchased from the preset keys. As a result, the item of the product corresponding to the operated preset key is input as the item of the product to be purchased.
例えば、計量値付け装置２１０は、購入対象の商品の品目が入力されたことに応じて、１商品についての値付け操作が開始されたと判定してよい。 For example, the weighing pricing device 210 may determine that the pricing operation for one product has started in response to the input of the item of the product to be purchased.
計量値付け装置２１０は、一取引における１つ目の商品の値付け操作が開始されたことに応じて、一取引に対応する商品登録が開始されたと判定し、今回の取引に対応付ける取引識別子を発行する。 The weighing pricing device 210 determines that the product registration corresponding to one transaction has been started in response to the start of the pricing operation of the first product in one transaction, and determines the transaction identifier corresponding to this transaction. Issue.
ステップＳ２１０２：計量値付け装置２１０は、値付け操作が行われたことに応じて、値付け処理を実行する。値付け処理は、計量値付け装置２１０が、購入対象の商品を登録するために実行する商品の登録処理である。 Step S2102: The weighing pricing device 210 executes the pricing process in response to the pricing operation being performed. The pricing process is a product registration process executed by the weighing pricing device 210 to register the product to be purchased.
値付け処理として、計量値付け装置２１０は、店員による商品の品目の入力を受け付け、購入対象商品の品目を取得する。計量値付け装置２１０は、重量単価と、計量部２１０９により計量された重量（例えば、計量部２１０９に商品を載せてから、変動せずに安定したときに測定された重量）とを利用して、商品の価格を算出する。計量部２１０９は、例えば店員用ディスプレイ２１０５及び客用ディスプレイ２１０６に、購入対象商品の品目、計測された重量、価格等を表示する。 As a pricing process, the weighing pricing device 210 accepts the input of the item of the product by the clerk and acquires the item of the product to be purchased. The weighing pricing device 210 utilizes the unit weight and the weight measured by the weighing unit 2109 (for example, the weight measured when the product is placed on the measuring unit 2109 and then stabilized without fluctuation). , Calculate the price of the goods. The measuring unit 2109 displays, for example, the item of the product to be purchased, the measured weight, the price, and the like on the display 2105 for the clerk and the display 2106 for the customer.
店員は、客に重量等について確認を行い、客からの承諾が得られると、購入対象商品の値付けの確定を指示する操作を行う。 The clerk confirms the weight and the like with the customer, and when the customer's consent is obtained, the clerk performs an operation of instructing the confirmation of the price of the product to be purchased.
ステップＳ２１０３：計量値付け装置２１０は、上記のように計量部２１０９による計量結果が確定され、これに伴って１の購入対象商品について値付けが確定（計量結果の確定に相当）されると、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に接続情報コードを表示させる。接続情報コードは、例えば二次元コードとして表示されてよい。接続情報コードは、買い物アプリケーションが動作する携帯端末２４０を、計量値付け装置２１０と例えばＢｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈにより接続するための制御情報である。接続情報コードには、今回の取引に応じて発行された取引識別子が含まれる。 Step S2103: In the weighing pricing device 210, when the weighing result by the weighing unit 2109 is determined as described above, and the pricing is confirmed (corresponding to the determination of the weighing result) for the product to be purchased in 1 accordingly. The connection information code is displayed on the customer display 2106. The connection information code may be displayed as, for example, a two-dimensional code. The connection information code is control information for connecting the mobile terminal 240 on which the shopping application operates to the weighing and pricing device 210 by, for example, Bluetooth. The connection information code includes the legal entity issued in response to this transaction.
図３２は、客用ディスプレイ２１０６において表示される接続情報コード画面の態様例を示している。同図では、客用ディスプレイ２１０６が縦長の表示面部を有し、画面における表記が英語である場合の態様例を示している。 FIG. 32 shows an example of the connection information code screen displayed on the customer display 2106. The figure shows an example of a mode in which the customer display 2106 has a vertically long display surface portion and the notation on the screen is in English.
接続情報コード画面においては、二次元コードによる接続情報コードが表示されるとともに、携帯端末の画像が、二次元コードを指し示す矢印とともに表示されている。これにより、客は、二次元コードについて、携帯端末２４０により読み取らせるべきものであることを感覚的に把握できる。 On the connection information code screen, the connection information code by the two-dimensional code is displayed, and the image of the mobile terminal is displayed together with the arrow pointing to the two-dimensional code. As a result, the customer can intuitively grasp that the two-dimensional code should be read by the mobile terminal 240.
接続情報コード画面においては、値付け対象の商品についての値付け関連情報（包袋重量（Ｔａｒｅ）、計量された重量（Ｇｒｏｓｓ　ｗｅｉｇｈｔ）、重量単価（Ｕｎｉｔ　Ｐｒｉｃｅ）及び価格（Ｔｏｔａｌ　Ｐｒｉｃｅ）等）が示されている。つまり、接続情報コード画面においては、値付け対象の商品についての値付け処理の結果（確定された計量結果）が示される。客に対して、計量された重量で登録してよいかどうかの確認を促すメッセージ（「ＯＫ　ｗｉｔｈ　ｔｈｉｓ　ｗｅｉｇｈｔ？」）が表示されている。 On the connection information code screen, pricing-related information (packet weight (Tare), weighed weight (Gross weight), weight unit price (Unit Price), price (Total Price), etc.) for the product to be priced is displayed. It is shown. That is, on the connection information code screen, the result of the pricing process (confirmed weighing result) for the product to be priced is shown. A message ("OK with this weight?") Is displayed asking the customer to confirm whether or not to register with the weighed weight.
客は、接続情報コード画面において表示される値付け関連情報の内容を確認したうえで、携帯端末２４０により、接続情報コード画面に表示された二次元コードとしての接続情報コードを読み取らせる操作を行うようにされる。 After confirming the contents of the pricing-related information displayed on the connection information code screen, the customer performs an operation of having the mobile terminal 240 read the connection information code as a two-dimensional code displayed on the connection information code screen. To be done.
店員用ディスプレイ２１０５においては、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に接続情報コードを表示させていることを店員に報知するためのメッセージ、ポップアップウィンドウ、アイコン等が表示されるようにしてよい。 In the clerk display 2105, a message, a pop-up window, an icon, or the like for notifying the clerk that the connection information code is displayed on the customer display 2106 may be displayed.
ステップＳ２１０３による接続情報コードの表示は、以下のタイミングで行われてもよい。 The display of the connection information code in step S2103 may be performed at the following timing.
例えば、接続情報コードは、値付け対象の商品についての計量部２１０９による計量値の変動量が一定以下となったタイミングで表示されてよい。 For example, the connection information code may be displayed at the timing when the fluctuation amount of the measured value by the measuring unit 2109 for the product to be priced becomes a certain amount or less.
接続情報コードは、値付け対象の商品についての計量部２１０９による計量値が安定し、価格算出のための計量値が確定されたタイミングで表示されてよい。 The connection information code may be displayed at the timing when the measured value by the measuring unit 2109 for the product to be priced becomes stable and the measured value for price calculation is determined.
接続情報コードは、価格算出のための計量値が確定されて価格が算出されたタイミングで表示されてよい。 The connection information code may be displayed at the timing when the weighing value for price calculation is fixed and the price is calculated.
接続情報コードは、操作に応じて表示されてよい。例えば取引の開始のタイミングや、値付け対象の商品の価格が確定されたタイミングなどのように、店員が任意のタイミングで接続情報コードを表示させる操作を行ってよい。 The connection information code may be displayed according to the operation. For example, the clerk may perform an operation of displaying the connection information code at an arbitrary timing, such as the timing of starting a transaction or the timing when the price of the product to be priced is fixed.
この場合の接続情報コードを表示させる操作は、例えば店員用ディスプレイ２１０５に表示された画面に配置された接続情報コードの表示を指示するボタンに対するタッチ操作であってよい。 The operation for displaying the connection information code in this case may be, for example, a touch operation for a button instructing the display of the connection information code arranged on the screen displayed on the clerk display 2105.
接続情報コードが店員の操作に応じて表示される場合の客用ディスプレイ２１０６での値付け対象の商品の価格と接続情報コードの表示タイミングは、以下のようにされてよい。例えば、計量値付け装置２１０は、計量された値付け対象の商品の価格が確定されたタイミングに応じて商品の価格を客用ディスプレイ２１０６にて表示させる。その後において、計量値付け装置２１０は、接続情報コードを表示させる操作が行われたことに応じて、値付け対象の商品の価格とともに接続情報コードを同一画面に追加して表示してよい。あるいは、計量値付け装置２１０は、値付け対象の商品の価格が計量によって確定されたタイミングでは商品の価格は表示せず、値付け対象の商品の価格の確定後において接続情報コードを表示させる操作が行われたことに応じて、値付け対象の商品の価格と接続情報コードとを同一画面に表示するようにしてよい。 When the connection information code is displayed according to the operation of the clerk, the price of the product to be priced on the customer display 2106 and the display timing of the connection information code may be as follows. For example, the weighing pricing device 210 displays the price of the product on the customer display 2106 according to the timing when the price of the product to be priced is determined. After that, the weighing and pricing device 210 may add and display the connection information code on the same screen together with the price of the product to be priced according to the operation of displaying the connection information code. Alternatively, the weighing pricing device 210 does not display the price of the product at the timing when the price of the product to be priced is determined by weighing, and displays the connection information code after the price of the product to be priced is determined. The price of the product to be priced and the connection information code may be displayed on the same screen according to the above.
計量値付け装置２１０は、例えば購入対象の商品の品目が入力されたことにより値付け操作が開始されたとステップＳ２１０１にて判定されたことに応じて、ステップＳ２１０２の値付け処理による値付けが完了するよりも前のタイミングで、接続情報コードを表示させてよい。 The weighing pricing device 210 completes the pricing by the pricing process in step S2102 in response to the determination in step S2101 that the pricing operation has started, for example, because the item of the product to be purchased has been input. The connection information code may be displayed at a timing prior to the above.
このような接続情報コードの表示タイミングの態様の変形例については、後述の第２の実施形態の第２の例から第２の実施形態の第５の例においても同様に適用されてよい。 Such a modified example of the display timing mode of the connection information code may be similarly applied to the second example of the second embodiment described later to the fifth example of the second embodiment.
図３１のステップＳ２１０４：計量値付け装置２１０は、接続情報コードを読み取った携帯端末２４０からの接続要求に応じて接続を確立させる接続処理を実行する。接続が確立されると、計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０とで通信が可能となる。 Step S2104 of FIG. 31: The weighing and pricing device 210 executes a connection process for establishing a connection in response to a connection request from the mobile terminal 240 that has read the connection information code. Once the connection is established, the weighing and pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 can communicate with each other.
ステップＳ２１０４−１：計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ２１０４の接続処理により接続が確立されたか否かについて検知するようにされている。計量値付け装置２１０は、携帯端末２４０との接続が確立されたことを検知すると、ステップＳ２１０３により表示された接続情報コードの表示を消去（終了）させる。 Step S2104-1: The weighing and pricing device 210 is adapted to detect whether or not the connection has been established by the connection process of step S2104. When the weighing and pricing device 210 detects that the connection with the mobile terminal 240 has been established, it erases (ends) the display of the connection information code displayed in step S2103.
例えば、計量値付け装置２１０にて定常的に接続情報コードが表示されるようにしたり、接続情報コードが提示されたプレートなどを計量値付け装置２１０の近傍に定常的に設置しておくなどされてよい。しかしながら、この場合には、例えば対象の取引とは関係の無い客が携帯端末２４０に接続情報コードを読み取らせてしまい、計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０との無駄な接続が行われる可能性がある。そこで、計量値付け装置２１０が、接続情報コードの表示の開始と終了を制御し、携帯端末２４０との接続が行われる機会を制限することで、上記のような計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０との無駄な接続が行われることを回避できる。 For example, the connection information code may be constantly displayed on the weighing and pricing device 210, or a plate or the like on which the connection information code is presented may be constantly installed in the vicinity of the weighing and pricing device 210. You can. However, in this case, for example, a customer who has nothing to do with the target transaction may cause the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code, resulting in a useless connection between the weighing and pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240. There is. Therefore, the weighing and pricing device 210 controls the start and end of the display of the connection information code and limits the opportunity for connection with the mobile terminal 240, whereby the weighing and pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal as described above are used. It is possible to avoid unnecessary connection with 240.
ステップＳ２１０５：ステップＳ２１０４の接続処理によって携帯端末２４０と接続された状態の計量値付け装置２１０は、取引識別子照合処理を行う。つまり、計量値付け装置２１０は、今回の取引に応じて発行した取引識別子と、接続先の携帯端末２４０から通知された取引識別子とが一致するか否かを判定する。 Step S2105: The weighing and pricing device 210 in a state of being connected to the mobile terminal 240 by the connection process of step S2104 performs the transaction identifier collation process. That is, the weighing pricing device 210 determines whether or not the transaction identifier issued in response to the current transaction matches the transaction identifier notified from the connection-destination mobile terminal 240.
例えば店員の応対を受けていない他の客が自分の携帯端末に接続情報コードを読み取らせるようなことはほぼ起こらないということを考慮すると、接続情報コードに取引識別子を含めないようにされてよい。この場合、ステップＳ２１０５と後述のステップＳ２２０３の取引識別子照合処理は省略されたうえで、以降の処理が実行されてもよい。 For example, considering that it is unlikely that another customer who has not been treated by a clerk will have his / her mobile terminal read the connection information code, the connection information code may not include the transaction identifier. .. In this case, the transaction identifier collation process of step S2105 and step S2203 described later may be omitted, and then the subsequent processes may be executed.
ステップＳ２１０６：ステップＳ２１０５の取引識別子照合処理によって取引識別子が一致していると判定された場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、今回のステップＳ２１０２による１商品についての値付け処理の結果が反映された商品値付け情報（登録処理情報の一例）を、接続先の携帯端末２４０に送信する。 Step S2106: When it is determined by the transaction identifier matching process of step S2105 that the transaction identifiers match, the weighing pricing device 210 reflects the result of the pricing process for one product in step S2102 this time. The pricing information (an example of registration processing information) is transmitted to the mobile terminal 240 of the connection destination.
ステップＳ２１０７：ステップＳ２１０６により送信された商品値付け情報が携帯端末２４０にて正常に受信できた場合、携帯端末２４０から計量値付け装置２１０に対して受信確認通知が送信される。計量値付け装置２１０は、送信された受信確認通知を受信する。 Step S2107: When the product pricing information transmitted in step S2106 can be normally received by the mobile terminal 240, the reception confirmation notification is transmitted from the mobile terminal 240 to the weighing pricing device 210. The weighing and pricing device 210 receives the transmitted confirmation notification.
ステップＳ２１０８：受信確認通知が受信されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、今回のステップＳ２１０２により値付け処理を行った商品に対応するラベル（単品ラベル）を印字部２１１０により印刷させることで、単品ラベルを発行させる。 Step S2108: In response to the receipt confirmation notification being received, the weighing pricing device 210 causes the printing unit 2110 to print a label (single item label) corresponding to the product that has been priced in step S2102 this time. Then, let's issue a single item label.
図３３は、単品ラベルの一態様例を示している。このような単品ラベルには、商品名、加工日、消費期限、重量単価、重量、価格等の情報が印刷される。単品ラベルには、例えば量り売り対応の売り場が対応する部門等を示す情報も印刷されてよい。単品ラベルには、上記のように文字等により印刷される情報の少なくとも一部を含むコード（同図ではバーコード）が印刷されてよいが一般客向けのラベルと混同しないように、登録済などの印字やラベルフォーマットなど態様を変えることが好ましい。店員は、このように発行された単品ラベルを、今回の値付けの対象とされた商品に貼り付ける。 FIG. 33 shows an example of a single item label. Information such as a product name, a processing date, an expiration date, a weight unit price, a weight, and a price is printed on such a single product label. On the single item label, for example, information indicating the department or the like corresponding to the sales floor corresponding to the sales by weight may be printed. As described above, a code containing at least a part of the information printed by characters (bar code in the figure) may be printed on the single product label, but it has been registered so as not to be confused with the label for general customers. It is preferable to change the mode such as printing and label format. The clerk attaches the single item label issued in this way to the product targeted for this price.
図３１のステップＳ２１０９：ステップＳ２１０１にて１商品についての値付け操作が行われなかったことが判定された場合、あるいは、ステップＳ２１０８の処理が実行された後、計量値付け装置２１０は、一取引に対応する全ての商品の値付けが完了したか否かを判定する。 Step S2109 of FIG. 31: When it is determined in step S2101 that the pricing operation for one product has not been performed, or after the process of step S2108 is executed, the weighing pricing device 210 makes one transaction. It is determined whether or not the pricing of all the products corresponding to is completed.
店員は、一取引に対応して客が指定する商品の全てについて値付けを完了したことを確認すると、一取引に対応する値付け完了を宣言する操作（値付け完了操作）を計量値付け装置２１０に対して行う。値付け完了操作が行われたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、一取引に対応する全ての商品の値付けが完了したと判定する。 When the clerk confirms that the pricing has been completed for all the products specified by the customer in response to one transaction, the clerk performs an operation of declaring the completion of pricing corresponding to one transaction (price completion operation). Perform for 210. In response to the pricing completion operation, the weighing pricing device 210 determines that the pricing of all the commodities corresponding to one transaction has been completed.
あるいは、例えば店員が、事前に一取引において値付け対象の商品の品目を指定する操作をしていた場合には、宣言された数に応じた回数の商品ごとの値付け処理が完了したか否かにより、一取引に対応する全ての商品の値付けが完了したか否かを判定するようにされてよい。ここで、店員が事前に一取引において値付け対象の商品の品目を指定する操作としては、例えば計量値付け装置２１０の店員用ディスプレイ２１０５に表示されたプリセットキーに対する操作や、陳列された商品ごとに対応して店員に向けて配置されたタグ装置に対する操作などであってよい。プリセットキーは、商品ごとに対応して画面に配置されるキーである。タグ装置は、タッチ操作が行われたことに応じて、対応の商品についての商品情報を例えば近距離無線通信によって計量値付け装置２１０に送信する装置である。 Alternatively, for example, if the clerk has previously specified the item of the product to be priced in one transaction, whether or not the pricing process for each product has been completed the number of times according to the declared number. Therefore, it may be determined whether or not the pricing of all the commodities corresponding to one transaction has been completed. Here, as an operation in which the clerk specifies the item of the product to be priced in one transaction in advance, for example, an operation on the preset key displayed on the clerk display 2105 of the weighing pricing device 210 or each displayed product. It may be an operation on a tag device arranged toward a clerk in response to the above. Preset keys are keys that are arranged on the screen corresponding to each product. The tag device is a device that transmits product information about a corresponding product to the weighing and pricing device 210 by, for example, short-range wireless communication, in response to a touch operation.
一取引に対応する商品の値付けが完了していないと判定された場合には、ステップＳ２１０１に処理が戻される。 If it is determined that the pricing of the goods corresponding to one transaction has not been completed, the process is returned to step S2101.
ステップＳ２１１０：一取引に対応する商品の値付けが完了したと判定されると、計量値付け装置２１０は、値付け完了通知を、接続先の携帯端末２４０に送信する。 Step S2110: When it is determined that the pricing of the product corresponding to one transaction is completed, the weighing pricing device 210 transmits the pricing completion notification to the mobile terminal 240 of the connection destination.
ステップＳ２１１１：ステップＳ２１１０により送信された値付け完了通知が受信された携帯端末２４０は、受信確認通知を計量値付け装置２１０に対して送信する。当該ステップＳ２１１１により送信される受信確認通知は、値付け完了通知が正常に受信されたことを通知するものである。受信確認通知を受信した計量値付け装置２１０は、これまでの携帯端末２４０との通信の接続を切断する処理を実行する。 Step S211: The mobile terminal 240 that has received the pricing completion notification transmitted in step S2110 transmits the reception confirmation notification to the weighing and pricing device 210. The reception confirmation notification transmitted in step S2111 notifies that the pricing completion notification has been normally received. Upon receiving the receipt confirmation notification, the weighing and pricing device 210 executes a process of disconnecting the communication connection with the conventional mobile terminal 240.
接続情報コードの表示は、ステップＳ２１０４−１のタイミングに代えて、例えばステップＳ２１０８にて単品ラベルが発行されたタイミング（１商品の値付けが完了したタイミング）で消去されてもよい。あるいは、接続情報コードの表示は、例えばステップＳ２１１１による携帯端末２４０との通信の切断に応じたタイミングで消去されてもよい。 The display of the connection information code may be erased at the timing when the single item label is issued in step S2108 (the timing when the pricing of one product is completed) instead of the timing of step S2104-1. Alternatively, the display of the connection information code may be erased at a timing corresponding to, for example, disconnection of communication with the mobile terminal 240 in step S2111.
次に、携帯端末２４０が実行する処理手順例を説明する。 Next, an example of the processing procedure executed by the mobile terminal 240 will be described.
ステップＳ２２０１：タッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６に商品登録画面を表示させた状態のもとで、携帯端末２４０は、コードが読み取られたか否かを判定している。 Step S2201: The mobile terminal 240 determines whether or not the code has been read under the state where the product registration screen is displayed on the touch panel display 2406.
ステップＳ２２０２：前述のように、客が指定した１つの商品が店員の操作に応じて計量値付け装置２１０により値付けされ、値付けが確定されると、計量値付け装置２１０の客用ディスプレイ２１０６に接続情報コードが表示される。そこで、客は、商品登録画面が表示された状態の携帯端末２４０を操作して、表示された接続情報コードを携帯端末２４０に読み取らせる。これにより、ステップＳ２２０１にてコードが読み取られたと判定される。 Step S2202: As described above, one product specified by the customer is priced by the weighing pricing device 210 according to the operation of the clerk, and when the pricing is confirmed, the customer display 2106 of the weighing pricing device 210 The connection information code is displayed in. Therefore, the customer operates the mobile terminal 240 in the state where the product registration screen is displayed, and causes the mobile terminal 240 to read the displayed connection information code. As a result, it is determined that the code has been read in step S2201.
この場合に読み取られたコードは、接続情報コードであることから、携帯端末２４０は、接続情報コードが示す接続手順に従って、接続先の計量値付け装置２１０と通信可能に接続するための処理を、計量値付け装置２１０との間で実行する。 Since the code read in this case is the connection information code, the mobile terminal 240 performs a process for communicably connecting to the measurement and pricing device 210 of the connection destination according to the connection procedure indicated by the connection information code. Execute with the weighing and pricing device 210.
ステップＳ２２０３：ステップＳ２２０２により計量値付け装置２１０と接続された携帯端末２４０は、接続先の計量値付け装置２１０と取引識別子照合処理を実行する。この際、携帯端末２４０は、ステップＳ２２０１に対応して読み取った接続情報コードに含まれていた取引識別子を計量値付け装置２１０に送信する。 Step S2203: The mobile terminal 240 connected to the weighing and pricing device 210 in step S2202 executes the transaction identifier matching process with the connected weighing and pricing device 210. At this time, the mobile terminal 240 transmits the transaction identifier included in the connection information code read corresponding to step S2201 to the weighing and pricing device 210.
前述のように、接続情報コードに取引識別子が含まれていない場合には、当該ステップＳ２２０３の取引識別子照合処理は、ステップＳ２１０５とともに省略されたうえで、以降の処理が実行されるようにしてよい。 As described above, when the connection information code does not include the transaction identifier, the transaction identifier matching process in step S2203 may be omitted together with step S2105, and the subsequent processes may be executed. ..
ステップＳ２２０４：前述のように、計量値付け装置２１０では、取引識別子照合処理により、取引識別子の一致することが判定されると、ステップＳ２１０６により商品値付け情報を送信する。携帯端末２４０は、送信されてきた商品値付け情報を受信する。携帯端末２４０は、商品値付け情報を受信したことに応じて、受信された商品値付け情報の内容を反映させた値付け結果を、タッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６に表示する。タッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６にて表示される値付け結果は、例えば商品名、価格、当該商品が値付け対象の商品である旨の明示等となる。値付け結果としては、例えば図３３のラベルにて示される情報のいずれも含めて表示することができる。 Step S2204: As described above, in the weighing pricing device 210, when it is determined by the transaction identifier matching process that the transaction identifiers match, the product pricing information is transmitted in step S2106. The mobile terminal 240 receives the transmitted product pricing information. The mobile terminal 240 displays the pricing result reflecting the contents of the received product pricing information on the touch panel display 2406 in response to the receipt of the product pricing information. The pricing result displayed on the touch panel display 2406 is, for example, a product name, a price, a clarification that the product is a product to be priced, and the like. As the pricing result, for example, any of the information indicated by the label of FIG. 33 can be displayed.
ステップＳ２２０５：携帯端末２４０は、商品値付け情報が受信されたことを通知する、受信確認通知を計量値付け装置２１０に送信する。 Step S2205: The mobile terminal 240 transmits a reception confirmation notice to the weighing pricing device 210, which notifies that the product pricing information has been received.
ステップＳ２２０６：携帯端末２４０は、ステップＳ２２０４にて受信された商品値付け情報の内容が反映された、１商品についての商品登録情報を取引管理サーバ２５０に送信する。このように送信される商品登録情報には、取引識別子が含まれる。 Step S2206: The mobile terminal 240 transmits the product registration information for one product, which reflects the content of the product pricing information received in step S2204, to the transaction management server 250. The product registration information transmitted in this way includes a transaction identifier.
ステップＳ２２０７：携帯端末２４０は、計量値付け装置２１０がステップＳ２１１０により送信される値付け完了通知が受信されたか否かを判定している。値付け完了通知の受信されないことが判定された場合、ステップＳ２２０１に処理が戻される。 Step S2207: The mobile terminal 240 determines whether or not the weighing pricing device 210 has received the pricing completion notification transmitted in step S2110. If it is determined that the pricing completion notification is not received, the process is returned to step S2201.
ステップＳ２２０８：ステップＳ２２０７にて値付け完了通知の受信されたことが判定されると、携帯端末２４０は、値付け完了通知が受信されたことの通知としての受信確認通知を、計量値付け装置２１０に送信する。 Step S2208: When it is determined in step S2207 that the pricing completion notification has been received, the mobile terminal 240 sends a reception confirmation notification as a notification that the pricing completion notification has been received to the weighing pricing device 210. Send to.
ステップＳ２２０９：値付け完了通知が受信されたということは、量り売り対応の売り場での一取引に応じた商品登録が完了したことになる。そこで、携帯端末２４０は、取引管理サーバ２５０に対して、一取引に応じた商品登録が完了したことの通知である、商品登録完了通知を送信する。 Step S2209: The receipt of the pricing completion notification means that the product registration corresponding to one transaction at the sales floor corresponding to the sale by weight has been completed. Therefore, the mobile terminal 240 transmits a product registration completion notification, which is a notification that the product registration corresponding to one transaction has been completed, to the transaction management server 250.
次に、取引管理サーバ２５０が実行する処理手順例を説明する。 Next, an example of the processing procedure executed by the transaction management server 250 will be described.
ステップＳ２３０１：取引管理サーバ２５０は、一取引に対応して携帯端末２４０がステップＳ２２０６により送信する商品登録情報が受信されたか否かを判定する。 Step S2301: The transaction management server 250 determines whether or not the product registration information transmitted by the mobile terminal 240 in step S2206 has been received in response to one transaction.
ステップＳ２３０２：ステップＳ２３０１にて商品登録情報が受信されると、取引管理サーバ２５０は、受信された商品登録情報を、今回の取引に対応するカート情報に登録（追加）する。これにより、一取引における１の商品（商品種別）の登録が確定される。一取引に対応して最初に実行されるステップＳ２３０２では、取引管理サーバ２５０は、新規にカート情報を生成したうえで、生成されたカート情報に対して、受信された商品登録情報の登録を行う。新規にカート情報を生成するにあたり、カート情報に格納するカート識別情報は、ステップＳ２２０６により送信される商品登録情報に含まれている取引識別子を利用して生成することができる。 Step S2302: When the product registration information is received in step S2301, the transaction management server 250 registers (adds) the received product registration information to the cart information corresponding to the current transaction. As a result, the registration of one product (product type) in one transaction is confirmed. In step S2302, which is first executed in response to one transaction, the transaction management server 250 newly generates cart information, and then registers the received product registration information with respect to the generated cart information. .. When newly generating the cart information, the cart identification information stored in the cart information can be generated by using the transaction identifier included in the product registration information transmitted in step S2206.
ステップＳ２３０３：ステップＳ２３０１にて商品登録情報の受信されないことが判定された場合、あるいはステップＳ２３０２の処理を実行した後、取引管理サーバ２５０は、携帯端末２４０がステップＳ２２０９により送信する商品登録完了通知が受信されたか否かを判定する。商品登録完了通知の受信されないことが判定された場合には、ステップＳ２３０１に処理が戻される。商品登録完了通知の受信されたことが判定された場合には、同図に示される、一取引に対応するカート情報の生成に関する処理が終了される。一取引に対応するカート情報の生成に関する処理が終了されたことに応じて、一取引に対応する全商品の登録が確定される。 Step S2303: When it is determined in step S2301 that the product registration information is not received, or after executing the process of step S2302, the transaction management server 250 receives a product registration completion notification transmitted by the mobile terminal 240 in step S2209. Determine if it has been received. If it is determined that the product registration completion notification is not received, the process is returned to step S2301. When it is determined that the product registration completion notification has been received, the process related to the generation of cart information corresponding to one transaction shown in the figure is completed. When the process related to the generation of cart information corresponding to one transaction is completed, the registration of all products corresponding to one transaction is confirmed.
処理によれば、第２の実施形態の計量値付け装置２１０は、接続先の携帯端末２４０から、商品値付け情報についての受信確認通知が受信されたことに応じて、単品ラベルを発行するようにされている。換言すれば、処理には具体的に示されていないが、計量値付け装置２１０から商品値付け情報を送信したにもかかわらず、接続先の携帯端末２４０からの受信確認通知が得られない場合には、計量値付け装置２１０は、単品ラベルを発行しない。この際には、例えばエラー報知が行われる。これにより、計量値付け装置２１０においては、携帯端末２４０にて商品値付け情報が受信された商品の単品ラベルのみが発行される。 According to the process, the weighing pricing device 210 of the second embodiment issues a single item label in response to the receipt confirmation notification regarding the product pricing information received from the mobile terminal 240 of the connection destination. Has been made. In other words, although it is not specifically shown in the process, when the receipt confirmation notification from the connected mobile terminal 240 is not obtained even though the product pricing information is transmitted from the weighing pricing device 210. The weighing pricing device 210 does not issue a single item label. At this time, for example, error notification is performed. As a result, in the weighing pricing device 210, only the single product label of the product for which the product pricing information has been received by the mobile terminal 240 is issued.
この場合、店員と客は、単品ラベルが発行されたことに応じて、量り売りの商品の登録に必要な値付け情報が携帯端末２４０にて正常に受信されていることを確認できることになる。つまり、店員と客は、携帯端末２４０での商品登録の処理が正常に実行されたか否かを的確に判断できる。 In this case, the clerk and the customer can confirm that the price information necessary for registering the product sold by weight is normally received by the mobile terminal 240 in response to the issuance of the single item label. That is, the clerk and the customer can accurately determine whether or not the product registration process on the mobile terminal 240 has been normally executed.
続いて、第２の実施形態の第２の例を説明する。先の第２の実施形態の第１の例は、計量値付け装置２１０が配置される売り場にて商品を購入しようとする客が携帯端末２４０を使用して商品登録を受ける場合の例を挙げている。 Subsequently, a second example of the second embodiment will be described. The first example of the second embodiment mentioned above is an example in which a customer who intends to purchase a product at a sales floor where a weighing pricing device 210 is arranged receives a product registration using a mobile terminal 240. ing.
店舗では、携帯端末２４０を使用して商品登録を行って買い物をする客と、携帯端末２４０を使用せずに買い物をする客とのいずれにも応対できるような運用とする場合がある。 The store may be operated so as to be able to accommodate both customers who shop by registering products using the mobile terminal 240 and customers who shop without using the mobile terminal 240.
携帯端末２４０を使用せずに買い物をする客に対応する場合、商品棚が配置された売り場での買い物に関しては、店舗において店員が操作するＰＯＳレジスタを配置し、客は、商品棚から選んで取り出した商品をＰＯＳレジスタに持ってくる。ＰＯＳレジスタを操作する店員は、客が持ってきた商品を登録し、精算を行うようにすればよい。 When dealing with customers who shop without using the mobile terminal 240, for shopping at the sales floor where the product shelves are arranged, a POS register operated by a clerk is arranged at the store, and the customer selects from the product shelves. Bring the removed product to the POS register. The clerk who operates the POS register may register the product brought by the customer and settle the payment.
例えば、店舗において店員の操作に応じて商品登録を行う登録装置を配置してもよい。客は、商品棚から選んで取り出した商品を登録装置に持ってくる。登録装置を操作する店員は、客が持ってきた商品を登録する操作を行う。登録装置による商品登録処理の結果が反映された精算情報は、所定の態様により精算装置２２０にて取得されるようになっている。具体的には、登録装置から直接、あるいは上位装置を経由して精算装置２２０に精算情報が送信されるようにしてよい。 For example, a registration device that registers products according to the operation of a clerk may be arranged in the store. The customer brings the products selected from the product shelves to the registration device. The clerk who operates the registration device performs an operation of registering the product brought by the customer. The settlement information reflecting the result of the product registration process by the registration device is acquired by the settlement device 220 according to a predetermined mode. Specifically, the settlement information may be transmitted directly from the registration device or via the host device to the settlement device 220.
例えば、登録装置によりお会計券（登録商標）を発行し、客がお会計券に印刷されたコード情報を精算装置２２０に読み取らせることにより、精算装置２２０が、コード情報が示す取引識別子が対応付けられた精算情報を、登録装置もしくは上位装置等から取得するようにされてよい。あるいは、お会計券に印刷されたコード情報に精算情報が含まれるようにされてよい。客は、精算情報を取得した精算装置２２０を操作して精算を行えばよい。 For example, a checkout ticket (registered trademark) is issued by a registration device, and the customer causes the checkout device 220 to read the code information printed on the checkout ticket, so that the checkout device 220 corresponds to the transaction identifier indicated by the code information. The attached settlement information may be acquired from a registration device, a higher-level device, or the like. Alternatively, the code information printed on the checkout ticket may include the settlement information. The customer may operate the settlement device 220 that has acquired the settlement information to perform the settlement.
店舗においてフルセルフのＰＯＳレジスタを配置してもよい。客は、フルセルフのＰＯＳレジスタにて、自分が商品棚から持ってきた商品を登録し、精算する操作を行ってよい。 A full self POS register may be placed in the store. The customer may register the products he / she brought from the product shelves in the full-self POS register and perform the operation of payment.
一方で、第２の実施形態の販売システムにおいては、計量値付け装置２１０が配置された量り売り商品の売り場では、携帯端末２４０を使用して買い物をする客と、携帯端末２４０を使用せずに買い物をする客とに応じて、以下のような応対が行えるように構成される。 On the other hand, in the sales system of the second embodiment, in the sales floor of the merchandise sold by weight in which the weighing pricing device 210 is arranged, the customer who makes a purchase using the mobile terminal 240 and the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 are not used. It is configured so that the following responses can be made according to the customers who shop.
図３４のフローチャートは、第２の実施形態の計量値付け装置２１０が、一取引における値付けに対応して実行する処理手順例を示している。 The flowchart of FIG. 34 shows an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing and pricing device 210 of the second embodiment in response to pricing in one transaction.
以下の説明では、量り売り商品の売り場にて、量り売り商品に加えて特定の定額商品についても値付けを行うようにされた場合を例に挙げる。 In the following explanation, an example will be given in which a specific fixed-price product is priced in addition to the weight-selling product at the sales floor of the weight-selling product.
計量値付け装置２１０の処理に対応する携帯端末２４０と取引管理サーバ２５０の処理は、図３１と同様でよい。 The processing of the mobile terminal 240 and the transaction management server 250 corresponding to the processing of the weighing and pricing device 210 may be the same as in FIG. 31.
ステップＳ１１０１：計量値付け装置２１０は、まず、商品特定処理を実行する。商品特定処理は、値付け対象の商品について、量り売り商品と定額商品とのいずれの種別であるのかについて特定する処理である。計量値付け装置２１０は、商品特定処理として、例えば店員の操作による商品の品目の入力に応じて、入力された商品の品目の商品マスタにおいて示される種別が量り売り商品と定額商品とのいずれに該当するのかを判定すればよい。 Step S1101: The weighing and pricing device 210 first executes a product identification process. The product identification process is a process for specifying whether the product to be priced is a type of a product sold by weight or a fixed-price product. In the weighing pricing device 210, as a product identification process, for example, in response to input of a product item by an operation of a clerk, the type indicated in the product master of the input product item corresponds to either a weight-selling product or a fixed-price product. You just have to decide if you want to.
商品特定処理にあたって店員が行う商品の品目の入力の操作は、登録対象の商品の指定に相当する。即ち、計量値付け装置２１０は、店員が行う商品の品目の入力のための操作に応じて、登録対象の商品を指定する。 The operation of inputting the item of the product performed by the clerk in the product identification process corresponds to the designation of the product to be registered. That is, the weighing and pricing device 210 designates the product to be registered according to the operation for inputting the item of the product performed by the clerk.
ステップＳ１１０１の商品特定処理には、値付け対象の商品の名称や画像の商品に関する情報を取得する処理も含まれてよい。ステップＳ１１０１の商品特定処理には、値付け対象の商品の単位重量あたりの金額（重量単価）や、値付け対象の商品の単位重量あたりの個数等の価格に関して取得する処理も含まれてよい。ステップＳ１１０１の商品特定処理は、計量値付け装置２１０の店員用ディスプレイ２１０５に表示されたプリセットキーが店員により操作されたことに応じて行われるようにされてよい。あるいは、ステップＳ１１０１の商品特定処理は、ショーケース内に陳列された商品ごとに対応して配置された、無線機能を有する棚札に店員または客がタッチする操作を行ったことに応じて、棚札から送信された商品情報を計量値付け装置２１０が受信したことに応じて行われるようにされてよい。 The product identification process in step S1101 may include a process of acquiring information about the product name and the image of the product to be priced. The product identification process in step S1101 may include a process of acquiring a price such as an amount of money per unit weight (weight unit price) of a product to be priced or a number of products to be priced per unit weight. The product identification process in step S1101 may be performed in response to the preset keys displayed on the clerk display 2105 of the weighing and pricing device 210 being operated by the clerk. Alternatively, in the product identification process of step S1101, the shelves may be touched by a clerk or a customer on a shelf tag having a wireless function, which is arranged corresponding to each product displayed in the showcase. It may be performed in response to the receipt of the product information transmitted from the tag by the weighing and pricing device 210.
ステップＳ１１０２：計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ１１０１による商品特定処理の結果として、値付け対象の商品が量り売り商品と定額商品とのいずれであったのかについて判定する。 Step S1102: The weighing and pricing device 210 determines whether the product to be priced is a merchandise sold by weight or a fixed-price product as a result of the product identification process in step S1101.
ステップＳ１１０３：ステップＳ１１０２にて量り売り商品であると判定された場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、計量対応値付け処理を実行する。計量対応値付け処理は、例えば図３１のステップＳ１０２に準ずればよい。 Step S1103: When it is determined in step S1102 that the product is sold by weight, the weighing pricing device 210 executes the weighing corresponding pricing process. The weighing corresponding pricing process may be, for example, according to step S102 in FIG.
ステップＳ１１０４：ステップＳ１１０２にて定額商品であると判定された場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、個数対応値付け処理を実行する。つまり、この場合、店員は、登録対象とされた定額商品の個数を計量値付け装置２１０に入力する。店員による個数の入力は、例えば置数の操作によって行われてよい。あるいは、店員による個数の入力は、秤台２１０９ａに、商品を１つずつ順に載せていく操作（作業）であってもよい。この場合、計量値付け装置１０は、商品が１つずつ秤台２１０９ａに載せられていくのに応じて、計量部２１０９により計測される重量が一定以上の増加量で段階的に変化していく回数を、商品の個数としてカウントしていくようにされる。そして、計量値付け装置２１０は、入力された個数と、登録対象の商品の品目について設定された重量単価とを利用して、商品の価格を算出する。 Step S1104: When it is determined in step S1102 that the product is a fixed-price product, the weighing pricing device 210 executes a quantity-corresponding pricing process. That is, in this case, the clerk inputs the number of fixed-price products to be registered into the weighing and pricing device 210. The number input by the clerk may be performed by, for example, the operation of the number. Alternatively, the input of the number by the clerk may be an operation (work) of placing the products one by one on the scale 2109a. In this case, in the weighing pricing device 10, the weight measured by the weighing unit 2109 gradually changes by an increase amount of a certain amount or more as the products are placed on the weighing platform 2109a one by one. The number of times is counted as the number of products. Then, the weighing pricing device 210 calculates the price of the product by using the input quantity and the weight unit price set for the item of the product to be registered.
計量値付け装置２１０は、例えば店員用ディスプレイ２１０５及び客用ディスプレイ２１０６に、購入対象商品の品目、個数、価格等を表示する。店員は、客に個数等について確認を行い、客からの承諾が得られると、購入対象商品の値付けの確定を指示する操作を行う。 The weighing pricing device 210 displays, for example, the item, quantity, price, etc. of the product to be purchased on the clerk display 2105 and the customer display 2106. The clerk confirms the number of items and the like with the customer, and when the customer's consent is obtained, the clerk performs an operation of instructing the confirmation of the price of the product to be purchased.
ステップＳ１１０５：ステップＳ１１０３またはステップＳ１１０４の処理の後、計量値付け装置２１０は、上記のように１の購入対象商品について値付けが確定されたことに応じて、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に接続情報コードを表示させる。 Step S1105: After the processing of step S1103 or step S1104, the weighing pricing device 210 sets the connection information code on the customer display 2106 in response to the determination of the pricing for the product to be purchased in 1 as described above. Display it.
ステップＳ１１０６：第２の実施形態においては、携帯端末２４０を利用する客だけではなく、携帯端末２４０を利用しない客にも、計量値付け装置２１０での値付けを受け付ける。この場合、携帯端末２４０を利用する客は、ステップＳ１１０５で客用ディスプレイ２１０６に表示された接続情報コードを携帯端末２４０により読み取らせる操作を行う。一方、携帯端末２４０を利用しない客は、携帯端末２４０を計量値付け装置２１０と通信可能に接続する操作を行わずに、次の商品の注文をしたり、店員からの商品の受け取りを待ったりする。 Step S1106: In the second embodiment, not only the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 but also the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 receives the pricing by the weighing pricing device 210. In this case, the customer using the mobile terminal 240 performs an operation of causing the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code displayed on the customer display 2106 in step S1105. On the other hand, a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 may order the next product or wait for the product to be received from the clerk without performing the operation of connecting the mobile terminal 240 to the weighing pricing device 210 in a communicable manner. do.
そこで、計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ１１０５により接続情報コードの表示を開始させた時点から所定時間が経過したか否かを判定する。ここでの所定時間は、接続情報コードが表示されてから、客が接続情報コードを携帯端末２４０により読み取らせる操作を完了させるまでに要する標準的な時間を考慮して設定されてよい。 Therefore, the weighing and pricing device 210 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the display of the connection information code is started in step S1105. The predetermined time here may be set in consideration of the standard time required from the display of the connection information code to the completion of the operation for the customer to read the connection information code by the mobile terminal 240.
ステップＳ１１０７：計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ１１０６にて所定時間が経過していないと判定されている間は、さらに接続処理が開始されたか否かを判定する。上記のように、今回の取引に対応する客が携帯端末２４０を利用する客である場合、客は、ステップＳ１１０５により表示された接続情報コードを携帯端末２４０に読み取らせる操作を行うことになる。そして、接続情報コードを読み取った携帯端末２４０は計量値付け装置２１０に対して接続要求を行い（図３１のステップＳ２２０２）、携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０との間で接続を確立させるための接続処理が開始される。計量値付け装置２１０は、このようにして携帯端末２４０からの接続要求に応じて接続処理を開始すると、ステップＳ１１０７において接続処理が開始されたと判定する。 Step S1107: The weighing and pricing device 210 further determines whether or not the connection process has been started while it is determined in step S1106 that the predetermined time has not elapsed. As described above, when the customer corresponding to this transaction is a customer who uses the mobile terminal 240, the customer performs an operation of causing the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code displayed in step S1105. Then, the mobile terminal 240 that has read the connection information code makes a connection request to the weighing and pricing device 210 (step S2202 in FIG. 31), and establishes a connection between the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210. Connection processing is started. When the weighing and pricing device 210 starts the connection process in response to the connection request from the mobile terminal 240 in this way, it is determined in step S1107 that the connection process has started.
ステップＳ１１０７にて接続処理が開始されないと判定された場合には、ステップＳ１１０６に処理が戻される。このように、計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ１１０５により客用ディスプレイ２１０６に接続情報コードを表示させた状態において、所定時間内に接続処理が開始されるか否かを判定する。 If it is determined in step S1107 that the connection process is not started, the process is returned to step S1106. In this way, the weighing and pricing device 210 determines whether or not the connection process is started within a predetermined time in the state where the connection information code is displayed on the customer display 2106 in step S1105.
ステップＳ１１０８：ステップＳ１１０６にて所定時間の経過したことが判定された場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、店員用ディスプレイ２１０５に接続要否確認画面を表示させる。 Step S1108: When it is determined in step S1106 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the weighing pricing device 210 causes the clerk display 2105 to display a connection necessity confirmation screen.
接続情報コードが表示されてから所定時間が経過したことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、対応の客は携帯端末２４０を利用しない客であるとして、コード情報が印刷された単品ラベルを発行するようにされてもよい。しかしながら、例えば、携帯端末２４０を利用するつもりの客が、他のことに気を取られるなどして携帯端末２４０により接続情報コードを読み取らせる操作を行うことを忘れていたり、携帯端末２４０の扱いに手間取っていたりすることで、所定時間を経過してしまう可能性がある。そこで、第２の実施形態の計量値付け装置２１０は、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に接続情報コードが表示されてから所定時間を経過した際、即座にラベルを発行するのではなく、接続要否確認画面を表示することで、店員に、携帯端末２４０を利用しない客であるのかどうかの確認を求めるようにされている。 When a predetermined time has passed since the connection information code was displayed, the weighing pricing device 210 issues a single item label on which the code information is printed, assuming that the corresponding customer is a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240. You may be made to do so. However, for example, a customer who intends to use the mobile terminal 240 forgets to perform an operation to read the connection information code by the mobile terminal 240 due to being distracted by other things, or the handling of the mobile terminal 240. There is a possibility that a predetermined time will elapse due to the time and effort required. Therefore, the weighing and pricing device 210 of the second embodiment does not immediately issue a label when a predetermined time elapses after the connection information code is displayed on the customer display 2106, but a connection necessity confirmation screen. Is displayed to ask the clerk to confirm whether or not the customer does not use the mobile terminal 240.
図３５は、接続要否確認画面の一例を示している。接続要否確認画面は、例えばポップアップウィンドウ形式とされて、ラベル発行操作が行われる直前まで店員側ディスプレイ２６にて表示されていた画面上に重畳されるように表示されるものであってよい。 FIG. 35 shows an example of a connection necessity confirmation screen. The connection necessity confirmation screen may be, for example, in the form of a pop-up window, and may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the screen displayed on the clerk side display 26 until immediately before the label issuing operation is performed.
接続要否確認画面においては、接続情報コード表示ボタンＢＴ１と、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ２とが配置されている。例えば、接続情報コード表示ボタンＢＴ１は、携帯端末４０を利用する客であったことが確認されて、店員が携帯端末２４０と接続すべきと判断した場合に操作するボタンである。ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ２は、携帯端末２４０を利用する客ではないことが確認されたので、店員がこのままラベルを発行してもよいと判断した場合に、単品ラベルを発行させるために操作するボタンである。 On the connection necessity confirmation screen, a connection information code display button BT1 and a label issuing button BT2 are arranged. For example, the connection information code display button BT1 is a button to be operated when it is confirmed that the customer is using the mobile terminal 40 and the clerk determines that the connection should be made with the mobile terminal 240. Since it was confirmed that the label issuing button BT2 is not a customer who uses the mobile terminal 240, it is a button to be operated to issue a single item label when the clerk decides that the label may be issued as it is. ..
接続要否確認画面が表示された場合、店員は、客の様子により、あるいは客に問い合わせるなどして、携帯端末２４０を利用する客であるか否かを確認するようにされる。 When the connection necessity confirmation screen is displayed, the clerk is asked to confirm whether or not the customer is using the mobile terminal 240, depending on the state of the customer or by inquiring to the customer.
これまでの処理においては、ステップＳ１１０３またはステップＳ１１０４にて値付けが確定されたことに応じて、まずステップＳ１１０５により客用ディスプレイ２１０６にて接続情報コードが表示されるようにしている。 In the processing so far, the connection information code is first displayed on the customer display 2106 by step S1105 in response to the pricing being confirmed in step S1103 or step S1104.
しかしながら、計量値付け装置２１０は、例えばステップＳ１１０５、Ｓ１１０６の処理を省略したうえで、ステップＳ１１０３またはステップＳ１１０４にて値付けが確定されたことに応じて、ステップＳ１１０８に対応する接続要否確認画面を表示させるようにしてよい。つまり、この場合には、値付けが確定されたことに応じて、まず接続要否確認画面が表示され、店員が携帯端末２４０を利用する客であるか否かを判断して、接続情報コードを表示させる操作と、ラベルを発行させる操作とのいずれかを行うようにされる。このような構成では、店員は、例えば明らかに携帯端末２４０を利用しない客であると判断できる場合に、迅速にラベルを発行させることができる。 However, the weighing pricing device 210 omits the processing of, for example, steps S1105 and S1106, and responds to the fact that the pricing is confirmed in step S1103 or step S1104, and the connection necessity confirmation screen corresponding to step S1108. May be displayed. That is, in this case, the connection necessity confirmation screen is first displayed according to the confirmation of the pricing, and it is determined whether or not the clerk is a customer who uses the mobile terminal 240, and the connection information code. Is to be displayed or a label is issued. In such a configuration, the clerk can promptly issue a label when, for example, it can be determined that the customer clearly does not use the mobile terminal 240.
図３４のステップＳ１１０９：計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ１１０８により接続要否確認画面を表示させた状態で、接続が不要との確認が得られたか否かを判定する。 Step S1109 of FIG. 34: The weighing and pricing device 210 determines whether or not it has been confirmed that the connection is unnecessary in the state where the connection necessity confirmation screen is displayed in step S1108.
携帯端末２４０を利用する客であったことが確認された場合、店員は、接続情報コード表示ボタンＢＴ１を操作する。接続情報コード表示ボタンＢＴ１が操作された場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、接続が必要との確認が得られたと判定する。この場合には、接続要否確認画面が消去されたうえで、ステップＳ１１０６に処理が戻される。これにより、ステップＳ１１０５により開始された客用ディスプレイ２１０６の接続情報コードの表示が継続される。 When it is confirmed that the customer is using the mobile terminal 240, the clerk operates the connection information code display button BT1. When the connection information code display button BT1 is operated, the weighing and pricing device 210 determines that the confirmation that the connection is necessary has been obtained. In this case, the connection necessity confirmation screen is deleted, and then the process is returned to step S1106. As a result, the display of the connection information code of the customer display 2106 started in step S1105 is continued.
ラベル発行操作に応じて客用ディスプレイ２１０６にて表示されていた接続情報コードが消去されるようになっている場合には、ステップＳ１１０５に処理が戻されるようにして、客用ディスプレイ２１０６にて接続情報コードが再表示されるようにしてよい。 If the connection information code displayed on the customer display 2106 is erased in response to the label issuing operation, the process is returned to step S1105 and the connection is made on the customer display 2106. The information code may be displayed again.
ステップＳ１１１０：携帯端末２４０を利用する客でないことが確認された場合、店員は、接続要否確認画面におけるラベル発行ボタンＢＴ２を操作する。ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ２に対する操作が行われた場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、接続が不要との確認が得られたと判定する。 Step S1110: When it is confirmed that the customer is not a customer using the mobile terminal 240, the clerk operates the label issuing button BT2 on the connection necessity confirmation screen. When the label issuing button BT2 is operated, the weighing and pricing device 210 determines that the confirmation that the connection is unnecessary has been obtained.
この場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、携帯端末２４０を利用しない客に対応して、今回の登録対象の商品の値付け処理の結果が反映された単品ラベルを発行する。店員は、このように発行された単品ラベルを、今回の値付けの対象とされた商品に貼り付ける。 In this case, the weighing and pricing device 210 issues a single item label reflecting the result of the pricing process of the product to be registered this time in response to the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240. The clerk attaches the single item label issued in this way to the product targeted for this price.
このようにラベル発行ボタンＢＴ２に対する操作が行われた場合には、計量値付け装置２１０は携帯端末２４０と接続する必要がないということになる。そこで、計量値付け装置１０は、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ２に対する操作が行われたタイミングで、ステップＳ１１０５により表示された接続情報コードを消去するようにされてよい。 When the label issuing button BT2 is operated in this way, the weighing and pricing device 210 does not need to be connected to the mobile terminal 240. Therefore, the weighing and pricing device 10 may be configured to erase the connection information code displayed in step S1105 at the timing when the label issuing button BT2 is operated.
携帯端末２４０を利用しない客に対応する単品ラベルとしては、図３３に示されるように、値付け処理の結果が文字により印刷されるとともに、コード情報が印刷される態様である。携帯端末２４０を利用しない客に対応する単品ラベルのコード情報には、例えば店員が操作するＰＯＳレジスタ、登録装置、フルセルフのＰＯＳレジスタ等の商品登録処理が可能な装置にて読み取りが行われることで商品登録処理の実行に際して利用可能な内容が含まれる。 As a single item label corresponding to a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240, as shown in FIG. 33, the result of the pricing process is printed in characters and the code information is printed. The code information of the single item label corresponding to the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 is read by a device capable of product registration processing such as a POS register operated by a clerk, a registration device, and a full-self POS register. Contains the content that can be used to execute the product registration process.
このようなコード情報は、例えば商品コード、重量または個数、単価（重量単価または所定個数あたりの単価）、価格等が含まれてよい。これにより、携帯端末２４０を利用しない客は、計量値付け装置２１０が設置された売り場（値付け対応売り場）にて値付けされた商品の登録を受けて精算を行うことができる。 Such code information may include, for example, a product code, weight or quantity, unit price (weight unit price or unit price per predetermined quantity), price, and the like. As a result, the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 can make a payment by receiving the registration of the priced product at the sales floor (the sales floor corresponding to pricing) in which the weighing and pricing device 210 is installed.
単品ラベルのコード情報は、携帯端末２４０によっても読み取り可能とされてよい。携帯端末２４０を利用する客であっても、例えば店員がミスにより、コード情報が印刷された単品ラベルを発行させてしまうといった可能性がある。この場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、携帯端末２４０に商品値付け情報を送信しないことになってしまう。このようなことが起こった場合であっても、単品ラベルのコード情報を携帯端末２４０によって読み取るようにすることで、携帯端末２４０が商品値付け情報を取得することができる。 The code information of the single item label may also be readable by the mobile terminal 240. Even for a customer who uses the mobile terminal 240, there is a possibility that, for example, a clerk may cause a single item label on which the code information is printed to be issued due to a mistake. In this case, the weighing pricing device 210 does not transmit the product pricing information to the mobile terminal 240. Even when such a situation occurs, the mobile terminal 240 can acquire the product price information by reading the code information of the single item label by the mobile terminal 240.
第２の実施形態においては、ステップＳ１１１５により携帯端末２４０を利用する客に対応して発行される単品ラベルにもコード情報を印刷することとしても、特に精算等の運用には支障がない。携帯端末２４０を利用する客の場合には、単品ラベルに印刷されたコード情報を携帯端末２４０に読み取らせなくとも、携帯端末２４０が計量値付け装置２１０との通信を介して商品値付け情報を取得できるようにされている。 In the second embodiment, even if the code information is printed on the single item label issued in response to the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 in step S1115, there is no particular problem in the operation such as settlement. In the case of a customer who uses the mobile terminal 240, the mobile terminal 240 can read the product pricing information via communication with the weighing pricing device 210 without having the mobile terminal 240 read the code information printed on the single item label. It is made available.
ステップＳ１１１１：計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ１１０７に対応して開始された接続処理を実行し、携帯端末２４０との接続を確立させる。 Step S1111: The weighing and pricing device 210 executes the connection process started in response to step S1107 to establish a connection with the mobile terminal 240.
ステップＳ１１１１−１：計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ１１１１の接続処理により接続が確立されたことを検知すると、ステップＳ１１０５により表示された接続情報コードの表示を消去させる。 Step S1111-1: When the weighing and pricing device 210 detects that the connection has been established by the connection process in step S1111, the display of the connection information code displayed in step S1105 is erased.
ステップＳ１１１２~Ｓ１１１６の処理は、図３１のステップＳ１０５~Ｓ１０９と同様となる。ただし、Ｓ１１１５の場合には、ラベル発行操作に応じて単品ラベルを発行するようにされている。この場合のラベル発行操作は、例えばキー操作部２１０８において配置される所定のキーに対する操作であってもよいし、店員用ディスプレイ２１０５に表示される操作画面において配置された所定のキーに対する操作であってもよい。発行される単品ラベルにおいてコード情報は印刷されない。この際、計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ１１１４における携帯端末２４０からの受信確認通知の受信に応じて、ラベル発行操作が行われる画面（例えばポップアップウィンドウ）を表示させてもよい。 The processing of steps S1112 to S1116 is the same as that of steps S105 to S109 of FIG. However, in the case of S1115, a single product label is issued according to the label issuing operation. The label issuing operation in this case may be, for example, an operation for a predetermined key arranged in the key operation unit 2108, or an operation for a predetermined key arranged on the operation screen displayed on the clerk display 2105. You may. No code information is printed on the single label issued. At this time, the weighing and pricing device 210 may display a screen (for example, a pop-up window) in which the label issuing operation is performed in response to the reception of the reception confirmation notification from the mobile terminal 240 in step S1114.
ステップＳ１１１５により単品ラベルを発行する際には、単品ラベルの発行確認のための発行確認画面を店員用ディスプレイ２１０５に表示させてよい。 When issuing the single item label in step S1115, the issue confirmation screen for confirming the issuance of the single item label may be displayed on the clerk display 2105.
図３６は、発行確認画面の一例を示している。発行確認画面においては、ステップＳ１１１３により送信した商品値付け情報の送信が完了したことに応じて単品ラベルを発行する旨を報知するメッセージが表示されるとともに、確認ボタンＢＴ３が配置されている。 FIG. 36 shows an example of the issuance confirmation screen. On the issuance confirmation screen, a message notifying that a single item label is issued in response to the completion of transmission of the product pricing information transmitted in step S1113 is displayed, and a confirmation button BT3 is arranged.
店員は、表示された発行確認画面に配置される確認ボタンＢＴ３に対する操作を行って、計量値付け装置２１０に単品ラベルを発行させる。携帯端末からの商品値付け情報の受信完了通知を受けてから単品ラベルを発行させるようにしてもよい。 The clerk operates the confirmation button BT3 arranged on the displayed issuance confirmation screen to cause the weighing and pricing device 210 to issue a single item label. The single item label may be issued after receiving the notification of the completion of receiving the product price information from the mobile terminal.
図３４のステップＳ１１１７：ステップＳ１１１６にて一取引に対応する商品の値付けが完了したと判定されると、計量値付け装置２１０は、現在において携帯端末２４０と接続された状態にあるか否かを判定する。携帯端末２４０と接続された状態にないと判定された場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ１１１９の処理をスキップして処理を終了させてよい。 Step S1117 of FIG. 34: When it is determined in step S1116 that the pricing of the product corresponding to one transaction is completed, whether or not the weighing pricing device 210 is currently connected to the mobile terminal 240. To judge. If it is determined that the mobile terminal 240 is not connected to the mobile terminal 240, the weighing and pricing device 210 may skip the process of step S1119 and end the process.
一方、ステップＳ１１１７において接続された状態にあると判定された場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ１１１８、Ｓ１１１９の処理を実行する。ステップＳ１１１８、Ｓ１１１９の処理は、図３１のステップＳ１１０、Ｓ１１１と同様となる。 On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1117 that the devices are connected, the weighing and pricing device 210 executes the processes of steps S1118 and S1119. The processing of steps S1118 and S1119 is the same as that of steps S110 and S111 of FIG.
接続情報コードの表示は、ステップＳ１１１−１のタイミングに代えて、例えばステップＳ１１１５にて単品ラベルが発行されたタイミングで消去されてもよい。あるいは、接続情報コードの表示は、例えばステップＳ１１１９による携帯端末２４０との通信の切断に応じたタイミングで消去されてもよい。 The display of the connection information code may be erased, for example, at the timing when the single item label is issued in step S1115, instead of the timing of step S111-1. Alternatively, the display of the connection information code may be erased at a timing corresponding to, for example, disconnection of communication with the mobile terminal 240 in step S1119.
上記のような処理手順例であれば、第２の実施形態においては、値付け対応売り場で買い物をする客に対して、以下のように応対することができる。つまり、携帯端末２４０を利用しない客の場合には、コード情報が印刷された単品ラベルを値付けした商品に貼り付ける。これにより、携帯端末２４０を利用しない客であっても、ＰＯＳレジスタ等で商品登録を受けられる。一方、携帯端末２４０を利用する客の場合には、ＰＯＳレジスタ等で商品登録を行う必要が無いので、コード情報が印刷されていない単品ラベルを値付けした商品に貼り付ける。 In the case of the above processing procedure example, in the second embodiment, it is possible to respond to the customer who shop at the price-supporting sales floor as follows. That is, in the case of a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240, a single item label on which the code information is printed is attached to the priced product. As a result, even a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 can receive product registration in the POS register or the like. On the other hand, in the case of a customer who uses the mobile terminal 240, since it is not necessary to register the product in the POS register or the like, a single product label on which the code information is not printed is attached to the priced product.
このように、第２の実施形態では、携帯端末２４０を利用しない客に向けてはコード情報が印刷された単品ラベルを発行し、携帯端末２４０を利用する客に向けてはコード情報が印刷されない単品ラベルを発行するようにされる。これにより、値付けされた商品が、携帯端末２４０を利用する客と、利用しない客とのいずれのものであるのかを、単品ラベルにおけるコード情報の有無により明確に区別できる。これにより、携帯端末２４０を利用する客と利用しない客との双方に対応して計量値付け装置２１０により値付けが行われる商品の販売を行うにあたり、効率よく取引を行えるようになる。 As described above, in the second embodiment, the single item label on which the code information is printed is issued to the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240, and the code information is not printed to the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240. It is made to issue a single item label. Thereby, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the priced product is a customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 or a customer who does not use it, depending on the presence or absence of the code information on the single item label. As a result, it becomes possible to efficiently carry out transactions when selling products that are priced by the weighing and pricing device 210 in response to both customers who use the mobile terminal 240 and customers who do not use it.
そのうえで、図３４の処理のもとでは、店員は、携帯端末２４０を利用する客と利用しない客とで、同様の手順による操作となっている。具体的には、店員は、計量値付け装置２１０にステップＳ１１０３とステップＳ１１０４とのいずれかに対応する値付け処理を実行させる値付けの操作を行い、次に、ステップＳ１１１５またはステップＳ１１１０に対応して、単品ラベルの発行を指示する操作を行えばよい。つまり、店員は、携帯端末２４０を利用する客と利用しない客とのいずれの客と応対する場合にも、行うべき操作としては、値付けの操作を行い、この後に単品ラベルの発行を指示する操作を行うというように手順が同じになる。このため、店員は、携帯端末２４０を利用する客と利用しない客とのいずれの客と応対する場合にも、操作に戸惑いにくい。これにより、さらに効率よく取引を行えるようになる。 Then, under the process of FIG. 34, the clerk operates according to the same procedure for the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 and the customer who does not use it. Specifically, the clerk performs a pricing operation for causing the weighing pricing device 210 to execute a pricing process corresponding to either step S1103 or step S1104, and then corresponds to step S1115 or step S1110. Then, the operation of instructing the issuance of a single item label may be performed. That is, the clerk performs a pricing operation as an operation to be performed regardless of whether the customer uses the mobile terminal 240 or the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240, and then instructs the issuance of a single item label. The procedure is the same, such as performing an operation. Therefore, the clerk is less likely to be confused about the operation when dealing with either the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 or the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240. This makes it possible to carry out transactions more efficiently.
図３４の説明では、コード情報が印刷された単品ラベルに対応するラベル発行操作は、接続要否確認画面に配置されたラベル発行ボタンＢＴ２に対する操作であるが、例えばステップＳ１１１５におけるコード情報が印刷されない単品ラベルの発行の場合と同じ操作とされてもよい。 In the description of FIG. 34, the label issuing operation corresponding to the single item label on which the code information is printed is an operation for the label issuing button BT2 arranged on the connection necessity confirmation screen, but the code information in step S1115 is not printed, for example. The operation may be the same as when issuing a single item label.
図３４の処理手順例のもとでは、ステップＳ１１０３またはステップＳ１１０４による計量値付け処理が完了して値付けが確定された後において、ステップＳ１１０５により接続情報コードを表示するようにされている。 Under the processing procedure example of FIG. 34, the connection information code is displayed in step S1105 after the weighing pricing process in step S1103 or step S1104 is completed and the pricing is confirmed.
しかしながら、接続情報コードの表示は、例えばステップＳ１１１３により商品値付け情報の送信を行ったことに応じて商品登録情報がカート情報に登録される（即ち、商品の登録が確定される）までに行われるようにされてよい。一例として、接続情報コードの表示は、ステップＳ１１０２にて商品特定処理が実行されるタイミングに併せて行われてよい。 However, the display of the connection information code is performed until the product registration information is registered in the cart information (that is, the product registration is confirmed) in response to the transmission of the product pricing information, for example, in step S1113. You may be made to be. As an example, the display of the connection information code may be performed at the same time as the product identification process is executed in step S1102.
図３４の処理手順例のもとでは、１商品ごとに接続情報コードの表示が行われることで、登録態様の商品ごとに計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０とが接続するようにされている。しかしながら、計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０との接続は、一取引における複数の登録対象の商品に対応して１回行われるようにされてよい。一例として、例えば、計量値付け装置２１０は、一取引の値付けの完了に対応する操作が行われた段階で、一取引に対応する接続情報コードを表示させるようにしてよい。この場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、接続先の携帯端末２４０に対して、今回の一取引において登録された全ての商品の商品値付け情報を送信するようにされてよい。 Under the processing procedure example of FIG. 34, the connection information code is displayed for each product so that the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 are connected for each product in the registration mode. .. However, the connection between the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 may be made once corresponding to a plurality of products to be registered in one transaction. As an example, for example, the weighing pricing device 210 may display the connection information code corresponding to one transaction at the stage when the operation corresponding to the completion of the pricing of one transaction is performed. In this case, the weighing pricing device 210 may be configured to transmit the product pricing information of all the products registered in this one transaction to the mobile terminal 240 of the connection destination.
第２の実施形態の変形例として、ステップＳ１１０８、Ｓ１１０９の処理は省略されてよい。つまり、ステップＳ１１０６にて接続情報コードの表示開始から所定時間を経過した場合には、携帯端末２４０を利用しない客であるとして、接続要否確認画面を表示させることなく、そのままコード情報が印刷された単品ラベルを発行するようにされてよい。この場合には、接続情報コードの表示開始から所定時間を経過したことをトリガとして、ラベル発行操作が行われなくとも、コード情報が印刷された単品ラベルが発行されるようにしてよい。この際、接続情報コードは、接続情報コードの表示開始から所定時間を経過してラベルを発行することとなったタイミングで消去されてよい。例えば第２の実施形態の第１の例と同様に、ステップＳ１１１５における単品ラベルの発行についても、ステップＳ１１１４により受信確認通知が受信されたことをトリガとして、ラベル発行操作が行われなくとも、コード情報が印刷されない単品ラベルが発行されるようにしてよい。 As a modification of the second embodiment, the processing of steps S1108 and S1109 may be omitted. That is, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of displaying the connection information code in step S1106, the code information is printed as it is without displaying the connection necessity confirmation screen as a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240. It may be made to issue a single item label. In this case, a single item label on which the code information is printed may be issued even if the label issuing operation is not performed, with the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of displaying the connection information code as a trigger. At this time, the connection information code may be deleted at the timing when the label is issued after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of displaying the connection information code. For example, as in the first example of the second embodiment, with respect to the issuance of the single item label in step S1115, the code is issued even if the label issuance operation is not performed with the receipt confirmation notification being received in step S1114 as a trigger. A single label may be issued with no information printed on it.
第２の実施形態の他の変形例として、例えばステップＳ１１０８、Ｓ１１０９の処理を省略するとともに、ステップＳ１１０６において、所定時間が経過したか否かの判定に代えて、コード情報が印刷された単品ラベルの発行を指示するラベル発行操作が行われたか否かを判定するようにしてよい。 As another modification of the second embodiment, for example, the processing of steps S1108 and S1109 is omitted, and in step S1106, instead of determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed, a single product label on which code information is printed is printed. It may be determined whether or not a label issuing operation for instructing the issuance of is performed.
この場合、店員は、ステップＳ１１０５により接続情報コードが表示された状態において、客の様子により、あるいは客に問い合わせるなどして、客が携帯端末２４０を利用するつもりであるのか否かを確認する。そして、客が携帯端末２４０を利用するつもりのないことを確認した場合には、ラベル発行操作を行う。これにより、ステップＳ１１１０によりコード情報が印刷されない単品ラベルが発行される。 In this case, in the state where the connection information code is displayed in step S1105, the clerk confirms whether or not the customer intends to use the mobile terminal 240 depending on the state of the customer or by inquiring the customer. Then, when it is confirmed that the customer does not intend to use the mobile terminal 240, a label issuing operation is performed. As a result, a single item label on which the code information is not printed is issued in step S1110.
一方、店員は、客が携帯端末２４０を利用するつもりであることを確認した場合、客が携帯端末２４０に接続情報コードを読み取らせる操作を行うのを待てばよい。そして、客が携帯端末２４０に接続情報コードを読み取らせたことに応じて、ステップＳ１１１１以降の処理が実行されるようにしてよい。 On the other hand, when the clerk confirms that the customer intends to use the mobile terminal 240, he / she may wait for the customer to perform an operation of causing the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code. Then, the process after step S1111 may be executed according to the customer having the mobile terminal 240 read the connection information code.
接続要否確認画面は、接続情報コード表示ボタンＢＴ１を配置せず、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ２を配置させた態様であってもよい。この場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、登録対象の商品の価格が確定した後の所定のタイミングで、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に接続情報コードを表示させるとともに、店員用ディスプレイ２１０５に接続要否確認画面を表示させる。この場合、客は、携帯端末２４０を利用するのであれば、表示された接続情報コードを携帯端末２４０により読み取らせて、携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０との通信を接続させる。計量値付け装置２１０は、通信が確立されたことに応じて、接続要否確認画面と接続情報コードとを消去してよい。一方、客が携帯端末２４０を利用しない場合には、店員が、接続要否確認画面に配置されたラベル発行ボタンＢＴ２を操作する。ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ２が操作されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、登録対象の商品の値付け処理の結果が反映された単品ラベルを発行する。この場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ２が発行されたことに応じて、接続要否確認画面と接続情報コードとを消去してよい。 The connection necessity confirmation screen may have a mode in which the label issuing button BT2 is arranged instead of the connection information code display button BT1. In this case, the weighing pricing device 210 displays the connection information code on the customer display 2106 and displays the connection necessity confirmation screen on the clerk display 2105 at a predetermined timing after the price of the product to be registered is determined. Display it. In this case, if the customer uses the mobile terminal 240, the customer causes the mobile terminal 240 to read the displayed connection information code to connect the communication between the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210. The weighing and pricing device 210 may erase the connection necessity confirmation screen and the connection information code according to the establishment of communication. On the other hand, when the customer does not use the mobile terminal 240, the clerk operates the label issuing button BT2 arranged on the connection necessity confirmation screen. In response to the operation of the label issuing button BT2, the weighing pricing device 210 issues a single item label reflecting the result of the pricing process of the product to be registered. In this case, the weighing and pricing device 210 may erase the connection necessity confirmation screen and the connection information code in response to the label issuing button BT2 being issued.
続いて、第２の実施形態の第３の例を説明する。図３４に示した処理のように、携帯端末２４０を利用しない客に対応してコード情報が印刷された単品ラベルを発行するようにされた場合に以下のような状況となる可能性がある。 Subsequently, a third example of the second embodiment will be described. As in the process shown in FIG. 34, when a single item label on which the code information is printed is issued in response to a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240, the following situation may occur.
つまり、ステップＳ１１０８により表示される接続要否確認画面に対して接続不要に対応する操作を行ったものの、コード情報が印刷された単品ラベルが発行された後において、今回の取引に対応する客が携帯端末２４０を利用する客であることが改めて確認される場合がある。 That is, although the operation corresponding to the connection necessity confirmation screen displayed in step S1108 is performed, after the single item label on which the code information is printed is issued, the customer corresponding to this transaction It may be confirmed again that the customer is using the mobile terminal 240.
このような場合の対応として、店員は、同じ商品の値付けをし直す操作を行ったうえで、客には携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０とを通信可能に接続した状態としてもらい、商品登録が行われるようにすればよい。 As a countermeasure in such a case, the clerk performs an operation to re-price the same product, and then asks the customer to connect the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing pricing device 210 so as to be communicable. Registration should be done.
しかしながら、上記のような対応の場合、値付けのし直しをすることにより、店員は、同じ商品について値付けに応じた操作手順を２回繰り返すことなるので、取引を効率よく進めていくことの妨げとなる場合がある。特に、商品を計量する計量操作が必要になる場合は、風袋引きを置数入力する操作、または風袋プリセットキーから風袋を選択する操作等が必要にある。通常は、容器（トレイ）を計量したうえで、風袋引き操作を行った後に商品を計量するので、値付けのし直しとなった場合、例えば容器から商品を取り出してから再度計量を行うことにもなり、無駄な工数がかかる。 However, in the case of the above measures, by re-pricing, the clerk will repeat the operation procedure according to the pricing for the same product twice, so that the transaction can proceed efficiently. It may be an obstacle. In particular, when a weighing operation for weighing a product is required, an operation for inputting a tare number or an operation for selecting a tare from a tare preset key is required. Normally, after weighing the container (tray), the product is weighed after performing the tare operation, so if the price is re-priced, for example, the product will be taken out of the container and then weighed again. It also takes a lot of wasted man-hours.
第２の実施形態においては、コード情報が印刷された単品ラベルを発行した後であっても、値付けのし直しをすることなく、携帯端末２４０を利用する客に対応した商品登録が行えるように構成される。 In the second embodiment, even after issuing a single item label on which the code information is printed, product registration corresponding to the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 can be performed without re-price. It is composed of.
図３７のフローチャートは、第２の実施形態の計量値付け装置２１０が、一取引における値付けに対応して実行する処理手順例を示している。図３７において、図３４と同様の処理となるステップについては、同一符号を付し、説明を省略する。 The flowchart of FIG. 37 shows an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing and pricing device 210 of the second embodiment in response to pricing in one transaction. In FIG. 37, the steps that are the same as those in FIG. 34 are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.
ステップＳ１２１０：ステップＳ１１１０にてコード情報が印刷された単品ラベルを発行した後において、計量値付け装置２１０は、以下の処理を実行する。つまり、計量値付け装置２１０は、次の値付け対象の商品について品目を入力する操作が行われるまでの間もしくは値付け完了操作が行われるまでの間において、ラベル再発行指示操作が行われたか否かを判定する。 Step S1210: After issuing the single item label on which the code information is printed in step S1110, the weighing pricing device 210 executes the following processing. That is, has the weighing pricing device 210 performed the label reissue instruction operation until the operation of inputting the item for the next product to be priced or the operation of completing the pricing is performed? Judge whether or not.
店員は、単品ラベルが発行された後において、今回応対している客が携帯端末２４０を利用する客であったことを確認した場合に、ラベル再発行指示操作を行うようにされる。ラベル再発行指示操作は、例えば、店員用ディスプレイ２１０５において所定の位置に配置されるボタンに対する操作であってよい。あるいは、コード情報が印刷された単品ラベルが発行された後において店員用ディスプレイ２１０５においてラベル再発行指示操作を確認するダイアログウィンドウを表示するようにしたうえで、ダイアログウィンドウにおいて配置される所定のボタンを操作することによりラベル再発行指示操作が行われるようにされてよい。 After the single item label is issued, the clerk is made to perform the label reissue instruction operation when it is confirmed that the customer who is responding this time is the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240. The label reissue instruction operation may be, for example, an operation on a button arranged at a predetermined position on the clerk display 2105. Alternatively, after the single item label on which the code information is printed is issued, a dialog window for confirming the label reissue instruction operation is displayed on the clerk display 2105, and then a predetermined button arranged in the dialog window is displayed. The label reissue instruction operation may be performed by the operation.
ステップＳ１２１１：ラベル再発行指示操作が行われたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、コード情報の入力が可能な状態となる。そこで、店員は、ステップＳ１１１０により発行された単品ラベルのコード情報をスキャナ２１０４により読み取らせる操作を行う。計量値付け装置２１０は、スキャナ２１０４により読み取られたコード情報を取得する。コード情報が読み取られた単品ラベルは、店員により回収される。 Step S1211: In response to the label reissue instruction operation, the weighing and pricing device 210 is in a state where code information can be input. Therefore, the clerk performs an operation of having the scanner 2104 read the code information of the single item label issued in step S1110. The weighing and pricing device 210 acquires the code information read by the scanner 2104. The single item label from which the code information has been read is collected by the clerk.
店員は、スキャナ２１０４によりコード情報を読み取らせる操作に代えて、コード情報に対応する数値を入力する操作（置数）を行うようにされてもよい。 The clerk may be made to perform an operation (number of units) for inputting a numerical value corresponding to the code information instead of the operation of reading the code information by the scanner 2104.
計量値付け装置２１０は、ラベル再発行指示操作が行われたことに応じて、店員に向けて、発行された単品ラベルのコード情報を読み取らせる操作を行ってもらうための案内を行ってよい。このような案内は、店員用ディスプレイ２１０５における表示や、音声出力等によって行われてよい。 The weighing pricing device 210 may guide the clerk to perform an operation of reading the code information of the issued single item label in response to the label reissue instruction operation. Such guidance may be performed by display on the clerk display 2105, audio output, or the like.
図３８は、単品ラベルのコード情報を入力する操作を行ってもらうための案内として店員用ディスプレイ２１０５に表示される、コード情報読取案内画面の一例を示している。 FIG. 38 shows an example of a code information reading guide screen displayed on the clerk display 2105 as a guide for performing an operation for inputting the code information of the single item label.
コード情報読取案内画面においては、店員に、単品ラベルに印刷されたコード情報を入力（スキャナ２１０４による読み取り、もしくは置数）する操作を案内するメッセージが表示されるとともに、確認ボタンＢＴ３が配置されている。店員は、確認ボタンＢＴ３を操作したうえで、単品ラベルに印刷されたコード情報を入力する操作を行う。 On the code information reading guidance screen, a message is displayed to the clerk to guide the operation of inputting the code information printed on the single item label (scanning by the scanner 2104 or the number of units), and the confirmation button BT3 is arranged. There is. The clerk operates the confirmation button BT3 and then inputs the code information printed on the single item label.
説明を図３７に戻す。ステップＳ１２２２：計量値付け装置２１０は、接続情報コードを客用ディスプレイ２１０６に表示させる。ステップＳ１２２２の処理の後は、ステップＳ１１１１に処理が移行する。 The description is returned to FIG. Step S1222: The weighing and pricing device 210 causes the connection information code to be displayed on the customer display 2106. After the process of step S1222, the process shifts to step S1111.
この場合の客は、ステップＳ１２２２により表示された接続情報コードを自分の携帯端末２４０により読み取らせる操作を行うようにされる。これにより、携帯端末２４０は計量値付け装置２１０と通信可能に接続するための接続処理を実行する。この際、計量値付け装置１０は、ステップＳ１１１１~Ｓ１１１５以降の処理を実行する。つまり、コード情報が印刷された単品ラベルに対応する商品は、改めて、ステップＳ１１１３にて商品値付け情報として送信されることで、取引管理サーバ２５０にてカート情報に登録される。つまり、携帯端末２４０を利用する取引において登録された商品として扱われる。 In this case, the customer is made to perform an operation of having his / her mobile terminal 240 read the connection information code displayed in step S1222. As a result, the mobile terminal 240 executes a connection process for communicably connecting to the weighing and pricing device 210. At this time, the weighing and pricing device 10 executes the processes after steps S1111 to S1115. That is, the product corresponding to the single product label on which the code information is printed is registered in the cart information on the transaction management server 250 by being transmitted again as the product pricing information in step S1113. That is, it is treated as a registered product in a transaction using the mobile terminal 240.
単品ラベルのコード情報に取引番号を含めるようにされている場合には、計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ１２１１で読み取ったコード情報を含む単品ラベルの再発行と、取引番号を含む商品値付け情報の携帯端末２４０への送信を行うようにしてよい。 When the code information of the single item label includes the transaction number, the weighing pricing device 210 reissues the single item label including the code information read in step S1211, and the product pricing information including the transaction number. May be transmitted to the mobile terminal 240.
一方、例えば、単品ラベルのコード情報に品番と金額の情報は含まれるが取引番号は含まれないような場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、当該商品の重量単価（例えば、商品マスタから取得してもよいし、店員が入力してもよい）と、ステップＳ１２１１で読み取ったコード情報に含まれる金額から重量を算出したうえで、単品ラベルを再発行してもよい。 On the other hand, for example, when the code information of the single item label includes the item number and the amount of money information but not the transaction number, the weighing pricing device 210 obtains the weight unit price of the item (for example, from the item master). Alternatively, the store clerk may input the weight), and after calculating the weight from the amount of money included in the code information read in step S1211, the single item label may be reissued.
精算は、例えば商品の品番と金額との情報が利用して行えることから、計量値付け装置２１０は、少なくとも対応の商品の品番と金額との情報を携帯端末２４０に送信してもよい。 Since the settlement can be performed using, for example, information on the product number and the amount of the product, the weighing and pricing device 210 may transmit at least the information on the product number and the amount of the corresponding product to the mobile terminal 240.
さらに、第２の実施形態の販売システムにおける所定の装置においてラベル発行履歴を記憶するようにされてよい。この場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、例えばステップＳ１２１１により読み取られたコード情報に含まれる所定の情報を検索キーとして、記憶されたラベル発行履歴のうちから該当のラベル発行履歴を検索し、検索されたラベル発行履歴を、商品値付け情報として送信してよい。 Further, the label issuance history may be stored in a predetermined device in the sales system of the second embodiment. In this case, the weighing and pricing device 210 searches for the corresponding label issuance history from the stored label issuance history by using the predetermined information included in the code information read in step S1211, for example, as a search key. The label issuance history may be transmitted as product pricing information.
＜第２の実施形態の第４の例＞ <Fourth Example of Second Embodiment>
続いて、第２の実施形態の第４の例を説明する。 Subsequently, a fourth example of the second embodiment will be described.
先の第２の実施形態の第１の例では、計量値付け装置２１０は、一取引において１商品の値付けが確定されるごとに、１商品に対応する単品ラベルを発行するようにされていた。 In the first example of the second embodiment above, the weighing pricing device 210 is configured to issue a single item label corresponding to one item each time the price of one item is confirmed in one transaction. rice field.
これに対して、第２の実施形態の計量値付け装置２１０は、一取引の値付けが完了したことに応じて、一取引において値付けされた商品の金額の総額を示す内容が印刷された加算ラベルを発行する。 On the other hand, the weighing and pricing device 210 of the second embodiment is printed with a content indicating the total amount of the priced goods in one transaction in response to the completion of the pricing in one transaction. Issue an additional label.
図３９は、加算ラベルの一態様例を示している。図３９に示されるように、一取引において値付けが確定された３つの商品の名称、各商品の価格、各商品の価格の総額等が印刷されている。 FIG. 39 shows an example of one aspect of the addition label. As shown in FIG. 39, the names of the three products whose prices have been confirmed in one transaction, the prices of each product, the total price of each product, and the like are printed.
加算ラベルにはコード情報（例えば、バーコード）が印刷されている。第２の実施形態において加算ラベルのバーコードに印刷される情報は、計量値付け装置２１０が一取引における商品の値付け処理に対応して取得可能な情報であれば特に限定されない。加算ラベルのコード情報は、例えば、計量値付け装置２１０が配置された売り場が対応する部門コード、商品の価格の総額の情報を示すものであってよい。 Code information (for example, a barcode) is printed on the addition label. The information printed on the bar code of the addition label in the second embodiment is not particularly limited as long as it is information that can be acquired by the weighing and pricing device 210 in response to the pricing process of the goods in one transaction. The code information of the addition label may indicate, for example, information on the department code corresponding to the sales floor where the weighing pricing device 210 is arranged and the total price of the product.
さらに、加算ラベルのコード情報は、取引識別子と、一取引において値付けが確定された商品ごとの情報を含むようにされてよい。このような加算ラベルのコード情報であれば、例えば返品等の精算処理後の取引実績の訂正を行うにあたり、加算ラベルのコード情報を精算装置２２０等に読み取らせることで、取引実績を呼び出して訂正を行える。一取引における量り売り商品の検品も加算ラベルのコード情報を精算装置２２０等に読み取らせることで可能となる。 Further, the code information of the addition label may include the transaction identifier and the information for each product whose price has been confirmed in one transaction. With such code information of the addition label, for example, when correcting the transaction record after the settlement process such as returned goods, the transaction record is called and corrected by having the settlement device 220 or the like read the code information of the addition label. Can be done. Inspection of products sold by weight in one transaction is also possible by having the settlement device 220 or the like read the code information of the addition label.
第２の実施形態における計量値付け装置２１０の処理手順の例を、図３１に基づき説明する。 An example of the processing procedure of the weighing and pricing device 210 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
第２の実施形態の計量値付け装置２１０の処理手順において、まず、図３１におけるステップＳ１０８が省略されてよい。そのうえで、ステップＳ１０９にて一取引に応じた商品の値付けの完了したことが判定された後に、加算ラベルを発行するステップが追加される。 In the processing procedure of the weighing and pricing device 210 of the second embodiment, first, step S108 in FIG. 31 may be omitted. Then, after it is determined in step S109 that the pricing of the product corresponding to one transaction has been completed, a step of issuing an addition label is added.
計量値付け装置２１０は、商品の値付けが確定されるごとに単品ラベルを発行するとともに、一取引の値付けが完了したことに応じて加算ラベルを発行するようにされてもよい。 The weighing pricing device 210 may be configured to issue a single item label each time the price of a product is confirmed, and to issue an additional label when the price of one transaction is completed.
このように、加算ラベルとともに、値付けが確定された商品ごとの単品ラベルも発行するにあたり、加算ラベルのコード情報に、取引識別子と一取引において値付けが確定された商品ごとの情報とを含めるようにした場合には、単品ラベルについてはコード情報の印刷は省略されてよい。 In this way, when issuing a single item label for each product whose price has been confirmed together with the addition label, the code information of the addition label includes the transaction identifier and the information for each product whose price has been confirmed in one transaction. In this case, printing of the code information may be omitted for the single product label.
第２の実施形態の第４の例を第２の実施形態の第２の例や第２の実施形態の第３の例に適用する場合には、以下のように構成されてよい。 When the fourth example of the second embodiment is applied to the second example of the second embodiment and the third example of the second embodiment, it may be configured as follows.
例えば図３４または図３７のフローチャートを基とした場合、ステップＳ１１１０、Ｓ１１１５の処理は省略される。そのうえで、ステップＳ１１１７にて一取引に応じた商品の値付けの完了したことが判定された後に、加算ラベルを発行するステップが追加される。 For example, based on the flowchart of FIG. 34 or FIG. 37, the processes of steps S1110 and S1115 are omitted. Then, after it is determined in step S1117 that the pricing of the product corresponding to one transaction has been completed, a step of issuing an addition label is added.
この場合、加算ラベルを発行するステップとしては、これまで携帯端末２４０が計量値付け装置２１０と接続されていない場合にはコード情報が印刷された加算ラベルを発行し、接続されていない場合にはコード情報が印刷されない加算ラベルを発行するようにされてよい。 In this case, as a step of issuing the addition label, if the mobile terminal 240 has not been connected to the weighing and pricing device 210, the addition label with the code information printed is issued, and if it is not connected, the addition label is issued. An additional label may be issued in which the code information is not printed.
続いて、第２の実施形態の第５の例を説明する。 Subsequently, a fifth example of the second embodiment will be described.
図４０は、第２の実施形態の販売システムの構成例を示している。図４０において、図１９と同一部分については同一符号を付して説明を省略する。 FIG. 40 shows a configuration example of the sales system of the second embodiment. In FIG. 40, the same parts as those in FIG. 19 are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.
販売システムにおいては、計量販売管理サーバ６０がさらに備えられる。計量販売管理サーバ６０は、計量値付け装置２１０のそれぞれと通信可能に接続される。計量販売管理サーバ６０は、取引管理サーバ２５０と通信可能に接続される。 In the sales system, a measurement sales management server 60 is further provided. The weighing and sales management server 60 is communicably connected to each of the weighing and pricing devices 210. The mass sales management server 60 is communicably connected to the transaction management server 250.
計量販売管理サーバ６０は、計量値付け装置２１０により実行された値付け処理の結果が反映された商品値付け情報を管理する。 The weighing and sales management server 60 manages product pricing information that reflects the result of the pricing process executed by the weighing and pricing device 210.
計量販売管理サーバ６０の構成は、図２５の取引管理サーバ２５０と同様に、ＣＰＵ、記憶部、ＲＡＭ及び通信部を備える構成であってよい。 Similar to the transaction management server 250 of FIG. 25, the mass sales management server 60 may be configured to include a CPU, a storage unit, a RAM, and a communication unit.
図４１のシーケンス図を参照して、第２の実施形態の計量値付け装置２１０、携帯端末２４０、取引管理サーバ２５０及び計量販売管理サーバ６０が、一取引における商品登録に関連して実行する処理手順例を説明する。 With reference to the sequence diagram of FIG. 41, the processing executed by the weighing pricing device 210, the mobile terminal 240, the transaction management server 250, and the weighing sales management server 60 of the second embodiment in connection with the product registration in one transaction. A procedure example will be described.
ステップＳ１００１：計量値付け装置２１０は、店員の商品値付けの操作に応じて、１商品に対応する値付け処理を実行する。 Step S1001: The weighing and pricing device 210 executes a pricing process corresponding to one product in response to the product pricing operation of the clerk.
ステップＳ１００２：計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ１００１により商品の値付けが確定されると、確定された商品の値付け処理の結果が示される商品値付け情報を計量販売管理サーバ６０に送信する。送信される商品値付け情報には、当該商品値付け情報を一意に識別する商品値付け情報識別子が含まれる。 Step S1002: When the price of the product is confirmed in step S1001, the weighing and pricing device 210 transmits the product pricing information indicating the result of the price processing of the confirmed product to the weighing and sales management server 60. The transmitted product pricing information includes a product pricing information identifier that uniquely identifies the product pricing information.
ステップＳ１００３：計量販売管理サーバ６０は、ステップＳ１００２により送信された商品値付け情報を受信すると、受信された商品値付け情報の内容が反映された商品登録情報を記憶する。記憶される商品登録情報には、受信された商品値付け情報の商品値付け情報識別子が対応付けられる。 Step S1003: When the weighing and sales management server 60 receives the product pricing information transmitted in step S1002, it stores the product registration information reflecting the contents of the received product pricing information. The stored product registration information is associated with the product pricing information identifier of the received product pricing information.
ステップＳ１００４：ステップＳ１００１による値付け処理を実行したことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ１００２の商品値付け情報の送信とともに、接続情報コードを客用ディスプレイ２１０６に表示させる。ここで表示される接続情報コードには、携帯端末２４０が取引管理サーバ２５０と通信可能に接続するための制御情報が含まれる。接続情報コードには、ステップＳ１００２により送信された商品値付け情報を一意に識別する商品値付け情報識別子が含まれる。 Step S1004: In response to the execution of the pricing process according to step S1001, the weighing pricing device 210 transmits the product pricing information in step S1002 and displays the connection information code on the customer display 2106. The connection information code displayed here includes control information for the mobile terminal 240 to connect to the transaction management server 250 in a communicable manner. The connection information code includes a product pricing information identifier that uniquely identifies the product pricing information transmitted in step S1002.
ステップＳ１００５：携帯端末２４０は商品登録画面を表示して、コードの読み取りが可能な状態にある。そこで、客は、携帯端末２４０を操作して、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に表示された接続情報コードを携帯端末２４０により読み取らせる操作を行う。 Step S1005: The mobile terminal 240 displays the product registration screen and is in a state where the code can be read. Therefore, the customer operates the mobile terminal 240 to have the mobile terminal 240 read the connection information code displayed on the customer display 2106.
ステップＳ１００６：携帯端末２４０は、ステップＳ１００５により読み取った接続情報コードに含まれる制御情報に基づく接続手順に従って、取引管理サーバ２５０との間で接続処理を実行する。 Step S1006: The mobile terminal 240 executes a connection process with the transaction management server 250 according to a connection procedure based on the control information included in the connection information code read in step S1005.
ステップＳ１００７：携帯端末２４０は、ステップＳ１００６の接続処理によって取引管理サーバ２５０との接続か確立されると、ステップＳ１００５により読み取った接続情報に含まれていた商品値付け情報識別子を取引管理サーバ２５０に対して送信する。 Step S1007: When the connection with the transaction management server 250 is established by the connection process of step S1006, the mobile terminal 240 transfers the product pricing information identifier included in the connection information read in step S1005 to the transaction management server 250. Send to.
ステップＳ１００８：ステップＳ１００７により商品値付け情報識別子を受信した取引管理サーバ２５０は、受信された商品値付け情報識別子を含む商品登録情報要求を、計量販売管理サーバ６０に送信する。 Step S1008: The transaction management server 250 that has received the product pricing information identifier in step S1007 transmits a product registration information request including the received product pricing information identifier to the measurement sales management server 60.
ステップＳ１００９：商品登録情報要求を受信したことに応じて、計量販売管理サーバ６０は、自己が記憶する商品登録情報のうちから、受信された商品登録情報要求に含まれるのと商品値付け情報識別子が対応付けられた商品登録情報を検索する。計量販売管理サーバ６０は、検索された商品登録情報を取引管理サーバ２５０に送信する。 Step S1009: In response to receiving the product registration information request, the weighing and sales management server 60 includes the received product registration information request from the product registration information stored by itself and the product pricing information identifier. Search for the product registration information associated with. The measurement sales management server 60 transmits the searched product registration information to the transaction management server 250.
ステップＳ１０１０：取引管理サーバ２５０は、受信された商品登録情報を、カート情報に登録する。 Step S1010: The transaction management server 250 registers the received product registration information in the cart information.
ステップＳ１０１１：ステップＳ１０１０により取引管理サーバ２５０にて商品登録情報がカート情報に登録されたことで、計量値付け装置２１０にてステップＳ１００１により値付け処理が行われた１商品についての商品登録が完了したことになる。そこで、取引管理サーバ２５０は、携帯端末２４０に対して、登録完了通知を送信する。 Step S1011: Since the product registration information is registered in the cart information on the transaction management server 250 in step S1010, the product registration for one product that has been priced in step S1001 on the weighing pricing device 210 is completed. That's what I did. Therefore, the transaction management server 250 transmits a registration completion notification to the mobile terminal 240.
登録完了通知を受信した携帯端末２４０は、例えば今回読み取った接続情報コードに対応して計量値付け装置２１０にて実行された値付け処理の対象とされた１商品についての商品登録が完了したことを客に向けて報知する表示等を行ってよい。 The mobile terminal 240 that has received the registration completion notification has completed the product registration for one product subject to the pricing process executed by the weighing and pricing device 210 in response to the connection information code read this time, for example. May be displayed to notify the customer.
ステップＳ１０１２：取引管理サーバ２５０は、ステップＳ１００９により送信された商品登録情報が正常に受信されたことを示す受信確認通知を、計量販売管理サーバ６０に送信する。受信確認通知には、対応の商品登録情報を識別する商品値付け情報識別子が含まれる。 Step S1012: The transaction management server 250 transmits a reception confirmation notification indicating that the product registration information transmitted in step S1009 has been normally received to the measurement sales management server 60. The receipt confirmation notification includes a product pricing information identifier that identifies the corresponding product registration information.
ステップＳ１０１３：計量販売管理サーバ６０は、ステップＳ１０１２により送信された受信確認通知の受信に応じて、自己が記憶する商品登録情報のうち、受信確認通知に含まれる商品値付け情報識別子により示される商品登録情報について、送信済みであることが示されるように管理する。 Step S1013: The weighing and sales management server 60 receives the receipt confirmation notification transmitted in step S1012, and among the product registration information stored by itself, the product indicated by the product pricing information identifier included in the reception confirmation notification. Manage the registration information so that it is shown to have been sent.
ステップＳ１０１４：ステップＳ１０１３の処理の後、計量販売管理サーバ６０は、ステップＳ１００２による商品値付け情報の送信元の計量値付け装置２１０に対して、登録完了通知を送信する。 Step S1014: After the process of step S1013, the weighing and sales management server 60 transmits a registration completion notification to the weighing and pricing device 210 that is the source of the product pricing information according to step S1002.
ステップＳ１０１５：ステップＳ１０１４により送信された登録完了通知を受信に応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ１００１による値付け処理の結果が反映された単品ラベルを発行させる。 Step S1015: In response to receiving the registration completion notification transmitted in step S1014, the weighing pricing device 210 causes the weighing pricing device 210 to issue a single item label reflecting the result of the pricing process in step S1001.
ステップＳ１０１５−１：ステップＳ１０１４により送信された登録完了通知を受信に応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ１００４により表示させた接続情報コードを消去する。 Step S1015-1: In response to receiving the registration completion notification transmitted in step S1014, the weighing pricing device 210 erases the connection information code displayed in step S1004.
ステップＳ１００１~Ｓ１０１５の処理は「ループ処理１」とされ、一取引に対応して客からの購入対象の量り売り商品の指定に応じて、１商品ごとの商品値付け操作が計量値付け装置２１０に対して行われるごとに、繰り返し実行される。 The processing of steps S1001 to S1015 is referred to as "loop processing 1", and the product pricing operation for each product is performed on the weighing pricing device 210 according to the designation of the product for sale by weight from the customer in response to one transaction. Every time it is done, it is executed repeatedly.
ステップＳ１０１６：店員は、一取引に対応して客が指定する商品の全てについて値付けを完了したことを確認すると、一取引に対応する値付け完了を宣言する操作（値付け完 Step S1016: When the clerk confirms that the pricing has been completed for all the products specified by the customer in response to one transaction, the operation of declaring the completion of pricing corresponding to one transaction (price completion).
了操作）を計量値付け装置２１０に対して行う。値付け完了操作が行われたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、一取引に対応する商品の値付けが完了したと判定する。 The completion operation) is performed on the weighing and pricing device 210. In response to the pricing completion operation, the weighing pricing device 210 determines that the pricing of the goods corresponding to one transaction has been completed.
ステップＳ１０１７：一取引に対応する商品の値付けが完了したと判定されると、計量値付け装置２１０は、値付け完了通知を、計量販売管理サーバ６０に送信する。値付け完了通知は、一取引に対応する全商品についての値付け処理が完了したことを示す。 Step S1017: When it is determined that the pricing of the product corresponding to one transaction is completed, the weighing pricing device 210 transmits the pricing completion notification to the weighing sales management server 60. The pricing completion notification indicates that the pricing process for all the products corresponding to one transaction has been completed.
ステップＳ１０１８：ステップＳ１０１７により送信された値付け完了通知を受信したことに応じて、計量販売管理サーバ６０は、取引管理サーバ２５０に対して値付け完了通知を送信する（転送でもよい）。 Step S1018: In response to receiving the pricing completion notification transmitted in step S1017, the weighing sales management server 60 transmits the pricing completion notification to the transaction management server 250 (may be forwarding).
ステップＳ１０１９：ステップＳ１０１８により送信された値付け完了通知を受信したことに応じて、取引管理サーバ２５０は、携帯端末２４０に対して値付け完了通知を送信する（転送でもよい）。値付け完了通知を受信した携帯端末２４０は、例えば図３０Ｄの精算案内画面を表示してよい。当該ステップＳ１０１９により、携帯端末２４０にて値付け完了通知が受信されたことに応じて、例えば携帯端末２４０と取引管理サーバ２５０との接続が切断されるように処理が実行されてよい。 Step S1019: In response to receiving the pricing completion notification transmitted in step S1018, the transaction management server 250 transmits the pricing completion notification to the mobile terminal 240 (may be forwarding). The mobile terminal 240 that has received the pricing completion notification may display, for example, the settlement guidance screen of FIG. 30D. In step S1019, the process may be executed so that, for example, the connection between the mobile terminal 240 and the transaction management server 250 is disconnected in response to the receipt of the pricing completion notification on the mobile terminal 240.
第２の実施形態において、接続情報コードの消去は、例えば取引管理サーバ２５０がステップＳ１００６の接続処理によって携帯端末２４０と接続を確立させたことに応じて行われてもよい。この場合、接続情報コードは、対応の計量値付け装置２１０を識別する計量値付け装置識別情報を含む。携帯端末２４０は、取引管理サーバ２５０と通信を確立した際に、接続情報コードに含まれていた計量値付け装置識別情報を取引管理サーバ２５０に送信する。取引管理サーバ２５０は、受信された計量値付け装置識別情報が示す計量値付け装置２１０に接続確立通知を送信する。計量値付け装置２１０は、接続確立通知の受信に応じて、接続情報コードを消去する。 In the second embodiment, the erasure of the connection information code may be performed, for example, in response to the transaction management server 250 establishing a connection with the mobile terminal 240 by the connection process of step S1006. In this case, the connection information code includes weighing device identification information that identifies the corresponding weighing device 210. When the mobile terminal 240 establishes communication with the transaction management server 250, the mobile terminal 240 transmits the weighing and pricing device identification information included in the connection information code to the transaction management server 250. The transaction management server 250 transmits a connection establishment notification to the weighing and pricing device 210 indicated by the received weighing and pricing device identification information. The weighing and pricing device 210 erases the connection information code in response to the reception of the connection establishment notification.
あるいは、接続情報コードの消去は、ステップＳ１０１０によりカート情報への商品登録が行われたことに応じて行われてもよい。この場合にも、接続情報コードは、対応の計量値付け装置２１０を識別する計量値付け装置識別情報を含む。携帯端末２４０は、取引管理サーバ２５０と通信を確立した際に、接続情報コードに含まれていた計量値付け装置識別情報を取引管理サーバ２５０に送信する。取引管理サーバ２５０は、受信された計量値付け装置識別情報を記憶する。取引管理サーバ２５０は、ステップＳ１０１０によるカート情報への商品の登録が完了すると、ステップＳ１０１１にて、携帯端末２４０だけではなく、記憶された計量値付け装置識別情報が示す計量値付け装置２１０にも登録完了通知を送信する。計量値付け装置２１０は、登録完了通知の受信に応じて、接続情報コードを消去する。 Alternatively, the connection information code may be deleted in response to the product registration in the cart information in step S1010. Again, the connection information code includes weighing device identification information that identifies the corresponding weighing device 210. When the mobile terminal 240 establishes communication with the transaction management server 250, the mobile terminal 240 transmits the weighing and pricing device identification information included in the connection information code to the transaction management server 250. The transaction management server 250 stores the received weighing and pricing device identification information. When the transaction management server 250 completes the registration of the product in the cart information in step S1010, the transaction management server 250 not only in the mobile terminal 240 but also in the weighing pricing device 210 indicated by the stored weighing pricing device identification information in step S1011. Send a registration completion notification. The weighing pricing device 210 erases the connection information code in response to the receipt of the registration completion notification.
あるいは、計量値付け装置２１０は、一取引の値付けにおける１つ目の商品の値付け処理に対応して接続情報コードの表示を開始させると、以降は表示を継続させ、当該一取引の値付けが完了したことに応じて消去されるようにしてよい。 Alternatively, when the weighing pricing device 210 starts displaying the connection information code in response to the pricing process of the first product in the pricing of one transaction, the display is continued thereafter, and the value of the one transaction is displayed. It may be erased when the attachment is completed.
第２の実施形態においては、計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０とは直接通信可能に接続されないが、計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０とがそれぞれ計量販売管理サーバ６０、取引管理サーバ２５０と接続されるとともに、計量販売管理サーバ６０と取引管理サーバ２５０とが相互に通信を行うようにされている。これにより、処理により、計量値付け装置２１０が、計量販売管理サーバ６０から、商品値付けに対応する商品登録情報のカート情報への登録が完了したことの通知（即ち、ステップＳ１０１４により送信される登録完了通知）が受信されたことに応じて、単品ラベルを発行することができる。この場合にも、計量値付け装置２１０から商品値付け情報を送信したにもかかわらず、取引管理サーバ２５０にて対応の商品登録情報がカート情報に登録されなかった場合には、計量値付け装置２１０は、単品ラベルを発行しない。これにより、計量値付け装置２１０においては、対応の商品登録情報がカート情報に登録された値付け対象の商品の単品ラベルのみが発行される。 In the second embodiment, the weighing and pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 are not directly connected to each other so as to be able to communicate directly with each other, but the weighing and pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 are connected to the weighing and sales management server 60 and the transaction management server 250, respectively. At the same time as being connected, the mass sales management server 60 and the transaction management server 250 communicate with each other. As a result, due to the process, the weighing and selling management server 60 notifies that the weighing and selling management server 60 has completed the registration of the product registration information corresponding to the product pricing in the cart information (that is, is transmitted in step S1014). A single item label can be issued in response to the receipt of the registration completion notification). In this case as well, if the corresponding product registration information is not registered in the cart information on the transaction management server 250 even though the product pricing information is transmitted from the weighing pricing device 210, the weighing pricing device 210 does not issue a single item label. As a result, in the weighing pricing device 210, only the single product label of the product to be priced whose corresponding product registration information is registered in the cart information is issued.
この場合、店員と客は、単品ラベルが発行されたことにより、値付け処理の対象とされた商品のカート情報への登録が正常に行われたことを確認できることになる。第２の実施形態の場合には、客は、登録完了通知の受信（ステップＳ１０１１）に応じて携帯端末２４０にて行われる報知によっても、値付け処理の対象とされた商品のカート情報への登録が正常に行われたことを確認できる。 In this case, the clerk and the customer can confirm that the product subject to the pricing process has been normally registered in the cart information by issuing the single item label. In the case of the second embodiment, the customer can also obtain the cart information of the product subject to the pricing process by the notification performed on the mobile terminal 240 in response to the reception of the registration completion notification (step S1011). You can confirm that the registration was successful.
第２の実施形態の第２の例や第２の実施形態の第３の例の構成は第２の実施形態にも適用できる。この場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、図３４または図３７のフローチャートと同様の処理を実行すればよい。 The configuration of the second example of the second embodiment and the third example of the second embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment. In this case, the weighing and pricing device 210 may perform the same processing as the flowchart of FIG. 34 or FIG. 37.
第２の実施形態の変形例として、第２の実施形態の第２の例を適用して、計量値付け装置２１０が、一取引の値付けが完了したことに応じて、一取引において値付けされた商品の金額の総額を示す内容が印刷された加算ラベルを発行するようにしてもよい。あるいは、計量値付け装置２１０は、商品の値付けが確定されるごとに単品ラベルを発行するとともに、一取引の値付けが完了したことに応じて加算ラベルを発行するようにされてもよい。 As a modification of the second embodiment, applying the second example of the second embodiment, the weighing and pricing device 210 prices in one transaction in response to the completion of pricing in one transaction. An additional label may be issued with a printed content indicating the total amount of the goods sold. Alternatively, the weighing and pricing device 210 may be configured to issue a single item label each time the pricing of a product is finalized, and issue an additional label when the pricing of one transaction is completed.
以下、第２の実施形態の第１の例から第５の例の変形例を説明する。 Hereinafter, modified examples of the first to fifth examples of the second embodiment will be described.
［第１変形例］ [First modification]
量り売り商品には不定貫商品と定貫商品とがある。不定貫商品は、重量単価が定められており、客が任意の重量（あるいは個数）で購入できる商品である。不定貫商品は、商品について計測された重量と重量単価とを乗算することにより価格が算出される。 There are two types of products sold by weight: indefinite products and fixed products. An indefinite product is a product that has a fixed weight unit price and can be purchased by a customer with an arbitrary weight (or quantity). The price of an indefinite product is calculated by multiplying the weight measured for the product by the unit weight.
定貫商品は、単位個数あたりの重量と単価とが定められた商品であり、客が個数を決めて購入する商品である。 A fixed-price product is a product in which the weight per unit number and the unit price are determined, and the customer decides the number of products to purchase.
上記各実施形態における計量値付け装置２１０は、不定貫商品に対応して値付け処理を実行する例を挙げたが、定貫商品に対応して値付け処理が可能なようにされてよい。計量値付け装置１０は、定貫商品の場合には、計量部２１０９が計量した重量を重量単価で除算することにより購入個数を算出し、算出された個数と単価とを乗算して価格を算出するようにされる。 Although the weighing pricing device 210 in each of the above embodiments gives an example of executing the pricing process corresponding to the indefinite product, the pricing process may be enabled in response to the indefinite product. In the case of a fixed-price product, the weighing pricing device 10 calculates the number of purchased items by dividing the weight measured by the measuring unit 2109 by the weight unit price, and calculates the price by multiplying the calculated number and the unit price. Be made to do.
［第２変形例］ [Second modification]
上記各実施形態において、値付け対象（登録対象）の商品の品目の入力は、計量値付け装置２１０の店員用ディスプレイ２１０５におけるプリセットキーに対する操作以外の態様によって行われてよい。 In each of the above embodiments, the input of the item of the product to be priced (registered target) may be performed by an mode other than the operation for the preset key on the clerk display 2105 of the weighing pricing device 210.
例えば、計量値付け装置２１０に値付け対象の商品を撮像する撮像部を設け、撮像部により撮像された画像の解析結果に基づいて、計量値付け装置２１０が値付け対象の商品の品目を特定可能なようにされてよい。例えば取引管理サーバ２５０が、商品が撮像された画像を計量値付け装置２１０から受信し、受信された画像を解析した結果に基づいて値付け対象の商品の品目を特定し、特定された商品の品目を取引管理サーバ２５０から計量値付け装置２１０に通知するようにされてもよい。 For example, the weighing pricing device 210 is provided with an imaging unit that images the product to be priced, and the weighing pricing device 210 identifies the item of the product to be priced based on the analysis result of the image captured by the imaging unit. It may be made possible. For example, the transaction management server 250 receives an image of the product captured from the weighing pricing device 210, identifies the item of the product to be priced based on the result of analyzing the received image, and of the specified product. The item may be notified from the transaction management server 250 to the weighing and pricing device 210.
この場合には、店員が、計量値付け装置２１０の撮像部に値付け対象の商品を撮像させることにより、計量値付け装置２１０は、撮像部により撮像された商品の品目を、値付け対象の商品の品目として入力する。 In this case, the store clerk causes the imaging unit of the weighing and pricing device 210 to image the product to be priced, and the weighing and pricing device 210 sets the item of the product imaged by the imaging unit to be priced. Enter as an item of goods.
例えば陳列された量り売り商品ごとに対応して、店員側に対応する位置にタグ装置が配置されてよい。タグ装置は、計量値付け装置２１０と有線または無線により通信可能に接続される。タグ装置は、対応の量り売り商品を示す商品情報を記憶する。タグ装置は、タッチセンサを備えることにより、タッチ操作により接触されたことを検出することができる。 For example, the tag device may be arranged at a position corresponding to the clerk side corresponding to each of the displayed products sold by weight. The tag device is communicably connected to the weighing and pricing device 210 by wire or wirelessly. The tag device stores product information indicating the corresponding products sold by weight. By providing the tag device with a touch sensor, it is possible to detect that the tag device has been touched by a touch operation.
この場合、店員は、例えば客から購入対象として伝えられた商品に対応するタグ装置に対してタッチ操作を行う。タッチ操作を検出したタグ装置は、自己が記憶する商品情報を計量値付け装置２１０に送信する。計量値付け装置２１０は、受信された商品情報を利用して、値付け対象の商品の品目を入力する。 In this case, the clerk performs a touch operation on the tag device corresponding to the product, for example, which is informed by the customer as the purchase target. The tag device that detects the touch operation transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210. The weighing pricing device 210 uses the received product information to input the item of the product to be priced.
タグ装置は、陳列された量り売り商品ごとに対応して客がタッチ操作を可能な位置に設けられてよい。この場合には、客自身が、購入対象の商品に対応するタグ装置に対してタッチ操作を行うようにされる。 The tag device may be provided at a position where the customer can perform a touch operation corresponding to each of the displayed products sold by weight. In this case, the customer himself / herself is made to perform a touch operation on the tag device corresponding to the product to be purchased.
量り売り商品が収納される什器からの商品の取り出しが行われることに伴って動く蓋、レバー等の部位に、動きを検出する動きセンサを設けてよい。動きセンサによる動きの検出は、例えば加速度センサ等により実現できる、対応の量り売り商品を示す商品情報を記憶する。動きセンサは、動きを検出したことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０に自己が記憶する商品情報を送信する。 A motion sensor that detects movement may be provided at a part such as a lid or a lever that moves as the product is taken out from the fixture in which the product sold by weight is stored. The motion detection by the motion sensor stores the product information indicating the corresponding merchandise sold by weight, which can be realized by, for example, an acceleration sensor or the like. The motion sensor transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210 in response to detecting the motion.
この場合、店員は、例えば客から購入対象として伝えられた商品を、陳列された商品のうちから取り出す。商品の取り出しが行われたことに応じて、購入対象の商品に対応する動きセンサは、動きを検出する。動きセンサは、動きを検出したことに応じて、自己が記憶する商品情報を計量値付け装置２１０に送信する。計量値付け装置２１０は、受信された商品情報を利用して、値付け対象の商品の品目を入力する。 In this case, the clerk takes out, for example, the product that the customer has informed as a purchase target from the displayed products. The motion sensor corresponding to the product to be purchased detects the movement in response to the product being taken out. The motion sensor transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210 in response to detecting the motion. The weighing pricing device 210 uses the received product information to input the item of the product to be priced.
例えば店舗において、商品の取り出しを客が行えるように量り売り商品が陳列されていてもよい。この場合には、客が、購入対象の商品を陳列された場所から取り出し、店員に渡すようにされる。この場合には、客が商品を取りだしたことに応じて、動きセンサから商品情報が送信され、計量値付け装置２１０は、値付け対象の商品の品目を入力する。 For example, in a store, products sold by weight may be displayed so that customers can take out the products. In this case, the customer is asked to take out the product to be purchased from the displayed place and hand it to the clerk. In this case, the product information is transmitted from the motion sensor in response to the customer taking out the product, and the weighing and pricing device 210 inputs the item of the product to be priced.
［第３変形例］ [Third variant]
図３１に示される処理のもとで、何らかの原因により、計量値付け装置２１０がステップＳ１０７にて受信確認通知を受信できない場合がある。 Under the process shown in FIG. 31, the weighing pricing device 210 may not be able to receive the reception confirmation notification in step S107 for some reason.
受信確認通知を受信できない場合としては、例えば以下のような場合を挙げることができる。１つには、ステップＳ１０６により計量値付け装置２１０が送信すべき商品値付け情報が正常に送信されなかった場合である。１つには、ステップＳ１０６により商品値付け情報が送信されたが、携帯端末２４０にて商品値付け情報を正常に受信できなかった場合である。１つには、ステップＳ２２０５により携帯端末２４０が送信すべき受信確認通知が正常に送信できなかった場合である。１つには、ステップＳ２２０５により商品値付け情報が送信されたが、計量値付け装置２１０にて受信確認通知を正常に受信できなかった場合である。 Examples of cases where the reception confirmation notification cannot be received include the following cases. One is a case where the product pricing information to be transmitted by the weighing pricing device 210 is not normally transmitted in step S106. One is a case where the product pricing information is transmitted in step S106, but the product pricing information cannot be normally received by the mobile terminal 240. One is a case where the reception confirmation notification to be transmitted by the mobile terminal 240 cannot be normally transmitted in step S2205. One is a case where the product pricing information is transmitted in step S2205, but the reception confirmation notification cannot be normally received by the weighing pricing device 210.
計量値付け装置２１０は、商品値付け情報を送信するステップＳ１０６の処理を実行してから一定時間以内に受信確認通知が受信されずにタイムアウトとなった場合、商品値付け情報の送受信エラーが発生したと判定する。商品値付け情報の送受信エラーが発生したと判定した場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、例えば、店員用ディスプレイ２１０５にて、商品値付け情報の送受信エラーが発生したことの報知を行うようにされる。客用ディスプレイ２１０６においても、商品値付け情報の送受信エラーが発生したことの報知が行われるようにされてよい。 If the weighing pricing device 210 does not receive the receipt confirmation notification and times out within a certain period of time after executing the process of step S106 for transmitting the product pricing information, an error in transmitting / receiving the product pricing information occurs. It is determined that the product has been used. When it is determined that the transmission / reception error of the product pricing information has occurred, the weighing pricing device 210 is made to notify, for example, that the transmission / reception error of the product pricing information has occurred on the clerk display 2105. .. The customer display 2106 may also be notified that a transmission / reception error of the product pricing information has occurred.
上記のように商品値付け情報の送受信エラーの発生の報知が行われた場合の対応として、例えば、店員は、客に対して、対応の商品について、正常に登録されているか否かの確認をしてもらうように伝えるようにされてよい。客は、例えば携帯端末２４０における表示等を見ることで、ステップＳ２２０６に対応する取引管理サーバ２５０との間での商品登録情報の送受信が正常に行われたか否か（取引管理サーバ２５０にて対応のカート情報が正常に登録されたか否か）を確認する。 As a response when the occurrence of a transmission / reception error of product pricing information is notified as described above, for example, the clerk asks the customer whether or not the corresponding product is normally registered. You may be asked to do it. The customer sees, for example, the display on the mobile terminal 240, and whether or not the product registration information is normally transmitted / received to / from the transaction management server 250 corresponding to step S2206 (corresponding with the transaction management server 250). (Whether or not the cart information of is registered normally) is confirmed.
商品登録情報の送受信が正常に行われていることが確認できた場合には、受信確認通知の送受信がエラーとなっただけであり、商品の登録は正常に行われたことになるので、特に対応の処置はしなくともよい。あるいは、例えば携帯端末２４０から受信確認通知を再送信させる操作を客に行ってもらい、計量値付け装置２１０が、受信確認通知が受信されたことを以て、商品値付け情報の送受信エラーが解消されたとして処理してもよい。 If it can be confirmed that the product registration information has been sent and received normally, only an error has occurred in sending and receiving the receipt confirmation notification, and the product registration has been performed normally. You do not have to take any action. Alternatively, for example, the customer is asked to retransmit the reception confirmation notification from the mobile terminal 240, and the weighing pricing device 210 receives the reception confirmation notification, so that the transmission / reception error of the product price information is resolved. May be processed as.
商品値付け情報の送受信エラーの発生の報知が行われた場合の対応として、計量値付け装置２１０により、対応の商品の値付け情報が反映された値付け情報コード（バーコード、もしくは二次元コードであってよい）が印刷されたラベル（再登録用ラベル）を発行してよい。 A pricing information code (bar code or two-dimensional code) that reflects the pricing information of the corresponding product is handled by the weighing pricing device 210 as a response when the occurrence of a transmission / reception error of the product pricing information is notified. A label (re-registration label) on which (may be) is printed may be issued.
再登録用ラベルの発行にあたり、店員に向けて発行の要否を確認するダイアログウィンドウが店員用ディスプレイ２１０５にて表示されるようにしてよい。この場合、店員は、取引管理サーバ２５０との間での商品登録情報の送受信が正常に行われたことの確認が得られた場合には、再登録用ラベルの発行が不要であることを宣言する操作をダイアログウィンドウに対して行う。一方、店員は、取引管理サーバ２５０との間での商品登録情報の送受信が正常に行われていないことの確認が得られた場合には、再登録用ラベルの発行を指示する操作をダイアログウィンドウに対して行う。 When issuing the re-registration label, a dialog window for asking the clerk to confirm the necessity of issuance may be displayed on the clerk display 2105. In this case, the clerk declares that it is not necessary to issue the re-registration label when it is confirmed that the product registration information has been normally transmitted / received to / from the transaction management server 250. Perform the operation to be performed on the dialog window. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the product registration information is not normally sent / received to / from the transaction management server 250, the clerk gives an operation to instruct the issuance of the re-registration label in the dialog window. To do.
再登録用ラベルが発行された場合、店員は、発行された再登録用ラベルを客に渡す。客は、渡された再登録用ラベルに印刷された値付け情報コードを携帯端末２４０に読み取らせる。携帯端末２４０は、読み取った値付け情報コードにより示される商品値付け情報を、商品登録情報として取引管理サーバ２５０に対して送信する。これにより、商品値付け情報の送受信エラーに対応する商品についての取引管理サーバ２５０へのカート情報の登録が行われることになる。 When the re-registration label is issued, the clerk hands the issued re-registration label to the customer. The customer has the mobile terminal 240 read the pricing information code printed on the handed re-registration label. The mobile terminal 240 transmits the product pricing information indicated by the read pricing information code to the transaction management server 250 as product registration information. As a result, the cart information for the product corresponding to the transmission / reception error of the product pricing information is registered in the transaction management server 250.
［第４変形例］ [Fourth variant]
上記実施形態では、一取引における商品単位で値付け処理が行われる都度に、接続情報コードが表示されるようにしていた。本変形例では、一取引に対応して接続情報コードが表示される。 In the above embodiment, the connection information code is displayed each time the pricing process is performed for each product in one transaction. In this modification, the connection information code is displayed corresponding to one transaction.
この場合には、例えば、一取引における最初の量り売り商品の値付け操作の前に店員が計量値付け装置２１０に所定操作を行うことで、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に接続情報コードを表示させる。あるいは、接続情報コードは、例えば一取引における最初の値付け操作を待機している状態において客用ディスプレイ２１０６にて表示する待機画面において含まれているようにされてもよい。 In this case, for example, the clerk performs a predetermined operation on the weighing pricing device 210 before the pricing operation of the first selling product by weight in one transaction, so that the connection information code is displayed on the customer display 2106. Alternatively, the connection information code may be included in the standby screen displayed on the customer display 2106, for example, in a state of waiting for the first pricing operation in one transaction.
この場合、客は、１つ目の商品の値付けが行われる前の段階で、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に表示された接続情報コードを、携帯端末２４０により読み取らせる。携帯端末２４０は、読み取った接続情報コードが示す接続条件（接続手順）に従って、計量値付け装置２１０と接続を確立させた状態とする。この場合、計量値付け装置２１０が、例えば携帯端末２４０との接続の確立を検知したことに応じて接続情報コードの表示を消去してよい。 In this case, the customer causes the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code displayed on the customer display 2106 before the price of the first product is set. The mobile terminal 240 is in a state of establishing a connection with the weighing and pricing device 210 according to the connection conditions (connection procedure) indicated by the read connection information code. In this case, the display of the connection information code may be erased when the weighing and pricing device 210 detects, for example, the establishment of a connection with the mobile terminal 240.
通信が確立すると、計量値付け装置２１０は、通信相手である携帯端末２４０と今回の取引とを対応付ける処理を実行する。このために、計量値付け装置２１０は、例えば通信相手である携帯端末２４０から端末識別子を取得する。端末識別子は、例えばＭＡＣアドレス等のように携帯端末２４０としてのハードウェアごとに個別に付与される識別子であってもよいし、携帯端末２４０にインストールされた買い物アプリケーションに付与されたアプリケーション識別子であってもよい。 When the communication is established, the weighing and pricing device 210 executes a process of associating the mobile terminal 240, which is the communication partner, with the current transaction. For this purpose, the weighing and pricing device 210 acquires a terminal identifier from, for example, a mobile terminal 240 which is a communication partner. The terminal identifier may be an identifier individually assigned to each hardware as the mobile terminal 240, such as a MAC address, or an application identifier assigned to the shopping application installed on the mobile terminal 240. You may.
計量値付け装置２１０は、通信が確立して携帯端末２４０と接続されたことに応じて、今回の取引に対して値付け操作を担当している店員を対応付けるための操作が行われる店員指定画面を、店員用ディスプレイ２１０５に表示させてよい。 The weighing pricing device 210 is a clerk designation screen in which an operation for associating a clerk in charge of a pricing operation with the current transaction is performed according to the establishment of communication and connection with the mobile terminal 240. May be displayed on the clerk display 2105.
図４２は、店員指定画面の一態様例を示している。店員指定画面においては、店員ボタンが配置されている。店員ボタンには、それぞれ対応の店員を示す文字等が表示されることで店員との対応付けが示されている。同図では、３つの店員ボタンが配置されており、それぞれ「店員Ａ」、「店員Ｂ」、「店員Ｃ」と示されている例が示されている。 FIG. 42 shows an example of a clerk designation screen. On the clerk designation screen, a clerk button is arranged. The clerk button is shown to be associated with the clerk by displaying characters or the like indicating the corresponding clerk. In the figure, three clerk buttons are arranged, and an example is shown in which they are shown as "clerk A", "clerk B", and "clerk C", respectively.
店員ボタンには、例えば店員の名前、役職等が示されてよい。表示された店員ボタンに対応する店員は、現在において、量り売り商品の売り場を担当中の店員として登録（ログイン）している店員である。現在において他の客に応対して他の計量値付け装置２１０にて値付け操作中の店員の店員ボタンについては、例えば同図に示されるように斜め線の配置（他にはグレーアウトなどでもよい）によって操作が不可であることを示すようにされている。 For example, the clerk's name, job title, etc. may be indicated on the clerk button. The clerk corresponding to the displayed clerk button is a clerk who is currently registered (logged in) as a clerk in charge of the sales floor of the merchandise sold by weight. Regarding the clerk button of the clerk who is currently performing the pricing operation by the other weighing and pricing device 210 in response to other customers, for example, as shown in the figure, the diagonal line arrangement (other than grayout etc. may be used). ) Indicates that the operation is not possible.
そして、店員は、表示された店員ボタンのうちから、自分に対応する店員ボタンに対する操作を行う。 Then, the clerk operates the clerk button corresponding to himself / herself from the displayed clerk buttons.
店員指定画面においては「追加」ボタンが配置されている。例えば、店員が、売り場を担当中の店員としてログインする前に客と応対する必要のある状況となる場合がある。このような場合、店員指定画面においては、ログインしていない店員に対応する店員ボタンが表示されていない状態にある。そこで、この場合の店員は「追加」ボタンを操作したうえで、例えば自分の店員識別子を計量値付け装置２１０に読み取らせる操作を行ってその場でログインすることができる。ログインに応じて、店員指定画面においては、これまでに表示されていた店員ボタンに加えて、対応の店員の店員ボタンがさらに表示される。 An "Add" button is arranged on the clerk designation screen. For example, a clerk may need to deal with a customer before logging in as a clerk in charge of the sales floor. In such a case, the clerk button corresponding to the clerk who is not logged in is not displayed on the clerk designation screen. Therefore, the clerk in this case can log in on the spot by operating the "add" button and then performing, for example, an operation of causing the weighing and pricing device 210 to read his / her clerk's identifier. In response to the login, on the clerk designation screen, in addition to the clerk buttons that have been displayed so far, the clerk buttons of the corresponding clerk are further displayed.
計量値付け装置２１０は、操作された店員ボタンが示す店員の店員識別子と、通信相手である携帯端末２４０から取得された端末識別子とを対応付ける。計量値付け装置２１０は、対応の取引のもとで行われた値付け操作に対応する商品ごとの商品値付け情報を店員識別子と対応付けて管理する。これにより、携帯端末２４０に対応する取引が一意に特定される状態とすることができる。 The weighing pricing device 210 associates the clerk identifier indicated by the operated clerk button with the terminal identifier acquired from the mobile terminal 240, which is the communication partner. The weighing pricing device 210 manages the product pricing information for each product corresponding to the pricing operation performed under the corresponding transaction in association with the clerk identifier. As a result, the transaction corresponding to the mobile terminal 240 can be uniquely specified.
店員ボタンの操作に代えて、例えば店員が所持する店員証に付された店員識別子のコード情報を計量値付け装置２１０のスキャナ２１０４に読み取らせることにより、店員識別子が取得されるようにしてよい。店員証については、例えば店員識別子が記憶されたＩＣ（Ｉｎｔｅｇｒａｔｅｄ　Ｃｉｒｃｕｉｔ）カード形式とされて、計量値付け装置２１０に備えられたカードリーダにより、ＩＣカードから店員識別子を取得するようにされてもよい。店員証としてのＲＦＩＤ（Ｒａｄｉｏ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　Ｉｄｅｎｔｉｆｉｅｒ）カード等と計量値付け装置２１０とが所定の近距離無線通信により相互に通信範囲内となったことに応じて通信が行われるようにされている場合には、計量値付け装置２１０が通信可能な店員証から記憶されている店員識別子を取得するようにされてよい。この場合において、通信可能な店員証が複数である場合には、例えば受信強度が最も強い店員証（即ち、計量値付け装置２１０に最も近い位置に存在する店員の店員証）から店員識別子を取得するようにされてよい。 Instead of operating the clerk button, for example, the clerk identifier may be acquired by having the scanner 2104 of the weighing and pricing device 210 read the code information of the clerk identifier attached to the clerk's card possessed by the clerk. The clerk ID may be, for example, in the form of an IC (Integrated Circuit) card in which the clerk identifier is stored, and the clerk identifier may be obtained from the IC card by a card reader provided in the weighing and pricing device 210. .. When the RFID (Radio Frequency Identifier) card or the like as a clerk ID and the weighing pricing device 210 are made to communicate with each other according to the mutual communication range by a predetermined short-range wireless communication. May be adapted so that the weighing pricing device 210 obtains a stored clerk identifier from a communicable clerk ID. In this case, when there are a plurality of clerk IDs that can be communicated, for example, the clerk identifier is obtained from the clerk ID with the strongest reception strength (that is, the clerk ID of the clerk located closest to the weighing and pricing device 210). May be done.
携帯識別子、店員識別子、商品値付け情報に、さらに取引識別子（取引番号）を対応付けられてもよい。あるいは、店員識別子に代えて、取引識別子が対応付けられてもよい。例えば、上記のように店員と取引とを対応付けた管理を行わない運用である場合には、店員識別子を使用しないことから、店員識別子に代えて取引識別子を対応付けることで、携帯端末２４０と取引との対応付けが可能となる。 A transaction identifier (transaction number) may be further associated with the mobile phone identifier, the clerk identifier, and the product pricing information. Alternatively, the transaction identifier may be associated with the clerk identifier. For example, in the case of the operation in which the clerk and the transaction are not managed in association with each other as described above, since the clerk identifier is not used, the transaction identifier can be associated with the mobile terminal 240 instead of the clerk identifier. Can be associated with.
上記のように、取引識別子を対応付ける場合には、計量値付け装置２１０は、店員ボタンに代えて、所定の図形等のマークや所定の色を示す複数の取引選択ボタンを表示し、表示された取引選択ボタンのうちから店員によって操作された取引選択ボタンに付されたマーク、色を、取引に対応付けるようにしてよい。 As described above, when associating a transaction identifier, the weighing pricing device 210 displays and displays a plurality of transaction selection buttons indicating a mark such as a predetermined figure or a predetermined color instead of the clerk button. The mark and color attached to the transaction selection button operated by the clerk from among the transaction selection buttons may be associated with the transaction.
本変形例のように、一取引に対応して接続情報コードが表示されるようにする場合には、計量値付け装置２１０は、商品単位で値付け処理が行われるごとに商品値付け情報を携帯端末２４０に送信しなくともよい。つまり、計量値付け装置２１０は、例えば一取引に対応する全ての商品の値付け処理を完了した段階で、値付けされた全ての商品ごとの商品値付け情報を携帯端末２４０に送信するようにされてよい。 When the connection information code is displayed corresponding to one transaction as in this modification, the weighing pricing device 210 displays the product pricing information each time the product is priced. It does not have to be transmitted to the mobile terminal 240. That is, the weighing pricing device 210 transmits the product pricing information for each of the priced products to the mobile terminal 240, for example, when the price processing of all the products corresponding to one transaction is completed. May be done.
本変形例のように、一取引に対応して接続情報コードが表示されるようにする場合において、上記のように、取引と携帯端末２４０とを対応付けることで、１つの計量値付け装置２１０について、或る１つの取引に応じた値付け操作が開始されてから完了するまでの間において、他の取引の値付け操作も割り込ませることができる。つまり、１つの計量値付け装置２１０が、複数の取引の値付け処理を並行的に行うようにすることが可能になる。 In the case where the connection information code is displayed corresponding to one transaction as in this modification, the one weighing and pricing device 210 is associated with the transaction and the mobile terminal 240 as described above. , The pricing operation of another transaction can also be interrupted between the start and the completion of the pricing operation according to one transaction. That is, one weighing and pricing device 210 can perform pricing processing for a plurality of transactions in parallel.
これにより、例えば先客が次に値付けしてもらう商品をどれにするか迷っていたり、何らかの事情で、客がその場で店員と相対する以外の行動を一時的にとらなければならなくなったような場合に、店員は、先客のこれまでの取引の内容（商品値付け情報）を記憶しておいたうえで、次客に対応した商品の値付けを行うことができる。 As a result, for example, it seems that the customer was wondering which product to be priced next, or for some reason, the customer had to temporarily take an action other than facing the clerk on the spot. In such a case, the clerk can price the product corresponding to the next customer after memorizing the contents of the previous transaction (product pricing information) of the previous customer.
上記の例では、一取引に対応して接続情報コードを表示する態様として一取引における最初の量り売り商品の値付け操作の前の段階において客用ディスプレイ２１０６に接続情報コードを表示させることで、一取引に対応する商品の値付けが開始される前の段階にて計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０とが接続されるようにされていた。 In the above example, as a mode for displaying the connection information code corresponding to one transaction, the connection information code is displayed on the customer display 2106 at the stage before the pricing operation of the first merchandise sold by weight in one transaction. The weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 were connected to each other before the price of the product corresponding to the transaction was started.
しかしながら、一取引に対応して接続情報コードを表示する態様としては、例えば図３１のステップＳ２１０３に準じて、一取引における最初の量り売り商品の値付けに応じたタイミングで表示されてもよい。 However, as a mode of displaying the connection information code corresponding to one transaction, for example, according to step S2103 of FIG. 31, it may be displayed at a timing corresponding to the price of the first mass-sold product in one transaction.
あるいは、一取引に対応して接続情報コードを表示する態様としては、一取引における全ての商品の値付けが完了した段階で、接続情報コードが表示されるようにしてよい。 Alternatively, as a mode for displaying the connection information code corresponding to one transaction, the connection information code may be displayed when the pricing of all the products in one transaction is completed.
図４３は、一取引における全ての商品の値付けが完了した段階で客用ディスプレイ２１０６に表示される接続情報コード画面の態様例を示している。図４３では、客用ディスプレイ２１０６が縦長の表示面部を有し、画面における表記が英語である場合の態様例を示している。 FIG. 43 shows an example of the mode of the connection information code screen displayed on the customer display 2106 when the pricing of all the products in one transaction is completed. FIG. 43 shows an example of a mode in which the customer display 2106 has a vertically long display surface portion and the notation on the screen is in English.
接続情報コード画面においては、図３２と同様に、二次元コードによる接続情報コードが表示されるとともに、携帯端末の画像が、二次元コードを指し示す矢印とともに表示されている。 On the connection information code screen, as in FIG. 32, the connection information code with the two-dimensional code is displayed, and the image of the mobile terminal is displayed with an arrow pointing to the two-dimensional code.
接続情報コード画面においては、対応の取引においてこれまでに値付け処理が行われた１以上の商品ごとについての値付け関連情報（商品名、計測された重量、価格等）が表示されている。 On the connection information code screen, pricing-related information (product name, measured weight, price, etc.) for each one or more products that have been priced so far in the corresponding transaction is displayed.
この場合にも、店員用ディスプレイ２１０５においては、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に接続情報コードを表示させていることを店員に報知するためのメッセージ、ポップアップウィンドウ、アイコン等が表示されるようにしてよい。 In this case as well, the clerk display 2105 may display a message, a pop-up window, an icon, or the like for notifying the clerk that the connection information code is displayed on the customer display 2106.
このように、一取引における全ての量り売り商品の値付けが完了した段階で接続情報コードが表示される場合にも、計量値付け装置２１０は、携帯端末２４０との接続の確立を検知したことに応じて接続情報コードの表示を消去してよい。 In this way, even when the connection information code is displayed at the stage when the pricing of all the products sold by weight in one transaction is completed, the weighing pricing device 210 has detected the establishment of the connection with the mobile terminal 240. The display of the connection information code may be deleted accordingly.
［第５変形例］ [Fifth variant]
複数の計量値付け装置２１０の間では、「商品登録引継ぎ」が可能とされてよい。商品登録引継ぎとは、店員が或る１つの計量値付け装置２１０にて１つの取引における商品の登録を行った後に、店員が他の計量値付け装置２１０に移動して同じ取引における商品の登録を行うことである。商品登録引継ぎにおいては、同じ一取引において、先に計量値付け装置２１０にて行われた商品の登録に応じた商品登録情報が次の計量値付け装置２１０に引き継がれる。次の計量値付け装置２１０は、引き継いだ商品登録情報に対して、自己の商品登録処理により登録された商品についての情報を追加することができる。 "Product registration takeover" may be possible between a plurality of weighing and pricing devices 210. Product registration takeover means that after a clerk registers a product in one transaction with one weighing and pricing device 210, the clerk moves to another weighing and pricing device 210 and registers the product in the same transaction. Is to do. In the product registration transfer, in the same transaction, the product registration information corresponding to the product registration previously performed by the weighing pricing device 210 is transferred to the next weighing pricing device 210. The next weighing and pricing device 210 can add information about the product registered by its own product registration process to the inherited product registration information.
例えば、現在おいて店員が操作している計量値付け装置２１０から離れた位置に陳列されている商品を客から指定されることがある。「商品登録引継ぎ」が可能とされることで、店員は、指定された商品のところにまで赴いて商品を取り出し、最寄りの場所に設置されている別の計量値付け装置２１０により商品の登録を続けることができる。 For example, a customer may specify a product displayed at a position away from the weighing and pricing device 210 currently operated by a clerk. By enabling "product registration takeover", the clerk goes to the designated product, takes out the product, and registers the product with another weighing and pricing device 210 installed at the nearest location. You can continue.
本変形例における「商品登録引継ぎ」は、複数の計量値付け装置２１０のうちのいずれか１つが親として機能したうえで、親の計量値付け装置２１０と子の計量値付け装置２１０とが通信可能に接続されることにより実現される。 In the "product registration takeover" in this modification, one of the plurality of weighing and pricing devices 210 functions as a parent, and then the parent weighing and pricing device 210 and the child weighing and pricing device 210 communicate with each other. It is realized by being connected as possible.
子の計量値付け装置２１０は、値付けされた商品ごとの商品値付け情報を、値付け操作を行った店員の店員識別子と対応付け（あるいは、店員識別子に代えて取引識別子が対応付けられてもよいし、店員識別子と取引識別子との両者が対応付けられてもよい）、親の計量値付け装置１０に送信する。例えば、店員は、１つの計量値付け装置２１０の操作を開始するごとに、計量値付け装置２１０に自分の店員証に記録された店員識別子を読み取らせたり、置数や所定ボタンに対する操作を行ったりすることで、計量値付け装置２１０に自分の店員識別子を取得させてログインを行う。店員は、商品登録引継ぎに応じて値付けの操作を行う計量値付け装置２１０を変更するごとに、計量値付け装置２１０に自分の店員識別子を取得させるようにする。 The child weighing and pricing device 210 associates the product pricing information for each priced product with the clerk identifier of the clerk who performed the pricing operation (or, the transaction identifier is associated with the clerk identifier instead of the clerk identifier. Alternatively, both the clerk identifier and the transaction identifier may be associated with each other), and the product is transmitted to the parent weighing and pricing device 10. For example, each time a clerk starts an operation of one weighing and pricing device 210, the clerk causes the weighing and pricing device 210 to read the clerk identifier recorded on his or her clerk's card, or operates the number of units and a predetermined button. By doing so, the weighing and pricing device 210 is made to acquire its own clerk identifier and logs in. Each time the clerk changes the weighing pricing device 210 that performs the pricing operation in response to the takeover of the product registration, the clerk causes the weighing pricing device 210 to acquire his / her own clerk identifier.
親の計量値付け装置２１０は、商品値付け情報が受信されるごとに、受信された商品値付け情報を同じ店員識別子ごとに統合した統合商品値付け情報を記憶する。 Each time the product pricing information is received, the parent weighing device 210 stores the integrated product pricing information in which the received product pricing information is integrated for each same clerk identifier.
そして、店員は、一取引における商品の値付けを全て終えると、値付け完了操作を行う。値付け完了操作が行われたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に接続情報コードを表示する。 Then, when the clerk finishes all the pricing of the products in one transaction, the clerk performs the pricing completion operation. In response to the pricing completion operation, the weighing pricing device 210 displays the connection information code on the customer display 2106.
客が表示された接続情報コードを携帯端末２４０により読み取らせたことに応じて、携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０とが通信可能に接続されると、携帯端末２４０は、接続情報コードに含まれていた店員識別子を計量値付け装置２１０に送信する。接続情報コードの表示は、計量値付け装置２１０が携帯端末２４０と通信可能に接続されたことを検知したことに応じて消去されてよい。 When the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210 are communicably connected in response to the customer having the mobile terminal 240 read the displayed connection information code, the mobile terminal 240 is included in the connection information code. The clerk identifier that has been used is transmitted to the weighing and pricing device 210. The display of the connection information code may be erased in response to detecting that the weighing and pricing device 210 is communicably connected to the mobile terminal 240.
店員識別子を受信した計量値付け装置２１０は、親の計量値付け装置２１０に記憶されている統合商品値付け情報のうちから、受信された店員識別子が対応付けられた統合商品値付け情報を、携帯端末２４０に送信する。携帯端末２４０は、受信された統合商品値付け情報を、値付けされた全ての商品についての商品登録情報として、取引管理サーバ２５０に送信する。取引管理サーバ２５０は、受信された商品登録情報において示される商品ごとの情報を、それぞれカート情報として登録する。 The weighing pricing device 210 that has received the clerk identifier receives the integrated product pricing information associated with the received clerk identifier from the integrated product pricing information stored in the parent weighing pricing device 210. It is transmitted to the mobile terminal 240. The mobile terminal 240 transmits the received integrated product pricing information to the transaction management server 250 as product registration information for all the priced products. The transaction management server 250 registers the information for each product indicated in the received product registration information as cart information.
本変形例のように「商品登録引継ぎ」が可能な場合にも第２変形例のように、取引と携帯端末２４０とを対応付けておいてよい。 Even when "commodity registration takeover" is possible as in this modification, the transaction and the mobile terminal 240 may be associated with each other as in the second modification.
親の計量値付け装置としての機能に対応する処理を、例えば上位の管理装置や取引管理サーバ２５０等が実行するようにされてよい。あるいは、店員が計量値付け装置２１０を移動して、店員識別子を入力してログインするごとに、移動元の計量値付け装置２１０にて記憶されていた該当取引の商品値付け情報が、移動先の計量値付け装置２１０に送信され、送信された商品値付け情報に対して、移動先での値付け処理によって得られた商品値付け情報が統合されていくようにされてもよい。 For example, a higher-level management device, a transaction management server 250, or the like may execute a process corresponding to the function as a parent weighing and pricing device. Alternatively, every time the clerk moves the weighing pricing device 210, inputs the clerk identifier and logs in, the product pricing information of the corresponding transaction stored in the weighing pricing device 210 of the moving source is moved to the moving destination. The product pricing information transmitted to and transmitted to the weighing and pricing device 210 may be integrated with the product pricing information obtained by the pricing process at the destination.
上記のように商品登録引継ぎが可能とされる場合において、商品の値付け処理が完了するごとに計量値付け装置２１０は、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に接続情報コードを表示させてよい。この場合にも、接続情報コードは、商品の値付け処理の完了ごとに応じて、客が携帯端末２４０に接続情報コードを読み取らせることで、計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０とが通信可能に接続されたことに応じて表示が消去されてよい。 When the product registration can be taken over as described above, the weighing pricing device 210 may display the connection information code on the customer display 2106 each time the product pricing process is completed. In this case as well, the connection information code enables communication between the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 by causing the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code each time the product pricing process is completed. The display may be erased depending on the connection to.
そのうえで、商品登録引継ぎのために、店員が値付けの操作を行う計量値付け装置２１０を移動する際には、一取引の値付けが完了してはいないが、移動元の計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０との接続が切断されるようにする。 Then, when the clerk moves the weighing pricing device 210 that performs the pricing operation for the transfer of product registration, the pricing of one transaction is not completed, but the weighing pricing device 210 of the moving source And the mobile terminal 240 are disconnected.
移動元の計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０との接続を切断させるにあたっては以下のような態様が考えられる。 The following modes can be considered for disconnecting the connection between the weighing and pricing device 210 of the moving source and the mobile terminal 240.
１つには、これまで移動元の計量値付け装置２１０により値付け操作を行っていた店員が、同じ取引に対応して移動先の計量値付け装置２１０に移動して値付け操作を行う必要が生じた場合には、移動元の計量値付け装置２１０に対して、ログアウトの操作を行うようにされる。ログアウトの操作に応じてログアウトとの状態となったことに応じて、移動元の計量値付け装置２１０は、現在の携帯端末２４０との接続を切断する。 One is that a clerk who has previously performed a pricing operation by the moving source weighing and pricing device 210 needs to move to the moving destination weighing and pricing device 210 and perform the pricing operation in response to the same transaction. When the above occurs, a log-out operation is performed on the weighing and pricing device 210 of the moving source. The weighing device 210 of the moving source disconnects from the current mobile terminal 240 according to the state of logging out in response to the log-out operation.
あるいは、店員が商品登録引継ぎにより移動先の計量値付け装置２１０にて値付け操作を開始する際に、自分の店員識別子を移動先の計量値付け装置２１０に取得させたことに応じて、移動元の計量値付け装置２１０が現在の携帯端末２４０との接続を切断するようにしてもよい。この場合、店員は、移動元の計量値付け装置２１０にログアウトの操作を行うことなく、移動先の計量値付け装置２１０に移動してよい。 Alternatively, when the clerk starts the pricing operation on the moving destination weighing pricing device 210 by taking over the product registration, the clerk moves according to the fact that the moving destination weighing pricing device 210 acquires his / her own clerk identifier. The original weighing and pricing device 210 may be disconnected from the current mobile terminal 240. In this case, the clerk may move to the moving-destination weighing and pricing device 210 without performing a log-out operation to the moving-source weighing and pricing device 210.
この場合、移動元の計量値付け装置２１０は、移動先の計量値付け装置２１０との通信により、移動先の計量値付け装置２１０から、現在において自己がログイン中であるのと同じ店員がログインしたことの通知を受信したことに応じて、現在の携帯端末２４０との接続を切断する。そのうえで、移動元の計量値付け装置２１０は、同じ店員がログインしたことの通知を移動先の計量値付け装置２１０から受信する前のタイミングで、他の店員によるログインが行われた場合にも、現在の携帯端末２４０との接続を切断する。 In this case, the moving source weighing and pricing device 210 is logged in by the same clerk who is currently logged in from the moving destination weighing and pricing device 210 by communicating with the moving destination weighing and pricing device 210. Upon receiving the notification of the fact, the connection with the current mobile terminal 240 is disconnected. In addition, the moving source weighing and pricing device 210 may log in by another clerk at a timing before receiving a notification that the same clerk has logged in from the moving destination weighing and pricing device 210. Disconnect from the current mobile terminal 240.
つまり、この場合には、移動先の計量値付け装置２１０にログインが行われるまでの所定のタイミングで、移動元の計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０との接続が切断されるように構成されればよい。 That is, in this case, the connection between the moving source weighing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 is configured to be disconnected at a predetermined timing until the destination weighing device 210 is logged in. Just do it.
上記のいずれの態様により移動元の計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０との接続を切断された場合であっても、一取引の値付け完了を宣言する操作が行われるまでは、親の計量値付け装置２１０にて、店員識別子と、同じ一取引における商品値付け情報とが対応付けられて管理されている。これにより、同じ店員が一取引に対応していずれの計量値付け装置２１０にて値付け操作を行っていったとしても、同じ一取引の商品値付け情報が適正に統合される。 Even if the connection between the source weighing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 is disconnected by any of the above modes, the parent weighing is performed until the operation for declaring the completion of pricing for one transaction is performed. The pricing device 210 manages the clerk identifier and the product pricing information in the same transaction in association with each other. As a result, even if the same clerk performs a pricing operation on any of the weighing pricing devices 210 in response to one transaction, the product pricing information of the same transaction is properly integrated.
そのうえで、例えば、一取引に対応して値付け操作を行う操作者（計量値付け装置２１０にログインした店員）の店員識別子と、ログインされた計量値付け装置２１０と接続された携帯端末２４０の端末識別情報（例えば、接続に使用されたる携帯端末２４０のデバイスＩＤ等の情報）とを対応付けた接続対応情報が、計量値付け装置２１０に記憶されるようにしてよい。接続対応情報は、ログインされた計量値付け装置２１０が記憶してもよいし、親の計量値付け装置２１０が記憶してもよい。 Then, for example, the clerk identifier of the operator (the clerk who logged in to the weighing pricing device 210) who performs the pricing operation corresponding to one transaction, and the terminal of the mobile terminal 240 connected to the logged-in weighing pricing device 210. Connection correspondence information associated with identification information (for example, information such as a device ID of a mobile terminal 240 used for connection) may be stored in the weighing and pricing device 210. The connection correspondence information may be stored in the logged-in weighing and pricing device 210, or may be stored in the parent weighing and pricing device 210.
このように接続対応情報が記憶されることで、例えば、商品登録引継ぎにより店員が他の計量値付け装置２１０に移動してログインしたことに応じて、接続情報コードを利用しなくとも自動的に計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０とを接続させることが可能になる。 By storing the connection correspondence information in this way, for example, when the clerk moves to another weighing and pricing device 210 and logs in by taking over the product registration, the connection information code is not used automatically. It becomes possible to connect the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240.
つまり、店員が他の計量値付け装置２１０に移動してログインしたことに応じて、ログインされた計量値付け装置２１０は、ログインにより取得されたのと同じ店員識別子を含む接続対応情報を取得する。し、ログインされた計量値付け装置２１０は、取得された接続対応情報が含む端末識別情報を利用して、対応の携帯端末２４０と接続する処理を実行してよい。 That is, in response to the clerk moving to another weighing device 210 and logging in, the logged-in weighing device 210 acquires connection correspondence information including the same clerk identifier acquired by login. .. Then, the logged-in weighing and pricing device 210 may execute a process of connecting to the corresponding mobile terminal 240 by using the terminal identification information included in the acquired connection correspondence information.
続いて、第２の実施形態の第６の例を説明する。先の第２の実施形態の第１の例から第２の実施形態の第５の例は、店員が客と相対して量り売り商品の計量、値付けを行うようにされた、対面方式に対応していた。 Subsequently, a sixth example of the second embodiment will be described. The first example to the fifth example of the second embodiment correspond to the face-to-face method in which the clerk is made to weigh and price the products sold by weight relative to the customer. Was.
これに対して、第２の実施形態は、量り売り商品についての計量、値付けを客が行うセルフ方式に対応する。セルフ方式の場合、計量値付け装置を操作する店員は不在であってよい。 On the other hand, the second embodiment corresponds to a self-service method in which the customer weighs and prices the products sold by weight. In the case of the self-method, the clerk who operates the weighing and pricing device may be absent.
第２の実施形態に対応する販売システムの構成は、図２と同様でよい。ただし、第２の実施形態における販売システムでは、計量値付け装置２１０とは異なる構成の計量値付け装置２１０Ａが備えられる。計量値付け装置２１０Ａの構成は、例えば図３と同様でよいが、店員用ディスプレイ２１０５は省略されてよい。 The configuration of the sales system corresponding to the second embodiment may be the same as that shown in FIG. However, in the sales system according to the second embodiment, the weighing and pricing device 210A having a configuration different from that of the weighing and pricing device 210 is provided. The configuration of the weighing pricing device 210A may be the same as that shown in FIG. 3, for example, but the clerk display 2105 may be omitted.
第２の実施形態の販売システムが対応する店舗において、客は、以下に説明するように量り売り商品の計量、値付けを行うことができる。 In the store to which the sales system of the second embodiment corresponds, the customer can weigh and price the products sold by weight as described below.
客は、量り売り商品が購入対象である場合に、まず、以下のようにして購入対象の商品の品目の入力を行う。 When the customer wants to purchase the product by weight, the customer first inputs the item of the product to be purchased as follows.
図４４には、店舗において量り売り商品が陳列された様子の一例が示されている。例では、量り売り商品として、レモンＬＭ、リンゴＡＰ、オレンジＯＧが陳列されている。陳列されたレモンＬＭ、リンゴＡＰ、オレンジＯＧごとに対応して、商品情報パネル３０００−ＬＭ、３０００−ＡＰ、３０００−ＯＧが設置されている。商品情報パネル３０００−ＬＭ、３０００−ＡＰ、３０００−ＯＧについて特に区別しない場合には、商品情報パネル３０００と記載する。 FIG. 44 shows an example of how the products sold by weight are displayed in the store. In the example, lemon LM, apple AP, and orange OG are displayed as products sold by weight. A product information panel 3000-LM, 3000-AP, 3000-OG is installed corresponding to each of the displayed lemon LM, apple AP, and orange OG. When the product information panel 3000-LM, 3000-AP, 3000-OG is not particularly distinguished, it is described as the product information panel 3000.
商品情報パネル３０００は、対応の商品の情報を提示する。同図においては、商品情報パネル３０００−ＬＭが拡大されて示されている。このように、商品情報パネル３０００−ＬＭにおいては、商品の情報として、商品の品目がレモンであることと、単位重量あたりの単価と、商品情報コード３００１とが提示されている。商品情報コード３００１は、例ではバーコード（一次元コード）とされている。商品情報コード３００１は、レモンとしての商品の品目の商品コードを含む。他の商品情報パネル３０００においても、同様に、商品の情報として、商品の品目、単位重量あたりの単価、商品情報コードが提示されている。 The product information panel 3000 presents information on the corresponding product. In the figure, the product information panel 3000-LM is enlarged and shown. As described above, in the product information panel 3000-LM, the product item is lemon, the unit price per unit weight, and the product information code 3001 are presented as the product information. The product information code 3001 is a bar code (one-dimensional code) in the example. The product information code 3001 includes the product code of the item of the product as a lemon. Similarly, in the other product information panel 3000, the item of the product, the unit price per unit weight, and the product information code are presented as the product information.
商品情報パネル３０００は、ディスプレイデバイスが表示を行うことにより商品の情報を提示するようにされてよい。あるいは、商品情報パネル３０００は、ポスターなどのような印刷物を貼り付けることで商品の情報を提示するようにされてよい。 The product information panel 3000 may be configured to present product information by displaying on the display device. Alternatively, the product information panel 3000 may be adapted to present product information by pasting a printed matter such as a poster.
ディスプレイデバイスにより商品の情報を提示することによっては、タイムサービスなどのときの値引きを反映した表示をしかるべきタイミングで行うことができる。バーコードを時間経過に応じて変更して表示することによって、予めカメラで撮像しておいたバーコードなどを携帯端末２４０に読み取らせることで、異なる単価にて、量り売り商品を登録するといった不正を防止することができる。 By presenting the product information on the display device, it is possible to perform the display reflecting the discount at the time service or the like at an appropriate timing. By changing the barcode according to the passage of time and displaying it, by having the mobile terminal 240 read the barcode etc. captured by the camera in advance, fraud such as registering products sold by weight at different unit prices can be done. Can be prevented.
購入対象の商品の品目を入力するにあたり、客は、自分の携帯端末２４０に商品登録画面を表示させ、購入対象の商品の商品情報パネル３０００にて提示されている商品情報コードを携帯端末２４０に読み取らせる。同図においては、客がレモンＬＭに対応する商品情報コード３００１を読み取らせる様子が示されている。携帯端末２４０の商品登録画面におけるスキャン画像エリアＡＲ１１には商品情報コード３００１を撮像した様子が示されている。 When inputting the item of the product to be purchased, the customer displays the product registration screen on his / her mobile terminal 240 and transfers the product information code presented on the product information panel 3000 of the product to be purchased to the mobile terminal 240. Let me read it. The figure shows a customer reading the product information code 3001 corresponding to the lemon LM. The scan image area AR11 on the product registration screen of the mobile terminal 240 shows the image of the product information code 3001.
このようにしてレモンＬＭに対応する商品情報コード３００１のコードスキャンが行われると、携帯端末２４０は、読み取られた商品情報コード３００１からレモンＬＭの商品情報を取得する。携帯端末２４０は、取得された商品情報を利用して、量り売り商品の品目としてレモンＬＭを指定する。 When the code scan of the product information code 3001 corresponding to the lemon LM is performed in this way, the mobile terminal 240 acquires the product information of the lemon LM from the read product information code 3001. The mobile terminal 240 uses the acquired product information to designate Lemon LM as an item of a product sold by weight.
商品登録画面においては、商品登録状況エリアＡＲ１２が配置される。商品登録状況エリアＡＲ１２には、現時点における購入対象の商品の登録状況が示されている。同図では、商品登録状況エリアＡＲ１２においては、合計エリアＡＲ１２１、登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２（ＡＲ１２２−１、ＡＲ１２２−２、ＡＲ１２２−３）が配置されている。登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２は、登録済みの商品または品目の入力が行われた仮登録状態の商品を個々に示すリスト項目である。 On the product registration screen, the product registration status area AR12 is arranged. The product registration status area AR12 shows the registration status of the product to be purchased at the present time. In the figure, in the product registration status area AR12, the total area AR121 and the registration list items AR122 (AR122-1, AR122-2, AR122-3) are arranged. The registration list item AR122 is a list item that individually indicates a registered product or a product in a provisionally registered state in which an item has been input.
同図においては、登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２として、ヨーグルト、リンゴＡＰ、レモンＬＭごとに対応する登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２−１、ＡＲ１２２−２、ＡＲ１２２−３が配置されている。 In the figure, as the registration list item AR122, the registration list items AR122-1, AR122-2, and AR122-3 corresponding to each of yogurt, apple AP, and lemon LM are arranged.
この場合、ヨーグルトは量り売り商品ではない。このため、ヨーグルトの登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２−１においては、コメント表示ＣＭにおいて「×１」と表示されていることで１個が登録済みとされるとともに、価格が１６０円であることが示されている。 In this case, yogurt is not a merchandise sold by weight. Therefore, in the yogurt registration list item AR122-1, one item is registered by displaying "x1" in the comment display CM, and the price is 160 yen. There is.
これに対して、リンゴＡＰ、レモンＬＭの各量り売り商品については、購入対象の商品について、「仮登録」の状態（仮登録状態）である。仮登録状態の商品とは、品目の入力は行われたが、未だ値付けが完了していない（計量待ちの状態でもある）商品である。 On the other hand, the apple AP and lemon LM products sold by weight are in the “temporary registration” state (temporary registration state) for the products to be purchased. A product in the provisionally registered state is a product in which the item has been input but the pricing has not been completed (it is also in the state of waiting for weighing).
このため、リンゴＡＰ、レモンＬＭの登録リスト項目においては、例えば「要計量」とのコメント表示ＣＭによって、計量による値付けが未だ行われていないことを示している。これに伴い、リンゴＡＰ、レモンＬＭの登録リスト項目においては、「？？円」との表示によって、価格について未確定であることが示されている。登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２−１、ＡＲ１２２−２においては、仮登録状態を示す所定の背景色が設定される。 For this reason, in the registration list items of apple AP and lemon LM, for example, a comment display CM saying "weighing required" indicates that pricing by weighing has not yet been performed. Along with this, in the registration list items of apple AP and lemon LM, the display of "?? Yen" indicates that the price is undecided. In the registration list items AR122-1 and AR122-2, a predetermined background color indicating the temporary registration state is set.
例では、客は量り売り商品として、レモンＬＭとリンゴＡＰとを仮登録している状況にある。この場合において、客が購入対象として品目を指定した量り売り商品は、レモンＬＭとリンゴＡＰとの２種類であった。この場合の客は、レモンＬＭとリンゴＡＰとのそれぞれについて計量することになる。そこで、客は、陳列されているレモンＬＭ、リンゴＡＰのうちから、それぞれ自分が購入しようとする分量（個数）を取り出すようにする。そして、取り出したレモンＬＭ、リンゴＡＰを持参し、客は、計量値付け装置２１０Ａに赴く。 In the example, the customer is in a situation where the lemon LM and the apple AP are provisionally registered as products sold by weight. In this case, there were two types of merchandise sold by weight for which the customer specified the item to be purchased: lemon LM and apple AP. In this case, the customer will weigh each of the lemon LM and the apple AP. Therefore, the customer tries to take out the quantity (quantity) to be purchased from each of the displayed lemon LM and apple AP. Then, the customer goes to the weighing and pricing device 210A with the taken out lemon LM and apple AP.
図４５は、第２の実施形態の計量値付け装置２１０Ａを正面方向からみた外観例が示されている。同図に示されるように、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、客に向けて、客用ディスプレイ２１０６、スキャナ２１０４、ラベル排出口１１０ａ、計量部２１０９の秤台１０９ｂが設けられる。 FIG. 45 shows an example of the appearance of the weighing and pricing device 210A of the second embodiment as viewed from the front direction. As shown in the figure, the weighing pricing device 210A is provided with a customer display 2106, a scanner 2104, a label discharge port 110a, and a weighing platform 109b of the weighing unit 2109 toward the customer.
計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、待機状態のもとで、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に待機画面を表示させた状態である。同図では、待機画面を拡大して示している。 The weighing pricing device 210A is in a state in which the standby screen is displayed on the customer display 2106 under the standby state. In the figure, the standby screen is enlarged and shown.
待機画面においては、コード読取案内領域ＡＲ２１と計量案内領域ＡＲ２２とが配置されている。 On the standby screen, the code reading guide area AR21 and the measurement guide area AR22 are arranged.
コード読取案内領域ＡＲ２１は、携帯端末２４０を利用して商品登録を行う客に向けた案内に応じた表示が行われる。コード読取案内領域ＡＲ２１においては、例えば二次元コードによる接続情報コードＣＤが表示されたうえで、購入対象の商品の登録（計量と、計量結果に基づく値付けとを含む）を開始するにあたり、まず、携帯端末２４０に、接続情報コードＣＤを読み取らせることを客に案内する表示が行われる。 The code reading guidance area AR21 is displayed according to the guidance for the customer who registers the product using the mobile terminal 240. In the code reading guide area AR21, for example, after displaying the connection information code CD by the two-dimensional code, when starting the registration of the product to be purchased (including weighing and pricing based on the weighing result), first , The mobile terminal 240 is displayed to guide the customer to read the connection information code CD.
計量案内領域ＡＲ２２は、携帯端末２４０を買い物に利用しない客に向けた案内に応じた表示が行われる。計量案内領域ＡＲ２２においては、購入対象の商品の登録を開始するにあたり、購入対象の商品のうちの１品目に応じた商品を、計量部２１０９の秤台１０９ｂに載せることを、客に向けて案内する表示が行われる。 The weighing guidance area AR22 is displayed according to guidance for customers who do not use the mobile terminal 240 for shopping. In the weighing guide area AR22, when starting the registration of the product to be purchased, the customer is instructed to place the product corresponding to one of the products to be purchased on the scale 109b of the weighing unit 2109. Is displayed.
この場合の客は、携帯端末２４０を利用して商品登録を行う。そこで、購入対象の量り売り商品の登録の開始にあたり、客は、コード読取案内領域ＡＲ２１に表示されている接続情報コードＣＤを携帯端末２４０により読み取らせる操作を行う。図４６Ａは、携帯端末２４０が接続情報コードＣＤを読み取っているときのタッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６における商品登録画面の態様の一例を示している。 In this case, the customer registers the product using the mobile terminal 240. Therefore, at the start of registration of the merchandise sold by weight to be purchased, the customer performs an operation of causing the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code CD displayed in the code reading guidance area AR21. FIG. 46A shows an example of the mode of the product registration screen on the touch panel display 2406 when the mobile terminal 240 is reading the connection information code CD.
携帯端末２４０は、上記のようにして接続情報コードＣＤを読み取ったことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０Ａとの通信を確立させる。このように計量値付け装置２１０Ａと携帯端末２４０とが通信可能に接続されることによっては、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、接続先の携帯端末２４０によって通信が専有される状態となる。通信が専有されている状態では、携帯端末２４０は、他の携帯端末２４０との接続を行わない。 The mobile terminal 240 establishes communication with the weighing and pricing device 210A in response to reading the connection information code CD as described above. When the weighing and pricing device 210A and the mobile terminal 240 are communicably connected in this way, the weighing and pricing device 210A is in a state in which communication is exclusively occupied by the connected mobile terminal 240. In the state where communication is exclusively used, the mobile terminal 240 does not connect to another mobile terminal 240.
計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、携帯端末２４０を買い物に利用しない顧客が、例えば秤台１０９ｂに商品を載せたことで、計量を開始させた場合には、以降において携帯端末２４０との相互通信の確立を禁止してもよい。仮に相互通信の確立を禁止しない場合、相互通信の確立を試みても失敗に終わることとなるが、タイムアウトする迄の時間を費やすこととなるため、上記の宣言を検出してから実際に計量可能となる迄に時間が掛かることとなる。これに対し、相互通信の確立を禁止すれば、本来は不要な時間（タイムアウトする迄の時間）を節約し、計量が直ちに行われるようになる。例えば、ラベルの印刷が完了した後に、上記の禁止を解除するように動作してもよい。 When a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 for shopping starts weighing by, for example, placing a product on the scale 109b, the weighing pricing device 210A establishes mutual communication with the mobile terminal 240 thereafter. May be prohibited. If the establishment of mutual communication is not prohibited, even if an attempt to establish mutual communication is attempted, it will end in failure, but it will take time until the timeout occurs, so it is possible to actually measure after detecting the above declaration. It will take some time before it becomes. On the other hand, if the establishment of mutual communication is prohibited, the originally unnecessary time (time until time-out) is saved, and the measurement is performed immediately. For example, after the label printing is completed, the above prohibition may be lifted.
携帯端末２４０は、計量値付け装置２１０Ａとの通信が確立されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０Ａに対して、仮登録状態の量り売り商品の情報を送信する。具体的に、この場合の携帯端末２４０は、仮登録状態の量り売り商品の情報として、レモンＬＭ、リンゴＡＰの情報を送信する。 The mobile terminal 240 transmits information on the merchandise sold by weight in the provisionally registered state to the weighing pricing device 210A in response to the establishment of communication with the weighing pricing device 210A. Specifically, the mobile terminal 240 in this case transmits information on the lemon LM and the apple AP as information on the products sold by weight in the provisionally registered state.
携帯端末２４０は、計量値付け装置２１０Ａとの通信が確立されたことに応じて、タッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６に、値付け操作画面を表示させる。図４６Ｂは、携帯端末２４０のタッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６に表示される値付け操作画面の一例を示している。 The mobile terminal 240 causes the touch panel display 2406 to display the pricing operation screen in response to the establishment of communication with the weighing and pricing device 210A. FIG. 46B shows an example of a pricing operation screen displayed on the touch panel display 2406 of the mobile terminal 240.
計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、携帯端末２４０との通信が確立されたことに応じて、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に値付け操作画面を表示させる。 The weighing and pricing device 210A causes the customer display 2106 to display the pricing operation screen in response to the establishment of communication with the mobile terminal 240.
図４６Ｃは、計量値付け装置２１０Ａの客用ディスプレイ２１０６に表示される値付け操作画面の一例を示している。 FIG. 46C shows an example of a pricing operation screen displayed on the customer display 2106 of the weighing pricing device 210A.
値付け操作画面においては、商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１（ＢＴ１１−１、ＢＴ１１−２）、が配置されている。商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１は、仮登録状態の商品ごとに対応し、登録（計量、値付け）対象とする商品を選択する操作が行われるボタンである。図４６Ｃでは、商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１のうち、商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１−１がリンゴＡＰに対応し、商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１−２がレモンＬＭに対応した例が示されている。 On the pricing operation screen, product selection buttons BT11 (BT11-1, BT11-2) are arranged. The product selection button BT11 is a button that corresponds to each product in the provisionally registered state and performs an operation of selecting a product to be registered (weighed, priced). FIG. 46C shows an example in which the product selection button BT11-1 corresponds to the apple AP and the product selection button BT11-2 corresponds to the lemon LM among the product selection buttons BT11.
値付け操作画面においては、登録結果エリアＡＲ３１が配置されている。登録結果エリアＡＲ３１には、登録対象とされた量り売り商品についての重量単価、計測された重量、これまでに登録が完了した量り売り商品の合計金額が示される。 On the pricing operation screen, the registration result area AR31 is arranged. In the registration result area AR31, the unit weight of the products sold by weight, the measured weight, and the total amount of the products sold by weight that have been registered so far are shown.
値付け操作画面においては、中止ボタンＢＴ１２、検索ボタンＢＴ１３が配置されている。中止ボタンＢＴ１２は、仮登録状態の量り売り商品の計量、値付けによる登録の中止を指示する操作が行われるボタンである。検索ボタンＢＴ１３は、例えば仮登録が行われていないことで、商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１により示されていない他の商品もさらに登録したい場合に、他の商品の検索を指示するにあたって操作されるボタンである。 On the pricing operation screen, a stop button BT12 and a search button BT13 are arranged. The cancel button BT12 is a button for instructing the cancellation of registration by weighing and pricing the merchandise sold by weight in the provisionally registered state. The search button BT13 is a button that is operated to instruct a search for another product when, for example, temporary registration has not been performed and it is desired to further register other products not indicated by the product selection button BT11. ..
値付け操作画面においては、「商品を選択してその商品を台に載せてください」のように、登録対象とする商品に応じた商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１を操作してから登録対象の商品を秤台１０９ｂに載せてもらうように客に向けて案内するメッセージＭＳ１が表示されている。 On the pricing operation screen, operate the product selection button BT11 according to the product to be registered, such as "Select a product and place the product on the table", and then weigh the product to be registered. A message MS1 is displayed to guide the customer to put it on 109b.
同図では、携帯端末２４０において、計量値付け装置２１０Ａに表示されているのと同様の値付け操作画面が表示されている。これにより、客は、仮登録状態の商品を計量、値付けして登録する操作を、携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０Ａとのいずれに対しても行うことができる。 In the figure, the mobile terminal 240 displays a pricing operation screen similar to that displayed on the weighing pricing device 210A. As a result, the customer can perform the operation of weighing, pricing, and registering the temporarily registered product for both the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210A.
携帯端末２４０においては、値付け操作画面を表示せずに商品登録画面等が表示されるようにしてよい。 In the mobile terminal 240, the product registration screen or the like may be displayed without displaying the pricing operation screen.
以降の説明では、客は計量値付け装置２１０Ａに表示された値付け操作画面を操作して登録を行う場合を例に挙げる。 In the following description, a case where the customer operates the pricing operation screen displayed on the weighing pricing device 210A to perform registration will be given as an example.
ここで、客は、仮登録状態のリンゴＡＰとレモンＬＭのうち、まず、リンゴＡＰから登録することとした。この場合、客は、値付け操作画面においてリンゴＡＰに対応する商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１−１を操作する。図４７Ａは、客がリンゴＡＰに対応する商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１−１を操作した状態を示している。商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１−１は操作によりタッチされたことに応じて強調表示される。このような商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１−１に対する操作によって、リンゴＡＰが登録対象として指定される。 Here, the customer decides to first register from the apple AP among the apple AP and the lemon LM in the provisionally registered state. In this case, the customer operates the product selection button BT11-1 corresponding to the apple AP on the pricing operation screen. FIG. 47A shows a state in which the customer operates the product selection button BT11-1 corresponding to the apple AP. The product selection button BT11-1 is highlighted according to the touch by the operation. By such an operation on the product selection button BT11-1, the apple AP is designated as the registration target.
リンゴＡＰが登録対象として指定されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０Ａにおける客用ディスプレイ２１０６の表示は、値付け操作画面から計量案内画面に遷移する。図４７Ｂは、計量案内画面の一例を示している。計量案内画面においては、計量案内エリアＡＲ３２が配置される。計量案内画面においては、登録結果エリアＡＲ３１、中止ボタンＢＴ１２、検索ボタンＢＴ１３が、値付け操作画面から継続して配置される。 In response to the fact that the apple AP is designated as the registration target, the display of the customer display 2106 in the weighing pricing device 210A transitions from the pricing operation screen to the weighing guidance screen. FIG. 47B shows an example of the weighing guide screen. On the weighing guide screen, the weighing guide area AR32 is arranged. On the weighing guide screen, the registration result area AR31, the stop button BT12, and the search button BT13 are continuously arranged from the pricing operation screen.
計量案内エリアＡＲ３２においては、客に向けて、リンゴＡＰを秤台１０９ｂに載せてもらうように案内する内容が表示される。具体的に、計量案内エリアＡＲ３２においては、「商品を載せてください」とのメッセージＭＳ２と、「リンゴ」との文字及びリンゴの絵柄が表示されている。計量案内エリアＡＲ３２においては、戻るボタンＢＴ１４が配置されている。戻るボタンＢＴ１４は、前画面に戻す操作が行われるボタンである。 In the weighing guide area AR32, the content of guiding the customer to place the apple AP on the scale 109b is displayed. Specifically, in the weighing guide area AR32, the message MS2 "Please put the product", the characters "apple" and the picture of the apple are displayed. In the weighing guide area AR32, the back button BT14 is arranged. The back button BT14 is a button on which an operation to return to the previous screen is performed.
この場合の客は、同じ図４７Ｂに示されるように、秤台１０９ｂに登録対象のリンゴＡＰを載せるようにする。 In this case, the customer places the apple AP to be registered on the scale 109b as shown in FIG. 47B.
秤台１０９ｂに登録対象のリンゴＡＰが載せられて計量部２１０９が計測を行ったことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０Ａの客用ディスプレイ２１０６の表示は、計量案内画面から計量結果画面に遷移する。図４８Ａは、計量結果画面の一例を示している。計量結果画面においては、ラベル発行案内エリアＡＲ３３が配置される。計量結果画面においては、登録結果エリアＡＲ３１、中止ボタンＢＴ１２、検索ボタンＢＴ１３が、計量案内画面から継続して配置される。計量結果画面の登録結果エリアＡＲ３１においては、リンゴＡＰについて計測された重量と、リンゴＡＰの重量単価と、計測された重量に応じて算出されたリンゴＡＰの価格とが示される。 The display of the customer display 2106 of the weighing pricing device 210A shifts from the weighing guide screen to the weighing result screen in response to the apple AP to be registered being placed on the scale table 109b and the weighing unit 2109 performing the measurement. .. FIG. 48A shows an example of the measurement result screen. On the measurement result screen, the label issuance guidance area AR33 is arranged. On the measurement result screen, the registration result area AR31, the stop button BT12, and the search button BT13 are continuously arranged from the measurement guidance screen. In the registration result area AR31 of the weighing result screen, the weight measured for the apple AP, the weight unit price of the apple AP, and the price of the apple AP calculated according to the measured weight are shown.
ラベル発行案内エリアＡＲ３３には、例えば「プリントボタンを押してください」のように、リンゴＡＰの値付け結果が反映されたラベル（単品ラベル）の発行のためにラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１５を操作してもらうことを客に促すメッセージＭＳ３が表示されている。ラベル発行案内エリアＡＲ３３には、今回のラベル発行の対象とされた商品がリンゴＡＰであることを示す「リンゴ」との文字やリンゴの絵柄が表示されている。ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１５は、ラベル発行案内エリアＡＲ３３内に配置されている。ラベル発行案内エリアＡＲ３３には、前画面に戻す操作が行われる戻るボタンＢＴ１４が配置されている。 Have the label issuance guide area AR33 operate the label issuance button BT15 to issue a label (single item label) that reflects the pricing result of the apple AP, for example, "Please press the print button". Message MS3 is displayed to prompt the customer. In the label issuance guidance area AR33, the characters "apple" indicating that the product for which the label is issued this time is an apple AP and an apple pattern are displayed. The label issuing button BT15 is arranged in the label issuing guidance area AR33. In the label issuing guidance area AR33, a back button BT14 for performing an operation to return to the previous screen is arranged.
この場合、客は、同じ図４８Ａに示されるように、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１５を操作する。ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１５が操作されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、リンゴＡＰについての値付け結果を反映した内容が印刷されたラベル（単品ラベル）を発行する。 In this case, the customer operates the label issuing button BT15 as shown in the same FIG. 48A. In response to the operation of the label issuing button BT15, the weighing pricing device 210A issues a label (single item label) on which the content reflecting the pricing result for the apple AP is printed.
ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１５が操作されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０Ａの客用ディスプレイ２１０６の表示は、計量結果画面からラベル貼付案内画面に遷移する。 In response to the operation of the label issuing button BT15, the display of the customer display 2106 of the weighing pricing device 210A shifts from the weighing result screen to the label affixing guidance screen.
図４８Ｂは、ラベル貼付案内画面の一例を示している。ラベル貼付案内画面においては、ラベル貼付案内エリアＡＲ３４が配置される。ラベル貼付案内画面においては、登録結果エリアＡＲ３１、中止ボタンＢＴ１２、検索ボタンＢＴ１３が、計量案内画面から継続して配置される。 FIG. 48B shows an example of a label sticking guide screen. On the label sticking guide screen, the label sticking guide area AR34 is arranged. On the label sticking guidance screen, the registration result area AR31, the stop button BT12, and the search button BT13 are continuously arranged from the measurement guidance screen.
ラベル貼付案内エリアＡＲ３４においては、計量値付け装置２１０Ａから発行されたラベルを、今回値付けが行われたリンゴＡＰを入れた袋に貼り付けてもらうように案内する内容の絵柄が表示されている。ラベル貼付案内エリアＡＲ３４において、例えば「ラベルを商品の袋に貼ってください」といったラベルの貼り付けを案内するメッセージが表示されてよい。 In the label affixing guidance area AR34, a pattern is displayed to guide the label issued by the weighing pricing device 210A to be affixed to the bag containing the apple AP that has been priced this time. .. In the label affixing guidance area AR34, a message for affixing the label, for example, "Please affix the label to the product bag" may be displayed.
上記のように仮登録状態の量り売り商品について値付け結果が得られ、ラベルが発行されるタイミングで、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、値付け結果が反映されたリンゴＡＰの商品登録情報を、携帯端末２４０に送信する。 As described above, when the pricing result is obtained for the product sold by weight in the provisionally registered state and the label is issued, the weighing pricing device 210A sends the product registration information of the apple AP reflecting the pricing result to the mobile terminal. Send to 240.
計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、商品登録情報を、通信回線を介して取引管理サーバ２５０に送信するようにしてもよい。 The weighing pricing device 210A may transmit the product registration information to the transaction management server 250 via the communication line.
上記のようにしてリンゴＡＰのラベルの発行が行われたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０Ａの客用ディスプレイ２１０６における表示は、ラベル貼付案内画面から値付け操作画面に遷移する。図４９Ａは、リンゴＡＰのラベルの発行に応じて表示された値付け操作画面の態様例を示している。値付け操作画面においては、図４６Ｃの値付け操作画面において表示されていたリンゴＡＰの商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１−１が消去されている。 In response to the issuance of the apple AP label as described above, the display on the customer display 2106 of the weighing and pricing device 210A transitions from the label affixing guidance screen to the pricing operation screen. FIG. 49A shows an example of a mode of the pricing operation screen displayed according to the issuance of the label of the apple AP. On the pricing operation screen, the product selection button BT11-1 of the apple AP displayed on the pricing operation screen of FIG. 46C is deleted.
リンゴＡＰの商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１−１は、消去に代えて、例えばグレーアウトなどにより操作が不可であることを示すようにして表示されていてもよい。つまり、値付け操作画面は、仮登録状態の量り売り商品の操作のみが可能なようにされている。 The product selection button BT11-1 of the apple AP may be displayed so as to indicate that the operation is impossible, for example, by graying out instead of erasing. That is, on the pricing operation screen, only the operation of the merchandise sold by weight in the temporarily registered state is possible.
値付け操作画面が表示されているときには、携帯端末２４０においても、同図と同様の操作が可能な値付け操作画面が表示されてよい。 When the pricing operation screen is displayed, the mobile terminal 240 may also display the pricing operation screen capable of performing the same operation as in the figure.
値付け操作画面が表示された状態のもとで、客は、未だ仮登録状態であるレモンＬＭを登録（計量、値付け）対象とするために、商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１−２を操作する。 With the pricing operation screen displayed, the customer operates the product selection button BT11-2 in order to register (weigh, price) the lemon LM, which is still in the provisionally registered state.
このときに客が中止ボタンＢＴ１２を操作すれば、レモンＬＭの仮登録状態は解除され、量り売り商品としてはリンゴＡＰのみが登録された状態となる。この場合、客は、陳列場所から持ってきたレモンＬＭについては、陳列場所に戻すか、保留商品として持ったままとしておいて、精算時に店員に渡すようにされてよい。 At this time, if the customer operates the stop button BT12, the temporary registration state of the lemon LM is canceled, and only the apple AP is registered as a product sold by weight. In this case, the customer may return the lemon LM brought from the display place to the display place or keep it as a reserved item and hand it to the clerk at the time of payment.
客は、レモンＬＭに対応する商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１−２を操作した後、先に説明したリンゴＡＰと同様の手順で、レモンＬＭの計量、値付けと、ラベルの発行を計量値付け装置２１０Ａに行わせる。レモンＬＭについてのラベルの発行が行われたことに応じて、仮登録状態にあった全ての量り売り商品についての計量、値付け（登録）が完了したことになる。 After operating the product selection button BT11-2 corresponding to the lemon LM, the customer uses the same procedure as the apple AP described above to weigh and price the lemon LM and issue a label to the weighing pricing device 210A. Let me do it. In response to the issuance of the label for Lemon LM, the weighing and pricing (registration) of all the products sold by weight that were in the provisionally registered state have been completed.
仮登録状態にあった全ての量り売り商品についての登録が完了したことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０Ａの客用ディスプレイ２１０６の表示は待機画面（図４５）に戻るようにされる。 The display of the customer display 2106 of the weighing and pricing device 210A is returned to the standby screen (FIG. 45) in response to the completion of registration of all the products sold by weight that were in the provisionally registered state.
仮登録状態にあった全ての量り売り商品についての登録が完了したことに応じて、携帯端末２４０のタッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６に表示される商品登録画面は、例えば図４９Ｂに示される状態となる。 The product registration screen displayed on the touch panel display 2406 of the mobile terminal 240 is in the state shown in FIG. 49B, for example, in response to the completion of registration of all the products sold by weight that were in the provisional registration state.
商品登録画面の商品登録状況エリアＡＲ１２は、図４４との比較では、以下のように変化している。つまり、レモンＬＭとリンゴＡＰとに対応する登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２−１、ＡＲ１２２−２は、仮登録であることを示す状態から登録済みであることを示す状態となっている。具体的に、登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２−１、ＡＲ１２２−２のそれぞれにおける背景色は、仮登録状態を示す色から登録済みを示す色に変化している。登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２−１、ＡＲ１２２−２のそれぞれにおいて値付け処理によって確定された価格が示される。登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２−１、ＡＲ１２２−２のそれぞれにおけるコメント表示ＣＭは「要計量」から「計量」に変化している。「計量」とのコメント表示ＣＭは、対応の商品が量り売り商品であって計量、値付けの処理によって登録されたものであることを示す。このため、コメント表示ＣＭは、「計量」との表示に代えて、例えば「計量済み」、あるいは「登録済み」といった表示であってもよい。 The product registration status area AR12 on the product registration screen changes as follows in comparison with FIG. 44. That is, the registration list items AR122-1 and AR122-2 corresponding to the lemon LM and the apple AP are in a state indicating that they have been registered from a state indicating that they are provisionally registered. Specifically, the background color of each of the registration list items AR122-1 and AR122-2 has changed from a color indicating a provisional registration state to a color indicating registration. The prices determined by the pricing process are shown in each of the registration list items AR122-1 and AR122-2. The comment display CM in each of the registration list items AR122-1 and AR122-2 has changed from "weighing required" to "weighing". The comment display CM of "weighing" indicates that the corresponding product is a product sold by weight and registered by the processing of weighing and pricing. Therefore, the comment display CM may be displayed as, for example, "weighed" or "registered" instead of the display of "weighed".
商品登録状況エリアＡＲ１２において、計量済みとされた量り売り商品については、計量された重量、価格、単価等の値付け処理の結果に関する情報等が表示されるようにしてよい。 In the product registration status area AR12, for the products sold by weight that have been weighed, information regarding the result of the pricing process such as the weighed weight, price, and unit price may be displayed.
あるいは、対応の商品が登録済みとなったことに応じて、「要計量」コメント表示ＣＭ自体が消去されてもよい。このような場合においても、商品登録状況エリアＡＲ１２において、量り売り商品と量り売り商品ではない商品とで視覚的に区別できるように、登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２の背景色等の態様を変更することが好ましい。 Alternatively, the "weighing required" comment display CM itself may be deleted depending on the fact that the corresponding product has been registered. Even in such a case, it is preferable to change the mode such as the background color of the registration list item AR122 so that the product registered by weight and the product not sold by weight can be visually distinguished in the product registration status area AR12.
携帯端末２４０にて表示される商品登録画面は、複数の仮登録状態の量り売り商品の登録（計量）が１つずつ完了されていくごとに、登録が完了された量り売り商品の登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２が登録済み（計量済み）であることを示す状態に変化していくようにされてよい。 On the product registration screen displayed on the mobile terminal 240, every time the registration (weighing) of a plurality of provisionally registered products by weight is completed, the registration list item AR122 of the registered products by weight is displayed. It may be changed to a state indicating that it is registered (weighed).
図５０のフローチャートを参照して、第２の実施形態の計量値付け装置２１０Ａ、携帯端末２４０及び取引管理サーバ２５０が、一取引における量り売り商品の登録に関連して実行する処理手順例を説明する。 With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 50, an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing pricing device 210A, the mobile terminal 240, and the transaction management server 250 of the second embodiment in connection with the registration of the merchandise sold by weight in one transaction will be described. ..
まず、客が携帯端末２４０を用いて購入対象とする量り売り商品の品目の入力を行う場合に対応する携帯端末２４０の処理手順例を説明する。 First, an example of a processing procedure of the mobile terminal 240 corresponding to the case where the customer inputs the item of the merchandise to be purchased by weight using the mobile terminal 240 will be described.
ステップＳ９２０１：携帯端末２４０は、タッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６に商品登録画面を表示させている状態のもとで、商品情報コード３００１（図４４）の読み取りが行われるのを待機する。 Step S9201: The mobile terminal 240 waits for the product information code 3001 (FIG. 44) to be read while the product registration screen is displayed on the touch panel display 2406.
ステップＳ９２０２：商品情報コード３００１の読み取りが行われたことに応じて、携帯端末２４０は、読み取られた商品情報コードから商品情報を取得する。携帯端末２４０は、商品情報を取得することにより、客の購入対象の商品の品目を入力したことになる。 Step S9202: In response to the reading of the product information code 3001, the mobile terminal 240 acquires the product information from the read product information code. By acquiring the product information, the mobile terminal 240 inputs the item of the product to be purchased by the customer.
ステップＳ９２０３：携帯端末２４０は、ステップＳ９２０２により取得された商品情報の商品を示す登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２を、商品登録画面の商品登録状況エリアＡＲ１２に追加する。このように商品情報コード３００１の読み取りに応じて取得された商品情報の商品は仮登録商品として扱われる。仮登録商品の登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２は、図４４の登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２−２、ＡＲ１２２−３のように、仮登録であることを示す背景色が設定され、コメント表示ＣＭにおいては「要計量」との表示により、値付けが未だ行われていないことを示すようにされる。 Step S9203: The mobile terminal 240 adds the registration list item AR122 indicating the product of the product information acquired in step S9202 to the product registration status area AR12 on the product registration screen. The product of the product information acquired in response to the reading of the product information code 3001 in this way is treated as a provisionally registered product. The registration list item AR122 of the provisionally registered product is set with a background color indicating that it is provisionally registered, as in the registration list items AR122-2 and AR122-3 of FIG. 44, and is described as "weighing required" in the comment display CM. Is displayed to indicate that pricing has not yet taken place.
ステップＳ９２０３の処理の後はステップＳ９２０１に処理が戻される。 After the processing of step S9203, the processing is returned to step S9201.
次に、計量値付け装置２１０Ａが仮登録商品の値付けに対応して実行する処理手順例を説明する。 Next, an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing pricing device 210A in response to pricing of the provisionally registered product will be described.
ステップＳ９１０１：計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、客による計量、値付けの操作が行われていない状態では待機モードを設定する。待機モードにおいて計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に待機画面を表示させる。待機画面には、図４５に示したように、接続情報コードＣＤが表示されている。 Step S9101: The weighing and pricing device 210A sets the standby mode when the customer has not performed the weighing and pricing operations. In the standby mode, the weighing pricing device 210A causes the customer display 2106 to display a standby screen. As shown in FIG. 45, the connection information code CD is displayed on the standby screen.
ステップＳ９１０２：待機状態のもとで、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、接続情報コードＣＤを読み取った携帯端末２４０との接続処理が開始されたか否かを判定する。 Step S9102: Under the standby state, the weighing and pricing device 210A determines whether or not the connection process with the mobile terminal 240 that has read the connection information code CD has been started.
ステップＳ９１０３：ステップＳ９１０２にて接続処理が開始されないと判定された場合、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、客が商品を秤台１０９ｂに載せたことにより計量部２１０９が計量を開始したか否かを判定する。 Step S9103: When it is determined in step S9102 that the connection process is not started, the weighing pricing device 210A determines whether or not the weighing unit 2109 has started weighing due to the customer placing the product on the weighing platform 109b. do.
ステップＳ９１０４：ステップＳ９１０３にて計量部２１０９が計量を開始したことが判定された場合、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、計量されている商品について、携帯端末２４０を利用しない取引に対応する値付け処理を実行する。ステップＳ９１０４の処理の後は、ステップＳ９１０１に処理が戻される。ステップＳ９１０１に処理が戻されることで、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、待機モードを設定し、接続情報コードＣＤを含む待機画面を表示させる。 Step S9104: When it is determined in step S9103 that the weighing unit 2109 has started weighing, the weighing pricing device 210A performs a pricing process corresponding to a transaction that does not use the mobile terminal 240 for the measured product. Run. After the processing in step S9104, the processing is returned to step S9101. When the process is returned to step S9101, the weighing and pricing device 210A sets the standby mode and displays the standby screen including the connection information code CD.
携帯端末２４０を利用しない取引に対応する、ステップＳ９０１４の値付け処理として、計量値付け装置２１０は、値付け対象の商品を指定（選択）する操作が行われるための商品選択画面を表示させる。接続情報コードＣＤは、商品選択画面が表示されたことに応じて消去されてよい。即ち、接続情報コードＣＤは、計量部２１０９が計量を行ったことに応じて消去されてよい。 As a pricing process in step S9014 corresponding to a transaction that does not use the mobile terminal 240, the weighing pricing device 210 displays a product selection screen for performing an operation of designating (selecting) a product to be priced. The connection information code CD may be deleted when the product selection screen is displayed. That is, the connection information code CD may be erased according to the measurement performed by the measuring unit 2109.
商品選択画面は、例えば量り売り商品に分類される商品ごとのプリセットキーが配置されることで、量り売り商品を選択可能とされた画面である。量り売り商品には、計量された重量に応じて個数が算出され、算出された個数と単価に応じて価格が算出される商品も含まれてよい。 The product selection screen is a screen in which a product for sale by weight can be selected by arranging preset keys for each product classified as a product for sale by weight, for example. The products sold by weight may include products in which the quantity is calculated according to the weighed weight and the price is calculated according to the calculated quantity and the unit price.
客は、秤台１０９ｂに載せた商品に対応するプリセットキーを商品選択画面から見つけ、見つけたプリセットキーを操作する。計量値付け装置２１０は、操作されたプリセットキーが対応する商品を値付け対象として設定する。 The customer finds a preset key corresponding to the product placed on the scale 109b from the product selection screen, and operates the found preset key. The weighing pricing device 210 sets the product corresponding to the operated preset key as a pricing target.
計量値付け装置２１０は、操作されたプリセットキーが対応する商品を値付け対象として設定すると、計量部２１０９の計量結果に基づいて値付け対象の商品の価格を算出する。 When the measured price setting device 210 sets the product corresponding to the operated preset key as the price target, the weighing unit 210 calculates the price of the product to be priced based on the weighing result of the measuring unit 2109.
価格が算出されると、計量値付け装置２１０は、図４８Ａに準じた態様で、ラベルの発行の操作を客に案内する内容を有し、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１５が配置された計量結果画面を表示する。 When the price is calculated, the weighing pricing device 210 has a content of guiding the customer to the operation of issuing the label in a manner according to FIG. 48A, and displays the weighing result screen on which the label issuing button BT15 is arranged. do.
計量値付け装置２１０は、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１５が操作されたことに応じて、今回の値付け対象商品の値付け処理結果が反映されたラベル（単品ラベル）を発行させる。この後、計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ９１０１に処理を戻すことで待機モードなって、待機画面を表示する。 The weighing pricing device 210 issues a label (single item label) reflecting the pricing processing result of the product to be priced this time in response to the operation of the label issuing button BT15. After that, the weighing and pricing device 210 returns to the process in step S9101 to enter the standby mode and display the standby screen.
あるいは、計量値付け装置２１０は、待機画面において、量り売り商品のプリセットキーが配置された商品選択画面を接続情報コードＣＤとともに表示させてよい。携帯端末２４０を利用しない客は、値付け対象の商品を秤台１０９ｂに載せる前に、待機画面にて表示された商品選択画面におけるプリセットキーを操作することによって値付けを開始させることもできる。このように待機画面にて表示された商品選択画面におけるプリセットキーが操作された場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、操作されたプリセットキーが対応する商品を値付け対象として設定する。そのうえで、計量値付け装置２１０は、例えば図４７Ａに準じた態様の計量案内画面を表示し、値付け対象として設定された商品を秤台１０９ｂに載せてもらうように客に案内する。接続情報コードＣＤは、計量案内画面が表示されたことに応じて消去されてよい。 Alternatively, the weighing pricing device 210 may display the product selection screen on which the preset keys of the products sold by weight are arranged together with the connection information code CD on the standby screen. A customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 can also start pricing by operating a preset key on the product selection screen displayed on the standby screen before placing the product to be priced on the scale 109b. When the preset key on the product selection screen displayed on the standby screen is operated in this way, the weighing pricing device 210 sets the product corresponding to the operated preset key as the price target. Then, the weighing and pricing device 210 displays, for example, a weighing guide screen according to FIG. 47A, and guides the customer to place the product set as the pricing target on the scale 109b. The connection information code CD may be erased when the weighing guide screen is displayed.
上記の計量案内画面を表示させた計量値付け装置２１０は、客が値付け対象の商品を秤台１０９ｂに載せたことに応じて、計量部２１０９の計量結果に基づいて値付け対象の商品の価格を算出する。価格が算出されると、計量値付け装置２１０は、図４８Ａに準じた態様で計量結果画面を表示する。計量値付け装置２１０は、計量結果画面において配置されたラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１５が操作されるとラベル（単品ラベル）を発行し、ステップＳ９１０１に処理を戻すことにより待機モードなって待機画面を表示する。 The weighing and pricing device 210 that displays the above weighing guide screen determines that the product to be priced is priced based on the weighing result of the weighing unit 2109 in response to the customer placing the product to be priced on the weighing platform 109b. Calculate the price. When the price is calculated, the weighing pricing device 210 displays the weighing result screen in a manner according to FIG. 48A. The weighing pricing device 210 issues a label (single item label) when the label issuing button BT15 arranged on the weighing result screen is operated, and returns the process to step S9101 to enter the standby mode and display the standby screen.
このようして、携帯端末２４０を利用しない客は、値付け対象とする商品を秤台１０９ｂに載せる、あるいは、待機画面にて表示される商品選択画面に対する操作により値付け対象とする商品を選択する操作を行うことで、値付けを開始させることができる。 In this way, the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 places the product to be priced on the scale 109b, or selects the product to be priced by operating the product selection screen displayed on the standby screen. You can start pricing by performing the operation.
ステップＳ９１０５：ステップＳ９１０２にて接続処理が開始されたことを判定した場合、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、当該開始された接続処理を実行し、携帯端末２４０との接続を確立させる。 Step S9105: When it is determined in step S9102 that the connection process has been started, the weighing and pricing device 210A executes the started connection process and establishes a connection with the mobile terminal 240.
ステップＳ９１０６：接続が確立されると、携帯端末２４０は、仮登録商品情報を送信する。計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、送信された仮登録商品情報を取得する。仮登録商品情報は、携帯端末２４０が商品情報コード３００１を読み取ったことに応じて品目が入力された、リンゴＡＰ、レモンＬＭ等の量り売り商品である。 Step S9106: When the connection is established, the mobile terminal 240 transmits the provisionally registered product information. The weighing pricing device 210A acquires the transmitted provisionally registered product information. The provisionally registered product information is a product sold by weight, such as an apple AP or a lemon LM, in which an item is input in response to the mobile terminal 240 reading the product information code 3001.
ステップＳ９１０７：仮登録商品情報を取得した計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に値付け操作画面（図４６Ｃ）を表示させる。値付け操作画面においては、取得された仮登録商品情報が示す仮登録商品ごとに対応する商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１が配置された画面であり、値付け操作として、仮登録商品のうちから値付け処理の対象とする１の仮登録商品を選択する操作が行われる。 Step S9107: The weighing pricing device 210A that has acquired the provisionally registered product information causes the customer display 2106 to display the pricing operation screen (FIG. 46C). The pricing operation screen is a screen in which the product selection button BT11 corresponding to each temporarily registered product indicated by the acquired temporarily registered product information is arranged, and as a pricing operation, the pricing process is performed from among the temporarily registered products. The operation of selecting the target 1 temporarily registered product is performed.
ここで、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、ステップＳ９１０２にて接続処理が開始されたことに応じた最初のステップＳ９０１７による値付け操作画面の表示に伴い、接続処理が開始されるまで表示されていた待機画面を消去することになる。待機画面の消去によっては、接続情報コードＣＤも消去される。つまり、ステップＳ９１０７の処理は、計量値付け装置２１０Ａが携帯端末２４０との接続を確立させたことに応じて、接続情報コードＣＤを消去する処理となる。 Here, the weighing and pricing device 210A is on standby until the connection process is started, along with the display of the price setting operation screen in the first step S9017 corresponding to the start of the connection process in step S9102. The screen will be erased. Depending on the deletion of the standby screen, the connection information code CD is also deleted. That is, the process of step S9107 is a process of erasing the connection information code CD in response to the measurement pricing device 210A establishing the connection with the mobile terminal 240.
ステップＳ９１０８：値付け操作画面を表示させた後、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、客の値付け操作に応じて値付け処理を実行する。つまり、客は、図４７Ａ、図４７Ｂにより説明したように、値付け操作画面における商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１を操作して値付け処理対象の仮登録商品を指定する。客は、値付け処理対象として指定した仮登録商品を秤台１０９ｂに載せ、計量部２１０９に計量を実行させる。計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、計量部２１０９により計量された重量と、ステップＳ９１０６にて取得された仮登録商品情報において示される重量単価とを利用して価格を算出する。 Step S9108: After displaying the pricing operation screen, the weighing pricing device 210A executes the pricing process according to the customer's pricing operation. That is, as described with reference to FIGS. 47A and 47B, the customer operates the product selection button BT11 on the pricing operation screen to specify the temporarily registered product to be priced. The customer places the temporarily registered product designated as the price processing target on the scale 109b and causes the weighing unit 2109 to perform the weighing. The weighing pricing device 210A calculates the price by using the weight measured by the weighing unit 2109 and the weight unit price indicated in the provisionally registered product information acquired in step S9106.
ステップＳ９１０９：ステップＳ９１０８の値付け処理により価格が確定されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に計量結果画面（図４８Ａ）を表示させる。計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、計量結果画面の登録結果エリアＡＲ３１において、計量された重量、重量単価、算出された価格が反映されるように表示を行う。 Step S9109: In response to the price being determined by the pricing process in step S9108, the weighing pricing device 210A causes the customer display 2106 to display the weighing result screen (FIG. 48A). The weighing pricing device 210A displays the weighed weight, the weight unit price, and the calculated price in the registration result area AR31 of the weighing result screen so as to be reflected.
ステップＳ９１１０：計量結果画面においてはラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１５が配置されている。客は、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１５を操作する。ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１５が操作されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、今回のステップＳ９０１８の値付け処理によって値付けされた商品に対応するラベルを発行する。 Step S9110: The label issuing button BT15 is arranged on the weighing result screen. The customer operates the label issuing button BT15. In response to the operation of the label issuing button BT15, the weighing pricing device 210A issues a label corresponding to the product priced by the pricing process in step S9018 this time.
計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、ステップＳ９１１０の処理として、例えばステップＳ９１０８による値付け処理が完了して価格が確定されたことに応じてラベルを発行するようにされてよい。この場合、計量結果画面におけるラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１５の表示は省略されてよい。 The weighing and pricing device 210A may be configured to issue a label as the process of step S9111, for example, when the pricing process of step S9108 is completed and the price is fixed. In this case, the display of the label issuing button BT15 on the weighing result screen may be omitted.
ステップＳ９１１１：計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、ステップＳ９１０８による値付け処理が完了して価格が確定されたことに応じて、携帯端末２４０に対して商品値付け情報を送信する。商品値付け情報には、今回のステップＳ９１０８による値付け処理の対象とされた商品についての値付け処理の結果が反映される。 Step S9111: The weighing pricing device 210A transmits the product pricing information to the mobile terminal 240 in response to the completion of the pricing process in step S9108 and the determination of the price. The product pricing information reflects the result of the pricing process for the product targeted for the price process in step S9108 this time.
ステップＳ９１１２：ステップＳ９１１１による商品値付け情報の送信の後、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、全ての仮登録商品についての値付け処理が完了したか否かを判定する。未だ値付け処理が完了していない商品が残っている場合、ステップＳ９１０７に処理が戻される。この場合、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、ステップＳ９１０７にて、図４９に例示したように値付け処理が完了した仮登録商品の商品選択ボタンＢＴ１１が操作不可の状態とされた値付け操作画面を表示させる。 Step S91112: After transmitting the product pricing information in step S9111, the weighing pricing device 210A determines whether or not the pricing processing for all the provisionally registered products has been completed. If there are still products for which the pricing process has not been completed, the process is returned to step S9107. In this case, in step S9107, the weighing and pricing device 210A displays a pricing operation screen in which the product selection button BT11 of the temporarily registered product for which the pricing process has been completed is in an inoperable state as illustrated in FIG. 49. Let me.
ステップＳ９１１３：ステップＳ９１１２にて全ての仮登録商品の値付け処理が完了したと判定された場合、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、ステップＳ９１０５により確立された携帯端末２４０との接続を切断する。 Step S9113: When it is determined in step S9112 that the pricing process of all the provisionally registered products is completed, the weighing pricing device 210A disconnects from the mobile terminal 240 established in step S9105.
携帯端末２４０との接続を切断した後は、ステップＳ９１０１に処理が戻される。つまり、待機画面が表示される。待機画面が表示されることにより、接続情報コードＣＤが表示される。つまり、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、携帯端末２４０との接続が切断されたことに応じて、次の携帯端末２４０との接続のために、接続情報コードＣＤを表示する。 After disconnecting from the mobile terminal 240, the process returns to step S9101. That is, the standby screen is displayed. By displaying the standby screen, the connection information code CD is displayed. That is, the weighing and pricing device 210A displays the connection information code CD for the next connection with the mobile terminal 240 in response to the disconnection from the mobile terminal 240.
次に、携帯端末２４０が、仮登録商品の値付けに関連して実行する処理手順例を説明する。 Next, an example of a processing procedure executed by the mobile terminal 240 in connection with the pricing of the provisionally registered product will be described.
ステップＳ９２１１：携帯端末２４０は、商品登録画面を表示させている状態のもとで、接続情報コードＣＤが読み取られるのを待機している。 Step S9211: The mobile terminal 240 is waiting for the connection information code CD to be read while the product registration screen is being displayed.
ステップＳ９２１２：客が携帯端末２４０により接続情報コードＣＤを読み取らせる操作を行うことで、携帯端末２４０は、接続情報コードＣＤの読み取りを行う。接続情 Step S9212: The mobile terminal 240 reads the connection information code CD by causing the customer to read the connection information code CD by the mobile terminal 240. Connection information
報コードＣＤの読み取りが行われたことに応じて、携帯端末２４０は、読み取った接続情報コードＣＤが示す接続手順に従って、計量値付け装置２１０Ａと通信可能に接続するための処理を計量値付け装置２１０Ａとの間で実行する。 In response to the reading of the information code CD, the mobile terminal 240 performs a process for communicably connecting to the weighing and pricing device 210A according to the connection procedure indicated by the read connection information code CD. Execute with 210A.
ステップＳ９２１３：ステップＳ９２１２の接続処理によって計量値付け装置２１０Ａとの接続が確立されると、携帯端末２４０は、仮登録商品情報を計量値付け装置２１０Ａに送信する。仮登録商品情報は、ステップＳ９２０１~Ｓ９２０３の処理によって品目の入力が行われた量り売り商品の情報である。 Step S9213: When the connection with the weighing and pricing device 210A is established by the connection process of step S9212, the mobile terminal 240 transmits the provisionally registered product information to the weighing and pricing device 210A. The provisionally registered product information is information on products sold by weight for which items have been input by the processes of steps S9201 to S9203.
ステップＳ９２１４：ステップＳ９２１３の処理の後、携帯端末２４０は、これまでの商品登録画面に代えて、値付け操作画面（図４６Ｂ）をタッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６に表示させる。 Step S9214: After the process of step S9213, the mobile terminal 240 causes the touch panel display 2406 to display the pricing operation screen (FIG. 46B) instead of the conventional product registration screen.
ステップＳ９２１５：携帯端末２４０は、ステップＳ９２１４による値付け操作画面の表示の後、ステップＳ９２１１により計量値付け装置２１０Ａから送信された商品値付け情報が受信されるのを待機する。携帯端末２４０は、商品値付け情報が受信されると、受信された商品値付け情報が示す値付け処理結果が反映された商品登録情報を、取引管理サーバ２５０に送信する。携帯端末２４０は、商品値付け情報が受信されたことに応じて、商品値付け情報が示す仮登録商品についての値付けが完了したと判定する。 Step S9215: The mobile terminal 240 waits for the product pricing information transmitted from the weighing pricing device 210A in step S9211 to be received after the display of the pricing operation screen in step S9214. When the product pricing information is received, the mobile terminal 240 transmits the product registration information reflecting the pricing processing result indicated by the received product pricing information to the transaction management server 250. The mobile terminal 240 determines that the pricing of the temporarily registered product indicated by the product pricing information has been completed in response to the receipt of the product pricing information.
ステップＳ９２１６：ステップＳ９２１５の処理の後、携帯端末２４０は、全ての仮登録商品についての値付け処理が完了したか否かを判定する。 Step S9216: After the process of step S9215, the mobile terminal 240 determines whether or not the pricing process for all the provisionally registered products has been completed.
未だ値付け処理が完了していない商品が残っている場合、ステップＳ９２１４に処理が戻される。この場合、携帯端末２４０は、ステップＳ９２１４にて、これまで表示されていた値付け操作画面について、値付け処理が完了した仮登録商品の商品選択ボタンが操作不可の状態となるように更新する。 If there are still products for which the pricing process has not been completed, the process is returned to step S9214. In this case, in step S9214, the mobile terminal 240 updates the pricing operation screen that has been displayed so far so that the product selection button of the temporarily registered product for which the pricing process has been completed becomes inoperable.
ステップＳ９２１７：ステップＳ９２１６にて全ての仮登録商品についての値付け処理が完了したことが判定された場合、携帯端末２４０は、タッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６に商品登録画面を表示させる。 Step S9217: When it is determined in step S9216 that the pricing process for all the temporarily registered products is completed, the mobile terminal 240 causes the touch panel display 2406 to display the product registration screen.
次に、取引管理サーバ２５０が実行する処理手順例を説明する。 Next, an example of the processing procedure executed by the transaction management server 250 will be described.
ステップＳ９３０１：取引管理サーバ２５０は、ステップＳ９２１５により携帯端末２４０から送信される商品登録情報が受信されるのを待機している。 Step S9301: The transaction management server 250 is waiting for receiving the product registration information transmitted from the mobile terminal 240 in step S9215.
ステップＳ９３０２：商品登録情報が受信されると、取引管理サーバ２５０は、受信された商品登録情報を、今回の取引に対応するカート情報に登録（追加）する。この際、取引管理サーバ２５０は、受信された商品登録情報に含まれるのと同じカート識別情報に対応付けられたカート情報を検索し、検索されたカート情報に商品登録情報を登録する。ステップＳ９３０２の処理が行われたことにより、１の商品についての仮登録状態が解消され、登録が完了する。ステップＳ９３０２の処理の後は、ステップＳ９３０１に処理が戻される。 Step S9302: When the product registration information is received, the transaction management server 250 registers (adds) the received product registration information to the cart information corresponding to the current transaction. At this time, the transaction management server 250 searches for the cart information associated with the same cart identification information included in the received product registration information, and registers the product registration information in the searched cart information. By performing the process of step S9302, the temporary registration state for one product is canceled, and the registration is completed. After the processing of step S9302, the processing is returned to step S9301.
以下、第２の実施形態の第６の例に対応する変形例を説明する。 Hereinafter, a modified example corresponding to the sixth example of the second embodiment will be described.
［第６変形例］ [6th variant]
第２の実施形態の第６の例において、計量値付け装置２１０Ａによる値付け対象の商品（仮登録商品）の商品情報（仮登録商品情報）の取得は、携帯端末２４０から送信させた仮登録商品情報の受信に限定されない。 In the sixth example of the second embodiment, the acquisition of the product information (temporary registered product information) of the product (temporary registered product) to be priced by the weighing pricing device 210A is the temporary registration transmitted from the mobile terminal 240. Not limited to receiving product information.
例えば、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に量り売り商品ごとに対応するプリセットキーを配置した商品選択画面を表示可能とされてよい。客は、表示された商品選択画面にて配置されたプリセットキーを操作することにより、計量値付け装置２１０Ａによる値付け対象の商品を指定することができる。計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、操作されたプリセットキーが対応する商品の商品情報を、仮登録商品情報として取得するようにされてよい。 For example, the weighing pricing device 210A may be capable of displaying a product selection screen in which a preset key corresponding to each product sold by weight is arranged on the customer display 2106. The customer can specify the product to be priced by the weighing pricing device 210A by operating the preset key arranged on the displayed product selection screen. The weighing pricing device 210A may be adapted to acquire the product information of the product corresponding to the operated preset key as the provisionally registered product information.
この場合には、携帯端末２４０から計量値付け装置２１０Ａに値付け対象の商品の商品情報を送信する必要は無い。そこで、この場合の計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、待機画面にて接続情報コードＣＤを表示させるのではなく、例えばプリセットキー操作に応じた所定のタイミングで、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に接続情報コードＣＤを表示させるようにしてよい。例えば、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、プリセットキーが配置された商品選択画面を表示させたタイミングで接続情報コードＣＤを表示させてよい。あるいは、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、１つ目の仮登録商品を選択するプリセットキーの操作が行われてから最後の仮登録商品を選択するプリセットキーの操作が行われるまでにおける所定のタイミングで、接続情報コードＣＤを表示させてよい。あるいは、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、購入対象の量り売り商品の全てに対応するプリセットキーの操作が完了したタイミングで接続情報コードＣＤを表示させてよい。あるいは、計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、購入対象の量り売り商品の全てに対応するプリセットキーの操作が完了した後において、少なくとも１つの商品の値付けが完了したタイミングで接続情報コードＣＤを示させてよい。 In this case, it is not necessary to transmit the product information of the product to be priced from the mobile terminal 240 to the weighing and pricing device 210A. Therefore, the weighing and pricing device 210A in this case does not display the connection information code CD on the standby screen, but displays the connection information code CD on the customer display 2106 at a predetermined timing according to, for example, a preset key operation. You may let it. For example, the weighing pricing device 210A may display the connection information code CD at the timing when the product selection screen on which the preset keys are arranged is displayed. Alternatively, the weighing pricing device 210A is at a predetermined timing from the operation of the preset key for selecting the first temporarily registered product to the operation of the preset key for selecting the last temporarily registered product. The connection information code CD may be displayed. Alternatively, the weighing pricing device 210A may display the connection information code CD at the timing when the operation of the preset keys corresponding to all the products sold by weight to be purchased is completed. Alternatively, the weighing pricing device 210A may indicate the connection information code CD at the timing when the pricing of at least one product is completed after the operation of the preset keys corresponding to all the products sold by weight to be purchased is completed. ..
携帯端末２４０が接続情報コードＣＤを読み取って計量値付け装置２１０Ａと通信可能に接続されることで、計量値付け装置２１０Ａから携帯端末２４０に仮登録商品情報が送信可能となる。これにより、計量値付け装置２１０Ａと携帯端末２４０とで仮登録商品情報を共有できる。 When the mobile terminal 240 reads the connection information code CD and is communicably connected to the weighing and pricing device 210A, the provisionally registered product information can be transmitted from the weighing and pricing device 210A to the mobile terminal 240. As a result, the provisionally registered product information can be shared between the weighing pricing device 210A and the mobile terminal 240.
この場合における接続情報コードＣＤの消去は、計量値付け装置２１０Ａと携帯端末２４０との接続が確立されたタイミングで行われてもよい。あるいは、接続情報コードＣＤの消去は、例えば全ての仮登録商品の値付けの完了に応じたタイミングで行われてよい。 In this case, the connection information code CD may be erased at the timing when the connection between the weighing and pricing device 210A and the mobile terminal 240 is established. Alternatively, the connection information code CD may be erased, for example, at a timing corresponding to the completion of pricing of all the temporarily registered products.
例えば、計量値付け装置２１０Ａに値付け対象の商品を撮像する撮像部を設け、客が購入対象の量り売り商品を撮像部により撮像させた画像の解析結果に基づいて、計量値付け装置１０Ａが、商品の品目を特定する。計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、特定した品目に対応する商品情報を、例えば商品マスタ等から取得することで仮登録商品情報を取得するようにされてよい。この場合にも、例えば取引管理サーバ２５０が、商品が撮像された画像を計量値付け装置２１０Ａから受信し、受信された画像を解析することにより、値付け対象の商品の品目を特定し、特定された商品の品目を取引管理サーバ２５０から計量値付け装置２１０Ａに通知するようにされてもよい。 For example, the weighing pricing device 210A is provided with an imaging unit that captures an image of a product to be priced, and the weighing pricing device 10A is based on an analysis result of an image obtained by the imaging unit of a product sold by weight to be purchased by a customer. Identify the item of goods. The weighing pricing device 210A may be adapted to acquire the provisionally registered product information by acquiring the product information corresponding to the specified item from, for example, the product master or the like. Also in this case, for example, the transaction management server 250 receives an image of the product from the weighing pricing device 210A and analyzes the received image to identify and identify the item of the product to be priced. The transaction management server 250 may notify the weighing and pricing device 210A of the item of the goods.
この場合の計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、１つ目の商品の仮登録商品情報が取得されてから最後の商品の仮登録商品情報が取得されるまでにおける所定のタイミングで、接続情報コードＣＤを表示させてよい。あるいは、購入対象の量り売り商品の全てに対応する仮登録商品情報が取得されたタイミングで接続情報コードＣＤを表示させてよい。 In this case, the weighing pricing device 210A displays the connection information code CD at a predetermined timing from the acquisition of the provisionally registered product information of the first product to the acquisition of the provisionally registered product information of the last product. You may let me. Alternatively, the connection information code CD may be displayed at the timing when the provisionally registered product information corresponding to all the products sold by weight to be purchased is acquired.
この場合における接続情報コードＣＤの消去も、計量値付け装置２１０Ａと携帯端末２４０との接続が確立されたタイミング、あるいは、全ての仮登録商品の値付けの完了に応じたタイミング等で行われてよい。 In this case, the connection information code CD is also erased at the timing when the connection between the weighing pricing device 210A and the mobile terminal 240 is established, or at the timing when the pricing of all the temporarily registered products is completed. good.
例えば陳列された量り売り商品ごとに対応して、客側に対応する位置にタグ装置が配置されてよい。タグ装置は、計量値付け装置２１０Ａと有線または無線により通信可能に接続される。タグ装置は、対応の量り売り商品を示す商品情報を記憶する。タグ装置は、タッチセンサを備えることにより、タッチ操作により接触されたことを検出することができる。 For example, the tag device may be arranged at a position corresponding to the customer side corresponding to each of the displayed products sold by weight. The tag device is communicably connected to the weighing and pricing device 210A by wire or wirelessly. The tag device stores product information indicating the corresponding products sold by weight. By providing the tag device with a touch sensor, it is possible to detect that the tag device has been touched by a touch operation.
この場合、客は、購入対象の商品に対応するタグ装置に対してタッチ操作を行う。タッチ操作を検出したタグ装置は、自己が記憶する商品情報を計量値付け装置２１０Ａに送信する。計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、受信された商品情報を、仮登録商品情報として取得するようにされてよい。 In this case, the customer performs a touch operation on the tag device corresponding to the product to be purchased. The tag device that detects the touch operation transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210A. The weighing pricing device 210A may be adapted to acquire the received product information as provisionally registered product information.
この場合の計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、例えば１つ目の商品の仮登録商品情報が取得されたタイミングで、接続情報コードＣＤを表示させてよい。 In this case, the weighing pricing device 210A may display the connection information code CD at the timing when the provisionally registered product information of the first product is acquired, for example.
この場合における接続情報コードＣＤの消去も、計量値付け装置２１０Ａと携帯端末２４０との接続が確立されたタイミング、あるいは、全ての仮登録商品の値付けの完了に応じたタイミング等で行われてよい。 In this case, the connection information code CD is also erased at the timing when the connection between the weighing pricing device 210A and the mobile terminal 240 is established, or at the timing when the pricing of all the temporarily registered products is completed. good.
量り売り商品が収納される什器から、客が商品を取り出すことが行われることに伴って動く蓋、レバー等の部位に、動きを検出する動きセンサを設けてよい。動きセンサによる動きの検出は、例えば加速度センサ等により実現できる、対応の量り売り商品を示す商品情報を記憶する。動きセンサは、動きを検出したことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０Ａに自己が記憶する商品情報を送信する。 A motion sensor that detects movement may be provided on a part such as a lid or a lever that moves as the customer takes out the product from the fixture in which the product sold by weight is stored. The motion detection by the motion sensor stores the product information indicating the corresponding merchandise sold by weight, which can be realized by, for example, an acceleration sensor or the like. The motion sensor transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210A in response to detecting the motion.
この場合、客は、購入対象の商品を、陳列された商品のうちから取り出す。商品の取り出しが行われたことに応じて、購入対象の商品に対応する動きセンサは、動きを検出する。動きセンサは、動きを検出したことに応じて、自己が記憶する商品情報を計量値付け装置２１０Ａに送信する。計量値付け装置２１０Ａは、受信された商品情報を、仮登録商品情報として取得する。 In this case, the customer takes out the product to be purchased from the displayed products. The motion sensor corresponding to the product to be purchased detects the movement in response to the product being taken out. The motion sensor transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210A in response to detecting the motion. The weighing pricing device 210A acquires the received product information as provisionally registered product information.
この場合の計量値付け装置２１０Ａも、例えば１つ目の商品の仮登録商品情報が取得されたタイミングで、接続情報コードＣＤを表示させてよい。 The weighing pricing device 210A in this case may also display the connection information code CD at the timing when the provisionally registered product information of the first product is acquired, for example.
この場合における接続情報コードＣＤの消去も、計量値付け装置２１０Ａと携帯端末２４０との接続が確立されたタイミング、あるいは、全ての仮登録商品の値付けの完了に応じたタイミング等で行われてよい。 In this case, the connection information code CD is also erased at the timing when the connection between the weighing pricing device 210A and the mobile terminal 240 is established, or at the timing when the pricing of all the temporarily registered products is completed. good.
［第７変形例］ [7th variant]
第２の実施形態の第６の例の変形例として、携帯端末２４０を利用する客と利用しない客とに対応して、以下のような手順で商品の値付けが行えるようにされてよい。 As a modification of the sixth example of the second embodiment, the price of the product may be set according to the following procedure in response to the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 and the customer who does not use it.
本変形例において、計量値付け装置２１０は、待機モードにおいて待機画面を表示させている。計量値付け装置２１０は、複数の待機画面を例えば所定時間ごとに循環的に切り替えるようにして表示させている。例えば、或る１つの待機画面は、値付けの開始のために商品を秤台１０９ｂにおいてもらうことを客に案内する内容を有する。或る１つの待機画面は、商品に付されたコード情報（例えば、バーコード）の読み取りを客に案内する内容を有する。或る１つの待機画面は、値付けの開始のために商品を検索する操作を行ってもらうことを客に案内にする内容を有する。或る１つの待機画面は、値付けの開始のために待機画面をタッチする操作を行ってもらうことを客に案内にする内容を有する。 In this modification, the weighing pricing device 210 displays the standby screen in the standby mode. The weighing and pricing device 210 displays a plurality of standby screens so as to be cyclically switched, for example, at predetermined time intervals. For example, one standby screen has content that guides the customer to pick up the goods on the scale 109b to start pricing. One standby screen has a content that guides the customer to read the code information (for example, a barcode) attached to the product. One standby screen has a content that guides the customer to perform an operation of searching for a product in order to start pricing. One standby screen has a content that guides the customer to perform an operation of touching the standby screen to start pricing.
本変形例では、商品の陳列場所にて第２の実施形態の第６の例で用いられた商品情報パネル３０００は用いられない。このため、携帯端末２４０を利用する客は、値付け対象の商品の品目の入力のために商品情報パネル３０００の商品情報コード３００１の読み取りによる仮登録は行わない。 In this modification, the product information panel 3000 used in the sixth example of the second embodiment is not used at the product display location. Therefore, the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 does not perform temporary registration by reading the product information code 3001 of the product information panel 3000 in order to input the item of the product to be priced.
本変形例において、客は、携帯端末２４０を利用するか否かにかかわらず、前述の第６変形例にて説明した、購入対象の商品に対応するタグ装置に対するタッチ操作、または動きセンサが備えられた陳列場所から購入対象の商品を取り出すことにより、値付け対象の商品の品目の入力（事前品目入力）を行うようにされる。あるいは、客は、携帯端末２４０を利用するか否かにかかわらず、まず商品の陳列場所から購入対象の商品を取ったうえで、計量値付け装置２１０に対して商品選択操作を行うことで、値付け対象の商品の品目の入力（画面操作品目入力）を行うようにされる。 In this modification, the customer is provided with the touch operation on the tag device corresponding to the product to be purchased or the motion sensor described in the sixth modification described above regardless of whether or not the mobile terminal 240 is used. By taking out the product to be purchased from the displayed display place, the item of the product to be priced is input (pre-item input). Alternatively, regardless of whether or not the mobile terminal 240 is used, the customer first picks up the product to be purchased from the product display location, and then performs the product selection operation on the weighing and pricing device 210. The item of the product to be priced is input (screen operation item input).
本変形例の計量値付け装置２１０は、客の操作に応じて動作していない状態では待機モード設定する。待機モードの計量値付け装置２１０は、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に初期状態の値付け操作画面を表示させている。 The weighing and pricing device 210 of this modification sets the standby mode when it is not operating according to the operation of the customer. The weighing and pricing device 210 in the standby mode displays the initial pricing operation screen on the customer display 2106.
図５１は、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に表示される初期状態の値付け操作画面の一例を示している。同図は、事前品目入力が行われていない場合に表示される初期状態の値付け操作画面を示している。 FIG. 51 shows an example of the pricing operation screen in the initial state displayed on the customer display 2106. The figure shows the initial pricing operation screen that is displayed when the advance item is not entered.
値付け操作画面においては計量結果エリアＡＲ４１が配置される。計量結果エリアＡＲ４１には、値付け対象の量り売り商品について計量した場合の結果が表示されるエリアである。計量結果エリアＡＲ４１においては、重量エリアＡＲ４１−１、重量単価エリアＡＲ４１−２、合計金額エリアＡＲ４１−３が含まれる。 The weighing result area AR41 is arranged on the pricing operation screen. The weighing result area AR41 is an area in which the result of weighing the product sold by weight to be priced is displayed. The weighing result area AR41 includes a weight area AR41-1, a weight unit price area AR41-2, and a total amount area AR41-3.
重量エリアＡＲ４１−１は、値付け対象の量り売り商品について計測された重量が示されるエリアである。 The weight area AR41-1 is an area where the measured weight of the goods sold by weight to be priced is shown.
重量単価エリアＡＲ４１−２は、値付け対象の量り売り商品の重量単価が示されるエリアである。 The weight unit price area AR41-2 is an area in which the weight unit price of the merchandise sold by weight to be priced is shown.
量り売り商品のうちには、計測された重量と単位重量に基づいて個数が算出され、算出された個数と、１個あたりの単価とに基づいて価格が算出される個数対応のものがある。このような個数対応の量り売り商品の場合には、重量エリアＡＲ４１−１には、計測された重量と単位重量に基づいて算出された個数が表示されるとともに、重量単価エリアＡＲ４１−２には１個あたりの単価が示されてよい。 Among the products sold by weight, there are products corresponding to the number of items for which the number is calculated based on the measured weight and the unit weight, and the price is calculated based on the calculated number of items and the unit price per item. In the case of such a quantity-corresponding product sold by weight, the weight area AR41-1 displays the number calculated based on the measured weight and the unit weight, and the weight unit price area AR41-2 is 1 The unit price per piece may be shown.
合計金額エリアＡＲ４１−３は、同じ一取引のもとで、これまでに値付けが完了した量り売り商品の価格を合計した合計金額が示されるエリアである。 The total amount area AR41-3 is an area showing the total amount of the total prices of the merchandise sold by weight for which pricing has been completed so far under the same transaction.
商品選択エリアＡＲ４２は、値付け対象とする商品を選択可能なエリアである。商品選択エリアＡＲ４２においては、商品選択エリアＡＲ４２に４つのタブＴＢ（ＴＢ−１~ＴＢ−４）が配置されている。商品選択エリアＡＲ４２においては、タブＴＢごとにそれぞれ商品ボタンが配置されるシートが対応付けられている。タブＴＢは、客の操作により選択可能である。選択されたタブＴＢは、他のタブＴＢに対して強調表示が行われ、商品選択エリアＡＲ４２においては、選択されたタブＴＢのシートに配置された商品ボタンＢＴ４１が表示される。 The product selection area AR42 is an area in which a product to be priced can be selected. In the product selection area AR42, four tabs TB (TB-1 to TB-4) are arranged in the product selection area AR42. In the product selection area AR42, a sheet on which a product button is arranged is associated with each tab TB. The tab TB can be selected by the operation of the customer. The selected tab TB is highlighted with respect to the other tab TB, and in the product selection area AR42, the product button BT41 arranged on the sheet of the selected tab TB is displayed.
例では、タブＴＢ−１に対応するシートは、事前品目入力された商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１が配置される。タブＴＢ−２に対応するシートは、量り売り商品として分類されたうえで商品マスタに予め登録されている商品ごとの商品ボタンＢＴ４１（プリセットキー）が所定の順序で配置される。 In the example, the product button BT41 of the product in which the pre-item has been input is arranged on the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-1. In the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-2, product buttons BT41 (preset keys) for each product registered in advance in the product master after being classified as products sold by weight are arranged in a predetermined order.
タブＴＢ−３に対応するシートは、商品マスタにおける量り売り商品の分類のもと、さらに、果物に分類される商品の商品ボタンが配置される。 On the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-3, the product buttons of the products classified as fruits are further arranged under the classification of the products sold by weight in the product master.
タブＴＢ−４に対応するシートは、商品マスタにおける量り売り商品の分類のもと、さらに野菜に分類される商品の商品ボタンが配置されるシートに対応するタブである。 The sheet corresponding to the tab TB-4 is a tab corresponding to the sheet on which the product buttons of the products classified as vegetables are arranged under the classification of the products sold by weight in the product master.
この場合には、量り売り商品のうち、果物と野菜の商品が購入実績が高いことに応じて、果物のシートと野菜のシートとを用意したものである。 In this case, a fruit sheet and a vegetable sheet are prepared according to the fact that the fruit and vegetable products have a high purchase record among the products sold by weight.
初期状態の値付け操作画面では、同図に示されるように、タブＴＢ−２が選択されている。これにより、商品選択エリアＡＲ４２においては、タブＴＢ−２に対応するシート上で商品マスタに量り売り商品の分類で登録された商品全般に含まれる商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１（プリセットキー）が配置された状態にある。 On the initial pricing operation screen, tab TB-2 is selected, as shown in the figure. As a result, in the product selection area AR42, the product button BT41 (preset key) of the product included in all the products registered in the product master by weight in the product master is arranged on the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-2. It is in.
この場合のシート上での商品ボタンＢＴ４１の配置順は、例えば購入実績や、予め設定された優先順位に基づいて定められてよい。商品選択エリアＡＲ４２においては、１６個の商品ボタンＢＴ４１が配置されている。つまり、１６個の量り売り商品が選択候補として提示されている。量り売り商品の分類で登録された商品が１７以上の場合には、例えばシートのエリアに対するページ送りあるいはスクロール等の操作により、他の量り売り商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１を表示させることができる。 In this case, the arrangement order of the product buttons BT41 on the sheet may be determined based on, for example, a purchase record or a preset priority. In the product selection area AR42, 16 product buttons BT41 are arranged. That is, 16 products sold by weight are presented as selection candidates. When the number of products registered in the classification of products sold by weight is 17, for example, the product button BT41 of other products sold by weight can be displayed by an operation such as page turning or scrolling with respect to the sheet area.
同図においては、商品ボタンＢＴ４１において「Ｉｔｅｍ１」、「Ｉｔｅｍ２」のように商品の情報を簡易化して示しているが、例えば商品ボタンＢＴ４１には、対応の商品を示す商品名や絵柄等が表示されてよい。 In the figure, the product button BT41 shows the product information in a simplified manner such as "Item1" and "Item2". For example, the product button BT41 displays the product name, the pattern, etc. indicating the corresponding product. May be done.
タブＴＢ−２に対応するシートは、商品マスタにより量り売り商品に分類されている商品全般から値付け対象の商品を指定（選択）する操作を行うエリアとなる。 The sheet corresponding to the tab TB-2 is an area for performing an operation of designating (selecting) a product to be priced from all the products classified as products sold by weight by the product master.
購入対象の量り売り商品が果物である場合、商品登録に携帯端末２４０を用いない客は、タブＴＢ−３を操作して、果物の分類の量り売り商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１が配置されたシートを表示させることができる。客は、表示されたシートに配置された商品ボタンＢＴ４１のうちから、購入対象の量り売り商品に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ４１を操作し、値付け対象の商品の品目として指定を行うことができる。 When the product to be purchased by weight is a fruit, the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 for product registration operates the tab TB-3 to display the sheet on which the product button BT41 of the product for sale by weight in the fruit classification is arranged. be able to. The customer can operate the product button BT41 corresponding to the product sold by weight to be purchased from the product button BT41 arranged on the displayed sheet, and can specify the item as the item of the product to be priced.
購入対象の量り売り商品が野菜である場合、商品登録に携帯端末２４０を用いない客は、タブＴＢ−４を操作して、野菜の分類の量り売り商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１が配置されたシートを表示させことができる。客は、表示されたシートに配置された商品ボタンＢＴ４１のうちから、購入対象の量り売り商品に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ４１を操作し、値付け対象の商品の品目として指定を行うことができる。 When the product sold by weight to be purchased is a vegetable, the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 for product registration operates the tab TB-4 to display the sheet on which the product button BT41 of the product sold by weight in the vegetable classification is arranged. be able to. The customer can operate the product button BT41 corresponding to the product sold by weight to be purchased from the product button BT41 arranged on the displayed sheet, and can specify the item as the item of the product to be priced.
商品選択エリアＡＲ４２における上側にはメッセージエリアＡＲｍが配置されている。メッセージエリアＡＲｍは、現在の画面の内容に応じた所定の内容のメッセージが表示されるエリアである。メッセージエリアＡＲｍにおいては、「ＳｅｌｅｃｔＴｈｅＩｔｅｍ」と表示されている。つまり、この場合のメッセージエリアＡＲｍには、値付け対象の商品の品目指定を行うための商品ボタンＢＴ４１の操作を行ってもらうことを客に案内するメッセージが表示されている。 A message area ARM is arranged above the product selection area AR42. The message area ARM is an area in which a message having a predetermined content according to the content of the current screen is displayed. In the message area ARM, "SelectTheItem" is displayed. That is, in the message area ARM in this case, a message is displayed to guide the customer to operate the product button BT41 for designating the item of the product to be priced.
値付け操作画面においては、量り売り商品を文字入力操作により検索可能な検索エリアＡＲ４３が配置されている。例では、検索エリアＡＲ４３において配置されたソフトウェアキーボードを操作して商品名等を入力することで量り売り商品の検索が可能なようにされている。 On the pricing operation screen, a search area AR43 that allows a search for products sold by weight by a character input operation is arranged. In the example, it is possible to search for a product sold by weight by operating a software keyboard arranged in the search area AR43 and inputting a product name or the like.
検索エリアＡＲ４３は値付け操作画面に配置されていなくともよい。そのうえで、例えば値付け操作画面に対する所定操作が行われたことに応じて検索エリアＡＲ４３が表示されるようにしてよい。 The search area AR43 does not have to be arranged on the pricing operation screen. Then, for example, the search area AR43 may be displayed in response to a predetermined operation on the pricing operation screen.
計量値付け装置２１０は、待機モードにおいて、事前品目入力に応じた量り売り商品の情報を、タグ装置または動きセンサから受信した場合には、図５１の値付け操作画面に代えて、図５２に示される値付け操作画面を表示する。図５２において、図５１と同一部分には同一符号を付して適宜説明を省略する。 When the weighing pricing device 210 receives the information of the merchandise sold by weight according to the pre-item input from the tag device or the motion sensor in the standby mode, it is shown in FIG. 52 instead of the pricing operation screen of FIG. Display the pricing operation screen. In FIG. 52, the same parts as those in FIG. 51 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
図５２の値付け操作画面では、商品選択エリアＡＲ４２においてタブＴＢ−１が選択された状態となっている。選択されたタブＴＢ−１に対応するシートには、Ｉｔｅｍ１１~Ｉｔｅｍ１６の６つの商品ボタンＢＴ４１が配置されている。６つの商品ボタンＢＴ４１に対応する量り売り商品は、客が先に行った事前品目入力により値付け対象の品目の入力が行われた商品である。この場合の商品ボタンＢＴ４１の配置順は、品目入力が行われた順に応じたものであってもよい。 On the pricing operation screen of FIG. 52, the tab TB-1 is selected in the product selection area AR42. Six product buttons BT41 of Items 11 to 16 are arranged on the sheet corresponding to the selected tab TB-1. The merchandise sold by weight corresponding to the six merchandise buttons BT41 is a merchandise in which the item to be priced is input by the pre-item input performed by the customer first. In this case, the arrangement order of the product buttons BT41 may correspond to the order in which the items are input.
メッセージエリアＡＲｍにおいては、値付け対象の商品の品目指定を行うため商品ボタンＢＴ４１の操作を行ってもらうことを客に案内するメッセージが表示されている。 In the message area ARM, a message is displayed to guide the customer to operate the product button BT41 in order to specify the item of the product to be priced.
このように、本変形例の計量値付け装置２１０は、待機モードにおいて、デフォルトでは商品選択エリアＡＲ４２において、タブＴＢ−２が選択された状態のもとでシート上に量り売り商品の分類で登録された商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１を配置させている。この状態のもとで、客により事前品目入力が行われたことで、計量装置外（タグ装置あるいは動きセンサ）から送信された量り売り商品の情報が受信されたことにより、計量値付け装置２１０は、タブＴＢ−２からタブＴＢ−１が選択された状態に変更する。計量値付け装置２１０は、選択されたタブＴＢ−１のシートに、受信された量り売り商品の情報に応じた商品ボタンＢＴ４１を配置させる表示を行う。そして、この後において、客が次の事前品目入力を行ったことで、さらにもう１つの量り売り商品の情報が受信されると、計量値付け装置２１０は、タブＴＢ−１のシートに、受信された量り売り商品の情報に応じた商品ボタンＢＴ４１を追加して配置させる表示を行う。 As described above, the weighing and pricing device 210 of the present modification is registered in the product selection area AR42 by default in the standby mode in the state where the tab TB-2 is selected and classified by weight for sale on the sheet. The product button BT41 of the product is arranged. In this state, the customer inputs the item in advance, and the information of the merchandise sold by weight transmitted from outside the weighing device (tag device or motion sensor) is received, so that the weighing pricing device 210 , Change from tab TB-2 to tab TB-1 in the selected state. The weighing pricing device 210 displays that the product button BT 41 corresponding to the received information on the products sold by weight is arranged on the sheet of the selected tab TB-1. Then, after this, when the customer inputs the next pre-item and further information on another product for sale by weight is received, the weighing pricing device 210 is received on the sheet of the tab TB-1. Display is performed by adding and arranging the product button BT41 according to the information of the product sold by weight.
客が事前品目入力を行っていない場合に計量値付け装置２１０に赴いたときには、図５１に示されるように、タブＴＢ−２のシートにプリセットキーとしての商品ボタンＢＴ４１が配置された値付け操作画面が表示されている。この場合、客は、そのときに表示されているタブＴＢ−２のシートに配置された商品ボタンＢＴ４１を操作して値付け対象の商品を指定することができる。あるいは、客は、果物、野菜の量り売り商品に対応するタブＴＢ−２、ＴＢ−３を操作してシートを切り替えたうえで商品ボタンＢＴ４１を操作することで値付け対象の商品を指定（選択）することができる。 When the customer goes to the weighing pricing device 210 when the customer has not entered the item in advance, the pricing operation in which the product button BT41 as a preset key is arranged on the sheet of the tab TB-2 as shown in FIG. The screen is displayed. In this case, the customer can specify the product to be priced by operating the product button BT41 arranged on the sheet of the tab TB-2 displayed at that time. Alternatively, the customer specifies (selects) the product to be priced by operating the tabs TB-2 and TB-3 corresponding to the products sold by weight of fruits and vegetables to switch the sheet and then operating the product button BT41. can do.
これに対して、客が事前品目入力を行っている場合に計量値付け装置２１０に赴いたときには、図５２に示されるように、タブＴＢ−１のシートにおいて事前品目入力された商品ごとの商品ボタンＢＴ４１が配置された値付け操作画面が表示されている。この場合、客は、そのときに表示されているタブＴＢ−１のシートに配置された商品ボタンＢＴ４１を操作して値付け対象の商品を指定（選択）する。 On the other hand, when the customer goes to the weighing pricing device 210 when the customer has entered the pre-item, as shown in FIG. 52, the product for each product for which the pre-item has been entered in the tab TB-1 sheet. The pricing operation screen on which the button BT41 is arranged is displayed. In this case, the customer operates the product button BT41 arranged on the sheet of the tab TB-1 displayed at that time to specify (select) the product to be priced.
このように、タブＴＢ−１のシートにおいて事前品目入力された商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１を配置した態様は、量り売り商品としての分類により商品マスタに予め登録されている商品のうちから、事前品目入力された商品を強調（優先）して表示しているものである。 In this way, the mode in which the product button BT41 of the product for which the pre-item has been input in the tab TB-1 sheet is arranged is that the pre-item is input from the products pre-registered in the product master according to the classification as a merchandise sold by weight. The products are displayed with emphasis (priority).
事前品目入力された商品を強調（優先）して表示する態様としては、上記のようにシートを切り替える例に限定されない。 The mode in which the pre-item input product is emphasized (priority) and displayed is not limited to the example of switching the sheet as described above.
例えば、計量値付け装置２１０は、１のシートにおいて、事前品目入力がない状態では、図５１のように、量り売り商品全般に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ４１を配置した表示を行う。 For example, the weighing pricing device 210 displays the product button BT41 corresponding to all the products sold by weight as shown in FIG. 51 in the state where there is no prior item input on the sheet 1.
そして、事前品目入力が行われると、計量値付け装置２１０は、同じシートにおいて、量り売り商品全般に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ４１のうちで、事前品目入力されていない商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１は消去し、事前品目入力された商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１を表示するようにしてよい。この際、事前品目入力された商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１は纏まって位置するようにして再配置されてよい。 Then, when the pre-item input is performed, the weighing pricing device 210 erases the product button BT41 of the product for which the pre-item has not been input among the product buttons BT41 corresponding to all the products sold by weight on the same sheet, and pre-inputs the product. The product button BT41 of the product for which the product has been input may be displayed. At this time, the product buttons BT41 of the products for which the pre-items have been input may be rearranged so as to be collectively positioned.
あるいは、計量値付け装置２１０は、事前品目入力が行われると、事前品目入力された商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１のサイズが、事前品目入力されていない商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１よりも大きくなるようにして表示してよい。 Alternatively, the weighing pricing device 210 displays the size of the product button BT41 of the product for which the pre-item has been input so as to be larger than the product button BT41 for the product for which the pre-item has not been input when the pre-item is input. You can do it.
あるいは、計量値付け装置２１０は、事前品目入力が行われると、商品選択エリアＡＲ４２において、事前品目入力された商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１が配置される領域と、事前品目入力されていない商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１が配置される領域とを分けるようにして表示してよい。 Alternatively, when the pre-item input is performed, the weighing pricing device 210 has an area in which the product button BT41 of the pre-item input product is arranged and the product button of the product for which the pre-item has not been input in the product selection area AR42. It may be displayed so as to be separated from the area where the BT 41 is arranged.
このようにして同じシート上で事前品目入力された商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１を事前品目入力されない商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１に対して強調させる態様は、適宜組み合わせされてよい。 In this way, the mode of emphasizing the product button BT41 of the product for which the pre-item is input on the same sheet with respect to the product button BT41 of the product for which the pre-item is not input may be appropriately combined.
客の商品ボタンＢＴ４１に対する操作によって、１の商品が値付け対象として指定（選択）されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０における客用ディスプレイ２１０６の表示は、値付け操作画面から計量案内画面に遷移する。図示は省略するが、計量案内画面は、値付け対象として指定された商品が例えば商品名や商品を表す絵柄により示されるとともに、値付け対象として指定された商品を秤台１０９ｂに載せてもらうように客に案内するメッセージが表示される。 In response to the fact that one product is designated (selected) as a price target by the operation of the customer's product button BT41, the display of the customer display 2106 in the weighing pricing device 210 changes from the pricing operation screen to the weighing guidance screen. Transition to. Although not shown, on the weighing guide screen, the product designated as the price target is indicated by, for example, the product name or a pattern representing the product, and the product designated as the price target is placed on the scale 109b. A message is displayed to guide the customer.
このような表示により、客は、自分が操作した商品ボタンＢＴ４１が、自分が値付け対象として指定した商品に間違いなく対応しているか否かを確認できる。客は、該当の商品を秤台１０９ｂに載せるべきことを把握することができる。 With such a display, the customer can confirm whether or not the product button BT41 operated by the customer definitely corresponds to the product designated as the price target. The customer can know that the product should be placed on the scale 109b.
計量案内画面が表示されているときは、値付け対象とされた商品は、未だ秤台１０９ｂに載せられていない状態である。 When the weighing guide screen is displayed, the product to be priced has not yet been placed on the scale 109b.
このように値付け対象の商品を秤台１０９ｂに載せる前の段階では、値付け操作画面の計量結果エリアＡＲ４１における表示は以下の状態である。つまり、重量エリアＡＲ４１−１は、未だ計量が行われていないことに応じて重量がゼロであることを示す。重量単価エリアＡＲ４１−２は、値付け対象として指定された商品の重量単価を示す。このように表示される重量単価は、例えば商品マスタの商品情報から取得されてよい。合計金額エリアＡＲ４１−３は、価格がゼロであることを示す。 In this way, before the product to be priced is placed on the scale 109b, the display in the measurement result area AR41 on the price setting operation screen is as follows. That is, the weight area AR41-1 indicates that the weight is zero depending on the fact that the weight has not been measured yet. The weight unit price area AR41-2 shows the weight unit price of the goods designated as the price target. The weight unit price displayed in this way may be obtained from, for example, the product information of the product master. The total amount area AR41-3 indicates that the price is zero.
計量案内画面が表示された状態において、客は、秤台１０９ｂに値付け対象の商品を載せるようにする。 With the weighing guide screen displayed, the customer places the product to be priced on the scale 109b.
商品が秤台１０９ｂに載せられたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、値付け処理を実行する。つまり、計量値付け装置２１０は、計量部２１０９により計測される商品の重量が安定したと判定したことに応じて商品の重量を確定させ、確定された重量と重量単価とにより価格を算出する。 The weighing pricing device 210 executes the pricing process in response to the goods being placed on the scale 109b. That is, the weighing pricing device 210 determines the weight of the product according to the determination that the weight of the product measured by the measuring unit 2109 is stable, and calculates the price based on the determined weight and the weight unit price.
このように値付け処理が実行されたことに応じて、客用ディスプレイ２１０６における表示は、計量案内画面から、計量結果画面に遷移する。 In response to the execution of the pricing process in this way, the display on the customer display 2106 transitions from the weighing guide screen to the weighing result screen.
図５３は、計量結果画面の一例を示している。同図において図５２と同一部分には同一符号を付して適宜説明を省略する。 FIG. 53 shows an example of the measurement result screen. In the figure, the same parts as those in FIG. 52 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
計量結果画面では、計量結果エリアＡＲ４１において、重量エリアＡＲ４１−１にて計量された商品の重量（この場合には、重量と単位重量に応じて算出された個数）が示され、合計金額エリアＡＲ４１−３にて、算出された商品の価格に応じた合計金額が示される状態に変化している。 On the weighing result screen, in the weighing result area AR41, the weight of the product weighed in the weight area AR41-1 (in this case, the number calculated according to the weight and the unit weight) is shown, and the total price area AR41 In -3, the total amount of money according to the calculated price of the product is shown.
計量結果画面においては、商品選択エリアＡＲ４２により、値付けされた商品の商品名や絵柄が示される。 On the weighing result screen, the product selection area AR42 indicates the product name and pattern of the priced product.
計量案内エリアＡＲ４６においては、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ４２と接続情報コードエリアＡＲ４４が配置される。 In the weighing guide area AR46, the label issuing button BT42 and the connection information code area AR44 are arranged.
ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ４２は、値付け対象の商品の値付け処理結果が反映されたラベル（単品ラベル）の発行を指示する操作が行われるボタンである。 The label issuing button BT42 is a button for instructing the issuance of a label (single item label) reflecting the pricing processing result of the product to be priced.
接続情報コードエリアＡＲ４４は、接続情報コードＣＤが表示されるエリアである。 The connection information code area AR44 is an area in which the connection information code CD is displayed.
メッセージエリアＡＲｍには、例えば「ＰＲＩＮＴＬＡＢＥＬＯＲＲＥＡＤＣＨＯＲＤ」のように、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ４２の操作と、接続情報コードＣＤの読み取りとのいずれかを客に行ってもらうことを案内するメッセージが表示される。 In the message area ARM, for example, a message such as "PRINTLABELOR READCHORD" is displayed to guide the customer to either operate the label issuing button BT42 or read the connection information code CD.
この場合、携帯端末２４０を利用する客は、携帯端末２４０に接続情報コードＣＤを読み取らせるようにする。これにより、携帯端末２４０が計量値付け装置２１０と接続される。接続情報コードＣＤは、携帯端末２４０が計量値付け装置２１０と接続されたことに応じて消去される。 In this case, the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 causes the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code CD. As a result, the mobile terminal 240 is connected to the weighing and pricing device 210. The connection information code CD is erased when the mobile terminal 240 is connected to the weighing and pricing device 210.
計量値付け装置２１０は、接続された携帯端末２４０に、今回の値付け処理結果が反映された商品値付け情報を送信する。計量値付け装置２１０は、商品値付け情報の送信が完了したことに応じて、コード情報が印刷されていない単品ラベルを発行する。 The weighing pricing device 210 transmits the product pricing information reflecting the current pricing processing result to the connected mobile terminal 240. The weighing pricing device 210 issues a single item label on which the code information is not printed, in response to the completion of transmission of the product pricing information.
携帯端末２４０を利用しない客は、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ４２を操作する。ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ４２が操作されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、今回の値付け処理結果が反映されたコード情報が印刷された単品ラベルを発行する。 A customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 operates the label issuing button BT42. In response to the operation of the label issuing button BT42, the weighing pricing device 210 issues a single item label on which the code information reflecting the current pricing processing result is printed.
本変形例においては、値付けが確定された段階で、計量結果画面としての同一画面においてラベル発行ボタンＢＴ４２と接続情報コードエリアＡＲ４４とが表示される。この場合、客は、自分が計量値付け装置２１０を利用するか否かに応じて、接続情報コードＣＤを読み取らせるのか、あるいはラベル発行ボタンＢＴ４２を操作するのかを判断することができる。本変形例の場合には、携帯端末２４０を利用するか否かにかかわらず、値付けにより価格が確定されるまでの手順が共通となることから、客が手順に慣れやすい。 In this modification, the label issuing button BT42 and the connection information code area AR44 are displayed on the same screen as the weighing result screen when the pricing is confirmed. In this case, the customer can determine whether to read the connection information code CD or operate the label issuing button BT42 depending on whether or not he / she uses the weighing and pricing device 210. In the case of this modification, the procedure until the price is fixed by pricing is common regardless of whether or not the mobile terminal 240 is used, so that the customer can easily get used to the procedure.
ラベルが発行された後は、計量結果画面からラベル貼付案内画面の表示に遷移するようにされてよい。ラベル貼付案内画面においては、計量値付け装置２１０から発行されたラベルを、今回値付けが行われた商品を入れた袋に貼り付けてもらうように案内するためのメッセージ、絵柄等の表示が行われる。ラベル貼付案内画面においては、計量結果画面に表示されていた接続情報コードエリアＡＲ４４は配置されていない。つまり、ラベル貼付案内画面の表示は、接続情報コードの表示が終了された後に行われる。 After the label is issued, the display may be changed from the measurement result screen to the label affixing guidance screen. On the label affixing guidance screen, a message, a pattern, etc. are displayed to guide the label issued by the weighing and pricing device 210 to be affixed to the bag containing the product that has been priced this time. Will be. On the label sticking guidance screen, the connection information code area AR44 displayed on the measurement result screen is not arranged. That is, the label affixing guidance screen is displayed after the display of the connection information code is completed.
客は、案内に従って、秤台１０９ｂから商品を持ち上げ、ラベル排出口１１０ａから取り出したラベルを、商品の入った袋に貼り付けるようにされる。 According to the guidance, the customer lifts the product from the scale 109b and attaches the label taken out from the label discharge port 110a to the bag containing the product.
ラベル貼付案内画面は、例えばラベル排出口１１０ａに設けられたセンサが、ラベルの取り出されたことを検出したのに応じて消去される。ラベル貼付案内画面の消去に代わり、客用ディスプレイ２１０６には、次の値付け対象の品目を指定するための値付け操作画面の表示に遷移する。 The label sticking guide screen is erased when, for example, the sensor provided in the label discharge port 110a detects that the label has been taken out. Instead of erasing the label affixing guidance screen, the customer display 2106 transitions to the display of the pricing operation screen for designating the next item to be priced.
この場合において、今回の値付け処理が、図５１のプリセットキーの配置された値付け操作画面に対する操作に応じて行われた場合には、次にも図５１の値付け操作画面に遷移するようにされてよい。一方、今回の値付け処理が、図５２に示される事前品目入力に応じた値付け操作画面に対する操作に応じて行われ、まだ、事前品目入力された商品のうちで値付けされていない商品が残っている場合には、次にも図５２の値付け操作画面に遷移するようにされてよい。 In this case, if the current pricing process is performed in response to an operation on the pricing operation screen on which the preset keys of FIG. 51 are arranged, the transition to the pricing operation screen of FIG. 51 is performed next. May be made. On the other hand, the current pricing process is performed in response to the operation on the pricing operation screen according to the pre-item input shown in FIG. 52, and among the pre-item input products, the unpriced product is not yet priced. If it remains, the transition to the pricing operation screen of FIG. 52 may be performed next.
ラベル排出口１１０ａからラベルが取り出されたタイミングで、例えば未だ秤台１０９ｂになんらかの重量物が載っている場合には、秤台１０９ｂの重量物を取り除くことを客に案内する画面が表示される。 At the timing when the label is taken out from the label discharge port 110a, for example, if some heavy object is still on the scale table 109b, a screen for instructing the customer to remove the heavy object on the scale table 109b is displayed.
先の第２の実施形態の第１の例~第２の実施形態の第５の例に対応する変形例（第１変形例~第５変形例）のうちで、第２の実施形態の第６の例に適用可能なものは、適宜、第２の実施形態の第６の例に適用されてよい。 Among the modified examples (first modified example to fifth modified example) corresponding to the first example of the second embodiment to the fifth example of the second embodiment, the second embodiment What is applicable to the sixth example may be appropriately applied to the sixth example of the second embodiment.
上記各実施形態において携帯端末２４０が実行するようにされていた所定の処理について、取引管理サーバ２５０等の上位装置が分担、あるいは携帯端末２４０と協働して実行するように構成されてよい。計量値付け装置２１０、１０Ａが実行する所定の処理について、取引管理サーバ２５０等の上位装置が分担、あるいは携帯端末２４０と協働して実行するように構成されてよい。さらに取引管理サーバ２５０が実行する所定の処理について、携帯端末２４０または計量値付け装置２１０、１０Ａが分担、あるいは携帯端末２４０または計量値付け装置２１０、１０Ａが協働するようにして構成されてよい。 A higher-level device such as the transaction management server 250 may share the predetermined processing that was to be executed by the mobile terminal 240 in each of the above embodiments, or may be configured to execute the predetermined processing in cooperation with the mobile terminal 240. A higher-level device such as the transaction management server 250 may share the predetermined processing executed by the weighing pricing devices 210 and 10A, or may be configured to execute the predetermined processing in cooperation with the mobile terminal 240. Further, the mobile terminal 240 or the weighing and pricing device 210 and 10A may share the predetermined processing executed by the transaction management server 250, or the mobile terminal 240 or the weighing and pricing device 210 and 10A may cooperate with each other. ..
量り売りの商品の販売にあたっては計量値付け装置が使用される。上記のような販売システムにおいて計量値付け装置を使用する売り場では、客の購入対象の商品について計量値付け装置により値付けを行ったうえで、客の携帯端末にて商品を登録するという手順となり、客が商品棚等から商品を取り出してコードを携帯端末に読み取らせることで商品登録を行う場合の手順とは異なってくる。 Weighing pricing equipment is used to sell products sold by weight. In the sales floor where the weighing and pricing device is used in the above-mentioned sales system, the procedure is that the product to be purchased by the customer is priced by the weighing and pricing device and then the product is registered on the customer's mobile terminal. , The procedure is different from the procedure when the customer takes out the product from the product shelf or the like and has the mobile terminal read the code to register the product.
第２の実施形態の販売システムは、客が所持する携帯端末により商品登録が行われるとき、計量値付け装置による商品登録を円滑に実行できる。 The sales system of the second embodiment can smoothly execute the product registration by the weighing and pricing device when the product registration is performed by the mobile terminal owned by the customer.
（１）以上説明したように第２の実施形態の販売システムは、計量値付け装置と、客が商品登録を行うのに利用する携帯端末とを備える。販売システムは、前記計量値付け装置と前記携帯端末とを通信可能に接続するための接続情報を出力する出力手段と、前記接続情報の出力後において、前記計量値付け装置と前記携帯端末とが通信可能に接続された後の所定のタイミングで、前記出力手段による接続情報の出力を終了させる制御手段とを備える。 (1) As described above, the sales system of the second embodiment includes a weighing and pricing device and a mobile terminal used by a customer to register a product. The sales system includes an output means for outputting connection information for communicably connecting the weighing and pricing device and the mobile terminal, and after the output of the connection information, the weighing and pricing device and the mobile terminal are connected to each other. It is provided with a control means for terminating the output of connection information by the output means at a predetermined timing after being communicably connected.
上記構成によれば、商品登録のために携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０（２１０Ａ）とを、計量値付け装置２１０に表示（出力）させた接続情報コードを用いて通信可能に接続するようにされる。そのうえで、計量値付け装置２１０（２１０Ａ）は、表示された接続情報コードを、携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０（２１０Ａ）とが通信可能に接続された後の所定タイミングで消去させることができる。 According to the above configuration, the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing pricing device 210 (210A) are communicably connected using the connection information code displayed (output) on the weighing pricing device 210 for product registration. Be made. Then, the weighing pricing device 210 (210A) can erase the displayed connection information code at a predetermined timing after the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing pricing device 210 (210A) are communicably connected. ..
これにより、例えば、取引とは関係のない客が誤って自分の携帯端末２４０に接続情報コードＣＤを読み取らせたことで、不用意に計量値付け装置２１０（２１０Ａ）と接続されてしまうような不具合が防止され、商品登録が円滑に行われるようになる。 As a result, for example, a customer who has nothing to do with the transaction accidentally causes his / her mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code CD, so that the customer is inadvertently connected to the weighing and pricing device 210 (210A). Problems will be prevented and product registration will be carried out smoothly.
（２）第２の実施形態の一態様は、（１）に記載の販売システムであって、前記制御手段は、前記計量値付け装置の計量部が計量を行ったタイミングまたは操作部に対する操作が行われたタイミングで、前記出力手段による接続情報の出力を終了させる。 (2) One aspect of the second embodiment is the sales system according to (1), wherein the control means is operated at a timing when the weighing unit of the weighing pricing device performs weighing or an operation on the operating unit. At the timing when the connection information is output, the output of the connection information by the output means is terminated.
上記構成によれば、計量値付け装置と前記携帯端末とが通信可能に接続された後の、前記計量値付け装置の計量部が計量を行ったタイミングまたは操作部に対する操作が行われたタイミングで接続情報コードを消去させることができる。 According to the above configuration, after the weighing and pricing device and the mobile terminal are communicably connected, at the timing when the weighing unit of the weighing and pricing device performs weighing or when the operation unit is operated. The connection information code can be erased.
（３）第２の実施形態の一態様は、（１）または（２）に記載の販売システムであって、前記制御手段により前記接続情報の出力が終了される際に、前記計量値付け装置による計量結果を示すラベルを発行するラベル発行手段を備える。 (3) One aspect of the second embodiment is the sales system according to (1) or (2), wherein when the control means ends the output of the connection information, the weighing and pricing device. Provided is a label issuing means for issuing a label indicating the measurement result by.
上記構成によれば、値付けに応じたラベルの発行にあわせて接続情報コードを消去することができる。 According to the above configuration, the connection information code can be erased when the label is issued according to the pricing.
（４）第２の実施形態の一態様は、（３）に記載の前記ラベルを商品に添付することの案内の表示を行う表示手段を備え、前記出力手段による接続情報の出力が終了された後に、前記表示手段による表示が行われる。 (4) One aspect of the second embodiment includes a display means for displaying a guide for attaching the label described in (3) to the product, and the output of the connection information by the output means is completed. Later, the display by the display means is performed.
上記構成によれば、商品の値付けが確定されてラベルが発行された段階で、接続情報コードが表示されていない状態とすることができる。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the connection information code not displayed at the stage when the price of the product is confirmed and the label is issued.
（５）第２の実施形態の一態様は、計量値付け装置と客が商品登録を行うのに利用する携帯端末とを備える販売システムであって、前記計量値付け装置と前記携帯端末とを通信可能に接続するための接続情報を出力する出力手段と、前記計量値付け装置と前記携帯端末とが通信可能に接続されていない状態において、所定のタイミングで前記出力手段により接続情報を出力させる制御手段とを備える販売システムである。 (5) One aspect of the second embodiment is a sales system including a weighing and pricing device and a mobile terminal used by a customer to register a product, and the weighing and pricing device and the mobile terminal are combined. In a state where the output means for outputting the connection information for communicably connecting and the weighing pricing device and the mobile terminal are not communicably connected, the output means outputs the connection information at a predetermined timing. It is a sales system equipped with a control means.
上記構成によれば、商品登録のために携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０（２１０Ａ）とを、計量値付け装置２１０に表示させた接続情報コードを用いて通信可能に接続するようにされる。そのうえで、計量値付け装置２１０（２１０Ａ）は、携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０（１０Ａ）とが通信可能に接続されていない状態のもとでの所定タイミングで接続情報コードを表示させることができる。 According to the above configuration, the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210 (210A) are communicably connected to each other for product registration by using the connection information code displayed on the weighing and pricing device 210. .. Then, the weighing and pricing device 210 (210A) can display the connection information code at a predetermined timing when the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210 (10A) are not communicably connected. can.
これにより、接続情報コードについては、取引に応じた客が商品登録する場面に対応させて適切なタイミングで接続情報コードの表示を制限できる。この結果、例えば、取引とは関係のない客が誤って自分の携帯端末２４０に接続情報コードＣＤを読み取らせたことで、不用意に計量値付け装置２１０（２１０Ａ）と接続されてしまうような不具合が防止され、商品登録が円滑に行われるようになる。 As a result, regarding the connection information code, it is possible to limit the display of the connection information code at an appropriate timing in accordance with the situation where the customer who corresponds to the transaction registers the product. As a result, for example, a customer who has nothing to do with the transaction accidentally causes his / her mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code CD, so that the customer is inadvertently connected to the weighing and pricing device 210 (210A). Problems will be prevented and product registration will be carried out smoothly.
（６）第２の実施形態の一態様は、（５）に記載の販売システムであって、前記制御手段は、前記計量値付け装置による計量結果が確定されたタイミングで、前記出力手段により接続情報を出力させる。 (6) One aspect of the second embodiment is the sales system according to (5), in which the control means is connected by the output means at the timing when the measurement result by the measurement pricing device is determined. Output information.
上記構成によれば、計量結果が確定されたことに伴って値付け結果が確定されたことを以て接続情報コードを表示することになるため、接続情報コードの読み取りにより通信可能な状態となってことに応じて、即座に、計量値付け装置２１０から携帯端末２４０に対して商品値付け情報を送信することができる。 According to the above configuration, the connection information code is displayed when the pricing result is confirmed when the weighing result is confirmed, so that communication is possible by reading the connection information code. In response to this, the product pricing information can be immediately transmitted from the weighing pricing device 210 to the mobile terminal 240.
（７）第２の実施形態の一態様は、（５）または（６）に記載の販売システムであって、前記制御手段は、前記計量値付け装置による計量結果とともに前記接続情報（例えば、接続情報コード画面）を出力させる。 (7) One aspect of the second embodiment is the sales system according to (5) or (6), wherein the control means includes the connection information (for example, connection) together with the measurement result by the measurement pricing device. Information code screen) is output.
上記構成によれば、客は、客用ディスプレイ２１０６に表示された値付け対象とされた商品についての計量結果（値付け処理結果）を確認しつつ、接続情報コードを携帯端末２４０にお読み取らせる操作を行うことができる。 According to the above configuration, the customer causes the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code while checking the weighing result (price processing result) of the product to be priced displayed on the customer display 2106. You can perform operations.
（８）第２の実施形態の一態様は、（５）から（７）のいずれか１つに記載の販売システムであって、前記計量値付け装置において計量結果をラベルに印刷するための操作子（例えば、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ４２）を表示する表示手段を備え、前記制御手段は、前記表示手段により表示される操作子とともに、前記接続情報を出力させる。 (8) One aspect of the second embodiment is the sales system according to any one of (5) to (7), and is an operation for printing the measurement result on a label in the measurement pricing device. A display means for displaying a child (for example, a label issuing button BT42) is provided, and the control means outputs the connection information together with an operator displayed by the display means.
上記構成によれば、携帯端末２４０を利用する客は、計量結果画面に配置された接続情報コードを読み取らせることにより商品の登録を確定させたうえで計量値付け装置２１０にラベル（バーコードが印刷されないもの）を発行させることができる。一方、携帯端末２４０を利用しない客は、同じ計量結果画面に配置されたラベル発行ボタンＢＴ４２を操作することにより、（バーコードが印刷されたもの）ラベルを発行させることができる。つまり、計量結果画面は、携帯端末２４０を利用する客と利用しない客とのいずれもがラベル発行のための操作を行えるようにされる。これとともに、計量値付け装置２１０は、ラベル発行の操作が接続情報コードの読み取りとラベル発行ボタンＢＴ４２の操作とのいずれであるのかに応じて、携帯端末２４０を利用する客向けのラベル（バーコードが印刷されていないラベル）と携帯端末２４０を利用しない客向けのラベル（バーコードが印刷されたラベル）とを区別して発行することができる。 According to the above configuration, the customer using the mobile terminal 240 confirms the registration of the product by reading the connection information code arranged on the weighing result screen, and then labels the weighing pricing device 210 (bar code is displayed). (Not printed) can be issued. On the other hand, a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 can issue a label (with a bar code printed on it) by operating the label issuing button BT42 arranged on the same weighing result screen. That is, on the weighing result screen, both the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 and the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 can perform the operation for issuing the label. At the same time, the weighing pricing device 210 is a label (bar code) for customers who use the mobile terminal 240, depending on whether the label issuing operation is reading the connection information code or operating the label issuing button BT42. (Label on which is not printed) and a label for customers who do not use the mobile terminal 240 (label on which a barcode is printed) can be issued separately.
（９）第２の実施形態の一態様は、（１）から（８）のいずれか１つに記載の販売システムであって、前記計量値付け装置による計量の対象とする商品の情報を計量装置外（例えば、タグ装置、動きセンサ）から受け付ける受付手段と、予め登録されている商品を選択可能に表示する（例えば、商品ボタンＢＴ４１を表示すること）選択表示手段とを備え、前記選択表示手段は、前記受付手段が前記商品の情報を受け付けた場合に、前記受付手段が受け付けた商品の情報に対応する商品を強調した態様（例えば、タブＴＢ−１のシート上で商品ボタンＢＴ４１を表示する態様）により選択可能に表示する。 (9) One aspect of the second embodiment is the sales system according to any one of (1) to (8), and measures the information of the product to be weighed by the weighing pricing device. The selection display is provided with a reception means for receiving from outside the device (for example, a tag device, a motion sensor) and a selection display means for displaying a pre-registered product in a selectable manner (for example, displaying the product button BT41). When the receiving means receives the information of the product, the means emphasizes the product corresponding to the information of the product received by the receiving means (for example, the product button BT41 is displayed on the sheet of the tab TB-1. Display can be selected according to the mode).
上記構成によれば、例えば初期状態の値付け操作画面において、事前品目入力がない状態のもとでは、タブＴＢ−２のシート上で、量り売り商品全般に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ４１（プリセットキー）を配置した態様での表示を行うようにすることができる。そのうえで、事前品目入力が行われたことに応じて、初期状態の値付け操作画面について、プリセットキーのうち、事前品目入力された商品の商品ボタンＢＴ４１をタブＴＢ−１のシート上に配置した態様の表示に切り替えることができる。これにより、事前品目入力が行われた場合の値付け対象の商品を指定する操作を行いやすくなる。 According to the above configuration, for example, on the initial pricing operation screen, when there is no prior item input, the product button BT41 (preset key) corresponding to all products sold by weight is pressed on the tab TB-2 sheet. It is possible to display in the arranged mode. Then, in response to the pre-item input, the product button BT41 of the pre-item input product among the preset keys is arranged on the tab TB-1 sheet on the initial state pricing operation screen. You can switch to the display of. This facilitates the operation of specifying the product to be priced when the pre-item input is performed.
以下に本発明の第３の実施形態を示す。 The third embodiment of the present invention is shown below.
＜第３の実施形態＞ <Third embodiment>
第３の実施形態における販売システムは、例えば、第２の実施形態の販売システムと同じ図１９に示す構成を有する。 The sales system in the third embodiment has, for example, the same configuration shown in FIG. 19 as the sales system in the second embodiment.
第３の実施形態における計量値付け装置２１０の構成例を説明する。図５４は、計量値付け装置２１０のハードウェア構成例を示すブロック図である。図５５は、計量値付け装置２１０の外観例を示す図であり、計量値付け装置２１０を正面方向からみた場合の外観例を示す。 A configuration example of the weighing and pricing device 210 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing a hardware configuration example of the weighing and pricing device 210. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the appearance of the weighing and pricing device 210, and shows an example of the appearance of the weighing and pricing device 210 when viewed from the front direction.
図５４に示すように、計量値付け装置２１０は、ＣＰＵ３１０１、ＲＯＭ３１０２、ＲＡＭ３１０３、スキャナ３１０４、客用ディスプレイ３１０６、ハードディスク３１０７、計量部３１０９、印字部３１１０、装置間対応通信部３１１１及び近距離通信部３１１２を備える。これらは、バス３１１９を介して互いに接続されている。 As shown in FIG. 54, the weighing and pricing device 210 includes a CPU 3101, a ROM 3102, a RAM 3103, a scanner 3104, a customer display 3106, a hard disk 3107, a weighing unit 3109, a printing unit 3110, an inter-device communication unit 3111, and a short-range communication unit. 3112 is provided. These are connected to each other via a bus 3119.
ＣＰＵ３１０１は、プログラムを実行することにより、計量値付け装置２１０としての機能実現のための各種処理を実行する。 By executing the program, the CPU 3101 executes various processes for realizing the function as the weighing and pricing device 210.
ＲＯＭ３１０２は、種々の情報を記憶する。例えば、ＣＰＵ３１０１が実行するプログラムを記憶する。ＲＯＭ３１０２は、客用ディスプレイ３１０６や客用ディスプレイ３１０６による表示に関する情報（画面情報、メッセージ情報等）を記憶する。ＲＯＭ３１０２は、自装置を識別させるための装置番号（装置識別子）を記憶する。ＲＯＭ３１０２は、印字部３１１０による印字に関する情報（印字内容、印字フォーマット情報等）を記憶してもよい。 The ROM 3102 stores various information. For example, the program executed by the CPU 3101 is stored. The ROM 3102 stores information (screen information, message information, etc.) related to the display on the customer display 3106 and the customer display 3106. The ROM 3102 stores a device number (device identifier) for identifying its own device. The ROM 3102 may store information (print contents, print format information, etc.) related to printing by the printing unit 3110.
ＲＡＭ３１０３は、ＣＰＵ３１０１が処理、演算を実行するにあたっての作業領域として利用される。 The RAM 3103 is used as a work area for the CPU 3101 to perform processing and calculation.
スキャナ３１０４は、コード化された情報を光学的に読み取る。 The scanner 3104 optically reads the coded information.
客用ディスプレイ３１０６は、図５５に示すように、正面側にて客側に向けて配置され、客向けの表示を行う。客用ディスプレイ３１０６は、客による操作が可能なようにタッチパネルとして構成されてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 55, the customer display 3106 is arranged on the front side toward the customer side to display for the customer. The customer display 3106 may be configured as a touch panel so that it can be operated by the customer.
ハードディスク３１０７は、ＣＰＵ３１０１の補助記憶装置として計量値付け装置２１０に必要な各種の情報を記憶する。ハードディスク３１０７は、例えば商品ファイル等を記憶してもよい。ハードディスク３１０７は、登録処理等をＣＰＵ３１０１に実行させるためのプログラムを記憶してもよい。ハードディスク３１０７は、プログラムが実行されることによって生成される種々の情報を記憶してもよい。ハードディスク３１０７は、客用ディスプレイ３１０６による表示に関する情報や、印字部３１１０による印字に関する情報を記憶してもよい。ハードディスク３１０７に代えて、ＳＳＤ等の他の記憶装置が備えられてもよい。 The hard disk 3107 stores various information required for the weighing and pricing device 210 as an auxiliary storage device of the CPU 3101. The hard disk 3107 may store, for example, a product file or the like. The hard disk 3107 may store a program for causing the CPU 3101 to execute a registration process or the like. The hard disk 3107 may store various information generated by executing the program. The hard disk 3107 may store information related to display by the customer display 3106 and information related to printing by the printing unit 3110. Instead of the hard disk 3107, another storage device such as an SSD may be provided.
計量部３１０９は、秤台３１０９ｂに置かれた商品等（商品及び該商品を入れた風袋）の重量を計量し、計量値を示したデータをＣＰＵ３１０１に出力する。計量部３１０９から計量値を取得したＣＰＵ３１０１は、計量値から所定の重量（風袋の重量）を減算して、秤台３１０９ｂに置かれた商品を算出する。ＣＰＵ３１０１は、上述の如く算出した商品の重量をＲＡＭ３１０３に一時記憶するとともに、客用ディスプレイ３１０６に表示させる。 The measuring unit 3109 weighs the product or the like (the product and the tare containing the product) placed on the scale 3109b, and outputs data indicating the measured value to the CPU 3101. The CPU 3101 that has acquired the measured value from the measuring unit 3109 subtracts a predetermined weight (weight of the tare) from the measured value to calculate the product placed on the scale 3109b. The CPU 3101 temporarily stores the weight of the product calculated as described above in the RAM 3103 and displays it on the customer display 3106.
印字部３１１０は、用紙媒体に印字（印刷）し、ラベル排出口１１０ａ（図５５）から発行（出力）する。例えば印字部３１１０は、商品に貼り付けるラベルを発行することができる。 The printing unit 3110 prints (prints) on a paper medium and issues (outputs) from the label ejection port 110a (FIG. 55). For example, the printing unit 3110 can issue a label to be attached to a product.
装置間対応通信部３１１１は、所定の通信網を経由して、他の計量値付け装置２１０との通信を行う場合に対応して備えられる。装置間対応通信部３１１１が対応する通信網は、有線であってもよいし、無線であってもよい。装置間対応通信部３１１１は、管理装置３０と通信可能とされてよい。 The inter-device communication unit 3111 is provided in response to the case of communicating with another weighing and pricing device 210 via a predetermined communication network. The communication network supported by the inter-device communication unit 3111 may be wired or wireless. The inter-device communication unit 3111 may be capable of communicating with the management device 30.
近距離通信部３１１２は、携帯端末２４０と所定の近距離無線通信方式により通信を行う。近距離通信部３１１２が対応する近距離無線通信方式は、例えばＢｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈであってもよい。 The short-range communication unit 3112 communicates with the mobile terminal 240 by a predetermined short-range wireless communication method. The short-range wireless communication method supported by the short-range communication unit 3112 may be, for example, Bluetooth.
第３の実施形態における精算装置２０は、例えば、図２２に示す外観及び図２３に示すハードウェア構成を備える。 The settlement device 20 in the third embodiment includes, for example, the appearance shown in FIG. 22 and the hardware configuration shown in FIG. 23.
第３の実施形態における携帯端末２４０は、例えば、図２４に示すハードウェア構成を備える。 The mobile terminal 240 according to the third embodiment includes, for example, the hardware configuration shown in FIG. 24.
第３の実施形態における取引管理サーバ２５０は、例えば、図２５に示すハードウェア構成を備える。 The transaction management server 250 in the third embodiment includes, for example, the hardware configuration shown in FIG. 25.
第３の実施形態における取引管理サーバ２５０は、例えば、図２６に示す顧客情報、図２７に示す店舗情報及図２８に示すカート情報を記憶する。 The transaction management server 250 in the third embodiment stores, for example, the customer information shown in FIG. 26, the store information shown in FIG. 27, and the cart information shown in FIG. 28.
第３の実施形態における携帯端末２４０は、図２９Ａ−２９Ｃ及び図３０Ａ−３０Ｄにおいて説明した買い物アプリケーションがインストールされる。 The mobile terminal 240 according to the third embodiment is installed with the shopping application described in FIGS. 29A-29C and 30A-30D.
一方で、店舗においては、客が計量値付け装置２１０により量り売り商品の値付けを行って商品を登録する、セルフ方式による量り売り対応の売り場がある。このような量り売り対応の売り場では、このようなセルフ方式に対応の計量値付け装置２１０が使用される売り場に関しては、商品登録に関する手順とこれに伴う販売システムでの処理が、先に説明した基本的な商品登録操作が行われる場合と異なってくる。以下、この点を説明する。 On the other hand, in stores, there is a self-service sales floor where customers price products sold by weight using a weighing and pricing device 210 and register the products. In such a sales floor that supports selling by weight, the procedure for product registration and the processing in the sales system that accompanies this are the basics explained above for the sales floor where the weighing and pricing device 210 that supports such a self-method is used. It will be different from the case where a typical product registration operation is performed. This point will be described below.
まず、計量値付け装置２１０が使用される売り場での客による商品登録に関する手順例を説明する。 First, an example of a procedure for registering a product by a customer at a sales floor where the weighing and pricing device 210 is used will be described.
客は、量り売り商品が購入対象である場合に、まず、自分の携帯端末２４０を用いて、以下のようにして購入対象の商品の品目の入力を行う。 When the customer wants to purchase the product by weight, the customer first inputs the item of the product to be purchased by using his / her mobile terminal 240 as follows.
図２５には、店舗において量り売り商品が陳列された様子の一例が示されている。同図の例では、量り売り商品として、レモンＬＭ、リンゴＡＰ、オレンジＯＧが陳列されている。陳列されたレモンＬＭ、リンゴＡＰ、オレンジＯＧごとに対応して、商品情報パネル３０００−ＬＭ、３０００−ＡＰ、３０００−ＯＧが設置されている。商品情報パネル３０００−ＬＭ、３０００−ＡＰ、３０００−ＯＧについて特に区別しない場合には、商品情報パネル３０００と記載する。 FIG. 25 shows an example of how products sold by weight are displayed in a store. In the example of the figure, lemon LM, apple AP, and orange OG are displayed as products sold by weight. A product information panel 3000-LM, 3000-AP, 3000-OG is installed corresponding to each of the displayed lemon LM, apple AP, and orange OG. When the product information panel 3000-LM, 3000-AP, 3000-OG is not particularly distinguished, it is described as the product information panel 3000.
商品情報パネル３０００は、対応の商品の情報を提示する。同図においては、商品情報パネル３０００−ＬＭが拡大されて示されている。このように、商品情報パネル３０００−ＬＭにおいては、商品の情報として、商品の品目がレモンであることと、単位重量あたりの単価と、商品情報コード３００１とが提示されている。商品情報コード３００１は、同図の例ではバーコード（一次元コード）とされている。商品情報コード３００１は、レモンとしての商品の品目の商品コードを含む。他の商品情報パネル３０００においても、同様に、商品の情報として、商品の品目、単位重量あたりの単価、商品情報コードが提示されている。 The product information panel 3000 presents information on the corresponding product. In the figure, the product information panel 3000-LM is enlarged and shown. As described above, in the product information panel 3000-LM, the product item is lemon, the unit price per unit weight, and the product information code 3001 are presented as the product information. The product information code 3001 is a barcode (one-dimensional code) in the example of the figure. The product information code 3001 includes the product code of the item of the product as a lemon. Similarly, in the other product information panel 3000, the item of the product, the unit price per unit weight, and the product information code are presented as the product information.
商品情報パネル３０００は、ディスプレイデバイスが表示を行うことにより商品の情報を提示するようにされてよい。あるいは、商品情報パネル３０００は、ポスターなどのような印刷物を貼り付けることで商品の情報を提示するようにされてよい。 The product information panel 3000 may be configured to present product information by displaying on the display device. Alternatively, the product information panel 3000 may be adapted to present product information by pasting a printed matter such as a poster.
ディスプレイデバイスにより商品の情報を提示することによっては、タイムサービスなどのときの値引きを反映した表示をしかるべきタイミングで行うことができる。バーコードを時間経過に応じて変更して表示することによって、予めカメラで撮像しておいたバーコードなどを携帯端末２４０に読み取らせることで、異なる単価にて、量り売り商品を登録するといった不正を防止することができる。 By presenting the product information on the display device, it is possible to perform the display reflecting the discount at the time service or the like at an appropriate timing. By changing the barcode according to the passage of time and displaying it, by having the mobile terminal 240 read the barcode etc. captured by the camera in advance, fraud such as registering products sold by weight at different unit prices can be done. Can be prevented.
購入対象の商品の品目を入力するにあたり、客は、自分の携帯端末２４０に商品登録画面を表示させ、購入対象の商品の商品情報パネル３０００にて提示されている商品情報コードを携帯端末２４０に読み取らせる。同図においては、客がレモンＬＭに対応する商品情報コード３００１を読み取らせる様子が示されている。携帯端末２４０の商品登録画面におけるスキャン画像エリアＡＲ１１には商品情報コード３００１を撮像した様子が示されている。 When inputting the item of the product to be purchased, the customer displays the product registration screen on his / her mobile terminal 240 and transfers the product information code presented on the product information panel 3000 of the product to be purchased to the mobile terminal 240. Let me read it. The figure shows a customer reading the product information code 3001 corresponding to the lemon LM. The scan image area AR11 on the product registration screen of the mobile terminal 240 shows the image of the product information code 3001.
このようにしてレモンＬＭに対応する商品情報コード３００１のコードスキャンが行われると、携帯端末２４０は、読み取られた商品情報コード３００１からレモンＬＭの商品情報を取得する。携帯端末２４０は、取得された商品情報を利用して、量り売り商品の品目としてレモンＬＭを指定する。 When the code scan of the product information code 3001 corresponding to the lemon LM is performed in this way, the mobile terminal 240 acquires the product information of the lemon LM from the read product information code 3001. The mobile terminal 240 uses the acquired product information to designate Lemon LM as an item of a product sold by weight.
商品登録画面においては、商品登録状況エリアＡＲ１２が配置される。商品登録状況エリアＡＲ１２には、現時点における購入対象の商品の登録状況が示されている。同図では、商品登録状況エリアＡＲ１２においては、合計エリアＡＲ１２１、登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２（ＡＲ１２２−１、ＡＲ１２２−２、ＡＲ１２２−３）が配置されている。登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２は、登録済みの商品または品目の入力が行われた仮登録状態の商品を個々に示すリスト項目である。 On the product registration screen, the product registration status area AR12 is arranged. The product registration status area AR12 shows the registration status of the product to be purchased at the present time. In the figure, in the product registration status area AR12, the total area AR121 and the registration list items AR122 (AR122-1, AR122-2, AR122-3) are arranged. The registration list item AR122 is a list item that individually indicates a registered product or a product in a provisionally registered state in which an item has been input.
同図においては、登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２として、ヨーグルト、リンゴＡＰ、レモンＬＭごとに対応する登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２−１、ＡＲ１２２−２、ＡＲ１２２−３が配置されている。 In the figure, as the registration list item AR122, the registration list items AR122-1, AR122-2, and AR122-3 corresponding to each of yogurt, apple AP, and lemon LM are arranged.
この場合、ヨーグルトは量り売り商品ではない。このため、ヨーグルトの登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２−１においては、コメント表示ＣＭにおいて「×１」と表示されていることで１個が登録済みとされるとともに、価格が１６０円であることが示されている。 In this case, yogurt is not a merchandise sold by weight. Therefore, in the yogurt registration list item AR122-1, one item is registered by displaying "x1" in the comment display CM, and the price is 160 yen. There is.
これに対して、リンゴＡＰ、レモンＬＭの各量り売り商品については、購入対象の商品について、「仮登録」の状態（仮登録状態）である。仮登録状態の商品とは、品目の入力は行われたが、未だ値付けが完了していない（計量待ちの状態でもある）商品である。 On the other hand, the apple AP and lemon LM products sold by weight are in the “temporary registration” state (temporary registration state) for the products to be purchased. A product in the provisionally registered state is a product in which the item has been input but the pricing has not been completed (it is also in the state of waiting for weighing).
このため、リンゴＡＰ、レモンＬＭの登録リスト項目においては、例えば「要計量」とのコメント表示ＣＭによって、計量による値付けが未だ行われていないことを示している。これに伴い、リンゴＡＰ、レモンＬＭの登録リスト項目においては、「？？円」との表示によって、価格について未確定であることが示されている。登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２−１、ＡＲ１２２−２においては、仮登録状態を示す所定の背景色が設定される。 For this reason, in the registration list items of apple AP and lemon LM, for example, a comment display CM saying "weighing required" indicates that pricing by weighing has not yet been performed. Along with this, in the registration list items of apple AP and lemon LM, the display of "?? Yen" indicates that the price is undecided. In the registration list items AR122-1 and AR122-2, a predetermined background color indicating the temporary registration state is set.
同図の例では、客は量り売り商品として、レモンＬＭとリンゴＡＰとを仮登録している状況にある。この場合において、客が購入対象として品目を指定した量り売り商品は、レモンＬＭとリンゴＡＰとの２種類であった。この場合の客は、レモンＬＭとリンゴＡＰとのそれぞれについて計量することになる。そこで、客は、陳列されているレモンＬＭ、リンゴＡＰのうちから、それぞれ自分が購入しようとする分量（個数）を取り出すようにする。そして、取り出したレモンＬＭ、リンゴＡＰを持参し、客は、計量値付け装置２１０に赴く。 In the example of the figure, the customer is in a situation where the lemon LM and the apple AP are provisionally registered as products sold by weight. In this case, there were two types of merchandise sold by weight for which the customer specified the item to be purchased: lemon LM and apple AP. In this case, the customer will weigh each of the lemon LM and the apple AP. Therefore, the customer tries to take out the quantity (quantity) to be purchased from each of the displayed lemon LM and apple AP. Then, the customer goes to the weighing and pricing device 210 with the taken out lemon LM and apple AP.
客が赴いた先の計量値付け装置２１０は、他の客の操作に対応して動作していない状態であったことから、一取引に応じた計量の開始を待機する待機モードの状態にあった。待機モードの計量値付け装置２１０は、客用ディスプレイ３１０６に初期状態の値付け操作画面を表示させている。 Since the weighing and pricing device 210 to which the customer went was not operating in response to the operation of another customer, it was in a standby mode of waiting for the start of weighing according to one transaction. rice field. The weighing and pricing device 210 in the standby mode displays the initial pricing operation screen on the customer display 3106.
図５６は、客用ディスプレイ３１０６に表示される初期状態の値付け操作画面の一例を示している。 FIG. 56 shows an example of the pricing operation screen in the initial state displayed on the customer display 3106.
値付け操作画面においては計量結果エリアＡＲ３１が配置される。計量結果エリアＡＲ３１は、値付け対象の量り売り商品について計量した結果が表示されるエリア（欄）である。計量結果エリアＡＲ３１においては、重量エリアＡＲ３１−１、重量単価エリアＡＲ３１−２、合計金額エリアＡＲ３１−３が含まれる。 The weighing result area AR31 is arranged on the pricing operation screen. The weighing result area AR31 is an area (column) in which the weighing result of the merchandise sold by weight to be priced is displayed. The weighing result area AR31 includes a weight area AR31-1, a weight unit price area AR31-2, and a total amount area AR31-3.
重量エリアＡＲ３１−１は、値付け対象の量り売り商品について計測された重量が示されるエリアである。 The weight area AR31-1 is an area where the measured weight of the goods sold by weight to be priced is shown.
重量単価エリアＡＲ３１−２は、値付け対象の量り売り商品の重量単価が示されるエリアである。 The weight unit price area AR31-2 is an area in which the weight unit price of the merchandise sold by weight to be priced is shown.
量り売り商品のうちには、計測された重量と単位重量に基づいて個数が算出され、算出された個数と、１個あたりの単価とに基づいて価格が算出される個数対応のものがある。このような個数対応の量り売り商品の場合には、重量エリアＡＲ３１−１には、計測された重量と単位重量に基づいて算出された個数が表示されるとともに、重量単価エリアＡＲ３１−２には１個あたりの単価が示されてよい。 Among the products sold by weight, there are products corresponding to the number of items for which the number is calculated based on the measured weight and the unit weight, and the price is calculated based on the calculated number of items and the unit price per item. In the case of such a quantity-corresponding product sold by weight, the weight area AR31-1 displays the number calculated based on the measured weight and the unit weight, and the weight unit price area AR31-2 is 1. The unit price per piece may be shown.
合計金額エリアＡＲ３１−３は、同じ一取引のもとで、これまでに値付けが完了した量り売り商品の価格を合計した合計金額が示されるエリアである。 The total amount area AR31-3 is an area showing the total amount of the total prices of the merchandise sold by weight for which pricing has been completed so far under the same transaction.
商品選択エリアＡＲ３２は、値付け対象とする商品を選択可能なエリアである。同図の商品選択エリアＡＲ３２においては、商品選択エリアＡＲ３２に４つのタブＴＢ（ＴＢ−１~ＴＢ−４）が配置されている。商品選択エリアＡＲ３２においては、タブＴＢごとにそれぞれ商品ボタンが配置されるシートが対応付けられている。タブＴＢは、客の操作により選択可能である。選択されたタブＴＢは、他のタブＴＢに対して強調表示が行われ、商品選択エリアＡＲ３２においては、選択されたタブＴＢのシートに配置された商品ボタンＢＴ１が表示される。 The product selection area AR32 is an area in which a product to be priced can be selected. In the product selection area AR32 of the figure, four tabs TB (TB-1 to TB-4) are arranged in the product selection area AR32. In the product selection area AR32, a sheet on which a product button is arranged is associated with each tab TB. The tab TB can be selected by the operation of the customer. The selected tab TB is highlighted with respect to the other tab TB, and in the product selection area AR32, the product button BT1 arranged on the sheet of the selected tab TB is displayed.
同図の例では、タブＴＢ−１に対応するシートは、仮登録商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１が配置される。 In the example of the figure, the product button BT1 of the temporarily registered product is arranged on the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-1.
タブＴＢ−２に対応するシートは、量り売り商品の分類により予め商品マスタに登録されている商品ごとの商品ボタンＢＴ１（プリセットキー）が所定の順序で配置される。 In the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-2, the product buttons BT1 (preset keys) for each product registered in advance in the product master according to the classification of the products sold by weight are arranged in a predetermined order.
タブＴＢ−３に対応するシートは、商品マスタにおける量り売り商品の分類のもと、さらに、果物に分類される商品の商品ボタンが配置される。 On the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-3, the product buttons of the products classified as fruits are further arranged under the classification of the products sold by weight in the product master.
タブＴＢ−４に対応するシートは、商品マスタにおける量り売り商品の分類のもと、さらに野菜に分類される商品の商品ボタンが配置されるシートに対応するタブである。 The sheet corresponding to the tab TB-4 is a tab corresponding to the sheet on which the product buttons of the products classified as vegetables are arranged under the classification of the products sold by weight in the product master.
この場合には、量り売り商品のうち、果物と野菜の商品が購入実績が高いことに応じて、果物のシートと野菜のシートとを用意したものである。 In this case, a fruit sheet and a vegetable sheet are prepared according to the fact that the fruit and vegetable products have a high purchase record among the products sold by weight.
初期状態の値付け操作画面では、同図に示されるように、タブＴＢ−２が選択されている。これにより、商品選択エリアＡＲ３２においては、タブＴＢ−２に対応するシート上で商品マスタに量り売り商品の分類で登録された商品全般に含まれる商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１が配置された状態にある。 On the initial pricing operation screen, tab TB-2 is selected, as shown in the figure. As a result, in the product selection area AR32, the product button BT1 of the product included in all the products registered in the product master in the classification of the products sold by weight is arranged on the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-2.
この場合のシート上での商品ボタンＢＴ１の配置順は、例えば購入実績や、予め設定された優先順位に基づいて定められてよい。同図の商品選択エリアＡＲ３２においては、１６個の商品ボタンＢＴ１が配置されている。つまり、１６個の量り売り商品が選択候補として提示されている。量り売り商品の分類で登録された商品が１７以上の場合には、例えばシートのエリアに対するページ送りあるいはスクロール等の操作により、他の量り売り商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１を表示させることができる。 In this case, the order of arrangement of the product buttons BT1 on the sheet may be determined based on, for example, the purchase record or a preset priority. In the product selection area AR32 in the figure, 16 product buttons BT1 are arranged. That is, 16 products sold by weight are presented as selection candidates. When the number of products registered in the classification of products sold by weight is 17, for example, the product button BT1 of other products sold by weight can be displayed by an operation such as page turning or scrolling with respect to the sheet area.
同図においては、商品ボタンＢＴ１において「Ｉｔｅｍ１」、「Ｉｔｅｍ２」のように商品の情報を簡易化して示しているが、例えば商品ボタンＢＴ１には、対応の商品を示す商品名や絵柄等が表示されてよい。 In the figure, the product button BT1 shows the product information in a simplified manner such as "Item1" and "Item2". For example, the product button BT1 displays the product name, the pattern, etc. indicating the corresponding product. May be done.
タブＴＢ−２に対応するシートは、商品マスタにより量り売り商品に分類されている商品全般から値付け対象の商品を指定（選択）する操作を行うエリアとなる。 The sheet corresponding to the tab TB-2 is an area for performing an operation of designating (selecting) a product to be priced from all the products classified as products sold by weight by the product master.
タブＴＢ−２に対応するシートは、携帯端末２４０を利用せずに量り売り商品の値付けを行う客が、値付け対象の量り売り商品を選択する操作を行うエリアとなる。 The seat corresponding to the tab TB-2 is an area where a customer who prices a product for sale by weight without using the mobile terminal 240 performs an operation of selecting a product for sale by weight to be priced.
携帯端末２４０を利用せずに量り売り商品の値付けを行う客の場合、携帯端末２４０から仮登録された量り売り商品の情報を取得することができない。この場合、客は、量り売り商品の陳列された場所から取ってきた購入対象の量り売り商品に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ１を、タブＴＢ−２に対応するシートから見つけ、見つけた商品ボタンＢＴ１を操作する。この際、商品登録に携帯端末２４０を用いない客は、タブＴＢ−２のシートにおける商品ボタンＢＴ１に対する操作により、値付け対象の商品の品目を指定するようにされる。 In the case of a customer who sets a price for a merchandise sold by weight without using the mobile terminal 240, it is not possible to obtain information on the merchandise sold by weight provisionally registered from the mobile terminal 240. In this case, the customer finds the product button BT1 corresponding to the product for sale by weight taken from the place where the product for sale by weight is displayed from the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-2, and operates the found product button BT1. At this time, the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 for product registration is made to specify the item of the product to be priced by operating the product button BT1 on the sheet of the tab TB-2.
購入対象の量り売り商品が果物である場合、商品登録に携帯端末２４０を用いない客は、タブＴＢ−３を操作して、果物の分類の量り売り商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１が配置されたシートを表示させることができる。客は、表示されたシートに配置された商品ボタンＢＴ１のうちから、購入対象の量り売り商品に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ１を操作し、値付け対象の商品の品目として指定を行うことができる。 When the product to be purchased by weight is a fruit, the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 for product registration operates the tab TB-3 to display the sheet on which the product button BT1 of the product for sale by weight in the fruit classification is arranged. be able to. The customer can operate the product button BT1 corresponding to the product sold by weight to be purchased from the product button BT1 arranged on the displayed sheet, and can specify the item as the item of the product to be priced.
購入対象の量り売り商品が野菜である場合、商品登録に携帯端末２４０を用いない客は、タブＴＢ−４を操作して、野菜の分類の量り売り商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１が配置されたシートを表示させことができる。客は、表示されたシートに配置された商品ボタンＢＴ１のうちから、購入対象の量り売り商品に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ１を操作し、値付け対象の商品の品目として指定を行うことができる。 When the product sold by weight to be purchased is a vegetable, the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 for product registration operates the tab TB-4 to display the sheet on which the product button BT1 of the product sold by weight in the vegetable classification is arranged. be able to. The customer can operate the product button BT1 corresponding to the product sold by weight to be purchased from the product button BT1 arranged on the displayed sheet, and can specify the item as the item of the product to be priced.
商品選択エリアＡＲ３２における上側にはメッセージエリアＡＲｍが配置されている。メッセージエリアＡＲｍは、現在の画面の内容に応じた所定の内容のメッセージが表示されるエリアである。同図のメッセージエリアＡＲｍにおいては、「ＳｅｌｅｃｔＴｈｅＩｔｅｍ」と表示されている。つまり、この場合のメッセージエリアＡＲｍには、値付け対象の商品の品目指定を行うための商品ボタンＢＴ１の操作を行ってもらうことを客に案内するメッセージが表示されている。 A message area ARM is arranged above the product selection area AR32. The message area ARM is an area in which a message having a predetermined content according to the content of the current screen is displayed. In the message area ARM in the figure, "SelectTheItem" is displayed. That is, in the message area ARM in this case, a message is displayed to guide the customer to operate the product button BT1 for designating the item of the product to be priced.
値付け操作画面においては、接続情報コードエリアＡＲ３４が配置される。接続情報コードエリアＡＲ３４は、接続情報コードＣＤが表示されるエリアである。接続情報コードは、例えば二次元コードとして表示されてよい。接続情報コードは、買い物アプリケーションが動作する携帯端末２４０が、例えばＢｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈにより計量値付け装置２１０と接続するための手続き等が示される制御情報である。 On the pricing operation screen, the connection information code area AR34 is arranged. The connection information code area AR34 is an area in which the connection information code CD is displayed. The connection information code may be displayed as, for example, a two-dimensional code. The connection information code is control information indicating a procedure for the mobile terminal 240 on which the shopping application operates to connect to the weighing and pricing device 210 by, for example, Bluetooth.
接続情報コードエリアＡＲ３４においては、客に向けて、接続情報コードＣＤを携帯端末２４０に読み取らせることを案内するメッセージ表示が行われている。 In the connection information code area AR34, a message is displayed to guide the customer to read the connection information code CD by the mobile terminal 240.
値付け操作画面においては、量り売り商品を文字入力操作により検索可能な検索エリアＡＲ３３が配置されている。同図の例では、検索エリアＡＲ３３において配置されたソフトウェアキーボードを操作して商品名等を入力することで量り売り商品の検索が可能なようにされている。 On the pricing operation screen, a search area AR33 is arranged in which a product sold by weight can be searched by a character input operation. In the example of the figure, it is possible to search for a product sold by weight by operating a software keyboard arranged in the search area AR33 and inputting a product name or the like.
検索エリアＡＲ３３は値付け操作画面に配置されていなくともよい。そのうえで、例えば値付け操作画面に対する所定操作が行われたことに応じて検索エリアＡＲ３３が表示されるようにしてよい。 The search area AR33 does not have to be arranged on the pricing operation screen. Then, for example, the search area AR33 may be displayed in response to a predetermined operation on the pricing operation screen.
商品登録に携帯端末２４０を利用する客は、購入対象の量り売り商品の登録の開始にあたり、接続情報コードエリアＡＲ３４に表示されている接続情報コードＣＤを携帯端末２４０により読み取らせる操作を行う。 A customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 for product registration performs an operation of causing the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code CD displayed in the connection information code area AR34 at the start of registration of the product sold by weight to be purchased.
携帯端末２４０は、読み取った接続情報コードＣＤに基づき、計量値付け装置２１０との通信を確立させる。このように計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０とが通信可能に接続されることによっては、計量値付け装置２１０は、接続先の携帯端末２４０によって通信が専有される状態となる。通信が専有されている状態では、携帯端末２４０は、他の携帯端末２４０との接続を行わない。 The mobile terminal 240 establishes communication with the weighing and pricing device 210 based on the read connection information code CD. When the weighing and pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 are communicably connected in this way, the weighing and pricing device 210 is in a state in which communication is exclusively occupied by the connected mobile terminal 240. In the state where communication is exclusively used, the mobile terminal 240 does not connect to another mobile terminal 240.
計量値付け装置２１０は、商品登録に携帯端末２４０を利用しない客が、例えば秤台３１０９ｂに商品を載せたことで、計量を開始させた場合には、以降において携帯端末２４０との相互通信の確立を禁止してもよい。仮に相互通信の確立を禁止しない場合、相互通信の確立を試みても失敗に終わることとなるが、タイムアウトするまでの時間を費やすこととなるため、上記の宣言を検出してから実際に計量可能となるまでに時間が掛かることとなる。これに対し、相互通信の確立を禁止すれば、本来は不要な時間（タイムアウトする迄の時間）を節約し、計量が直ちに行われるようになる。例えば、ラベルの印刷が完了した後に、上記の禁止を解除するように動作してもよい。 When a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 for product registration starts weighing by, for example, placing a product on the scale 3109b, the weighing pricing device 210 communicates with the mobile terminal 240 thereafter. The establishment may be prohibited. If the establishment of mutual communication is not prohibited, even if an attempt to establish mutual communication is attempted, it will end in failure, but it will take time until the timeout occurs, so it is possible to actually measure after detecting the above declaration. It will take some time before it becomes. On the other hand, if the establishment of mutual communication is prohibited, the originally unnecessary time (time until time-out) is saved, and the measurement is performed immediately. For example, after the label printing is completed, the above prohibition may be lifted.
上記のように携帯端末２４０との相互通信の確立を禁止した場合には、計量値付け装置２１０は、これまでの接続情報コードＣＤの表示を消去してよい。この場合、接続情報コードＣＤが消去された接続情報コードエリアＡＲ３４においては、現在において携帯端末２４０との通信の確立が禁止された状態にある旨を示す表示が行われてよい。 When the establishment of mutual communication with the mobile terminal 240 is prohibited as described above, the weighing and pricing device 210 may erase the display of the connection information code CD so far. In this case, in the connection information code area AR34 where the connection information code CD has been erased, a display indicating that the establishment of communication with the mobile terminal 240 is currently prohibited may be performed.
あるいは、接続情報コードエリアＡＲ３４における接続情報コードＣＤの箇所を少なくともグレーアウト等により表示することで、現在において携帯端末２４０との通信の確立が禁止された状態にある旨を示すようにされてもよい。 Alternatively, by displaying the location of the connection information code CD in the connection information code area AR34 at least by graying out or the like, it may be indicated that the establishment of communication with the mobile terminal 240 is currently prohibited. ..
携帯端末２４０は、計量値付け装置２１０との通信が確立されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０に対して、仮登録状態の量り売り商品の情報を送信する。具体的に、この場合の携帯端末２４０は、仮登録状態の量り売り商品の情報として、レモンＬＭ、リンゴＡＰの情報を送信する。 The mobile terminal 240 transmits information on the merchandise sold by weight in the provisionally registered state to the weighing and pricing device 210 in response to the establishment of communication with the weighing and pricing device 210. Specifically, the mobile terminal 240 in this case transmits information on the lemon LM and the apple AP as information on the products sold by weight in the provisionally registered state.
計量値付け装置２１０は、仮登録状態の量り売り商品の情報を受信したことに応じて、値付け操作画面について、図５６から図５７に示される態様に変更する。図５７において、図５６と同一部分には同一符号を付して適宜説明を省略する。 The weighing and pricing device 210 changes the pricing operation screen to the mode shown in FIGS. 56 to 57 in response to receiving the information on the merchandise sold by weight in the provisionally registered state. In FIG. 57, the same parts as those in FIG. 56 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
図５７の値付け操作画面の商品選択エリアＡＲ３２では、図５６にて選択されていたタブＴＢ−１に代えてタブＴＢ−１が選択された状態となっている。選択されたタブＴＢ−１に対応するシートには、リンゴＡＰとレモンＬＭとに対応する２つの商品ボタンＢＴ１が配置されている。２つの商品ボタンＢＴ１に対応するリンゴＡＰとレモンＬＭの量り売り商品は、先の図２５による説明のようにして仮登録された商品である。 In the product selection area AR32 on the pricing operation screen of FIG. 57, the tab TB-1 is selected instead of the tab TB-1 selected in FIG. 56. On the sheet corresponding to the selected tab TB-1, two product buttons BT1 corresponding to the apple AP and the lemon LM are arranged. The apple AP and lemon LM products sold by weight corresponding to the two product buttons BT1 are tentatively registered products as described with reference to FIG. 25 above.
つまり、携帯端末２４０は、携帯端末２４０から受信した仮登録状態の量り売り商品の情報に基づき、タブＴＢ−１に対応するシートに、商品選択エリアＡＲ３２に仮登録状態の量り売り商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１を表示させる。 That is, the mobile terminal 240 puts the product button BT1 of the temporarily registered product by weight in the product selection area AR32 on the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-1 based on the information of the product sold by weight in the temporarily registered state received from the mobile terminal 240. Display it.
この場合の商品ボタンＢＴ１の配置順は、仮登録順（商品情報コードの読み取り順）に応じたものであってもよい。 In this case, the arrangement order of the product buttons BT1 may be in accordance with the temporary registration order (reading order of the product information code).
つまり、計量値付け装置２１０は、待機モードにおいて携帯端末２４０との接続が確立されたことにより、仮登録状態の量り売り商品（仮登録商品）の情報を受信する。計量値付け装置２１０は、仮登録商品の情報を受信した際に、初期状態の値付け操作画面においてタブＴＢ−２のシート（図５６）を表示させていた場合には、仮登録商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１が配置されたタブＴＢ−１のシートの表示（図５７）に切り替えるようにされる。 That is, the weighing and pricing device 210 receives the information of the merchandise sold by weight (temporarily registered merchandise) in the provisionally registered state because the connection with the mobile terminal 240 is established in the standby mode. When the weighing pricing device 210 receives the information on the temporarily registered product and displays the tab TB-2 sheet (FIG. 56) on the initial pricing operation screen, the product of the temporarily registered product. The display (FIG. 57) of the sheet of the tab TB-1 on which the button BT1 is arranged is switched.
このようなタブＴＢの切り替えは、量り売り商品としての分類により商品マスタに予め登録されている商品のうちから、仮登録商品を強調（優先）して表示したものとして捉えられる。 Such switching of the tab TB can be regarded as emphasizing (prioritizing) the provisionally registered products from the products registered in advance in the product master according to the classification as the products sold by weight.
仮登録商品を強調（優先）して表示する態様としては、上記のようにシートを切り替える例に限定されない。 The mode of emphasizing (prioritizing) the provisionally registered product is not limited to the example of switching sheets as described above.
例えば、計量値付け装置２１０は、仮登録商品の情報を受信していない状態では、１のシートにおいて、図５６のように、量り売り商品全般に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ１を配置した表示を行う。 For example, in the state where the information on the provisionally registered product is not received, the weighing and pricing device 210 displays the product button BT1 corresponding to all the products sold by weight on the sheet 1 as shown in FIG. 56.
そして、仮登録商品の情報が受信されると、計量値付け装置２１０は、同じシートにおいて、量り売り商品全般に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ１のうちで、仮登録商品以外の商品ボタンＢＴ１は消去し、仮登録商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１を残すようにして表示してよい。この際、仮登録商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１は纏まって位置するようにして再配置されてよい。 Then, when the information on the temporarily registered product is received, the weighing pricing device 210 erases the product button BT1 other than the temporarily registered product among the product button BT1 corresponding to all the products sold by weight on the same sheet, and temporarily. The product button BT1 of the registered product may be displayed so as to remain. At this time, the product buttons BT1 of the temporarily registered products may be rearranged so as to be positioned together.
あるいは、計量値付け装置２１０は、仮登録商品の情報が受信されると、仮登録商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１のサイズが、仮登録状態ではない商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１よりも大きくなるようにして表示してよい。 Alternatively, when the information on the temporarily registered product is received, the weighing pricing device 210 displays the size of the product button BT1 of the temporarily registered product so as to be larger than the product button BT1 of the product not in the temporarily registered state. You can.
あるいは、計量値付け装置２１０は、仮登録商品の情報が受信されると、商品選択エリアＡＲ３２において、仮登録商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１が配置される領域と、仮登録商品でない商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１が配置される領域とを分けるようにして表示してよい。 Alternatively, when the weighing pricing device 210 receives the information on the temporarily registered product, the area in which the product button BT1 of the temporarily registered product is arranged and the product button BT1 of the product that is not the temporarily registered product are arranged in the product selection area AR32. It may be displayed so as to be separated from the area to be arranged.
このようにして同じシート上で仮登録商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１を仮登録状態でない商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１に対して強調させる態様は、適宜組み合わせされてよい。 In this way, the mode of emphasizing the product button BT1 of the temporarily registered product with respect to the product button BT1 of the product not in the temporarily registered state on the same sheet may be appropriately combined.
図５７の値付け操作画面では、接続情報コードエリアＡＲ３４において、接続情報コードＣＤが消去された代わりに、例えば「接続中」のように、現在において計量値付け装置２１０が携帯端末２４０と接続されている状態にあることを示す接続対応情報の表示が行われる。 In the pricing operation screen of FIG. 57, instead of erasing the connection information code CD in the connection information code area AR34, the weighing pricing device 210 is currently connected to the mobile terminal 240, for example, "connecting". The connection correspondence information indicating that the state is in the state is displayed.
このような接続情報コードエリアＡＲ３４の接続対応情報の表示が行われることで、客は、自分の携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０とが通信を行った結果、同図の商品選択エリアＡＲ３２の表示に遷移したことを確認できる。例えば客がなんらかの事情で、計量値付け装置２１０から少し離れたときに、別の客が計量値付け装置２１０を利用しようとするような状況となる場合がある。このような状況であっても、他の客が接続対応情報の表示を見ることにより、自分ではない客によって計量値付け装置２１０が使用中であることを把握することができる。 By displaying the connection correspondence information of the connection information code area AR34 in this way, the customer can communicate with the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210, and as a result, the customer can see the product selection area AR32 in the figure. You can confirm that the display has changed. For example, when a customer is a little away from the weighing and pricing device 210 for some reason, another customer may try to use the weighing and pricing device 210. Even in such a situation, it is possible to know that the weighing and pricing device 210 is being used by a customer other than himself / herself by seeing the display of the connection correspondence information by another customer.
メッセージエリアＡＲｍにおいては、値付け対象の商品の品目指定を行うため商品ボタンＢＴ１の操作を行ってもらうことを客に案内するメッセージが表示されている。 In the message area ARM, a message is displayed to guide the customer to operate the product button BT1 in order to specify the item of the product to be priced.
接続対応情報の表示の態様は、上記の「接続中」との表示以外の態様であってよい。接続対応情報としては、例えば端末番号、会員番号、会員登録名称、ハンドルネーム、キャラクタ、整理番号、値付け操作画面の背景色設定、携帯端末２４０との接続経過時間等を挙げることができる。 The mode of displaying the connection correspondence information may be a mode other than the above-mentioned display of "connecting". Examples of the connection correspondence information include a terminal number, a member number, a member registration name, a handle name, a character, a reference number, a background color setting of a pricing operation screen, an elapsed time of connection with the mobile terminal 240, and the like.
端末番号は、接続先の携帯端末２４０に付与された番号である。店舗において端末番号と客とは一意に対応するので、端末番号は、客を示す情報として扱うことができる。 The terminal number is a number assigned to the mobile terminal 240 to be connected. Since the terminal number and the customer correspond uniquely in the store, the terminal number can be treated as information indicating the customer.
会員番号は、接続先の携帯端末２４０にインストールされたショッピングアプリケーションのユーザ（会員）に付与された番号である。会員登録名称、ハンドルネーム等は、接続先の携帯端末２４０にインストールされたショッピングアプリケーションのユーザ（会員）により登録される名称である。 The member number is a number given to a user (member) of the shopping application installed on the mobile terminal 240 of the connection destination. The member registration name, handle name, and the like are names registered by the user (member) of the shopping application installed on the mobile terminal 240 of the connection destination.
キャラクタは、例えば客に対応するものとしてアイコンのような画像として表示される。キャラクタが表示されることで、計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０と接続され、仮登録商品の値付けを行う客に対応中であることを示す。客に対応するキャラクタは、例えばショッピングアプリケーションを利用して客が会員登録を行う際に選択するようにされてよい。あるいは、客に対応するキャラクタは、例えば予め計量値付け装置２１０に記憶させるなどして用意した所定数の種類のうちから、順に客に割り当てられるようにされてもよい。整理番号は、例えば計量値付け装置２１０を利用した値付けを待つ客に付された番号である。 The character is displayed as an icon-like image, for example, as corresponding to a customer. By displaying the character, it is indicated that the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 are connected to each other and the customer who is pricing the temporarily registered product is being dealt with. The character corresponding to the customer may be selected when the customer registers as a member by using, for example, a shopping application. Alternatively, the characters corresponding to the customers may be assigned to the customers in order from a predetermined number of types prepared by, for example, storing them in the weighing and pricing device 210 in advance. The reference number is, for example, a number assigned to a customer waiting for pricing using the weighing pricing device 210.
値付け操作画面の背景色設定としては、例えば携帯端末２４０と接続されたことに応じて、接続されていないときと異なる背景色に変更するようにされる。変更後の背景色については、客ごとに所定の色が対応付けられてよい（或る客の間で同じ色が対応付けられることは許容されてよい）。客に対応する背景色は、例えばショッピングアプリケーションを利用して客が会員登録を行う際に選択、設定するようにされてよい。あるいは、客に対応する背景色は、例えば予め計量値付け装置２１０に記憶させるなどして用意した所定数の色のうちから、順に客に割り当てられるようにされてもよい。 As the background color setting of the pricing operation screen, for example, depending on the connection with the mobile terminal 240, the background color is changed to a color different from that when the mobile terminal 240 is not connected. As for the changed background color, a predetermined color may be associated with each customer (it may be allowed that the same color is associated among certain customers). The background color corresponding to the customer may be selected and set when the customer registers as a member by using, for example, a shopping application. Alternatively, the background color corresponding to the customer may be assigned to the customer in order from a predetermined number of colors prepared by, for example, storing in the weighing and pricing device 210 in advance.
接続経過時間は、携帯端末２４０と接続されている経過時間である。このような経過時間は、携帯端末２４０を利用する客が計量値付け装置２１０を値付けのために専有している時間経過を示している。 The connection elapsed time is the elapsed time of being connected to the mobile terminal 240. Such an elapsed time indicates the passage of time in which the customer using the mobile terminal 240 occupies the weighing and pricing device 210 for pricing.
このような接続対応情報が表示されることによっても、客は、自分の携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０とが接続されていることを確認できる。他の客が、自分ではない客によって計量値付け装置２１０が使用中であることを把握できる。 By displaying such connection correspondence information, the customer can confirm that his / her mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210 are connected. Other customers can know that the weighing and pricing device 210 is in use by a customer other than themselves.
計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０とが接続されている状態においては、携帯端末２４０においても、所定の接続対応情報の表示が行われてよい。携帯端末２４０にて行われる接続対応情報の表示としては、例えば単に接続中であることを示す表示のほか、接続先の計量値付け装置２１０に付された番号、接続先の計量値付け装置２１０の種別等が表示されてよい。 In a state where the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 are connected, the mobile terminal 240 may also display predetermined connection correspondence information. As the display of the connection correspondence information performed on the mobile terminal 240, for example, in addition to the display indicating that the connection is in progress, the number assigned to the connection-destination weighing and pricing device 210 and the connection-destination weighing and pricing device 210 Type, etc. may be displayed.
このような表示が行われることで、客は、自分の携帯端末２４０の表示を見ることによって、計量値付け装置２１０と接続されているか否かを確認できる。計量値付け装置２１０が複数設置されている場合には、表示される番号等により、いずれの計量値付け装置２１０と接続されているのかを確認できる。 By performing such a display, the customer can confirm whether or not the device is connected to the weighing and pricing device 210 by looking at the display of his / her mobile terminal 240. When a plurality of weighing and pricing devices 210 are installed, it is possible to confirm which weighing and pricing device 210 is connected by the displayed number or the like.
携帯端末２４０においても、計量値付け装置２１０に表示されているのと同様の値付け操作画面が表示されるようにしてよい。これにより、客は、仮登録状態の商品を値付けして登録する操作を、携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０とのいずれに対しても行うことができる。 The mobile terminal 240 may also display a pricing operation screen similar to that displayed on the weighing pricing device 210. As a result, the customer can perform the operation of pricing and registering the temporarily registered product for both the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210.
携帯端末２４０においては、値付け操作画面が表示されなくともよい。この場合には、例えば携帯端末２４０において商品登録画面等が表示されるようにしてよい。この場合、客は、値付けに関する操作を全て計量値付け装置２１０に対して行うこととなる。そこで、この場合の携帯端末２４０は、接続情報コードＣＤの読み取りにより計量値付け装置２１０と接続されたことに応じて、例えば「現在、計量値付け装置と通信中です。計量値付け装置を操作してください」といった表示を行うようにされてよい。このような表示は、携帯端末２４０が値付け処理結果が反映された商品値付け情報が受信されるまで行われてよい。 In the mobile terminal 240, the pricing operation screen does not have to be displayed. In this case, for example, the product registration screen or the like may be displayed on the mobile terminal 240. In this case, the customer will perform all the pricing operations on the weighing pricing device 210. Therefore, the mobile terminal 240 in this case responds to the fact that it is connected to the weighing pricing device 210 by reading the connection information code CD, for example, "Currently communicating with the weighing pricing device. Operate the weighing pricing device. Please do so. " Such display may be performed until the mobile terminal 240 receives the product pricing information reflecting the pricing processing result.
以降の説明では、客は計量値付け装置２１０に表示された値付け操作画面を操作して登録を行う場合を例に挙げる。 In the following description, a case where the customer operates the pricing operation screen displayed on the weighing pricing device 210 to perform registration will be given as an example.
ここで、客は、仮登録状態のリンゴＡＰとレモンＬＭのうち、まず、リンゴＡＰから登録することとした。そこで、客は、リンゴＡＰに対応する商品ボタンＢＴ１を操作した。これにより、リンゴＡＰが値付け対象として指定される。 Here, the customer decides to first register from the apple AP among the apple AP and the lemon LM in the provisionally registered state. Therefore, the customer operated the product button BT1 corresponding to the apple AP. As a result, the apple AP is designated as a pricing target.
リンゴＡＰが値付け対象として指定されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０における客用ディスプレイ３１０６の表示は、値付け操作画面から計量案内画面に遷移する。 In response to the apple AP being designated as the pricing target, the display of the customer display 3106 in the weighing pricing device 210 transitions from the pricing operation screen to the weighing guidance screen.
図５８は、計量案内画面の一例を示している。同図の計量案内画面において、図５６、図５７の値付け操作画面と同一となる部位については同一符号を付している。 FIG. 58 shows an example of the weighing guide screen. In the weighing guide screen of FIG. 56, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that are the same as the pricing operation screens of FIGS. 56 and 57.
計量案内画面においては、値付け操作画面において配置されていた商品選択エリアＡＲ３２に代えて、計量案内エリアＡＲ３６が配置される。同図の計量案内エリアＡＲ３６においては、「リンゴ」との文字及びリンゴの絵柄が表示されている。計量案内エリアＡＲ３６においても、メッセージエリアＡＲｍが配置される。計量案内エリアＡＲ３６のメッセージエリアＡＲｍにおいては、「ＰＬＡＣＥＩＴＥＭ」のように、客に向けて、リンゴＡＰを秤台３１０９ｂに載せてもらうように案内するメッセージが表示される。 On the weighing guide screen, the weighing guide area AR36 is arranged in place of the product selection area AR32 arranged on the pricing operation screen. In the weighing guide area AR36 in the figure, the characters "apple" and the picture of an apple are displayed. The message area ARM is also arranged in the measurement guide area AR36. In the message area ARM of the measurement guidance area AR36, a message such as "PLACEITEM" is displayed to guide the customer to put the apple AP on the scale 3109b.
このような表示により、客は、自分が操作した商品ボタンＢＴ１がリンゴＡＰに対応するもので間違いがないことを確認できる。客は、購入対象の量り売り商品のうちのリンゴＡＰを秤台３１０９ｂに載せるべきことを把握することができる。 With such a display, the customer can confirm that the product button BT1 operated by the customer corresponds to the apple AP and that there is no mistake. The customer can grasp that the apple AP among the products sold by weight to be purchased should be placed on the scale 3109b.
同図の計量案内画面が表示されているときは、値付け対象とされたリンゴＡＰは、未だ秤台３１０９ｂに載せられていない状態である。 When the weighing guide screen shown in the figure is displayed, the apple AP to be priced has not yet been placed on the scale 3109b.
このようにリンゴＡＰを秤台３１０９ｂに載せる前の段階では、値付け操作画面の計量結果エリアＡＲ３１における表示は以下の状態である。つまり、重量エリアＡＲ３１−１は、未だ計量が行われていないことに応じて重量がゼロであることを示す。重量単価エリアＡＲ３１−２は、値付け対象として指定されたリンゴＡＰの重量単価を示す。このように表示される重量単価は、例えば商品マスタにおけるリンゴＡＰの商品情報から取得されてよい。合計金額エリアＡＲ３１−３は、価格がゼロであることを示す。このように値付け操作画面の計量結果エリアＡＲ３１において表示される計量前の内容も、計量結果エリアＡＲ３１において示される計量結果に含まれる。 In this way, before the apple AP is placed on the scale 3109b, the display in the weighing result area AR31 on the pricing operation screen is as follows. That is, the weight area AR31-1 indicates that the weight is zero depending on the fact that the weighing has not been performed yet. The weight unit price area AR31-2 indicates the weight unit price of the apple AP designated as the price target. The weight unit price displayed in this way may be obtained from, for example, the product information of the apple AP in the product master. The total amount area AR31-3 indicates that the price is zero. The content before weighing displayed in the weighing result area AR31 on the pricing operation screen is also included in the weighing result shown in the weighing result area AR31.
計量案内エリアＡＲ３６においては、戻るボタンＢＴ１４、中止ボタンＢＴ１５が配置されている。戻るボタンＢＴ１４は、前画面に戻す操作が行われるボタンである。中止ボタンＢＴ１５は、仮登録状態の量り売り商品の計量、値付けによる登録の中止を指示する操作が行われるボタンである。 In the weighing guide area AR36, a back button BT14 and a stop button BT15 are arranged. The back button BT14 is a button on which an operation to return to the previous screen is performed. The cancel button BT15 is a button for instructing the cancellation of registration by weighing and pricing the merchandise sold by weight in the provisionally registered state.
このときに客が中止ボタンＢＴ１２を操作すれば、リンゴＡＰの仮登録状態は解除される。この場合、客は、陳列場所から持ってきたリンゴＡＰについては、陳列場所に戻すか、保留商品として持ったままとしておいて、精算時に店員に渡すようにされてよい。 At this time, if the customer operates the stop button BT12, the temporary registration state of the apple AP is released. In this case, the customer may return the apple AP brought from the display place to the display place or keep it as a reserved product and hand it to the clerk at the time of payment.
計量案内画面が表示されている状態のもとでは、計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０との接続が継続されている。これに伴い、同図の計量案内画面においては、図５７の値付け操作画面から引き続き、接続報知表示の行われた接続情報コードエリアＡＲ３４が配置される。 While the weighing guide screen is displayed, the connection between the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 is continued. Along with this, on the weighing guide screen of FIG. 57, the connection information code area AR34 on which the connection notification display is performed is continuously arranged from the pricing operation screen of FIG. 57.
同図の計量案内画面が表示された状態において、客は、秤台３１０９ｂに値付け対象のリンゴＡＰを載せるようにする。 With the weighing guide screen shown in the figure displayed, the customer places the apple AP to be priced on the scale 3109b.
リンゴＡＰが秤台３１０９ｂに載せられたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、値付け処理を実行する。つまり、計量値付け装置２１０は、計量部３１０９により計測されるリンゴＡＰの重量が安定したと判定したことに応じてリンゴＡＰの重量を確定させ、確定された重量と重量単価とにより価格を算出する。 The weighing pricing device 210 executes the pricing process in response to the apple AP being placed on the scale 3109b. That is, the weighing pricing device 210 determines the weight of the apple AP according to the determination that the weight of the apple AP measured by the measuring unit 3109 is stable, and calculates the price based on the determined weight and the weight unit price. do.
このように値付け処理が実行されたことに応じて、客用ディスプレイ３１０６における表示は、図５８の計量案内画面から、計量結果画面に遷移する。 In response to the execution of the pricing process in this way, the display on the customer display 3106 transitions from the weighing guide screen of FIG. 58 to the weighing result screen.
図５９は、計量結果画面の一例を示している。同図において図５８と同一部分には同一符号を付して適宜説明を省略する。 FIG. 59 shows an example of the measurement result screen. In the figure, the same parts as those in FIG. 58 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
同図の計量結果画面では、計量結果エリアＡＲ３１において、重量エリアＡＲ３１−１にて計量されたリンゴＡＰの重量が示され、合計金額エリアＡＲ３１−３にて、算出されたリンゴＡＰの価格に応じた合計金額が示される状態に変化している。 On the weighing result screen of the figure, the weight of the apple AP weighed in the weight area AR31-1 is shown in the weighing result area AR31, and the total price area AR31-3 corresponds to the calculated price of the apple AP. The total amount has changed to the state shown.
計量案内エリアＡＲ３６においては、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６が配置される。メッセージエリアＡＲｍには、「ＰＲＩＮＴＬＡＢＥＬ」のように、リンゴＡＰの値付け処理結果が反映されたラベル（単品ラベル）の発行のためにラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６を操作してもらうことを客に促すメッセージが表示される。 In the weighing guide area AR36, the label issuing button BT16 is arranged. In the message area ARM, there is a message such as "PRINTLABEL" that prompts the customer to operate the label issuing button BT16 in order to issue a label (single item label) that reflects the pricing process result of the apple AP. Is displayed.
この場合、客は、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６を操作する。この場合の計量値付け装置２１０は、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６が操作されたことに応じて値付け処理による値付けを確定させ、リンゴＡＰについて確定された値付け結果を反映した内容が印刷されたラベル（単品ラベル）を発行する。このような計量結果画面のラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６に対する操作は、客が計量結果エリアＡＲ３１において表示される重量、価格等の値付け結果についての確認操作でもある。 In this case, the customer operates the label issuing button BT16. In this case, the weighing pricing device 210 confirms the pricing by the pricing process according to the operation of the label issuing button BT16, and the label printed with the content reflecting the determined pricing result for the apple AP. Issue (single item label). Such an operation on the label issuing button BT16 on the weighing result screen is also an operation for the customer to confirm the pricing result such as weight and price displayed in the weighing result area AR31.
ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６に対する操作が行われたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、ラベルの発行とともに、接続先の携帯端末２４０に対して、リンゴＡＰについての商品値付け情報の送信を行う。つまり、この場合のラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６に対する操作は、ラベルの発行と商品値付け情報との送信との２つの処理を指示するトリガとなる。 In response to the operation on the label issuing button BT16, the weighing pricing device 210 issues the label and transmits the product pricing information about the apple AP to the connected mobile terminal 240. That is, the operation on the label issuing button BT16 in this case serves as a trigger for instructing two processes of issuing the label and transmitting the product pricing information.
計量結果画面は、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６が配置されない態様とされてよい。この場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、例えば計量部３１０９により計測される重量が確定されたことに応じて、ラベルを発行し、商品値付け情報を送信してよい。 The weighing result screen may have a mode in which the label issuing button BT16 is not arranged. In this case, the weighing pricing device 210 may issue a label and transmit the product pricing information, for example, when the weight measured by the weighing unit 3109 is determined.
図示は省略するが、ラベルが発行された後は、計量結果画面からラベル貼付案内画面の表示に遷移するようにされてよい。ラベル貼付案内画面においては、計量値付け装置２１０から発行されたラベルを、今回値付けが行われたリンゴＡＰを入れた袋に貼り付けてもらうように案内するためのメッセージ、絵柄等の表示が行われる。客は、案内に従って、秤台３１０９ｂからリンゴＡＰを持ち上げ、ラベル排出口１１０ａから取り出したラベルを、リンゴＡＰの入った袋に貼り付けるようにされる。 Although not shown, after the label is issued, the display may be changed from the measurement result screen to the label affixing guidance screen. On the label affixing guidance screen, a message, a pattern, etc. are displayed to guide the label issued by the weighing pricing device 210 to be affixed to the bag containing the apple AP that has been priced this time. Will be done. According to the guidance, the customer lifts the apple AP from the scale 3109b and attaches the label taken out from the label discharge port 110a to the bag containing the apple AP.
ラベル貼付案内画面は、例えばラベル排出口１１０ａに設けられたセンサが、ラベルの取り出されたことを検出したのに応じて消去される。ラベル貼付案内画面の消去に代わり、客用ディスプレイ３１０６には、次の値付け対象の量り売り商品の品目を指定するための値付け操作画面の表示に遷移する。ただし、ラベル排出口１１０ａからラベルが取り出されたタイミングで、例えば未だ秤台３１０９ｂになんらかの重量物が載っている場合には、秤台３１０９ｂの重量物を取り除くことを客に案内する画面が表示される。 The label sticking guide screen is erased when, for example, the sensor provided in the label discharge port 110a detects that the label has been taken out. Instead of erasing the label affixing guidance screen, the customer display 3106 transitions to the display of the pricing operation screen for designating the item of the next price-selling product to be priced. However, at the timing when the label is taken out from the label discharge port 110a, for example, if some heavy object is still on the scale table 3109b, a screen for instructing the customer to remove the heavy object on the scale table 3109b is displayed. NS.
上記のように仮登録状態の量り売り商品について値付け結果が得られ、ラベルが発行されるタイミングで、計量値付け装置２１０は、値付け結果が反映されたリンゴＡＰの商品登録情報を、携帯端末２４０に送信する。 As described above, when the pricing result is obtained for the product sold by weight in the provisionally registered state and the label is issued, the weighing pricing device 210 sends the product registration information of the apple AP reflecting the pricing result to the mobile terminal. Send to 240.
計量値付け装置２１０は、商品登録情報を、通信回線を介して取引管理サーバ２５０に送信するようにしてもよい。 The weighing pricing device 210 may transmit the product registration information to the transaction management server 250 via the communication line.
図６０は、リンゴＡＰのラベルの発行が行われたことに応じて、ラベル貼付案内画面に代わって表示された値付け操作画面を示している。 FIG. 60 shows a pricing operation screen displayed in place of the label affixing guidance screen in response to the issuance of the apple AP label.
同図の値付け操作画面においては、図５７の値付け操作画面において表示されていたリンゴＡＰの商品ボタンＢＴ１がグレーアウトにより操作不可となっている。リンゴＡＰの商品ボタンＢＴ−１は、グレーアウトによる表示に代えて消去されてもよい。即ち、値付け操作画面における商品選択エリアＡＲ３２は、仮登録状態の量り売り商品の操作のみが可能なようにされている。 In the pricing operation screen of FIG. 57, the product button BT1 of the apple AP displayed on the pricing operation screen of FIG. 57 is grayed out and cannot be operated. The product button BT-1 of the apple AP may be erased instead of the grayed out display. That is, the product selection area AR32 on the pricing operation screen is designed so that only the products sold by weight in the provisionally registered state can be operated.
同図の値付け操作画面が表示されているときには、携帯端末２４０においても、同図と同様の操作が可能な値付け操作画面が表示されてよい。 When the pricing operation screen shown in the figure is displayed, the mobile terminal 240 may also display the pricing operation screen capable of performing the same operation as shown in the figure.
同図の値付け操作画面が表示された状態のもとで、客は、未だ仮登録状態であるレモンＬＭを値付け対象とするために、レモンＬＭの商品ボタンＢＴ１を操作する。 While the pricing operation screen shown in the figure is displayed, the customer operates the product button BT1 of the lemon LM in order to target the lemon LM, which is still in the provisionally registered state, as a pricing target.
客は、レモンＬＭに対応する商品ボタンＢＴ１１−２を操作した後、先に説明したリンゴＡＰと同様の手順で、レモンＬＭの値付け処理と、ラベルの発行を計量値付け装置２１０に行わせる。レモンＬＭについてのラベルの発行が行われたことに応じて、仮登録状態にあった全ての量り売り商品についての値付け処理（登録）が完了したことになる。 After operating the product button BT11-2 corresponding to the lemon LM, the customer causes the weighing pricing device 210 to perform the pricing process of the lemon LM and the issuance of the label in the same procedure as the apple AP described above. .. In response to the issuance of the label for Lemon LM, the pricing process (registration) for all the products sold by weight that were in the provisionally registered state is completed.
仮登録状態にあった全ての量り売り商品についての登録が完了したことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０の客用ディスプレイ３１０６の表示は初期状態の値付け操作画面（図５６）に戻るようにされる。 When the registration of all the merchandise sold by weight that was in the provisional registration state is completed, the display of the customer display 3106 of the weighing pricing device 210 is returned to the initial pricing operation screen (FIG. 56). NS.
仮登録状態にあった全ての量り売り商品についての登録が完了したことに応じて、携帯端末２４０のタッチパネル付ディスプレイ４０６に表示される商品登録画面は、例えば図３０に示される状態となる。 The product registration screen displayed on the touch panel display 406 of the mobile terminal 240 is in the state shown in FIG. 30, for example, in response to the completion of registration of all the products sold by weight that were in the provisional registration state.
図６１のフローチャートを参照して、第３の実施形態の計量値付け装置２１０、携帯端末２４０及び取引管理サーバ２５０が、一取引における量り売り商品の登録に関連して実行する処理手順例を説明する。 With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 61, an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing pricing device 210, the mobile terminal 240, and the transaction management server 250 of the third embodiment in connection with the registration of the merchandise sold by weight in one transaction will be described. ..
まず、客が携帯端末２４０を用いて購入対象とする量り売り商品の品目の入力を行う場合に対応する携帯端末２４０の処理手順例を説明する。 First, an example of a processing procedure of the mobile terminal 240 corresponding to the case where the customer inputs the item of the merchandise to be purchased by weight using the mobile terminal 240 will be described.
ステップＳ３２０１：携帯端末２４０は、タッチパネル付ディスプレイ４０６に商品登録画面を表示させている状態のもとで、商品情報コード３００１の読み取りが行われるのを待機する。 Step S3201: The mobile terminal 240 waits for the product information code 3001 to be read while the product registration screen is displayed on the touch panel display 406.
ステップＳ３２０２：商品情報コード３００１の読み取りが行われたことに応じて、携帯端末２４０は、読み取られた商品情報コードから商品情報を取得する。携帯端末２４０は、商品情報を取得することにより、客の購入対象の商品の品目を入力したことになる。 Step S3202: In response to the reading of the product information code 3001, the mobile terminal 240 acquires the product information from the read product information code. By acquiring the product information, the mobile terminal 240 inputs the item of the product to be purchased by the customer.
ステップＳ３２０３：携帯端末２４０は、ステップＳ３２０２により取得された商品情報の商品を示す登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２を、商品登録画面の商品登録状況エリアＡＲ１２に追加する。このように商品情報コード３００１の読み取りに応じて取得された商品情報の商品は仮登録商品として扱われる。仮登録商品の登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２は、図２５の登録リスト項目ＡＲ１２２−２、ＡＲ１２２−３のように、仮登録であることを示す背景色が設定され、コメント表示ＣＭにおいては「要計量」との表示により、値付けが未だ行われていないことを示すようにされる。 Step S3203: The mobile terminal 240 adds the registration list item AR122 indicating the product of the product information acquired in step S3202 to the product registration status area AR12 on the product registration screen. The product of the product information acquired in response to the reading of the product information code 3001 in this way is treated as a provisionally registered product. The registration list item AR122 of the provisionally registered product is set with a background color indicating that it is provisionally registered, as in the registration list items AR122-2 and AR122-3 of FIG. Is displayed to indicate that pricing has not yet taken place.
ステップＳ３２０３の処理の後はステップＳ３２０１に処理が戻される。 After the processing of step S3203, the processing is returned to step S3201.
次に、計量値付け装置２１０が仮登録商品の値付けに対応して実行する処理手順例を説明する。 Next, an example of a processing procedure executed by the weighing pricing device 210 in response to pricing of the provisionally registered product will be described.
ステップＳ３１０１：計量値付け装置２１０は、客による値付けに関する操作が行われていない状態（待機状態）では待機モードを設定する。待機モードにおいて計量値付け装置２１０は、客用ディスプレイ３１０６に、図５６に例示したように、初期状態の値付け操作画面を表示させる。値付け操作画面には、図５６に示したように、接続情報コードＣＤが表示されている。 Step S3101: The weighing and pricing device 210 sets the standby mode in a state (standby state) in which the customer has not performed an operation related to pricing. In the standby mode, the weighing and pricing device 210 causes the customer display 3106 to display the initial pricing operation screen as illustrated in FIG. 56. As shown in FIG. 56, the connection information code CD is displayed on the pricing operation screen.
ステップＳ３１０２：待機状態のもとで、計量値付け装置２１０は、接続情報コードＣＤを読み取った携帯端末２４０との接続処理が開始されたか否かを判定する。 Step S3102: In the standby state, the weighing and pricing device 210 determines whether or not the connection process with the mobile terminal 240 that has read the connection information code CD has been started.
ステップＳ３１０３：ステップＳ３１０２にて接続処理が開始されないと判定された場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、客による値付け対象の商品の選択操作が行われたか否かについて判定する。値付け対象の商品の選択操作は、値付け操作画面の商品選択エリアＡＲ３２に配置されるタブＴＢ−２、タブＴＢ−３、タブＴＢ−４のいずれかに対応するシートに配置された商品ボタンＢＴ１に対する操作である。 Step S3103: When it is determined in step S3102 that the connection process is not started, the weighing pricing device 210 determines whether or not the customer has performed the selection operation of the product to be priced. The product selection operation of the product to be priced is performed by the product button arranged on the sheet corresponding to any of tab TB-2, tab TB-3, and tab TB-4 arranged in the product selection area AR32 of the price setting operation screen. This is an operation for BT1.
ステップＳ３１０４：値付け対象の商品の選択操作が行われないと判定された場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、客が商品を秤台３１０９ｂに載せたことにより計量部３１０９が計量を開始したか否かを判定する。 Step S3104: When it is determined that the selection operation of the product to be priced is not performed, the weighing pricing device 210 determines whether or not the weighing unit 3109 has started weighing when the customer places the product on the weighing platform 3109b. Is determined.
計量部３１０９が計量を開始しないことが判定された場合にはステップＳ３１０１に処理が戻される。 If it is determined that the weighing unit 3109 does not start weighing, the process is returned to step S3101.
ステップＳ３１０５：ステップＳ３１０３により値付け対象の商品の選択操作の行われたことが判定された場合、またはステップＳ３１０４により計量が開始されたことが判定された場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、計量されている商品について、携帯端末２４０を利用しない取引に対応する値付け処理を実行する。 Step S3105: When it is determined in step S3103 that the selection operation of the product to be priced has been performed, or when it is determined in step S3104 that the weighing has been started, the weighing pricing device 210 is weighed. The pricing process corresponding to the transaction that does not use the mobile terminal 240 is executed for the product.
携帯端末２４０を利用しない取引に対応する、ステップＳ３０１５の値付け処理として、ステップＳ３１０３により商品選択操作が行われたことが判定された場合には、計量値付け装置２１０は、商品選択操作により選択された商品に対応する計量案内画面を、図５８に準じた態様で表示させる。この場合の計量案内画面における接続情報コードエリアＡＲ３４においては、接続情報コードＣＤが消去されてよく、「接続中」のようなメッセージは表示させない。携帯端末２４０を利用しない取引に対応する計量案内画面においても、接続情報コードＣＤが表示されていてよい。この場合、接続情報コードＣＤは、値付け処理結果が確定されてラベルが発行されるまで表示されていてもよいし、値付け処理結果が確定されてラベルが発行される以前の所定のタイミングで消去されてもよい。 When it is determined in step S3103 that the product selection operation has been performed as the pricing process in step S3015 corresponding to the transaction that does not use the mobile terminal 240, the weighing pricing device 210 selects the product by the product selection operation. The weighing guide screen corresponding to the product is displayed in a manner according to FIG. 58. In the connection information code area AR34 on the measurement guidance screen in this case, the connection information code CD may be erased, and a message such as "connecting" is not displayed. The connection information code CD may also be displayed on the measurement guidance screen corresponding to the transaction that does not use the mobile terminal 240. In this case, the connection information code CD may be displayed until the pricing process result is confirmed and the label is issued, or at a predetermined timing before the pricing process result is confirmed and the label is issued. It may be erased.
上記の計量案内画面を表示させた計量値付け装置２１０は、客が値付け対象の商品を秤台３１０９ｂに載せたことに応じて、計量部３１０９の計量結果に基づいて値付け対象の商品の価格を算出する。 The weighing and pricing device 210 that displays the above weighing guide screen indicates that the product to be priced is priced based on the weighing result of the weighing unit 3109 in response to the customer placing the product to be priced on the scale 3109b. Calculate the price.
価格が算出されると、計量値付け装置２１０は、計量結果画面を表示する。このような計量結果画面は、図５９に準じた態様であり、ラベルの発行の操作を客に案内する内容を有し、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６が配置されている。 When the price is calculated, the weighing pricing device 210 displays the weighing result screen. Such a weighing result screen has a mode according to FIG. 59, has a content of guiding the customer to the operation of issuing a label, and has a label issuing button BT16 arranged.
計量値付け装置２１０は、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６が操作されたことに応じて、今回の値付け対象商品の値付け処理結果が反映されたラベル（単品ラベル）を発行させる。この後、計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ３１０１に処理を戻すことで、初期状態の値付け操作画面を表示して待機モードとなる。 The weighing pricing device 210 issues a label (single item label) reflecting the pricing processing result of the product to be priced this time in response to the operation of the label issuing button BT16. After that, the weighing and pricing device 210 returns the process to step S3101 to display the initial pricing operation screen and enter the standby mode.
ステップＳ３１０５の値付け処理のもとで発行されるラベルには、商品の品目、価格等の値付け処理結果を反映した内容を有するバーコード等のコード情報が印刷される。ステップＳ３１０５の値付け処理により値付けされた商品は、客と応対する店員が操作するＰＯＳ端末（図示省略）にて商品登録が行われる。店員は、ラベルのコード情報をＰＯＳ端末に読み取らせる操作を行ことで、商品登録を行う。 On the label issued under the pricing process of step S3105, code information such as a bar code having contents reflecting the pricing process results such as the item and price of the product is printed. The product priced by the price processing in step S3105 is registered on the POS terminal (not shown) operated by the clerk who responds to the customer. The clerk registers the product by performing an operation of causing the POS terminal to read the code information of the label.
ラベルのコード情報は、ＰＯＳ端末だけではなく、携帯端末２４０によっても読み取り可能とされてよい。携帯端末２４０を利用する客であっても、例えば店員がミスにより、コード情報が印刷されたラベルを発行させてしまうといった可能性がある。この場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、携帯端末２４０に商品値付け情報を送信しないことになってしまう。このようなことが起こった場合であっても、ラベルのコード情報を携帯端末２４０によって読み取るようにすれば、携帯端末２４０が商品値付け情報を取得することができる。 The code information of the label may be readable not only by the POS terminal but also by the mobile terminal 240. Even a customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 may, for example, have a clerk issue a label on which the code information is printed due to a mistake. In this case, the weighing pricing device 210 does not transmit the product pricing information to the mobile terminal 240. Even when such a situation occurs, if the code information of the label is read by the mobile terminal 240, the mobile terminal 240 can acquire the product pricing information.
第３の実施形態においては、ステップＳ３１１１により携帯端末２４０を利用する客に対応して発行されるラベルにもコード情報を印刷することとしても、特に精算等の運用には支障がない。そのうえで、第３の実施形態としては、携帯端末２４０を利用する客の場合には、わざわざラベルに印刷されたコード情報を携帯端末２４０に読み取らせなくとも、携帯端末２４０が計量値付け装置２１０との通信を介して商品値付け情報を取得できるようにされている。 In the third embodiment, even if the code information is printed on the label issued in response to the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 in step S3111, there is no particular problem in the operation such as settlement. Then, in the third embodiment, in the case of a customer who uses the mobile terminal 240, the mobile terminal 240 can be referred to as a weighing and pricing device 210 without having the mobile terminal 240 read the code information printed on the label. It is possible to obtain product pricing information via the communication of.
ステップＳ３０１５の値付け処理として、ステップＳ３１０４により計量が開始されたことが判定された場合には、計量値付け装置２１０は、そのときに表示している値付け操作画面に対する商品ボタンＢＴ１の操作を待機する。客は、値付け操作画面の商品選択エリアＡＲ３２から秤台３１０９ｂに載せた商品に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ１を見つけ、見つけた商品ボタンＢＴ１を操作する。計量値付け装置２１０は、操作された商品ボタンＢＴ１が対応する商品を値付け対象として設定する。 When it is determined in step S3104 that the weighing is started as the pricing process in step S3015, the weighing pricing device 210 operates the product button BT1 on the pricing operation screen displayed at that time. stand by. The customer finds the product button BT1 corresponding to the product placed on the scale 3109b from the product selection area AR32 on the pricing operation screen, and operates the found product button BT1. The weighing and pricing device 210 sets the product corresponding to the operated product button BT1 as the price target.
計量値付け装置２１０は、操作された商品ボタンＢＴ１が対応する商品を値付け対象として設定すると、計量部３１０９の計量結果に基づいて値付け対象の商品の価格を算出する。 When the operated product button BT1 sets the corresponding product as the price target, the weighing pricing device 210 calculates the price of the product to be priced based on the weighing result of the measuring unit 3109.
価格が算出されると、計量値付け装置２１０は、ラベルの発行の操作を客に案内する内容を有し、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６が配置された計量結果画面を表示する。計量値付け装置２１０は、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６が操作されたことに応じて、今回の値付け対象商品の値付け処理結果が反映されたラベル（単品ラベル）を発行させる。この後、計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ３１０１に処理を戻すことで、初期状態の値付け操作画面を表示して待機モードなる。 When the price is calculated, the weighing pricing device 210 has a content of guiding the customer to the operation of issuing the label, and displays the weighing result screen on which the label issuing button BT16 is arranged. The weighing pricing device 210 issues a label (single item label) reflecting the pricing processing result of the product to be priced this time in response to the operation of the label issuing button BT16. After that, the weighing and pricing device 210 returns to step S3101 to display the initial pricing operation screen and enter the standby mode.
ステップＳ３１０６：ステップＳ３１０２にて接続処理が開始されたことを判定した場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、当該開始された接続処理を実行し、携帯端末２４０との接続を確立させる。 Step S3106: When it is determined in step S3102 that the connection process has been started, the weighing and pricing device 210 executes the started connection process and establishes a connection with the mobile terminal 240.
ステップＳ３１０７：接続が確立されると、携帯端末２４０は、仮登録商品情報を送信する。計量値付け装置２１０は、送信された仮登録商品情報を取得する。仮登録商品情報は、携帯端末２４０が商品情報コード３００１を読み取ったことに応じて品目が入力された、リンゴＡＰ、レモンＬＭ等の量り売り商品である。 Step S3107: When the connection is established, the mobile terminal 240 transmits the provisionally registered product information. The weighing pricing device 210 acquires the transmitted provisionally registered product information. The provisionally registered product information is a product sold by weight, such as an apple AP or a lemon LM, in which an item is input in response to the mobile terminal 240 reading the product information code 3001.
ステップＳ３１０８：仮登録商品情報を取得した計量値付け装置２１０は、仮登録商品対応の値付け操作画面を表示させる。仮登録商品対応の値付け操作画面は、図５７に例示した態様によるものである。 Step S3108: The weighing pricing device 210 that has acquired the provisionally registered product information displays the pricing operation screen corresponding to the temporarily registered product. The pricing operation screen corresponding to the provisionally registered product is based on the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 57.
ステップＳ３１０９：値付け操作画面を表示させた後、計量値付け装置２１０は、客の値付け操作に応じて値付け処理を実行する。つまり、客は、図５７の値付け操作画面における商品ボタンＢＴ１を操作して値付け処理対象の仮登録商品を指定する。計量値付け装置２１０は、商品ボタンＢＴ１の操作に応じて、図５８に例示した態様の計量案内画面を表示させる。客は、値付け処理対象として指定した仮登録商品を秤台３１０９ｂに載せ、計量部３１０９に計量を実行させる。計量値付け装置２１０は、計量部３１０９により計量された重量と、ステップＳ３１０７にて取得された仮登録商品情報において示される重量単価とを利用して価格を算出する。 Step S3109: After displaying the pricing operation screen, the weighing pricing device 210 executes the pricing process according to the customer's pricing operation. That is, the customer operates the product button BT1 on the pricing operation screen of FIG. 57 to specify the temporarily registered product to be priced. The weighing guide screen 210 displays the weighing guide screen of the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 58 in response to the operation of the product button BT1. The customer places the temporarily registered product designated as the price processing target on the scale 3109b and causes the weighing unit 3109 to perform the weighing. The weighing pricing device 210 calculates the price by using the weight measured by the weighing unit 3109 and the weight unit price indicated in the provisionally registered product information acquired in step S3107.
ステップＳ３１１０：ステップＳ３１０９の値付け処理により価格が確定されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、客用ディスプレイ３１０６に、図５９に例示した態様の計量結果画面を表示させる。計量値付け装置２１０は、計量結果画面の計量結果エリアＡＲ３１において、重量単価とともに、計量された重量、算出された価格が反映されるように表示を行う。 Step S3110: In response to the price being determined by the pricing process in step S3109, the weighing pricing device 210 causes the customer display 3106 to display the weighing result screen of the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 59. The weighing pricing device 210 displays the measured weight and the calculated price together with the weight unit price in the weighing result area AR31 on the weighing result screen so as to be reflected.
ステップＳ３１１１：計量結果画面においてはラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６が配置されている。客は、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６を操作する。ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６が操作されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、今回のステップＳ３０１８の値付け処理によって値付けされた商品に対応するラベルを発行する。当該ステップＳ３１０９の値付け処理が実行された場合には、後述のステップＳ３１１２により取引管理サーバ２５０に商品値付け情報が送信される。つまり、値付け処理の結果が取引管理サーバ２５０に渡される。このため、当該ステップＳ３１１１により発行されるラベルについては、値付け処理の結果が反映されたコード情報は印刷されなくともよい。 Step S3111: The label issuing button BT16 is arranged on the weighing result screen. The customer operates the label issuing button BT16. In response to the operation of the label issuing button BT16, the weighing pricing device 210 issues a label corresponding to the product priced by the pricing process in step S3018 this time. When the pricing process of step S3109 is executed, the product pricing information is transmitted to the transaction management server 250 by step S3112 described later. That is, the result of the pricing process is passed to the transaction management server 250. Therefore, for the label issued in step S3111, the code information reflecting the result of the pricing process does not have to be printed.
計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ３１１１の処理として、例えばステップＳ３１０９による値付け処理が完了して価格が確定されたことに応じてラベルを発行するようにされてよい。この場合、計量結果画面におけるラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６の表示は省略されてよい。 The weighing and pricing device 210 may be configured to issue a label as the process of step S3111, for example, when the pricing process of step S3109 is completed and the price is fixed. In this case, the display of the label issuing button BT16 on the weighing result screen may be omitted.
ステップＳ３１１２：計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ３１０８による値付け処理が完了して価格が確定されたことに応じて、携帯端末２４０に対して商品値付け情報を送信する。商品値付け情報には、今回のステップＳ３１０９による値付け処理の対象とされた商品についての値付け処理の結果が反映される。 Step S3112: The weighing pricing device 210 transmits the product pricing information to the mobile terminal 240 in response to the completion of the pricing process in step S3108 and the determination of the price. The product pricing information reflects the result of the pricing process for the product targeted for the price process in step S3109 this time.
ステップＳ３１１３：ステップＳ３１１２による商品値付け情報の送信の後、計量値付け装置２１０は、全ての仮登録商品についての値付け処理が完了したか否かを判定する。 Step S3113: After transmitting the product pricing information in step S3112, the weighing pricing device 210 determines whether or not the pricing process for all the provisionally registered products has been completed.
未だ値付け処理が完了していない商品が残っている場合、ステップＳ３１０８に処理が戻される。この場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ３１０８にて、図６０に例示したように値付け処理が完了した仮登録商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１１が操作不可の状態とされた値付け操作画面を表示させる。 If there are still products for which the pricing process has not been completed, the process is returned to step S3108. In this case, in step S3108, the weighing and pricing device 210 displays a pricing operation screen in which the product button BT11 of the temporarily registered product for which the pricing process has been completed is in an inoperable state as illustrated in FIG. ..
ステップＳ３１１４：ステップＳ３１１３にて全ての仮登録商品の値付け処理が完了したと判定された場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、ステップＳ３１０６により確立された携帯端末２４０との接続を切断する。 Step S3114: When it is determined in step S3113 that the pricing process for all the provisionally registered products is completed, the weighing pricing device 210 disconnects from the mobile terminal 240 established in step S3106.
携帯端末２４０との接続を切断した後は、ステップＳ３１０１に処理が戻されることで待機モードとなり、初期状態の値付け操作画面が表示される。 After disconnecting from the mobile terminal 240, the process is returned to step S3101 to enter the standby mode, and the initial pricing operation screen is displayed.
次に、携帯端末２４０が、仮登録商品の値付けに関連して実行する処理手順例を説明する。 Next, an example of a processing procedure executed by the mobile terminal 240 in connection with the pricing of the provisionally registered product will be described.
ステップＳ３２１１：携帯端末２４０は、商品登録画面を表示させている状態のもとで、接続情報コードＣＤが読み取られるのを待機している。 Step S3211: The mobile terminal 240 is waiting for the connection information code CD to be read while the product registration screen is being displayed.
ステップＳ３２１２：客が携帯端末２４０により接続情報コードＣＤを読み取らせる操作を行うことで、携帯端末２４０は、接続情報コードＣＤの読み取りを行う。接続情報コードＣＤの読み取りが行われたことに応じて、携帯端末２４０は、読み取った接続情報コードＣＤが示す接続手順に従って、計量値付け装置２１０と通信可能に接続するための処理を計量値付け装置２１０との間で実行する。 Step S3212: The mobile terminal 240 reads the connection information code CD by causing the customer to read the connection information code CD by the mobile terminal 240. In response to the reading of the connection information code CD, the mobile terminal 240 measures the process for communicably connecting to the weighing device 210 according to the connection procedure indicated by the read connection information code CD. Execute with the device 210.
ステップＳ３２１３：ステップＳ３２１２の接続処理によって計量値付け装置２１０との接続が確立されると、携帯端末２４０は、仮登録商品情報を計量値付け装置２１０に送信する。仮登録商品情報は、ステップＳ３２０１~Ｓ３２０３の処理によって品目の入力が行われた量り売り商品の情報である。 Step S3213: When the connection with the weighing and pricing device 210 is established by the connection process of step S3212, the mobile terminal 240 transmits the provisionally registered product information to the weighing and pricing device 210. The provisionally registered product information is information on products sold by weight for which items have been input by the processes of steps S3201 to S3203.
ステップＳ３２１４：携帯端末２４０は、ステップＳ３２１１により計量値付け装置２１０から送信された商品値付け情報が受信されるのを待機する。携帯端末２４０は、商品値付け情報が受信されると、受信された商品値付け情報が示す値付け処理結果が反映された商品登録情報を、取引管理サーバ２５０に送信する。携帯端末２４０は、商品値付け情報が受信されたことに応じて、商品値付け情報が示す仮登録商品についての値付けが完了したと判定する。 Step S3214: The mobile terminal 240 waits for the product pricing information transmitted from the weighing pricing device 210 in step S3211 to be received. When the product pricing information is received, the mobile terminal 240 transmits the product registration information reflecting the pricing processing result indicated by the received product pricing information to the transaction management server 250. The mobile terminal 240 determines that the pricing of the temporarily registered product indicated by the product pricing information has been completed in response to the receipt of the product pricing information.
ステップＳ３２１５：ステップＳ３２１４の処理の後、携帯端末２４０は、全ての仮登録商品についての値付け処理が完了したか否かを判定する。 Step S3215: After the process of step S3214, the mobile terminal 240 determines whether or not the pricing process for all the provisionally registered products has been completed.
未だ値付け処理が完了していない商品が残っている場合、ステップＳ３２１４に処理が戻される。この場合、携帯端末２４０は、ステップＳ３２１４にて、商品値付け情報が受信されるのを待機し、商品値付け情報が受信されると、受信された商品値付け情報が示す値付け処理結果が反映された商品登録情報を、取引管理サーバ２５０に送信する。 If there are still products for which the pricing process has not been completed, the process is returned to step S3214. In this case, the mobile terminal 240 waits for the product price information to be received in step S3214, and when the product price information is received, the price processing result indicated by the received product price information is displayed. The reflected product registration information is transmitted to the transaction management server 250.
ステップＳ３２１６：ステップＳ３２１５にて全ての仮登録商品についての値付け処理が完了したことが判定された場合、携帯端末２４０は、タッチパネルディスプレイ２４０６に商品登録画面を表示させる。 Step S3216: When it is determined in step S3215 that the pricing process for all the temporarily registered products is completed, the mobile terminal 240 causes the touch panel display 2406 to display the product registration screen.
次に、取引管理サーバ２５０が実行する処理手順例を説明する。 Next, an example of the processing procedure executed by the transaction management server 250 will be described.
ステップＳ３３０１：取引管理サーバ２５０は、ステップＳ３２１５により携帯端末２４０から送信される商品登録情報が受信されるのを待機している。 Step S3301: The transaction management server 250 is waiting for receiving the product registration information transmitted from the mobile terminal 240 in step S3215.
ステップＳ３３０２：商品登録情報が受信されると、取引管理サーバ２５０は、受信された商品登録情報を、今回の取引に対応するカート情報に登録（追加）する。この際、取引管理サーバ２５０は、受信された商品登録情報に含まれるのと同じカート識別情報に対応付けられたカート情報を検索し、検索されたカート情報に商品登録情報を登録する。ステップＳ３３０２の処理が行われたことにより、１の商品についての仮登録状態が解消され、登録が完了する。ステップＳ３３０２の処理の後は、ステップＳ３３０１に処理が戻される。 Step S3302: When the product registration information is received, the transaction management server 250 registers (adds) the received product registration information to the cart information corresponding to the current transaction. At this time, the transaction management server 250 searches for the cart information associated with the same cart identification information included in the received product registration information, and registers the product registration information in the searched cart information. By performing the process of step S3302, the temporary registration state for one product is canceled, and the registration is completed. After the processing of step S3302, the processing is returned to step S3301.
以下、第３の実施形態の変形例を説明する。 Hereinafter, a modified example of the third embodiment will be described.
［第１変形例］ [First modification]
例えば、携帯端末２４０を用いない量り売り商品の購入にあたり、値付け対象とする商品の品目の入力は、以下のようにして行われてもよい。 For example, when purchasing a merchandise sold by weight without using the mobile terminal 240, the item of the merchandise to be priced may be input as follows.
量り売り商品の陳列場所にて、陳列された量り売り商品ごとに対応してタグ装置が配置されてよい。タグ装置は、計量値付け装置２１０と有線または無線により通信可能に接続される。タグ装置は、対応の量り売り商品を示す商品情報を記憶する。タグ装置は、タッチセンサを備えることにより、タッチ操作により接触されたことを検出することができる。 At the display place of the merchandise sold by weight, a tag device may be arranged corresponding to each of the merchandise sold by weight displayed. The tag device is communicably connected to the weighing and pricing device 210 by wire or wirelessly. The tag device stores product information indicating the corresponding products sold by weight. By providing the tag device with a touch sensor, it is possible to detect that the tag device has been touched by a touch operation.
この場合、客は、自分の購入対象の量り売り商品のタグ装置に対してタッチ操作を行う。タッチ操作を検出したタグ装置は、自己が記憶する商品情報を計量値付け装置２１０に送信する。 In this case, the customer performs a touch operation on the tag device of the product sold by weight to be purchased. The tag device that detects the touch operation transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210.
本変形例の計量値付け装置２１０は、待機モードに対応して表示される値付け操作画面の商品選択エリアＡＲ３２において、タグ装置から受信した商品情報ごとに応じた商品ボタンＢＴ１を配置させた「ＭｙＩｔｅｍ」のタブＴＢ−１のシートを表示させる。 In the weighing pricing device 210 of this modification, the product button BT1 corresponding to each product information received from the tag device is arranged in the product selection area AR32 of the pricing operation screen displayed corresponding to the standby mode. Display the sheet of tab TB-1 of "MyItem".
ここで、本変形例の計量値付け装置２１０は、例えば待機モードにてタグ装置からの商品情報が受信されていない状態では、図５６のように、商品選択エリアＡＲ３２において、商品マスタに量り売り商品の分類で登録された商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１が配置された「ＰＯＰＵＬＡＲ」のタブＴＢ−２のシートを表示させていてよい。そのうえで、計量値付け装置２１０は、タグ装置からの商品情報が受信されたことに応じて、タグ装置から送信された商品情報に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ１を配置した「ＭｙＩｔｅｍ」のタブＴＢ−１のシートの表示に切り替えるようにしてよい。 Here, the weighing and pricing device 210 of this modification is, for example, in a state where the product information from the tag device is not received in the standby mode, as shown in FIG. 56, in the product selection area AR32, the product sold by weight to the product master. The sheet of the tab TB-2 of "POPULAR" in which the product button BT1 of the product registered in the above classification is arranged may be displayed. Then, the weighing pricing device 210 has a tab TB-1 of "MyItem" in which the product button BT1 corresponding to the product information transmitted from the tag device is arranged in response to the receipt of the product information from the tag device. You may switch to the sheet display.
このような表示が行われることで、例えば携帯端末２４０を利用しない客が計量値付け装置２１０に赴いたときには、自分がタグ装置にタッチ操作を行って購入対象として入力した商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１が表示されている状態にある。これにより、客は、自分が値付け対象としたい商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１を即座に見つけて操作することができる。 By performing such a display, for example, when a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 goes to the weighing pricing device 210, the product button BT1 of the product entered as a purchase target by touching the tag device is pressed. It is in the displayed state. As a result, the customer can immediately find and operate the product button BT1 of the product that he / she wants to price.
例えば携帯端末２４０を利用可能な客が、そのことを忘れて、タグ装置に対するタッチ操作によって値付け対象の商品の品目を入力してしまったが、計量値付け装置２１０に赴いたときに、携帯端末２４０を利用可能であることを思い出すような場合がある。 For example, a customer who can use the mobile terminal 240 forgets to do so and inputs the item of the product to be priced by touching the tag device, but when he goes to the weighing pricing device 210, he carries it. It may remind you that the terminal 240 is available.
このような場合、客は、例えば商品ボタンＢＴ１を操作する前に、携帯端末２４０に接続情報コードＣＤを読み取らせて、携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０とを接続させてよい。 In such a case, the customer may have the mobile terminal 240 read the connection information code CD to connect the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device 210, for example, before operating the product button BT1.
この場合、携帯端末２４０からは仮登録商品情報のないことが計量値付け装置２１０に対して通知される。このような通知を受けた場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、値付け操作画面の「ＭｙＩｔｅｍ」のタブＴＢ−１に対応するシート上に配置された商品ボタンＢＴ１を、仮登録商品に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ１として扱い、以降の値付け処理を実行するようにされてよい。 In this case, the mobile terminal 240 notifies the weighing and pricing device 210 that there is no provisionally registered product information. Upon receiving such a notification, the weighing pricing device 210 uses the product button BT1 arranged on the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-1 of "MyItem" on the pricing operation screen to be a product corresponding to the temporarily registered product. It may be treated as the button BT1 and the subsequent pricing process may be executed.
あるいは、図２５にて説明したように、商品が陳列された場所に商品情報パネル３０００を設けずに、携帯端末２４０を用いて量り売り商品を購入するか否かにかかわらず、客にはタグ装置に対するタッチ操作を行ってもらうようにされてもよい。携帯端末２４０を用いて量り売り商品を購入する場合、客は、上記のように商品ボタンＢＴ１を操作する前に、携帯端末２４０に接続情報コードＣＤを読み取らせて、携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０とを接続させる。 Alternatively, as described with reference to FIG. 25, the tag device is provided to the customer regardless of whether or not the product is purchased by weight using the mobile terminal 240 without providing the product information panel 3000 at the place where the product is displayed. You may be asked to perform a touch operation on. When purchasing a product sold by weight using the mobile terminal 240, the customer causes the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code CD before operating the product button BT1 as described above, and the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing and pricing device. Connect with 210.
［第２変形例］ [Second modification]
値付け対象とする商品の品目の入力は、以下のようにして行われてもよい。本変形例では、量り売り商品が収納される什器からの商品の取り出しが行われることに伴って動く蓋、レバー等の部位に、動きを検出する動きセンサが設けられる。動きセンサによる動きの検出は、例えば加速度センサ等により実現できる、対応の量り売り商品を示す商品情報を記憶する。動きセンサは、動きを検出したことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０に自己が記憶する商品情報を送信する。 The item of the product to be priced may be input as follows. In this modification, a motion sensor for detecting movement is provided on a part such as a lid or a lever that moves as the product is taken out from the fixture in which the product sold by weight is stored. The motion detection by the motion sensor stores the product information indicating the corresponding merchandise sold by weight, which can be realized by, for example, an acceleration sensor or the like. The motion sensor transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210 in response to detecting the motion.
この場合、客は、自分の購入対象の商品を、陳列された商品のうちから取り出す。商品の取り出しが行われたことに応じて、購入対象の商品に対応する動きセンサは、動きを検出する。動きセンサは、動きを検出したことに応じて、自己が記憶する商品情報を計量値付け装置２１０に送信する。 In this case, the customer takes out the product to be purchased from the displayed products. The motion sensor corresponding to the product to be purchased detects the movement in response to the product being taken out. The motion sensor transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210 in response to detecting the motion.
本変形例の計量値付け装置２１０は、待機モードに対応して表示される値付け操作画面の商品選択エリアＡＲ３２において、動きセンサから受信した商品情報ごとに応じた商品ボタンＢＴ１を配置させた「ＭｙＩｔｅｍ」のタブＴＢ−１のシートを表示させる。 In the weighing pricing device 210 of this modification, the product button BT1 corresponding to each product information received from the motion sensor is arranged in the product selection area AR32 of the pricing operation screen displayed corresponding to the standby mode. Display the sheet of tab TB-1 of "MyItem".
本変形例においても、計量値付け装置２１０は、例えば待機モードにて動きセンサからの商品情報が受信されていない状態では、商品選択エリアＡＲ３２において、商品マスタに量り売り商品の分類で登録された商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１が配置された「ＰＯＰＵＬＡＲ」のタブＴＢ−２のシートを表示させていてよい。そのうえで、計量値付け装置２１０は、動きセンサからの商品情報が受信されたことに応じて、動きセンサから送信された商品情報に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ１を配置した「ＭｙＩｔｅｍ」のタブＴＢ−１のシートの表示に切り替えるようにしてよい。 Also in this modification, the weighing pricing device 210 is a product registered in the product master in the product classification by weight in the product selection area AR32, for example, in a state where the product information from the motion sensor is not received in the standby mode. The sheet of the tab TB-2 of "POPULAR" on which the product button BT1 of the above is arranged may be displayed. Then, the weighing pricing device 210 has a tab TB-1 of "MyItem" in which the product button BT1 corresponding to the product information transmitted from the motion sensor is arranged in response to the product information received from the motion sensor. You may switch to the sheet display.
本変形例では、携帯端末２４０を用いない客は、そのまま計量値付け装置２１０において表示されているタブＴＢ−１のシート上の商品ボタンＢＴ１に対する操作を行って値付け対象の商品を指定してよい。 In this modification, the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 directly operates the product button BT1 on the sheet of the tab TB-1 displayed on the weighing and pricing device 210 to specify the product to be priced. good.
一方、携帯端末２４０を用いる客は、商品ボタンＢＴ１を操作する前に、計量値付け画面に表示されている接続情報コードＣＤを携帯端末２４０に読み取らせて、携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０とを接続させる。この場合、計量値付け装置２１０は、値付け操作画面の「ＭｙＩｔｅｍ」のタブＴＢ−１に対応するシート上に配置された商品ボタンＢＴ１を、仮登録商品に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ１として扱い、以降の値付け処理を実行する。 On the other hand, the customer using the mobile terminal 240 causes the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code CD displayed on the weighing price setting screen before operating the product button BT1, and causes the mobile terminal 240 and the weighing pricing device 210 to read the connection information code CD. To connect with. In this case, the weighing and pricing device 210 treats the product button BT1 arranged on the sheet corresponding to the tab TB-1 of "MyItem" on the pricing operation screen as the product button BT1 corresponding to the temporarily registered product, and thereafter. The pricing process of is executed.
本変形例の運用では、図２５に示したような商品が陳列された場所に商品情報パネル３０００を設けなくともよい。 In the operation of this modification, it is not necessary to provide the product information panel 3000 at the place where the products as shown in FIG. 25 are displayed.
［第３変形例］ [Third variant]
第６実施形態において、計量値付け装置２１０による値付け対象の商品（仮登録商品）の商品情報（仮登録商品情報）の取得は、携帯端末２４０から送信させた仮登録商品情報の受信に限定されない。 In the sixth embodiment, the acquisition of the product information (temporary registered product information) of the product (temporarily registered product) to be priced by the weighing pricing device 210 is limited to the reception of the temporarily registered product information transmitted from the mobile terminal 240. Not done.
例えば、計量値付け装置２１０は、客用ディスプレイ３１０６に量り売り商品ごとに対応するプリセットキーを配置した商品選択画面を表示可能とされる。商品選択画面は、図５６のタブＴＢ−２のシートのように、予め量り売り商品として登録された商品ボタンＢＴ１を配置した態様でよい。 For example, the weighing pricing device 210 can display a product selection screen in which a preset key corresponding to each product sold by weight is arranged on the customer display 3106. The product selection screen may have a mode in which the product button BT1 registered as a pre-sold product by weight is arranged as in the sheet of tab TB-2 in FIG. 56.
客は、表示された商品選択画面にて配置されたプリセットキーを操作することにより、計量値付け装置２１０による値付け対象の商品を指定することができる。計量値付け装置２１０は、操作されたプリセットキーが対応する商品の商品情報を、仮登録商品情報として取得するようにされてよい。 The customer can specify the product to be priced by the weighing pricing device 210 by operating the preset key arranged on the displayed product selection screen. The weighing pricing device 210 may be adapted to acquire the product information of the product corresponding to the operated preset key as the provisionally registered product information.
この場合には、携帯端末２４０から計量値付け装置２１０に値付け対象の商品の商品情報を送信する必要は無い。そこで、この場合の計量値付け装置２１０は、待機画面にて接続情報コードＣＤを表示させるのではなく、例えばプリセットキー操作に応じた所定のタイミングで、客用ディスプレイ３１０６に接続情報コードＣＤを表示させるようにしてよい。例えば In this case, it is not necessary to transmit the product information of the product to be priced from the mobile terminal 240 to the weighing and pricing device 210. Therefore, the weighing and pricing device 210 in this case does not display the connection information code CD on the standby screen, but displays the connection information code CD on the customer display 3106 at a predetermined timing according to, for example, a preset key operation. You may let it. for example
、計量値付け装置２１０は、プリセットキーが配置された商品選択画面を表示させたタイミングで接続情報コードＣＤを表示させてよい。あるいは、計量値付け装置２１０は、１つ目の仮登録商品を選択するプリセットキーの操作が行われてから最後の仮登録商品を選択するプリセットキーの操作が行われるまでにおける所定のタイミングで、接続情報コードＣＤを表示させてよい。あるいは、計量値付け装置２１０は、購入対象の量り売り商品の全てに対応するプリセットキーの操作が完了したタイミングで接続情報コードＣＤを表示させてよい。あるいは、計量値付け装置２１０は、購入対象の量り売り商品の全てに対応するプリセットキーの操作が完了した後において、少なくとも１つの商品の値付けが完了したタイミングで接続情報コードＣＤを示させてよい。 , The weighing pricing device 210 may display the connection information code CD at the timing when the product selection screen on which the preset keys are arranged is displayed. Alternatively, the weighing pricing device 210 is at a predetermined timing from the operation of the preset key for selecting the first temporarily registered product to the operation of the preset key for selecting the last temporarily registered product. The connection information code CD may be displayed. Alternatively, the weighing pricing device 210 may display the connection information code CD at the timing when the operation of the preset keys corresponding to all the products sold by weight to be purchased is completed. Alternatively, the weighing pricing device 210 may indicate the connection information code CD at the timing when the pricing of at least one product is completed after the operation of the preset keys corresponding to all the products sold by weight to be purchased is completed. ..
携帯端末２４０が接続情報コードＣＤを読み取って計量値付け装置２１０と通信可能に接続されることで、計量値付け装置２１０から携帯端末２４０に仮登録商品情報が送信可能となる。これにより、計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０とで仮登録商品情報を共有できる。 When the mobile terminal 240 reads the connection information code CD and is communicably connected to the weighing and pricing device 210, the provisionally registered product information can be transmitted from the weighing and pricing device 210 to the mobile terminal 240. As a result, the provisionally registered product information can be shared between the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240.
この場合における接続情報コードＣＤの消去は、計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０との接続が確立されたタイミングで行われてもよい。あるいは、接続情報コードＣＤの消去は、例えば全ての仮登録商品の値付けの完了に応じたタイミングで行われてよい。 In this case, the connection information code CD may be erased at the timing when the connection between the weighing and pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 is established. Alternatively, the connection information code CD may be erased, for example, at a timing corresponding to the completion of pricing of all the temporarily registered products.
例えば、計量値付け装置２１０に値付け対象の商品を撮像する撮像部を設け、客が購入対象の量り売り商品を撮像部により撮像させた画像の解析結果に基づいて、計量値付け装置２１０が、商品の品目を特定する。計量値付け装置２１０は、特定した品目に対応する商品情報を、例えば商品マスタ等から取得することで仮登録商品情報を取得するようにされてよい。この場合にも、例えば取引管理サーバ２５０が、商品が撮像された画像を計量値付け装置２１０から受信し、受信された画像を解析することにより、値付け対象の商品の品目を特定し、特定された商品の品目を取引管理サーバ２５０から計量値付け装置２１０に通知するようにされてもよい。 For example, the weighing pricing device 210 is provided with an image pickup unit that captures an image of a product to be priced, and the weighing pricing device 210 is based on an analysis result of an image obtained by the imaging unit of a product sold by weight to be purchased by a customer. Identify the item of goods. The weighing pricing device 210 may be configured to acquire the provisionally registered product information by acquiring the product information corresponding to the specified item from, for example, the product master or the like. Also in this case, for example, the transaction management server 250 receives an image of the product from the weighing pricing device 210 and analyzes the received image to identify and identify the item of the product to be priced. The transaction management server 250 may notify the weighing and pricing device 210 of the item of the goods.
この場合の計量値付け装置２１０は、１つ目の商品の仮登録商品情報が取得されてから最後の商品の仮登録商品情報が取得されるまでにおける所定のタイミングで、接続情報コードＣＤを表示させてよい。あるいは、購入対象の量り売り商品の全てに対応する仮登録商品情報が取得されたタイミングで接続情報コードＣＤを表示させてよい。 In this case, the weighing pricing device 210 displays the connection information code CD at a predetermined timing from the acquisition of the provisionally registered product information of the first product to the acquisition of the provisionally registered product information of the last product. You may let me. Alternatively, the connection information code CD may be displayed at the timing when the provisionally registered product information corresponding to all the products sold by weight to be purchased is acquired.
この場合における接続情報コードＣＤの消去も、計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０との接続が確立されたタイミング、あるいは、全ての仮登録商品の値付けの完了に応じたタイミング等で行われてよい。 In this case, the connection information code CD is also erased at the timing when the connection between the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 is established, or at the timing when the pricing of all the temporarily registered products is completed. good.
例えば陳列された量り売り商品ごとに対応して、客側に対応する位置にタグ装置が配置されてよい。タグ装置は、計量値付け装置２１０と有線または無線により通信可能に接続される。タグ装置は、対応の量り売り商品を示す商品情報を記憶する。タグ装置は、タッチセンサを備えることにより、タッチ操作により接触されたことを検出することができる。 For example, the tag device may be arranged at a position corresponding to the customer side corresponding to each of the displayed products sold by weight. The tag device is communicably connected to the weighing and pricing device 210 by wire or wirelessly. The tag device stores product information indicating the corresponding products sold by weight. By providing the tag device with a touch sensor, it is possible to detect that the tag device has been touched by a touch operation.
この場合、客は、購入対象の商品に対応するタグ装置に対してタッチ操作を行う。タッチ操作を検出したタグ装置は、自己が記憶する商品情報を計量値付け装置２１０に送信する。計量値付け装置２１０は、受信された商品情報を、仮登録商品情報として取得するようにされてよい。 In this case, the customer performs a touch operation on the tag device corresponding to the product to be purchased. The tag device that detects the touch operation transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210. The weighing pricing device 210 may be adapted to acquire the received merchandise information as provisionally registered merchandise information.
この場合の計量値付け装置２１０は、例えば１つ目の商品の仮登録商品情報が取得されたタイミングで、接続情報コードＣＤを表示させてよい。 In this case, the weighing pricing device 210 may display the connection information code CD at the timing when the provisionally registered product information of the first product is acquired, for example.
この場合における接続情報コードＣＤの消去も、計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０との接続が確立されたタイミング、あるいは、全ての仮登録商品の値付けの完了に応じたタイミング等で行われてよい。 In this case, the connection information code CD is also erased at the timing when the connection between the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 is established, or at the timing when the pricing of all the temporarily registered products is completed. good.
量り売り商品が収納される什器から、客が商品を取り出すことが行われることに伴って動く蓋、レバー等の部位に、動きを検出する動きセンサを設けてよい。動きセンサによる動きの検出は、例えば加速度センサ等により実現できる、対応の量り売り商品を示す商品情報を記憶する。動きセンサは、動きを検出したことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０に自己が記憶する商品情報を送信する。 A motion sensor that detects movement may be provided on a part such as a lid or a lever that moves as the customer takes out the product from the fixture in which the product sold by weight is stored. The motion detection by the motion sensor stores the product information indicating the corresponding merchandise sold by weight, which can be realized by, for example, an acceleration sensor or the like. The motion sensor transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210 in response to detecting the motion.
この場合、客は、購入対象の商品を、陳列された商品のうちから取り出す。商品の取り出しが行われたことに応じて、購入対象の商品に対応する動きセンサは、動きを検出する。動きセンサは、動きを検出したことに応じて、自己が記憶する商品情報を計量値付け装置２１０に送信する。計量値付け装置２１０は、受信された商品情報を、仮登録商品情報として取得する。 In this case, the customer takes out the product to be purchased from the displayed products. The motion sensor corresponding to the product to be purchased detects the movement in response to the product being taken out. The motion sensor transmits the product information stored by itself to the weighing and pricing device 210 in response to detecting the motion. The weighing pricing device 210 acquires the received product information as provisionally registered product information.
この場合の計量値付け装置２１０も、例えば１つ目の商品の仮登録商品情報が取得されたタイミングで、接続情報コードＣＤを表示させてよい。 The weighing pricing device 210 in this case may also display the connection information code CD at the timing when the provisionally registered product information of the first product is acquired, for example.
この場合における接続情報コードＣＤの消去も、計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０との接続が確立されたタイミング、あるいは、全ての仮登録商品の値付けの完了に応じたタイミング等で行われてよい。 In this case, the connection information code CD is also erased at the timing when the connection between the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 is established, or at the timing when the pricing of all the temporarily registered products is completed. good.
［第４変形例］ [Fourth variant]
第３の実施形態の変形例として、携帯端末２４０を利用する客と利用しない客とに対応して、以下のような手順で商品の値付けが行えるようにされてよい。 As a modification of the third embodiment, the price of the product may be set according to the following procedure in response to the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 and the customer who does not use it.
本変形例において、計量値付け装置２１０は、待機モードにおいて待機画面を表示させている。計量値付け装置２１０は、複数の待機画面を例えば所定時間ごとに循環的に切り替えるようにして表示させている。例えば、或る１つの待機画面は、値付けの開始のために商品を秤台３１０９ｂにおいてもらうことを客に案内する内容を有する。或る１つの待機画面は、商品に付されたコード情報（例えば、バーコード）の読み取りを客に案内する内容を有する。或る１つの待機画面は、値付けの開始のために商品を検索する操作を行ってもらうことを客に案内にする内容を有する。或る１つの待機画面は、値付けの開始のために待機画面をタッチする操作を行ってもらうことを客に案内にする内容を有する。 In this modification, the weighing pricing device 210 displays the standby screen in the standby mode. The weighing and pricing device 210 displays a plurality of standby screens so as to be cyclically switched, for example, at predetermined time intervals. For example, one standby screen has content that guides the customer to pick up the goods on the scale 3109b to start pricing. One standby screen has a content that guides the customer to read the code information (for example, a barcode) attached to the product. One standby screen has a content that guides the customer to perform an operation of searching for a product in order to start pricing. One standby screen has a content that guides the customer to perform an operation of touching the standby screen to start pricing.
本変形例では、商品の陳列場所にて第６実施形態で用いられた商品情報パネル３０００は用いられない。このため、携帯端末２４０を利用する客は、値付け対象の商品の品目の入力のために商品情報パネル３０００の商品情報コード３００１の読み取りによる仮登録は行わない。 In this modification, the product information panel 3000 used in the sixth embodiment is not used at the product display location. Therefore, the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 does not perform temporary registration by reading the product information code 3001 of the product information panel 3000 in order to input the item of the product to be priced.
本変形例において、客は、携帯端末２４０を利用するか否かにかかわらず、前述の第１変形例または第２変形例にて説明した、購入対象の商品に対応するタグ装置に対するタッチ操作、または動きセンサが備えられた陳列場所から購入対象の商品を取り出すことにより、値付け対象の商品の品目の入力（事前品目入力）を行うようにされる。あるいは、客は、携帯端末２４０を利用するか否かにかかわらず、まず商品の陳列場所から購入対象の商品を取ったうえで、計量値付け装置２１０に対して商品選択操作を行うことで、値付け対象の商品の品目の入力（画面操作品目入力）を行うようにされる。 In this modified example, regardless of whether or not the mobile terminal 240 is used, the customer touches the tag device corresponding to the product to be purchased as described in the first modified example or the second modified example described above. Alternatively, by taking out the product to be purchased from the display place equipped with the motion sensor, the item of the product to be priced is input (pre-item input). Alternatively, regardless of whether or not the mobile terminal 240 is used, the customer first picks up the product to be purchased from the product display location, and then performs the product selection operation on the weighing and pricing device 210. The item of the product to be priced is input (screen operation item input).
本変形例の計量値付け装置２１０は、客の操作に応じて動作していない状態では待機モード設定する。待機モードの計量値付け装置２１０は、客用ディスプレイ３１０６に初期状態の値付け操作画面を表示させている。初期状態の値付け操作画面は、図５６と同様の態様でよい。 The weighing and pricing device 210 of this modification sets the standby mode when it is not operating according to the operation of the customer. The weighing and pricing device 210 in the standby mode displays the initial pricing operation screen on the customer display 3106. The initial pricing operation screen may have the same mode as in FIG. 56.
計量値付け装置２１０は、待機モードにおいて、事前品目入力に応じた量り売り商品の情報を、タグ装置または動きセンサから受信した場合には、上記の初期状態の値付け操作画面に代えて、図５７と同様の態様により、商品選択エリアＡＲ３２においてタブＴＢ−１が選択された状態の値付け操作画面を表示する。 When the weighing pricing device 210 receives the information of the merchandise sold by weight according to the input of the pre-item from the tag device or the motion sensor in the standby mode, the pricing operation screen in the initial state is replaced with FIG. 57. In the same manner as in the above, the pricing operation screen in the state where the tab TB-1 is selected in the product selection area AR32 is displayed.
このように、本変形例の計量値付け装置２１０は、待機モードにおいて、デフォルトでは商品選択エリアＡＲ３２において、タブＴＢ−２が選択された状態のもとでシート上に量り売り商品の分類で登録された商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１を配置させている。この状態のもとで、客により事前品目入力が行われたことで、計量装置外（タグ装置あるいは動きセンサ）から送信された量り売り商品の情報が受信されたことにより、計量値付け装置２１０は、タブＴＢ−２からタブＴＢ−１が選択された状態に変更する。計量値付け装置２１０は、選択されたタブＴＢ−１のシートに、受信された量り売り商品の情報に応じた商品ボタンＢＴ１を配置させる表示を行う。そして、この後において、客が次の事前品目入力を行ったことで、さらにもう１つの量り売り商品の情報が受信されると、計量値付け装置２１０は、タブＴＢ−１のシートに、受信された量り売り商品の情報に応じた商品ボタンＢＴ１を追加して配置させる表示を行う。 As described above, the weighing and pricing device 210 of this modification is registered in the product selection area AR32 by default in the standby mode in the state where the tab TB-2 is selected and classified by weight for sale on the sheet. The product button BT1 of the product is arranged. In this state, the customer inputs the item in advance, and the information of the merchandise sold by weight transmitted from outside the weighing device (tag device or motion sensor) is received, so that the weighing pricing device 210 , Change from tab TB-2 to tab TB-1 in the selected state. The weighing pricing device 210 displays that the product button BT1 corresponding to the received information on the products sold by weight is arranged on the sheet of the selected tab TB-1. Then, after this, when the customer inputs the next pre-item and further information on another product for sale by weight is received, the weighing pricing device 210 is received on the sheet of the tab TB-1. Display is performed by adding and arranging the product button BT1 according to the information of the product sold by weight.
客が事前品目入力を行っていない場合に計量値付け装置２１０に赴いたときには、図５６と同様の態様で、タブＴＢ−２のシートにプリセットキーとしての商品ボタンＢＴ１が配置された値付け操作画面が表示されている。この場合、客は、そのときに表示されているタブＴＢ−２のシートに配置された商品ボタンＢＴ１を操作して値付け対象の商品を指定することができる。あるいは、客は、果物、野菜の量り売り商品に対応するタブＴＢ−２、ＴＢ−３を操作してシートを切り替えたうえで商品ボタンＢＴ１を操作することで値付け対象の商品を指定（選択）することができる。 When the customer goes to the weighing pricing device 210 when the customer has not entered the item in advance, the pricing operation in which the product button BT1 as the preset key is arranged on the sheet of the tab TB-2 in the same manner as in FIG. The screen is displayed. In this case, the customer can specify the product to be priced by operating the product button BT1 arranged on the sheet of the tab TB-2 displayed at that time. Alternatively, the customer specifies (selects) the product to be priced by operating the tabs TB-2 and TB-3 corresponding to the products sold by weight of fruits and vegetables to switch the sheet and then operating the product button BT1. can do.
これに対して、客が事前品目入力を行っている場合に計量値付け装置２１０に赴いたときには、図５７と同様の態様で、タブＴＢ−１のシートにおいて事前品目入力された商品ごとの商品ボタンＢＴ１が配置された値付け操作画面が表示されている。この場合、客は、 On the other hand, when the customer goes to the weighing pricing device 210 when the customer has entered the pre-item, the product for each product for which the pre-item has been entered in the tab TB-1 sheet in the same manner as in FIG. 57. The pricing operation screen on which the button BT1 is arranged is displayed. In this case, the customer
そのときに表示されているタブＴＢ−１のシートに配置された商品ボタンＢＴ１を操作して値付け対象の商品を指定（選択）する。 The product button BT1 arranged on the sheet of the tab TB-1 displayed at that time is operated to specify (select) the product to be priced.
本変形例においても、タブＴＢ−１のシートにおいて事前品目入力された商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１を配置した態様は、量り売り商品としての分類により商品マスタに予め登録されている商品のうちから、事前品目入力された商品を強調（優先）して表示しているものである。前述のように、事前品目入力された商品を強調（優先）して表示する態様としては、上記のようにシート（選択されるタブＴＢ）を切り替える例に限定されない。 Also in this modification, the mode in which the product button BT1 of the product for which the pre-item has been input in the tab TB-1 sheet is arranged is the pre-item from the products pre-registered in the product master according to the classification as a merchandise sold by weight. The entered product is emphasized (priority) and displayed. As described above, the mode in which the pre-item input product is emphasized (priority) and displayed is not limited to the example of switching the sheet (selected tab TB) as described above.
客の商品ボタンＢＴ１に対する操作によって、１の商品が値付け対象として指定（選択）されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０における客用ディスプレイ３１０６の表示は、値付け操作画面から計量案内画面に遷移する。図示は省略するが、計量案内画面は、値付け対象として指定された商品が例えば商品名や商品を表す絵柄により示されるとともに、値付け対象として指定された商品を秤台３１０９ｂに載せてもらうように客に案内するメッセージが表示される。 In response to the fact that one product is designated (selected) as a pricing target by the operation of the customer's product button BT1, the display of the customer display 3106 in the weighing pricing device 210 changes from the pricing operation screen to the weighing guidance screen. Transition to. Although not shown, on the weighing guide screen, the product designated as the price target is indicated by, for example, the product name or a pattern representing the product, and the product designated as the price target is placed on the scale 3109b. A message is displayed to guide the customer.
この場合の計量案内画面は、例えば図５８と同様の態様でよい。 The weighing guide screen in this case may have the same aspect as that of FIG. 58, for example.
計量案内画面が表示された状態において、客は、秤台３１０９ｂに値付け対象の商品を載せるようにする。 With the weighing guide screen displayed, the customer places the product to be priced on the scale 3109b.
商品が秤台３１０９ｂに載せられたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、値付け処理を実行する。つまり、計量値付け装置２１０は、計量部３１０９により計測される商品の重量が安定したと判定したことに応じて商品の重量を確定させ、確定された重量と重量単価とにより価格を算出する。 The weighing pricing device 210 executes the pricing process in response to the goods being placed on the scale 3109b. That is, the weighing pricing device 210 determines the weight of the product according to the determination that the weight of the product measured by the measuring unit 3109 is stable, and calculates the price based on the determined weight and the weight unit price.
このように値付け処理が実行されたことに応じて、客用ディスプレイ３１０６における表示は、計量案内画面から、計量結果画面に遷移する。 In response to the execution of the pricing process in this way, the display on the customer display 3106 transitions from the weighing guide screen to the weighing result screen.
図１９は、計量結果画面の一例を示している。同図において図５６~図５９等と同一部分には同一符号を付して適宜説明を省略する。 FIG. 19 shows an example of the measurement result screen. In the figure, the same parts as those in FIGS. 56 to 59 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
同図の計量結果画面では、計量結果エリアＡＲ３１において、重量エリアＡＲ３１−１にて計量された商品の重量（この場合には、重量と単位重量に応じて算出された個数）が示され、合計金額エリアＡＲ３１−３にて、算出された商品の価格に応じた合計金額が示される状態に変化している。 On the weighing result screen of the figure, in the weighing result area AR31, the weight of the product weighed in the weight area AR31-1 (in this case, the number calculated according to the weight and the unit weight) is shown, and the total is displayed. In the amount area AR31-3, the total amount corresponding to the calculated price of the product is shown.
計量結果画面においては、商品確認エリアＡＲ３５により、値付けされた商品の商品名や絵柄が示される。 On the weighing result screen, the product confirmation area AR35 indicates the product name and pattern of the priced product.
計量案内エリアＡＲ３６においては、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６と接続情報コードエリアＡＲ３４が配置される。 In the weighing guide area AR36, the label issuing button BT16 and the connection information code area AR34 are arranged.
ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６は、値付け対象の商品の値付け処理結果が反映されたラベル（単品ラベル）の発行を指示する操作が行われるボタンである。 The label issuing button BT16 is a button for instructing the issuance of a label (single item label) reflecting the pricing processing result of the product to be priced.
接続情報コードエリアＡＲ３４は、接続情報コードＣＤが表示されるエリアである。 The connection information code area AR34 is an area in which the connection information code CD is displayed.
接続情報コードエリアＡＲ３４においては、携帯端末２４０を利用する客に向けて、接続情報コードＣＤを携帯端末２４０に読み取らせることを案内するメッセージの表示が行われている。 In the connection information code area AR34, a message is displayed to the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 to guide the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code CD.
メッセージエリアＡＲｍには、例えば「ＰＲＩＮＴＬＡＢＥＬＯＲＲＥＡＤＣＨＯＲＤ」のように、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６の操作と、接続情報コードＣＤの読み取りとのいずれかを客に行ってもらうことを案内するメッセージが表示される。 In the message area ARM, for example, a message such as "PRINTLABELOR READCHORD" is displayed to guide the customer to either operate the label issuing button BT16 or read the connection information code CD.
この場合、携帯端末２４０を利用する客は、携帯端末２４０に接続情報コードＣＤを読み取らせるようにする。これにより、携帯端末２４０が計量値付け装置２１０と接続される。 In this case, the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 causes the mobile terminal 240 to read the connection information code CD. As a result, the mobile terminal 240 is connected to the weighing and pricing device 210.
接続情報コードＣＤは、携帯端末２４０が計量値付け装置２１０と接続されたことに応じて消去される。 The connection information code CD is erased when the mobile terminal 240 is connected to the weighing and pricing device 210.
計量値付け装置２１０は、接続された携帯端末２４０に、今回の値付け処理結果が反映された商品値付け情報を送信する。計量値付け装置２１０は、商品値付け情報の送信が完了したことに応じて、コード情報が印刷されていない単品ラベルを発行する。 The weighing pricing device 210 transmits the product pricing information reflecting the current pricing processing result to the connected mobile terminal 240. The weighing pricing device 210 issues a single item label on which the code information is not printed, in response to the completion of transmission of the product pricing information.
携帯端末２４０を利用しない客は、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６を操作する。ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６が操作されたことに応じて、計量値付け装置２１０は、今回の値付け処理結果が反映されたコード情報が印刷された単品ラベルを発行する。 A customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 operates the label issuing button BT16. In response to the operation of the label issuing button BT16, the weighing pricing device 210 issues a single item label on which the code information reflecting the current pricing processing result is printed.
本変形例においては、値付けが確定された段階で、計量結果画面としての同一画面においてラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６と接続情報コードエリアＡＲ３４とが表示される。この場合、客は、自分が計量値付け装置２１０を利用するか否かに応じて、接続情報コードＣＤを読み取らせるのか、あるいはラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６を操作するのかを判断することができる。本変形例の場合には、携帯端末２４０を利用するか否かにかかわらず、値付けにより価格が確定されるまでの手順が共通となることから、客が手順に慣れやすい。 In this modification, the label issuing button BT16 and the connection information code area AR34 are displayed on the same screen as the weighing result screen when the pricing is confirmed. In this case, the customer can determine whether to read the connection information code CD or operate the label issuing button BT16 depending on whether or not he / she uses the weighing and pricing device 210. In the case of this modification, the procedure until the price is fixed by pricing is common regardless of whether or not the mobile terminal 240 is used, so that the customer can easily get used to the procedure.
ラベルが発行された後は、計量結果画面からラベル貼付案内画面の表示に遷移するようにされてよい。ラベル貼付案内画面においては、計量値付け装置２１０から発行されたラベルを、今回値付けが行われた商品を入れた袋に貼り付けてもらうように案内するためのメッセージ、絵柄等の表示が行われる。ラベル貼付案内画面においては、計量結果画面に表示されていた接続情報コードエリアＡＲ３４は配置されていない。つまり、ラベル貼付案内画面の表示は、接続情報コードの表示が終了された後に行われる。 After the label is issued, the display may be changed from the measurement result screen to the label affixing guidance screen. On the label affixing guidance screen, a message, a pattern, etc. are displayed to guide the label issued by the weighing and pricing device 210 to be affixed to the bag containing the product that has been priced this time. Will be. On the label sticking guidance screen, the connection information code area AR34 displayed on the weighing result screen is not arranged. That is, the label affixing guidance screen is displayed after the display of the connection information code is completed.
客は、案内に従って、秤台３１０９ｂから商品を持ち上げ、ラベル排出口１１０ａから取り出したラベルを、商品の入った袋に貼り付けるようにされる。 According to the guidance, the customer lifts the product from the scale 3109b and attaches the label taken out from the label discharge port 110a to the bag containing the product.
ラベル貼付案内画面は、例えばラベル排出口１１０ａに設けられたセンサが、ラベルの取り出されたことを検出したのに応じて消去される。ラベル貼付案内画面の消去に代わり、客用ディスプレイ３１０６には、次の値付け対象の品目を指定するための値付け操作画面の表示に遷移する。 The label sticking guide screen is erased when, for example, the sensor provided in the label discharge port 110a detects that the label has been taken out. Instead of erasing the label affixing guidance screen, the customer display 3106 transitions to the display of the pricing operation screen for designating the next item to be priced.
この場合において、今回の値付け処理が、図５６と同様のプリセットキーの配置された値付け操作画面に対する操作に応じて行われた場合には、次も図５６と同様の値付け操作画面に遷移するようにされてよい。一方、今回の値付け処理が、図５７と同様の事前品目入力に応じた値付け操作画面に対する操作に応じて行われ、まだ、事前品目入力された商品のうちで値付けされていない商品が残っている場合には、次も図５７と同様の値付け操作画面に遷移するようにされてよい。 In this case, if the current pricing process is performed in response to an operation on the pricing operation screen on which the preset keys are arranged as in FIG. 56, the next pricing operation screen will be the same as in FIG. 56. It may be made to transition. On the other hand, the current pricing process is performed in response to the operation on the pricing operation screen according to the pre-item input as in FIG. 57, and among the pre-item input products, the unpriced product is not yet priced. If it remains, the next transition may be made to the same pricing operation screen as in FIG. 57.
ラベル排出口１１０ａからラベルが取り出されたタイミングで、例えば未だ秤台３１０９ｂになんらかの重量物が載っている場合には、秤台３１０９ｂの重量物を取り除くことを客に案内する画面が表示される。 At the timing when the label is taken out from the label discharge port 110a, for example, if some heavy object is still on the scale table 3109b, a screen for instructing the customer to remove the heavy object on the scale table 3109b is displayed.
［第５変形例］ [Fifth variant]
上記各実施形態において携帯端末２４０が実行するようにされていた所定の処理について、取引管理サーバ２５０等の上位装置が分担、あるいは携帯端末２４０と協働して実行するように構成されてよい。計量値付け装置２１０が実行する所定の処理について、取引管理サーバ２５０等の上位装置が分担、あるいは携帯端末２４０と協働して実行するように構成されてよい。さらに取引管理サーバ２５０が実行する所定の処理について、携帯端末２４０又は計量値付け装置２１０、２１０Ａが分担、あるいは携帯端末２４０または計量値付け装置２１０、２１０Ａが協働するようにして構成されてよい。 A higher-level device such as the transaction management server 250 may share the predetermined processing that was to be executed by the mobile terminal 240 in each of the above embodiments, or may be configured to execute the predetermined processing in cooperation with the mobile terminal 240. A higher-level device such as the transaction management server 250 may share the predetermined processing executed by the weighing and pricing device 210, or may be configured to execute the predetermined processing in cooperation with the mobile terminal 240. Further, the mobile terminal 240 or the weighing pricing devices 210 and 210A may share the predetermined processing executed by the transaction management server 250, or the mobile terminal 240 or the weighing pricing devices 210 and 210A may cooperate with each other. ..
量り売りの商品の販売にあたっては計量値付け装置が使用される。上記のような販売システムにおいても計量値付け装置を使用する売り場が設けられる場合がある。 Weighing pricing equipment is used to sell products sold by weight. Even in the above-mentioned sales system, a sales floor using a weighing and pricing device may be provided.
第２の実施形態における販売システムは、客が所持する携帯端末により商品登録が行われるとき、計量値付け装置を用いた商品登録を円滑に実行できる。 The sales system in the second embodiment can smoothly execute the product registration using the weighing and pricing device when the product registration is performed by the mobile terminal owned by the customer.
（１）以上説明したように第３の実施形態の一態様は、計量値付け装置と、客が商品の登録に利用する携帯端末と、を備える販売システムにおける計量値付け装置であって、計量結果欄（例えば、計量結果エリアＡＲ３１）と、携帯端末と通信可能に接続するための接続情報（例えば、接続情報コードＣＤ）とを同一画面（例えば、値付け操作画面）に表示させる表示手段と、前記接続情報を読み取った携帯端末と通信可能に接続する接続手段とを備える計量値付け装置である。 (1) As described above, one aspect of the third embodiment is a weighing and pricing device in a sales system including a weighing and pricing device and a mobile terminal used by a customer to register a product. A display means for displaying the result column (for example, the weighing result area AR31) and the connection information (for example, the connection information code CD) for communicably connecting to the mobile terminal on the same screen (for example, the pricing operation screen). , A weighing and pricing device including a connecting means for communicably connecting to a mobile terminal that has read the connection information.
上記構成によれば、計量値付け装置２１０は、例えば量り売り商品の計量結果を示す計量結果エリアＡＲ３１と、商品登録のために客が利用する携帯端末２４０とを値付け操作画面に表示させることができる。これにより、客は、値付け操作画面が表示された状態のもとで、値付け対象とされた量り売り商品を計量した結果（重量、価格等）の確認を行いながら、携帯端末２４０と計量値付け装置２１０とを接続させることによる値付け対象の商品の品目の入力を行うことが可能となる。これにより、客が所持する携帯端末により商品登録が行われるようにされた販売システムにおいて、計量値付け装置を用いた商品登録が円滑に行われるようになる。 According to the above configuration, the weighing pricing device 210 may display, for example, the weighing result area AR31 showing the weighing result of the merchandise sold by weight and the mobile terminal 240 used by the customer for product registration on the pricing operation screen. can. As a result, the customer confirms the result (weight, price, etc.) of weighing the product sold by weight, which is the target of pricing, while the pricing operation screen is displayed, and the mobile terminal 240 and the measured value. By connecting to the pricing device 210, it is possible to input the item of the product to be priced. As a result, in the sales system in which the product registration is performed by the mobile terminal owned by the customer, the product registration using the weighing and pricing device can be smoothly performed.
（２）第３の実施形態の一態様は、（１）に記載の販売システムであって、前記表示手段は、量り売り商品に分類された商品に対応する商品ボタン（ＢＴ１）を表示する。 (2) One aspect of the third embodiment is the sales system according to (1), in which the display means displays a product button (BT1) corresponding to a product classified as a merchandise sold by weight.
上記構成によれば、値付け操作画面において、量り売り商品に対応して予め用意されたプリセットキーを配置させることができる。 According to the above configuration, preset keys prepared in advance can be arranged corresponding to the products sold by weight on the pricing operation screen.
（３）第３の実施形態の一態様は、（１）または（２）に記載の販売システムであって、前記計量値付け装置による計量の対象とする商品の情報を計量装置外（例えば、タグ装置、動きセンサ）から受け付ける受付手段と、予め登録されている商品を選択可能に表示する選択表示手段（例えば、商品ボタンＢＴ１を表示すること）とを備え、前記選択表示手段は、前記受付手段が前記商品の情報を受け付けた場合に、前記受付手段が受け付けた商品の情報を強調した態様（例えば、タブＴＢ−１のシート上で商品ボタンＢＴ１を表示する態様）により選択可能に表示する。 (3) One aspect of the third embodiment is the sales system according to (1) or (2), in which information on a product to be weighed by the weighing pricing device is stored outside the weighing device (for example,). The reception means for receiving from a tag device (motion sensor) and the selection display means for displaying a pre-registered product in a selectable manner (for example, displaying the product button BT1) are provided, and the selection display means is the reception. When the means receives the information on the product, the information on the product received by the receiving means is displayed in a selectable manner (for example, a mode in which the product button BT1 is displayed on the sheet of the tab TB-1). ..
上記構成によれば、例えば初期状態の値付け操作画面において、事前品目入力がない状態のもとでは、タブＴＢ−２のシート上で、量り売り商品全般に対応する商品ボタンＢＴ１（プリセットキー）を配置した態様での表示を行うようにすることができる。そのうえで、事前品目入力が行われたことに応じて、初期状態の値付け操作画面について、プリセットキーのうち、事前品目入力された商品の商品ボタンＢＴ１をタブＴＢ−１のシート上に配置した態様の表示に切り替えることができる。これにより、事前品目入力が行われた場合の値付け対象の商品を指定する操作を行いやすくなる。 According to the above configuration, for example, on the initial price setting operation screen, when there is no prior item input, the product button BT1 (preset key) corresponding to all the products sold by weight is pressed on the tab TB-2 sheet. It is possible to display in the arranged mode. Then, in response to the pre-item input, the product button BT1 of the pre-item input product among the preset keys is arranged on the tab TB-1 sheet on the initial state pricing operation screen. You can switch to the display of. This facilitates the operation of specifying the product to be priced when the pre-item input is performed.
（４）第３の実施形態の一態様は、（１）から（３）のいずれか１つに記載の販売システムであって、前記表示手段は、前記接続手段により携帯端末と通信可能に接続された後の所定のタイミングで前記接続情報を消去する。 (4) One aspect of the third embodiment is the sales system according to any one of (1) to (3), wherein the display means is communicably connected to a mobile terminal by the connection means. The connection information is deleted at a predetermined timing after the connection information is created.
上記構成によれば、計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０とが通信可能に接続されたことに応じて接続情報コードＣＤの表示が停止される。これにより、計量値付け装置２１０と携帯端末２４０とが通信可能に接続されたことを把握しやすくなるとともに、例えば、他の客が不用意に接続しようとしてしまうことを防ぐことができる。 According to the above configuration, the display of the connection information code CD is stopped according to the communicable connection between the weighing pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240. As a result, it becomes easy to grasp that the weighing and pricing device 210 and the mobile terminal 240 are communicably connected, and for example, it is possible to prevent another customer from inadvertently trying to connect.
（５）第３の実施形態の一態様は、（１）から（６）のいずれか１つに記載の販売システムであって、前記表示手段は、値付け処理の対象とする商品を検索する検索エリアを、さらに前記同一画面に表示させる。 (5) One aspect of the third embodiment is the sales system according to any one of (1) to (6), and the display means searches for a product to be priced. The search area is further displayed on the same screen.
上記構成によれば、値付け操作画面に対する操作によって商品の検索を行うことが可能となり、値付け操作画面の使い勝手が向上される。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to search for products by operating on the pricing operation screen, and the usability of the pricing operation screen is improved.
（６）第３の実施形態の一態様は、（１）から（５）のいずれか１つに記載の販売システムであって、前記表示手段は、値付けに関する操作が行われていない待機状態のもとで、商品ボタンと接続情報とを同一画面に表示させる。 (6) One aspect of the third embodiment is the sales system according to any one of (1) to (5), and the display means is in a standby state in which an operation related to pricing is not performed. Under, the product button and the connection information are displayed on the same screen.
上記構成によれば、客の値付けに関する操作を待機している段階から、既に値付け操作画面において商品ボタンＢＴ１と接続情報コードＣＤとを表示させておくことができる。これにより、計量値付け装置２１０に赴いた客がすぐに値付けに関する操作をはじめることができる。 According to the above configuration, the product button BT1 and the connection information code CD can be already displayed on the pricing operation screen from the stage of waiting for the operation related to the customer's pricing. As a result, the customer who goes to the weighing and pricing device 210 can immediately start the operation related to pricing.
（７）第３の実施形態の一態様は、（１）から（６）のいずれか１つに記載の販売システムであって、前記計量値付け装置によりされた値付け情報の印刷を指示する印刷指示手段（例えば、ラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６）を備え、前記表示手段は、前記印刷指示手段と前記接続情報とを同一画面に表示させる。 (7) One aspect of the third embodiment is the sales system according to any one of (1) to (6), and instructs the printing of the pricing information by the weighing pricing device. A print instruction means (for example, a label issuing button BT16) is provided, and the display means displays the print instruction means and the connection information on the same screen.
上記構成によれば、携帯端末２４０を利用する客は、計量結果画面に配置された接続情報コードを読み取らせることにより商品の登録を確定させたうえで計量値付け装置２１０にラベル（バーコードが印刷されないもの）を発行させることができる。一方、携帯端末２４０を利用しない客は、同じ計量結果画面に配置されたラベル発行ボタンＢＴ４２を操作することにより、（バーコードが印刷されたもの）ラベルを発行させることができる。つまり、計量結果画面は、携帯端末２４０を利用する客と利用しない客とのいずれもがラベル発行のための操作を行えるようにされる。これとともに、計量値付け装置２１０は、ラベル発行の操作が接続情報コードの読み取りとラベル発行ボタンＢＴ１６の操作とのいずれであるのかに応じて、携帯端末２４０を利用する客向けのラベル（バーコードが印刷されていないラベル）と携帯端末２４０を利用しない客向けのラベル（バーコードが印刷されたラベル）とを区別して発行することができる。 According to the above configuration, the customer using the mobile terminal 240 confirms the registration of the product by reading the connection information code arranged on the weighing result screen, and then labels the weighing pricing device 210 (bar code is displayed). (Not printed) can be issued. On the other hand, a customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 can issue a label (with a bar code printed on it) by operating the label issuing button BT42 arranged on the same weighing result screen. That is, on the weighing result screen, both the customer who uses the mobile terminal 240 and the customer who does not use the mobile terminal 240 can perform the operation for issuing the label. At the same time, the weighing pricing device 210 is a label (bar code) for customers who use the mobile terminal 240, depending on whether the label issuing operation is reading the connection information code or operating the label issuing button BT16. (Label on which is not printed) and a label for customers who do not use the mobile terminal 240 (label on which a barcode is printed) can be issued separately.
（８）第３の実施形態の一態様は、（１）から（７）のいずれか１つに記載の販売システムであって、前記接続手段により接続された前記携帯端末の利用者に関する情報（例えば、接続対応情報（端末番号、会員番号、会員登録名称、ハンドルネーム、キャラクタ、整理番号、値付け操作画面の背景色設定、接続経過時間等）を表示する利用者情報表示手段を備える。 (8) One aspect of the third embodiment is the sales system according to any one of (1) to (7), and information about a user of the mobile terminal connected by the connection means ( For example, a user information display means for displaying connection correspondence information (terminal number, member number, member registration name, handle name, character, reference number, background color setting of pricing operation screen, connection elapsed time, etc.) is provided.
上記構成によれば、計量値付け装置２１０は、携帯端末２４０と接続されたことに応じて、接続先の携帯端末２４０の利用者（例えば、携帯端末２４０を利用する客）に関する情報を表示することができる。これにより、客は、自分の携帯端末２４０が計量値付け装置２１０と接続されていることを容易に確認できる。他の客も、自分以外の客により計量値付け装置２１０が使用されていることを容易に理解できるので、他の客が不用意に自分の携帯端末２４０を計量値付け装置２１０と接続しようとすることが防止される。 According to the above configuration, the weighing pricing device 210 displays information about a user of the connected mobile terminal 240 (for example, a customer who uses the mobile terminal 240) in response to being connected to the mobile terminal 240. be able to. As a result, the customer can easily confirm that his / her mobile terminal 240 is connected to the weighing and pricing device 210. Since other customers can easily understand that the weighing and pricing device 210 is being used by customers other than themselves, other customers inadvertently try to connect their mobile terminal 240 to the weighing and pricing device 210. Is prevented.
（９）第３の実施形態の一態様は、計量値付け装置と、客が商品の登録に利用する携帯端末とを備える販売システムであって、計量結果欄と、携帯端末と通信可能に接続するための接続情報とを、前記計量値付け装置にて同一画面に表示させる表示手段と、前記接続情報を読み取った携帯端末と前記計量値付け装置とを通信可能に接続する接続手段とを備える販売システムである。 (9) One aspect of the third embodiment is a sales system including a weighing pricing device and a mobile terminal used by a customer to register a product, and is connected to a weighing result column so as to be able to communicate with the mobile terminal. It is provided with a display means for displaying the connection information for displaying on the same screen by the weighing and pricing device, and a connecting means for communicably connecting the mobile terminal that has read the connection information and the weighing and pricing device. It is a sales system.
以下に本発明の第４の実施形態を示す。 The fourth embodiment of the present invention is shown below.
（第４の実施形態の第１の例） (First example of the fourth embodiment)
図６２は、第４の実施形態の第１の例における販売システム１のネットワーク構成を示す説明図である。販売システム１は、取引情報出力システムの一例である。販売システム１は、スーパーマーケット、ホームセンター、コンビニエンスストア、各種用品店など、種々の店舗に導入可能である。本明細書において、「客」、「顧客」、及び「ユーザ」は、特に区別して説明しない限り、同義とする。 FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a network configuration of the sales system 1 in the first example of the fourth embodiment. The sales system 1 is an example of a transaction information output system. The sales system 1 can be introduced in various stores such as supermarkets, home centers, convenience stores, and various supply stores. In the present specification, "customer", "customer", and "user" are synonymous unless otherwise specified.
図６２において、販売システム１は、クラウドサーバＳｖと、ストアコントローラ（管理装置、ストアコンピュータ）４１０と、監視端末４１１と、ＰＯＳ（ＰｏｉｎｔＯｆＳａｌｅｓ）端末４２０と、計量装置４３０と、携帯端末４５０と、を含む。ＰＯＳ端末４２０及び計量装置４３０は、それぞれ取引情報出力装置の一例である。携帯端末４５０は、端末装置の一例である。 In FIG. 62, the sales system 1 includes a cloud server Sv, a store controller (management device, store computer) 410, a monitoring terminal 411, a POS (PointOfSales) terminal 420, a weighing device 430, and a mobile terminal 450. include. The POS terminal 420 and the weighing device 430 are examples of transaction information output devices, respectively. The mobile terminal 450 is an example of a terminal device.
各装置及び各端末は、それぞれ、ネットワークを介して、通信可能に接続されている。例えば、ストアコントローラ４１０と、監視端末４１１と、ＰＯＳ端末４２０と、計量装置４３０とは、それぞれ、ＬＡＮ４５５を介して、通信可能に接続されている。各装置及び各端末は、ＣＰＵ、ＲＯＭ、ＲＡＭ及び通信部を備えるコンピュータである。 Each device and each terminal are connected to each other so as to be able to communicate with each other via a network. For example, the store controller 410, the monitoring terminal 411, the POS terminal 420, and the weighing device 430 are connected to each other via LAN 455 so as to be able to communicate with each other. Each device and each terminal is a computer including a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and a communication unit.
クラウドサーバＳｖは、顧客に関する情報や、店舗に関する情報、店舗ごとの商品に関する情報などの各種情報を管理するサーバ装置である。例えば、クラウドサーバＳｖは、携帯端末４５０によって読み取られた商品の情報に基づいて、顧客ごとに、仮想カートを示すカート情報を生成し、仮想カートに商品を登録する。クラウドサーバＳｖが管理（生成及び記憶）する情報については、図６７を用いて後述する。 The cloud server Sv is a server device that manages various information such as information about customers, information about stores, and information about products for each store. For example, the cloud server Sv generates cart information indicating a virtual cart for each customer based on the product information read by the mobile terminal 450, and registers the product in the virtual cart. The information managed (generated and stored) by the cloud server Sv will be described later with reference to FIG. 67.
ストアコントローラ４１０は、ＰＯＳ端末４２０や計量装置４３０を管理するとともに、商品マスタなどの取引に必要な各種情報を記憶する。商品マスタは、各商品の商品識別情報（例えばＪＡＮ（Ｊａｐａｎｅｓｅ　Ａｒｔｉｃｌｅ　Ｎｕｍｂｅｒ）コード）、商品名、販売価格などの商品情報を格納するファイルである。商品マスタは、計量が必要な商品（以下「計量対象商品」と言う）の商品識別情報、商品名称、計量対象商品の単価などを含む。ストアコントローラ４１０は、商品マスタのほかにも、在庫状況、販売履歴、入出金記録などの各種の情報を記憶する。ストアコントローラ４１０は、顧客の会員情報を記憶してもよい。 The store controller 410 manages the POS terminal 420 and the weighing device 430, and stores various information necessary for transactions such as a product master. The product master is a file that stores product information such as product identification information (for example, JAN (Japanese Article Number) code), product name, and selling price of each product. The product master includes product identification information, product name, unit price of the product to be weighed, and the like of the product that needs to be weighed (hereinafter referred to as "product to be weighed"). In addition to the product master, the store controller 410 stores various information such as inventory status, sales history, and deposit / withdrawal records. The store controller 410 may store the member information of the customer.
監視端末４１１は、ＰＯＳ端末４２０や計量装置４３０を監視する。具体的には、監視端末４１１は、ＰＯＳ端末４２０の状況（動作モード、処理状況等）を表示したり、ＰＯＳ端末４２０を制御したりする。監視端末４１１は、計量装置４３０の処理状況等を表示したり、計量装置４３０を制御したりする。 The monitoring terminal 411 monitors the POS terminal 420 and the weighing device 430. Specifically, the monitoring terminal 411 displays the status (operation mode, processing status, etc.) of the POS terminal 420, and controls the POS terminal 420. The monitoring terminal 411 displays the processing status of the weighing device 430 and the like, and controls the weighing device 430.
ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、携帯端末４５０によって登録された商品の精算（決済）を行う精算処理を実行することが可能なコンピュータ装置である。第４の実施形態において、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、精算処理のほかにも、購入する商品の登録（以下「商品登録」という場合がある。）を行う登録処理を実行することも可能である。ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、携帯端末４５０で登録された商品を精算することのほかにも、自端末または他のＰＯＳ端末４２０で登録された商品の精算を行うことも可能である。図６２において、ＰＯＳ端末４２０及び計量装置４３０の台数は、それぞれ複数台を例示しているが、それぞれ１台であってもよい。 The POS terminal 420 is a computer device capable of executing a settlement process for settlement (settlement) of products registered by the mobile terminal 450. In the fourth embodiment, the POS terminal 420 can also execute a registration process for registering a product to be purchased (hereinafter, may be referred to as “product registration”) in addition to the settlement process. The POS terminal 420 can settle the products registered in the mobile terminal 450 as well as the products registered in the own terminal or another POS terminal 420. In FIG. 62, a plurality of POS terminals 420 and measuring devices 430 are illustrated, but each may be one.
計量装置４３０は、計量対象商品の計量を行うコンピュータ装置である。計量装置４３０は、計量した重量（または個数）と、計量対象商品の単価とを用いて、計量対象商品の金額を算出する。計量対象商品は、通常の商品とは異なる商品である。ここで、通常の商品は、例えば、ＪＡＮコードが付されている商品である。携帯端末４５０は、ＪＡＮコードを読み取ると、読み取ったＪＡＮコードをクラウドサーバＳｖに問い合わせ、ＪＡＮコードに対応付けられている価格データを取得する。 The weighing device 430 is a computer device that weighs the product to be weighed. The weighing device 430 calculates the amount of the product to be weighed by using the weighed weight (or the number) and the unit price of the product to be weighed. The product to be weighed is a product different from a normal product. Here, the ordinary product is, for example, a product to which a JAN code is attached. When the mobile terminal 450 reads the JAN code, it queries the cloud server Sv for the read JAN code and acquires the price data associated with the JAN code.
一方で、計量対象商品は、品物の重量や数量により価格が異なる商品である。計量対象商品は、例えば、野菜、果物、鮮魚、精肉などの生鮮食品や総菜などである。計量装置４３０は、計量対象商品の金額や重量等をコード化したラベルを印刷して出力する。当該ラベルには、価格が含まれている。すなわち、計量対象商品に付されるラベル（バーコード）は、ＮＯＮ−ＰＬＵ（Ｐｒｉｃｅ　Ｌｏｏｋ　Ｕｐ）の方式が用いられている。図６２において、計量装置４３０の台数は、複数台を例示しているが、１台であってもよい。 On the other hand, the products to be weighed are products whose prices differ depending on the weight and quantity of the products. The products to be weighed are, for example, fresh foods such as vegetables, fruits, fresh fish, and meat, and delicatessen items. The weighing device 430 prints and outputs a label encoding the amount, weight, etc. of the product to be weighed. The label contains the price. That is, the label (bar code) attached to the product to be weighed uses the NON-PLU (Price Look Up) method. In FIG. 62, a plurality of measuring devices 430 are illustrated, but one may be used.
携帯端末４５０は、スマートフォン、タブレット装置、携帯電話などの可搬型のコンピュータ装置である。携帯端末４５０は、通信部、撮像部（カメラ）、タッチパネルなどを備え、顧客によって操作される。第４の実施形態において、携帯端末４５０は、ショッピングカートに対して着脱可能に取り付けられる。ただし、携帯端末４５０は、ショッピングカートに対して着脱不可能に据え付けられたものでもよい。すなわち、携帯端末４５０は、店舗が顧客に貸与する貸与品であってもよい。 The mobile terminal 450 is a portable computer device such as a smartphone, a tablet device, or a mobile phone. The mobile terminal 450 includes a communication unit, an image pickup unit (camera), a touch panel, and the like, and is operated by a customer. In the fourth embodiment, the mobile terminal 450 is detachably attached to the shopping cart. However, the mobile terminal 450 may be installed so as not to be attached to and detached from the shopping cart. That is, the mobile terminal 450 may be a loan item that the store lends to the customer.
携帯端末４５０は、商品に付されるバーコード（商品コード）をスキャンして（読み取り）、商品の登録を受け付ける。すなわち、携帯端末４５０は、商品に付されるバーコードを認識する認識機能を備える。 The mobile terminal 450 scans (reads) the barcode (product code) attached to the product and accepts the registration of the product. That is, the mobile terminal 450 has a recognition function for recognizing a barcode attached to a product.
携帯端末４５０が備える認識機能は、商品に付される商品コードを読み取ることができるものであればよく、読み取った商品コードから商品を特定できなくてもよい。つまり、携帯端末４５０は、撮像機能によって撮像されている撮像画像（スルー画像として取得している画像）内にオブジェクトとしてバーコードが存在する場合に、当該バーコードから商品コードを読み取ることができればよい。 The recognition function provided in the mobile terminal 450 may be any as long as it can read the product code attached to the product, and it is not necessary to be able to identify the product from the read product code. That is, the mobile terminal 450 only needs to be able to read the product code from the barcode as an object in the captured image (the image acquired as the through image) captured by the imaging function. ..
携帯端末４５０は、画像認識技術を備えていてもよい。具体的には、携帯端末４５０は、画像（スルー画像、撮像画像）から特徴点を抽出し、撮像対象（オブジェクト等）を認識する画像認識技術を備えていてもよい。例えば、携帯端末４５０は、画像認識技術を用いて、撮像した商品を特定（推定）してもよい。このような画像認識技術を用いることにより、携帯端末４５０は、例えば、バーコードの付されていない野菜や果物などの生鮮食品を特定することも可能である。 The mobile terminal 450 may be provided with an image recognition technique. Specifically, the mobile terminal 450 may be provided with an image recognition technique for extracting feature points from an image (through image, captured image) and recognizing an imaging target (object or the like). For example, the mobile terminal 450 may identify (estimate) the imaged product by using the image recognition technology. By using such an image recognition technique, the mobile terminal 450 can also identify fresh foods such as vegetables and fruits without a barcode, for example.
携帯端末４５０には、販売システム１における商品の登録及び精算を行うためのアプリケーションソフトウェア（以下、「本アプリ」という場合がある。）がインストールされている。携帯端末４５０は、本アプリを起動させることにより、商品に付されたバーコードを読み取って、読み取った情報をクラウドサーバＳｖに送信する。これにより、当該バーコードに対応する商品は、クラウドサーバＳｖの仮想カートに登録される。 Application software (hereinafter, may be referred to as "this application") for registering and paying for products in the sales system 1 is installed in the mobile terminal 450. By activating this application, the mobile terminal 450 reads the barcode attached to the product and transmits the read information to the cloud server Sv. As a result, the product corresponding to the barcode is registered in the virtual cart of the cloud server Sv.
携帯端末４５０は、精算を行う際に、登録した商品に対応する２次元コード（例えば、ＱＲコード（登録商標））を表示する。ＰＯＳ端末４２０が当該２次元コードを読み取ると、クラウドサーバＳｖに対して、登録した商品の登録情報の送信要求を行う。そして、ＰＯＳ端末４２０がクラウドサーバＳｖから受信して、ＰＯＳ端末４２０において精算を行うことが可能になる。以下において、当該２次元コードを「精算用コード」という場合がある。登録した商品を「登録商品」という場合がある。 The mobile terminal 450 displays a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)) corresponding to the registered product when making a payment. When the POS terminal 420 reads the two-dimensional code, it requests the cloud server Sv to transmit the registration information of the registered product. Then, the POS terminal 420 receives from the cloud server Sv, and the POS terminal 420 can perform the settlement. In the following, the two-dimensional code may be referred to as a "payment code". The registered product may be referred to as a "registered product".
第４の実施形態において、精算を行う装置は、ＰＯＳ端末４２０としているが、これに限らない。例えば、精算を行う装置は、店舗に設置された精算専用の装置であってもよいし、ショッピングカートに対して着脱不可能に据え付けられた精算用のコンピュータ装置であってもよい。このコンピュータ装置は、例えば、クレジットカードやプリペイドカードを用いたカードの精算のみを可能にするものであってもよい。 In the fourth embodiment, the device for performing settlement is the POS terminal 420, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the payment device may be a payment-dedicated device installed in a store, or a payment computer device installed in a non-detachable manner with respect to a shopping cart. This computer device may, for example, allow only payment of a card using a credit card or a prepaid card.
次に、ＰＯＳ端末４２０の構成例を説明する。 Next, a configuration example of the POS terminal 420 will be described.
図６３は、ＰＯＳ端末４２０のハードウェア構成の一例を示す説明図である。図６３に示すように、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、ＣＰＵ４２０１と、ＲＯＭ４２０２と、ＲＡＭ４２０３と、ハードディスク４２０４と、客側ディスプレイ４２０５と、客側スキャナ４２０６と、カード決済部４２０８と、釣銭機４２０９と、店員側ディスプレイ４２１０と、キー操作部４２１１と、店員側スキャナ４２１２と、印刷部４２１３と、音声出力部４２１４と、通信部４２１５とを備える。これらは、バス４２２０を介して相互に通信可能に接続されている。 FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the POS terminal 420. As shown in FIG. 63, the POS terminal 420 includes a CPU 4201, a ROM 4202, a RAM 4203, a hard disk 4204, a customer side display 4205, a customer side scanner 4206, a card payment unit 4208, a change machine 4209, and a clerk side. It includes a display 4210, a key operation unit 4211, a clerk side scanner 4212, a printing unit 4213, an audio output unit 4214, and a communication unit 4215. They are communicably connected to each other via bus 4220.
ＣＰＵ４２０１は、中央演算処理装置であり、ＲＯＭ４２０２に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行することにより、ＰＯＳ端末４２０の動作を制御する。各種プログラムは、第４の実施形態における情報出力プログラムを含む。 The CPU 4201 is a central processing unit, and controls the operation of the POS terminal 420 by reading and executing various programs stored in the ROM 4202. The various programs include the information output program according to the fourth embodiment.
ＲＯＭ４２０２は、読み出し専用メモリであり、プログラムをはじめとしてＣＰＵ４２０１が利用する各種の情報を記憶する。 The ROM 4202 is a read-only memory, and stores various information used by the CPU 4201 including a program.
ＲＡＭ４２０３は、読み出しや書き込みが可能なメモリであり、種々の情報を記憶する。例えば、ＲＡＭ４２０３は、外部（例えば、クラウドサーバＳｖやストアコントローラ４１０）から取得した情報や、処理において生成した情報を記憶する。この情報は、例えば、商品を登録する登録処理において生成した登録情報（登録データ）や、登録商品を精算する精算処理において生成した精算情報などである。 The RAM 4203 is a memory that can be read and written, and stores various information. For example, the RAM 4203 stores information acquired from the outside (for example, cloud server Sv or store controller 410) and information generated in processing. This information includes, for example, registration information (registration data) generated in the registration process for registering products, settlement information generated in the settlement process for settlement of registered products, and the like.
ハードディスク４２０４は、種々の情報を記憶する。ハードディスク４２０４は、例えば、計量装置４３０が記憶する言語関連テーブル４４２０（図６５Ｂ参照）や対応言語テーブル４４３０（図６５Ｃ参照）と同等のテーブルを記憶する。ハードディスク４２０４は、例えば、ＲＯＭ４２０２に代えて、ＣＰＵ４２０１が実行するプログラム等を記憶してもよい。ＲＡＭ４２０３に代えて、外部から取得した情報や、処理において生成した情報を記憶してもよい。 The hard disk 4204 stores various information. The hard disk 4204 stores, for example, a table equivalent to the language-related table 4420 (see FIG. 65B) and the corresponding language table 4430 (see FIG. 65C) stored in the weighing device 430. The hard disk 4204 may store, for example, a program executed by the CPU 4201 instead of the ROM 4202. Instead of the RAM 4203, information acquired from the outside or information generated in the process may be stored.
客側ディスプレイ４２０５は、顧客用のタッチディスプレイである。客側ディスプレイ４２０５は、顧客に種々の情報を表示するとともに、顧客から種々の入力を受け付ける。 The customer side display 4205 is a touch display for the customer. The customer side display 4205 displays various information to the customer and accepts various inputs from the customer.
客側スキャナ４２０６は、顧客用のスキャナであり、各種の情報を光学的に読み取る。例えば、客側スキャナ４２０６は、精算が行われる際に、携帯端末４５０に表示される精算用コードを光学的に読み取る。第４の実施形態において、客側スキャナ４２０６は、商品に付されているバーコード（商品コード等）や、お会計券（登録商標）に印刷されているコード（バーコード、２次元コード等）を光学的に読み取ることも可能である。客側スキャナ４２０６は、上記に加えて、品券類（商品券、クーポン券、優待券）や、各種カード（例えば、会員カード、ポイントカード等）に印刷されているコード（バーコード、２次元コード等）を読み取ってもよい。商品の登録は、客側スキャナ４２０６によるコードの読み取りによる登録に限らない。例えば、客側ディスプレイ４２０５に、商品に対応するプリセットキー（商品を注文するボタン）を表示し、当該プリセットキーが顧客によって操作（押下）されることによって、商品の登録を行うことも可能である。 The customer-side scanner 4206 is a customer-use scanner that optically reads various types of information. For example, the customer-side scanner 4206 optically reads the settlement code displayed on the mobile terminal 450 when the settlement is performed. In the fourth embodiment, the customer-side scanner 4206 uses a barcode (product code, etc.) attached to the product or a code (bar code, two-dimensional code, etc.) printed on the accounting ticket (registered trademark). Can also be read optically. In addition to the above, the customer-side scanner 4206 has a code (bar code, two-dimensional) printed on gift certificates (gift certificates, coupons, complimentary tickets) and various cards (for example, membership cards, point cards, etc.). You may read the code etc.). Product registration is not limited to registration by reading the code with the customer-side scanner 4206. For example, it is also possible to display a preset key (button for ordering a product) corresponding to a product on the customer side display 4205 and register the product by operating (pressing) the preset key by the customer. ..
カード決済部４２０８は、各種カードによる決済機構である。各種カードは、クレジットカード、電子マネーであるプリペイドカード、ポイントカードなどである。プリペイドカードには、金額（残額）が記憶（チャージ）されている。カード決済部４２０８は、カード認識部（読取部）やディスプレイや操作部を備える。カード認識部は、各種カードの情報を磁気的または電気的に読み取る。読み取られた情報は、登録商品の精算に用いられる。カード認識部は、例えば、ポイントカードの保有ポイントを使用する場合など、今回の登録商品の精算において使用する情報を認識することも可能である。カード認識部は、例えば、ポイントカードにポイントを付与する場合など、今回の登録商品の精算に使用しない情報を認識することも可能である。 The card payment unit 4208 is a payment mechanism using various cards. Various cards include credit cards, prepaid cards that are electronic money, and point cards. The amount (remaining amount) is stored (charged) in the prepaid card. The card payment unit 4208 includes a card recognition unit (reading unit), a display, and an operation unit. The card recognition unit magnetically or electrically reads information on various cards. The read information is used for the settlement of registered products. The card recognition unit can also recognize the information used in the settlement of the registered product this time, for example, when using the points held by the point card. The card recognition unit can also recognize information that is not used for the settlement of the registered product this time, for example, when giving points to the point card.
第４の実施形態のカード決済部４２０８は、カード認識部、ディスプレイ、及び操作部を備えるが、これに限らず、少なくともカード認識部を備えるものであればよい。第４の実施形態のカード認識部は、接触型のカード（ＩＣカード、磁気カード）に対応するものであるが、これに限らない。例えば、カード認識部は、接触型のカードに対応するものに代えて又は加えて、非接触型のカード（ＩＣカード）に対応するものであってもよい。 The card payment unit 4208 of the fourth embodiment includes a card recognition unit, a display, and an operation unit, but is not limited to this, and may include at least a card recognition unit. The card recognition unit of the fourth embodiment corresponds to a contact type card (IC card, magnetic card), but is not limited to this. For example, the card recognition unit may be one corresponding to a non-contact type card (IC card) in place of or in addition to the one corresponding to the contact type card.
釣銭機４２０９（現金決済部）は、現金による決済機構であり、紙幣や硬貨の投入口、紙幣や硬貨の排出口を有する。釣銭機４２０９は、投入口への投入金額を算出し、投入金額と買上金額の差分である釣銭金額を算出し、釣り銭を排出口から排出する。釣銭機４２０９は、客側に向けられており、顧客から各種操作や現金の投入を受け付ける。釣銭機４２０９は、投入口に投入された紙幣や硬貨を検出するセンサを有する。当該センサは、投入口に紙幣や硬貨が投入された旨の検出や、金種別の枚数の検出などを行う。 The change machine 4209 (cash settlement unit) is a cash settlement mechanism, and has a bill and coin slot and a bill and coin outlet. The change machine 4209 calculates the amount of money to be put into the slot, calculates the amount of change which is the difference between the amount of money to be put in and the amount of purchase, and discharges the change from the outlet. The change machine 4209 is directed toward the customer and accepts various operations and cash input from the customer. The change machine 4209 has a sensor that detects bills and coins inserted into the slot. The sensor detects that a bill or coin has been inserted into the slot, detects the number of coins by denomination, and the like.
店員側ディスプレイ４２１０は、店員用のタッチディスプレイである。店員側ディスプレイ４２１０は、店員に種々の情報を表示するとともに、店員から種々の入力を受け付ける。 The clerk side display 4210 is a touch display for the clerk. The clerk side display 4210 displays various information to the clerk and accepts various inputs from the clerk.
キー操作部４２１１は、各種のキー（ハードウェアキー、ボタン）を備える。キー操作部４２１１は、店員から種々の入力を受け付ける。キー操作部４２１１は、数字を入力するための数字キー、登録する商品に対応するキー、モードを切替えるためのキーなどを含む。 The key operation unit 4211 includes various keys (hardware keys, buttons). The key operation unit 4211 receives various inputs from the clerk. The key operation unit 4211 includes a number key for inputting a number, a key corresponding to a product to be registered, a key for switching a mode, and the like.
店員側スキャナ４２１２は、店員用のスキャナであり、各種の情報を光学的に読み取る。例えば、店員側スキャナ４２１２は、商品に付されているバーコードや、店員の名札に付された店員コードを光学的に読み取る。店員側スキャナ４２１２は、上記に加えて、お会計券に印刷されているコードや、品券類や、各種カードに印刷されているコードを読み取ってもよい。 The clerk side scanner 4212 is a clerk scanner, and optically reads various kinds of information. For example, the clerk-side scanner 4212 optically reads the bar code attached to the product or the clerk code attached to the clerk's name tag. In addition to the above, the clerk-side scanner 4212 may read the code printed on the checkout ticket, the gift certificate, and the code printed on various cards.
商品の登録は、店員側スキャナ４２１２によるコードの読み取りによる登録に限らない。例えば、キー操作部４２１１に、商品に対応するキー（例えば、スポーツ新聞に対応するキー等）を配置し、当該キーが店員に操作（押下）されることによって、商品の登録が行われてもよい。ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、店員側ディスプレイ４２１０に、商品に対応するプリセットキーを表示し、当該プリセットキーが店員に操作されることによって、商品の登録を行うことも可能である。 The registration of the product is not limited to the registration by reading the code with the scanner 4212 on the clerk side. For example, even if a key corresponding to a product (for example, a key corresponding to a sports newspaper) is arranged in the key operation unit 4211 and the key is operated (pressed) by a clerk to register the product. good. The POS terminal 420 can also display a preset key corresponding to a product on the clerk side display 4210 and register the product by operating the preset key by the clerk.
印刷部４２１３は、各種媒体（レシート、領収書、お会計券等）を印刷して出力する。印刷部４２１３は、媒体発行口の方向を変更可能である。具体的には、印刷部４２１３は、回転自在な機構を有し、媒体発行口が店員側から客側に向くように、客側から店員側に向くように構成されている。媒体発行口の向きは、手動で変更可能であってもよいし、動作モードが切り替わることに応じて自動で変更可能であってもよい。印刷部４２１３は、印刷発行口の向きの正誤を検出するセンサを備えていてもよい。 The printing unit 4213 prints and outputs various media (receipts, receipts, checkout tickets, etc.). The printing unit 4213 can change the direction of the medium issuing port. Specifically, the printing unit 4213 has a rotatable mechanism, and is configured so that the medium issuing port faces from the clerk side to the customer side and from the customer side to the clerk side. The orientation of the media outlet may be manually changeable, or may be automatically changed as the operation mode is switched. The printing unit 4213 may include a sensor that detects the correctness of the orientation of the printing issuing port.
音声出力部４２１４は、音声を出力する。例えば、音声出力部４２１４は、音声ガイダンスや警告音などを出力する。音声ガイダンスや警告音は、例えば、商品の登録や精算におけるものである。 The audio output unit 4214 outputs audio. For example, the voice output unit 4214 outputs voice guidance, warning sounds, and the like. Voice guidance and warning sounds are, for example, in product registration and settlement.
通信部４２１５は、他の装置（クラウドサーバＳｖ、ストアコントローラ４１０、監視端末４１１、他のＰＯＳ端末４２０、計量装置４３０、携帯端末４５０）と情報を送受信するインターフェースである。 The communication unit 4215 is an interface for transmitting and receiving information with other devices (cloud server Sv, store controller 410, monitoring terminal 411, other POS terminal 420, weighing device 430, mobile terminal 450).
続いて、ＰＯＳ端末４２０の動作モードを説明する。ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、複数の動作モードのうちいずれかの動作モードで動作する。複数の動作モードは、通常の業務中における動作モード（登録処理及び精算処理における動作モード）である。具体的には、複数の動作モードは、通常モードと、会計専用モードと、フルセルフモードとである。以下、通常モード、会計専用モード、及びフルセルフモードの各モードについて簡単に説明する。 Subsequently, the operation mode of the POS terminal 420 will be described. The POS terminal 420 operates in one of a plurality of operation modes. The plurality of operation modes are operation modes during normal business (operation modes in registration processing and settlement processing). Specifically, the plurality of operation modes are a normal mode, an accounting-only mode, and a full self-mode. Hereinafter, each mode of the normal mode, the accounting-only mode, and the full self mode will be briefly described.
（通常モード） (Normal mode)
通常モードは、店員側の商品登録を有効とし、客側の商品登録を無効とした動作モードである。すなわち、通常モードは、客側の登録処理を実行せずに、店員側の登録処理を実行する動作モードである。店員側の商品登録では、店員側スキャナ４２１２、店員側ディスプレイ４２１０、及びキー操作部４２１１を用いて、商品の登録が行われる。通常モードでは、貨幣（紙幣及び硬貨）の投入や各種カードの読み取りなど、精算が可能である。通常モードでは、商品の登録処理が行われている際も、精算を開始させること（例えば、貨幣の投入）が可能である。 The normal mode is an operation mode in which the product registration on the clerk side is enabled and the product registration on the customer side is invalidated. That is, the normal mode is an operation mode in which the registration process on the clerk side is executed without executing the registration process on the customer side. In the product registration on the clerk side, the product is registered using the clerk side scanner 4212, the clerk side display 4210, and the key operation unit 4211. In the normal mode, it is possible to make payments such as inserting money (banknotes and coins) and reading various cards. In the normal mode, it is possible to start the settlement (for example, insert money) even when the product registration process is being performed.
通常モードでは、他のＰＯＳ端末４２０への登録情報の送信が可能である。他のＰＯＳ端末４２０への登録情報の送信とは、登録処理において生成された登録情報を、精算処 In the normal mode, registration information can be transmitted to another POS terminal 420. Sending registration information to another POS terminal 420 means that the registration information generated in the registration process is settled.
理を実行可能な他のＰＯＳ端末４２０（会計専用モードのＰＯＳ端末４２０）に送信することである。通常モードでは、お会計券の発行が可能である。お会計券の発行とは、登録処理において生成した登録情報等をコード化し、印刷媒体（お会計券）に印刷して出力することである。お会計券が他のＰＯＳ端末４２０で読み取られることにより、他のＰＯＳ端末４２０において、精算処理を行うことが可能である。 It is to transmit to another POS terminal 420 (POS terminal 420 in accounting-only mode) that can execute the reason. In normal mode, it is possible to issue a checkout ticket. Issuing an accounting ticket is to encode the registration information and the like generated in the registration process, print it on a print medium (accounting ticket), and output it. By reading the checkout ticket on the other POS terminal 420, it is possible to perform the settlement process on the other POS terminal 420.
（会計専用モード） (Accounting-only mode)
会計専用モードは、店員側及び客側の商品登録を無効とした動作モードである。具体的には、会計専用モードは、クラウドサーバＳｖから登録情報を受信して、精算を行う動作モードである。会計専用モードは、他のＰＯＳ端末４２０（通常モードのＰＯＳ端末４２０）からの登録情報の受信、お会計券の読み取り、貨幣の投入を有効として、精算を行う動作モードである。会計専用モードでは、他のＰＯＳ端末４２０への登録情報の送信や、お会計券の発行は無効とされる。販売システム１において、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、会計専用モードで動作するものとする。 The accounting-only mode is an operation mode in which product registration on the clerk side and the customer side is invalidated. Specifically, the accounting-only mode is an operation mode in which registration information is received from the cloud server Sv and settlement is performed. The accounting-only mode is an operation mode in which payment is made by validating reception of registration information from another POS terminal 420 (POS terminal 420 in normal mode), reading of accounting tickets, and insertion of money. In the accounting-only mode, the transmission of registration information to other POS terminals 420 and the issuance of accounting tickets are invalid. In the sales system 1, the POS terminal 420 operates in the accounting-only mode.
（フルセルフモード） (Full self mode)
フルセルフモードは、店員側の商品登録を無効とし、客側の商品登録を有効とした動作モードである。具体的には、フルセルフモードは、客側における登録処理を前提とした動作モードである。客側の商品登録では、客側スキャナ４２０６、客側ディスプレイ４２０５を用いて、商品の登録が行われる。フルセルフモードは、自端末における精算処理を行うことが可能な動作モードである。具体的には、フルセルフモードは、客側の商品登録及び貨幣の投入を有効とした動作モードである。フルセルフモードでは、他のＰＯＳ端末４２０への登録情報の送信や、お会計券の発行は無効とされる。フルセルフモードは、会計専用モードと同様に、クラウドサーバＳｖや他のＰＯＳ端末４２０からの登録情報の受信、お会計券の読み取りを有効として、精算を行うことも可能である。 The full self mode is an operation mode in which the product registration on the clerk side is invalidated and the product registration on the customer side is enabled. Specifically, the full self mode is an operation mode premised on the registration process on the customer side. In the product registration on the customer side, the product is registered using the customer side scanner 4206 and the customer side display 4205. The full self mode is an operation mode in which the settlement process can be performed on the own terminal. Specifically, the full self mode is an operation mode in which the customer side's product registration and money insertion are enabled. In the full self mode, transmission of registration information to other POS terminals 420 and issuance of checkout tickets are invalid. In the full self mode, as in the accounting-only mode, it is possible to perform settlement by validating the reception of registration information from the cloud server Sv and other POS terminals 420 and the reading of the accounting ticket.
（計量装置４３０の構成例） (Structure example of weighing device 430)
以下、図６４を参照しつつ、図６５Ａに示した計量装置４３０の構成例を説明する。図６４は、計量装置４３０の外観の一例を示す説明図である。 Hereinafter, a configuration example of the weighing device 430 shown in FIG. 65A will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing an example of the appearance of the weighing device 430.
図６５Ａは、計量装置４３０のハードウェア構成の一例を示す説明図である。図６４または図６５Ａに示すように、計量装置４３０は、ＣＰＵ４３０１と、ＲＯＭ４３０２と、ＲＡＭ４３０３と、メモリ４３０４と、通信部４３０５と、ディスプレイ４３０６と、印刷部４３０７と、スキャナ４３０８と、音声出力部４３０９と、ロードセル４３１０と、載台４３２０と、を備える。これらは、バス４３３０を介して相互に通信可能である。 FIG. 65A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the weighing device 430. As shown in FIG. 64 or FIG. 65A, the weighing device 430 includes a CPU 4301, a ROM 4302, a RAM 4303, a memory 4304, a communication unit 4305, a display 4306, a printing unit 4307, a scanner 4308, and an audio output unit 4309. A load cell 4310 and a mount 4320 are provided. They can communicate with each other via bus 4330.
ＣＰＵ４３０１は、中央演算処理装置であり、ＲＯＭ４３０２に記憶されている取引情報出力プログラム等の各種プログラムを読み出して実行することにより、計量装置４３０の動作を制御する。 The CPU 4301 is a central processing unit, and controls the operation of the weighing device 430 by reading and executing various programs such as a transaction information output program stored in the ROM 4302.
ＲＯＭ４３０２は、読み出し専用メモリであり、プログラムをはじめとしてＣＰＵ４３０１が利用する各種の情報を記憶する。 The ROM 4302 is a read-only memory, and stores various information used by the CPU 4301 including a program.
ＲＡＭ４３０３は、読み出しや書き込みが可能なメモリであり、種々の情報を記憶する。例えば、ＲＡＭ４３０３は、ＲＯＭ４３０２やメモリ４３０４から読み出した情報や、外部から取得した情報や、処理において生成した情報等を記憶する。 The RAM 4303 is a memory that can be read and written, and stores various information. For example, the RAM 4303 stores information read from the ROM 4302 or the memory 4304, information acquired from the outside, information generated in the process, and the like.
メモリ４３０４は、種々の情報を記憶する。メモリ４３０４は、例えば、ストアコントローラ４１０から取得した計量対象商品の単価を記憶する。メモリ４３０４は、計量対象商品を示す情報などの種々の情報を、設定された言語を用いて表示または音声で出力するための出力情報（図６５Ｂを用いて後述する言語関連テーブル４４２０）を記憶する。メモリ４３０４は、図６５Ｃを用いて後述する対応言語テーブル４４３０を記憶する。メモリ４３０４に記憶されている各種情報は、外部の装置（例えば、ストアコントローラ４１０や外部のサーバ装置等）に記憶されていてもよい。この場合、計量装置４３０は、各種情報を用いる際に、当該外部の装置に問い合わせて、各種情報を取得するようにすればよい。 Memory 4304 stores various information. The memory 4304 stores, for example, the unit price of the product to be weighed acquired from the store controller 410. The memory 4304 stores output information (language-related table 4420, which will be described later using FIG. 65B) for displaying or outputting various information such as information indicating a product to be weighed using a set language. .. The memory 4304 stores the corresponding language table 4430, which will be described later, using FIG. 65C. Various information stored in the memory 4304 may be stored in an external device (for example, a store controller 410, an external server device, or the like). In this case, when using various information, the measuring device 430 may inquire of the external device to acquire various information.
メモリ４３０４は、ＲＯＭ４３０２に代えて、ＣＰＵ４３０１が実行するプログラム等を記憶してもよい。メモリ４３０４は、ＲＡＭ４３０３に代えて、ＲＯＭ４３０２から読み出した情報や、外部から取得した情報や、処理において生成した情報等を記憶してもよい。 The memory 4304 may store a program or the like executed by the CPU 4301 instead of the ROM 4302. Instead of the RAM 4303, the memory 4304 may store information read from the ROM 4302, information acquired from the outside, information generated in the process, and the like.
通信部４３０５は、外部の装置との間で情報を送受信するインターフェースである。通信部４３０５は、ストアコントローラ４１０から、計量対象商品の商品識別情報に対応する単価を受信する。計量装置４３０は、載台４３２０に載置された商品の重量（または個数）と、単価とを用いて、計量対象商品の売価を算出する。 The communication unit 4305 is an interface for transmitting and receiving information to and from an external device. The communication unit 4305 receives the unit price corresponding to the product identification information of the product to be weighed from the store controller 410. The weighing device 430 calculates the selling price of the product to be weighed by using the weight (or number) of the product placed on the platform 4320 and the unit price.
通信部４３０５は、ネットワーク通信を介した通信のほかに、携帯端末４５０と近距離無線通信を行う。通信部４３０５が近距離無線通信によって携帯端末４５０と通信接続可能な台数は、限られており、例えば、１台である。具体的に説明すると、携帯端末４５０と１対１で近距離無線通信を行う。１対１の近距離無線通信は、例えば、Ｂｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈ（登録商標）である。１対１の近距離無線通信は、ＮＦＣ（Ｎｅａｒ　Ｆｉｅｌｄ　Ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｉｏｎ）、Ｗｉ−Ｆｉ（登録商標）、光通信、４Ｇ（Ｇｅｎｅｒａｔｉｏｎ）回線等などの通信プロトコルによる通信であってもよい。通信部４３０５が近距離無線通信によって携帯端末４５０と通信接続可能な台数は、１台に限らず、２台や３台であってもよい。 The communication unit 4305 performs short-range wireless communication with the mobile terminal 450 in addition to communication via network communication. The number of communication units 4305 capable of communicating with the mobile terminal 450 by short-range wireless communication is limited, for example, one. Specifically, short-range wireless communication is performed one-to-one with the mobile terminal 450. One-to-one short-range wireless communication is, for example, Bluetooth®. The one-to-one short-range wireless communication may be communication by a communication protocol such as NFC (Near Field Communication), Wi-Fi (registered trademark), optical communication, 4G (Generation) line, or the like. The number of communication units 4305 capable of communicating with the mobile terminal 450 by short-range wireless communication is not limited to one, and may be two or three.
ディスプレイ４３０６は、顧客に各種情報を表示するとともに、顧客から操作を受け付ける。ディスプレイ４３０６に表示される各種情報は、計量中の計量対象商品の商品名や計量数などのほか、計量に関するガイダンスなどを含む。ディスプレイ４３０６に表示される各種情報は、携帯端末４５０と１対１の通信を開始させるために、携帯端末４５０に読み取らせる２次元コード（以下「接続用コード」という場合がある。）を含む。 The display 4306 displays various information to the customer and accepts an operation from the customer. The various information displayed on the display 4306 includes the product name and the number of products to be weighed, as well as guidance on weighing. The various information displayed on the display 4306 includes a two-dimensional code (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “connection code”) read by the mobile terminal 450 in order to start one-to-one communication with the mobile terminal 450.
印刷部４３０７は、計量対象商品に関する情報（計量対象商品の重量、売価、及びこれらを示すバーコードなど）が印刷されたラベルを出力するラベル発行部である。 The printing unit 4307 is a label issuing unit that outputs a label on which information about the product to be weighed (weight, selling price, bar code indicating these, etc.) of the product to be weighed is printed.
スキャナ４３０８は、各種コード（バーコード、２次元コード等）を読み取る。 The scanner 4308 reads various codes (bar code, two-dimensional code, etc.).
音声出力部４３０９は、音声を出力する。例えば、音声出力部４３０９は、計量に関する音声ガイダンス等を出力する。 The audio output unit 4309 outputs audio. For example, the voice output unit 4309 outputs voice guidance and the like regarding weighing.
ロードセル４３１０は、重量を検出するセンサである。ロードセル４３１０は、載台４３２０に載置された計量対象商品の重量を計測する。 The load cell 4310 is a sensor that detects the weight. The load cell 4310 measures the weight of the product to be weighed placed on the platform 4320.
図６５Ｂは、メモリ４３０４が記憶する言語関連テーブルの一例を示す説明図である。図６５Ｂに示すように、言語関連テーブル４４２０は、言語情報と、重量単位と、重量変換値と、通貨と、金額変換値とを含む。言語関連テーブル４４２０において、言語情報は、計量装置４３０において出力可能な言語を示す。重量単位は、言語情報に対応して用いられる重量の単位であり、具体的には、言語情報が示す言語が用いられる国において使用される重量の単位である。重量変換値は、キログラムを基準にして、重量単位に変換する際に用いられる値である。通貨は、言語情報に対応して用いられる通貨の単位であり、具体的には、言語情報が示す言語が用いられる国において使用される通貨の単位である。金額変換値は、日本円を基準にして、言語情報に対応する通貨の単位に変換する際に用いられる値である。 FIG. 65B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a language-related table stored in the memory 4304. As shown in FIG. 65B, the language-related table 4420 includes language information, a weight unit, a weight conversion value, a currency, and a monetary conversion value. In the language-related table 4420, the language information indicates the language that can be output by the weighing device 430. The weight unit is a unit of weight used in response to linguistic information, and specifically, a unit of weight used in a country in which the language indicated by the linguistic information is used. The weight conversion value is a value used when converting to a weight unit based on a kilogram. A currency is a unit of currency used in response to linguistic information, and specifically, a unit of currency used in a country in which the language indicated by the linguistic information is used. The amount conversion value is a value used when converting to a currency unit corresponding to linguistic information based on Japanese yen.
図６５Ｂにおいて、具体的に説明すると、言語情報は、日本語、英語、中国語、韓国語などを示す。すなわち、計量装置４３０は、これらの言語が示す言語情報で、取引に関する情報を出力可能であることを示している。重量単位は、各国で用いられる重量の単位を示す。例えば、日本語（日本）の場合「キログラム」であり、英語（米国）の場合「オンス」であり、中国語（中国）の場合「公斤」であり、韓国語（韓国）の場合「クン」である。 More specifically, in FIG. 65B, the linguistic information indicates Japanese, English, Chinese, Korean, and the like. That is, the weighing device 430 indicates that it is possible to output information related to transactions with the linguistic information indicated by these languages. The weight unit indicates the unit of weight used in each country. For example, Japanese (Japan) is "kilogram", English (US) is "ounce", Chinese (China) is "public", and Korean (Korea) is "kun". Is.
重量変換値に示すように、１オンスは「０．０２８３４９５ｋｇ」であり、１公斤は「１ｋｇ」であり、１クンは「０．６ｋｇ」である。通貨は、日本語（日本）の場合「円」であり、英語（米国）の場合「ドル」であり、中国語（中国）の場合「人民元」であり、韓国語（韓国）の場合「ウォン」である。金額変換値に示すように、１ドルは「１０７円」であり、１人民元は「１５．０９円」であり、１ウォンは「０．０８７円」である。 As shown in the weight conversion value, 1 ounce is "0.0283495 kg", 1 weight is "1 kg" and 1 kun is "0.6 kg". The currency is "yen" for Japanese (Japan), "dollar" for English (US), "renminbi" for Chinese (China), and "Renminbi" for Korean (Korea). Won ". As shown in the amount conversion value, one dollar is "107 yen", one yuan is "15.09 yen", and one won is "0.087 yen".
このような言語関連テーブル４４２０を用いることにより、計量装置４３０は、キログラム及び日本円で計量した計量結果を用いて、顧客の使用する言語（顧客の母国）に応じた通貨及び重量単位で計量結果を表示することが可能である。 By using such a language-related table 4420, the weighing device 430 uses the weighing results weighed in kilograms and Japanese yen, and weighs the results in currency and weight units according to the language used by the customer (customer's home country). Can be displayed.
（メモリ４３０４が記憶する対応言語テーブル） (Supported language table stored in memory 4304)
図６５Ｃは、メモリ４３０４が記憶する対応言語テーブルの一例を示す説明図である。図６５Ｃに示すように、対応言語テーブル４４３０は、言語情報と、対応言語とを対応付けたテーブルである。言語情報は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報であり、且つ、計量装置４３０において出力不可能な言語情報を示す。 FIG. 65C is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a corresponding language table stored in the memory 4304. As shown in FIG. 65C, the corresponding language table 4430 is a table in which the language information and the corresponding language are associated with each other. The linguistic information is linguistic information set in the mobile terminal 450 and indicates linguistic information that cannot be output by the measuring device 430.
ここで、図６５Ｂの言語関連テーブル４４２０に記憶されている「言語」は、一般的な言語（来店が見込める外国人が使用する言語）に限られている。言い換えれば、言語関連テーブル４４２０において、多くの来店が見込めない外国人（例えば、台湾人や北朝鮮人）が使用する言語（例えば、台湾語や朝鮮語）は、記憶されていない。このため、このような顧客の場合には、言語情報に近い言語（親和性のある言語）である対応言語を用いて、計量結果を表示することが可能になっている。 Here, the "language" stored in the language-related table 4420 of FIG. 65B is limited to general languages (languages used by foreigners who are expected to visit the store). In other words, in the language-related table 4420, the languages (for example, Taiwanese and Korean) used by foreigners (for example, Taiwanese and North Koreans) who are not expected to visit many stores are not remembered. Therefore, in the case of such a customer, it is possible to display the measurement result by using a corresponding language which is a language close to the language information (a language having an affinity).
具体的に説明すると、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が台湾語の場合、対応言語は、中国語である。すなわち、この場合、中国語を用いて出力情報が出力されることを示している。携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が朝鮮語の場合、対応言語は、韓国語である。すなわち、この場合、韓国語を用いて出力情報が出力されることを示している。より来店が見込めない外国人（例えば、グリーンランドなど）が使用する特殊な言語（例えば、イヌイット語など）のように、言語関連テーブル４４２０内の言語情報に記憶されていない場合、言語情報は「その他」となる。「その他」には、対応言語として、英語が対応付けられている。「その他」には、対応言語として、日本語が対応付けられていてもよい。 Specifically, when the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 is Taiwanese, the supported language is Chinese. That is, in this case, it is shown that the output information is output using Chinese. When the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 is Korean, the supported language is Korean. That is, in this case, it is shown that the output information is output using Korean. If the language information is not stored in the language information in the language-related table 4420, such as a special language used by a foreigner (for example, Greenland) who is less likely to visit the store (for example, Inuit), the language information is ". Others ". English is associated with "Other" as a corresponding language. Japanese may be associated with "Other" as a corresponding language.
携帯端末４５０の構成例を説明する。図６６は、携帯端末４５０のハードウェア構成の一例を示す説明図である。図６６において、携帯端末４５０は、ＣＰＵ４５０１、ＲＯＭ４５０２、ＲＡＭ４５０３、メモリ４５０４、通信Ｉ／Ｆ４５０５、操作部４５０６、カメラ４５０７、マイク４５０８、ディスプレイ４５０９、スピーカ４５１０を備えている。各構成部４５０１~４５１０は、バス４５２０によってそれぞれ接続されている。 A configuration example of the mobile terminal 450 will be described. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the mobile terminal 450. In FIG. 66, the mobile terminal 450 includes a CPU 4501, a ROM 4502, a RAM 4503, a memory 4504, a communication I / F 4505, an operation unit 4506, a camera 4507, a microphone 4508, a display 4509, and a speaker 4510. Each component 4501 to 4510 is connected by a bus 4520.
ＣＰＵ４５０１は、携帯端末４５０の全体の制御を司る。ＲＯＭ４５０２は、各種プログラムを記録している。ＲＡＭ４５０３は、ＣＰＵ４５０１のワークエリアとして使用される。すなわち、ＣＰＵ４５０１は、ＲＡＭ４５０３をワークエリアとして使用しながら、ＲＯＭ４５０２に記録された各種プログラムを実行することによって、携帯端末４５０の全体の制御を司る。 The CPU 4501 controls the entire mobile terminal 450. The ROM 4502 records various programs. The RAM 4503 is used as a work area for the CPU 4501. That is, the CPU 4501 controls the entire mobile terminal 450 by executing various programs recorded in the ROM 4502 while using the RAM 4503 as a work area.
メモリ４５０４は、各種データを記憶する。メモリには、例えば、フラッシュＲＯＭが用いられる。メモリ４５０４は、各種プログラムや、本アプリなどを記憶する。メモリ４５０４は、使用可能な複数の言語情報を記憶する。メモリ４５０４は、使用可能な複数の言語情報のうち、使用する一の言語情報を設定言語として記憶する。ＣＰＵ４５０１は、メモリ４５０４に記憶されている設定言語で、各種データを出力する。 The memory 4504 stores various data. For the memory, for example, a flash ROM is used. The memory 4504 stores various programs, this application, and the like. Memory 4504 stores a plurality of available linguistic information. The memory 4504 stores one language information to be used as a setting language among a plurality of available language information. The CPU 4501 outputs various data in the setting language stored in the memory 4504.
通信部４５０５は、無線を介してネットワークに接続され、携帯端末４５０及びＣＰＵ４５０１のインターフェースとして機能する。ネットワークとして機能する通信網には、インターネットや携帯電話網などがある。通信部４５０５は、ネットワーク通信を介した通信のほかに、計量装置４３０と近距離無線通信を行う。 The communication unit 4505 is wirelessly connected to the network and functions as an interface between the mobile terminal 450 and the CPU 4501. Communication networks that function as networks include the Internet and mobile phone networks. The communication unit 4505 performs short-range wireless communication with the measuring device 430 in addition to communication via network communication.
操作部４５０６は、文字、数値、各種指示などの入力のための複数のキーを備えたハードキーである。 The operation unit 4506 is a hard key including a plurality of keys for inputting characters, numerical values, various instructions, and the like.
カメラ４５０７は、商品に付されたバーコードや、各種の２次元コードを読み取る。 The camera 4507 reads a barcode attached to a product and various two-dimensional codes.
マイク４５０８は、音声を入力する。 The microphone 4508 inputs audio.
ディスプレイ４５０９は、アイコン、カーソル、メニュー、ウインドウ、文字、画像などの各種データを表示する。ディスプレイ４５０９には、例えば、タッチパネルが用いられる。ディスプレイ４５０９は、予め設定された言語で画面を表示する。 The display 4509 displays various data such as icons, cursors, menus, windows, characters, and images. For the display 4509, for example, a touch panel is used. The display 4509 displays the screen in a preset language.
スピーカ４５１０は、音声を含む音を出力する。スピーカ４５１０は、予め設定された言語で音声を出力する。携帯端末４５０は、ＧＰＳユニットを備えており、ＧＰＳ衛星からの電波を受信し、携帯端末４５０の現在位置を示す情報を出力する機能も有する。 The speaker 4510 outputs sound including voice. The speaker 4510 outputs audio in a preset language. The mobile terminal 450 includes a GPS unit, and also has a function of receiving radio waves from GPS satellites and outputting information indicating the current position of the mobile terminal 450.
ここで、一の携帯端末４５０と計量装置４３０との接続時間が長いと、その分、他の顧客の携帯端末４５０と計量装置４３０とが通信接続できない時間も長くなってしまう。例えば、一の携帯端末４５０と計量装置４３０とが通信接続した後に、当該客が計量対象商品を仮登録して計量装置４３０に当該計量対象商品を載置したりするなどの一連の計量操作が行われると、当該一の携帯端末４５０が長時間、計量装置４３０を占有してしまうことになる。これにより、他の顧客が計量装置４３０を使用することができなくなり、計量対象商品の登録における効率が低下してしまう。 Here, if the connection time between one mobile terminal 450 and the weighing device 430 is long, the time during which communication connection between the mobile terminal 450 of another customer and the weighing device 430 cannot be made becomes long accordingly. For example, after one mobile terminal 450 and the weighing device 430 are connected by communication, a series of weighing operations such as the customer temporarily registering the weighing target product and placing the weighing target product on the weighing device 430 can be performed. If this is done, the one mobile terminal 450 will occupy the weighing device 430 for a long time. As a result, other customers cannot use the weighing device 430, and the efficiency in registering the weighing target product is reduced.
このため、第４の実施形態では、計量装置４３０は、仮登録された計量対象商品の商品識別情報を携帯端末４５０から受信することを条件に、当該商品識別情報が示す仮登録商品（仮登録された商品）の計量を可能にする。言い換えれば、計量装置４３０は、携帯端末４５０において計量対象商品が仮登録されることを条件に、当該計量対象商品の計量を可能にする。以下に、携帯端末４５０が行う計量対象商品の仮登録及び本登録について詳述する。 Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the weighing device 430 receives the provisionally registered product identification information of the measurement target product from the mobile terminal 450, and the provisionally registered product (temporary registration) indicated by the product identification information. Allows the weighing of goods). In other words, the weighing device 430 enables the weighing target product to be weighed on condition that the weighing target product is provisionally registered in the mobile terminal 450. The provisional registration and the main registration of the products to be weighed by the mobile terminal 450 will be described in detail below.
携帯端末４５０（ＣＰＵ４５０１）は、計量対象商品を仮登録する。仮登録は、Ｎｏｎ−ＰＬＵコードや、計量対象商品に特別に設けられた番号などを用いて、計量対象商品を特定することができればよい。例えば、仮登録とは、例えば、商品識別情報、商品名、単価などが登録された状態であり、商品の重量や売価などが登録されていない状態である。仮登録された商品は、例えば、仮登録がキャンセルされたとしても、後述する保留商品として扱われない。仮登録された商品は、メモリ４５０４に記憶されている。 The mobile terminal 450 (CPU4501) temporarily registers the product to be weighed. For provisional registration, it suffices if the product to be weighed can be specified by using the Non-PLU code, a number specially provided for the product to be weighed, or the like. For example, the provisional registration is a state in which the product identification information, the product name, the unit price, and the like are registered, and the weight and the selling price of the product are not registered. Even if the provisionally registered product is canceled, for example, the temporarily registered product is not treated as a reserved product described later. The temporarily registered product is stored in the memory 4504.
携帯端末４５０は、カメラ４５０７によって計量対象商品を識別するバーコード（商品識別情報）が読み取られると、当該バーコードの読取結果から得られる計量対象商品を仮登録する。仮登録された計量対象商品は、ディスプレイ４５０９に表示される。計量対象商品を識別するバーコードは、例えば、計量対象商品の近傍に表示されている。当該バーコードの表示の態様は、ディスプレイへの表示でよいし、紙面への表示でもよい。 When the barcode (product identification information) that identifies the product to be weighed is read by the camera 4507, the mobile terminal 450 provisionally registers the product to be weighed obtained from the reading result of the barcode. The provisionally registered merchandise to be weighed is displayed on the display 4509. The barcode that identifies the product to be weighed is displayed in the vicinity of the product to be weighed, for example. The display mode of the barcode may be a display on a display or a paper surface.
通信部５０５は、計量装置４３０の通信部４３０５と通信する。具体的には、通信部５０５は、例えば、Ｂｌｕｅｔｏｏｔｈを用いて、計量装置４３０の通信部４３０５と１対１で近距離無線通信を行う。１対１の通信には、携帯端末４５０において、１対１の通信を行うための機能（以下「近距離無線通信機能」と言う）をＯＮに設定しておくことを要する。携帯端末４５０は、計量装置４３０に対して、１対１の通信の接続要求を行う。計量装置４３０は、この接続要求に応じて携帯端末４５０との通信を開始して、携帯端末４５０において仮登録されている商品識別情報を受信することが可能になる。 The communication unit 505 communicates with the communication unit 4305 of the weighing device 430. Specifically, the communication unit 505 uses Bluetooth, for example, to perform one-to-one short-range wireless communication with the communication unit 4305 of the weighing device 430. For one-to-one communication, it is necessary to set the function for performing one-to-one communication (hereinafter referred to as "short-range wireless communication function") to ON in the mobile terminal 450. The mobile terminal 450 makes a one-to-one communication connection request to the weighing device 430. The weighing device 430 starts communication with the mobile terminal 450 in response to this connection request, and can receive the product identification information provisionally registered in the mobile terminal 450.
携帯端末４５０と計量装置４３０との接続の手順を説明する。例えば、計量装置４３０は、携帯端末４５０と通信接続されていない状態では、１対１の通信接続を行うためのペアリング可能状態（待機状態）となっている。携帯端末４５０は、近距離無線通信がＯＮになっている場合、１対１の通信が可能な周囲の機器を探索し、計量装置４３０を指定する。そして、携帯端末４５０と計量装置４３０との双方に、同一のパスキーが入力されると、１対１の通信が可能になる。 The procedure for connecting the mobile terminal 450 and the weighing device 430 will be described. For example, the weighing device 430 is in a pairable state (standby state) for making a one-to-one communication connection when the mobile terminal 450 is not connected to the communication. When the short-range wireless communication is turned on, the mobile terminal 450 searches for surrounding devices capable of one-to-one communication and designates the weighing device 430. Then, when the same passkey is input to both the mobile terminal 450 and the weighing device 430, one-to-one communication becomes possible.
携帯端末４５０に、計量装置４３０との接続を行わせるための情報（周囲の機器の探索や、計量装置４３０の指定や、パスキーの入力等を行わせるための情報や、言語情報を計量装置４３０に送信する旨の情報など）は、接続用コードに含まれる。接続用コードは、例えば、待機状態中の計量装置４３０のディスプレイ４３０６に表示されている。このため、顧客が携帯端末４５０のカメラ４５０７で当該接続用コードを読み取ると、周囲の機器の探索や、計量装置４３０の指定や、パスキーの入力などが自動で行われる。すなわち、顧客が携帯端末４５０のカメラ４５０７で当該接続用コードを読み取ると、携帯端末４５０から計量装置４３０に対して接続要求が自動で行われ、自動で計量装置４３０との通信接続が行われる。 Information for causing the mobile terminal 450 to connect to the weighing device 430 (information for searching for surrounding devices, designating the weighing device 430, inputting a passkey, etc., and linguistic information for measuring device 430. Information to be sent to) is included in the connection code. The connection cord is displayed, for example, on the display 4306 of the weighing device 430 in the standby state. Therefore, when the customer reads the connection code with the camera 4507 of the mobile terminal 450, the search for surrounding devices, the designation of the weighing device 430, the input of the passkey, and the like are automatically performed. That is, when the customer reads the connection code with the camera 4507 of the mobile terminal 450, the mobile terminal 450 automatically makes a connection request to the weighing device 430, and the communication connection with the weighing device 430 is automatically performed.
接続要求を行う際には、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が計量装置４３０に送信される。これにより、計量装置４３０は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報を取得することができる。 When making a connection request, the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 is transmitted to the weighing device 430. As a result, the weighing device 430 can acquire the language information set in the mobile terminal 450.
接続用コードは、計量装置４３０に表示されることに限らず、紙面等に表示されて掲示されていてもよい。１対１の通信接続は、接続用コードが読み取られて行われることに限らず、顧客から、周囲の機器の探索、計量装置４３０の指定、パスキーの入力等のそれぞれを受け付けて行われてもよい。接続要求は、携帯端末４５０から計量装置４３０に対して行われることに限らず、計量装置４３０から携帯端末４５０に対して行われてもよい。 The connection cord is not limited to being displayed on the weighing device 430, and may be displayed and posted on paper or the like. The one-to-one communication connection is not limited to the connection code being read, but the customer may search for surrounding devices, specify the weighing device 430, enter a passkey, and so on. good. The connection request is not limited to being made from the mobile terminal 450 to the weighing device 430, but may be made from the measuring device 430 to the mobile terminal 450.
１対１の通信接続が完了すると、通信部５０５は、ＣＰＵ４５０１の制御に従って、仮登録された計量対象商品を識別する商品識別情報を計量装置４３０へ送信する。 When the one-to-one communication connection is completed, the communication unit 505 transmits the product identification information for identifying the temporarily registered product to be measured to the weighing device 430 under the control of the CPU 4501.
計量装置４３０の通信部４３０５は、携帯端末４５０の通信部５０５と１対１で通信する。計量装置４３０の通信部４３０５は、携帯端末４５０の通信部５０５から送信された商品識別情報を受信する。計量装置４３０のＣＰＵ４３０１は、通信部４３０５が受信した商品識別情報によって識別される計量対象商品の計量を行う。通信部４３０５は、近距離無線通信によって計量結果を携帯端末４５０に送信する。計量結果は、載台４３２０に載置された商品の重量（または個数）のほか、当該重量（または個数）と単価とを用いて算出された売価や、当該商品の商品識別情報（商品コード）などを含む。すなわち、計量結果は、計量対象商品の商品情報に相当する。 The communication unit 4305 of the weighing device 430 communicates with the communication unit 505 of the mobile terminal 450 on a one-to-one basis. The communication unit 4305 of the weighing device 430 receives the product identification information transmitted from the communication unit 505 of the mobile terminal 450. The CPU 4301 of the weighing device 430 weighs the product to be weighed, which is identified by the product identification information received by the communication unit 4305. The communication unit 4305 transmits the measurement result to the mobile terminal 450 by short-range wireless communication. The weighing result includes the weight (or quantity) of the product placed on the platform 4320, the selling price calculated using the weight (or quantity) and the unit price, and the product identification information (product code) of the product. And so on. That is, the weighing result corresponds to the product information of the product to be weighed.
携帯端末４５０のＣＰＵ４５０１は、計量装置４３０の計量結果に基づいて、仮登録した計量対象商品を本登録する。本登録とは、精算を行うための全ての情報が登録されることである。具体的には、本登録は、例えば、仮登録した商品識別情報や商品名や単価に加えて、重量や売価などが登録されることである。本登録された商品は、例えば、本登録がキャンセルされると、後述する保留商品として扱われる点でも、仮登録された商品とは異なる。 The CPU 4501 of the mobile terminal 450 actually registers the provisionally registered product to be weighed based on the weighing result of the weighing device 430. The main registration is that all the information for performing the settlement is registered. Specifically, in the main registration, for example, in addition to the provisionally registered product identification information, product name, and unit price, the weight, selling price, and the like are registered. The fully registered product is different from the provisionally registered product in that, for example, when the main registration is canceled, it is treated as a reserved product described later.
第４の実施形態では、携帯端末４５０に計量対象商品が仮登録されていない場合には、計量装置４３０と携帯端末４５０との１対１の通信接続が禁止されるようになっている。１対１の通信接続を禁止する制御を行う主体は、例えば、携帯端末４５０である。例えば、携帯端末４５０は、接続用コードを読み取ったとしても、計量対象商品を仮登録していない場合には、接続要求を行わないようにすればよい。 In the fourth embodiment, when the product to be weighed is not provisionally registered in the mobile terminal 450, the one-to-one communication connection between the weighing device 430 and the mobile terminal 450 is prohibited. The main body that controls to prohibit one-to-one communication connection is, for example, a mobile terminal 450. For example, even if the mobile terminal 450 reads the connection code, if the product to be weighed is not provisionally registered, the connection request may not be made.
１対１の通信接続を禁止する主体は、計量装置４３０であってもよい。この場合、携帯端末４５０は、１対１の通信接続後に直ぐに、仮登録した計量対象商品に関する情報を送信すればよい。仮登録した計量対象商品に関する情報は、仮登録した計量対象商品を示す情報でもよいし、計量対象商品の仮登録の有無を示す情報でもよい。計量装置４３０は、仮登録した計量対象商品に関する情報を用いて、計量対象商品が仮登録されているか否かを判別し、仮登録されていないと判別した場合には、当該携帯端末４５０との１対１に通信を解除（禁止）すればよい。 The entity that prohibits one-to-one communication connections may be the weighing device 430. In this case, the mobile terminal 450 may transmit the information regarding the provisionally registered product to be weighed immediately after the one-to-one communication connection. The information regarding the provisionally registered merchandise to be weighed may be information indicating the provisionally registered merchandise to be weighed or information indicating whether or not the merchandise to be weighed is provisionally registered. The weighing device 430 determines whether or not the tentatively registered product is tentatively registered by using the information about the tentatively registered merchandise to be weighed, and if it is determined that the tentatively registered product is not registered, the measuring device 430 is connected to the mobile terminal 450. Communication may be canceled (prohibited) on a one-to-one basis.
第４の実施形態では、携帯端末４５０において計量対象商品の仮登録が行われないと、計量装置４３０を使用することができないようになっている。このため、携帯端末４５０において計量対象商品の仮登録が行われていない場合には、その旨を報知するようにしている。これについて、具体的に説明する。携帯端末４５０は、計量対象商品を仮登録してない場合、計量対象商品の仮登録を促す旨の報知を行う。具体的に、計量装置４３０と携帯端末４５０との１対１の通信接続が禁止された場合、携帯端末４５０は、計量対象商品の仮登録を促す旨の報知を行う。仮登録を促す旨の報知の態様は、ディスプレイ４５０９からの表示出力や、スピーカ４５１０からの音声出力である。 In the fourth embodiment, the weighing device 430 cannot be used unless the product to be weighed is provisionally registered in the mobile terminal 450. For this reason, if the mobile terminal 450 has not been provisionally registered for the product to be weighed, it is notified to that effect. This will be specifically described. When the mobile terminal 450 has not temporarily registered the product to be weighed, the mobile terminal 450 notifies that the provisional registration of the product to be weighed is urged. Specifically, when the one-to-one communication connection between the weighing device 430 and the mobile terminal 450 is prohibited, the mobile terminal 450 notifies that the provisional registration of the product to be weighed is urged. The mode of notification to encourage temporary registration is a display output from the display 4509 and an audio output from the speaker 4510.
計量装置４３０のＣＰＵ４３０１は、計量装置４３０ごとに予め定められた計量可能な計量対象商品（以下「計量可能商品」と言う）を計量する。計量可能商品は、例えば、野菜売り場に配置された計量装置４３０であれば、野菜に該当する各種商品であり、鮮魚売り場に配置された計量装置４３０であれば、鮮魚に該当する各種商品である。計量可能商品を識別する商品識別情報は、例えば、メモリ４３０４に記憶されている。計量可能商品を識別する商品識別情報は、ストアコントローラ４１０から取得されてもよい。 The CPU 4301 of the weighing device 430 weighs a predetermined measurable product to be weighed (hereinafter referred to as “measurable product”) for each weighing device 430. The measurable products are, for example, various products corresponding to vegetables in the case of the weighing device 430 arranged in the vegetable section, and various products corresponding to fresh fish in the case of the measuring device 430 arranged in the fresh fish section. .. The product identification information that identifies the measurable product is stored in, for example, the memory 4304. The product identification information that identifies the measurable product may be acquired from the store controller 410.
携帯端末４５０は、仮登録されている計量対象商品が計量可能商品ではない場合（計量不可能商品である場合）、計量不可能な旨の報知を行う。仮登録されている計量対象商品が計量可能商品であるか否かを判断する判断主体は、例えば、計量装置４３０である。この場合、計量装置４３０は、携帯端末４５０から受信した商品識別情報が、メモリ４３０４に記憶されている計量可能商品を示す商品識別情報に含まれるか否かを判断する。当該判断において、否定の判断結果が得られた場合、計量装置４３０は、その旨を示す情報を携帯端末４５０に送信する。携帯端末４５０（ＣＰＵ４５０１）は、当該情報を受信すると、計量不可能な旨の報知（計量不可能商品の報知）を行う。計量不可能商品の報知の態様は、ディスプレイ４５０９からの表示出力や、スピーカ４５１０からの音声出力である。 When the provisionally registered merchandise to be weighed is not a measurable product (if it is a non-measurable product), the mobile terminal 450 notifies that the merchandise cannot be weighed. The determinant for determining whether or not the tentatively registered merchandise to be weighed is a merchandise that can be weighed is, for example, a weighing device 430. In this case, the weighing device 430 determines whether or not the product identification information received from the mobile terminal 450 is included in the product identification information indicating the measurable product stored in the memory 4304. If a negative determination result is obtained in the determination, the weighing device 430 transmits information indicating that fact to the mobile terminal 450. When the mobile terminal 450 (CPU4501) receives the information, the mobile terminal 450 (CPU4501) notifies that the measurement is impossible (notification of the non-weighable product). The mode of notifying the non-weighable product is a display output from the display 4509 and an audio output from the speaker 4510.
仮登録されている計量対象商品が計量可能商品であるか否かを判断する判断主体は、携帯端末４５０であってもよい。この場合、例えば、接続用コードに計量可能商品を識別する商品識別情報が含まれていてもよい。携帯端末４５０は、接続用コードを読み取ると、仮登録している計量対象商品の商品識別情報が、接続用コードから得られる計量可能商品の商品識別情報に含まれるか否かを判断すればよい。携帯端末４５０は、当該判断において、否定の判断結果を得た場合、計量不可能な旨の報知を行うようにすればよい。 The mobile terminal 450 may be the determining entity that determines whether or not the tentatively registered merchandise to be weighed is a merchandise that can be weighed. In this case, for example, the connection cord may include product identification information that identifies the measurable product. When the mobile terminal 450 reads the connection code, it may determine whether or not the product identification information of the tentatively registered merchandise to be weighed is included in the merchandise identification information of the measurable product obtained from the connection code. .. When the mobile terminal 450 obtains a negative determination result in the determination, the mobile terminal 450 may notify that the measurement is impossible.
次に、計量装置４３０の機能的構成を説明する。計量装置４３０は、通信部４３０５（図６５Ａ参照）と、取得部と、出力制御部と、計量部と、ラベル発行部とを備える。取得部と、出力制御部と、計量部とは、ＣＰＵ４３０１によって実現される。すなわち、ＣＰＵ４３０１がＲＯＭ４３０２に記憶されている取引情報出力プログラムを実行することにより、各部の機能を実現する。ラベル発行部は、印刷部４３０７によって実現される。 Next, the functional configuration of the weighing device 430 will be described. The weighing device 430 includes a communication unit 4305 (see FIG. 65A), an acquisition unit, an output control unit, a measuring unit, and a label issuing unit. The acquisition unit, the output control unit, and the measurement unit are realized by the CPU 4301. That is, the functions of each part are realized by the CPU 4301 executing the transaction information output program stored in the ROM 4302. The label issuing unit is realized by the printing unit 4307.
通信部４３０５は、端末装置の一例である携帯端末４５０と通信を行う。通信部４３０５は、例えば、携帯端末４５０と近距離無線通信によって１対１の通信を行う。携帯端末４５０には、予め一の言語情報が設定されている。具体的には、携帯端末４５０には、携帯端末４５０の購入時等に顧客等が設定した一の言語情報が設定されている。当該言語情報が示す言語は、例えば、顧客が日常的に使用する言語である。携帯端末４５０は、設定されている言語情報が示す言語で画面を表示する。携帯端末４５０は、顧客の操作を受け付ける。 The communication unit 4305 communicates with the mobile terminal 450, which is an example of the terminal device. The communication unit 4305 performs one-to-one communication with the mobile terminal 450 by short-range wireless communication, for example. One language information is set in advance in the mobile terminal 450. Specifically, one language information set by a customer or the like at the time of purchase of the mobile terminal 450 or the like is set in the mobile terminal 450. The language indicated by the language information is, for example, a language that the customer uses on a daily basis. The mobile terminal 450 displays the screen in the language indicated by the set language information. The mobile terminal 450 accepts customer operations.
取得部は、通信部４３０５の通信によって、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報を取得する。ここで、携帯端末４５０は、計量装置４３０と接続する際に、計量装置４３０に表示される接続用コードを読み取る。接続用コードには、計量装置４３０宛てに言語情報を送信する旨の情報が含まれている。このため、携帯端末４５０は、接続用コードを読み取ると、計量装置４３０に一の言語情報を送信する。このように、携帯端末４５０から一の言語情報が送信されることにより、取得部は、一の言語情報を取得する。 The acquisition unit acquires one language information set in the mobile terminal 450 by the communication of the communication unit 4305. Here, the mobile terminal 450 reads the connection code displayed on the weighing device 430 when connecting to the weighing device 430. The connection code contains information to the effect that language information is transmitted to the weighing device 430. Therefore, when the mobile terminal 450 reads the connection code, it transmits one language information to the weighing device 430. By transmitting one language information from the mobile terminal 450 in this way, the acquisition unit acquires one language information.
出力制御部は、取得部によって取得された一の言語情報に応じた言語で、取引に関する情報を出力する。具体的には、出力制御部は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が日本語を示す場合、日本語で取引に関する情報を出力する。一方で、出力制御部は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が日本語以外の他の言語（外国語）を示す場合、他の言語で取引に関する情報を出力する。出力制御部は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が日本語以外の他の言語を示す場合、日本語と他の言語とを併記して取引に関する情報を出力してもよい。 The output control unit outputs information related to transactions in a language corresponding to one language information acquired by the acquisition unit. Specifically, when the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 indicates Japanese, the output control unit outputs information related to transactions in Japanese. On the other hand, when the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 indicates a language other than Japanese (foreign language), the output control unit outputs information related to transactions in the other language. When the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 indicates a language other than Japanese, the output control unit may output information on transactions by writing both Japanese and other languages.
取引に関する情報は、計量部の計量に関する計量情報を含む。計量情報は、計量対象商品を載台４３２０に載せることを促す通知を行うための情報や、ラベルの発行を促す通知を行うための情報などを含む。出力制御部による取引に関する情報の出力態様は、音声や表示の出力態様である。 The information regarding the transaction includes the measurement information regarding the measurement of the measurement department. The weighing information includes information for giving a notification for urging the product to be weighed to be placed on the mounting table 4320, information for giving a notification for issuing a label, and the like. The output mode of the information related to the transaction by the output control unit is the output mode of voice or display.
出力制御部は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語で取引に関する情報を出力する。具体的には、出力制御部は、言語関連テーブル４４２０（図６５Ｂ参照）に記憶されている言語情報を用いて、取引に関する情報を出力する。携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語を出力できない場合がある。具体的には、言語関連テーブル４４２０に、当該一の言語情報と同一の言語情報が記憶されていない場合がある。この場合、出力制御部は、当該一の言語情報に対応する他の言語で、取引に関する情報を出力する。例えば、出力制御部は、対応言語テーブル４４３０（図４Ｃ参照）を参照し、他の言語としての対応言語で、取引に関する情報を出力する。 The output control unit outputs information related to transactions in the same language as the language indicated by one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. Specifically, the output control unit outputs information related to transactions using the language information stored in the language-related table 4420 (see FIG. 65B). It may not be possible to output the same language as the language indicated by one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. Specifically, the language-related table 4420 may not store the same language information as the one language information. In this case, the output control unit outputs information about the transaction in another language corresponding to the one language information. For example, the output control unit refers to the corresponding language table 4430 (see FIG. 4C) and outputs information on transactions in the corresponding language as another language.
計量情報は、計量部によって計量された商品の重量の情報を含む。計量部によって計量された商品の重量の単位は、例えば、ｋｇである。出力制御部は、商品の重量の情報を、一の言語情報に応じた重量の単位に換算して出力する。具体的には、出力制御部は、計量部によって計量された重量の単位を、一の言語情報に応じた重量さの単位（例えば、オンス）に換算して、重量の情報を出力する。より具体的には、出力制御部は、言語関連テーブル４４２０の「重量変換値」を参照して、計量によって得られた重量の情報を、言語情報に応じた単位に換算して出力する。例えば、出力制御部は、換算前の重量の単位（例えば、ｋｇ）と、換算した重量の単位（例えば、オンス）とを併記してディスプレイ４３０６に表示させる。 The weighing information includes information on the weight of the goods weighed by the weighing unit. The unit of weight of the product weighed by the weighing unit is, for example, kg. The output control unit converts the weight information of the product into a weight unit corresponding to one linguistic information and outputs it. Specifically, the output control unit converts the unit of weight weighed by the weighing unit into a unit of weight corresponding to one linguistic information (for example, ounce) and outputs the weight information. More specifically, the output control unit refers to the "weight conversion value" of the language-related table 4420, converts the weight information obtained by weighing into units corresponding to the language information, and outputs the weight information. For example, the output control unit displays the unit of weight before conversion (for example, kg) and the unit of converted weight (for example, ounce) together on the display 4306.
取引に関する情報は、商品の買上金額の情報を含む。買上金額は、顧客が商品に対して支払う金額であり、例えば、商品の単価と重量（または個数）との積によって得られる。買上金額の通信の単位は、例えば、日本円である。出力制御部は、買上金額の情報を、一の言語情報に応じた通貨（例えば、ドル）に換算して出力する。具体的には、出力制御部は、言語関連テーブル４４２０の「金額変換値」を参照して、買上金額を言語情報に応じた通貨に換算して買上金額の情報を出力する。例えば、出力制御部は、換算前の通過の単位（例えば、日本円）と、換算した通貨の単位（例えば、ドル）とを併記してディスプレイ４３０６に表示させる。 Information about the transaction includes information on the purchase price of the goods. The purchase price is an amount paid by the customer to the product, and is obtained by, for example, the product of the unit price of the product and the weight (or quantity) of the product. The communication unit of the purchase amount is, for example, Japanese yen. The output control unit converts the purchase price information into a currency (for example, dollar) corresponding to one language information and outputs it. Specifically, the output control unit refers to the "amount conversion value" in the language-related table 4420, converts the purchase amount into a currency corresponding to the language information, and outputs the purchase amount information. For example, the output control unit displays the unit of passage before conversion (for example, Japanese yen) and the unit of converted currency (for example, dollar) on the display 4306 together.
ラベル発行部は、ラベルを発行する。出力制御部は、一の言語情報に応じた言語で、ラベル発行部にラベルを発行させる。ラベル発行部は、印刷部４３０７を用いてラベルを発行する。ラベル発行部は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語でラベルを発行する。ラベル発行部は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語でラベルを出力できない場合は、対応言語でラベルを発行する。ラベル発行部は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が日本語を示す場合、日本語のみでラベルを発行する。一方で、ラベル発行部は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が日本語以外の他の言語を示す場合、日本語に他の言語を併記したラベルを発行する。 The label issuing department issues a label. The output control unit causes the label issuing unit to issue a label in a language corresponding to one language information. The label issuing unit issues a label using the printing unit 4307. The label issuing unit issues a label in the same language as the language indicated by one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. If the label issuing unit cannot output the label in the same language as the language indicated by one language information set in the mobile terminal 450, the label issuing unit issues the label in the corresponding language. When the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 indicates Japanese, the label issuing unit issues the label only in Japanese. On the other hand, when the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 indicates a language other than Japanese, the label issuing unit issues a label in which the other language is written together with Japanese.
出力制御部は、所定のタイミングで、外国語の出力を終了させる。所定のタイミングは、例えば、計量が完了したタイミングや、ラベルが発行されたタイミングや、顧客がラベルを受け取ったタイミングなどである。具体的には、計量が完了したタイミングは、例えば、ロードセル４３１０によって重量の検出が完了したタイミングである。ラベルが発行されたタイミングは、ラベル発行部によるラベルの発行が完了したタイミングである。顧客がラベル受け取ったタイミングは、顧客によるラベルの取り出しを検出するセンサによって、当該取り出しが検出されたタイミングである。出力制御部は、上述した各タイミングから所定時間が経過したタイミングで、外国語の出力を終了させるようにしてもよい。 The output control unit ends the output of the foreign language at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing is, for example, the timing when the weighing is completed, the timing when the label is issued, the timing when the customer receives the label, and the like. Specifically, the timing at which the weighing is completed is, for example, the timing at which the weight detection is completed by the load cell 4310. The timing when the label is issued is the timing when the label issuance by the label issuing unit is completed. The timing at which the customer receives the label is the timing at which the removal of the label is detected by the sensor that detects the removal of the label by the customer. The output control unit may end the output of the foreign language at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from each of the above-mentioned timings.
次に、ＰＯＳ端末４２０の機能的構成を説明する。ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、通信部４２１５（図６３参照）と、取得部と、出力制御部と、精算部と、印刷部４２１３とを備える。取得部と、出力制御部と、精算部とは、ＣＰＵ４２０１によって実現される。すなわち、ＣＰＵ４２０１がＲＯＭ４２０２に記憶されている取引情報出力プログラムを実行することにより、各部の機能を実現する。 Next, the functional configuration of the POS terminal 420 will be described. The POS terminal 420 includes a communication unit 4215 (see FIG. 63), an acquisition unit, an output control unit, a settlement unit, and a printing unit 4213. The acquisition unit, the output control unit, and the settlement unit are realized by the CPU 4201. That is, the functions of each part are realized by the CPU 4201 executing the transaction information output program stored in the ROM 4202.
ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、計量装置４３０が記憶する言語関連テーブル４４２０（図４Ｂ参照）と同等のテーブル（以下「ＰＯＳ端末４２０の言語関連テーブル」という。）を記憶する。ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、計量装置４３０が記憶する対応言語テーブル４４３０（図６５Ｃ参照）と同等のテーブル（以下、「ＰＯＳ端末４２０の対応言語テーブル」という。）を記憶する。 The POS terminal 420 stores a table equivalent to the language-related table 4420 (see FIG. 4B) stored in the weighing device 430 (hereinafter referred to as “language-related table of the POS terminal 420”). The POS terminal 420 stores a table equivalent to the corresponding language table 4430 (see FIG. 65C) stored in the weighing device 430 (hereinafter, referred to as “corresponding language table of the POS terminal 420”).
通信部４２１５は、端末装置の一例である携帯端末４５０と通信を行う。通信部４２１５は、携帯端末４５０と、クラウドサーバＳｖを介して間接的に通信を行う。ただし、通信部４２１５は、携帯端末４５０と直接的に通信を行ってもよい。 The communication unit 4215 communicates with the mobile terminal 450, which is an example of the terminal device. The communication unit 4215 indirectly communicates with the mobile terminal 450 via the cloud server Sv. However, the communication unit 4215 may directly communicate with the mobile terminal 450.
取得部は、通信部４２１５の通信によって、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報を取得する。一の言語情報は、精算部による精算が開始される際に、クラウドサーバＳｖから登録情報とともに送信される。登録情報は、クラウドサーバＳｖに登録されるカート情報に含まれる情報である。取得部は、通信部４２１５によって受信された一の言語情報を取得する。 The acquisition unit acquires one language information set in the mobile terminal 450 by the communication of the communication unit 4215. One language information is transmitted from the cloud server Sv together with the registration information when the settlement by the settlement unit is started. The registration information is information included in the cart information registered in the cloud server Sv. The acquisition unit acquires one language information received by the communication unit 4215.
出力制御部は、取得部によって取得された一の言語情報に応じた言語で、取引に関する情報を出力する。具体的には、出力制御部は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が日本語を示す場合、日本語で取引に関する情報を出力する。一方で、出力制御部は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が日本語以外の他の言語（外国語）を示す場合、他の言語で取引に関する情報を出力する。出力制御部は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が日本語以外の他の言語を示す場合、日本語と他の言語とを併記して取引に関する情報を出力してもよい。 The output control unit outputs information related to transactions in a language corresponding to one language information acquired by the acquisition unit. Specifically, when the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 indicates Japanese, the output control unit outputs information related to transactions in Japanese. On the other hand, when the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 indicates a language other than Japanese (foreign language), the output control unit outputs information related to transactions in the other language. When the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 indicates a language other than Japanese, the output control unit may output information on transactions by writing both Japanese and other languages.
取引に関する情報は、精算部による精算に用いられる登録情報を含む。出力制御部による取引に関する情報の出力態様は、音声や表示の出力態様である。 Information about the transaction includes registration information used for settlement by the settlement department. The output mode of the information related to the transaction by the output control unit is the output mode of voice or display.
出力制御部は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語で登録情報を出力する。具体的には、出力制御部は、ＰＯＳ端末４２０の言語関連テーブルに記憶されている言語情報を用いて、登録情報を出力する。携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語を出力できない場合がある。具体的には、ＰＯＳ端末４２０の言語関連テーブルに、当該一の言語情報と同一の言語情報が記憶されていない場合がある。この場合、出力制御部は、当該一の言語情報に対応する他の言語で、登録情報を出力する。具体的には、出力制御部は、ＰＯＳ端末４２０の対応言語テーブルを参照し、他の言語としての対応言語で、登録情報を出力する。 The output control unit outputs the registration information in the same language as the language indicated by one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. Specifically, the output control unit outputs the registration information using the language information stored in the language-related table of the POS terminal 420. It may not be possible to output the same language as the language indicated by one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. Specifically, the language-related table of the POS terminal 420 may not store the same language information as the one language information. In this case, the output control unit outputs the registration information in another language corresponding to the one language information. Specifically, the output control unit refers to the corresponding language table of the POS terminal 420 and outputs the registration information in the corresponding language as another language.
ＰＯＳ端末４２０の出力制御部が出力する取引に関する情報は、計量装置４３０によって計量された商品の重量の情報を含むようにしてもよい。この場合、出力制御部は、商品の重量の情報を、一の言語情報に応じた重量の単位に換算して出力する。具体的には、出力制御部は、計量装置４３０によって計量された重量の単位を、一の言語情報に応じた重量さの単位（例えば、オンス）に換算して、重量の情報を出力する。より具体的には、出力制御部は、ＰＯＳ端末４２０の言語関連テーブルの「重量変換値」を参照して、計量によって得られた重量の情報を、言語情報に応じた単位に換算して出力する。例えば、出力制 The information regarding the transaction output by the output control unit of the POS terminal 420 may include information on the weight of the goods weighed by the weighing device 430. In this case, the output control unit converts the product weight information into a weight unit corresponding to one linguistic information and outputs the product. Specifically, the output control unit converts the unit of weight weighed by the weighing device 430 into a unit of weight (for example, ounce) corresponding to one linguistic information, and outputs the weight information. More specifically, the output control unit refers to the "weight conversion value" in the language-related table of the POS terminal 420, converts the weight information obtained by weighing into units corresponding to the language information, and outputs the weight information. do. For example, output system
御部は、換算前の重量の単位（例えば、ｋｇ）と、換算した重量の単位（例えば、オンス）とを併記して客側ディスプレイ４２０５に表示させる。 The unit of weight before conversion (for example, kg) and the unit of converted weight (for example, ounce) are written together and displayed on the customer side display 4205.
ＰＯＳ端末４２０の出力制御部が出力する取引に関する情報は、商品の買上金額の情報を含むようにしてもよい。この場合、買上金額の通信の単位は、例えば、日本円である。出力制御部は、買上金額の情報を、一の言語情報に応じた通貨（例えば、ドル）に換算して出力する。具体的には、出力制御部は、ＰＯＳ端末４２０の言語関連テーブルの「金額変換値」を参照して、買上金額を言語情報に応じた通貨に換算して買上金額の情報を出力する。例えば、出力制御部は、換算前の通過の単位（例えば、日本円）と、換算した通貨の単位（例えば、ドル）とを併記して客側ディスプレイ４２０５に表示させる。 The information regarding the transaction output by the output control unit of the POS terminal 420 may include information on the purchase price of the product. In this case, the communication unit of the purchase amount is, for example, Japanese yen. The output control unit converts the purchase price information into a currency (for example, dollar) corresponding to one language information and outputs it. Specifically, the output control unit refers to the "amount conversion value" in the language-related table of the POS terminal 420, converts the purchase amount into a currency corresponding to the language information, and outputs the purchase amount information. For example, the output control unit displays the unit of passage before conversion (for example, Japanese yen) and the unit of converted currency (for example, dollar) together on the customer side display 4205.
印刷部４２１３は、レシート等の各種媒体を発行してもよい。この場合、出力制御部は、一の言語情報に応じた言語で、印刷部４２１３に各種媒体を発行させる。具体的には、印刷部４２１３は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語で各種媒体を発行する。印刷部４２１３は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語で各種媒体を出力できない場合は、対応言語で各種媒体を発行する。印刷部４２１３は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が日本語を示す場合、日本語のみで各種媒体を発行する。一方で、印刷部４２１３は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が日本語以外の他の言語を示す場合、日本語に他の言語を併記した各種媒体を発行する。 The printing unit 4213 may issue various media such as receipts. In this case, the output control unit causes the printing unit 4213 to issue various media in a language corresponding to one language information. Specifically, the printing unit 4213 issues various media in the same language as the language indicated by one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. When the printing unit 4213 cannot output various media in the same language as the language indicated by one language information set in the mobile terminal 450, the printing unit 4213 issues various media in the corresponding language. When the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 indicates Japanese, the printing unit 4213 issues various media only in Japanese. On the other hand, when the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 indicates a language other than Japanese, the printing unit 4213 issues various media in which the other language is written together with Japanese.
出力制御部は、所定のタイミングで、外国語の出力を終了させる。所定のタイミングは、例えば、お釣りが払い出されたタイミング、レシートが発行されたタイミング、お釣りやレシートが取り除かれたタイミングなどである。具体的には、お釣りが払い出されたタイミングは、例えば、釣銭機４２０９によって釣り銭が排出口から排出されたタイミングである。レシートが発行されたタイミングは、印刷部４２１３によってレシートが出力されたタイミングである。お釣りが取り除かれたタイミングは、釣銭機４２０９が備えるセンサによってお釣りが取り除かれたことが検出されたタイミングである。レシートが取り除かれたタイミングは、顧客によるレシートの取り出しを検出するセンサによって、当該取り出しが検出されたタイミングである。出力制御部は、上述した各タイミングから所定時間が経過したタイミングで、外国語の出力を終了させるようにしてもよい。 The output control unit ends the output of the foreign language at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing is, for example, the timing when the change is paid out, the timing when the receipt is issued, the timing when the change or the receipt is removed, and the like. Specifically, the timing at which the change is paid out is, for example, the timing at which the change is discharged from the discharge port by the change machine 4209. The timing at which the receipt is issued is the timing at which the receipt is output by the printing unit 4213. The timing at which the change is removed is the timing at which the sensor included in the change machine 4209 detects that the change has been removed. The timing at which the receipt is removed is the timing at which the removal is detected by the sensor that detects the removal of the receipt by the customer. The output control unit may end the output of the foreign language at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from each of the above-mentioned timings.
図６７Ａ−６７Ｃは、クラウドサーバＳｖが管理する、携帯端末４５０ごとの各種情報の一例を示す説明図である。クラウドサーバＳｖは、Ａ顧客情報と、Ｂ店舗情報と、Ｃカート情報とを含む各種情報を記憶する。クラウドサーバＳｖは、自装置内の記憶部に各種情報を記憶することに代えて又は加えて、クラウドサーバＳｖがアクセス可能なファイルサーバ等の他の装置に、各種情報の一部または全部を記憶してもよい。 FIGS. 67A-67C are explanatory views showing an example of various information for each mobile terminal 450 managed by the cloud server Sv. The cloud server Sv stores various information including A customer information, B store information, and C cart information. The cloud server Sv stores a part or all of various information in another device such as a file server that the cloud server Sv can access, instead of or in addition to storing various information in the storage unit in the own device. You may.
図６７Ａは、顧客情報の一例を示す。顧客情報は、個々の顧客を管理するための情報である。顧客情報は、店舗ごとや系列店ごとの会員情報であってもよい。図６７Ａに示すように、顧客情報は、顧客識別情報と、顧客名と、顧客登録日と、顧客ランクと、ポイント数とを含む。 FIG. 67A shows an example of customer information. Customer information is information for managing individual customers. The customer information may be member information for each store or affiliated store. As shown in FIG. 67A, the customer information includes customer identification information, a customer name, a customer registration date, a customer rank, and a number of points.
顧客識別情報は、顧客を一意に識別する識別情報である。顧客識別情報は、例えば、携帯端末４５０に本アプリがインストールされる際に、インストールされたアプリごとに固有に割り当てられるアプリケーション識別情報（以下「アプリ識別情報」という）であってもよい。アプリ識別情報は、例えば、シーケンシャルに付される番号であってよい。あるいは、アプリ識別情報は、本アプリがインストールされた携帯端末４５０に固有に割り当てられた端末識別情報であってもよい。この端末識別情報は、例えば、携帯端末４５０のユーザである顧客に割り当てられた電話番号や、ＭＡＣ（Ｍｅｄｉａ　Ａｃｃｅｓｓ　Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ）アドレス等のように携帯端末４５０のハードウェアに固有となるように付されるハードウェア識別情報であってよい。 The customer identification information is identification information that uniquely identifies a customer. The customer identification information may be, for example, application identification information (hereinafter referred to as "application identification information") uniquely assigned to each installed application when the application is installed on the mobile terminal 450. The application identification information may be, for example, a number assigned sequentially. Alternatively, the application identification information may be terminal identification information uniquely assigned to the mobile terminal 450 on which the application is installed. This terminal identification information is attached so as to be unique to the hardware of the mobile terminal 450, such as a telephone number assigned to a customer who is a user of the mobile terminal 450, a MAC (Media Access Control) address, and the like. It may be hardware identification information.
顧客名は、顧客の氏名やニックネームなどである。 The customer name is a customer's name, nickname, or the like.
顧客登録日は、クラウドサーバＳｖに顧客情報を新規に登録した日時である。 The customer registration date is the date and time when the customer information is newly registered in the cloud server Sv.
顧客ランクは、顧客の購入実績に応じたランクである。 The customer rank is a rank according to the purchase record of the customer.
ポイント数は、本アプリを使用して買い物を行ったことによって顧客に付与されるポイント数である。ポイント数には、店舗ごとのポイント数を含めてもよい。 The number of points is the number of points given to the customer by shopping using this application. The number of points may include the number of points for each store.
顧客識別情報、顧客名、及び顧客登録日は、新規の顧客の顧客情報が生成される際に生成される。具体的には、顧客識別情報は、クラウドサーバＳｖや、アプリケーション全般を提供する所定のサーバから、携帯端末４５０に本アプリがダウンロードされる際に生成される。顧客名、例えば、顧客を新規に登録する際に、携帯端末４５０の登録フォーム（入力フォーム）の氏名欄に入力された情報に基づいて生成される。顧客登録日は、顧客を新規に登録の際の現在日時に基づいて生成される。 The customer identification information, customer name, and customer registration date are generated when the customer information of a new customer is generated. Specifically, the customer identification information is generated when the application is downloaded to the mobile terminal 450 from the cloud server Sv or a predetermined server that provides the entire application. It is generated based on the customer name, for example, the information entered in the name field of the registration form (input form) of the mobile terminal 450 when a new customer is registered. The customer registration date is generated based on the current date and time when the customer is newly registered.
図６７Ｂは、店舗情報の一例を示す。店舗情報は、各店舗を管理するための情報である。図６７Ｂに示すように、店舗情報は、店舗識別情報と、店舗名と、店舗特定情報１（２次元コードの情報）と、店舗特定情報２（位置情報）とを含む。 FIG. 67B shows an example of store information. The store information is information for managing each store. As shown in FIG. 67B, the store information includes the store identification information, the store name, the store identification information 1 (two-dimensional code information), and the store identification information 2 (location information).
店舗識別情報は、店（屋号）または企業のコードと、支店のコードとを含む。 The store identification information includes a store (store name) or company code and a branch office code.
店舗名は、店舗の名称であり、例えば、店名（屋号）または企業名と、支店名とから構成される。 The store name is the name of the store, and is composed of, for example, a store name (store name) or a company name and a branch name.
店舗特定情報１，２は、取引する店舗（商品の売買が行われる店舗）を特定するための情報である。店舗特定情報１は、例えば、２次元コードの情報である。店舗特定情報２は、店舗の所在地を示す位置情報（ＧＰＳ情報）である。図６７Ｂに示した例では、店舗識別情報や店舗特定情報１、２が記憶されているが、いずれの情報も店舗を一意に特定できる情報であることから、少なくともいずれか一つの情報が記憶されていればよい。 The store identification information 1 and 2 are information for specifying a store to be traded (a store where products are bought and sold). The store identification information 1 is, for example, two-dimensional code information. The store identification information 2 is location information (GPS information) indicating the location of the store. In the example shown in FIG. 67B, the store identification information and the store identification information 1 and 2 are stored, but since each of the information is information that can uniquely identify the store, at least one of the information is stored. I just need to be there.
図６７Ｃは、カート情報の一例を示す。カート情報は、店舗において顧客が登録した商品に関する情報である。図６７Ｃに示すように、カート情報は、カート識別情報と、取引開始日時と、取引終了日時と、顧客識別情報と、言語情報と、登録商品情報とを含む。 FIG. 67C shows an example of cart information. The cart information is information about a product registered by a customer at a store. As shown in FIG. 67C, the cart information includes cart identification information, transaction start date and time, transaction end date and time, customer identification information, language information, and registered product information.
カート識別情報は、カート情報を識別するための情報である。具体的には、カート識別情報は、店舗識別情報と、日付と、シリアル番号（例えば、各店舗の日付別のシリアル番号）とを含む。 The cart identification information is information for identifying the cart information. Specifically, the cart identification information includes a store identification information, a date, and a serial number (for example, a serial number for each store date).
取引開始日時は、取引を開始した日時であり、例えば、当該カート情報の生成日時である。取引開始日時は、１品目の商品の登録日時としてもよく、具体的には、図６７Ｃに示す登録商品情報（登録商品１）を記憶した日時としてもよい。取引開始日時に代えて又は加えて、商品ごとの登録日時を別途記憶するようにしてもよい。 The transaction start date and time is the date and time when the transaction is started, for example, the generation date and time of the cart information. The transaction start date and time may be the registration date and time of one item of product, and specifically, the date and time when the registered product information (registered product 1) shown in FIG. 67C is stored. Instead of or in addition to the transaction start date and time, the registration date and time for each product may be stored separately.
取引終了日時は、取引を終了した日時であり、具体的には、精算した日時である。例えば、取引終了日時は、精算を終了した日時であるが、精算を開始した日時であってもよい。 The transaction end date and time is the date and time when the transaction was completed, and specifically, the date and time when the transaction was settled. For example, the transaction end date and time is the date and time when the settlement was completed, but it may be the date and time when the settlement was started.
顧客識別情報は、当該取引を行う顧客を一意に識別する情報である。 The customer identification information is information that uniquely identifies the customer who conducts the transaction.
言語情報は、顧客が日常的に使用する言語を示す情報であり、例えば、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語を示す情報である。言語情報は、取引の開始時に携帯端末４５０から送信されることによりクラウドサーバＳｖが取得する。 The language information is information indicating a language that a customer uses on a daily basis, and is, for example, information indicating a language set in the mobile terminal 450. The language information is acquired by the cloud server Sv by being transmitted from the mobile terminal 450 at the start of the transaction.
登録商品情報（計）は、商品が登録されるごとに更新される累計情報である。登録商品情報（計）は、品数（商品数）、概算小計金額、小計金額等を含む。 Registered product information (total) is cumulative information that is updated each time a product is registered. The registered product information (total) includes the number of products (number of products), the estimated subtotal amount, the subtotal amount, and the like.
登録商品情報（登録商品Ｎ：Ｎは整数）は、Ｎ品目に登録された商品を示す。登録商品情報Ｎは、商品コード、品名、価格、当該商品の登録日時などを含む。具体的には、登録商品情報（登録商品１）は、１品目の商品を示す。登録商品情報（登録商品２）は、２品目の商品を示す。図６７Ｃに示す例では、３品目以降の登録商品情報については、図示を省略している。 The registered product information (registered product N: N is an integer) indicates the product registered in the N item. The registered product information N includes a product code, a product name, a price, a registration date and time of the product, and the like. Specifically, the registered product information (registered product 1) indicates one product. The registered product information (registered product 2) indicates two products. In the example shown in FIG. 67C, the illustration of the registered product information of three or more items is omitted.
次に、保留商品を示す保留商品情報を説明する。保留商品は、店員の確認を要する商品である。例えば、保留商品は、未スキャン商品、ＮＯＮファイル商品、年齢確認が必要な商品、防犯タグの除去が必要な商品、医薬品などの種別がある。 Next, the reserved product information indicating the reserved product will be described. A pending product is a product that requires confirmation from a clerk. For example, there are types of reserved products such as unscanned products, NON file products, products that require age confirmation, products that require removal of security tags, and pharmaceutical products.
未スキャン商品は、商品コードのスキャンに失敗したこと（スキャナによる読み取りがＮＧとなったこと）によって登録できなかった保留商品である。一例を挙げると、商品のパッケージにシワが存在する場合や、バーコードの印字にカスレや汚れが生じている場合に、タイムアウトによりバーコードの認識に至らないことがある。 The unscanned product is a reserved product that could not be registered because the scanning of the product code failed (scanning by the scanner became NG). For example, if there are wrinkles on the product package, or if the barcode is printed with blur or stains, the barcode may not be recognized due to a timeout.
ここで、タイムアウトによりバーコードの認識に至らないことについて詳述する。携帯端末４５０は、各種センサ（例えば、ジャイロセンサ、加速度センサ、距離センサなど）を備え、各種センサの検出結果やカメラ４５０７の撮像結果を用いて、バーコードの読取中であることを判別可能である。具体的には、携帯端末４５０は、各種センサの検出結果を用いて、携帯端末４５０が傾けられている状況であり、かつ、当該携帯端末４５０から一定距離だけ離れた位置に商品が存在している状況を、バーコードの読取中であるとして判別可能である。そして、携帯端末４５０は、バーコードの読取中であると判別してから、所定時間内にバーコードを読み取れなかった場合に、タイムアウトとして、未スキャン商品として特定する。 Here, it will be described in detail that the barcode is not recognized due to the timeout. The mobile terminal 450 is provided with various sensors (for example, a gyro sensor, an acceleration sensor, a distance sensor, etc.), and can determine that a barcode is being read by using the detection results of the various sensors and the imaging results of the camera 4507. be. Specifically, the mobile terminal 450 is in a situation where the mobile terminal 450 is tilted using the detection results of various sensors, and the product exists at a position separated from the mobile terminal 450 by a certain distance. It is possible to determine the situation as if the barcode is being read. Then, the mobile terminal 450 identifies the unscanned product as a timeout when the barcode cannot be read within a predetermined time after determining that the barcode is being read.
未スキャン商品は、例えば、商品のバーコードを読んだフリして、カゴへ投入された商品を含む。言い換えれば、読取ＮＧの保留商品は、不正操作が行われた可能性のある商品であり、不正操作が行われたか否かについて店員の確認を要する商品を含む。不正操作は、例えば、バーコードのスキャンの有無を示すスキャン結果や、買い物かごの中を撮像するカメラの撮像結果や、買い物かごの中の商品の総重量を検出する検出結果などを用いて検出される。 The unscanned product includes, for example, a product that has been put into a basket by pretending to read the barcode of the product. In other words, the reserved product of reading NG is a product that may have been tampered with, and includes a product that requires confirmation by a clerk as to whether or not the tampering has been performed. Illegal operations are detected using, for example, scan results that indicate the presence or absence of barcode scanning, camera imaging results that capture the inside of a shopping cart, and detection results that detect the total weight of products in a shopping cart. Will be done.
ＮＯＮファイル商品は、商品コードのスキャンに成功し（未スキャン商品とはならず）、商品マスタに該商品コードの商品を問い合わせたものの、商品の特定に失敗した（商品の問い合わせがＮＧとなった）ことによって登録できなかった商品である。 The NON file product succeeded in scanning the product code (it does not become an unscanned product), and although the product master was inquired about the product with the product code, the product identification failed (the product inquiry was NG). ) This is a product that could not be registered.
年齢確認が必要な商品は、例えば、酒類、タバコなど未成年者が購入できない商品である。 Products that require age confirmation are, for example, alcoholic beverages, tobacco, and other products that minors cannot purchase.
防犯タグの除去が必要な商品は、例えば、一定金額以上の商品など、防犯タグが取り付けられている商品である。 A product for which the security tag needs to be removed is a product to which the security tag is attached, for example, a product having a certain amount of money or more.
医薬品は、例えば、薬剤師の説明を要する商品である。 A drug is, for example, a product that requires explanation by a pharmacist.
図６７Ｃに示すように、保留商品情報（計）は、保留商品（未スキャン商品、ＮＯＮファイル商品）の品数（商品数）を含む。図示では、年齢確認が必要な商品、防犯タグの除去が必要な商品、医薬品を省略している。 As shown in FIG. 67C, the reserved product information (total) includes the number of products (number of products) of the reserved products (unscanned products, NON file products). In the figure, products that require age confirmation, products that require the removal of security tags, and medicines are omitted.
保留商品情報（保留商品Ｎ：Ｎは整数）は、Ｎ品目の保留商品の情報であり、Ｎ品目の保留商品の保留商品種別を含む。保留商品種別は、保留商品の種別を示す情報である。本例では、保留商品種別の「１」は未スキャン商品を示し、保留商品種別の「２」はＮＯＮファイル商品を示す。保留商品情報は、当該商品の登録日時を含む。 The reserved product information (held product N: N is an integer) is information on the reserved product of N items, and includes the reserved product type of the reserved product of N items. The reserved product type is information indicating the type of the reserved product. In this example, the reserved product type "1" indicates an unscanned product, and the reserved product type "2" indicates a NON file product. The reserved product information includes the registration date and time of the product.
未スキャン商品の保留商品情報は、保留商品種別「１」に加え、当該商品の画像データ（携帯端末４５０がバーコードの読み取り行った際に撮像した画像データ）を含む。例えば、保留商品情報（３）は、保留商品種別「１（未スキャン商品）」、画像データを含む。 The reserved product information of the unscanned product includes the image data of the product (image data captured when the mobile terminal 450 reads the barcode) in addition to the reserved product type "1". For example, the reserved product information (3) includes the reserved product type "1 (unscanned product)" and image data.
ＮＯＮファイル商品の保留商品情報は、保留商品種別「２（ＮＯＮファイル商品）」に加え、携帯端末４５０が読み取った商品コードを含む。例えば、保留商品情報（１）は、保留商品種別「２（ＮＯＮファイル商品）」に加え、商品コードを含んでいる。 The reserved product information of the NON file product includes the product code read by the mobile terminal 450 in addition to the reserved product type "2 (NON file product)". For example, the reserved product information (1) includes a product code in addition to the reserved product type "2 (NON file product)".
（販売システム１における商品の登録及び精算における処理の一例） (Example of processing in product registration and settlement in sales system 1)
図６８は、販売システム１における商品の登録及び精算における処理の流れを示すシーケンス図である。図６８では、ある顧客が、ある店舗に来店して、自身の携帯端末４５０を用いて購入対象の商品を登録し、ＰＯＳ端末４２０で当該商品の精算を完了する際の流れを説明する。 FIG. 68 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow in product registration and settlement in the sales system 1. FIG. 68 describes a flow when a customer visits a store, registers a product to be purchased using his / her mobile terminal 450, and completes the settlement of the product on the POS terminal 420.
ステップＳ６０１：まず、携帯端末４５０は、店舗を特定する情報（店舗特定情報）を取得する。ここで、店舗特定情報の取得態様の一例を説明する。例えば、店舗の入口付近には、店舗特定情報（店舗特定情報１）を示す２次元コードが表示されている。２次元コードは、所定の表示装置に表示出力されていてもよいし、媒体への印刷によって表示出力されていてもよい。携帯端末４５０は、来店した顧客の操作に応じて本アプリが起動することにより、カメラ４５０７を起動させる。そして、カメラ４５０７は、顧客の操作に応じて、当該２次元コードをスキャンする。これにより、携帯端末４５０は、店舗特定情報を取得する。２次元コードには、店舗を識別するための店舗識別情報が含まれていてもよい。 Step S601: First, the mobile terminal 450 acquires information that identifies the store (store identification information). Here, an example of the acquisition mode of the store specific information will be described. For example, a two-dimensional code indicating store identification information (store identification information 1) is displayed near the entrance of the store. The two-dimensional code may be displayed and output on a predetermined display device, or may be displayed and output by printing on a medium. The mobile terminal 450 activates the camera 4507 by activating this application in response to an operation of a customer who visits the store. Then, the camera 4507 scans the two-dimensional code according to the operation of the customer. As a result, the mobile terminal 450 acquires the store specific information. The two-dimensional code may include store identification information for identifying the store.
店舗特定情報の取得態様の他の一例としては、位置情報の取得が挙げられる。例えば、携帯端末４５０は、来店した顧客の操作に応じて、位置情報（ＧＰＳ情報）を取得する。この位置情報は、店舗特定情報２との比較に用いられる情報であり、店舗特定情報１に代わる情報である。携帯端末４５０は、来店した顧客の操作に応じて本アプリが起動することにより、位置情報を取得してクラウドサーバＳｖに接続し、初期画面としてクラウドサーバＳｖに接続中である旨を報知する画面を表示するようにしてもよい。 Another example of the acquisition mode of store specific information is the acquisition of location information. For example, the mobile terminal 450 acquires location information (GPS information) according to the operation of a customer who visits the store. This location information is information used for comparison with the store identification information 2, and is information that replaces the store identification information 1. The mobile terminal 450 is a screen that acquires location information and connects to the cloud server Sv by activating this application in response to an operation of a customer who visits the store, and notifies that the user is connecting to the cloud server Sv as an initial screen. May be displayed.
店舗特定情報を取得した携帯端末４５０は、クラウドサーバＳｖに取引開始の要求を行う。具体的には、携帯端末は、図６８の送受信データＤ１に示すように、取得した店舗特定情報と、顧客識別情報と、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語を示す言語情報とをクラウドサーバＳｖへ送信する。 The mobile terminal 450 that has acquired the store specific information requests the cloud server Sv to start a transaction. Specifically, as shown in the transmission / reception data D1 of FIG. 68, the mobile terminal uses the acquired store identification information, the customer identification information, and the language information indicating the language set in the mobile terminal 450 on the cloud server Sv. Send to.
ステップＳ６０２：クラウドサーバＳｖは、携帯端末４５０から取引の開始要求として、顧客識別情報と、店舗特定情報と、言語情報とを受信すると、当該取引のカート情報を生成する。具体的には、クラウドサーバＳｖは、図６７Ｃに示すように、カート識別情報と、取引開始日時と、顧客識別情報と、言語情報とを含むカート情報を生成する。クラウドサーバＳｖは、携帯端末４５０から取引の開始要求として店舗特定情報を受信すると、店舗情報（図６７Ｂ参照）を参照し、店舗識別情報を特定する。クラウドサーバＳｖは、携帯端末４５０から位置情報を受信した場合は、店舗情報の店舗特定情報２を参照して、位置情報に対応する店舗識別情報を特定する。２次元コードに店舗識別情報を含ませるようにした場合には、クラウドサーバＳｖは、携帯端末４５０から受信した店舗識別情報を取得することも可能である。 Step S602: When the cloud server Sv receives the customer identification information, the store identification information, and the language information as a transaction start request from the mobile terminal 450, the cloud server Sv generates the cart information of the transaction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67C, the cloud server Sv generates cart information including cart identification information, transaction start date and time, customer identification information, and language information. When the cloud server Sv receives the store identification information as a transaction start request from the mobile terminal 450, the cloud server Sv refers to the store information (see FIG. 67B) and identifies the store identification information. When the cloud server Sv receives the location information from the mobile terminal 450, the cloud server Sv refers to the store identification information 2 of the store information and identifies the store identification information corresponding to the location information. When the store identification information is included in the two-dimensional code, the cloud server Sv can also acquire the store identification information received from the mobile terminal 450.
クラウドサーバＳｖは、携帯端末４５０から取引の開始要求があると、現在日付を取得し、シリアル番号を発行（採番）する。さらに、クラウドサーバＳｖは、取得した店舗識別情報と、取得した現在日付と、発行したシリアル番号とを結合させて、カート識別情報として記憶する。クラウドサーバＳｖは、携帯端末４５０から取引の開始要求を受信すると、現在日時を、カート情報に取引開始日時（生成日時）を記憶させる。クラウドサーバＳｖは、携帯端末４５０から顧客識別情報を受信すると、受信した顧客識別情報をカート情報に記憶させる。クラウドサーバＳｖは、携帯端末４５０から取引の開始要求として言語情報を受信すると、受信した言語情報をカート情報に記憶させる。 When the mobile terminal 450 requests the start of a transaction, the cloud server Sv acquires the current date and issues (numbers) a serial number. Further, the cloud server Sv combines the acquired store identification information, the acquired current date, and the issued serial number, and stores the acquired store identification information as cart identification information. When the cloud server Sv receives the transaction start request from the mobile terminal 450, the cloud server Sv stores the current date and time and the transaction start date and time (generation date and time) in the cart information. When the cloud server Sv receives the customer identification information from the mobile terminal 450, the cloud server Sv stores the received customer identification information in the cart information. When the cloud server Sv receives the language information as a transaction start request from the mobile terminal 450, the cloud server Sv stores the received language information in the cart information.
ステップＳ６０３：クラウドサーバＳｖは、当該取引のカート情報を生成すると、初期画面である商品登録画面の画面情報（商品登録初期画面情報）を生成し、携帯端末４５０へ送信する。クラウドサーバＳｖは、商品登録初期画面情報とともに、カート識別情報を携帯端末４５０へ送信する（図６８の送受信データＤ２）。送信する商品登録初期画面情報は、言語情報に応じた画面情報としてもよい。 Step S603: When the cloud server Sv generates the cart information of the transaction, it generates the screen information (product registration initial screen information) of the product registration screen, which is the initial screen, and transmits it to the mobile terminal 450. The cloud server Sv transmits the cart identification information to the mobile terminal 450 together with the product registration initial screen information (transmission / reception data D2 in FIG. 68). The product registration initial screen information to be transmitted may be screen information according to the language information.
ステップＳ６０４：携帯端末４５０は、クラウドサーバＳｖからカート識別情報及び商品登録初期画面情報を受信すると、カート識別情報を記憶するとともに、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語で商品登録画面をディスプレイ４５０９に表示する。 Step S604: When the mobile terminal 450 receives the cart identification information and the product registration initial screen information from the cloud server Sv, the mobile terminal 450 stores the cart identification information and displays the product registration screen on the display 4509 in the language set in the mobile terminal 450. indicate.
ステップＳ６０５：携帯端末４５０は、顧客の操作に応じて、商品（商品に付されたバーコード）をスキャンする。商品をスキャンすると、携帯端末４５０は、スキャンによって得られた商品コードを、カート識別情報とともにクラウドサーバＳｖへ送信する（図６８の送受信データＤ３参照）。読み取った商品コードが示す商品が、例えば、未スキャン商品等の保留商品である場合には、送受信データＤ３として、カート識別情報と、保留商品を示す情報とが送信される。 Step S605: The mobile terminal 450 scans the product (bar code attached to the product) according to the operation of the customer. When the product is scanned, the mobile terminal 450 transmits the product code obtained by the scan to the cloud server Sv together with the cart identification information (see transmission / reception data D3 in FIG. 68). When the product indicated by the read product code is a reserved product such as an unscanned product, cart identification information and information indicating the reserved product are transmitted as transmission / reception data D3.
ステップＳ６０６：クラウドサーバＳｖは、携帯端末４５０から商品コードとカート識別情報とを受信すると、受信したカート識別情報が含まれるカート情報を特定する。 Step S606: When the cloud server Sv receives the product code and the cart identification information from the mobile terminal 450, the cloud server Sv identifies the cart information including the received cart identification information.
ステップＳ６０７：クラウドサーバＳｖは、特定したカート情報に含まれる登録商品情報を更新する。具体的には、クラウドサーバＳｖは、Ｎ品目の商品コードを受信した場合には、当該商品コードが示す登録商品情報（登録商品Ｎ）を記憶する。より具体的には、クラウドサーバＳｖは、商品コードと、品名と、価格とを対応付けて記憶する。クラウドサーバＳｖは、特定したカート情報のうち、登録商品情報の累計情報（累計品数、小計金額など）を更新する。 Step S607: The cloud server Sv updates the registered product information included in the specified cart information. Specifically, when the cloud server Sv receives the product code of N items, the cloud server Sv stores the registered product information (registered product N) indicated by the product code. More specifically, the cloud server Sv stores the product code, the product name, and the price in association with each other. The cloud server Sv updates the cumulative information (cumulative number of products, subtotal amount, etc.) of the registered product information among the specified cart information.
商品に割引などがある場合は、ステップＳ６０７において、割引額を算出して、登録商品情報の価格や累計情報の小計金額を算出してもよい。商品毎に税率が異なる場合は、ステップＳ６０７において、各商品の税率を勘案して、登録商品情報の価格や累計情報の小計金額を算出してもよい。 If there is a discount on the product, the discount amount may be calculated in step S607 to calculate the price of the registered product information or the subtotal amount of the cumulative information. If the tax rate is different for each product, in step S607, the price of the registered product information or the subtotal amount of the cumulative information may be calculated in consideration of the tax rate of each product.
ステップＳ６０８：クラウドサーバＳｖは、カート情報の登録商品情報を更新すると、登録した商品が追加される更新画面を示す画面情報（商品登録更新画面情報）を生成し、携帯端末４５０へ送信する。このとき、クラウドサーバＳｖは、商品登録更新画面情報とともに、カート識別情報も携帯端末４５０へ送信する（図６８の送受信データＤ４）。 Step S608: When the registered product information of the cart information is updated, the cloud server Sv generates screen information (product registration update screen information) indicating an update screen to which the registered product is added, and transmits the screen information (product registration update screen information) to the mobile terminal 450. At this time, the cloud server Sv transmits the cart identification information to the mobile terminal 450 together with the product registration update screen information (transmission / reception data D4 in FIG. 68).
ステップＳ６０９：携帯端末４５０は、クラウドサーバＳｖからカート識別情報及び商品登録更新画面情報を受信すると、登録画面に商品を追加した商品登録更新画面を表示する。図６８では、説明の便宜上、図示を省略しているが、ステップＳ６０５~ステップＳ６０９の処理は、商品に付されたバーコードをスキャンする毎に繰り返し実行される。すなわち、ステップＳ６０５~ステップＳ６０９の処理は、後述するステップＳ６１０の登録完了の指示を受け付けるまでループする。 Step S609: When the mobile terminal 450 receives the cart identification information and the product registration update screen information from the cloud server Sv, the mobile terminal 450 displays the product registration update screen in which the product is added to the registration screen. Although not shown in FIG. 68 for convenience of explanation, the processes of steps S605 to S609 are repeatedly executed every time the barcode attached to the product is scanned. That is, the processes of steps S605 to S609 loop until an instruction to complete registration in step S610, which will be described later, is received.
ステップＳ６１０：携帯端末４５０は、顧客の操作によって登録完了の指示を受け付ける。例えば、携帯端末４５０は、ディスプレイ４５０９に表示される登録を完了させるボタン（登録完了ボタン）が押下されることによって、登録完了の指示を受け付ける。 Step S610: The mobile terminal 450 receives an instruction to complete registration by the operation of the customer. For example, the mobile terminal 450 receives an instruction to complete registration by pressing a button (registration completion button) for completing registration displayed on the display 4509.
ステップＳ６１１：携帯端末４５０は、登録完了の指示を受け付けると、精算用コードを生成する。精算用コードには、カート識別情報や、ＰＯＳ端末４２０に精算を行わせるための送信要求情報が含まれる。送信要求情報は、クラウドサーバＳｖに対して、ＰＯＳ端末４２０宛てに登録情報の送信を催促する情報である。登録情報は、精算に必要な情報であり、例えば、登録商品情報のうち、品名、価格、小計金額などを含む。携帯端末４５０は、精算用コードを生成すると、生成した精算用コードをディスプレイ４５０９に表示する。 Step S611: When the mobile terminal 450 receives the instruction to complete the registration, the mobile terminal 450 generates a settlement code. The settlement code includes cart identification information and transmission request information for causing the POS terminal 420 to perform settlement. The transmission request information is information that urges the cloud server Sv to transmit the registration information to the POS terminal 420. The registration information is information necessary for settlement, and includes, for example, a product name, a price, a subtotal amount, and the like among the registered product information. When the mobile terminal 450 generates the settlement code, the mobile terminal 450 displays the generated settlement code on the display 4509.
ステップＳ６１２：商品の登録を完了した顧客は、ＰＯＳ端末４２０の客側スキャナ４２０６に、携帯端末４５０のディスプレイ４５０９に表示されている精算用コードをスキャンさせる。これにより、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、カート識別情報を取得することが可能である。精算用コードをスキャンすることが可能なＰＯＳ端末４２０は、会計専用モードまたはフルセルフモードに制御されているＰＯＳ端末４２０である。 Step S612: The customer who has completed the registration of the product causes the customer-side scanner 4206 of the POS terminal 420 to scan the checkout code displayed on the display 4509 of the mobile terminal 450. As a result, the POS terminal 420 can acquire the cart identification information. The POS terminal 420 capable of scanning the settlement code is the POS terminal 420 controlled in the accounting-only mode or the full self-mode.
ステップＳ６１３：ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、携帯端末４５０のディスプレイ４５０９に表示されている精算用コードを読み取ると、クラウドサーバＳｖに、登録情報や言語情報の送信要求（送信要求情報）を行う。具体的には、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、精算用コードから復元したカート識別情報を含む送信要求をクラウドサーバＳｖへ送信する（図６８の送受信データＤ５）。 Step S613: When the POS terminal 420 reads the settlement code displayed on the display 4509 of the mobile terminal 450, it makes a transmission request (transmission request information) of registration information and language information to the cloud server Sv. Specifically, the POS terminal 420 transmits a transmission request including the cart identification information restored from the settlement code to the cloud server Sv (transmission / reception data D5 in FIG. 68).
ステップＳ６１４：クラウドサーバＳｖは、ＰＯＳ端末４２０からカート識別情報及び送信要求情報を受信すると、受信したカート識別情報を含むカート情報を特定する。 Step S614: When the cloud server Sv receives the cart identification information and the transmission request information from the POS terminal 420, the cloud server Sv identifies the cart information including the received cart identification information.
ステップＳ６１５：クラウドサーバＳｖは、カート情報を特定すると、送受信データＤ６として、カート識別情報、登録情報（登録商品情報や小計金額を示す情報）、及び言語情報を含む各種情報をＰＯＳ端末４２０へ送信する（図６８の送受信データＤ６）。特定したカート情報に保留商品がある場合には、保留商品の情報を含む登録情報がＰＯＳ端末４２０へ送信される。 Step S615: When the cloud server Sv specifies the cart information, the cloud server Sv transmits various information including cart identification information, registration information (information indicating registered product information and subtotal amount), and language information to the POS terminal 420 as transmission / reception data D6. (Transmission / reception data D6 in FIG. 68). If there is a reserved product in the specified cart information, registration information including the information on the reserved product is transmitted to the POS terminal 420.
ステップＳ６１６：ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、クラウドサーバＳｖから登録情報を受信すると、客側ディスプレイ４２０５に、言語情報に応じた所定の言語（例えば、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語と同一の言語）で登録情報を一覧表示する。所定の言語は、言語情報が日本語を示す場合には日本語のみであり、言語情報が日本語でない他の言語を示す場合には、日本語と他の言語との両方の言語である。 Step S616: When the POS terminal 420 receives the registration information from the cloud server Sv, the customer side display 4205 is displayed in a predetermined language according to the language information (for example, the same language as the language set in the mobile terminal 450). List the registration information. The predetermined language is only Japanese when the linguistic information indicates Japanese, and both Japanese and other languages when the linguistic information indicates another language other than Japanese.
一覧表示において、保留商品がある場合には、保留商品を除いた小計金額が表示されてもよいし、小計金額が表示されなくてもよい。保留商品がある場合には、店員の呼び出しが行われる。この場合、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、例えば、監視端末４１１や、店員が所持する端末装置へ、保留商品が存在していることを示す情報や、当該ＰＯＳ端末４２０へ店員を赴かせるための報知情報を送信する。 In the list display, if there are reserved products, the subtotal amount excluding the reserved products may be displayed, or the subtotal amount may not be displayed. If there is a reserved item, a clerk is called. In this case, the POS terminal 420 provides, for example, information indicating that a reserved product exists in the monitoring terminal 411 or a terminal device owned by the clerk, or notification information for sending the clerk to the POS terminal 420. Send.
ステップＳ６１７：ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、精算処理を実行する。精算処理において、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、決済種別の選択を受け付ける。決済種別は、本アプリに予め登録されていてもよい。予め決済種別が登録されている場合には、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、決済種別の選択画面を表示しなくてもよい。決済種別が登録されている場合でも、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、決済種別を選択する画面を表示してもよい。 Step S617: The POS terminal 420 executes the settlement process. In the settlement process, the POS terminal 420 accepts the selection of the payment type. The payment type may be registered in advance in this application. When the payment type is registered in advance, the POS terminal 420 does not have to display the payment type selection screen. Even when the payment type is registered, the POS terminal 420 may display a screen for selecting the payment type.
精算処理において、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、例えば、現金の投入を受け付け、お釣りの払い出しを行い、レシートを発行する。そして、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、精算した内容を示す情報や、カート情報をクラウドサーバＳｖに送信する。そして、クラウドサーバＳｖは、当該カート情報の取引終了日時（精算日時）を記憶する。このようにして、一連の処理が終了する。 In the settlement process, the POS terminal 420 accepts, for example, cash input, pays out change, and issues a receipt. Then, the POS terminal 420 transmits the information indicating the settlement content and the cart information to the cloud server Sv. Then, the cloud server Sv stores the transaction end date and time (settlement date and time) of the cart information. In this way, a series of processes is completed.
上述した処理では、携帯端末４５０で商品をスキャンする度に、送受信データＤ３（カート識別情報と商品コード）をクラウドサーバＳｖへ送信するようにした。ただし、送受信データＤ３の送信は、商品をスキャンする度に行うことに限らない。例えば、携帯端末４５０は、商品をスキャンする度に商品コードを記憶しておき、登録完了の指示を受け付けたタイミングで、カート識別情報ともに、商品コードを一括してクラウドサーバＳｖへ送信するようにしてもよい。このようにすることによって、携帯端末４５０と、クラウドサーバＳｖとの間の通信回数を抑えることができる。 In the above-mentioned process, every time the product is scanned by the mobile terminal 450, the transmission / reception data D3 (cart identification information and product code) is transmitted to the cloud server Sv. However, the transmission / reception data D3 is not limited to being transmitted every time the product is scanned. For example, the mobile terminal 450 stores the product code every time the product is scanned, and when the instruction to complete the registration is received, the product code is collectively transmitted to the cloud server Sv together with the cart identification information. You may. By doing so, the number of communications between the mobile terminal 450 and the cloud server Sv can be suppressed.
（計量対象商品の登録処理の一例） (Example of registration process for products to be weighed)
図６９は、計量対象商品の登録処理の流れを示すシーケンス図である。 FIG. 69 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of registration processing of the goods to be weighed.
ステップＳ８０１：携帯端末４５０は、客の操作に応じて、計量対象商品のバーコードをスキャンする。 Step S801: The mobile terminal 450 scans the barcode of the product to be weighed in response to the operation of the customer.
ステップＳ８０２：携帯端末４５０は、スキャンしたバーコードから特定される計量対象商品を仮登録し、仮登録画面を表示する。 Step S802: The mobile terminal 450 temporarily registers the product to be weighed specified from the scanned barcode, and displays the temporary registration screen.
ステップＳ８０３：計量装置４３０は、いずれの携帯端末４５０とも通信接続されていない待機状態において待機画面を表示する。待機画面には、接続用コードが表示されている。ステップＳ８０４：携帯端末４５０は、計量対象商品を仮登録した後、顧客の操作に応じて計量装置４３０に表示されている接続用コードをスキャンする。接続用コードには、計量装置４３０宛てに言語情報を送信する旨の情報が含まれる。 Step S803: The weighing device 430 displays a standby screen in a standby state in which communication is not connected to any of the mobile terminals 450. The connection code is displayed on the standby screen. Step S804: After temporarily registering the product to be weighed, the mobile terminal 450 scans the connection code displayed on the weighing device 430 according to the operation of the customer. The connection code includes information to the effect that language information is transmitted to the weighing device 430.
ステップＳ８０５：携帯端末４５０は、接続用コードをスキャンすると、計量装置４３０に１対１の通信の接続要求を行う。接続要求には、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語を示す言語情報が含まれる。 Step S805: When the mobile terminal 450 scans the connection code, it makes a one-to-one communication connection request to the weighing device 430. The connection request includes linguistic information indicating the language set in the mobile terminal 450.
ステップＳ８０５において、計量対象商品が仮登録されていない場合には、接続用コードをスキャンしたとしても、携帯端末４５０は、計量装置４３０に接続要求を行わない。これは、一の携帯端末４５０と計量装置４３０との接続時間が長いと、その分、当該携帯端末４５０を携帯する客が計量装置４３０を占有する時間も長くなってしまうことから、当該占有する時間の短縮化を図るためである。 If the product to be weighed is not provisionally registered in step S805, the mobile terminal 450 does not make a connection request to the weighing device 430 even if the connection code is scanned. This is because if the connection time between one mobile terminal 450 and the weighing device 430 is long, the time for the customer carrying the mobile terminal 450 to occupy the weighing device 430 also becomes long. This is to shorten the time.
ステップＳ８０６：計量装置４３０は、携帯端末４５０から接続要求があると、１対１の通信の認証や、仮登録されている商品が計量装置４３０における計量対象の商品であるか等の判定を含むペアリングの判定を行う。 Step S806: When there is a connection request from the mobile terminal 450, the weighing device 430 includes authentication of one-to-one communication, determination of whether the temporarily registered product is a product to be weighed in the weighing device 430, and the like. Judgment of pairing.
ステップＳ８０７：ペアリングの判定においてペアリングに成功すると、計量装置４３０は、携帯端末４５０との１対１の通信を開始する。 Step S807: When the pairing is successful in the determination of pairing, the weighing device 430 starts one-to-one communication with the mobile terminal 450.
ステップＳ８０８：ペアリングに成功すると、携帯端末４５０は、計量装置４３０との１対１の通信を開始する。 Step S808: When the pairing is successful, the mobile terminal 450 starts one-to-one communication with the weighing device 430.
ステップＳ８０９：計量装置４３０は、仮登録されている商品の計量画面を、言語情報に応じた所定の言語（例えば、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語と同一の言語）で表示する。所定の言語は、言語情報が日本語を示す場合には日本語のみであり、言語情報が日本語でない他の言語を示す場合には、日本語と他の言語との両方の言語である。 Step S809: The weighing device 430 displays the tentatively registered product weighing screen in a predetermined language (for example, the same language as the language set in the mobile terminal 450) according to the language information. The predetermined language is only Japanese when the linguistic information indicates Japanese, and both Japanese and other languages when the linguistic information indicates another language other than Japanese.
ステップＳ８１０：計量装置４３０は、客が載台４３２０に置いた商品の計量を行う。 Step S810: The weighing device 430 weighs the goods placed on the platform 4320 by the customer.
ステップＳ８１１：計量装置４３０は、計量を終えると、客の操作を受け付けて、計量結 Step S811: When the weighing device 430 finishes weighing, it accepts the customer's operation and makes a weighing connection.
果を示すラベルを所定の言語（日本語のみ、または、日本語と外国語の併記）で出力する。計量装置４３０は、ラベルを出力する際に、計量結果を携帯端末４５０に送信する。 A label indicating the result is output in a predetermined language (Japanese only or both Japanese and foreign languages). The weighing device 430 transmits the weighing result to the mobile terminal 450 when outputting the label.
ステップＳ８１２：携帯端末４５０は、計量結果を受信すると、計量結果を表示する。計量結果が携帯端末４５０に送信されるタイミングは、ラベルの出力タイミングに限らず、計量装置４３０において計量が完了したタイミングとしてもよい。この場合、携帯端末４５０において計量結果が表示されるタイミングは、当該計量が完了したタイミングとなる。 Step S812: When the mobile terminal 450 receives the measurement result, the mobile terminal 450 displays the measurement result. The timing at which the weighing result is transmitted to the mobile terminal 450 is not limited to the label output timing, and may be the timing at which the weighing device 430 completes the weighing. In this case, the timing at which the weighing result is displayed on the mobile terminal 450 is the timing at which the weighing is completed.
ステップＳ８１３：携帯端末４５０は、登録更新画面を表示し、計量対象商品を本登録する。 Step S813: The mobile terminal 450 displays the registration update screen and main-registers the product to be weighed.
ステップＳ８１４：携帯端末４５０は、計量結果から得られる計量対象商品の商品情報と、カート識別情報とをクラウドサーバＳｖへ送信する。 Step S814: The mobile terminal 450 transmits the product information of the product to be weighed obtained from the weighing result and the cart identification information to the cloud server Sv.
ステップＳ８１５：クラウドサーバＳｖは、携帯端末４５０から商品情報とバスケット識別情報とを受信すると、受信したカート識別情報が含まれるカート情報を特定する。 Step S815: When the cloud server Sv receives the product information and the basket identification information from the mobile terminal 450, the cloud server Sv identifies the cart information including the received cart identification information.
ステップＳ８１６：クラウドサーバＳｖは、特定したカート情報が含まれる登録商品情報を更新する。具体的には、クラウドサーバＳｖは、Ｎ品目の商品情報を受信した場合には、当該商品情報に含まれる商品コードを登録商品情報（登録商品Ｎ）の商品コードとして記憶する。さらに、クラウドサーバＳｖは、商品コードと、品名と、価格とを対応付けて記憶する。クラウドサーバＳｖは、特定したカート情報のうち、登録商品情報の累計情報（累計品数、小計金額など）を更新する。 Step S816: The cloud server Sv updates the registered product information including the specified cart information. Specifically, when the cloud server Sv receives the product information of N items, the cloud server Sv stores the product code included in the product information as the product code of the registered product information (registered product N). Further, the cloud server Sv stores the product code, the product name, and the price in association with each other. The cloud server Sv updates the cumulative information (cumulative number of products, subtotal amount, etc.) of the registered product information among the specified cart information.
図６９では、説明の便宜上、図示を省略しているが、ステップＳ８１０~ステップＳ８１６の処理は、仮登録した計量対象商品の数だけ繰り返し実行される。 Although not shown in FIG. 69 for convenience of explanation, the processes of steps S810 to S816 are repeatedly executed for the number of provisionally registered merchandise to be weighed.
図７０Ａは、携帯端末４５０が行う計量対象商品の登録処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。図７０Ａのフローチャートに示す処理は、携帯端末４５０において、常時（非常に短い時間間隔で定期的に）開始される。 FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing an example of the registration process of the weighing target product performed by the mobile terminal 450. The process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 70A is always started (regularly at very short time intervals) in the mobile terminal 450.
図７０Ａにおいて、携帯端末４５０は、計量対象商品のバーコードをスキャンしたか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９０１）。携帯端末４５０は、計量対象商品のバーコードをスキャンしない場合（ステップＳ９０１：ＮＯ）、ステップＳ９０３に進む。携帯端末４５０は、計量対象商品のバーコードをスキャンした場合（ステップＳ９０１：ＹＥＳ）、計量対象商品を仮登録する（ステップＳ９０２）。仮登録された計量対象商品は、ディスプレイ４５０９に表示される。 In FIG. 70A, the mobile terminal 450 determines whether or not the barcode of the product to be weighed has been scanned (step S901). If the mobile terminal 450 does not scan the barcode of the product to be weighed (step S901: NO), the mobile terminal 450 proceeds to step S903. When the mobile terminal 450 scans the barcode of the product to be weighed (step S901: YES), the mobile terminal 450 temporarily registers the product to be weighed (step S902). The provisionally registered merchandise to be weighed is displayed on the display 4509.
そして、携帯端末４５０は、接続用コードをスキャンしたか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９０３）。接続用コードをスキャンしない場合（ステップＳ９０３：ＮＯ）、携帯端末４５０は、ステップＳ９０９に進む。接続用コードをスキャンした場合（ステップＳ９０３：ＹＥＳ）、携帯端末４５０は、仮登録中の計量対象商品があるか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９０４）。ステップＳ９０４では、計量対象商品が仮登録中の商品としてメモリ４５０４に記憶されているか否かを判断する。 Then, the mobile terminal 450 determines whether or not the connection code has been scanned (step S903). If the connection code is not scanned (step S903: NO), the mobile terminal 450 proceeds to step S909. When the connection code is scanned (step S903: YES), the mobile terminal 450 determines whether or not there is a product to be weighed that is being provisionally registered (step S904). In step S904, it is determined whether or not the product to be weighed is stored in the memory 4504 as a product being provisionally registered.
仮登録中の計量対象商品がない場合（ステップＳ９０４：ＮＯ）、携帯端末４５０は、仮登録を促す旨を報知し（ステップＳ９０５）、一連の処理を終了する。仮登録を促す旨の報知の終了条件は、ユーザから当該報知を終了する操作を受け付けたり、仮登録を行うための操作を受け付けたりすることなどである。 When there is no product to be weighed during the provisional registration (step S904: NO), the mobile terminal 450 notifies that the provisional registration is urged (step S905), and ends a series of processes. The termination condition of the notification to prompt the temporary registration is to accept an operation for terminating the notification from the user, an operation for performing the temporary registration, and the like.
一方、仮登録中の計量対象商品がある場合（ステップＳ９０４：ＹＥＳ）、携帯端末４５０は、１対１の通信を行うための近距離無線通信機能がオンであるか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９０６）。近距離無線通信機能がオフである場合（ステップＳ９０６：ＮＯ）、携帯端末４５０は、機能オン報知を行う（ステップＳ９０７）。機能オン報知の終了条件は、ユーザから当該報知を終了する操作を受け付けたり、近距離無線通信機能をオンにするための操作を受け付けたりすることなどである。 On the other hand, when there is a product to be weighed during provisional registration (step S904: YES), the mobile terminal 450 determines whether or not the short-range wireless communication function for performing one-to-one communication is turned on (step). S906). When the short-range wireless communication function is off (step S906: NO), the mobile terminal 450 performs a function-on notification (step S907). The end condition of the function-on notification is to accept an operation for terminating the notification from the user, an operation for turning on the short-range wireless communication function, and the like.
近距離無線通信機能がオンである場合（ステップＳ９０６：ＹＥＳ）、携帯端末４５０は、計量装置４３０に１対１の通信の接続要求を行う（ステップＳ９０８）。接続要求には、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語を示す言語情報が含まれる。当該接続要求を行うと、携帯端末４５０は、接続中であることを示す画面を表示する。そして、携帯端末４５０は、ペアリングに成功したか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９０９）。ペアリングに成功した場合（ステップＳ９０９：ＹＥＳ）、計量装置４３０との１対１の通信（ペアリング）を開始する（ステップＳ９１０）。携帯端末４５０は、ペアリングを開始すると、仮登録している商品の識別情報を計量装置４３０へ送信する。 When the short-range wireless communication function is turned on (step S906: YES), the mobile terminal 450 makes a one-to-one communication connection request to the weighing device 430 (step S908). The connection request includes linguistic information indicating the language set in the mobile terminal 450. When the connection request is made, the mobile terminal 450 displays a screen indicating that the connection is in progress. Then, the mobile terminal 450 determines whether or not the pairing is successful (step S909). When the pairing is successful (step S909: YES), one-to-one communication (pairing) with the weighing device 430 is started (step S910). When the mobile terminal 450 starts pairing, the mobile terminal 450 transmits the identification information of the temporarily registered product to the measuring device 430.
そして、携帯端末４５０は、ペアリング成功後の所定時間内に、仮登録されている商品が計量装置４３０の計量対象外であることを示すエラー情報を受信したか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９１１）。計量対象外を示すエラー情報を受信しない場合（ステップＳ９１１：ＮＯ）、計量装置４３０との接続中に行う接続中処理（図７０Ｂ参照）を行い（ステップＳ９１２）、一連の処理を終了する。一方、計量対象外を示すエラー情報を受信した場合（ステップＳ９１１：ＹＥＳ）、携帯端末４５０は、計量対象外であることを報知する（ステップＳ９１３）。そして、携帯端末４５０は、ペアリングを解除し（ステップＳ９１４）、一連の処理を終了する。 Then, the mobile terminal 450 determines whether or not the error information indicating that the temporarily registered product is not subject to weighing of the weighing device 430 has been received within a predetermined time after the pairing is successful (step S911). ). When the error information indicating that the measurement target is not received is not received (step S9111: NO), the connecting process (see FIG. 70B) performed during the connection with the weighing device 430 is performed (step S912), and the series of processes is completed. On the other hand, when the error information indicating that the measurement target is not received is received (step S911: YES), the mobile terminal 450 notifies that the measurement target is not applicable (step S913). Then, the mobile terminal 450 cancels the pairing (step S914) and ends a series of processes.
ステップＳ９０９において、ペアリングに成功しない場合（ステップＳ９０９：ＮＯ）、携帯端末４５０は、接続要求を行った後、所定時間が経過したか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９１５）。接続要求を行った後、所定時間が経過していない場合（ステップＳ９１５：ＮＯ）、携帯端末４５０は、ステップＳ９０９に戻る。接続要求を行った後、所定時間が経過した場合（ステップＳ９１５：ＹＥＳ）、携帯端末４５０は、通信接続に関する操作をユーザに再度促すために、接続要求のリトライを報知し（ステップＳ９１６）、一連の処理を終了する。 If the pairing is not successful in step S909 (step S909: NO), the mobile terminal 450 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after making the connection request (step S915). If the predetermined time has not elapsed after making the connection request (step S915: NO), the mobile terminal 450 returns to step S909. When a predetermined time has elapsed after making the connection request (step S915: YES), the mobile terminal 450 notifies the user of the retry of the connection request (step S916) in order to prompt the user to perform the operation related to the communication connection again, and a series of steps. Ends the processing of.
接続要求のリトライの報知の終了条件は、ユーザから当該報知を終了する操作を受け付けたり、再度接続用コードをスキャンするための操作を受け付けたりすることなどである。 The termination condition of the notification of the retry of the connection request is to accept an operation for terminating the notification from the user, an operation for scanning the connection code again, and the like.
（携帯端末４５０が行う計量装置４３０との接続中処理） (Processing during connection with the weighing device 430 performed by the mobile terminal 450)
図７０Ｂは、携帯端末４５０が行う計量装置４３０との接続中処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。図７０Ｂにおいて、携帯端末４５０は、近距離無線通信により、計量装置４３０から計量結果を受信したか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９２１）。携帯端末４５０は、計量装置４３０から計量結果を受信した場合（ステップＳ９２１：ＹＥＳ）、計量結果をディスプレイ４５０９に表示する（ステップＳ９２２）。 FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing an example of processing during connection with the weighing device 430 performed by the mobile terminal 450. In FIG. 70B, the mobile terminal 450 determines whether or not the weighing result has been received from the weighing device 430 by short-range wireless communication (step S921). When the mobile terminal 450 receives the weighing result from the weighing device 430 (step S921: YES), the mobile terminal 450 displays the weighing result on the display 4509 (step S922).
そして、携帯端末４５０は、クラウドサーバＳｖから、バスケット識別情報及び商品登録更新画面情報を受信すると、商品登録更新画面を表示し、計量対象商品の本登録が完了する（ステップＳ９２３）。次いで、携帯端末４５０は、計量結果から得られる計量対象商品の商品情報を取得し、取得した商品情報と、バスケット識別情報とをクラウドサーバＳｖへ送信する（ステップＳ９２４）。 Then, when the mobile terminal 450 receives the basket identification information and the product registration update screen information from the cloud server Sv, the mobile terminal 450 displays the product registration update screen, and the main registration of the product to be weighed is completed (step S923). Next, the mobile terminal 450 acquires the product information of the product to be weighed obtained from the weighing result, and transmits the acquired product information and the basket identification information to the cloud server Sv (step S924).
この後、携帯端末４５０は、仮登録した全ての計量対象商品の計量が完了したか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９２５）。具体的には、携帯端末４５０は、仮登録した全ての計量対象商品の本登録が完了したか否かを判断する。仮登録した全ての計量対象商品の計量が完了した場合（ステップＳ９２５：ＹＥＳ）、携帯端末４５０は、ペアリングを解除し（ステップＳ９２６）、一連の処理を終了する。 After that, the mobile terminal 450 determines whether or not all the provisionally registered merchandise to be weighed has been weighed (step S925). Specifically, the mobile terminal 450 determines whether or not the main registration of all the provisionally registered products to be weighed has been completed. When the weighing of all the provisionally registered products to be weighed is completed (step S925: YES), the mobile terminal 450 cancels the pairing (step S926) and ends a series of processes.
仮登録した全ての計量対象商品の計量が完了していない場合（ステップＳ９２５：ＮＯ）、携帯端末４５０は、計量装置４３０との通信接続が切断されたか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９２７）。通信接続の切断は、例えば、計量装置４３０と携帯端末４５０との距離が近距離無線通信の可能な範囲を超えてしまう場合などに生じ得る。具体的には、通信接続の切断は、全ての計量対象商品の本登録が完了する前に、客が他の売場に行ってしまうような場合に生じ得る。 When the measurement of all the provisionally registered products to be weighed is not completed (step S925: NO), the mobile terminal 450 determines whether or not the communication connection with the weighing device 430 has been disconnected (step S927). The disconnection of the communication connection may occur, for example, when the distance between the measuring device 430 and the mobile terminal 450 exceeds the possible range of short-range wireless communication. Specifically, the disconnection of the communication connection may occur when the customer goes to another sales floor before the main registration of all the products to be weighed is completed.
計量装置４３０との通信接続が切断されていない場合（ステップＳ９２７：ＮＯ）、携帯端末４５０は、ステップＳ９２１に戻る。計量装置４３０との通信接続が切断された場合（ステップＳ９２７：ＹＥＳ）、携帯端末４５０は、通信が切断した旨を報知する（ステップＳ９２８）。この報知の終了条件は、ユーザから当該報知を終了する操作を受け付けたり、通信が再接続されたりすることなどである。 When the communication connection with the weighing device 430 is not disconnected (step S927: NO), the mobile terminal 450 returns to step S921. When the communication connection with the measuring device 430 is disconnected (step S927: YES), the mobile terminal 450 notifies that the communication is disconnected (step S928). The termination condition of this notification is that an operation for terminating the notification is accepted from the user, communication is reconnected, and the like.
そして、携帯端末４５０は、計量装置４３０との通信接続が終了したか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９２９）。通信接続の終了は、例えば、ユーザから接続を終了する操作を受け付けることや、切断した状態が所定時間以上継続することである。計量装置４３０との通信接続が終了した場合（ステップＳ９２９：ＹＥＳ）、携帯端末４５０は、一連の処理を終了する。計量装置４３０との通信接続が終了していない場合（ステップＳ９２９：ＮＯ）、携帯端末４５０は、ステップＳ９２１に戻る。 Then, the mobile terminal 450 determines whether or not the communication connection with the weighing device 430 is terminated (step S929). The termination of the communication connection is, for example, accepting an operation for terminating the connection from the user or continuing the disconnected state for a predetermined time or longer. When the communication connection with the measuring device 430 is completed (step S929: YES), the mobile terminal 450 ends a series of processes. When the communication connection with the weighing device 430 is not completed (step S929: NO), the mobile terminal 450 returns to step S921.
（計量装置４３０が行う取引情報出力処理の一例） (Example of transaction information output processing performed by the weighing device 430)
図７０Ｃは、計量装置４３０が行う取引情報出力処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。図７０Ｃのフローチャートに示す処理は、計量装置４３０において、常時（非常に短い時間間隔で定期的に）開始される。 FIG. 70C is a flowchart showing an example of transaction information output processing performed by the weighing device 430. The process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 70C is always started (regularly at very short time intervals) in the weighing device 430.
図７０Ｃにおいて、計量装置４３０は、待機状態であるか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９４１）。待機状態ではない場合（ステップＳ９４１：ＮＯ）、計量装置４３０は、ステップＳ９４７に進む。待機状態である場合（ステップＳ９４１：ＹＥＳ）、計量装置４３０は、携帯端末４５０からの接続要求があるか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９４２）。 In FIG. 70C, the weighing device 430 determines whether or not it is in the standby state (step S941). If it is not in the standby state (step S941: NO), the weighing device 430 proceeds to step S947. In the standby state (step S941: YES), the weighing device 430 determines whether or not there is a connection request from the mobile terminal 450 (step S942).
接続要求がない場合（ステップＳ９４２：ＮＯ）、計量装置４３０は、ステップＳ９４１に戻る。接続要求がある場合（ステップＳ９４２：ＹＥＳ）、計量装置４３０は、ペアリングに成功したか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９４３）。ペアリングに失敗した場合（ステップＳ９４３：ＮＯ）、計量装置４３０は、ステップＳ９４１に戻る。 If there is no connection request (step S942: NO), the weighing device 430 returns to step S941. When there is a connection request (step S942: YES), the weighing device 430 determines whether or not the pairing is successful (step S943). If the pairing fails (step S943: NO), the weighing device 430 returns to step S941.
ペアリングに成功した場合（ステップＳ９４３：ＮＯ）、計量装置４３０は、接続要求とともに送信された言語情報を参照し（ステップＳ９４４）、言語情報が示す言語で表示可能であるか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９４５）。具体的には、計量装置４３０は、言語関連テーブル４４２０（図６５Ｂ参照）を参照して、言語情報が示す言語で表示可能であるか否かを判断する。言語情報が示す言語で表示可能である場合（ステップＳ９４５：ＹＥＳ）、計量装置４３０は、表示用及び音声用の言語として、言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語を設定する（ステップＳ９４６）。 If the pairing is successful (step S943: NO), the weighing device 430 refers to the language information transmitted together with the connection request (step S944), and determines whether or not it can be displayed in the language indicated by the language information. (Step S945). Specifically, the weighing device 430 refers to the language-related table 4420 (see FIG. 65B) to determine whether or not it can be displayed in the language indicated by the language information. When it is possible to display in the language indicated by the language information (step S945: YES), the weighing device 430 sets the same language as the language indicated by the language information as the language for display and voice (step S946).
一方で、言語情報が示す言語で表示可能ではない場合（ステップＳ９４５：ＮＯ）、すなわち、例えば、台湾語などのように、予め用意されていない言語である場合、計量装置４３０は、対応言語テーブル４４３０（図６５Ｃ参照）を参照し、対応言語を設定する（ステップＳ９４７）。対応言語は、顧客の選択に応じて設定されてもよい。 On the other hand, when it is not possible to display in the language indicated by the language information (step S945: NO), that is, when it is a language that is not prepared in advance, such as Taiwanese, the weighing device 430 has a corresponding language table. Refer to 4430 (see FIG. 65C) and set the corresponding language (step S947). The supported language may be set according to the customer's choice.
計量装置４３０は、ステップＳ９４６またはステップＳ９４７において設定した言語で、表示内容を表示する。計量装置４３０は、設定した言語が日本語の場合は日本語のみで表示内容を表示し、設定した言語が外国語の場合は日本語に外国語を併記して表示内容を表示する。 The weighing device 430 displays the display content in the language set in step S946 or step S947. When the set language is Japanese, the weighing device 430 displays the display content only in Japanese, and when the set language is a foreign language, the display content is displayed by writing the foreign language together with Japanese.
言語の設定を終えると、計量装置４３０は、携帯端末４５０との１対１の通信（ペアリング）を開始する（ステップＳ９４８）。そして、計量装置４３０は、携帯端末４５０に仮登録されている商品の計量が完了するまで待機する（ステップＳ９４９：ＮＯ）。計量装置４３０は、仮登録されている商品の計量が完了すると（ステップＳ９４９：ＹＥＳ）、ラベルを出力するためのプリントボタンをディスプレイ４３０６に表示する（ステップＳ９５０）。 When the language setting is completed, the weighing device 430 starts one-to-one communication (pairing) with the mobile terminal 450 (step S948). Then, the weighing device 430 waits until the weighing of the product temporarily registered in the mobile terminal 450 is completed (step S949: NO). When the weighing device 430 completes weighing the temporarily registered product (step S949: YES), the weighing device 430 displays a print button for outputting a label on the display 4306 (step S950).
次に、計量装置４３０は、プリントボタンが押下されたか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９５１）。計量装置４３０は、プリントボタンが押下されるまで待機する（ステップＳ９５１：ＮＯ）。計量装置４３０は、プリントボタンが押下されると（ステップＳ９５１：ＹＥＳ）、ラベルを出力する（ステップＳ９５２）。そして、計量装置４３０は、近距離無線通信により計量結果を携帯端末４５０へ送信する（ステップＳ９５３）。携帯端末４５０は、計量結果を受信すると、商品登録更新画面を表示し、計量対象商品の本登録を完了させる。 Next, the weighing device 430 determines whether or not the print button has been pressed (step S951). The weighing device 430 waits until the print button is pressed (step S951: NO). When the print button is pressed (step S951: YES), the weighing device 430 outputs a label (step S952). Then, the weighing device 430 transmits the weighing result to the mobile terminal 450 by short-range wireless communication (step S953). Upon receiving the weighing result, the mobile terminal 450 displays the product registration update screen and completes the main registration of the weighing target product.
そして、計量装置４３０は、携帯端末４５０に仮登録されている全ての商品の計量が完了したか否かを判断する（ステップＳ９５４）。計量装置４３０は、仮登録されている全ての商品の計量が完了していない場合（ステップＳ９５４：ＮＯ）、ステップＳ９４９に戻る。仮登録されている全ての商品の計量が完了した場合（ステップＳ９５４：ＹＥＳ）、計量装置４３０は、携帯端末４５０とのペアリングを解除する（ステップＳ９５５）。そして、計量装置４３０は、待機状態に移行し（ステップＳ９５６）、一連の処理を終了する。 Then, the weighing device 430 determines whether or not the weighing of all the products provisionally registered in the mobile terminal 450 has been completed (step S954). When the weighing device 430 has not completed the weighing of all the temporarily registered products (step S954: NO), the weighing device 430 returns to step S949. When the weighing of all the provisionally registered products is completed (step S954: YES), the weighing device 430 cancels the pairing with the mobile terminal 450 (step S955). Then, the weighing device 430 shifts to the standby state (step S956), and ends a series of processes.
（ＰＯＳ端末４２０が行う取引情報出力処理の一例） (Example of transaction information output processing performed by POS terminal 420)
図７１は、ＰＯＳ端末４２０が行う取引情報出力処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。図７１において、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、携帯端末４５０に表示される精算用コードを読み取ったか否かを判断する（ステップＳ１００１）。ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、精算用コードを読み取るまで待機する（ステップＳ１００１：ＮＯ）。精算用コードを読み取ると（ステップＳ１００１：ＹＥＳ）、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、クラウドサーバＳｖに対して、登録情報の送信要求を行う（ステップＳ１００２）。 FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of transaction information output processing performed by the POS terminal 420. In FIG. 71, the POS terminal 420 determines whether or not the settlement code displayed on the mobile terminal 450 has been read (step S1001). The POS terminal 420 waits until the settlement code is read (step S1001: NO). When the settlement code is read (step S1001: YES), the POS terminal 420 requests the cloud server Sv to transmit the registration information (step S1002).
そして、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、クラウドサーバＳｖから登録情報を受信する。次に、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、登録情報に含まれる言語情報を参照し（ステップＳ１００４）、言語情報が示す言語で表示可能であるか否かを判断する（ステップＳ１００５）。具体的には、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、ＰＯＳ端末４２０の言語関連テーブルを参照して、言語情報が示す言語で表示可能であるか否かを判断する。言語情報が示す言語で表示可能である場合（ステップＳ１００５：ＹＥＳ）、計量装置４３０は、表示用及び音声用の言語として、言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語を設定する（ステップＳ１００６）。 Then, the POS terminal 420 receives the registration information from the cloud server Sv. Next, the POS terminal 420 refers to the language information included in the registration information (step S1004), and determines whether or not it can be displayed in the language indicated by the language information (step S1005). Specifically, the POS terminal 420 refers to the language-related table of the POS terminal 420 to determine whether or not it can be displayed in the language indicated by the language information. When it is possible to display in the language indicated by the language information (step S1005: YES), the weighing device 430 sets the same language as the language indicated by the language information as the language for display and voice (step S1006).
一方で、言語情報が示す言語で表示可能ではない場合（ステップＳ１００５：ＮＯ）、すなわち、例えば、台湾語などのように、予め用意されていない言語である場合、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、ＰＯＳ端末４２０の対応言語テーブルを参照し、対応言語を設定する（ステップＳ１００７）。対応言語は、顧客の選択に応じて設定されてもよい。 On the other hand, if it is not possible to display in the language indicated by the language information (step S1005: NO), that is, if it is a language that is not prepared in advance, such as Taiwanese, the POS terminal 420 is the POS terminal 420. Refer to the corresponding language table of, and set the corresponding language (step S1007). The supported language may be set according to the customer's choice.
ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、ステップＳ１００６またはステップＳ１００７において設定した言語で、表示内容を表示する。ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、設定した言語が日本語の場合は日本語のみで表示内容を表示し、設定した言語が外国語の場合は日本語に外国語を併記して表示内容を表示する。 The POS terminal 420 displays the display content in the language set in step S1006 or step S1007. When the set language is Japanese, the POS terminal 420 displays the display content only in Japanese, and when the set language is a foreign language, the display content is displayed by writing the foreign language together with Japanese.
言語の設定を終えると、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、設定した言語で登録情報を表示する（ステップＳ１００８）。そして、顧客の精算を受け付けてレシートを発行する一連の精算処理を実行し（ステップＳ１００９）、一連の処理を終了する。 When the language setting is completed, the POS terminal 420 displays the registration information in the set language (step S1008). Then, a series of settlement processes for accepting the customer's settlement and issuing a receipt is executed (step S1009), and the series of processes is completed.
（日本語を表示して計量対象商品を登録する際の手順について） (About the procedure for registering the products to be weighed by displaying Japanese)
次に、図７２~図７６を用いて、日本語を表示して計量対象商品を登録する際の手順を説明する。 Next, the procedure for registering the product to be weighed by displaying Japanese will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 76.
図７２は、計量対象商品の登録手順の一例を示す説明図である。図７２では、携帯端末４５０のカメラ４５０７が、顧客が購入を希望する計量対象商品の識別情報を撮像する例を説明する。店舗内の果物が置かれているコーナー（売場）には、例えば、レモンの計量対象商品４１１０１ａと、リンゴの計量対象商品４１１０１ｂと、オレンジの計量対象商品４１１０１ｃとが陳列されているものとする。各計量対象商品４１１０１（１１０１ａ~１１０１ｃ）の背後には、それぞれ、ディスプレイを有する標識１１０２（１１０２ａ~１１０２ｃ）が置かれている。以下では、主にレモンの標識１１０２ａを例に挙げて説明するが、他の標識１１０２ｂ、１１０２ｃについても同様である。 FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a procedure for registering a product to be weighed. FIG. 72 describes an example in which the camera 4507 of the mobile terminal 450 captures the identification information of the weighing target product that the customer wants to purchase. In the corner (sales floor) where fruits are placed in the store, for example, it is assumed that the lemon weighing target product 41101a, the apple weighing target product 41101b, and the orange weighing target product 41101c are displayed. Behind each of the goods to be weighed 41101 (1101a to 1101c), a sign 1102 (1102a to 1102c) having a display is placed. In the following, the lemon label 1102a will be mainly described as an example, but the same applies to the other labels 1102b and 1102c.
標識１１０２ａには、「レモン」の文字と、単価と、バーコード４１１０３とが表示されている。単価は、１ｋｇあたり、ｎｎ円であることを示している。バーコード４１１０３は、計量対象商品４１１０１ａを識別する情報（商品識別情報）や、単価を含む。バーコード４１１０３は、携帯端末４５０によって読み取られる。 On the sign 1102a, the characters "lemon", the unit price, and the barcode 41103 are displayed. The unit price is nn yen per kg. The barcode 41103 includes information for identifying the product 41101a to be weighed (product identification information) and a unit price. The barcode 41103 is read by the mobile terminal 450.
標識１１０２ａは、ディスプレイに表示される。標識１１０２ａは、時間に応じてバーコード４１１０３の内容を変えることが可能である。例えば、タイムサービスにおける値引きを行ったり、過去に読み取ったバーコードを用いて取引を行うといった不正を防止したりすることができる。この不正は、具体的には、例えば、前日のタイムサービス中のバーコードをカメラで撮影しておき、翌日に当該バーコードを読み取らせることにより、前日のタイムサービス中の単価で、計量対象商品４１１０１を登録するといったことである。標識１１０２ａは、紙などの印刷媒体に印刷されたものでもよい。 The sign 1102a is displayed on the display. The sign 1102a can change the content of the barcode 41103 according to the time. For example, it is possible to prevent fraud such as discounting in a time service or conducting a transaction using a barcode read in the past. Specifically, for example, by taking a picture of the barcode during the time service of the previous day with a camera and having the barcode read the next day, the unit price during the time service of the previous day is used to measure the product. It means registering 41101. The sign 1102a may be printed on a printing medium such as paper.
図７２において、携帯端末４５０の表示画面は、レモンの計量対象商品４１１０１ａとリンゴの計量対象商品４１１０１ｂとのバーコード４１１０３が読み取られた後の仮登録の画面を示している。具体的には、携帯端末４５０の表示画面は、レモン及びリンゴの商品名（商品識別情報）が表示され、各商品の計量がされていないことを示している。 In FIG. 72, the display screen of the mobile terminal 450 shows a screen for provisional registration after the barcode 41103 of the lemon weighing target product 41101a and the apple weighing target product 41101b is read. Specifically, the display screen of the mobile terminal 450 displays the product names (product identification information) of lemons and apples, indicating that each product is not weighed.
より具体的に説明すると、携帯端末４５０のディスプレイ４５０９には、小計欄４５５０と、仮登録欄４５５１（４５５１ａ、４５５１ｂ）と、本登録欄４５５２と、読取結果４５６０とが表示されている。小計欄４５５０には、本登録された商品の合計金額が表示される。仮登録欄４５５１には、仮登録された計量対象商品４１１０１が表示される。具体的には、仮登録欄４５５１ａ、４５５１ｂには、レモン及びリンゴのそれぞれについて、計量が必要であることを示す「要計量」や、計量が完了していないために価格が未確定であることを示す「？？円」が表示されている。 More specifically, the display 4509 of the mobile terminal 450 displays a subtotal column 4550, a temporary registration column 4551 (4551a, 4551b), a main registration column 4552, and a reading result 4560. In the subtotal column 4550, the total amount of the registered products is displayed. In the temporary registration column 4551, the temporarily registered measurement target product 41101 is displayed. Specifically, in the provisional registration columns 4551a and 4551b, "weighing required" indicating that weighing is required for each of lemon and apple, and the price is undecided because the weighing has not been completed. "?? Yen" is displayed.
読取結果４６６０は、バーコード４１１０３の読取結果を示す。読取結果４５６０は、計量対象商品４１１０１の単価を含む。図示では、先にリンゴのバーコード４１１０３が読み取られ、その後に、レモンのバーコード４１１０３を読み取った際の画面を示している。 The reading result 4660 indicates the reading result of the barcode 41103. The reading result 4560 includes the unit price of the product 41101 to be weighed. In the figure, the screen when the apple barcode 41103 is read first and then the lemon barcode 41103 is read is shown.
仮登録欄４５５１ａ、４５５１ｂは、本登録欄４５５２と異なる表示態様で表示されている。図示では、仮登録欄４５５１ａ、４５５１ｂは、網掛け表示の表示態様で表示されている。このような表示態様とすることにより、仮登録中であることを顧客に認識させやすくすることができ、顧客に計量を促すことができる。仮登録欄４５５１には、「？？円」を表示しているが、これに限らず、単価を表示するようにしてもよい。 The temporary registration fields 4551a and 4551b are displayed in a display mode different from that of the main registration field 4552. In the illustration, the temporary registration fields 4551a and 4551b are displayed in a shaded display mode. By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to make it easier for the customer to recognize that the provisional registration is in progress, and it is possible to encourage the customer to weigh. "?? Yen" is displayed in the temporary registration column 4551, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the unit price may be displayed.
本登録欄４５５２は、本登録された商品及び金額が表示されている。本登録欄４５５２は、１６０円のヨーグルトが１点、登録されていることを示している。小計欄４５５０の右側には、お会計ボタン４５５４が表示されている。お会計ボタン４５５４が押下されると、本登録されている商品について、精算を行うことが可能になる。 In the main registration column 4552, the mainly registered product and the amount of money are displayed. The main registration column 4552 indicates that one yogurt of 160 yen is registered. The checkout button 4554 is displayed on the right side of the subtotal column 4550. When the checkout button 4554 is pressed, it becomes possible to settle the registered products.
計量対象商品４１１０１を登録する画面は、計量対象商品４１１０１ではない通常の商品を登録する画面とは異なる専用画面であってもよい。例えば、通常の商品を登録する画面が表示されているときに、計量対象商品４１１０１のバーコード４１１０３が読み取られた場合、計量対象商品４１１０１のみが表示される専用画面を表示すればよい。この専用画面では、例えば、計量対象商品４１１０１のみを登録可能とする。これにより、計量対象商品４１１０１が仮登録されたことや、計量が必要であることを、より明確にすることができる。 The screen for registering the weighing target product 41101 may be a dedicated screen different from the screen for registering a normal product other than the weighing target product 41101. For example, if the barcode 41103 of the weighing target product 41101 is read while the screen for registering a normal product is displayed, a dedicated screen in which only the weighing target product 41101 is displayed may be displayed. On this dedicated screen, for example, only the product 41101 to be weighed can be registered. As a result, it is possible to make it clearer that the product 41101 to be weighed has been provisionally registered and that the merchandise needs to be weighed.
ここで、専用画面において、通常の商品のバーコードが読み取られた場合に、通常の商品の登録を禁止する制御としてもよい。具体的には、専用画面において、通常の商品のバーコードが読み取られた場合に、「計量対象商品を先に計量してください」と表示してもよい。これにより、顧客が仮登録した計量対象商品４１１０１の計量を忘れてしまうことを抑えることができる。当該登録の禁止を解除する条件は、計量対象商品４１１０１の本登録の完了としてもよいし、計量対象商品４１１０１の仮登録をキャンセルするボタンを表示しておき、当該ボタンの押下を受け付けることとしてもよい。 Here, when the barcode of the normal product is read on the dedicated screen, the control may be such that the registration of the normal product is prohibited. Specifically, when the barcode of a normal product is read on the dedicated screen, "Please weigh the product to be weighed first" may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the customer from forgetting to weigh the tentatively registered merchandise 41101 to be weighed. The condition for canceling the prohibition of the registration may be the completion of the main registration of the weighing target product 41101, or the button for canceling the provisional registration of the weighing target product 41101 may be displayed and the pressing of the button may be accepted. good.
専用画面において、通常の商品のバーコードが読み取られた場合に、当該登録を許可する制御としてもよい。具体的には、専用画面において、通常の商品のバーコードが読み取られた場合に、通常の商品を登録する画面に戻るようにしてもよい。通常の商品を登録する画面に戻った後に、当該画面において、計量対象商品４１１０１が仮登録中であることを示す通知（例えば「要計量商品あり」の表示など）を行うようにしてもよい。これにより、顧客が、仮登録中の計量対象商品４１１０１の計量を忘れてしまうことを抑えることができる。 When the barcode of a normal product is read on the dedicated screen, the registration may be permitted. Specifically, when the barcode of a normal product is read on the dedicated screen, the screen may return to the screen for registering the normal product. After returning to the screen for registering a normal product, a notification indicating that the product to be weighed 41101 is being provisionally registered (for example, "display of a product requiring measurement" or the like) may be given on the screen. As a result, it is possible to prevent the customer from forgetting to weigh the product 41101 to be weighed, which is being provisionally registered.
次に、図７３を用いて、計量装置４３０に表示される待機画面の一例を説明する。図７３は、計量装置４３０に表示される待機画面の一例を示す説明図である。図７３に示すように、計量装置４３０のディスプレイ４３０６には、待機状態中に表示される待機画面４１２００が表示されている。待機画面４１２００には、言語切替えボタン４１２０１と、第１案内欄４１２１０と、第２案内欄４１２２０と、が表示されている。 Next, an example of the standby screen displayed on the weighing device 430 will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a standby screen displayed on the weighing device 430. As shown in FIG. 73, the display 4306 of the weighing device 430 displays the standby screen 41200 displayed in the standby state. On the standby screen 41200, a language switching button 41201, a first guide column 41210, and a second guide column 41220 are displayed.
言語切替えボタン４１２０１は、第１案内欄４１２１０及び第２案内欄４１２２０に表示される言語を切り替えるボタンであり、例えば、英語、中国語、及び韓国語のいずれかに切り替えることを受け付けるボタンである。 The language switching button 41201 is a button for switching the language displayed in the first guide column 41210 and the second guide column 41220, and is a button for accepting switching to, for example, English, Chinese, or Korean.
第１案内欄４１２１０は、携帯端末４５０を使用して計量対象商品の登録を行う場合の案内を示す。具体的には、第１案内欄４１２１０には、接続用コード４１２１１が表示され、接続用コード４１２１１を携帯端末４５０に読み取らせる旨の案内が表示されている。 The first guidance column 41210 shows guidance when registering a product to be weighed using the mobile terminal 450. Specifically, the connection code 42211 is displayed in the first guide column 41211, and a guide for causing the mobile terminal 450 to read the connection code 42211 is displayed.
第２案内欄４１２２０は、携帯端末４５０を使用せずに、計量対象商品の登録を行う場合の案内を示す。具体的には、第２案内欄４１２２０には、計量対象商品を秤に載せて計量を促す旨の案内が表示されている。以下では、携帯端末４５０を使用する場合を説明する。 The second guide column 41220 shows a guide when the product to be weighed is registered without using the mobile terminal 450. Specifically, in the second guide column 41220, a guide for placing the product to be weighed on the scale and encouraging weighing is displayed. Hereinafter, a case where the mobile terminal 450 is used will be described.
図７２に示したように、携帯端末４５０がレモンとリンゴの仮登録を終えると、顧客は、携帯端末４５０に接続用コード４１２１１を読み取らせる。仮登録を終えた後も、携帯端末４５０には、商品のバーコードを読み取るときと同様の画面が表示されている。このため、顧客は、画面を切り替える操作を行わなくても、携帯端末４５０に接続用コード４１２１１を読み取らせることができる。 As shown in FIG. 72, when the mobile terminal 450 completes the provisional registration of the lemon and the apple, the customer causes the mobile terminal 450 to read the connection code 42111. Even after the temporary registration is completed, the mobile terminal 450 still displays the same screen as when reading the barcode of the product. Therefore, the customer can have the mobile terminal 450 read the connection code 42111 without performing the operation of switching the screen.
接続用コード４１２１１を読み取った携帯端末４５０は、接続用コード４１２１１が示す指示に基づいて、計量装置４３０に通信接続の要求を行う。これにより、携帯端末４５０と、計量装置４３０とは、１対１の通信を開始することが可能になる。通信が確立すると、携帯端末４５０は、計量装置４３０に仮登録した商品の情報を送信する。例えば、図７２のようにレモンとリンゴを仮登録した場合には、携帯端末４５０は、レモンとリンゴとの識別情報を送信する。 The mobile terminal 450 that has read the connection code 42211 makes a request for communication connection to the measuring device 430 based on the instruction indicated by the connection code 42211. As a result, the mobile terminal 450 and the weighing device 430 can start one-to-one communication. When the communication is established, the mobile terminal 450 transmits the information of the product temporarily registered in the weighing device 430. For example, when the lemon and the apple are provisionally registered as shown in FIG. 72, the mobile terminal 450 transmits the identification information between the lemon and the apple.
商品の識別情報を受信した計量装置４３０は、識別情報に示される計量対象商品の計量を促す画面をディスプレイ４３０６に表示する。例えば、複数の計量対象商品が仮登録されている場合、計量装置４３０は、携帯端末４５０によってバーコードが読み取られた順番にしたがって、それぞれの計量対象商品の計量を促す画面をディスプレイ４３０６に表示する。 Upon receiving the product identification information, the weighing device 430 displays on the display 4306 a screen prompting the weighing of the product to be weighed shown in the identification information. For example, when a plurality of weighing target products are provisionally registered, the weighing device 430 displays a screen prompting the weighing of each weighing target product on the display 4306 in the order in which the barcodes are read by the mobile terminal 450. ..
次に、携帯端末４５０に表示されるペアリング中の画面を説明する。 Next, the pairing screen displayed on the mobile terminal 450 will be described.
図７４Ａ及び図７４Ｂは、携帯端末４５０に表示されるペアリング中の画面の一例を示す説明図である。図７４Ａは、携帯端末４５０が計量装置４３０に接続要求を行った際の画面を示す。図７４Ａに示すように、携帯端末４５０のディスプレイ４５０９には、計量装置４３０との通信接続を試みている旨を示す状態表示４１３１０が表示されている。ペアリングが完了すると、図７４Ｂに示す画面に遷移する。 74A and 74B are explanatory views showing an example of a screen during pairing displayed on the mobile terminal 450. FIG. 74A shows a screen when the mobile terminal 450 makes a connection request to the weighing device 430. As shown in FIG. 74A, the display 4509 of the mobile terminal 450 displays a status display 41310 indicating that a communication connection with the weighing device 430 is being attempted. When the pairing is completed, the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 74B.
図７４Ｂは、通信接続が確立した際の画面を示す。図７４Ｂに示すように、携帯端末４５０のディスプレイ４５０９には、商品を秤に載せることを促す案内表示４１３２０が表示されている。携帯端末４５０は、レモンよりもリンゴを先に仮登録したため、リンゴの計量を促す案内表示４１３２０を、レモンの計量を促す案内表示よりも先に表示する。 FIG. 74B shows a screen when a communication connection is established. As shown in FIG. 74B, the display 4509 of the mobile terminal 450 displays a guidance display 41320 urging the product to be placed on the scale. Since the mobile terminal 450 provisionally registered the apple before the lemon, the guidance display 41320 for prompting the weighing of the apple is displayed before the guidance display for prompting the weighing of the lemon.
次に、計量装置４３０及び携帯端末４５０に表示される計量中の画面を説明する。図７５は、計量装置４３０及び携帯端末４５０に表示される計量中の画面の一例を示す説明図である。 Next, the screen during weighing displayed on the weighing device 430 and the mobile terminal 450 will be described. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen during weighing displayed on the weighing device 430 and the mobile terminal 450.
図７５Ａは、携帯端末４５０が接続用コード４１２１１（図７３参照）を読み取り、計量装置４３０とリンゴの計量を開始する際に、計量装置４３０のディスプレイ４３０６に表示される操作案内画面４１４００を示す。操作案内画面４１４００は、案内表示Ｓ１と、商品名表示４１４０１と、戻るボタン４１４０２と、中止ボタン４１４０３と、サーチボタン４１４０４と、計量結果欄４１４０５と、単価欄４１４０６と、合計金額欄４１４０７と、携帯端末情報４１４３０とが表示されている。 FIG. 75A shows an operation guide screen 41400 displayed on the display 4306 of the weighing device 430 when the mobile terminal 450 reads the connection code 42211 (see FIG. 73) and starts weighing the weighing device 430 and the apple. The operation guidance screen 41400 includes a guidance display S1, a product name display 41401, a back button 41402, a stop button 41403, a search button 41404, a measurement result column 41405, a unit price column 41406, a total amount column 41407, and a mobile phone. Terminal information 41430 and is displayed.
案内表示Ｓ１は、載台４３２０に商品を載せることを促す案内を示す。商品名表示４１４０１は、計量対象商品の商品名を示す。戻るボタン４１４０２は、１つ前の画面に戻すことを受け付けるボタンである。中止ボタン４１４０３は、計量の中止を受け付けるボタンである。サーチボタン４１４０４は、例えば、携帯端末４５０との通信接続が切断した場合に、当該携帯端末４５０と再接続するために周辺の携帯端末４５０の検索を受け付けるボタンである。 The guidance display S1 indicates guidance for urging the product to be placed on the mounting table 4320. The product name display 41401 indicates the product name of the product to be weighed. The back button 41402 is a button that accepts the return to the previous screen. The stop button 41403 is a button for accepting the stop of weighing. The search button 41404 is a button that accepts a search for a peripheral mobile terminal 450 in order to reconnect to the mobile terminal 450, for example, when the communication connection with the mobile terminal 450 is disconnected.
計量結果欄４１４０５は、載台４３２０に載置された計量対象商品の重量を示す。計量結果欄４１４０５には、重量が表示されることに限らず、例えば、１個当たりのおおよその重量がわかっている商品については、重量を基に換算された個数が表示されてもよい。単価欄４１４０６は、単価（例えば１キログラムあたりの価格）を示す。合計金額欄４１４０７は、計量結果と単価とから算出される合計金額を示す。 The weighing result column 41405 indicates the weight of the product to be weighed placed on the platform 4320. The weight is not limited to be displayed in the weighing result column 41405, and for example, for a product for which the approximate weight per piece is known, the number converted based on the weight may be displayed. The unit price column 41406 indicates a unit price (for example, a price per kilogram). The total amount column 41407 shows the total amount calculated from the measurement result and the unit price.
携帯端末情報４１４３０は、どの携帯端末４５０と接続中であることを客に分かるようにするために表示する文字情報である。具体的には、携帯端末情報４１４３０は、「○○さんと接続中」という文字情報を示す。携帯端末情報４１４３０に示す「○○」のディスプレイ分は、例えば、客の氏名、ＩＤ、ニックネーム、会員名、会員番号、会員が選んだキャラクタやマーク、など会員を識別可能な情報であればよい。 The mobile terminal information 41430 is character information displayed so that the customer can know which mobile terminal 450 is being connected to. Specifically, the mobile terminal information 41430 indicates the character information "connecting with Mr. XX". The display portion of "○○" shown in the mobile terminal information 41430 may be any information that can identify the member, such as the customer's name, ID, nickname, member name, member number, character or mark selected by the member, and the like. ..
携帯端末情報４１４３０は、文字情報に限らない。例えば、携帯端末情報４１４３０は、客ごと（携帯端末４５０ごと）に、背景画像や所定部分の色が異なる表示であってもよい。例えば、計量装置４３０の背景画像と、携帯端末４５０の背景画像とを関連する画像を表示させてもよい。具体的には、例えば、携帯端末４５０の背景画像と、計量装置４３０（ディスプレイ４３０６）の背景画像とをそれぞれ同じ色（例えば黄色）に表示させてもよい。 The mobile terminal information 41430 is not limited to character information. For example, the mobile terminal information 41430 may be displayed in which the background image and the color of a predetermined portion are different for each customer (for each mobile terminal 450). For example, an image related to the background image of the weighing device 430 and the background image of the mobile terminal 450 may be displayed. Specifically, for example, the background image of the mobile terminal 450 and the background image of the weighing device 430 (display 4306) may be displayed in the same color (for example, yellow).
携帯端末４５０と計量装置４３０とに同じ種類のマークを表示させるようにしてもよい。同じ種類のマークを表示させるとは、例えば、ライオンやシマウマなど動物のマークを表示可能とした場合、携帯端末４５０と計量装置４３０とにライオンのマークを表示させることである。携帯端末４５０と計量装置４３０とにそれぞれに関連する画像や同一の画像を表示させる制御は、携帯端末４５０の指示に基づいて行われてもよいし、計量装置４３０の指示に基づいて行われてもよい。 The mobile terminal 450 and the weighing device 430 may be displayed with the same type of mark. Displaying the same type of mark means displaying the lion mark on the mobile terminal 450 and the weighing device 430, for example, when the mark of an animal such as a lion or a zebra can be displayed. Control to display an image related to each of the mobile terminal 450 and the weighing device 430 or the same image may be performed based on the instruction of the mobile terminal 450, or may be performed based on the instruction of the measuring device 430. May be good.
携帯端末情報４１４３０は、携帯端末４５０と接続中である場合と、接続中ではない場合とで、一見して区別がつく表示であればよい。例えば、携帯端末４５０と接続中である場合と、接続中ではない場合とで、計量装置４３０の背景色が異なる表示としてもよいし、フォントのサイズや種類が異なる表示としてもよい。 The mobile terminal information 41430 may be displayed so that it can be visually distinguished depending on whether the mobile terminal 450 is connected to the mobile terminal 450 or not. For example, the background color of the weighing device 430 may be different depending on whether the device is connected to the mobile terminal 450 or not, or the font size or type may be different.
携帯端末４５０との接続中には、携帯端末４５０との接続中ではない場合に比べて、携帯端末４５０のイラストを大きく表示するようにしてもよい。例えば、携帯端末４５０と接続中である場合には「携帯端末接続モード」の文字を表示し、携帯端末４５０と接続中ではない場合には「通常登録モード」の文字を表示するようにしてもよい。 The illustration of the mobile terminal 450 may be displayed larger during the connection with the mobile terminal 450 than when not connected with the mobile terminal 450. For example, if the mobile terminal 450 is connected, the characters "mobile terminal connection mode" are displayed, and if the mobile terminal 450 is not connected, the characters "normal registration mode" are displayed. good.
このように、携帯端末情報４１４３０を表示することにより、携帯端末４５０との接続中であることを明示することができる。このため、当該携帯端末４５０を有する顧客とは異なる顧客が、自身の携帯端末４５０を用いて計量装置４３０との接続を試みることを防止することができる。 By displaying the mobile terminal information 41430 in this way, it is possible to clearly indicate that the connection with the mobile terminal 450 is in progress. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a customer different from the customer having the mobile terminal 450 from attempting to connect to the weighing device 430 using his / her own mobile terminal 450.
図７５Ｂは、顧客が載台４３２０にリンゴを載置し、計量が完了した際に表示される計量完了画面１４１０を示す。計量完了画面１４１０は、図７５Ａの操作案内画面４１４００と比較して、計量結果欄４１４０５の表示内容と、合計金額欄４１４０７の表示内容と、案内表示Ｓ２と、プリントボタン４１４０８とが表示されている点で異なる。計量結果欄４１４０５の表示内容は、計量結果のうちの重量（図では１．２００６ｋｇ）を示している。合計金額欄４１４０７の表示内容は、計量結果のうちの合計金額（図では￥４３２）が表示されている。合計金額欄４１４０７に表示される合計金額は、例えば、重量と単価の積を示す。当該合計金額は、１円未満が切り捨てられて表示される。 FIG. 75B shows a weighing completion screen 1410 displayed when a customer places an apple on a platform 4320 and weighing is completed. Compared with the operation guidance screen 41400 of FIG. 75A, the measurement completion screen 1410 displays the display content of the measurement result column 41405, the display content of the total amount column 41407, the guidance display S2, and the print button 41408. It differs in that. The display content of the measurement result column 41405 indicates the weight (1.2006 kg in the figure) of the measurement result. In the display content of the total amount column 41407, the total amount of the weighing results (¥ 432 in the figure) is displayed. The total amount displayed in the total amount column 41407 indicates, for example, the product of weight and unit price. The total amount is rounded down to the nearest yen.
案内表示Ｓ２は、プリントボタン４１４０８の押下を促す案内を示す。プリントボタン４１４０８は、計量対象商品に関する情報を印刷したラベルの発行を受け付けるボタンである。プリントボタン４１４０８は、例えば、計量対象商品を載置して計量値が安定したときに初めて表示される。プリントボタン４１４０８は、計量値が安定するまではグレーアウトさせて受け付け不可能とし、計量値が安定したときにグレーアウトを解除して受け付け可能としてもよい。 The guidance display S2 indicates guidance for prompting the pressing of the print button 41408. The print button 41408 is a button that accepts the issuance of a label on which information about the product to be weighed is printed. The print button 41408 is displayed only when, for example, a product to be weighed is placed and the weighed value becomes stable. The print button 41408 may be grayed out until the measured value becomes stable so that it cannot be accepted, and when the measured value becomes stable, the grayed out may be canceled and accepted.
図７５Ｂに示す計量完了画面１４１０において、プリントボタン４１４０８が押下されると、印刷部４３０７の排出口からラベル（図７６参照）が排出され、図７５Ｃに示す画面が表示される。 When the print button 41408 is pressed on the weighing completion screen 1410 shown in FIG. 75B, the label (see FIG. 76) is ejected from the discharge port of the printing unit 4307, and the screen shown in FIG. 75C is displayed.
図７５Ｃは、計量対象商品（リンゴ）を入れた袋にラベルを貼付することを促す案内画面１４２０を示す。図７５Ｃに示す画面を表示する際に、計量装置４３０は、携帯端末４５０にリンゴに関する計量結果（商品識別情報、計量されたこと、価格等）を近距離無線通信で送信する。この通信によって、携帯端末４５０が計量結果を受信すると、携帯端末４５０は、図７５Ｄに示す画面を表示する。 FIG. 75C shows a guide screen 1420 urging the bag containing the product to be weighed (apple) to be labeled. When displaying the screen shown in FIG. 75C, the weighing device 430 transmits the weighing result (product identification information, weighing, price, etc.) regarding the apple to the mobile terminal 450 by short-range wireless communication. When the mobile terminal 450 receives the weighing result by this communication, the mobile terminal 450 displays the screen shown in FIG. 75D.
図７５Ｄは、リンゴの本登録が完了した際に携帯端末４５０に表示される画面を示す。図７５Ｄに示すように、携帯端末４５０には、計量装置４３０からリンゴの計量結果を受信したことにより、リンゴに対応する仮登録欄４５５１ｂに代わり、リンゴに対応する本登録欄４５５２ａを表示した画面が表示されている。 FIG. 75D shows a screen displayed on the mobile terminal 450 when the main registration of the apple is completed. As shown in FIG. 75D, the mobile terminal 450 receives the weighing result of the apple from the weighing device 430, so that the screen displaying the main registration column 4552a corresponding to the apple instead of the temporary registration column 4551b corresponding to the apple. Is displayed.
本登録欄４５５２ａは、仮登録欄４５５１ｂにおいて表示されていた網掛けが解除され、さらに価格（４３２円）も表示される。仮登録欄４５５１ｂにおいて表示されていた「要計量」の文字は、図７５Ｄの本登録欄４５５２ａでは「計量」の文字に変更されている。これにより、リンゴの計量が完了したことを顧客に通知することができる。本登録欄４５５２ａには、「計量」の文字に代えて、計量した重量（例えば、０．５ｋｇなど）が表示されてもよいし、単価（例えば、￥１０００／ｋｇ）が表示されてもよい。 In the main registration column 4552a, the shading displayed in the temporary registration column 4551b is released, and the price (432 yen) is also displayed. The character "weighing required" displayed in the temporary registration field 4551b has been changed to the character "weighing" in the main registration field 4552a of FIG. 75D. This makes it possible to notify the customer that the weighing of apples is complete. In the main registration field 4552a, the weighed weight (for example, 0.5 kg) may be displayed or the unit price (for example, ¥ 1000 / kg) may be displayed instead of the characters “weighing”. ..
計量装置４３０は、図７５Ｃに示す画面を表示してから、所定時間（例えば３秒）が経過すると、レモンの計量を促すための画面に遷移する。レモンを計量する際の計量装置４３０及び携帯端末４５０の画面の遷移については、リンゴを計量と同様の遷移であるため、説明を省略する。仮登録されたすべての計量対象商品（リンゴとレモン）の本登録が完了すると、計量装置４３０は、所定時間が経過後（例えば３秒）に、図７３に示した待機画面４１２００を表示する。 When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after displaying the screen shown in FIG. 75C, the weighing device 430 transitions to a screen for prompting the weighing of lemons. The transition of the screens of the weighing device 430 and the mobile terminal 450 when weighing the lemon is the same transition as the weighing of the apple, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. When the main registration of all the provisionally registered products to be weighed (apples and lemons) is completed, the weighing device 430 displays the standby screen 41200 shown in FIG. 73 after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds).
図７６は、計量装置４３０が発行するラベルの一例を示す説明図である。図７６に示すラベル４１５００は、シートＳｔに、規定のラベルサイズに応じた切れ目が設けられていないライナーレスのラベル（以下「ライナーレスラベル」という。）である。ライナーレスラベルを用いる場合、裏面に粘着材が施され、ロール状に捲かれたシートＳｔが用いられる。計量装置４３０の印刷部４３０７には、ロール状のシートＳｔが収納される。そして、印刷部４３０７は、ラベル４１５００を発行する際に、ロール状のシートＳｔを繰り出し、繰り出したシートＳｔに所定の印字を施す。そして、印刷部４３０７は、印字したデータ量に応じた長さの分のシートＳｔをカッター部で切断し、１枚のラベル４１５００を発行する。このように、ライナーレスラベルは、印字されるデータ量に応じて引き出し方向（発行方向）の長さが可変長になっている。 FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a label issued by the weighing device 430. The label 41500 shown in FIG. 76 is a linerless label (hereinafter referred to as “linerless label”) in which the sheet St is not provided with a cut corresponding to a specified label size. When a linerless label is used, a sheet St with an adhesive material applied to the back surface and rolled into a roll is used. A roll-shaped sheet St is housed in the printing unit 4307 of the weighing device 430. Then, when issuing the label 41500, the printing unit 4307 feeds out the roll-shaped sheet St, and prints a predetermined print on the fed out sheet St. Then, the printing unit 4307 cuts the sheet St for the length corresponding to the amount of printed data with the cutter unit, and issues one label 41500. As described above, the linerless label has a variable length in the drawing direction (issuing direction) according to the amount of data to be printed.
図７６について、ラベル４１５００は、商品名４１５０１と、単価４１５０２と、内容量４１５０３と、売価４１５０４と、バーコード４１５０５との各表示を含む。商品名４１５０１は、ラベル４１５００が付される商品の名称（リンゴ）である。単価４１５０２は、リンゴの１ｋｇ当たりの売価である。内容量４１５０３は、ラベル４１５００が付される商品の重量を示す。売価４１５０４は、ラベル４１５００が付される商品の買上金額を示す。バーコード４１５０５は、商品名４１５０１と、単価４１５０２と、内容量４１５０３と、売価４１５０４とに印字されている内容をコード化したものである。バーコード４１５０５は、１次元バーコードを示しているが、２次元コードなど他の表示形式のコードであってもよい。 With respect to FIG. 76, the label 41500 includes a trade name 41501, a unit price 41502, an internal capacity 41503, a selling price 41504, and a barcode 41505. The product name 41501 is the name of the product (apple) to which the label 41500 is attached. The unit price 41502 is the selling price per 1 kg of apples. The content 41503 indicates the weight of the product to which the label 41500 is attached. The selling price 41504 indicates the purchase price of the product to which the label 41500 is attached. The barcode 41505 is a coded version of the contents printed on the product name 41501, the unit price 41502, the content capacity 41503, and the selling price 41504. Although the barcode 41505 indicates a one-dimensional barcode, it may be a code of another display format such as a two-dimensional code.
シートＳｔは、ライナーレスではなく、例えばタックシートと呼ばれるラベルであってもよい。タックシートには、例えば、台紙に所定サイズのラベル用紙が仮着されて巻回された台紙付きのラベル用紙が用いられる。台紙付きのラベル用紙は、予め規定間隔で切れ目が入れられているものや、所定間隔（マージン）を空けて規定サイズが連続して仮着されているものであってもよい。タックシートは、縦横のサイズが固定となる。タックシートを用いる場合、印刷部４３０７は、台紙付きのラベル用紙に印字した後、ラベル用紙の排出口の付近に設けられたディスペンサ（剥離部）を用いて、ラベル用紙を台紙から剥離して、１枚ずつラベルの発行を行うことになる。 The sheet St may be a label called, for example, a tack sheet instead of linerless. As the tack sheet, for example, a label paper with a backing paper in which a label paper of a predetermined size is temporarily attached to the backing paper and wound is used. The label paper with a mount may be one in which cuts are made in advance at predetermined intervals, or one in which specified sizes are continuously temporarily attached with a predetermined interval (margin). The vertical and horizontal sizes of the tack sheet are fixed. When a tack sheet is used, the printing unit 4307 prints on the label paper with the mount, and then peels the label paper from the mount using a dispenser (peeling part) provided near the discharge port of the label paper. Labels will be issued one by one.
次に、図７７~図８０を用いて、外国語を表示して計量対象商品を登録する際の手順を説明する。図７７~図８０は、図７２~図７６に示した内容を外国語（例えば中国語）で表示した場合を示す。以下、外国語で表示画面等を出力する各説明では、既に説明した構成と同様の構成については同様の符号を付し、適宜説明を省略する。 Next, the procedure for registering the product to be weighed by displaying the foreign language will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. 77 to 80 show a case where the contents shown in FIGS. 72 to 76 are displayed in a foreign language (for example, Chinese). Hereinafter, in each description of outputting a display screen or the like in a foreign language, the same components as those already described will be designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
図７７は、外国語で計量対象商品を登録する際の手順の一例を示す説明図である。図７７に示す携帯端末４５０は、中国人の顧客が有する携帯端末４５０である。この携帯端末４５０は、使用する言語として中国語が設定されている。図７７において、携帯端末４５０のディスプレイ４５０９には、図７２に示した携帯端末４５０のディスプレイ４５０９に表示されている内容が中国語で表示されている。 FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a procedure for registering a product to be weighed in a foreign language. The mobile terminal 450 shown in FIG. 77 is a mobile terminal 450 owned by a Chinese customer. Chinese is set as the language to be used in this mobile terminal 450. In FIG. 77, the content displayed on the display 4509 of the mobile terminal 450 shown in FIG. 72 is displayed in Chinese on the display 4509 of the mobile terminal 450.
小計欄４５５０には、本登録された商品の合計金額のほかにも、中国語の通貨（中国人民元）に換算した金額も表示されている。これにより、外国人の顧客は、自国の通貨に換算した合計金額を把握することができる。為替レートは随時変わるため、例えば、前月の平均値を用いて換算してもよいし、携帯端末４５０がリアルタイムのレートを取得して、換算してもよい。 In the subtotal column 4550, in addition to the total amount of the registered products, the amount converted into the Chinese currency (Chinese yuan) is also displayed. This allows foreign customers to keep track of the total amount converted into their own currency. Since the exchange rate changes from time to time, for example, the average value of the previous month may be used for conversion, or the mobile terminal 450 may acquire the real-time rate and convert it.
読取結果４５６０に示す計量対象商品４１１０１の単価は、「ｋｇ」あたりの単価の他にも、中国での重さの単位「公斤」あたりの中国人民元での単価も併記している。１公斤は１ｋｇあるため、重さについては、換算を要さない。例えば、単価をドルで表す場合には、金額及び重さについても換算し、単価を「ドル／オンス」で併記すればよい。 As for the unit price of the product to be weighed 41101 shown in the reading result 4560, in addition to the unit price per "kg", the unit price in Chinese yuan per unit of weight "public weight" in China is also shown. Since one weight is 1 kg, no conversion is required for the weight. For example, when the unit price is expressed in dollars, the amount and weight may also be converted, and the unit price may be written together in "dollars / ounces".
図７８は、計量装置４３０に表示される外国語表示の待機画面の一例を示す説明図である。図７８に示すように、ディスプレイ４３０６には、待機状態中に表示される待機画面４１２００が中国語で表示されている。これは、言語切替えボタン４１２０１のうち、中国語に切り替える中国語ボタン４１２０１ａが押下されたことによる。言語切替えボタン４１２０１には、日本語ボタン４１２０１ｂが含まれている。日本語ボタン４１２０１ｂが押下されると、日本語の表記に戻る。 FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a standby screen for displaying a foreign language displayed on the weighing device 430. As shown in FIG. 78, the standby screen 41200 displayed in the standby state is displayed in Chinese on the display 4306. This is because the Chinese button 41201a for switching to Chinese was pressed among the language switching buttons 41201. The language switching button 41201 includes a Japanese button 41201b. When the Japanese button 41201b is pressed, the notation returns to Japanese.
図７９は、携帯端末４５０に表示されるペアリング中の外国語表示の画面の一例を示す説明図である。図７９Ａに示すように、携帯端末４５０のディスプレイ４５０９には、計量装置４３０との通信接続を試みている旨を示す状態表示４１３１０が中国語で表示されている。図７９Ｂに示すように、携帯端末４５０のディスプレイ４５０９には、商品を秤に載せることを促す案内表示４１３２０が中国語で表示されている。 FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a foreign language display screen during pairing displayed on the mobile terminal 450. As shown in FIG. 79A, on the display 4509 of the mobile terminal 450, a status display 41310 indicating that a communication connection with the weighing device 430 is being attempted is displayed in Chinese. As shown in FIG. 79B, on the display 4509 of the mobile terminal 450, a guidance display 41320 for urging the product to be placed on the scale is displayed in Chinese.
図８０は、計量装置４３０及び携帯端末４５０に表示される計量中の外国語表示の画面の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen for displaying a foreign language during weighing displayed on the weighing device 430 and the mobile terminal 450.
図８０Ａ~Ｃに示すように、計量装置４３０のディスプレイ４３０６には、各表示が中国語で表示されている。単価欄４１４０６に表示される単価は、日本円の単価のほかにも、中国人民元に換算した単価を示している。重さの単位が「オンス」のように、「ｋｇ」から換算を要する場合には、単価欄４１４０６には、重さについても換算した単価（例えば、「ドル／オンス」）が併記されるようにしてもよい。 As shown in FIGS. 80A to 80C, each display is displayed in Chinese on the display 4306 of the weighing device 430. The unit price displayed in the unit price column 41406 shows the unit price converted into Chinese yuan in addition to the unit price of Japanese yen. When the unit of weight is "ounce" and conversion is required from "kg", the unit price converted for weight (for example, "dollar / ounce") is also written in the unit price column 41406. It may be.
これにより、外国人の顧客は、自国の通貨に換算した単価を把握することができる。図８０Ｂの合計金額欄４１４０７には、日本円の合計金額のほかにも、中国人民元に換算した合計金額も表示されている。これにより、外国人の顧客は、自国の通貨に換算した合計金額を把握することができる。為替レートは随時変わるため、例えば、前月の平均値を用いて換算してもよいし、計量装置４３０がリアルタイムのレートを取得して、換算してもよい。携帯端末４５０についても同様に、図８０Ｄに示すように、ディスプレイ４５０９には、各表示が中国語で表示されている。 As a result, foreign customers can grasp the unit price converted into their own currency. In the total amount column 41407 of FIG. 80B, in addition to the total amount of Japanese yen, the total amount converted into Chinese yuan is also displayed. This allows foreign customers to keep track of the total amount converted into their own currency. Since the exchange rate changes from time to time, for example, the average value of the previous month may be used for conversion, or the measuring device 430 may acquire the real-time rate and convert it. Similarly, for the mobile terminal 450, as shown in FIG. 80D, each display is displayed in Chinese on the display 4509.
図８１は、計量装置４３０が外国語で発行するラベルの一例を示す説明図である。図８１に示すラベル２０００は、ライナーレスラベルである。 FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a label issued by the weighing device 430 in a foreign language. The label 2000 shown in FIG. 81 is a linerless label.
図８１のラベル２０００において、商品名４１５０１には、ラベル２０００が付される商品の名称（リンゴ）が日本語及び中国語で記載されている。単価４１５０２には、リンゴの１ｋｇ当たりの売価が日本語及び中国語で記載されている。内容量４１５０３には、ラベル２０００が付される商品の重量が日本語及び中国語で記載されている。売価４１５０４には、ラベル４１５００が付される商品の金額が日本円の金額及び中国人民元の換算した金額で記載されている。 In the label 2000 of FIG. 81, the product name (apple) to which the label 2000 is attached is described in Japanese and Chinese in the product name 41501. In the unit price 41502, the selling price per 1 kg of apples is described in Japanese and Chinese. In the content 41503, the weight of the product labeled 2000 is described in Japanese and Chinese. In the selling price 41504, the amount of the product labeled 41500 is described in the amount of Japanese yen and the amount converted into Chinese yuan.
ラベル２０００の大きさは、図７６に示したラベル４１５００と比較して異なる。ラベル２０００は、日本語の文字の大きさをラベル４１５００と同程度としながら、中国語の文字を追加している。このため、ラベル２０００の大きさは、ラベル４１５００よりも大きい。このように、外国語で発行されるラベル２０００は、外国語を併記する分、表示領域が大きくなるため、ライナーレスラベルであることが望ましい。特に、ライナーレスラベルを用いることにより、日本語及び外国語の文字を縮小しなくてもよいため、視認性が低下することを抑えることができる。 The size of label 2000 is different from that of label 41500 shown in FIG. Label 2000 adds Chinese characters while keeping the size of Japanese characters about the same as Label 41500. Therefore, the size of the label 2000 is larger than that of the label 41500. As described above, the label 2000 issued in a foreign language is preferably a linerless label because the display area becomes large because the foreign language is also written. In particular, by using the linerless label, it is not necessary to reduce the characters in Japanese and foreign languages, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of visibility.
ただし、ラベル２０００は、ライナーレスラベルに限らず、タックシートであってもよい。タックシートを用いる場合は、シートＳｔのサイズが固定であることから、ラベル２０００に記載する文字の大きさを小さくすればよい。 However, the label 2000 is not limited to the linerless label, and may be a tack sheet. When a tack sheet is used, since the size of the sheet St is fixed, the size of the characters described on the label 2000 may be reduced.
次に、図８２及び図８３を用いて、日本語を表示して精算を行う際の画面の一例を説明する。 Next, an example of a screen for displaying Japanese and performing settlement will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83.
図８２は、携帯端末４５０のディスプレイ４５０９に表示される画面の一例を示す説明図である。 FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen displayed on the display 4509 of the mobile terminal 450.
図８２Ａは、携帯端末４５０に表示される商品を登録する際の画面を示す。図８２Ａに示すように、携帯端末４５０のディスプレイ４５０９には、小計欄４５５０と、本登録欄４５５２と、お会計ボタン４５５４とが表示されている。図８２Ａにおいて、携帯端末４５０は、お会計ボタン４５５４が押下されると、図８２Ｂに示す画面に移行する。 FIG. 82A shows a screen for registering a product displayed on the mobile terminal 450. As shown in FIG. 82A, the subtotal column 4550, the main registration column 4552, and the checkout button 4554 are displayed on the display 4509 of the mobile terminal 450. In FIG. 82A, when the checkout button 4554 is pressed, the mobile terminal 450 shifts to the screen shown in FIG. 82B.
図８２Ｂは、携帯端末４５０に精算用コード４２１００が表示された際の画面を示す。図８２Ｂに示すように、携帯端末４５０のディスプレイ４５０９には、精算用コード４２１００と、案内表示領域４２１０１と、登録復帰ボタン４２１０２とが表示されている。 FIG. 82B shows a screen when the settlement code 42100 is displayed on the mobile terminal 450. As shown in FIG. 82B, the settlement code 42100, the guidance display area 42101, and the registration / return button 42102 are displayed on the display 4509 of the mobile terminal 450.
精算用コード４２１００は、携帯端末４５０のカート識別情報や、クラウドサーバＳｖに対して精算開始の要求を行うための情報をコード化したものである。案内表示領域４２１０１には、ＰＯＳ端末４２０に、精算用コード４２１００を読み取らせる旨の案内が表示されている。登録復帰ボタン４２１０２は、商品をスキャンすることが可能な画面（図８２Ａの画面）に復帰することを受け付けるボタンである。 The settlement code 42100 encodes the cart identification information of the mobile terminal 450 and the information for requesting the cloud server Sv to start settlement. In the guidance display area 42101, guidance indicating that the POS terminal 420 is to read the settlement code 42100 is displayed. The registration return button 42102 is a button that accepts the return to the screen on which the product can be scanned (the screen of FIG. 82A).
ＰＯＳ端末４２０の客側スキャナ４２０６が精算用コード４２１００を読み取ると、ＰＯＳ端末４２０において精算処理が実行可能になる。 When the customer-side scanner 4206 of the POS terminal 420 reads the settlement code 42100, the settlement process can be executed on the POS terminal 420.
図８３は、精算時にＰＯＳ端末４２０の客側ディスプレイ４２０５に表示される画面の遷移の一例を示す説明図である。図８３Ａは、案内画面４２２００を示す。案内画面４２２００は、客側スキャナ４２０６に、精算用コード４２１００（図８２Ｂ参照）を読み取らせることを促す画面である。案内画面４２２００には、言語切替えボタン４２２０１が表示されている。言語切替えボタン４２２０１は、案内画面４２２００に表示される言語を切り替えるボタンであり、例えば、英語、中国語、及び韓国語のいずれかに切り替えることを受け付けるボタンである。 FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of screen transitions displayed on the customer side display 4205 of the POS terminal 420 at the time of payment. FIG. 83A shows the guidance screen 42200. The guidance screen 42200 is a screen that prompts the customer-side scanner 4206 to read the settlement code 42100 (see FIG. 82B). The language switching button 42201 is displayed on the guidance screen 42200. The language switching button 42201 is a button for switching the language displayed on the guidance screen 42200, and is a button for accepting switching to, for example, English, Chinese, or Korean.
図８３Ａに示す案内画面４２２００において、顧客が携帯端末４５０に表示された精算用コード４２１００を客側スキャナ４２０６に読み取らせると、図８３Ｂに示す一覧表示画面４２２１０に遷移する。 On the guidance screen 42200 shown in FIG. 83A, when the customer causes the customer side scanner 4206 to read the settlement code 42100 displayed on the mobile terminal 450, the screen transitions to the list display screen 42210 shown in FIG. 83B.
図８３Ｂは、取引情報の一覧表示画面４２２１０を示す。図８３Ｂに示す一覧表示画面４２２１０は、取引情報表示４２２１１と、精算開始ボタン４２２１２と、店員呼出ボタン４２２１３と、ソートボタン４２２１４とを含む。取引情報表示４２２１１は、登録した商品ごとの、商品名や購入点数（購入重量）や購入金額などを示すほか、登録した各種商品の合計点数や合計金額などを示す。 FIG. 83B shows a transaction information list display screen 42210. The list display screen 42210 shown in FIG. 83B includes a transaction information display 42211, a settlement start button 42212, a clerk call button 42213, and a sort button 42214. The transaction information display 42211 indicates the product name, the number of purchased items (purchased weight), the purchase price, and the like for each registered product, and also indicates the total number of points and the total amount of various registered products.
取引情報表示４２２１１は、携帯端末４５０のディスプレイ４５０９に表示される本登録欄４５５２（図８２Ａ参照）と比較して、表示領域も大きく、顧客にとって見やすい表示である。このように視認性の良好な取引情報表示４２２１１を表示するため、顧客は、自身で登録した商品を容易に確認することができる。取引情報表示４２２１１は、例えば、購入金額の高い商品から順に表示されている。 The transaction information display 42211 has a larger display area than the main registration field 4552 (see FIG. 82A) displayed on the display 4509 of the mobile terminal 450, and is a display that is easy for the customer to see. Since the transaction information display 42211 with good visibility is displayed in this way, the customer can easily confirm the product registered by himself / herself. The transaction information display 42211 is displayed in order from, for example, the products having the highest purchase price.
精算開始ボタン４２２１２は、顧客から精算処理の開始を受け付けるボタンである。店員呼出ボタン４２２１３は、顧客から店員の呼び出しを受け付けるボタンである。ソートボタン４２２１４は、取引情報表示４２２１１に表示される商品の並び順を、登録順としたり、部門別としたりするための変更を受け付けるボタンである。 The settlement start button 42212 is a button that accepts the start of the settlement process from the customer. The clerk call button 42213 is a button that accepts a clerk call from a customer. The sort button 42214 is a button that accepts changes for changing the order of the products displayed on the transaction information display 42211 to be the registration order or the department.
図８３Ｂの取引情報表示４２２１１に表示される商品について具体的に説明する。取引情報表示４２２１１には、３つの商品が登録されている。顧客が取引情報表示４２２１１を確認し、登録した商品と、実際に購入する商品とに相違がなければ、精算開始ボタン４２２１２を押下する。ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、精算開始ボタン４２２１２が押下されると、精算処理が開始される。 The product displayed on the transaction information display 42211 in FIG. 83B will be specifically described. Three products are registered in the transaction information display 42211. The customer confirms the transaction information display 42211, and if there is no difference between the registered product and the product actually purchased, the settlement start button 42212 is pressed. The POS terminal 420 starts the settlement process when the settlement start button 42212 is pressed.
次に、図８４及び図８５を用いて、外国語を表示して精算を行う際の画面の一例を説明する。図８４及び図８５は、図８２及び図８３に示した内容を外国語（例えば中国語）で表示した場合を示す。 Next, an example of a screen for displaying a foreign language and performing settlement will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. 84 and 85 show a case where the contents shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 are displayed in a foreign language (for example, Chinese).
図８４は、携帯端末４５０のディスプレイ４５０９に中国語で表示される画面の一例を示す説明図である。図８４Ａ、Ｂにおいて、携帯端末４５０のディスプレイ４５０９には、図８２Ａ及び８２Ｂに示した内容が中国語で表示されている。図８４Ａの小計欄４５５０には、本登録された商品の合計金額のほかにも、中国語の通貨（中国人民元）に換算した金額も表示されている。 FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen displayed in Chinese on the display 4509 of the mobile terminal 450. In FIGS. 84A and 84B, the contents shown in FIGS. 82A and 82B are displayed in Chinese on the display 4509 of the mobile terminal 450. In the subtotal column 4550 of FIG. 84A, in addition to the total amount of the registered products, the amount converted into the Chinese currency (Chinese yuan) is also displayed.
図８５は、精算時にＰＯＳ端末４２０の客側ディスプレイ４２０５に外国語で表示される画面の遷移の一例を示す説明図である。図８５Ａ、８５Ｂは、図８３Ａ、８３Ｂに示した内容が中国語で表示されている。 FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of screen transitions displayed in a foreign language on the customer side display 4205 of the POS terminal 420 at the time of payment. In FIGS. 85A and 85B, the contents shown in FIGS. 83A and 83B are displayed in Chinese.
図８５Ａにおいて、案内画面４２２００は、言語切替えボタン４２２０１のうち、中国語に切り替える中国語ボタン４２２０１ａが押下されたことによって表示される。図８５Ａの言語切替えボタン４２２０１には、日本語ボタン４２２０１ｂが含まれている。日本語ボタン４２２０１ｂが押下されると、日本語の表記に戻る。 In FIG. 85A, the guidance screen 42200 is displayed when the Chinese button 42201a for switching to Chinese is pressed among the language switching buttons 42201. The language switching button 42201 of FIG. 85A includes a Japanese button 42201b. When the Japanese button 42201b is pressed, the notation returns to Japanese.
図８５Ｂの一覧表示画面４２２１０は、ＰＯＳ端末４２０がクラウドサーバＳｖから、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報を含む登録情報を受信することによって、中国語で表示される。一覧表示画面４２２１０は、言語情報を受信することによって表示されることに限らず、図８５Ａの案内画面４２２００において中国語ボタン４２２０１ａが押下されたことによって表示されるようにしてもよい。 The list display screen 42210 of FIG. 85B is displayed in Chinese when the POS terminal 420 receives the registration information including the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 from the cloud server Sv. The list display screen 42210 is not limited to being displayed by receiving language information, and may be displayed by pressing the Chinese button 42201a on the guidance screen 42200 of FIG. 85A.
以上説明したように、第４の実施形態における計量装置４３０は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報に応じた言語で、取引に関する情報を出力するようにした。したがって、計量装置４３０が使用する言語を、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報に応じた言語に自動で切り替えることができる。すなわち、販売システム１が導入されている店舗における言語を把握できない外国人の顧客でも、当該顧客が把握可能な言語を店員に口頭で伝えたり、顧客が把握可能な言語に切り替えるための操作を顧客自身で行ったりしなくても、当該顧客が使用する言語で取引に関する情報を出力することができる。したがって、店舗で使用される言語とは異なる言語を使用する外国人等の顧客でも、買い物を好適に行うことを支援することができる。 As described above, the weighing device 430 according to the fourth embodiment outputs information related to transactions in a language corresponding to one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. Therefore, the language used by the weighing device 430 can be automatically switched to the language corresponding to one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. That is, even a foreign customer who cannot grasp the language in the store where the sales system 1 is introduced can verbally convey the language that the customer can understand to the clerk or perform an operation for switching to the language that the customer can understand. You can output information about the transaction in the language used by the customer, without having to do it yourself. Therefore, it is possible to support customers such as foreigners who use a language different from the language used in the store to shop appropriately.
第４の実施形態における計量装置４３０は、計量を行う際に、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報に応じた言語で計量情報を出力するようにした。したがって、外国人の顧客が計量装置４３０を用いて計量対象商品を計量する際に、当該計量を好適に支援することができる。 When weighing, the weighing device 430 according to the fourth embodiment outputs the weighing information in a language corresponding to one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. Therefore, when a foreign customer weighs a product to be weighed using the weighing device 430, the weighing can be suitably supported.
第４の実施形態における計量装置４３０は、計量した商品の重量の情報を、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報に応じた重量の単位に換算して出力するようにした。これにより、外国人の顧客が母国で使用している重量の単位で、取引に関する情報を出力することができる。したがって、外国人の顧客が計量装置４３０を用いて計量対象商品を計量する際に、計量対象商品の重量を容易に把握することができる。 The weighing device 430 according to the fourth embodiment converts the weight information of the weighed product into a weight unit corresponding to one linguistic information set in the mobile terminal 450 and outputs the information. This makes it possible to output transaction-related information in units of weight used by foreign customers in their home countries. Therefore, when a foreign customer weighs a product to be weighed using the weighing device 430, the weight of the product to be weighed can be easily grasped.
第４の実施形態における計量装置４３０は、商品の買上金額の情報を、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報に応じた通貨に換算して出力するようにした。これにより、外国人の顧客が母国で使用している通貨で、取引に関する情報を出力することができる。したがって、外国人の顧客が商品を購入する際の金銭的価値を容易に把握することができる。 The weighing device 430 according to the fourth embodiment converts the information on the purchase price of the product into a currency corresponding to one language information set in the mobile terminal 450 and outputs the information. This makes it possible to output information about transactions in the currency used by foreign customers in their home countries. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the monetary value when a foreign customer purchases a product.
第４の実施形態における計量装置４３０は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報に応じた言語で、ラベルを発行するようにした。これにより、外国人の顧客は、ラベルに記載された内容を容易に把握することができる。 The weighing device 430 according to the fourth embodiment issues a label in a language corresponding to one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. As a result, the foreign customer can easily grasp the contents written on the label.
第４の実施形態におけるＰＯＳ端末４２０は、精算において、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報に応じた言語で、取引に関する情報（登録情報）を出力するようにした。これにより、販売システム１が導入されている店舗における言語を把握できない外国人の顧客でも、顧客が把握できる言語を店員に口頭で伝えたり、顧客が把握可能な言語を切り替えるための操作を顧客自身で行ったりしなくても、当該顧客が使用する言語で精算を行うことができる。したがって、外国人の顧客が精算を行う際に、当該精算を好適に支援することができる。 The POS terminal 420 in the fourth embodiment outputs information (registration information) related to transactions in a language corresponding to one language information set in the mobile terminal 450 at the time of settlement. As a result, even a foreign customer who cannot understand the language in the store where the sales system 1 is introduced can verbally convey the language that the customer can understand to the clerk or perform an operation for switching the language that the customer can understand. You can settle in the language used by the customer without having to go to. Therefore, when a foreign customer makes a payment, the payment can be suitably supported.
次に、上記第１の例の変形例を説明する。以下の変形例では、上述した第４の実施形態の第１の例で説明した内容については、適宜説明を省略する。 Next, a modification of the first example will be described. In the following modified examples, the contents described in the first example of the fourth embodiment described above will be omitted as appropriate.
（変形例１） (Modification example 1)
上述した第１の例では、計量装置４３０が、携帯端末４５０から言語情報を直接取得する構成について説明した。このような構成に加えて、または、このような構成に代えて、変形例１では、計量装置４３０が、会員情報から言語情報を取得する構成を説明する。 In the first example described above, the configuration in which the weighing device 430 acquires linguistic information directly from the mobile terminal 450 has been described. In addition to or in place of such a configuration, in the first modification, a configuration in which the weighing device 430 acquires linguistic information from the member information will be described.
変形例１において、クラウドサーバＳｖは、会員情報を記憶する。会員情報は、例えば、図６７Ａに示した顧客情報に言語情報が含まれる情報である。言語情報は、顧客識別情報に対応付けられて記憶されている。言語情報は、会員登録の際に顧客が選択した言語である。言語情報は、顧客の居住地や国籍から得られるようにしてもよい。 In the first modification, the cloud server Sv stores the member information. The member information is, for example, information including language information in the customer information shown in FIG. 67A. The language information is stored in association with the customer identification information. The language information is the language selected by the customer at the time of membership registration. Linguistic information may be obtained from the customer's place of residence or nationality.
計量装置４３０は、計量対象商品の計量を開始する前に、会員カードに記載されている会員コードや、携帯端末４５０に表示される会員コードを読み取る。会員コードを読み取るタイミングは、携帯端末４５０とのペアリングが開始される前でもよいし、後でもよい。会員コードは、顧客識別情報を含む情報をコード化したものである。 The weighing device 430 reads the membership code written on the membership card and the membership code displayed on the mobile terminal 450 before starting the weighing of the product to be weighed. The timing of reading the membership code may be before or after the pairing with the mobile terminal 450 is started. The membership code is a code of information including customer identification information.
計量装置４３０は、会員コードを読み取ると、クラウドサーバＳｖに言語情報の問い合わせを行う。具体的には、計量装置４３０は、読み取った会員コードをクラウドサーバＳｖへ送信するとともに、クラウドサーバＳｖに当該会員に対応する言語情報の送信要求を行う。 When the weighing device 430 reads the membership code, it inquires the cloud server Sv for language information. Specifically, the weighing device 430 transmits the read member code to the cloud server Sv, and also requests the cloud server Sv to transmit the language information corresponding to the member.
クラウドサーバＳｖは、会員情報を参照し、計量装置４３０から受信した会員コード（顧客識別情報）に対応する言語情報を特定し、当該言語情報を計量装置４３０に送信する。これにより、計量装置４３０は、言語情報を取得することができる。会員情報から言語情報を取得するようにした場合、計量装置４３０が表示する接続用コードには、計量装置４３０宛てに言語情報を送信する旨の情報が含まれないようにしてもよい。 The cloud server Sv refers to the member information, identifies the language information corresponding to the member code (customer identification information) received from the measuring device 430, and transmits the language information to the measuring device 430. As a result, the weighing device 430 can acquire linguistic information. When the language information is acquired from the member information, the connection code displayed by the measuring device 430 may not include the information that the language information is transmitted to the measuring device 430.
変形例１において、会員情報は、クラウドサーバＳｖに記憶されることとしたが、これに限らない。会員情報は、例えば、ストアコントローラ４１０など、他の装置に記憶されていてもよい。この場合、計量装置４３０は、当該他の装置に言語情報の問い合わせを行えばよい。 In the first modification, the member information is stored in the cloud server Sv, but the present invention is not limited to this. The member information may be stored in another device such as the store controller 410. In this case, the weighing device 430 may inquire the other device for language information.
変形例１によれば、計量装置４３０は、会員情報から特定される言語情報が示す言語で、取引に関する情報を出力することができる。つまり、計量装置４３０は、会員情報から得られる一の言語情報に応じた言語に自動で切り替えることができる。したがって、使用する言語が異なる外国人の顧客が買い物を行う際に、当該顧客の買い物を好適に支援することができる。 According to the first modification, the weighing device 430 can output information related to the transaction in the language indicated by the language information specified from the member information. That is, the weighing device 430 can automatically switch to a language corresponding to one language information obtained from the member information. Therefore, when a foreign customer who uses a different language makes a purchase, it is possible to preferably support the customer's shopping.
（変形例２） (Modification 2)
上述した第４の実施形態の第１の例では、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、携帯端末４５０がクラウドサーバＳｖへ送信した言語情報を取得する構成について説明した。このような構成に加えて、または、このような構成に代えて、変形例２では、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、変形例１と同様に、会員情報から言語情報を取得する構成を説明する。 In the first example of the fourth embodiment described above, the configuration in which the POS terminal 420 acquires the language information transmitted by the mobile terminal 450 to the cloud server Sv has been described. In addition to or in place of such a configuration, in the second modification, the configuration in which the POS terminal 420 acquires language information from the member information will be described as in the first modification.
変形例２において、クラウドサーバＳｖは、変形例１と同様に、会員情報を記憶する。ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、精算を開始する前に、会員カードに記載されている会員コードや、携帯端末４５０に表示される会員コードを読み取る。会員コードを読み取るタイミングは、携帯端末４５０に表示される精算用コードを読み取る前でもよいし、後でもよい。 In the second modification, the cloud server Sv stores the member information as in the first modification. The POS terminal 420 reads the membership code written on the membership card and the membership code displayed on the mobile terminal 450 before starting the settlement. The timing of reading the membership code may be before or after reading the settlement code displayed on the mobile terminal 450.
ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、会員コードを読み取ると、クラウドサーバＳｖに言語情報の問い合わせを行う。具体的には、計量装置４３０は、読み取った会員コードをクラウドサーバＳｖへ送信するとともに、クラウドサーバＳｖに当該会員に対応する言語情報の送信要求を行う。 When the POS terminal 420 reads the membership code, it inquires the cloud server Sv for language information. Specifically, the weighing device 430 transmits the read member code to the cloud server Sv, and also requests the cloud server Sv to transmit the language information corresponding to the member.
クラウドサーバＳｖは、会員情報を参照し、ＰＯＳ端末４２０から受信した会員コード（顧客識別情報）に対応する言語情報を特定し、当該言語情報をＰＯＳ端末４２０に送信する。これにより、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、言語情報を取得することができる。会員情報から言語情報を取得するようにした場合、ＰＯＳ端末４２０がクラウドサーバＳｖに送信する送信要求情報（図７の送受信データＤ５参照）には、言語情報の送信要求を示す情報が含まれないようにしてもよい。 The cloud server Sv refers to the member information, identifies the language information corresponding to the member code (customer identification information) received from the POS terminal 420, and transmits the language information to the POS terminal 420. As a result, the POS terminal 420 can acquire language information. When the language information is acquired from the member information, the transmission request information (see transmission / reception data D5 in FIG. 7) transmitted by the POS terminal 420 to the cloud server Sv does not include information indicating the transmission request of the language information. You may do so.
変形例２によれば、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、会員情報から特定される言語情報が示す言語で、取引に関する情報を出力することができる。つまり、ＰＯＳ端末４２０は、会員情報から得られる一の言語情報に応じた言語に自動で切り替えることができる。したがって、使用する言語が異なる外国人の顧客が買い物を行う際に、当該顧客の買い物を好適に支援することができる。 According to the second modification, the POS terminal 420 can output information related to the transaction in the language indicated by the language information specified from the member information. That is, the POS terminal 420 can automatically switch to a language corresponding to one language information obtained from the member information. Therefore, when a foreign customer who uses a different language makes a purchase, it is possible to preferably support the customer's shopping.
（第４の実施形態の第２の例） (Second example of the fourth embodiment)
次に、第４の実施形態の第２の例を説明する。上述した第４の実施形態の第１の例では、ＰＯＳ端末４２０と、計量装置４３０と、携帯端末４５０とを含む販売システム１に本発明を適用した構成について説明した。第４の実施形態の第２の例では、券売機と、呼出ディスプレイとを含む販売システムに本発明を適用した構成を説明する。以下の各実施形態では、上述した第４の実施形態の第１の例で説明した内容については、適宜説明を省略する。 Next, a second example of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the first example of the fourth embodiment described above, the configuration in which the present invention is applied to the sales system 1 including the POS terminal 420, the weighing device 430, and the mobile terminal 450 has been described. In the second example of the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which the present invention is applied to a sales system including a ticket vending machine and a call display will be described. In each of the following embodiments, the contents described in the first example of the fourth embodiment described above will be omitted as appropriate.
図８６は、第４の実施形態の第２の例における販売システム５５００のネットワーク構成を示す説明図である。販売システム５５００は、取引情報出力システムの一例である。販売システム５５００は、例えば、顧客が食券を購入して、調理が完了すると、顧客が商品（料理）を受け取るセルフサービス式の飲食店に用いられる。セルフサービス式の飲食店は、例えば、フードコート、ラーメン店、カレー店、牛丼店などである。 FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing a network configuration of the sales system 5500 in the second example of the fourth embodiment. The sales system 5500 is an example of a transaction information output system. The sales system 5500 is used, for example, in a self-service restaurant where a customer purchases a meal ticket and when the cooking is completed, the customer receives a product (cooking). Self-service restaurants include, for example, food courts, ramen shops, curry shops, and beef bowl shops.
図８６において、販売システム５５００は、券売機５５１０と、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０と、キッチンモニタ５５３０と、キッチンプリンタ５５４０とを含む。これらの各機器は、ＬＡＮ５５５０を介して、通信可能に接続されている。これらの各機器は、それぞれ、ＣＰＵ、ＲＯＭ、ＲＡＭ、通信部、ディスプレイなどを備えたコンピュータ装置である。券売機５５１０は、端末装置の一例である。呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、取引情報出力装置の一例である。 In FIG. 86, the sales system 5500 includes a ticket vending machine 5510, a call display 5520, a kitchen monitor 5530, and a kitchen printer 5540. Each of these devices is communicably connected via LAN5550. Each of these devices is a computer device including a CPU, ROM, RAM, communication unit, display, and the like. The ticket vending machine 5510 is an example of a terminal device. The call display 5520 is an example of a transaction information output device.
券売機５５１０は、例えば、店舗の入口付近に設置され、飲食店において提供される商品（調理メニュー）に対応する食券を発行する。顧客は、店舗に入店すると、券売機５５１０に現金を投入したり、電子マネーを読み取らせたりすることにより、券売機５５１０で食券を購入する。券売機５５１０は、食券を発行すると、当該食券に対応する登録情報をキッチンモニタ５５３０やキッチンプリンタ５５４０へ送信する。これにより、厨房の店員は、当該食券に対応する商品（料理）の注文が入ったことを把握することができる。顧客は、食券を購入すると、調理が完了するまで待つ。食券には、注文番号が記載されている。 The ticket vending machine 5510 is installed near the entrance of the store, for example, and issues a meal ticket corresponding to the product (cooking menu) provided at the restaurant. When a customer enters a store, he / she purchases a meal ticket at the ticket vending machine 5510 by inserting cash into the ticket vending machine 5510 or having the customer read electronic money. When the ticket vending machine 5510 issues a meal ticket, the ticket vending machine 5510 transmits the registration information corresponding to the meal ticket to the kitchen monitor 5530 and the kitchen printer 5540. As a result, the kitchen clerk can know that the product (cooking) corresponding to the meal ticket has been ordered. When a customer purchases a meal ticket, he waits until cooking is complete. The order number is written on the meal ticket.
呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、店舗内の顧客が視認できる位置に配置されている。例えば、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、商品を引き渡す窓口の上方に配置されている。呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、食券に記載された注文番号を表示する。具体的には、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、注文番号に対応する商品が調理中である場合に、当該注文番号を、調理中であることを示す表示領域（以下「調理中領域」という。）に表示する。呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、注文番号に対応する商品の調理が完了した場合に、当該注文番号を、調理が完了したことを示す表示領域（以下「調理完了領域」という。）に表示する。顧客は、食券に記載されている注文番号が、調理が完了したことを示す表示領域に表示されると、商品を引き取りに行き、取引が完了する。 The call display 5520 is arranged at a position in the store where customers can see it. For example, the call display 5520 is located above the window for delivering the goods. The call display 5520 displays the order number written on the meal ticket. Specifically, when the product corresponding to the order number is being cooked, the call display 5520 displays the order number in a display area (hereinafter referred to as “cooking area”) indicating that the product is being cooked. do. When the cooking of the product corresponding to the order number is completed, the calling display 5520 displays the order number in a display area (hereinafter, referred to as “cooking completion area”) indicating that the cooking is completed. When the order number printed on the meal ticket is displayed in the display area indicating that the cooking is completed, the customer goes to pick up the product and completes the transaction.
キッチンモニタ５５３０は、厨房内に配置され、券売機５５１０が受け付けた注文内容を表示する。キッチンモニタ５５３０は、注文内容が示す料理の調理が完了すると、その旨を厨房内の店員から受け付ける。キッチンモニタ５５３０は、調理が完了する旨を示す情報を呼出ディスプレイ５５２０へ送信する。 The kitchen monitor 5530 is arranged in the kitchen and displays the order contents accepted by the ticket vending machine 5510. When the cooking of the dish indicated by the order contents is completed, the kitchen monitor 5530 receives the fact from the clerk in the kitchen. The kitchen monitor 5530 transmits information indicating that cooking is completed to the calling display 5520.
キッチンプリンタ５５４０は、厨房内に配置され、券売機５５１０が受け付けた注文内容を印刷する。 The kitchen printer 5540 is arranged in the kitchen and prints the order contents accepted by the ticket vending machine 5510.
次に、券売機５５１０の構成例を説明する。図８７は、券売機５５１０の外観の一例を示す説明図である。図８８は、券売機５５１０のハードウェア構成の一例を示す説明図である。以下、図８７を参照しつつ、図８８に示す構成を説明する。 Next, a configuration example of the ticket vending machine 5510 will be described. FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the appearance of the ticket vending machine 5510. FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the ticket vending machine 5510. Hereinafter, the configuration shown in FIG. 88 will be described with reference to FIG. 87.
券売機５５１０は、ＣＰＵ５６０１と、ＲＯＭ５６０２と、ＲＡＭ５６０３と、ディスプレイ５６０４と、キー操作部５６０５と、カード決済部５６０６と、釣銭機５６０７と、印刷部５６０８と、通信部５６０９と、音声出力部５６１０とを備える。これらは、バス５６２０を介して相互に通信可能に接続されている。 The ticket vending machine 5510 includes a CPU 5601, a ROM 5602, a RAM 5603, a display 5604, a key operation unit 5605, a card payment unit 5606, a change machine 5607, a printing unit 5608, a communication unit 5609, and an audio output unit 5610. To be equipped. They are communicably connected to each other via bus 5620.
ＣＰＵ５６０１は、中央演算処理装置であり、ＲＯＭ５６０２に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行することにより、券売機５５１０の動作を制御する。 The CPU 5601 is a central processing unit, and controls the operation of the ticket vending machine 5510 by reading and executing various programs stored in the ROM 5602.
ＲＯＭ５６０２は、読み出し専用メモリであり、プログラムをはじめとしてＣＰＵ５６０１が利用する各種の情報を記憶する。 The ROM 5602 is a read-only memory, and stores various information used by the CPU 5601 including a program.
ＲＡＭ５６０３は、読み出しや書き込みが可能なメモリであり、種々の情報を記憶する。例えば、ＲＡＭ５６０３は、ＲＯＭ５６０２から読み出した情報や、外部から取得した情報や、処理において生成した販売データや注文情報等を記憶する。ＲＡＭ５６０３は、各種言語に対応した言語情報を記憶する。ＲＡＭ５６０３は、言語関連テーブル４４２０（図６５Ｂ参照）と同等のテーブル（以下「券売機５５１０の言語関連テーブル」という。）を記憶する。 RAM5603 is a memory that can be read and written, and stores various information. For example, the RAM 5603 stores information read from the ROM 5602, information acquired from the outside, sales data generated in the process, order information, and the like. RAM5603 stores linguistic information corresponding to various languages. The RAM 5603 stores a table equivalent to the language-related table 4420 (see FIG. 65B) (hereinafter referred to as “language-related table of ticket vending machine 5510”).
ディスプレイ５６０４は、各種情報を表示するとともに、各種操作を受け付けるタッチパネルである。ディスプレイ５６０４は、顧客が購入可能な各種商品を表示するとともに、例えば、テイクアウトであるか否かの指定や、表示する言語の指定や、商品サイズの指定や、数量の指定や、発券ボタンの指定などを顧客から受け付ける。ディスプレイ５６０４は、指定された言語で、各種情報を表示する。 The display 5604 is a touch panel that displays various information and accepts various operations. The display 5604 displays various products that can be purchased by the customer, and for example, specifies whether or not it is a takeout, specifies the language to be displayed, specifies the product size, specifies the quantity, and specifies the ticketing button. Etc. are accepted from customers. The display 5604 displays various information in the designated language.
カード決済部５６０６は、各種カードによる決済機構である。各種カードは、クレジットカード、電子マネーであるプリペイドカード、ポイントカードなどである。カード決済部５６０６は、各種カードの情報を磁気的または電気的に読み取る。読み取られた情報は、商品の精算に用いられる。 The card payment unit 5606 is a payment mechanism using various cards. Various cards include credit cards, prepaid cards that are electronic money, and point cards. The card payment unit 5606 magnetically or electrically reads information on various cards. The read information is used for the settlement of goods.
釣銭機５６０７（現金決済部）は、現金による決済機構である。具体的には、釣銭機５６０７は、図８７に示すように、紙幣投入口５６０７ａと、硬貨投入口５６０７ｂと、お釣り返却レバー５６０７ｃと、紙幣排出口５６０７ｄと、硬貨排出口５６０７ｅとを備える。釣銭機５６０７は、紙幣投入口５６０７ａ及び硬貨投入口５６０７ｂへの投入金額を算出し、投入金額と買上金額の差分である釣銭金額を算出し、お釣り返却レバー５６０７ｃの操作を受け付けると、紙幣排出口５６０７ｄまたは硬貨排出口５６０７ｅから釣り銭を排出する。 The change machine 5607 (cash settlement unit) is a cash settlement mechanism. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 87, the change machine 5607 includes a bill insertion slot 5607a, a coin insertion slot 5607b, a change return lever 5607c, a bill discharge port 5607d, and a coin discharge port 5607e. The change machine 5607 calculates the amount of money to be inserted into the bill insertion slot 5607a and the coin insertion slot 5607b, calculates the change amount which is the difference between the insertion amount and the purchase amount, and when the operation of the change return lever 5607c is received, the bill discharge port Change is discharged from the 5607d or the coin outlet 5607e.
印刷部５６０８は、各種媒体（食券、レシート、領収書など）を印刷して出力する。 The printing unit 5608 prints and outputs various media (food tickets, receipts, receipts, etc.).
通信部５６０９は、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０や、キッチンモニタ５５３０や、キッチンプリンタ５５４０などと情報を送受信するインターフェースである。通信部５６０９は、注文情報を、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０や、キッチンモニタ５５３０や、キッチンプリンタ５５４０へ送信する。注文情報は、登録した商品の名称、サイズ、数量、注文番号などのほか、ディスプレイ５６０４が指定の言語を受け付けた場合には、当該言語を示す言語情報も含む。 The communication unit 5609 is an interface for transmitting and receiving information to and from the calling display 5520, the kitchen monitor 5530, the kitchen printer 5540, and the like. The communication unit 5609 transmits the order information to the calling display 5520, the kitchen monitor 5530, and the kitchen printer 5540. The order information includes the name, size, quantity, order number, and the like of the registered product, as well as language information indicating the language when the display 5604 accepts the designated language.
音声出力部５６１０は、音声を出力する。例えば、音声出力部５６１０は、音声ガイダンスや警告音などを出力する。音声ガイダンスや警告音は、例えば、商品の登録や精算におけるものである。音声出力部５６１０は、指定された言語で、音声ガイダンスを出力することが可能である。 The audio output unit 5610 outputs audio. For example, the voice output unit 5610 outputs voice guidance, a warning sound, and the like. Voice guidance and warning sounds are, for example, in product registration and settlement. The voice output unit 5610 can output voice guidance in a designated language.
次に、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０の構成例を説明する。図８９は、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０のハードウェア構成の一例を示す説明図である。図８９に示すように、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、ＣＰＵ５８０１と、メモリ５８０２と、通信部５８０３と、ディスプレイ５８０４と、音声出力部５８０５とを備える。これらは、バス５８２０を介して相互に通信可能に接続されている。 Next, a configuration example of the call display 5520 will be described. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the calling display 5520. As shown in FIG. 89, the calling display 5520 includes a CPU 5801, a memory 5802, a communication unit 5803, a display 5804, and an audio output unit 5805. They are communicably connected to each other via bus 5820.
ＣＰＵ５８０１は、中央演算処理装置であり、メモリ５８０２に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行することにより、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０の動作を制御する。 The CPU 5801 is a central processing unit, and controls the operation of the call display 5520 by reading and executing various programs stored in the memory 5802.
メモリ５８０２は、プログラムをはじめとしてＣＰＵ５８０１が利用する各種の情報を記憶する。メモリ５８０２は、外部から取得した情報や、処理において生成した情報等を記憶する。メモリ５８０２は、各種言語に対応した言語情報を記憶する。メモリ５８０２は、言語関連テーブル４４２０（図６５Ｂ参照）と同等のテーブル（以下「呼出ディスプレイの言語関連テーブル」という。）を記憶する。 The memory 5802 stores various information used by the CPU 5801 including the program. The memory 5802 stores information acquired from the outside, information generated in the process, and the like. The memory 5802 stores linguistic information corresponding to various languages. The memory 5802 stores a table equivalent to the language-related table 4420 (see FIG. 65B) (hereinafter referred to as “language-related table of the calling display”).
通信部５８０３は、券売機５５１０や、キッチンモニタ５５３０や、キッチンプリンタ５５４０などと情報を送受信するインターフェースである。例えば、通信部５８０３は、券売機５５１０から注文情報を受信するとともに、キッチンモニタ５５３０から調理が完了したことを示す情報（以下「調理完了情報」という。）を受信する。 The communication unit 5803 is an interface for transmitting and receiving information to and from a ticket vending machine 5510, a kitchen monitor 5530, a kitchen printer 5540, and the like. For example, the communication unit 5803 receives order information from the ticket vending machine 5510 and also receives information indicating that cooking has been completed from the kitchen monitor 5530 (hereinafter referred to as “cooking completion information”).
ディスプレイ５８０４は、各種情報を表示する。具体的には、ディスプレイ５８０４は、調理中領域と、調理完了領域とを設け、各領域を示す情報と、注文番号とを表示する。各領域を示す情報は、調理中であることを示す文字情報（例えば、「調理中です」の文字情報）や、調理が完了したことを示す文字情報（例えば、「料理ができました」の文字情報）である。ディスプレイ５８０４は、券売機５５１０から受信した言語情報に応じた言語で、文字情報を表示することが可能である。 The display 5804 displays various information. Specifically, the display 5804 provides a cooking area and a cooking completion area, and displays information indicating each area and an order number. The information indicating each area includes character information indicating that cooking is in progress (for example, character information indicating that "cooking is in progress") and character information indicating that cooking is completed (for example, "cooking is complete"). Character information). The display 5804 can display character information in a language corresponding to the language information received from the ticket vending machine 5510.
ディスプレイ５８０４は、食券に記載された注文番号に対応する商品が調理中である場合に、当該商品に対応する注文番号を、調理中領域に表示する。そして、食券に記載された注文番号に対応する商品の調理が完了すると、具体的には、キッチンモニタ５５３０から調理完了情報を受信すると、ディスプレイ５８０４は、当該商品に対応する注文番号を、調理中領域から消去して、調理完了領域に表示する（切り替える）。 When the product corresponding to the order number written on the meal ticket is being cooked, the display 5804 displays the order number corresponding to the product in the cooking area. Then, when the cooking of the product corresponding to the order number written on the meal ticket is completed, specifically, when the cooking completion information is received from the kitchen monitor 5530, the display 5804 is cooking the order number corresponding to the product. Erase from the area and display (switch) in the cooking completion area.
当該注文番号の調理中領域から調理完了領域への表示の切替えは、キッチンモニタ５５３０から調理完了情報を受信することによって行われることに限らない。例えば、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０が、店員の操作入力を受け付ける操作部を備える構成とすることも可能であり、このような構成とした場合には、当該表示の切替えは、当該操作部が調理の完了を示す操作を受け付けることによって行われてもよい。 The switching of the display of the order number from the cooking area to the cooking completion area is not limited to being performed by receiving the cooking completion information from the kitchen monitor 5530. For example, the call display 5520 may be configured to include an operation unit that receives an operation input of a clerk. In such a configuration, the operation unit completes cooking when switching the display. It may be performed by accepting the indicated operation.
音声出力部５８０５は、音声を出力する。例えば、音声出力部５８０５は、注文番号を音声で出力する。音声出力部５８０５は、券売機５５１０から受信した言語情報に応じた言語で、注文番号を音声で出力することが可能である。 The audio output unit 5805 outputs audio. For example, the voice output unit 5805 outputs the order number by voice. The voice output unit 5805 can output the order number by voice in a language corresponding to the language information received from the ticket vending machine 5510.
（呼出ディスプレイ５５２０の機能的構成） (Functional configuration of call display 5520)
次に、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０の機能的構成を説明する。呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、通信部５８０３と、取得部と、出力制御部と、ディスプレイ５８０４とを備える。取得部と、出力制御部とは、ＣＰＵ５８０１によって実現される。すなわち、ＣＰＵ５８０１がメモリ５８０２に記憶されている取引情報出力プログラムを実行することにより、各部の機能を実現する。 Next, the functional configuration of the calling display 5520 will be described. The calling display 5520 includes a communication unit 5803, an acquisition unit, an output control unit, and a display 5804. The acquisition unit and the output control unit are realized by the CPU 5801. That is, the CPU 5801 realizes the functions of each part by executing the transaction information output program stored in the memory 5802.
通信部５８０３は、端末装置の一例である券売機５５１０と通信を行う。券売機５５１０には、一の言語情報が設定されており、設定されている言語情報が示す言語で画面を表示する。具体的には、券売機５５１０は、顧客の操作に応じて、一の言語情報を設定する。券売機５５１０は、顧客の操作を受け付ける。 The communication unit 5803 communicates with the ticket vending machine 5510, which is an example of a terminal device. One language information is set in the ticket vending machine 5510, and the screen is displayed in the language indicated by the set language information. Specifically, the ticket vending machine 5510 sets one language information according to the operation of the customer. The ticket vending machine 5510 accepts customer operations.
取得部は、通信部５８０３の通信によって、券売機５５１０に設定されている一の言語情報を取得する。ここで、券売機５５１０は、発券ボタンが押下されると、計量装置４３０に一の言語情報を送信する。このように、券売機５５１０から一の言語情報が送信されることにより、取得部は、一の言語情報を取得する。 The acquisition unit acquires one language information set in the ticket vending machine 5510 by the communication of the communication unit 5803. Here, when the ticket issuing button is pressed, the ticket vending machine 5510 transmits one language information to the weighing device 430. By transmitting one language information from the ticket vending machine 5510 in this way, the acquisition unit acquires one language information.
出力制御部は、取得部によって取得された一の言語情報に応じた言語で、取引に関する情報を出力する。具体的には、出力制御部は、券売機５５１０に設定された言語情報が日本語を示す場合、日本語で取引に関する情報をディスプレイ５８０４に表示させる。一方で、出力制御部は、券売機５５１０に設定された言語情報が日本語以外の他の言語を示す場合、日本語と他の言語とを併記して取引に関する情報をディスプレイ５８０４に表示させる。 The output control unit outputs information related to transactions in a language corresponding to one language information acquired by the acquisition unit. Specifically, when the language information set in the ticket vending machine 5510 indicates Japanese, the output control unit causes the display 5804 to display information related to the transaction in Japanese. On the other hand, when the language information set in the ticket vending machine 5510 indicates a language other than Japanese, the output control unit displays Japanese and other languages together on the display 5804.
取引に関する情報は、顧客に商品を引き渡すための引渡情報を含む。引渡し情報は、商品を顧客に引渡すことが可能であるか否かを示す情報であり、例えば、注文番号に対応する商品が調理中であるのか、調理が完了したのかを示す文字情報である。出力制御部による取引に関する情報の出力態様は、音声や表示の出力態様である。 Information about the transaction includes delivery information for delivering the goods to the customer. The delivery information is information indicating whether or not the product can be delivered to the customer, and is, for example, character information indicating whether the product corresponding to the order number is being cooked or cooking is completed. The output mode of the information related to the transaction by the output control unit is the output mode of voice or display.
出力制御部は、ディスプレイ５８０４に情報を表示する際に、券売機５５１０に設定されている一の言語情報に応じた言語で引渡情報を出力する。具体的には、出力制御部は、券売機５５１０に設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語で取引に関する情報を出力する。第４の実施形態の第２の例において、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、券売機５５１０で設定されている言語と同一の言語を設定することが可能である。言い換えれば、出力制御部は、券売機５５１０に設定された一の言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語を必ず出力できるものとする。 When displaying information on the display 5804, the output control unit outputs delivery information in a language corresponding to one language information set in the ticket vending machine 5510. Specifically, the output control unit outputs information related to transactions in the same language as the language indicated by one language information set in the ticket vending machine 5510. In the second example of the fourth embodiment, the calling display 5520 can be set to the same language as the language set by the ticket vending machine 5510. In other words, the output control unit can always output the same language as the language indicated by one language information set in the ticket vending machine 5510.
呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、券売機５５１０に設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語を出力できない場合があってもよい。例えば、券売機５５１０が１０種類の言語に対応しており、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０が３種類の言語に対応している場合があってもよい。言い換えれば、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０の言語関連テーブルに、当該一の言語情報と同一の言語情報が記憶されていない場合があってもよい。この場合、出力制御部は、当該一の言語情報に対応する他の言語で、取引に関する情報を出力すればよい。具体的には、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、対応言語テーブル４４３０（図６５Ｃ参照）と同等のテーブルを記憶しておき、当該テーブルを参照し、対応言語で、取引に関する情報を出力すればよい。 The call display 5520 may not be able to output the same language as the language indicated by one language information set in the ticket vending machine 5510. For example, the ticket vending machine 5510 may support 10 different languages, and the calling display 5520 may support 3 different languages. In other words, the language-related table of the calling display 5520 may not store the same language information as the one language information. In this case, the output control unit may output information about the transaction in another language corresponding to the one language information. Specifically, the call display 5520 may store a table equivalent to the corresponding language table 4430 (see FIG. 65C), refer to the table, and output information on transactions in the corresponding language.
図９０は、券売機５５１０が行う処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。図９０において、券売機５５１０は、選択されている言語のメニュー画面を表示する（ステップＳ２９０１）。待機状態におけるメニュー画面の言語は、日本語である。そして、券売機５５１０は、言語の変更を受け付けたか否かを判断する（ステップＳ２９０２）。言語の変更を受け付けた場合（ステップＳ２９０２：ＹＥＳ）、券売機５５１０は、ステップＳ２９０１に戻り、メニュー画面の言語を受け付けた言語に切り替える。 FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed by the ticket vending machine 5510. In FIG. 90, the ticket vending machine 5510 displays the menu screen of the selected language (step S2901). The language of the menu screen in the standby state is Japanese. Then, the ticket vending machine 5510 determines whether or not the language change has been accepted (step S2902). When the language change is accepted (step S2902: YES), the ticket vending machine 5510 returns to step S2901 and switches the language of the menu screen to the accepted language.
言語の変更を受け付けない場合（ステップＳ２９０２：ＮＯ）、券売機５５１０は、商品が選択されたか否かを判断する（ステップＳ２９０３）。商品が選択されない場合（ステップＳ２９０３：ＮＯ）、券売機５５１０は、ステップＳ２９１０に戻る。商品が選択された場合（ステップＳ２９０３：ＹＥＳ）、券売機５５１０は、メニュー画面に選択された商品を表示する（ステップＳ２９０４）。 When the language change is not accepted (step S2902: NO), the ticket vending machine 5510 determines whether or not the product has been selected (step S2903). If no product is selected (step S2903: NO), the ticket vending machine 5510 returns to step S2910. When a product is selected (step S2903: YES), the ticket vending machine 5510 displays the selected product on the menu screen (step S2904).
そして、券売機５５１０は、発券ボタンが押下されたか否かを判断する（ステップＳ２９０５）。発券ボタンが押下されない場合（ステップＳ２９０５：ＮＯ）、券売機５５１０は、ステップＳ２９０３に戻る。発券ボタンが押下された場合（ステップＳ２９０５：ＹＥＳ）、券売機５５１０、決済種別の選択や入金を受け付ける精算画面を表示する（ステップＳ２９０６）。 Then, the ticket vending machine 5510 determines whether or not the ticket issuing button has been pressed (step S2905). If the ticketing button is not pressed (step S2905: NO), the ticket vending machine 5510 returns to step S2903. When the ticketing button is pressed (step S2905: YES), the ticket vending machine 5510, the payment type selection and the settlement screen for accepting payment are displayed (step S2906).
そして、券売機５５１０は、精算画面において受け付けた決済種別で精算処理を実行する（ステップＳ２９０７）。次いで、券売機５５１０は、メニュー画面の表示において言語変更があったか否かを判断する（ステップＳ２９０８）。言語変更がない場合（ステップＳ２９０８：ＮＯ）、券売機５５１０は、日本語の食券を発行し（ステップＳ２９０９）、ステップＳ２９１０に進む。言語変更があった場合（ステップＳ２９０８：ＹＥＳ）、券売機５５１０は、変更した言語である外国語を併記した食券を発行する（ステップＳ２９１０）。 Then, the ticket vending machine 5510 executes the settlement process according to the settlement type accepted on the settlement screen (step S2907). Next, the ticket vending machine 5510 determines whether or not the language has been changed in the display of the menu screen (step S2908). If there is no language change (step S2908: NO), the ticket vending machine 5510 issues a Japanese meal ticket (step S2909) and proceeds to step S2910. When there is a language change (step S2908: YES), the ticket vending machine 5510 issues a meal ticket in which a foreign language, which is the changed language, is also written (step S2910).
そして、券売機５５１０は、お釣りを排出する（ステップＳ２９１１）。次いで、券売機５５１０は、食券及び貨幣の取り出しを促す、取り忘れ報知画面を表示する（ステップＳ２９１２）。そして、券売機５５１０は、販売データを記憶するとともに（ステップＳ２９１３）、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０や、キッチンモニタ５５３０や、キッチンプリンタ５５４０へ注文情報を送信し（ステップＳ２９１４）、一連の処理を終了する。券売機５５１０は、一連の処理を終了すると、待機状態に戻る。 Then, the ticket vending machine 5510 discharges the change (step S2911). Next, the ticket vending machine 5510 displays a forget-to-take notification screen that prompts the user to take out the meal ticket and money (step S2912). Then, the ticket vending machine 5510 stores the sales data (step S2913), transmits the order information to the call display 5520, the kitchen monitor 5530, and the kitchen printer 5540 (step S2914), and ends a series of processes. When the ticket vending machine 5510 completes a series of processes, it returns to the standby state.
図９１は、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０が行う取引情報出力処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。以下では、説明の便宜上、一の商品の注文情報を受信してから、当該商品の調理が完了するまでの処理を示すものとし、当該処理において、他の商品の注文情報を受信する場合については説明を省略する。 FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of transaction information output processing performed by the call display 5520. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the process from receiving the order information of one product to the completion of cooking of the product shall be shown, and in the case of receiving the order information of another product in the process, The explanation is omitted.
図９１において、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、券売機５５１０から注文情報を受信したか否かを判断する（ステップＳ３００１）。呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、注文情報を受信するまで待機し（ステップＳ３００１：ＮＯ）、注文情報を受信すると（ステップＳ３００１：ＹＥＳ）、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、注文情報に含まれる注文番号を示す情報を用いて、調理中領域に注文番号を表示する（ステップＳ３００２）。 In FIG. 91, the calling display 5520 determines whether or not the order information has been received from the ticket vending machine 5510 (step S3001). The calling display 5520 waits until it receives the order information (step S3001: NO), and when it receives the order information (step S3001: YES), the calling display 5520 uses the information indicating the order number included in the order information. , The order number is displayed in the cooking area (step S3002).
そして、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、外国語で注文を受け付けた商品であるか否かを判断する（ステップＳ３００３）。ステップＳ３００３では、具体的には、注文情報に言語情報が含まれているか否かを判断する。外国語で注文を受け付けた商品ではない場合（ステップＳ３００３：ＮＯ）、すなわち、日本語で注文を受け付けた商品である場合、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、ステップＳ３００５に進む。 Then, the call display 5520 determines whether or not the product has received an order in a foreign language (step S3003). Specifically, in step S3003, it is determined whether or not the order information includes language information. If the product has not received an order in a foreign language (step S3003: NO), that is, if the product has received an order in Japanese, the calling display 5520 proceeds to step S3005.
一方、外国語で注文を受け付けた商品である場合（ステップＳ３００３：ＹＥＳ）、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、調理中であることを示す文字表示に、言語情報が示す外国語を併記して表示する（ステップＳ３００４）。呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、言語情報が示す外国語を併記して表示することに限らず、例えば、調理中であることを示す文字表示を、所定時間おきに、日本語と、当該外国語とに切り替えて表示するようにしてもよい。呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、外国語で注文を受け付けた商品に対応する注文番号のみを表示している場合には、当該外国語のみで、調理中であることを示す文字表示を行うようにしてもよい。 On the other hand, when the product has received an order in a foreign language (step S3003: YES), the call display 5520 displays the foreign language indicated by the language information in addition to the character display indicating that cooking is in progress (step S3003: YES). S3004). The call display 5520 is not limited to displaying the foreign language indicated by the language information together, and for example, the character display indicating that cooking is being performed is switched between Japanese and the foreign language at predetermined time intervals. May be displayed. When the call display 5520 displays only the order number corresponding to the product for which the order has been received in a foreign language, the call display 5520 may display characters indicating that cooking is in progress only in the foreign language. ..
そして、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、キッチンモニタ５５３０から調理完了情報を受信したか否かを判断する（ステップＳ３００５）。調理完了情報を受信しない場合（ステップＳ３００５：ＮＯ）、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、ステップＳ３００３に戻る。調理完了情報を受信した場合（ステップＳ３００５：ＹＥＳ）、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、調理中領域から注文番号を消去する（ステップＳ３００６）。 Then, the calling display 5520 determines whether or not the cooking completion information has been received from the kitchen monitor 5530 (step S3005). If the cooking completion information is not received (step S3005: NO), the calling display 5520 returns to step S3003. When the cooking completion information is received (step S3005: YES), the calling display 5520 erases the order number from the cooking area (step S3006).
そして、呼出ディスプレイ５６２０は、調理完了領域に注文番号を表示する（ステップＳ３００７）。次いで、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、外国語で注文を受け付けた商品であるか否かを判断する（ステップＳ３００８）。外国語で注文を受け付けた商品ではない場合（ステップＳ３００８：ＮＯ）、すなわち、日本語で注文を受け付けた商品である場合、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、ステップＳ３０１０に進む。 Then, the call display 5620 displays the order number in the cooking completion area (step S3007). Next, the call display 5520 determines whether or not the product has received an order in a foreign language (step S3008). If the product has not received an order in a foreign language (step S3008: NO), that is, if the product has received an order in Japanese, the calling display 5520 proceeds to step S3010.
一方、外国語で注文を受け付けた商品である場合（ステップＳ３００８：ＹＥＳ）、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、調理完了であることを示す文字表示に、言語情報が示す外国語を併記して表示する（ステップＳ３００９）。この場合、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、調理が完了したことや、注文番号や、窓口に引き取りに来る旨を、当該外国語で音声出力する。 On the other hand, when the product is ordered in a foreign language (step S3008: YES), the call display 5520 displays the foreign language indicated by the language information in addition to the character display indicating that cooking is completed (step S3008: YES). S3009). In this case, the call display 5520 voice-outputs in the foreign language that the cooking has been completed, the order number, and the fact that the person will come to the counter to pick up the food.
呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、言語情報が示す外国語を併記して表示することに限らず、例えば、調理完了を示す文字表示を、所定時間おきに、日本語と、当該外国語とに切り替えて表示するようにしてもよい。呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、外国語で注文を受け付けた商品に対応する注文番号のみを表示している場合には、常時、当該外国語のみで、調理完了を示す文字表示を行うようにしてもよい。 The call display 5520 is not limited to displaying the foreign language indicated by the language information together, and for example, the character display indicating the completion of cooking is displayed by switching between Japanese and the foreign language at predetermined time intervals. You may do so. When the call display 5520 displays only the order number corresponding to the product for which the order has been received in a foreign language, the character display indicating the completion of cooking may always be performed in the foreign language only.
そして、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、商品を引き渡す窓口に顧客が訪れ、商品を顧客に引渡したか否かを判断する（ステップＳ３０１０）。商品を顧客に引渡すと、店員は、キッチンモニタ５５３０に表示されている、商品を引渡したことを示すボタンを押下する。そして、キッチンモニタ５５３０は、当該ボタンが押下されると、その旨を示す引渡し完了情報を呼出ディスプレイ５５２０へ送信する。このため、ステップＳ３０１０に示す判断は、引渡し完了情報を受信したか否かの判断である。 Then, the call display 5520 visits the window for delivering the product and determines whether or not the product has been delivered to the customer (step S3010). When the product is delivered to the customer, the clerk presses the button on the kitchen monitor 5530 indicating that the product has been delivered. Then, when the button is pressed, the kitchen monitor 5530 transmits the delivery completion information indicating that fact to the calling display 5520. Therefore, the determination shown in step S3010 is a determination as to whether or not the delivery completion information has been received.
商品を顧客に引渡していない場合（ステップＳ３０１０：ＮＯ）、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、ステップＳ３００８に戻る。商品を顧客に引渡した場合（ステップＳ３０１０：ＹＥＳ）、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、調理完了領域から注文番号を消去し（ステップＳ３０１１）、一連の処理を終了する。 If the goods have not been delivered to the customer (step S3010: NO), the call display 5520 returns to step S3008. When the product is delivered to the customer (step S3010: YES), the call display 5520 erases the order number from the cooking completion area (step S3011) and ends a series of processes.
次に、図９２~図９７を用いて、日本語で注文を受け付けた場合と、外国語で注文を受け付けた場合に出力される情報を説明する。まず、日本語で注文を受け付けた場合に出力される情報を説明する。 Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 97, the information output when the order is accepted in Japanese and when the order is accepted in a foreign language will be described. First, the information output when an order is accepted in Japanese will be described.
図９２は、券売機５５１０に日本語で表示されるメニュー画面の一例を示す説明図である。図９２に示すように、ディスプレイ５６０４には、メニュー画面３１００が表示されている。メニュー画面３１００は、商品指定ボタン３１０１（３１０１ａ~３１０１ｃ）と、言 FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a menu screen displayed in Japanese on the ticket vending machine 5510. As shown in FIG. 92, the menu screen 3100 is displayed on the display 5604. The menu screen 3100 is said to be the product designation button 3101 (3101a to 3101c).
語切替えボタン３１０２（３１０２ａ~３１０２ｃ）と、預り金額領域３１１０と、合計金額領域３１１１と、領収書発行ボタン３１２０と、やり直しボタン３１２１と、発券ボタン３１２２とを含む。各ボタン及び各領域は、日本語で表示されている。 It includes a word switching button 3102 (3102a to 3102c), a deposit amount area 3110, a total amount area 3111, a receipt issuing button 3120, a redo button 3121, and a ticketing button 3122. Each button and each area is displayed in Japanese.
商品指定ボタン３１０１は、表示される商品の購入を受け付けるボタンである。言語切替えボタン３１０２は、表示される言語の切り替えを受け付けるボタンである。預り金額領域３１１０は、顧客が釣銭機５６０７に投入した投入金額を表示する領域である。合計金額領域３１１１は、商品指定ボタン３１０１が受け付けた商品の合計金額を示す領域である。 The product designation button 3101 is a button for accepting the purchase of the displayed product. The language switching button 3102 is a button that accepts switching of the displayed language. The deposit amount area 3110 is an area for displaying the amount of money that the customer has put into the change machine 5607. The total amount area 3111 is an area indicating the total amount of the products received by the product designation button 3101.
領収書発行ボタン３１２０は、領収書の発行を受け付けるボタンである。やり直しボタン３１２１は、商品指定ボタン３１０１が受け付けた商品の登録等のキャンセルを受け付けるボタンである。発券ボタン３１２２は、食券の発行を受け付けるボタンである。 The receipt issuance button 3120 is a button for accepting the issuance of a receipt. The redo button 3121 is a button that accepts cancellation of product registration or the like accepted by the product designation button 3101. The ticketing button 3122 is a button for accepting the issuance of meal tickets.
図９３は、日本語で発行した食券の一例を示す説明図である。図９３に示すように、食券３２００には、発券日時、注文番号、商品名、買上金額、店名などが日本語で表示されている。顧客は、食券３２００に記載されている注文番号が呼出ディスプレイ５５２０の調理完了領域に表示されるまで待機する。 FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a meal ticket issued in Japanese. As shown in FIG. 93, the ticket issuance date and time, the order number, the product name, the purchase price, the store name, and the like are displayed in Japanese on the meal ticket 3200. The customer waits until the order number on the meal ticket 3200 is displayed in the cooking completion area of the calling display 5520.
図９４は、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０に日本語で表示される呼出画面の一例を示す説明図である。図９４に示すように、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０のディスプレイ５８０４には、調理中領域３３０１と、調理完了領域３３０２とが表示されている。調理中領域３３０１に表示されている番号は、調理中の商品に対応する注文番号を示している。調理完了領域３３０２に表示されている番号は、調理が完了した商品に対応する注文番号を示している。 FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a call screen displayed in Japanese on the call display 5520. As shown in FIG. 94, the display 5804 of the calling display 5520 displays the cooking area 3301 and the cooking completion area 3302. The number displayed in the cooking area 3301 indicates the order number corresponding to the product being cooked. The number displayed in the cooking completion area 3302 indicates the order number corresponding to the cooked product.
顧客は、食券３２００に表示されている注文番号を確認し、当該注文番号が調理完了領域３３０２に表示されると、窓口まで商品を取りに行き、取引が完了する。 The customer confirms the order number displayed on the meal ticket 3200, and when the order number is displayed in the cooking completion area 3302, the customer goes to the counter to pick up the product and completes the transaction.
次に、外国語で注文を受け付けた場合に出力される情報を説明する。以下では、外国語として中国語を例に挙げて説明する。 Next, the information output when an order is accepted in a foreign language will be described. In the following, Chinese will be used as an example as a foreign language.
図９５は、券売機５５１０に中国語で表示されるメニュー画面の一例を示す説明図である。図９５に示すメニュー画面３４００は、言語切替えボタン３１０２ｃが押下されることにより表示される。メニュー画面３４００において、各ボタン及び各領域は、中国語で表示されている。これにより、中国人の顧客は、メニュー画面３４００に記載されている内容を容易に把握することができる。 FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a menu screen displayed in Chinese on the ticket vending machine 5510. The menu screen 3400 shown in FIG. 95 is displayed by pressing the language switching button 3102c. On the menu screen 3400, each button and each area is displayed in Chinese. As a result, the Chinese customer can easily grasp the contents described on the menu screen 3400.
図９６は、中国語で発行した食券の一例を示す説明図である。図９６に示すように、食券３５００には、注文番号、商品名、買上金額、店名が日本語及び中国語で表示されている。これにより、中国人の顧客は、食券３５００に記載されている内容を容易に把握することができる。 FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a meal ticket issued in Chinese. As shown in FIG. 96, the order number, product name, purchase price, and store name are displayed in Japanese and Chinese on the meal ticket 3500. As a result, the Chinese customer can easily grasp the contents described in the meal ticket 3500.
図９７は、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０に中国語で表示される呼出画面の一例を示す説明図である。図９７に示すように、調理中領域３３０１及び調理完了領域３３０２に表示される文字表示には、中国語の訳文がカッコ書きで併記されている。これにより、中国人の顧客は、注文した商品が調理中であるのか、調理が完了したのかを容易に把握することができる。 FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a call screen displayed in Chinese on the call display 5520. As shown in FIG. 97, Chinese translations are also written in parentheses on the character display displayed in the cooking area 3301 and the cooking completion area 3302. This allows Chinese customers to easily determine whether the ordered product is being cooked or cooked.
以上説明したように、第４の実施形態の第２の例における呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、券売機２４１０に設定された一の言語情報に応じた言語で、取引に関する情報を出力するようにした。したがって、呼出ディスプレイ５５２０が出力する言語を、券売機２４１０に設定された一の言語情報に応じた言語に自動で切り替えることができる。すなわち、販売システム５５００が導入されている店舗における言語を把握できない外国人の顧客でも、顧客が把握可能な言語を店員に口頭で伝えたり、当該顧客が把握可能な言語に切り替えるための操作を顧客自身で行ったりしなくても、当該顧客が使用する言語で取引に関する情報を出力することができる。したがって、店舗で使用される言語とは異なる言語を使用する外国人等の顧客でも、注文を好適に行うことを支援することができる。 As described above, the call display 5520 in the second example of the fourth embodiment outputs information related to transactions in a language corresponding to one language information set in the ticket vending machine 2410. Therefore, the language output by the call display 5520 can be automatically switched to the language corresponding to one language information set in the ticket vending machine 2410. That is, even a foreign customer who cannot grasp the language in the store where the sales system 5500 is introduced can verbally convey the language that the customer can understand to the clerk or perform an operation for switching to the language that the customer can understand. You can output information about the transaction in the language used by the customer, without having to do it yourself. Therefore, even a customer such as a foreigner who uses a language different from the language used in the store can be assisted in appropriately placing an order.
第４の実施形態の第２の例における呼出ディスプレイ５５２０は、ディスプレイ５８０４に情報を表示する際に一の言語情報に応じた言語で、顧客に商品を引き渡すための引渡情報を出力するようにした。したがって、外国人の顧客に商品を引き渡す際に、当該引き渡しを好適に支援することができる。 The calling display 5520 in the second example of the fourth embodiment outputs delivery information for delivering the product to the customer in a language corresponding to one language information when displaying the information on the display 5804. .. Therefore, when delivering a product to a foreign customer, the delivery can be suitably supported.
（第４の実施形態の第３の例） (Third example of the fourth embodiment)
次に、第４の実施形態の第３の例を説明する。上述した第４の実施形態の第１の例では、ＰＯＳ端末４２０と、計量装置４３０と、携帯端末４５０と、クラウドサーバＳｖとを含む販売システム１に本発明を適用した構成について説明した。第４の実施形態の第３の例では、商品ロッカーと、携帯端末４５０と、店舗注文管理装置と、注文管理サーバとを含む商品引き渡しシステムに本発明を適用した構成を説明する。第４の実施形態の第３の例において、商品ロッカーは、取引情報出力装置の一例である。 Next, a third example of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the first example of the fourth embodiment described above, the configuration in which the present invention is applied to the sales system 1 including the POS terminal 420, the weighing device 430, the mobile terminal 450, and the cloud server Sv has been described. In the third example of the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which the present invention is applied to a product delivery system including a product locker, a mobile terminal 450, a store order management device, and an order management server will be described. In the third example of the fourth embodiment, the product locker is an example of the transaction information output device.
第４の実施形態の第３の例における商品引き渡しシステムは、顧客が携帯端末４５０で注文し、注文した商品を店舗等に配置される商品ロッカーから受け取ることを可能なシステムである。ここで The product delivery system in the third example of the fourth embodiment is a system that allows a customer to place an order on the mobile terminal 450 and receive the ordered product from a product locker arranged in a store or the like. here
、第４の実施形態の第３の例における商品は、店舗と顧客との間で引き渡すことが可能の商品であり、且つ、商品ロッカーに収納可能な商品であればよい。具体的には、商品は、例えば、飲食物、電子機器、日用品、雑貨、衣料品などの各種商品である。商品は、顧客が所有する商品であってもよく、例えば、クリーニングにおける衣料や、修理を依頼する商品（時計、靴など）などであってもよい。第４の実施形態の第３の例における商品引き渡しシステムは、これらの商品を扱う各種店舗に適用することが可能である。 , The product in the third example of the fourth embodiment may be a product that can be delivered between the store and the customer and that can be stored in the product locker. Specifically, the products are various products such as foods and drinks, electronic devices, daily necessities, miscellaneous goods, and clothing. The product may be a product owned by the customer, for example, clothing for cleaning, a product for which repair is requested (watch, shoes, etc.), and the like. The product delivery system in the third example of the fourth embodiment can be applied to various stores handling these products.
商品引き渡しシステムにおいて、商品ロッカーと、店舗注文管理装置と、携帯端末４５０と、注文管理サーバとは、それぞれ、ネットワークを介して通信可能に接続されている。商品ロッカーと、店舗注文管理装置とは、例えば、店舗に配置されている。商品ロッカー及び店舗注文管理装置は、それぞれ、ＣＰＵ、メモリ、通信部、ディスプレイ、スピーカ等を備えたコンピュータ装置である。 In the product delivery system, the product locker, the store order management device, the mobile terminal 450, and the order management server are connected to each other via a network so as to be able to communicate with each other. The product locker and the store order management device are arranged in the store, for example. The product locker and the store order management device are computer devices equipped with a CPU, a memory, a communication unit, a display, a speaker, and the like, respectively.
商品ロッカーは、複数の収納口を有し、それぞれ施錠可能な扉を有する。商品ロッカーは、ディスプレイや、後述する引取証明コードを読み取るコードリーダを備える。商品ロッカーのメモリには、取引情報出力プログラムが記憶されている。 The product locker has a plurality of storage openings, each of which has a lockable door. The product locker is equipped with a display and a code reader that reads a receipt certification code described later. The transaction information output program is stored in the memory of the product locker.
携帯端末４５０は、顧客が所持する端末装置である。携帯端末４５０には、注文アプリケーションがインストールされている。注文管理サーバは、注文内容を管理するサーバ装置である。 The mobile terminal 450 is a terminal device owned by the customer. An ordering application is installed on the mobile terminal 450. The order management server is a server device that manages order contents.
携帯端末４５０は、注文用の画面を表示し、顧客から注文を受け付ける。受け付ける内容は、例えば、飲食物であれば、商品のサイズ、トッピングの有無、支払方法、イートイン／テイクアウトの別、来店時刻などである。携帯端末４５０は、注文を受け付けると、注文内容とともに言語情報を注文管理サーバへ送信する。 The mobile terminal 450 displays an order screen and accepts an order from a customer. For example, in the case of food and drink, the contents to be accepted include the size of the product, the presence or absence of toppings, the payment method, the distinction between eat-in and take-out, and the time of arrival at the store. When the mobile terminal 450 receives the order, the mobile terminal 450 transmits the language information together with the order contents to the order management server.
注文管理サーバは、携帯端末４５０から注文内容及び言語情報を受信すると、商品の受け取り時に用いる引取証明コード（注文識別情報）を生成し、引取証明コードを携帯端末４５０へ送信する。携帯端末４５０は、注文管理サーバから引取証明コードを受信すると、引取証明コードをディスプレイ４５０９に表示させる。 When the order management server receives the order details and language information from the mobile terminal 450, it generates a receipt certification code (order identification information) to be used when receiving the product, and transmits the receipt certification code to the mobile terminal 450. When the mobile terminal 450 receives the pick-up certification code from the order management server, the mobile terminal 450 displays the pick-up certification code on the display 4509.
注文管理サーバは、引取証明コードを生成すると、携帯端末４５０から受信した注文内容とともに、言語情報及び引取証明コードを店舗注文管理装置へ送信する。店舗注文管理装置は、言語情報と、引取証明コードが示す注文番号とを記憶するとともに、ディスプレイに注文内容を表示する。店員は、店舗注文管理装置のディスプレイに表示された注文内容を確認し、注文内容が示す商品を用意する。 When the order management server generates the receipt certification code, the order management server transmits the language information and the receipt certification code to the store order management device together with the order contents received from the mobile terminal 450. The store order management device stores the language information and the order number indicated by the receipt certification code, and displays the order details on the display. The clerk confirms the order contents displayed on the display of the store order management device, and prepares the product indicated by the order contents.
店員は、顧客の来店時刻の前に、商品を商品ロッカーに収納する。店舗注文管理装置は、店員の操作に応じて（または自動で）、言語情報と、注文番号（引取証明コード）と、商品が収納される収納口とを対応付けて記憶する。店舗注文管理装置は、言語情報と来店時刻とを商品ロッカーに送信する。 The clerk stores the product in the product locker before the customer's arrival time. The store order management device stores the language information, the order number (collection certification code), and the storage port in which the product is stored in association with each other according to the operation of the store clerk (or automatically). The store order management device transmits the language information and the store visit time to the product locker.
商品ロッカーは、例えば、言語情報と来店時刻とを対応付けて記憶する。商品ロッカーは、待機画面において、ディスプレイに引取証明コードを読み取らせる旨を表示する。商品ロッカーのディスプレイに表示される言語は、主に、日本語である。ただし、外国語でオンライン注文を受け付けた場合、商品ロッカーは、来店時刻が近付くと、ディスプレイに表示する言語を、来店時刻に対応付けて記憶されている言語情報が示す言語に切り替える。 The product locker stores, for example, the language information and the store visit time in association with each other. The product locker displays on the standby screen to the effect that the receipt verification code is read by the display. The language displayed on the display of the product locker is mainly Japanese. However, when an online order is accepted in a foreign language, the product locker switches the language displayed on the display to the language indicated by the language information stored in association with the store visit time when the store visit time approaches.
顧客は、商品を受け取るために、来店すると、携帯端末４５０に引取証明コードを表示させる。そして、顧客は、当該引取証明コードを、商品ロッカーのコードリーダに読み取らせる。商品ロッカーは、読み取られた引取証明コードが示す注文番号を、店舗注文管理装置へ送信する。店舗注文管理装置は、商品ロッカーから受信した注文番号に対応する商品が収納された収納口を特定する。さらに、店舗注文管理装置は、特定した収納口の解錠が行われるように、商品ロッカーへ解錠の指示を送信する。商品ロッカーは、店舗注文管理装置から解錠の指示を受信すると、収納口を解錠する。 When the customer comes to the store to receive the product, the customer displays the take-back certification code on the mobile terminal 450. Then, the customer has the code reader of the product locker read the receipt certification code. The product locker transmits the order number indicated by the read receipt certification code to the store order management device. The store order management device identifies a storage slot in which the product corresponding to the order number received from the product locker is stored. Further, the store order management device sends an unlocking instruction to the product locker so that the identified storage opening is unlocked. When the product locker receives the unlocking instruction from the store order management device, the product locker unlocks the storage opening.
商品ロッカーにおいて、外国語に切り替わるタイミングは、来店時刻が近付いたときに限らない。例えば、商品ロッカーが引取証明コードを読み取ったタイミングで、外国語に切り替わるようにしてもよい。具体的には、商品ロッカーは、引取証明コードを読み取ると、引取証明コードに対応付けられている言語情報を店舗注文管理装置から取得し、取得した言語情報が示す言語に切り替えるようにしてもよい。言語情報は、店舗注文管理装置から取得することに限らない。例えば、商品ロッカーは、予め、店舗注文管理装置から言語情報と注文番号（引取証明コード）とを受信しておき、これらを記憶しておいてもよい。引取証明コードに言語情報が含まれていてもよい。この場合、商品ロッカーは、引取証明コードを読み取ると、当該引取証明コードに含まれる言語情報が示す言語に切り替えるようにすればよい。 In the product locker, the timing of switching to a foreign language is not limited to when the time of arrival is approaching. For example, the product locker may switch to a foreign language when the product locker reads the receipt certification code. Specifically, when the product locker reads the receipt certification code, the product locker may acquire the language information associated with the receipt certification code from the store order management device and switch to the language indicated by the acquired language information. .. Language information is not limited to being acquired from the store order management device. For example, the product locker may receive the language information and the order number (collection certification code) from the store order management device in advance and store them. The take-back certification code may include linguistic information. In this case, when the product locker reads the receipt certification code, it may switch to the language indicated by the language information included in the receipt certification code.
引取証明コードを読み取ったタイミングで外国語に切り替わるようにしたとすると、来店時刻のタイミングでは、商品ロッカーのディスプレイに表示する言語が、外国語に切り替わってはいないことになる。このため、日本語を全く把握できない顧客にとっては、商品ロッカーのディスプレイに表示される待機画面の内容（引取証明コードを読み取らせることを促す内容など）を理解することができないことがある。このようなことに鑑み、引取証明コードを読み取ったタイミングで外国語に切り替わるようにする場合には、携帯端末４５０において、顧客が使用する言語で、待機画面が示す内容や、商品ロッカーの使用方法を通知しておくようにすればよい。 Assuming that the language is switched to a foreign language when the receipt certificate code is read, the language displayed on the display of the product locker is not switched to a foreign language at the time of arrival at the store. For this reason, a customer who cannot understand Japanese at all may not be able to understand the contents of the standby screen displayed on the display of the product locker (contents prompting the customer to read the take-back certification code, etc.). In view of this, when switching to a foreign language at the timing when the receipt certification code is read, the content shown on the standby screen and the usage method of the product locker in the language used by the customer on the mobile terminal 450 Should be notified.
商品ロッカーは、各収納口に対応するランプ（インジケータ）を備える。商品ロッカーは、解錠した収納口に対応するランプを所定のパターンで点灯させる。これにより、引き取り対象の商品が収納されている収納口を顧客に報知することができる。顧客は、点灯しているランプに対応する収納口に収納されている商品を取り出す。このようにして、顧客は、オンライン注文により注文した商品を、商品ロッカーから引き取ることができる。 The product locker is equipped with a lamp (indicator) corresponding to each storage port. The product locker lights the lamp corresponding to the unlocked storage port in a predetermined pattern. As a result, it is possible to notify the customer of the storage opening in which the product to be picked up is stored. The customer takes out the product stored in the storage opening corresponding to the lit lamp. In this way, the customer can pick up the goods ordered by the online order from the goods locker.
商品ロッカーの扉は、ヒンジ部等に設けられた機構により、解錠時に自動で回動して開状態となる。このため、顧客は、収納口の扉に触れることなく、商品を取り出すことができる。したがって、不特定多数の人間が扉を触ることを抑えることができるため、良好な衛生状態を保つことができる。 The door of the product locker is automatically rotated and opened when unlocked by a mechanism provided in the hinge portion or the like. Therefore, the customer can take out the product without touching the door of the storage opening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unspecified number of people from touching the door, so that good hygiene can be maintained.
（商品ロッカーの機能的構成） (Functional configuration of product locker)
次に、商品ロッカーの機能的構成を説明する。商品ロッカーは、通信部と、取得部と、出力制御部と、ディスプレイとを備える。取得部と、出力制御部とは、商品ロッカーが備えるＣＰＵによって実現される。すなわち、ＣＰＵがメモリに記憶されている取引情報出力プログラムを実行することにより、各部の機能を実現する。メモリには、言語関連テーブル４４２０（図６５Ｂ参照）及び対応言語テーブル４４３０（図４Ｃ参照）に相当する各テーブルが記憶されている。これらのテーブルは、商品ロッカーが記憶することに限らず、他の装置（例えば、店舗注文管理装置や注文管理サーバ）に記憶されていてもよい。 Next, the functional configuration of the product locker will be described. The product locker includes a communication unit, an acquisition unit, an output control unit, and a display. The acquisition unit and the output control unit are realized by a CPU included in the product locker. That is, the functions of each part are realized by the CPU executing the transaction information output program stored in the memory. Each table corresponding to the language-related table 4420 (see FIG. 65B) and the corresponding language table 4430 (see FIG. 4C) is stored in the memory. These tables are not limited to being stored in the product locker, but may be stored in another device (for example, a store order management device or an order management server).
通信部は、端末装置の一例である携帯端末４５０と通信を行う。通信部は、携帯端末４５０と、注文管理サーバ及び店舗注文管理装置を介して間接的に通信を行う。ただし、通信部は、例えば、近距離無線通信を用いて、携帯端末４５０と直接的に通信を行ってもよい。 The communication unit communicates with the mobile terminal 450, which is an example of the terminal device. The communication unit indirectly communicates with the mobile terminal 450 via the order management server and the store order management device. However, the communication unit may directly communicate with the mobile terminal 450 by using, for example, short-range wireless communication.
取得部は、通信部の通信によって、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報を取得する。一の言語情報は、例えば、注文内容を受け付けた際に、店舗注文管理装置から注文内容（来店時刻）とともに送信される。取得部は、通信部によって受信された一の言語情報を取得する。 The acquisition unit acquires one language information set in the mobile terminal 450 by the communication of the communication unit. One language information is transmitted from the store order management device together with the order content (store visit time), for example, when the order content is received. The acquisition unit acquires one language information received by the communication unit.
携帯端末４５０に表示される引取証明コードに言語情報を含ませるようにした場合、引取証明コードを読み取ることによって、言語情報を取得してもよい。待機中の商品ロッカーのディスプレイに、携帯端末４５０に言語情報の送信を要求する接続用コードを表示しておき、携帯端末４５０によって当該接続用コードが読み取られることで、携帯端末４５０から直接の通信によって、言語情報を取得するようにしてもよい。 When the language information is included in the collection certification code displayed on the mobile terminal 450, the language information may be acquired by reading the collection certification code. A connection code that requests the mobile terminal 450 to transmit language information is displayed on the display of the product locker on standby, and the connection code is read by the mobile terminal 450 to communicate directly from the mobile terminal 450. In some cases, language information may be acquired.
出力制御部は、取得部によって取得された一の言語情報に応じた言語で、取引に関する情報を出力する。取引に関する情報は、例えば、引取証明コードを読み取らせる旨の情報や、注文内容を示す情報や、引き渡しの準備が完了しているか否かを示す情報や、引き渡しの手順を示す情報や、取引完了の挨拶文（例えば「ありがとうございました」）を示す情報などである。 The output control unit outputs information related to transactions in a language corresponding to one language information acquired by the acquisition unit. Information about the transaction includes, for example, information to read the receipt certification code, information indicating the order details, information indicating whether or not the preparation for delivery is complete, information indicating the delivery procedure, and transaction completion. Information indicating a greeting (for example, "Thank you").
外国語でオンライン注文を受け付けた場合、出力制御部は、当該注文内容に含まれる来店時刻の前に、待機画面に表示する言語を当該外国語に切り替える。例えば、この場合、出力制御部は、当該商品の引き取りが完了するまで、日本語と、当該外国語とを併記して表示させる。これに限らず、当該商品の引き取りが完了するまで、出力制御部は、数秒間隔で、日本語と、当該外国語とを切り替えるようにしてもよい。 When an online order is accepted in a foreign language, the output control unit switches the language displayed on the standby screen to the foreign language before the store visit time included in the order content. For example, in this case, the output control unit displays both Japanese and the foreign language together until the pick-up of the product is completed. Not limited to this, the output control unit may switch between Japanese and the foreign language at intervals of several seconds until the pick-up of the product is completed.
通信部が携帯端末４５０と直接的に通信を行って携帯端末４５０の言語情報を受信するようにした場合、出力制御部は、携帯端末４５０から言語情報を直接取得すると、以降は当該言語情報が示す言語で出力すればよい。出力制御部は、当該商品の引き取りが完了したタイミングで、外国語での出力を終了させる。 When the communication unit directly communicates with the mobile terminal 450 to receive the language information of the mobile terminal 450, when the output control unit directly acquires the language information from the mobile terminal 450, the language information is subsequently transmitted. You can output in the language shown. The output control unit ends the output in a foreign language when the pick-up of the product is completed.
出力制御部は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が日本語を示す場合、日本語で取引に関する情報をディスプレイに表示させる。一方で、出力制御部は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が日本語以外の他の言語（外国語）を示す場合、日本語と他の言語とを併記して取引に関する情報をディスプレイに表示させる。出力制御部による取引に関する情報の出力態様は、音声や表示の出力態様である。 When the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 indicates Japanese, the output control unit displays information on transactions in Japanese on the display. On the other hand, when the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 indicates a language other than Japanese (foreign language), the output control unit displays information on transactions by writing both Japanese and other languages. To display. The output mode of the information related to the transaction by the output control unit is the output mode of voice or display.
出力制御部は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語で取引に関する情報を出力する。具体的には、出力制御部は、商品ロッカーが記憶する言語関連テーブルに記憶されている言語情報を用いて、取引に関する情報を出力する。携帯端末４５０に設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語を出力できない場合がある。具体的には、言語関連テーブルに、当該一の言語情報と同一の言語情報が記憶されていない場合がある。この場合、出力制御部は、当該一の言語情報に対応する他の言語で、取引に関する情報を出力すればよい。具体的には、出力制御部は、対応言語テーブルを参照し、他の言語としての対応言語で、取引に関する情報を出力すればよい。 The output control unit outputs information related to transactions in the same language as the language indicated by one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. Specifically, the output control unit outputs information related to the transaction by using the language information stored in the language-related table stored in the product locker. It may not be possible to output the same language as the language indicated by one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. Specifically, the language-related table may not store the same language information as the one language information. In this case, the output control unit may output information about the transaction in another language corresponding to the one language information. Specifically, the output control unit may refer to the corresponding language table and output information on transactions in the corresponding language as another language.
（クリーニングの場合について） (For cleaning)
クリーニングなどにおいて顧客が商品を預ける場合であれば、携帯端末４５０は、注文用の画面において、シャツやセーターなどの衣料種別、ドライや染み抜きなど洗濯種別、支払方法、来店時刻などを表示して、注文を受け付けるようにすればよい。クリーニングなどにおいて店舗から顧客へ商品を引き渡す場合であれば、店員の操作によって、引き渡しに関する情報が入力される。具体的には、例えば、店舗注文管理装置は、引き渡しに関する入力画面を表示して、店員から、引渡時刻の入力を受け付ける。店舗注文管理は、引渡時刻の入力を受け付けると、引渡時刻を示す情報とともに、先の注文内容から記憶していた言語情報を注文管理サーバへ送信する。 When a customer deposits a product for cleaning, etc., the mobile terminal 450 displays the clothing type such as a shirt or sweater, the washing type such as dry or stain remover, the payment method, the visit time, etc. on the ordering screen. You just have to accept the order. When the product is delivered from the store to the customer for cleaning or the like, the information regarding the delivery is input by the operation of the clerk. Specifically, for example, the store order management device displays an input screen for delivery and accepts input of the delivery time from the clerk. When the store order management receives the input of the delivery time, the store order management sends the language information stored from the previous order contents to the order management server together with the information indicating the delivery time.
注文管理サーバは、引渡時刻を示す情報を受信すると、商品の引き渡し時に用いる引取証明コード（識別情報）を生成し、引取証明コードを携帯端末４５０へ送信する。携帯端末４５０は、注文管理サーバから引取証明コードを受信すると、引取証明コードを表示させる。 When the order management server receives the information indicating the delivery time, it generates a pick-up certification code (identification information) to be used when the product is delivered, and transmits the pick-up certification code to the mobile terminal 450. When the mobile terminal 450 receives the receipt certification code from the order management server, the mobile terminal 450 displays the receipt certification code.
注文管理サーバは、店舗注文管理装置に対しても、言語情報とともに、引取証明コードを送信する。店舗注文管理装置は、言語情報と、引取証明コードが示す注文番号とを記憶する。店員は、顧客の引渡時刻の前に、商品を商品ロッカーに収納する。店舗注文管理装置は、店員の操作に応じて（または自動で）、言語情報と、注文番号と、商品が収納される収納口とを対応付けて記憶する。店舗注文管理装置は、言語情報と引渡時刻とを商品ロッカーに送信する。 The order management server also transmits the receipt certification code to the store order management device together with the language information. The store order management device stores the language information and the order number indicated by the receipt certification code. The clerk stores the product in the product locker before the delivery time of the customer. The store order management device stores the language information, the order number, and the storage port in which the product is stored in association with each other according to the operation of the store clerk (or automatically). The store order management device transmits the language information and the delivery time to the product locker.
商品ロッカーは、例えば、言語情報と引渡時刻とを記憶する。外国語でオンライン注文を受け付けた場合、商品ロッカーは、引渡時刻が近付くと、ディスプレイに表示する言語を、引渡時刻に対応付けて記憶されている言語情報が示す言語に切り替える。クリーニングの引き取りにおいて、顧客が引渡時刻に来るとは限らない。このため、常時外国語で表示させたとすると、他の顧客（日本人の顧客）にとっては、表示される内容を理解しにくくなってしまう。このため、商品ロッカーは、当該商品の引き取りが完了するまで、日本語と当該外国語とを併記して表示させたり、数秒間隔で日本語と当該外国語とを切り替えたりすればよい。 The product locker stores, for example, language information and delivery time. When an online order is accepted in a foreign language, the product locker switches the language displayed on the display to the language indicated by the language information stored in association with the delivery time when the delivery time approaches. In picking up the cleaning, the customer does not always come at the delivery time. For this reason, if it is always displayed in a foreign language, it will be difficult for other customers (Japanese customers) to understand the displayed contents. Therefore, the product locker may display the Japanese language and the foreign language together, or switch between the Japanese language and the foreign language at intervals of several seconds until the product is picked up.
顧客は、商品を引き取るために、来店すると、携帯端末４５０に引取証明コードを表示させて、商品ロッカーのコードリーダに読み取らせる。これにより、収納口を解錠させて、商品（クリーニング後の衣料）を引き取ることができる。 When the customer comes to the store to pick up the product, the customer displays the pick-up certification code on the mobile terminal 450 and has the code reader of the product locker read it. As a result, the storage opening can be unlocked and the product (clothes after cleaning) can be picked up.
以上説明したように、第４の実施形態の第３の例における商品ロッカーは、携帯端末４５０に設定された一の言語情報に応じた言語で、取引に関する情報を出力するようにした。したがって、商品ロッカーが出力する言語を、携帯端末４５０に設定された一の言語情報に応じた言語に自動で切り替えることができる。すなわち、商品引き渡しシステムが導入されている店舗における言語を把握できない外国人の顧客でも、当該顧客が把握可能な言語を、店員に口頭で伝えたり、顧客が把握可能な言語に切り替えるための操作を顧客自身で行ったりしなくても、当該顧客が使用する言語で取引に関する情報を出力することができる。したがって、店舗で使用される言語とは異なる言語を使用する外国人等の顧客でも、商品の引き取りを好適に行うことを支援することができる。 As described above, the product locker in the third example of the fourth embodiment outputs information related to transactions in a language corresponding to one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. Therefore, the language output by the product locker can be automatically switched to the language corresponding to one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. In other words, even a foreign customer who cannot understand the language at a store where a product delivery system is installed can verbally convey the language that the customer can understand to the clerk or switch to a language that the customer can understand. Information about transactions can be output in the language used by the customer without having to do it by the customer himself. Therefore, it is possible to support even a customer such as a foreigner who uses a language different from the language used in the store to preferably pick up the product.
（第４の実施形態の第４の例） (Fourth Example of Fourth Embodiment)
次に、第４の実施形態の第４の例を説明する。上述した第４の実施形態の第１の例では、ＰＯＳ端末４２０と、計量装置４３０と、携帯端末４５０と、クラウドサーバＳｖとを含む販売システム１に本発明を適用した構成について説明した。第４の実施形態の第４の例では、電子棚札と、携帯端末４５０と、商品管理サーバとを含む販売システムに本発明を適用した構成を説明する。第４の実施形態の第４の例において、電子棚札は、取引情報出力装置の一例である。 Next, a fourth example of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the first example of the fourth embodiment described above, the configuration in which the present invention is applied to the sales system 1 including the POS terminal 420, the weighing device 430, the mobile terminal 450, and the cloud server Sv has been described. In the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which the present invention is applied to a sales system including an electronic shelf label, a mobile terminal 450, and a product management server will be described. In the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, the electronic shelf label is an example of the transaction information output device.
第４の実施形態の第４の例における販売システムにおいて、電子棚札と、携帯端末４５０と、商品管理サーバとは、それぞれ、ネットワークを介して通信可能に接続されている。電子棚札は、例えば、店舗の商品棚に配置されている。電子棚札は、通信部やディスプレイを備えた表示装置である。 In the sales system according to the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, the electronic shelf label, the mobile terminal 450, and the product management server are connected to each other so as to be able to communicate with each other via the network. Electronic shelf labels are placed on product shelves in stores, for example. An electronic shelf label is a display device provided with a communication unit and a display.
第４の実施形態の第４の例において、商品管理サーバは、店舗内の各商品の売上、在庫状況、値段などを管理する。電子棚札は、商品販売情報を表示する。商品販売情報は、商品名、単価、価格（税込価格及び税抜価格）、セール品などの各種情報を含む。商品販売情報は、取引に関する情報の一例である。 In the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, the product management server manages sales, inventory status, price, and the like of each product in the store. The electronic shelf label displays product sales information. The product sales information includes various information such as a product name, a unit price, a price (tax-included price and a tax-excluded price), and a sale item. Product sales information is an example of information related to transactions.
商品管理サーバは、電子棚札に表示させる内容を制御する。例えば、商品管理サーバは、タイムセールの商品がある場合には、タイムセールの時間になると当該商品に対応する電子棚札に表示される値段を下げるように制御し、タイムセールが終了すると、当該電子棚札に表示される値段を通常の価格になるように制御する。 The product management server controls the contents to be displayed on the electronic shelf label. For example, if there is a time sale product, the product management server controls to lower the price displayed on the electronic shelf label corresponding to the product at the time of the time sale, and when the time sale ends, the product management server concerned. Control the price displayed on the electronic shelf label so that it becomes the normal price.
電子棚札は、通信部と、取得部と、出力制御部と、ディスプレイとの各機能部を備える。電子棚札は、通信部の機能により、近距離無線通信（ＮＦＣ：Ｎｅａｒ　Ｆｉｅｌｄ　Ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｉｏｎ）を用いて、携帯端末４５０と通信することが可能である。電子棚札は、出力制御部及びディスプレイの機能により、携帯端末４５０と接続するための接続用コード（２次元コード）を表示する。接続用コードには、言語情報を電子棚札に送信する旨の情報が含まれる。このため、顧客が携帯端末４５０のカメラ４５０７で当該接続用コードを読み取ると、携帯端末４５０から電子棚札に対して、言語情報が送信される。 The electronic shelf label includes each function unit of a communication unit, an acquisition unit, an output control unit, and a display. The electronic shelf label can communicate with the mobile terminal 450 using short-range wireless communication (NFC: Near Field Communication) by the function of the communication unit. The electronic shelf label displays a connection code (two-dimensional code) for connecting to the mobile terminal 450 by the functions of the output control unit and the display. The connection code contains information to the effect that the language information is transmitted to the electronic shelf label. Therefore, when the customer reads the connection code with the camera 4507 of the mobile terminal 450, the language information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 450 to the electronic shelf label.
電子棚札は、携帯端末４５０から言語情報を受信（取得）すると、一の言語情報に応じた言語で、商品販売情報を表示（出力）する。具体的には、電子棚札は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が日本語を示す場合、日本語で商品販売情報を表示する。一方で、電子棚札は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が日本語以外の他の言語（外国語）を示す場合、他の言語で商品販売情報を表示する。電子棚札は、対応言語で商品販売情報を表示してもよい。電子棚札は、携帯端末４５０に設定されている言語情報が外国語を示す場合、日本語と外国語とを併記して商品販売情報を表示してもよいし、数秒間隔で、日本語と外国語とを切り替えるようにしてもよい。 When the electronic shelf label receives (acquires) language information from the mobile terminal 450, it displays (outputs) product sales information in a language corresponding to one language information. Specifically, the electronic shelf label displays the product sales information in Japanese when the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 indicates Japanese. On the other hand, when the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 indicates a language other than Japanese (foreign language), the electronic shelf label displays the product sales information in the other language. The electronic shelf label may display product sales information in a supported language. When the language information set in the mobile terminal 450 indicates a foreign language, the electronic shelf label may display the product sales information in both Japanese and the foreign language, or the electronic shelf tag may display the product sales information in Japanese at intervals of several seconds. You may switch to a foreign language.
電子棚札は、一の言語情報に応じた重量の単位に換算して、商品販売情報を表示してもよい。電子棚札は、商品販売情報を、一の言語情報に応じた通貨に換算して表示してもよい。 The electronic shelf label may display the product sales information by converting it into a unit of weight corresponding to one language information. The electronic shelf label may display the product sales information by converting it into a currency corresponding to one language information.
以上説明したように、第４の実施形態の第４の例における電子棚札は、携帯端末４５０に設定された一の言語情報に応じた言語で、商品販売情報を表示するようにした。したがって、電子棚札が表示する言語を、携帯端末４５０に設定された一の言語情報に応じた言語に自動で切り替えることができる。すなわち、第４の実施形態の第４の例における販売システムが導入されている店舗における言語を把握できない外国人の顧客でも、当該顧客が把握可能な言語を、店員に口頭で伝えたり、顧客が把握可能な言語に切り替えるための操作を顧客自身で行ったりしなくても、電子棚札は、当該顧客が使用する言語で商品販売情報を表示することができる。したがって、店舗で使用される言語とは異なる言語を使用する外国人等の顧客でも、電子棚札に表示される商品販売情報を容易に把握することができる。 As described above, the electronic shelf label in the fourth example of the fourth embodiment displays the product sales information in a language corresponding to one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. Therefore, the language displayed on the electronic shelf label can be automatically switched to the language corresponding to one language information set in the mobile terminal 450. That is, even a foreign customer who cannot grasp the language in the store where the sales system in the fourth example of the fourth embodiment is introduced can verbally convey the language that the customer can grasp to the clerk, or the customer can tell the customer. The electronic shelf label can display the product sales information in the language used by the customer without having to perform the operation for switching to the understandable language by the customer himself / herself. Therefore, even a customer such as a foreigner who uses a language different from the language used in the store can easily grasp the product sales information displayed on the electronic shelf label.
セルフレジシステムにおいては、携帯端末、計量装置及び精算装置など複数の装置が用いられる。携帯端末には、取引に関する情報が表示される。取引に関する情報は、計量装置において計量された商品の計量結果や、登録した商品を示す登録情報などを含む。取引に関する情報は、携帯端末以外にも、計量装置や精算装置など、店舗において設置される他の装置にも表示される。 In the self-registration system, a plurality of devices such as a mobile terminal, a weighing device and a checkout device are used. Information about the transaction is displayed on the mobile terminal. The information on the transaction includes the weighing result of the product weighed by the weighing device, the registration information indicating the registered product, and the like. In addition to mobile terminals, transaction information is also displayed on other devices installed in stores, such as weighing devices and checkout devices.
ここで、携帯端末は、顧客が設定した言語で各種情報を表示することが可能である。一方で、携帯端末以外の装置は、来店する多くの顧客が使用する言語（自国の言語）で各種情報を表示する。このため、外国人など、店舗で使用されている言語に精通していない顧客の場合、携帯端末以外の装置に表示された内容を容易に把握することができないことがある。 Here, the mobile terminal can display various information in the language set by the customer. On the other hand, devices other than mobile terminals display various information in the language used by many customers who visit the store (the language of their own country). Therefore, a customer who is not familiar with the language used in the store, such as a foreigner, may not be able to easily grasp the content displayed on a device other than the mobile terminal.
関連する技術として、店員が商品を登録して、顧客が精算をおこなうＰＯＳシステムにおいて、登録用レジスタにおいて選択した言語で、精算用レジスタにおいて商品に関する情報を表示させるようにしたＰＯＳシステムが知られている。 As a related technology, in a POS system in which a clerk registers a product and a customer makes a payment, a POS system is known in which information about the product is displayed in the payment register in the language selected in the registration register. There is.
しかしながら、従来技術では、セルフレジシステムが導入されている店舗における言語を把握できない外国人等の顧客にとっては、顧客が把握可能な言語を店員に口頭で伝えたり、顧客が把握可能な言語に切り替える操作を顧客自身で行ったりすることすら困難なことがある。このため、セルフレジシステムにおいて、店舗で使用される言語とは異なる言語を使用する外国人等の顧客が好適に取引を行うことができないことがある、という問題があった。 However, with the conventional technology, for customers such as foreigners who cannot grasp the language in the store where the self-registration system is introduced, the operation of verbally telling the clerk the language that the customer can understand or switching to the language that the customer can understand. It can be difficult to even do it yourself. Therefore, in the self-registration system, there is a problem that a customer such as a foreigner who uses a language different from the language used in the store may not be able to make a favorable transaction.
本発明は、このような事情に鑑みてなされたもので、その目的は、外国人等の顧客が取引を好適に行うことを支援することができる技術を提供することにある。 The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of assisting a customer such as a foreigner in conducting a transaction favorably.
［課題を解決するための手段］ [Means to solve problems]
本発明の一態様である取引情報出力装置は、設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語で画面を表示して顧客の操作を受け付ける端末装置と通信を行う通信手段と、前記通信手段の前記通信によって、前記一の言語情報を取得する取得手段と、前記取得手段によって取得された前記一の言語情報に応じた言語で、取引に関する情報を出力可能な出力制御手段と、を備える、ことを特徴とする取引情報出力装置である。 The transaction information output device according to one aspect of the present invention includes a communication means that displays a screen in a language indicated by a set language information and communicates with a terminal device that accepts a customer's operation, and the communication means. It is provided with an acquisition means for acquiring the one language information by communication and an output control means capable of outputting information about a transaction in a language corresponding to the one language information acquired by the acquisition means. It is a characteristic transaction information output device.
上記構成によれば、取引情報出力装置が使用する言語を、端末装置に設定されている一の言語情報に応じた言語に自動で切り替えることができる。これにより、取引情報出力システムが導入されている店舗における言語を把握できない外国人の顧客でも、顧客が把握可能な言語を店員に口頭で伝えたり、顧客が把握可能な言語に切り替えるための操作を顧客自身で行ったりしなくても、当該顧客が使用する言語で取引に関する情報を出力することができる。したがって、店舗で使用される言語とは異なる言語を使用する外国人等の顧客が買い物を好適に行うことを支援することができる。 According to the above configuration, the language used by the transaction information output device can be automatically switched to the language corresponding to one language information set in the terminal device. As a result, even foreign customers who cannot understand the language at the store where the transaction information output system is installed can verbally convey the language that the customer can understand to the clerk or switch to the language that the customer can understand. Information about transactions can be output in the language used by the customer, without having to do it by the customer himself. Therefore, it is possible to support customers such as foreigners who use a language different from the language used in the store to shop favorably.
上記取引情報出力装置において、商品の計量を行う計量手段をさらに備え、前記取引に関する情報は、前記計量手段の計量に関する計量情報を含み、前記出力制御手段は、前記計量手段によって計量が行われる際に、前記一の言語情報に応じた言語で前記計量情報を出力してもよい。 The transaction information output device further includes a weighing means for weighing a product, the transaction information includes weighing information related to the weighing of the measuring means, and the output control means is when the weighing is performed by the weighing means. In addition, the measurement information may be output in a language corresponding to the one language information.
上記構成によれば、外国人の顧客が取引情報出力装置を用いて計量対象商品を計量する際に、当該計量を好適に支援することができる。 According to the above configuration, when a foreign customer weighs a product to be weighed using a transaction information output device, the weighing can be suitably supported.
上記取引情報出力装置において、前記計量情報は、前記計量手段によって計量された商品の重量の情報を含み、前記出力制御手段は、前記重量の情報を、前記一の言語情報に応じた重量の単位に換算して出力してもよい。 In the transaction information output device, the weighing information includes information on the weight of a product weighed by the weighing means, and the output control means uses the weight information as a unit of weight according to the one linguistic information. It may be converted to and output.
上記構成によれば、外国人の顧客が母国で使用している重量の単位で、取引に関する情報を出力することができる。したがって、外国人の顧客が取引情報出力装置を用いて計量対象商品を計量する際に、計量対象商品の重量を容易に把握することができる。 According to the above configuration, information on transactions can be output in units of weight used by foreign customers in their home countries. Therefore, when a foreign customer weighs a product to be weighed using the transaction information output device, the weight of the product to be weighed can be easily grasped.
上記取引情報出力装置において、前記取引に関する情報は、商品の買上金額の情報を含み、前記出力制御手段は、前記買上金額の情報を、前記一の言語情報に応じた通貨に換算して出力してもよい。 In the transaction information output device, the information related to the transaction includes information on the purchase price of the product, and the output control means converts the information on the purchase price into a currency corresponding to the one language information and outputs the information. You may.
上記構成によれば、外国人の顧客が母国で使用している通貨で、取引に関する情報を出力することができる。したがって、外国人の顧客が商品を購入する際の金銭的価値を容易に把握することができる。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to output information on transactions in the currency used by foreign customers in their home countries. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the monetary value when a foreign customer purchases a product.
上記取引情報出力装置において、ラベルを発行するラベル発行部をさらに備え、前記出力制御手段は、前記一の言語情報に応じた言語で、前記ラベル発行部にラベルを発行させるようにしてもよい。 The transaction information output device may further include a label issuing unit for issuing a label, and the output control means may cause the label issuing unit to issue a label in a language corresponding to the one language information.
上記構成によれば、外国人の顧客は、ラベルに記載された内容を容易に把握することができる。 According to the above configuration, the foreign customer can easily grasp the contents written on the label.
上記取引情報出力装置において、情報を表示する表示手段をさらに備え、前記取引に関する情報は、顧客に商品を引き渡すための引渡情報を含み、前記出力制御手段は、前記表示手段に情報を表示する際に、前記一の言語情報に応じた言語で前記引渡情報を出力してもよい。 The transaction information output device further includes display means for displaying information, the information related to the transaction includes delivery information for delivering a product to a customer, and the output control means displays information on the display means. In addition, the delivery information may be output in a language corresponding to the one language information.
上記構成によれば、外国人の顧客に商品を引き渡す際に、当該引き渡しを好適に支援することができる。 According to the above configuration, when delivering a product to a foreign customer, the delivery can be suitably supported.
上記取引情報出力装置において、顧客の操作によって精算を行う精算手段をさらに備え、前記取引に関する情報は、前記精算手段による精算に用いられる登録情報を含み、前記出力制御手段は、前記精算手段によって精算が行われる際に、前記一の言語情報に応じた言語で前記登録情報を出力してもよい。 The transaction information output device further includes a settlement means for performing settlement by a customer's operation, the information regarding the transaction includes registration information used for settlement by the settlement means, and the output control means is settled by the settlement means. Is performed, the registration information may be output in a language corresponding to the one language information.
上記構成によれば、外国人の顧客が精算を行う際に、当該精算を好適に支援することができる。 According to the above configuration, when a foreign customer makes a payment, the payment can be suitably supported.
上記取引情報出力装置において、前記一の言語情報は、顧客を識別する顧客識別情報と対応付けられており、前記取得手段は、前記顧客識別情報を取得し、取得した前記顧客識別情報に対応付けられている前記一の言語情報を取得してもよい。 In the transaction information output device, the one language information is associated with the customer identification information that identifies the customer, and the acquisition means acquires the customer identification information and associates it with the acquired customer identification information. You may acquire the above-mentioned one language information.
上記構成によれば、会員情報等から特定される言語情報が示す言語で、取引に関する情報を出力することができる。したがって、使用する言語が異なる外国人の顧客が買い物を行う際に、当該顧客の買い物を好適に支援することができる。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to output information related to transactions in the language indicated by the language information specified from the member information and the like. Therefore, when a foreign customer who uses a different language makes a purchase, it is possible to preferably support the customer's shopping.
上記取引情報出力装置において、前記出力制御手段は、前記一の言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語で、または、前記一の言語情報に対応する他の言語で、取引に関する情報を出力してもよい。 In the transaction information output device, even if the output control means outputs information related to the transaction in the same language as the language indicated by the one language information or in another language corresponding to the one language information. good.
上記構成によれば、一の言語情報が示す言語と同一の言語が用意されていない場合でも、顧客にとって理解できる可能性のある他の言語で取引に関する情報を出力することができる。これにより、外国人の顧客の買い物を支援することができる。 According to the above configuration, even if the same language as the language indicated by one language information is not prepared, the information related to the transaction can be output in another language that may be understood by the customer. This makes it possible to support the shopping of foreign customers.
本発明の他の態様である取引情報出力方法は、取引情報出力装置に用いられるコンピュータが、設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語で画面を表示して顧客の操作を受け付ける端末装置と通信を行う通信ステップと、前記通信ステップの前記通信によって、前記一の言語情報を取得する取得ステップと、前記取得ステップによって取得された前記一の言語情報に応じた言語で、取引に関する情報を出力可能な出力制御ステップと、を含む処理を実行することを特徴とする取引情報出力方法である。 In another aspect of the present invention, in the transaction information output method, the computer used for the transaction information output device communicates with a terminal device that displays a screen in a language indicated by one set language information and accepts a customer's operation. Information on transactions can be output in the communication step of performing the transaction, the acquisition step of acquiring the one language information by the communication of the communication step, and the language corresponding to the one language information acquired by the acquisition step. It is a transaction information output method characterized by executing a process including various output control steps.
本発明の他の態様である取引情報出力システムは、設定されている一の言語で画面を表示して顧客の操作を受け付ける端末装置と、前記端末装置と通信を行う取引情報出力装置とを含む取引情報出力システムにおいて、前記取引情報出力装置は、前記端末装置と通信を行う通信手段と、前記通信手段の前記通信によって、前記一の言語情報を取得する取得手段と、前記取得手段によって取得された前記一の言語情報に応じた言語で、取引に関する情報を出力可能な出力制御手段と、を備える、ことを特徴とする取引情報出力システムである。 The transaction information output system according to another aspect of the present invention includes a terminal device that displays a screen in a set language and accepts a customer's operation, and a transaction information output device that communicates with the terminal device. In the transaction information output system, the transaction information output device is acquired by a communication means that communicates with the terminal device, an acquisition means that acquires the one language information by the communication of the communication means, and the acquisition means. The transaction information output system is characterized by comprising an output control means capable of outputting information related to transactions in a language corresponding to the above-mentioned one language information.
本発明の他の態様であるプログラムは、取引情報出力装置に用いられるコンピュータを、設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語で画面を表示して顧客の操作を受け付ける端末装置と通信を行う通信手段と、前記通信手段の前記通信によって、前記一の言語情報を取得する取得手段と、前記取得手段によって取得された前記一の言語情報に応じた言語で、取引に関する情報を出力可能な出力制御手段と、として機能させることを特徴とするプログラムである。 A program according to another aspect of the present invention communicates with a computer used for a transaction information output device by displaying a screen in a language indicated by one set language information and communicating with a terminal device that accepts customer operations. Output control capable of outputting information related to a transaction in a means, an acquisition means for acquiring the one language information by the communication of the communication means, and a language corresponding to the one language information acquired by the acquisition means. It is a program characterized by functioning as a means.
上述した説明では、取得部と、出力制御部と、計量部と、精算部とは、ＰＯＳ端末４２０及び計量装置４３０に具備される構成について説明した。これらの機能部は、他のコンピュータ装置に具備されていてもよい。例えば、これらの機能部は、ストアコントローラ４１０に具備されていてもよいし、監視端末４１１に具備されていてもよいし、これら以外のコンピュータ装置に具備されていてもよい。これらの機能部が具備されるコンピュータ装置は、１台であることに限らず、複数台であってもよい。例えば、これらの機能部の一部の機能部を一のコンピュータ装置が具備し、他の機能部を他のコンピュータ装置が具備していてもよい。同様に、呼出ディスプレイ２５２０が備える取得部や出力制御部についても、他のコンピュータ装置に具備されていてもよい。同様に、呼出ディスプレイ２５２０、商品ロッカー、及び電子棚札に具備される各機能部についても、他の装置に具備されていてもよい。 In the above description, the configuration of the acquisition unit, the output control unit, the measurement unit, and the settlement unit provided in the POS terminal 420 and the measurement device 430 has been described. These functional parts may be provided in other computer devices. For example, these functional units may be provided in the store controller 410, may be provided in the monitoring terminal 411, or may be provided in a computer device other than these. The number of computer devices provided with these functional units is not limited to one, and may be a plurality of computers. For example, one computer device may include some of these functional units, and another computer device may include other functional units. Similarly, the acquisition unit and the output control unit included in the calling display 2520 may be provided in another computer device. Similarly, each functional unit provided in the call display 2520, the product locker, and the electronic shelf label may be provided in another device.
上記実施形態及び変形例は、それぞれ組み合わせてもよい。 The above-described embodiment and modification may be combined with each other.
以上に説明した装置（例えば、計量装置、計量値付け装置、携帯端末、取引管理サーバ）を実現するためのプログラムを、コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体に記録し、そのプログラムをコンピュータシステムに読み込ませて実行するようにしてもよい。ここでいう「コンピュータシステム」とは、ＯＳや周辺機器等のハードウェアを含むものとする。「コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体」とは、フレキシブルディスク、光磁気ディスク、ＲＯＭ、ＣＤ−ＲＯＭ等の可搬媒体、コンピュータシステムに内蔵されるハードディスク等の記憶装置のことをいう。さらに「コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体」とは、インターネット等のネットワークや電話回線等の通信回線を介してプログラムが送信された場合のサーバやクライアントとなるコンピュータシステム内部の揮発性メモリ（ＲＡＭ）のように、一定時間プログラムを保持しているものも含むものとする。上記プログラムは、このプログラムを記憶装置等に格納したコンピュータシステムから、伝送媒体を介して、あるいは、伝送媒体中の伝送波により他のコンピュータシステムに伝送されてもよい。ここで、プログラムを伝送する「伝送媒体」は、インターネット等のネットワーク（通信網）や電話回線等の通信回線（通信線）のように情報を伝送する機能を有する媒体のことをいう。上記プログラムは、前述した機能の一部を実現するためのものであってもよい。さらに、前述した機能をコンピュータシステムにすでに記録されているプログラムとの組み合わせで実現できるもの、いわゆる差分ファイル（差分プログラム）であってもよい。 A program for realizing the device described above (for example, a weighing device, a weighing pricing device, a mobile terminal, a transaction management server) is recorded on a computer-readable recording medium, and the program is read into a computer system. You may want to do it. The term "computer system" as used herein includes hardware such as an OS and peripheral devices. The "computer-readable recording medium" refers to a portable medium such as a flexible disk, a magneto-optical disk, a ROM, or a CD-ROM, or a storage device such as a hard disk built in a computer system. Furthermore, a "computer-readable recording medium" is a volatile memory (RAM) inside a computer system that serves as a server or client when a program is transmitted via a network such as the Internet or a communication line such as a telephone line. In addition, it shall include those that hold the program for a certain period of time. The program may be transmitted from a computer system in which this program is stored in a storage device or the like to another computer system via a transmission medium or by a transmission wave in the transmission medium. Here, the "transmission medium" for transmitting a program refers to a medium having a function of transmitting information, such as a network (communication network) such as the Internet or a communication line (communication line) such as a telephone line. The above program may be for realizing a part of the above-mentioned functions. Further, it may be a so-called difference file (difference program) that can realize the above-mentioned function in combination with a program already recorded in the computer system.

Claims (10)

  1. 計量値付け装置と、客による商品登録に用いられる携帯端末と、を備える販売システムであって、
    前記携帯端末は、前記計量値付け装置と通信する通信部を備え、
    前記計量値付け装置は、
    前記計量値付け装置と前記携帯端末とを通信可能に接続するための接続情報を表示するディスプレイと、
    前記接続情報に基づき前記計量値付け装置と前記携帯端末とが通信可能に接続された後、所定のタイミングで、前記ディスプレイに前記接続情報の表示を終了させるコントローラと、を備える販売システム。     A sales system equipped with a weighing and pricing device and a mobile terminal used for product registration by a customer.
    The mobile terminal includes a communication unit that communicates with the weighing and pricing device.
    The weighing and pricing device is
    A display that displays connection information for communicably connecting the weighing pricing device and the mobile terminal, and
    A sales system including a controller that terminates the display of the connection information on the display at a predetermined timing after the weighing and pricing device and the mobile terminal are communicably connected based on the connection information.
  2. 前記コントローラは、前記計量値付け装置の計量部が計量を行った時又は操作部に対する操作が行われた時、前記ディスプレイに前記接続情報の表示を終了させる、請求項１に記載の販売システム。 The sales system according to claim 1, wherein the controller terminates the display of the connection information on the display when the weighing unit of the weighing pricing device performs weighing or an operation on the operating unit is performed.
  3. 前記計量値付け装置は、前記接続情報の表示が終了されるとき、前記計量値付け装置による計量結果を示すラベルを発行する、請求項１又は２に記載の販売システム。 The sales system according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the weighing and pricing device issues a label indicating a weighing result by the weighing and pricing device when the display of the connection information is completed.
  4. 前記ディスプレイは、前記ラベルを商品に添付することの案内を表示し、
    前記接続情報の表示が終了された後、前記ディスプレイは、前記案内を表示する、請求項３のいずれか一項に記載の販売システム。     The display displays a guide to attach the label to the product.
    The sales system according to any one of claims 3, wherein the display displays the guidance after the display of the connection information is completed.
  5. 前記計量値付け装置は、商品を計量する計量部を備え、
    前記ディスプレイは、前記計量部による計量結果に基づく情報を表示し、
    前記ディスプレイは、前記携帯端末との接続状態及び該携帯端末を識別する識別情報を表示する、請求項１乃至４のいずれか一項に記載の販売システム。     The weighing and pricing device includes a weighing unit that weighs goods.
    The display displays information based on the measurement result by the measuring unit.
    The sales system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the display displays a connection state with the mobile terminal and identification information for identifying the mobile terminal.
  6. 前記計量値付け装置は、計時部を備え、
    前記ディスプレイは、前記計時部により計時された時間に基づき、前記携帯端末との接続に関係する時間を表示する、請求項１乃至５のいずれか一項に記載の販売システム。     The weighing and pricing device includes a timekeeping unit.
    The sales system according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the display displays a time related to connection with the mobile terminal based on the time measured by the time measuring unit.
  7. 前記ディスプレイは、計量結果欄及び前記携帯端末との通信に用いられる接続情報を同一画面に表示し、
    前記計量値付け装置は、前記接続情報を読み取った携帯端末と通信する通信部を備える、請求項１乃至６のいずれか一項に記載の販売システム。     The display displays the measurement result column and the connection information used for communication with the mobile terminal on the same screen.
    The sales system according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the weighing and pricing device includes a communication unit that communicates with a mobile terminal that has read the connection information.
  8. 前記ディスプレイは、量り売り商品に分類された商品に対応する商品ボタンを表示する、請求項１乃至７のいずれか一項に記載の販売システム。 The sales system according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the display displays a product button corresponding to a product classified as a product sold by weight.
  9. 前記計量値付け装置は、前記計量値付け装置による計量の対象とする商品の情報を計量装置外から受け付ける受付部を備え、
    前記ディスプレイは、予め登録されている商品の選択を受け付ける選択画面を表示し、
    前記ディスプレイは、前記受付部が前記商品の情報を受け付けたとき、前記選択画面において前記受け付けた商品の情報を強調して表示する、請求項１乃至８のいずれか一項に記載の販売システム。     The weighing and pricing device includes a reception unit that receives information on products to be weighed by the weighing and pricing device from outside the weighing device.
    The display displays a selection screen that accepts the selection of pre-registered products.
    The sales system according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the display emphasizes and displays the received product information on the selection screen when the reception unit receives the product information.
  10. 　前記携帯端末は、設定されている一の言語情報が示す言語で画面を表示し、顧客の操作を受け付け、
    前記販売システムは、さらに取引情報出力装置を備え、
    前記取引情報出力装置は、
    前記携帯端末と通信する通信部と、
    前記携帯端末から前記一の言語情報を取得するコントローラと、
    取得された前記一の言語情報に応じた言語で、取引に関する情報を表示するディスプレイと、を備える請求項１乃至９のいずれか一項に記載の販売システム。     The mobile terminal displays a screen in the language indicated by one set language information, accepts customer operations, and accepts customer operations.
    The sales system is further equipped with a transaction information output device.
    The transaction information output device is
    A communication unit that communicates with the mobile terminal,
    A controller that acquires the one language information from the mobile terminal,
    The sales system according to any one of claims 1 to 9, further comprising a display for displaying information on transactions in a language corresponding to the acquired language information.
PCT/IB2021/051781 2020-03-04 2021-03-03 Sales system WO2021176375A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020037200A JP2021139727A (en) 2020-03-04 2020-03-04 Weighing device and weighing system
JP2020-037200 2020-03-04
JP2020039013A JP7438530B2 (en) 2020-03-06 2020-03-06 sales system
JP2020-039013 2020-03-06
JP2020-039294 2020-03-06
JP2020039294A JP7455365B2 (en) 2020-03-06 2020-03-06 Weighing and pricing equipment and sales system
JP2020132301A JP2022029133A (en) 2020-08-04 2020-08-04 Transaction information output device, transaction information output method, transaction information output system, and program
JP2020-132301 2020-08-04

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021176375A1 true WO2021176375A1 (en) 2021-09-10

Family

ID=77612558

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/IB2021/051781 WO2021176375A1 (en) 2020-03-04 2021-03-03 Sales system

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2021176375A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114266572A (en) * 2021-12-23 2022-04-01 百果园技术(新加坡)有限公司 Collection method, collection device, collection equipment and collection equipment of exchange rate data

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6273770B2 (en) * 2013-10-28 2018-02-07 株式会社寺岡精工 Product registration apparatus and accounting system provided with the product registration apparatus

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6273770B2 (en) * 2013-10-28 2018-02-07 株式会社寺岡精工 Product registration apparatus and accounting system provided with the product registration apparatus

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114266572A (en) * 2021-12-23 2022-04-01 百果园技术(新加坡)有限公司 Collection method, collection device, collection equipment and collection equipment of exchange rate data

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7131652B2 (en) Product registration device and settlement support method
WO2021161168A1 (en) Self-checkout system and self-checkout method
CN107103713A (en) accounting device
WO2021176375A1 (en) Sales system
JP2022058880A (en) System, registration device, and program
WO2020149279A1 (en) Weighing/pricing device, sales system, product registration processing method, program, and recording medium
CN109993620A (en) A kind of vending method and sell control device
JP2018018421A (en) Commodity sales data processing system and program
JP5298641B2 (en) Mobile terminal, accounting device, merchandise sales processing system
JP7311880B2 (en) Merchandise sales data processor and program
JP7455365B2 (en) Weighing and pricing equipment and sales system
JP7438530B2 (en) sales system
JP2022029133A (en) Transaction information output device, transaction information output method, transaction information output system, and program
JP2016091225A (en) Order system and management device
JP7321498B2 (en) Label issuing device and program
JP7301330B2 (en) Weighing and pricing device, sales system, merchandise registration processing method, and program
JP2014211751A (en) Checkout system, merchandise registration device and fare adjustment device
JP2019133439A (en) Pos system and price payment machine
JP7403798B2 (en) Settlement system, settlement device and program
JP2022118458A (en) Item data processor and program
JP2021101320A (en) Article registration system, registration terminal, metering device, article registration method, metering method, and program
JP2022148380A (en) Portable registration device, commodity sales data processing system, transaction completion device, and program
JP2022045990A (en) Commodity sales data processing system, portable terminal, and program
JP2022098820A (en) Item sales data processing system and program
JP2022149381A (en) Checkout system, settlement device, checkout method and program

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21763866

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21763866

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1